Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PW18-480 - Original - Prospect Construction, Inc. - 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station - 12/27/2018
Records Management Document CONTRACT COVER SHEET tlIrvs tit" � x+5 P`iltll°,�qil n`,Y�u...�7N bJV v nu. n.. .dowG 9"r`& ?. �G'ggt;0 'R it rfc"Y to", °aub nli n .0. ba :..uip u. 4-ritd , il , ° ild:r!: .' a f?n'.:uG J t V «inhn` w.E ' d,OM0 n'wun J F fro u h,a" J-'re qAuf^,0,io r p"We_ a re. V'iP;AV'"' , ,„� ; i.:t c� Ir,rti ,a V. ."!e. Vendor Name: Prospect Construction, Inc. Vendor Number (JDE): p Contract Number (City Clerk): I W1'� - wg-D Category: Agreement Sub-Category (if applicable): Project Name: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Contract Execution Date: Dale of the Mayor's signature 200 working days Termination Date: Contract Manager: Bryan Bond Department: PW Operations Contract Amount: 2,728,427.90 Budgeted: (i) Grant? Part of NEW Budget: 0 Local: State: 0 Federal: 0 Related to a New Position: 0 Basis for Selection of Contractor? Bid: Small Works Roster: ❑ Direct Negotiation: F] RFP: Quotes: Approval Authority: 0 Director 0 Mayor (i) City Council Other Details: Construct a new booster pump station. VOLUME 1 OF 2 CITY OF KENT KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR 40 Pressure Zone Booster Station Pro Nul mb►er: 16-30112 BIDS ACCEPTED UNTIL BID OPENING December 4, 2018 December 4, 2018 10:45 A.M. 11 :00 A.M. DELIVER TO C 1 TY OF KENT, C 1 TY HALL 220 4th Avenue S., Kent, WA 98032-5895 TIMOTHY J. LAPORTE, P.E. PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR 40 i ENT W A S H I N 0 T 0 N PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT Timothy J. LaPorte, P.E. Public Works Director �woiu4 400 West Gowe ' �r9 Kent, WA 98032 IC E,1�T Fax: 253-856-5500 wnsnni arar PHONE: 253-856-5500 CITY OF KENT KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON I 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project Number: 16-3012 ADDENDUM No. 1 November 21, 2018 FROM: The Office of the City Engineer, Kent Washington TO: All Plan Holders of the Project Specifications and Plans This addendum forms a part of the Contract documents and modifies the Project Proposal and Specifications and Contract Drawings in accordance with the following: ALL CHANGES ARE (REFLECTED IN RED I ... APPENDIX 7 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIQNS ITEM NO. 1.- AIDID the following new sections to the Technical Specifications: Sig C"T"t':ON I:16520 STRUCTURAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS (FRP) GRATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shall consist of all structural fiberglass reinforced plastic (FIMP) items, with all appurtenances, accessories, and incidentals necessary to produce a complete, operable, and serviceable installation as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1..2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE o Section Item a' 01300 Submittals 3 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Y 05120 Structural Steel 0 Mayor Dana Ralph.' '...' 1 13 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM D635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1a4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. A. GRATING Submit shop drawings of all fabricated gratings and accessories in accordance with the provisions of this Section. B. CONNECTIONS Submit manufacturer's shop drawings clearly showing material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers, complete details for the fabrication and erection of components including, but not limited to, location, lengths, type and sizes of fasteners, clip angles, member sizes, and connection details. C. TEST REPORTS Submit the manufacturer's published literature including structural design data, structural properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, concrete anchor systems and their allowable load tables, and design calculations for systerns not sized or designed in the contract documents. D. SAMPLES Submit sample pieces of each item specified herein for acceptance by the Engineer as to quality and color. Sample pieces shall be manufactured by the method to be used in the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems. If requested, experience shall be demonstrated by a record of five previous, separate, and similar successful installations completed within the last 5 years. 1,6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and 2 their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility. All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area and free from contact with soil and water. Store adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are required. Any material which has become damaged, as to be unfit for use, shall be promptly removed from the site of work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers, which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc,, Addison, Texas McNichols Company, Tampa, Florida IKG Industries, Clark, New Jersey 2.2 GENERAL All FRP items furnished under this Section shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be continuous roving in sufficient, quantities as needed by the application and/or physical properties required. Resin shall be Type I Isophthallc Polyester, with chemical formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength, and other physical properties as required. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids, and without dry spots, cracks, crazes, or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. All grating products shall have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84 Tunnel Test. Gratings shall also have tested burn time of less than 30 seconds and an extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM D635. All mechanical grating clips shall be manufactured of Type 316SS (stainless steel). 23 FRP GRATING Provide FRP grating of the type and size as indicated on the Plans. 3 Grating shall be fire retardant with a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Grating shall also have tested burn time of less than 30 seconds and an extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM D635. Certifications shall be made available to the Engineer when requested and shall be dated within the past 2 years. Test data performed only on the resin shall not be acceptable. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, grating color shall be Light Grey. The cover plate shall have a gritted Surface, integrally molded into the plate prior to bonding to the grating. The color of the cover plate shall match the color of the grating, A. MOLDED FRP GRATING Grating shall be of a one piece molded construction with tops and bottorns of bearing bars and cross bars in the same plane. Grating shall have a square mesh pattern. Grating shall be reinforced with continuous ravings of equal number of layers in each direction. The top layer of reinforcement in the grating panel shall be no more than 3/16 inch below the top surface of the grating so as to provide maximum stiffness and prevent resin chipping of unreinforced surfaces. Percentage of glass (by weight) shall not exceed 35 percent so as to achieve maximum corrosion resistance, and as required to maintain the structural requirements specified herein. After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing bars or cross bars. All bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation irregularities, interlaminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas. Grating load/deflection requirements at the required span (shown below) shall be less than manufacturers published maximum recommended loads. Maximum recommended loads shall be determined by acoustic emission testing. Load/deflection not to exceed the following: Uniform distributed load over a 48 inch span: 150 pounds per square foot, with a maximum deflection of 0.42 inch. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, provide grating with nor slip surfacing. Grating shall be manufactured with a concave profile on the top of each bar providing maximum slip resistance. Secondarily applied grit shall be allowed as Jong as the top Surface does not exceed 1/16 inch. Provide non slip grating cover plate as indicated on the Plans. The grating cover plate shall be attached to the completed panel of grating by chemical means (epoxy) to ensure integral action of the panel and plate. The panel and grating shall be vacuum assisted to ensure that all contact surface remain in contact throughout the curing process. B. PULTRUDED FRP GRATING 4 Grating components shall be high strength and high stiffness pultruded elements having a maximum of 70 percent and a minimum of 60 percent glass content (by weight) of continuous roving and continuous strand mat fiberglass reinforcements. The finished surface of the product shall be provided with a surfacing veil to provide a resin rich surface which improves corrosion resistance and resistance to ultraviolet degradation. Bearing bars shall be interlocked and epoxied in place with a two piece cross rod system to provide a mechanical and chemical lock. Cross rods shall be flush with the top surface bearing bars for maximum bearing bar stability and maximum slip resistance. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, the minimum overall depth shall be 1 5/8 inches with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 of an inch. Maximum spacing of bars shall be 1 1/2 inches with maximum cross rods spacing of 6 inches on center. Grating load/deflection requirements at the required span (shown below) shall be less than the manufacturer's published maximum recommended loads. Load/deflection shall not exceed the following: Uniform distributed load of 125 pounds per square foot (PSF) on grating with a clear span of 60 inches with a maximum deflection of 0.38 inches, Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, provide grating with non slip surfacing. Grating shall be manufactured with a quartz grit slip resistant surface on the top of each bar. The embedded grit shall not penetrate beyond 3/16 of an inch. Provide non slip grating cover plate as indicated on the Plans. The grating cover plate shall be attached to the completed panel of grating by chemical means (epoxy) to ensure integral action of the panel and plate. The panel and grating shall be vacuum assisted to ensure that all contact surface remain in contact throughout the curing process. 2.4 GRATING FABRICATION Grating supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified. The Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit field conditions as required by grating manufacturer to complete the work. When field dimensions are not required, contractor shall determine correct size and locations of required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before grating fabrication. Each covered grating section shall be tied down with appropriate anchors or clips. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the contract Plans. Grating openings, which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.), shall be field cut or, when shop fabricated, discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section of grating is readily removable. Gratings shall be fabricated free from warps, twists, or other defects which affect appearance and serviceability. 5 All shop fabricated grating cuts shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated grating Cuts shall be coated similarly by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Type 316 stainless steel hold down clips shall be provided and spaced at a maximum of 4 feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Contractor shall install gratings in accordance with manufacturers' assembly drawings. Lock grating panels securely in place with hold down fasteners as specified herein. Field cut and drill fiberglass reinforced plastic products with carbide or diamond tipped bits and blades. Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Follow manufacturer's instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass products or using resin products; provide adequate ventilation. ITEM NO. 2: Page 13417-3, Technical Specification Section 13417-2.2, PRESSURE GAUGES IIREVISE the second paragraph as shown below: Gauges measuring liquid shall be supplied stairMess steel dillaphiragmi scalls. L19M NQ._a* Page 13419-2, Technical Specification Section 13419-2.2, PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS REVISIIE the second paragraph as shown below: The transmitter pressure sensor shall be protected from the effects of pressure swings and spikes up to the maximum working pressure (body rating) of the pressure capsule. The process connections shall be Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2- inch diameter, NPT 14thfe;:rci as showri on the Pllans.----T-he -eefrFi,-ctleR--4w-1-1 L-Ifystanless-steel with�a Iyfw 316 stamless sl�ee� b[eed-valve. 1he ¢n wfll i F(Ad-s�hitn-p crm i t-r e R w Val air of the (�l repvrtent wit-N-PT4r ii-rn al 4eakrige o f process) 4urifig-cornpreision f,ernoval-of the-filaccenst)-r-. ITEM NO. 4; Page 15050-3, Technical Specification Section 15050-2.2, DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS REVISf: the fifth paragraph as shown below: 6 Below ground piping shall be,puM on joint o,�: mechanical joint pipe--L�R�esi othef-wise sp,ei.:ified-er Mechanical joint pipe shall comply with AWWA C111. ITEM NO. 5: Page 15050-3, Technical Specification Section 15050-2.2, DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1)11,11 Eir'IE the sixth paragraph in its entirety. Bel o w9-r oun d-re.,Aiamec'l p�PeJafnts FR as by are not nccu�pbable, ITEM NO. 6: Page 15100-3, Technical Specification Section 15100-2.4, CHECK VALVES 11111,'�VISIE the second paragraph as shown below: Check valves for liquid service larger than 3 inches shall be swing check, single outside lever and spring, iron body, stainless steel shaft, bronze mounted with bronze and stainless steel fittings, ANSI' B16.1 Class 125 -preund servk.-u flainges, Wfikerij-Mueller A 2600 or equal. II - PLANS REIPII.ACE plan sheets G-5, M-4, M-5, M-6, A-4, S-2, S-3, S-6, and 5-10. END OF ADDENDUM No. 1 Ti thy J. La Port P Date Public Works Director Attachments: Plan Sheets: G-5, M-4, M-5, M-6, A-4, S-2, S-3, S-6, and 5-10 7 f ---------_---- ......_- it It It- y ww l q �� ✓_ U ou. .� r an uim �#e ��W� i .t" vWi pp +Ff Iir� U'r X! r4, �E pr Wi 3�""rf �1�� ✓ o� v° inn ,!il a � a Ie •� � � Q j I i �� � I 1, w > I V� � W � 1��e�IlA��J II '"a�• J J 1 /� 4`x� �N eR ^yam r. _ S l j I . �i � SII ry o Ip1 a � / x v r 1� � } s 14� 314i zl s r �I yVN� fi 7 f t �tl N r� (W� ><6 ny by �............ it _ U� K I Pill e ... ........ I a�� 1 r&S g4''v 'rye i7�lj, o ar v 1 �sn ng 16 yy � la al a6 k \ pp .a I G Iri w � p •. yl e s 1 ,,,� "" u 7 t _ w Y m na ��5 "u JI' " Q gY n �.... r. o I� ........__. _..._ f , fdf E.5 mg ; al fff � w !� tl � l'J ✓4 y / q Y 2 � Q � fo ✓ d + b ,rye .. _......... allak ➢ 1 - jG� a R I ii ,� x ° Z � I P 7 � i V- uo J W eJ A l 12 Ij IF o"- _ o a�o e r, ! P yy M 5 K 3 `�9y yJ 6 � 1 & z. �y b i- 1 N ........... ......... x II_ i r 4 ✓s r"', y b , gg w gg "A 51rn ;f w �Cl�e G�'�^fk• I IT ..��_Y p F' o ` yys s fYm a,.•,,., s l I i I x w f+ �� I all wr A�x -JA -20 "MI IXX 1 AIA RO OR x as r p 4 o» J 44 71 b'i �4' kJ rrn A I � x A yy t`I � Ir 5 ADMINISTRATION Timothy J. LaPorte, P.E. Public Works Director 400 West Gowe E,pt Kent, WA 98032 W„„.....N Fax: 253-856-6500 CITY OF KENT ,APHONE: 258-ase-ssoo mmw.m�wwa.�ammmm�m53-856�����I�...��......00 KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project Number: 16-3012 ADDENDUM No. 2 November 29, 2018 FROM: The Office of the City Engineer, Kent Washington TO: All Plan Holders of the Project Specifications and Plans This addendum forms a part of the Contract documents and modifies the Project Proposal and Specifications and Contract Drawings in accordance with the following: All CII-1AIN ES ARE REIFIII,,.III"C" 11:..:,D 1114 RED I - PLANS IR.E14PW..ACEi plan sheets A-1, S-6, S-7, S-8, S-9, and S-10. II — PROJECT N M ER REPLACE the project number 16-3012 noted on the specifications with 17-7999.4 REPLACE the project number W20031 noted on the plans with 17-7999A END OF ADDENDUM No. 2 /emuu�— /0 9/0 Chad Bieren, P.E. Date Deputy Director/City Engineer y 0 ° Attachments: 3 Plan Sheets: A-1, S-6, S-7, S-8, S-9, and S-10 c Y Mayor Dana Ralph W'W�1 City of Kent Public Works Department \ 1 i w w 'n f Tl d � � Yv IA1 I u Nrvly WD5 i�5 O o g�V C� A z RIM El Ell 777 ,77 4 Y r� ja A a f u v a .N �aY LL� ski n°A I �r o f i59 i . w m �I w p e� ° 5 k 6 � o ................. A ....._..............._.,. ..,...:L:�......... k a JI � 4 e f 4 Yqq 41 w, i TTIfz If Ifr yt Nf \ yy� ti � 4 P I R� to If a is .. �. . d. - ,.� ............. vv r„ r z � a r T 'MOM Z a y w 0 y v x I 3g I f {I r - m Y N w n J ri I a ( f Y....il &. h is 4 }) i Y € y €pp .... ..... .'a ....... .... ... i�"F, �yl I.. it i !1 ll{ if T t"1 T e s (SIM& HE' --1 11711,71.7 'T, --------------- ............. 777 .................. -----......... ................, ............. ... ..........- .............. N ....................... ........ ...... ............. 9 Alf sv TM .................... AP -,L� I Ail. 7-- li, 12 4------------- .............. J t f-r r vp CZ I 1110 �Am %.M," 60 'Ipw .................... ------------ ..... AS! too 6 CD 11" fifr - -- --------- INIDEX Section 1 Bidder's Package Section 2 Payment and Performance Bond and Contract Section S Table of Contents Section 4 Kent Special Provisions Section 5 Kent Standard Plans Section 6 WSDOT Standard Plans Section 7 Geotechncal Report Section 8 New Water Main Connection Procedures Section 8 Sample Project Sign Section 10 Prevailing Wage Rates Section 11 Technical Specifications CITY OF KENT KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Bidder: Prospect Construction, Inc. 116 23rd Street SE Puyallup,WA 98372 253-446-1600 Project Number: 16-3012 BIDS ACCEPTED UNTIL BID OPENING December 4, 2018 December 4, 2018 10:45 A.M. 11:00 A.M. DELIVER TO CITY OF KENT, CITY FALL 220 4th Avenue S., Kent, WA 98032-5895 TIMOTHY J. LAPORTE, P.E. PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR f fi40f22/2018 y, 30748 ``C15TE`E" Except for Technical Specifications KENTT WASMINOTON ORDER OF CONTENTS Invitation to Bid Contractor Compliance Statement Declaration - City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy Administrative Policy 1.2 - Minority and Women Contractors City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Compliance Statement Proposal City of Kent Subcontractor List (over $100K) Subcontractor List (over $1 million) Contractor's Qualification Statement Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes Proposal Signature Page Bid Bond Form Combined Declaration Form Non-Collusion, Minimum Wage Change Order Bidder's Checklist Payment and Performance Bond Contract Table of Contents Kent Special Provisions Kent Standard Plans WSDOT Standard Plans Geotechnical Report New Water Main Connection Procedures Sample Project Sign Prevailing Wage Rates Technical Specifications INVITATION TO BID Notice is hereby given that the City of Kent, Washington, will receive sealed bids at the City Clerk's office through December 4, 2018 up to 10:45 a.m. as shown on the clock on the east wall of the City Clerk's Office on the first floor of City Hall, 220 4th Avenue South, Kent, Washington. All bids must be properly marked and sealed in accordance with this "Invitation to Bid." Bids must be delivered and received at the City Clerk's office by the above-stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail. All bids will be opened and read publicly aloud at 11.00 a.m. for the City of Kent project named as follows: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project Number: 16-3012 The project consists of the construction of new booster pump station, including site work, new single story building containing an equipment room and a diesel generator, HVAC system, horizontal split case pumps, VFD, electrical power, control, instrumentation and SCADA, diesel fuel storage, HMA, landscaping, and other work all in accordance with the Contract Plans, Kent Special Provisions, and the WSDOT Standard Specifications; for the City of Kent's 640 pressure zone water reservoir site (a.k.a. Blue Boy Reservoir site) located at 11300 SE 236th Place, Kent Washington 98031. The City will make the sites open to contractors interested on bidding the project on November 27, 2018 from 8:30 a.m. to 11:30 a.m. located at 11300 SE 236th Place, Kent Washington 98031. City staff will be present only to provide access to the site and vault/building; not to answer questions or provide information. The Engineer's estimated range for this project is approximately $2,700,000 to 3,000,000. Bid documents may be obtained by contacting City of Kent Engineering Department, Nancy Yoshitake at 253-856-5508. For technical questions, please call Bryan Bond at 253-856-5662. Bids must be clearly marked "Bid" with the name of the project on the outside of the envelope, addressed to the City Clerk, 220 4th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032-5895. Only sealed bids will be accepted. No facsimiles or electronic submittals will be considered. Each bid shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications and other contract documents now on file in the office of the City Engineer, City of Kent, Washington. Paper copies of the plans and Kent Special Provisions may be purchased at a non-refundable cost of $50 for each set. Plans and specifications can also be downloaded at no charge at Ken WA. w iry s b°d - oc rement. Copies of the WSDOT Standard Specifications are available for perusal only. A cashier's check, cash or surety bond in the amount of 5% of the bid must be included with the bid. The City of Kent reserves the right to reject any and all bids on any or all schedules or alternates or to waive any informalities in the bidding and shall determine which bid or bidders is the most responsive, satisfactory and responsible bidder and shall be the sole judge thereof. No plea of mistake in the bid shall be available to the bidder for the recovery of his/her deposit or as a defense to any action based upon the neglect or refusal to execute a contract. Bidders must submit with their initial bid a signed statement as to whether they have previously performed work subject to the President's Executive Order No. 11246. ! l No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) days after the day of bid opening. Dated this 31st day of October, 2018. 8Y; i4n)k Kimberley A omoto, City Cler Published in Daily Journal of Commerce on November 6, 13, 20, and 27, 2018. CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (President's Executive Order #11246) Date December 4 2018 I This statement relates to a proposed contract with the City of Kent named 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project Number: fr viz 17-7999.4 I am the undersigned bidder or prospective contractor. I represent that - 1. I ✓ have, have not, participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the President's Executive Order #11246 (regarding equal employment opportunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order. Prospect Construction, Inc. NAME OF BIDDER BY: _ v.ecce President SIG URE/T TLE. Ryan Sondgroth 116 23rd St. SE - Puyallup, WA 98372 ADDRESS (Note to Bidders: The information required in this Compliance Statement is informational only) 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16 36i2 17-7999.4 DECLAMATION CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY The City of Kent is committed to conform to Federal and State laws regarding equal opportunity. As such, all contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who perform work with relation to this contract shall comply with the regulations of the City's equal employment opportunity policies. The following questions specifically identify the requirements the City deems necessary for any contractor, subcontractor or supplier on this specific contract to adhere to. An affirmative response is required on all of the following questions for this contract to be valid and binding. If any contractor, subcontractor or supplier willfully misrepresents themselves with regard to the directives outlined, it will be considered a breach of contract and it will be at the City's sole determination regarding suspension or termination for all or part of the contract; The questions are as follows: 1. I have read the attached City of Kent administrative policy number 1.2. 2. During the time of this contract, I will not discriminate in employment on the basis of sex, race, color, national origin, age, or the presence of all sensory, mental or physical disability. 3. During the time of this contract, the prime contractor will provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 4. During the time of the contract I, the prime contractor, will actively consider hiring and promotion of women and minorities. 5. Before acceptance of this contract, an adherence statement will be signed by me, the Prime Contractor, that the Prime Contractor complied with the requirements as set forth above. By signing below, I agree to fulfill the five requirements referenced above. By. Rya,VSond4roth For: Prospect Construction, Inc. Title: vice President " Date: December 4 . 2018 640 Pressure Zone Booster Statlon/Bond 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number: :_ 3 := 17-7999.4 CITY OF KENT ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY NUMBER: 1.2 EFFECTIVE DATE: January 1, 1998 SUBJECT: MINORITY AND WOMEN SUPERSEDES: April 1, 1996 CONTRACTORS APPROVED BY Jim White, Mayor POLICY: Equal employment opportunity requirements for the City of Kent will conform to federal and state laws. All contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers of the City must guarantee equal employment opportunity within their organization and, if holding contracts with the City amounting to $10,000 or more within any given year, must take the following affirmative steps: 1. Provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 2. Actively consider for promotion and advancement available minorities and women. Any contractor, subcontractor, consultant or supplier who willfully disregards the City's nondiscrimination and equal opportunity requirements shall be considered in breach of contract and subject to suspension or termination for all or part of the contract. Contract Compliance Officers will be appointed by the Directors of Planning, Parks, and Public Works Departments to assume the following duties for their respective departments. 1. Ensuring that contractors, subcontractors, consultants, and suppliers subject to these regulations are familiar with the regulations and the City's equal employment opportunity policy. 2. Monitoring to assure adherence to federal, state and local laws, policies and guidelines. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16 9ft2-j 7-7999.4 PROPOSAL To the City Clerk City Hall Kent, Washington 98032 The undersigned hereby certifies that Rvan S=dciroth of PTqspecr has examined the job site and construction details of the work as outlined on the plans and described in the specifications the project named 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Project Number: or the City of Kent, Washington, and has read and thoroughly understands the plans and specifications and contract governing the work embraced in this improvement and the method by which payment will be made for that work and hereby proposes to undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement in accordance with the bid and contract, and at the following schedule of rates and prices: NOTE TO BIDDERS: 1) All bid items are described in the Kent Special Provisions (KSP) or the Standard Specifications (WSDOT). Reference the Section No. listed in this proposal, where the bid item is described. 2) Proposal items are numbered in sequence but are non-continuous. 3) Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and total amount of bid must be shown. 4) Should bid items with identically worded bid item descriptions, marked with asterisk (*), appear in more than one schedule of the proposal, the bidder must bid the same unit price on corresponding items for each schedule. If the Contractor enters different unit prices on these items, the City will unilaterally revise the bid amounts to the lowest unit price on each corresponding item and recalculate the Contractor's total bid amount. The corrected total bid amount will be used by the City for award purposes and fix the amount of the contract bond. EXAMPLE SCHEDULE I - STREET ITEM SECTION APPROX. ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. NO. QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 1006 2-03.5 100 Roadway Excavation, $14.00 $1,400.00 WSDOT CU YDS Including Haul Per CY Any bids not filled out properly may be considered non-responsive. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 October 31, 2018 Project Number 17-7999.4 WATER ITEM SECTION APPROX. ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. NO. QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 1 1-09.7 1 Mobilization $ -ew,ew.60$ JOD,o�•� WSDOT LUMP SUM Per LS 2 8-30.5 1 Project Sign $ ,-00,00 $ pw"040 KSP EACH Per EA 3 Technical 1 Locate Existing Utilities $ yW.00 $ ya•AO specification 01200LUMP SUM Per LS 4 Technical 8 Potholing $ aro,OD $ „���9pp,0,5? SpecificationEACH Per EA 012000 5 Technical 3 Catch Basin Protection Specification $ a'°V'0.00 $$ �arq• QO 01200 EACH Per EA 6 Tech nicai 1 Temporary Erosion Control $ -74w,40 $ 17004P-oo Specification LUMP SUM 0120o Per LS 7 Technical 1 Excavation Safety Systems $ 0,449.00 $ c3 0 Specification Per LS 01200 LUMP SUM 8 Technical 1 Clearing and Grubbing $ 7',t o0 Specification $ 7De LUMP SUM Per LS GY7 0120o 9 Technical 1 Earthwork $ c�Q,OLb.ao$ XO A. ii 40 Specification olzoa LUMP SUM Per LS 10 Technical 50 Unsuitable Excavation $ 'yB qg Specification $ ���• 40 01200 CU YDS Per CY 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: i6 981P 17-7999.4 WATER ITEM SECTION APPROX. ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. NO. OUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 11 Technical 200 Foundation Gravel $ a 49 $ h9,00o.lP Specification 01200 TONS Per TON 12 Technical 1 Booster Station Building $,folrj14/d.6b$c�GG/�.j.Cr, Specification 01200 LUMP SUM Per LS 13 Technical 1 Booster Station Site Piping $ /d"0, 00$ /fO,p40.40 Specification 01200 LUMP SUM Per LS 14 Technical 1 Booster Station Building $ wfi.r4Etwa cry$ ,zrp pcp.pp Specification 01200 LUMP SUM Piping Per LS 15 Technical 1 Check Valve Utility Vault $ 1f ,0,9 600.kry Specification 01200 LUMP SUM Per LS 16 Technical 2 20-HP Horizontal Split Case $ J40,CAO.00 $60,".0a Specification EACH Pumps Per EA 17 Technical 2 125-HP Horizontal lit Ca se ase ,O Specification p $ xeR7.00 O$ /o�„ G•YJ en, 01200 EACH Pumps Per EA 18 Technical 1 Electrical $c3.J,eea'Z$3jG, 00,0. co Specification olzoo LUMP SUM Per LS 19 Technical 1 Instrumentation and SCADA $ Specification 01200 LUMP SUM Per LS 20 Technical 1 Generator, Fuel Tank, and $/60'ay.00$ Ade 00 Specification alzoo LUMP SUM Transfer Switch Per LS 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number: '19 98±2 17-7999.4 WATER ITEM SECTION APPROX. ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. NO. QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT I i 21 5-04.5 55 HMA Class 1/2", PG 58H-22 $ /Jw..cry $c$ LkG4, 00 KSP TONS Per TON 22 Technical 1 Site Restoration/Landscaping $ at-;"-Vas a?3;ci�•do Specification olzoo LUMP SUM Per LS 23 8-02.5 6 PSIPE Cornus Kousa $ 66-,%41 + $ 3, GcYaob KSP EACH (2 inch Caliper) Per EA 24 8-02.5 33 PSIPE Osmanthus Delavayi $ d"G.ao $y g yy gp KSP EACH (5 Gallon Container) Per EA 25 8-02.5 319 PSIPE Spiraea Japonica $ J7 ,ao $f JF? pb KSP EACH (2 Gallon Container) Per EA 26 1- 1 SPCC Plan $ '3160.G) $ Je�.� 07.15(1) LUMP SUM Per LS WSDOT 27 8-01.5 1 Erosion/Water Pollution $15,000.00* $15,000.00 WSDOT FORCE Control Per FA ACCOUNT *Common price to all bidders 28 1-04.4(1) 1 Minor Changes $10,000.00* $10,000.00 WSDOT CALC Per CALC *Common price to all bidders Sub Total $ 7 � ' a 10% WA State Sales Tax Water Total $ a?' % y ✓ '/• r 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16 39i-=17-7999.4 CITY OF KENT SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over $100,000) List each subcontractor, from any tier of subcontractors, that shall perform subcontract work amounting to more than 10% of the total bid contract price. List each bid item to be performed by each designated subcontractor in numerical sequence. If no subcontractors will be performing 10% or more of the work, indicate this by writing "None" and signing this form at the bottom of the page. Failure to submit a fully completed and signed subcontractor list after the time set for bid opening may disqualify your bid. Project Name: Fian Praccura 7nne Rnnctar Statinn Project Number: 16-3@12 17-7999.4 Subcontractor Name T Item Numbers 9 ' Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE Rya ondgx"o..... vice 1) esi..dent 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 October 31, 2016 Project Number: 16 99s2 17-7999.4 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over 1 million dollars) Name of Bidder: Prospect construction, Inc. Project Name: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Statinn Project Number: 176m� 17-7992,4 Pursuant to RCW 39.30.060, Bidder shall list the names of the subcontractors with whom the Bidder, if awarded the contract, will subcontract for performance of the work of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning; plumbing; and electrical, or to name itself for the work. Failure of the Bidder to submit, as part of the Bid, the names of such subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work or the naming of two or more subcontractors to perform the same work shall render the Bidder's Bid non-responsive and, therefore, void. Heating, ,Ventilation, and Air ConditioningSubcontractor Name: Plumbing Subcontractor Name: Prospect construction. Inc_ Electrical Subcontractor Name: December 4 2018 Sign ...e of Bid ',er Date Ryan Sondgroth, Vice President 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number,,16-98�i 17-7999.4 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (RCVW 39.04.350) THE CITY WILL REVIEW THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSES TO THIS FORM TO DETERMINE WHETHER THE BIDDING CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PERFORM THE CONTRACT WORK. THIS FORM INCLUDES CRITERIA ESTABLISHED BY STATE LAW THAT MUST BE MET TO BE CONSIDERED A RESPONSIBLE BIDDER AND QUALIFIED TO BE AWARDED THIS PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT AS WELL AS SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA ESTABLISHED BY THE CITY THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT. THE BIDDER SHOULD READ AND RESPOND TO THIS FORM CAREFULLY. Indicia of contractor's responsibility inherently involve subjective determinations as to the contractor's ability to perform and complete the contract work responsibly and to the owner city's satisfaction. The city has an obligation and a duty to its citizens and its taxpayers to administer its budgets and complete its projects in a businesslike manner. Accordingly, it has a duty to exercise the type of inquiry and discretion a business would conduct when selecting a contractor who will be responsible to perform the contract work. The city's supplemental criteria are based, in large part, on the qualification statement form used by the American Institute of Architects. The city provides these criteria so as to provide the most objective framework possible within which the city will make its decision regarding the bidder's ability to be responsible to perform the contract work. These criteria, taken together, will form the basis for the city's decision that a bidder is or is not responsible to perform the contract work. Any bidder may make a formal written request to the city to modify the criteria set forth in this qualification statement, but that request may only be made within 48 hours of the date and time that the bidder first obtains the bid documents or three (3) business days prior to the scheduled bid opening date, whichever occurs first. If the city receives a modification request, it will consider any information submitted in the request and will respond before the bid submittal deadline. If the city's evaluation results in changed criteria, the city will issue an addendum establishing the new or modified criteria. If the city determines that, based on the criteria established in this statement, a bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work, the city will provide written notice of its determination that will include the city's reason for its decision. The bidder has 24 hours from the time the city delivers written notice to the bidder that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work to appeal the city's determination. No appeals will be received after the expiration of this 24 hour appeal period. The city may deliver this notice by hand delivery, email, facsimile, or regular mail. In the event the city uses regular mail, the delivery will be deemed complete three days after being placed in the U.S. Mail. The bidder's right to appeal is limited to the single remedy of providing the city with additional information to be considered before the city issues a final determination. Bidder acknowledges and understands that, as provided by RCW 39,04.350, no other appeal is allowed and no other remedy of any kind or nature is available to the bidding contractor if the City determines that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16.96i2 17-7999.4 If the bidder fails to request a modification within the time allowed, or fails to appeal a determination that the bidder is not responsible within the time allowed, the city will make its determination of bidder responsibility based on the information submitted. COMPLETE AND SIGN THIS FORM AS PART OF YOUR BID. FAILURE TO PROPERLY COMPLETE THIS FORM MAY ALSO RESULT IN A DETERMINATION THAT YOUR BID IS NON-RESPONSIVE AND THEREFORE VOID. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMITTED BY: Rvan sondaroth. vice President NAME: Prospect construction, Inc. ADDRESS: 116 23rd St SE Puyallup, WA 98372 PRINCIPAL OFFICE: Prospect cnn,9tru,ct_ion. Inc_ ADDRESS: 116 23rd St SE Puvallun. WA 98372 PHONE: itinn FAX: STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS — Per state law a bidder must meet the following responsibility criteria 1. Required Responsibility Criteria 1.1 provide a copy of your Department of Labor and Industries certificate of registration in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW. Attached 1.2 Provide your current state unified business identifier number. 602 850 637 1.3 Provide proof of applicable industrial insurance coverage for your employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW, together with an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW, and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW. Providing a copy of a state of Washington "Master License Service Registration and Licenses" form is typically sufficient evidence of the requirements of this subsection. Attached 1.4 Provide a statement, signed by a person with authority to act and speak for your company, that your company, including any subsidiary companies or affiliated companies under majority ownership or under 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 12 October 31, 2018 Project Number.—i6 Ba ix 17-7999.4 control by the owners of the bidder's company, are not and have not been in the past three (3) years, disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). Attached 1.5 Provide a signed statement, signed under penalty of perjury by a person with authority to act and speak for your company, that within the three- year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date, your company is not a "willful" violator as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provisions of chapters 49,46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. Attached SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA — Established by the City to determine bidder responsibility 2. ORGANIZATION 2.1 How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor? 20 Years 2.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? 20 Years 2.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated? N/A 2.3 If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: 2.3.1 Date of incorporation: 02/04/1998 2.3.2 State of incorporation: Washington 2.3.3 President's name: cordon McLaren 2.3.4 Vice-president's name(s): Ryan Sondgroth 2.3.5 Secretary's name: Susan Dunn 2.3.6 Treasurer's name: xelby Vaughan 2.4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following: 2.4.1 Date of organization: 2.4.2 Type of partnership (if applicable): 2.4.3 Name(s) of general partner(s): 2.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following: 2.5.1 Date of organization: 2.5.2 Name of owner: 2.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals: 3. LICENSING 3.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate license numbers, if applicable. N/A 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 13 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 17-7999.4 3.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed. N/A 4. EXPERIENCE 4.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces. Civil,concrete,carpentry and mechanical. 4.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.) 4.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? No 4.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? No 4.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? No 4.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) No 4.4 On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect or design engineer, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion (fate. Attached 4.4.1 State total worth of work in progress and under contract: $35,363,442 4.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect or design engineer, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. Attached 4.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: $22,000,000 4.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individuals of your organization. Attached 4.7 On a separate sheet, list your major equipment. Attached 5. REFERENCES 5.1 Trade References: HD Fowler,Sean McCabe,360-651-1438,ext.3131 5.2 Bank References: Heritage Sank, Rebecca Cresswell, 253-864-3407 5.3 Surety: Liberty mutual Insurance 5.3.1 Name of bonding company: Propel Insurance 5.3.2 Name and address of agent: Eric Zimmerman, Propel Insurance, 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 14 601 Union St. , Ste 34000ctober 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Seattle, WA 98101 6. FINANCING 6.1 Financial Statement. i After bid opening, the City may require the following financial information from any of the three apparent low bidders. If so required, the selected bidder(s) must respond with this financial information within 24 hours of the City's request for that information. The City's request for this information shall not be construed as an award or as an intent to award the contract. A bidder's failure or refusal to provide this information may result in rejection of that bidder's bid. 6.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses); Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes); Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings), 6.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof: 6.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? 6.1.4 If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent- subsidiary). 6.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction? Yes 7. SIGNATURE 7.1 Dated at this _4tn day of December 2018. Name of Organization; Prospect construction, Inc. 6y: .F'f Rv n Sonderesth Title: 'Dice President 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 15 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 17-7999.4 7.2 Ryan Sondgroth , being duly sworn, deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. Subscribed and sworn before me this 4th day of December�ry�11,'�Qlii610 x�� 411+ Notary Public: ti� J pT Ur'�. Susan L. Dunn a ,1:. i0 My Commission Expires: 11/16/2022 _ MyCanm.EON Nownber 16,2022 N0.57736 1r R CJ w770P rY+'k'A5µ���`� 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 16 October 31,2018 Project Number: 16-3012 17-7999.4 I I Department of Labor and Industries PRO, P!E T CONSTRUCTION INC PO Box 4445077 Olympia WA 98504-4450 i t , CCr'I,O,SPC1022CD U1�1 `601 13504037 kegistr�* as provided by'Law as: , t orlsid ton Contractor ,. . , , `„ CCT7 • CrEG*7f*�AL r PROSPECT CONSTRUC T►ON INC ., E e t ,1 ate 2 4/1998 116 23RD ST SE � Ptairn Datc 4/2020 PUYALLUP WA 98372 SEP 2 4 201B ate Notice: WA Workers ('arid uns"IM)� ��i YI r I� i � lY.!,a.nlnl THIS IS State of Washington NOT A Department of Labor and Industries i Uly 1 , 2018 1 . 2831 Olyy mpia WA 98504-4140 BILL, 9-18-18 'a c O1 850 637 Policyholder rt PROSPECT CONSTRUCTION INC 53 , 190-00 76765723 116 23RD ST SE PUYALLUP WA 983724116 .AVID PRYOR 360)902-4804 Class code 0217-01 is used to report all hours worked by employees who are doing concrete flatwork and foundations (new construction or repair) including pools and ponds, associated with wood frame buildings. This class code covers all related work including, but not limited to, making, setting up or tearing down forms, placement of reinforcing materials, pouring and finishing concrete, and pick up and delivery of supplies and equipment. For the complete description of the risk classification(s) assigned to your business, go to http://apps.leg.wa.gov/wac/default.aspx?cite=296-17A and click the links for your classification(s) „ Pay your premiums online:www.Lni.wa.gov/QuarterlyReports Need h01p understanding this notice?Call your account manager at the phone nurnber shown above. Have apayroll service? Send there a ropryof this notice. `f11i1rin/ � / ����f fI'��fl/1� 1$2.19225 rf7 ��1 �� I///�� l�ii va I m G/r/ rJ''arrf r��i� ���%/ l�ii/�cFl�m.f/� ill„e✓arrrJu%� a%�r„hs�T„aii'a,,, 0101-02 zcavation NDIC 1.7467 0.6802 0.0227 0.1030 .74365 $0.50245 a $3.2461 0201-01 ridge1011NO Crossing Const/Rpr 2.6424 0.9618 0.0344 0.1030 .08110 $0.69060 $4.7717 a 0217-01 oncr Found/Flatwork-Wood Bldg 2.0067 0.9334 0.0259 0.1030 .24175 $0.66695 03.9087 0306-00 lambing NOC Sewer Pipe Cling 1.3768 0.5653 0.0179 0.1030 $0.42565 $2.6179 °' 0518-00 uflding/Concrete Const NOC 1.9059 0.8032 0.0247 0,1030 $3.02805 $0.58265 03.6107 :+ 4900-00 uperint/Frog. Mgr - Const 0.2521 0.0960 0.0033 0.1030 00.45870 $0.11520 $0.5539 4904-00 larical Office NOC 8 Oraftsmn 0.0260 010188 0.0003 0.1030 00.09715 00.06375 I $0.1609 5206-79 ontraciors Perm Yard or Shop 0.6557 0.3269 0.0084 0.1030 $1.10800 $0.26660 ' $1.3746 . 7204-00 referred Workers 0.1030 $0.05150 $0.05150 $0.1030 We show your experience factor history here Iim,I% Ihe Withheld this Or the each December, ernpoyer'�s amnuntfrom Quarterly Mo ryoorivattpur employee Report,the Or, you may go online, where it is always to workers' payforeach ernployerw available. mnhp covenago hour"#hey multiply this work.It is their number by What's an experience factor?Your account manager i s a I so ready to he I p. contribution to hnurs"Mal workers camp to calculate See back for an explanation. coverage. premiums, G971,..nru rinn ran_wi,iar PAGE 1 OF 1 *Hours or units. R O S P E CT PH. 253-446- 1 60O CONSTRUCTION , INC. FX. 253-446- 1 601 i CITY OF KENT 640 PRESSURE ZONE BOOSTER STATION PROJECT NUMBER: 16-3012 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 1. Required Responsibility Criteria 1.4 Prospect Construction, Inc. is not and has not been in the past three (3) years, disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). V;301 ' e Ryan Sondgroth, Vice President December 4, 2018 Date P C I 1 16 23RD STREET SE PUYALLUP, WA 9S372 f3ROS, PECT PH. 253-446- 1 600 CONSTRUCTION , INC. Fx. 253-446- 1 601 CITY OF KENT 640 PRESSURE ZONE BOOSTER STATION PROJECT NUMBER: 16-3012 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 1. Required Responsibility Criteria 1.5 Within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date, Prospect Construction, Inc. is not a "willful" violator as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provisions of chapters 49.46, 49.48 or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgement entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. Ryan Sondgroth, ice President December 4. 2018 Date PG I 1 16 23RD STREET SE PUYALLUP, WA 98372 Prospect Construction, Inc. Projects Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility Remodel Initial Contract $4,743,187 Tacoma Public Utilities Date of Award: December 13,2017 Completion Date: Under Construction Owner: Tacoma Public Utilities 3628 S.3511'St. Tacoma,WA 98409 Chad Druffel 253-502-8073 Major components of work under this contract include developing an existing spring with an outlet weir, infiltration gallery and pump station,juvenile holding pools, adult handing area,remodel sampling building, construct new office/storage building, improvements to the existing CFNSC electrical)1,67011 building and replacing existing air compressor system with a duplex compressor package. Snoqualmie Water Reclamation Facility— Initial Contract $10,416,516 Phase 2 Improvements City of Snoqualnie Date of Award: December 11,2017 Completion Date: Under Construction Owner: City of Snoqualmie PO Box 987 Snoqualmie, WA 98065 Jeff Hamlin 425-831-4919 Engineer: RH2 Engineering 22722 29th Dr, SE, Suite 210 Bothell, WA 98021 Dan Mahlum 425-951-5340 The project generally consists of the following improvements: Headworks grip pump addition,headworks lower level building addition, oxidation ditch anaerobic mixer replacement, Clarifier No. 1 centerwell replacement with feedwell and energy dissipating inlet, scum pump stations,WAS pump station pump and piping improvements,new solids handling facility, solids handling system in-ground biofilter fans and ductwork,and new decant facility. Foothills Trail Bridge No.PRT17196-B Replacement Initial Contract $1,132,108 Pierce County Final Contract $1,131,695 Date of Award: June 14,2017 Completion Date: November,2018 Owner: Pierce County 4301 S.Pine Street Tacoma, WA 98409 Susan Holdener 253-798-7172 Project includes replacing the bridge with an arch pipe with a 51 foot 0 inch span, spiral nail walls,welded wire walls along with paving the trail and landscaping. Sons Creek Hatchery Redevelopment Project Initial Contract $16,327,593 WA Dept. of Fish and Wildlife Final Contract Date of Award: April 11,2017 Completion Date: Under construction Owner: WA Dept. of Fish and Wildlife PO Box 43200 Olympia, WA 98504 Michael DeLaCruz 360-753-5730 The project includes demolition, site improvement,site piping, site sheet pile retaining wall,intake structure, concrete adult pond spawning shed,concrete fish ladder, in-water weir structure,juvenile fish by- passage concrete structure,heavy concrete settling pond,distribution concrete box structures,concrete bridge,design-guild metal hatchery building, concrete fine settling pond,office building, and septic system, fiberglass round ponds, flood channel and site electrical. Hybrid Battery Lift Project Initial Contract $807,881 King County Final Contract Date of Award: January 31,2017 Completion Date: Under construction Owner: King County Transportation Department 11911 E. Marginal Way S., Bldg.B Tukwila, WA 98168 Jerry Williams 206-263-1396 The project is contracting the purchase and installation of Jib Cranes (4-total)at Ryerson Base, Central Base,North Base and East Base Metro Transit locations. The one ton cranes will be installed in the bus maintenance bays and ultimately used to exchange hybrid batteries off the roof of buses. McAllister We11t3eld Corrosion Control Facility Initial Contract $2,869,035 City of Olympia Final Contract Date of Award: December 6, 2016 Completion Date: June 7,2018 Owner: City of Olympia PO Box 1967 Olympia, WA 98507-1967 360-753-8447 Engineer: Gray& Osborne 701 Dexter Ave N., Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98109 (206)284-0860 Project consists of the construction of three fiberglass aeration towers, concrete foundation pad, a CMU blower building, associated sitework,piping, electrical,telemetry and control necessary to complete the McAllister Wellfield Corrosion Control Facility. LOTT Sludge Dewatering System Upgrade Initial Contract $6,369,705 LOTT Clean Water Alliance Final Contract $6,510,352 Date of Award: October 14,2016 Completion Date: March 26,2018 Owner: LOTT Clean Water Alliance 500 Adams St.NE Olympia, WA 98501 Graham McAllister (360) 528-5718 Engineer: Parametrix 1019 39'^Ave. SE#100 Puyallup, WA 98374 Lyle Rosco (253)604-6600 Project generally consisted of demolition,modification,addition,and upgrades to the existing sludge dewatering system while maintaining process control and flow. Demolition and salvage consisted of removal of centrifuges,polymer batching system,metering pumps, conveyors,structural steel platforms, concrete,electrical and associated process piping. Demolition required extensive planning for numerous electrical and process piping tie ins and cutovers to complete the work with minimal disturbance to normal operations. New work consisted of structural concrete,modifications to the HVAC, structural steel, centrifuges, dry polymer hatching system,grinders, metering pumps,horizontal and transverse conveyors, electrical,new operator room,new truck loadout area, and associated process piping. Chein Hill Slide Repair Initial Contract: $461,832.80 Thurston County Public Works Final Contract: $449,329.48 Date of Award: August 23,2016 Completion Date: November 21,2016 Owner: Thurston County Public Works 9605 Tilley Rd. SW Olympia,WA 98512 (360)867-2358 The work included mobilization, Shaft-24 in. Diameter, 870 LF; Furnishing Soldier Pile, I,073 LF; Lagging, 1,078 SF; Commercial HMA, 8 Tons,and other work. 2014 Water System Improvement Initial Contract: 1,589,864.68 City of Enumclaw Final Contract: 1,635,185.93 Date of Award: August 22, 2016 Completion Date: July 11,2017 Owner: City of Enumclaw 1309 Myrtle Ave. Enumclaw, WA 98022 Scott Woodbury (360)615-5728 Engineer: Pace Engineers 11255 Kirkland Way, Suite300 Kirkland,WA 98033 (425)827-2014 The project included construction of a 28' x 32' CMU well house building, well motor,skid mounted booster pump system and associated piping, flow meters, valving, chlorination system,generator installation, site piping, well decommissioning,demolition, and connection to the existing system. In addition, work included the installation of main PRV and altitude valve vaults and individual service PRVs. Second Flocculation Train Initial Contract: $1,204,349 City of Chehalis Final Contract: $1,187,294 Date of Award: July 18, 2016 Completion Date: May 22,2017 Owner: City of Chehalis PO Box 871 Chehalis, WA 99532 360-345-3225 Engineer: HDR EngineeringGig GePhase 2 601 Union Street Seattle, WA 98101 (206)826-4735 The project included construction of 1)a second,new concrete flocculation train at the Water Treatment Plant,included excavation,pilings,piping, electrical and telemetry, and 2)renovation of the existing piping and plumbing in the Water Treatment Plant chemical room. Ship Canal Pump Plant Rehabilitation Initial Contract: $5,828,808 Corps of Engineers Date of Award: September 26, 2015 Completion Date: October 2017 Owner/Engineer: Seattle District Corps of Engineers PO Box 3755 Seattle, WA 98124-3755 Carey D.Mellott 206-595-8447 This project consists of demolition of existing pump plant equipment residing within a 26 feet diameter by 65 feet deep well, while accommodating severe overhead height restrictions, limited side access and no direct vehicular access. Partial disassembly of historic motor casings and valve actuation machinery, fabrication and installation of new pumps, structural steel and piping components and connection to existing, permanent suction and discharge openings. Pipe sizes range from 60 inches to 6 inches in diameter. Furnishing and install new motor control center. Gig Harbor W WTP Phase 2—Mechanical Package Initial Contract: $4,971,468 City of Gig Harbor Final Contract: $4,692,330 Date of Award: July 29,2015 Completion Date: 09/23/2016 Owner: City of Gig Harbor 3510 Grandview St. Gig Harbor, WA 98335 George Flanigan (253)851-6710 Engineer: Parametrix Engineers 4660 Kitsap Way Bremerton,WA 98312 253-604-6645 This project consists of improvements to existing W WTP sludge pumping and in-channel fine screens, clarifiers, utility water system, UV/Blower building modifications, aeration basins, aerated digester, electrical systems, P&1D's, as well as instrumentation and control systems. Additionally, improvements include new vactor truck loadout station,new UV disinfection system, second floor mezzanine in existing shop building, and new odor scrubber system. Yelm SW Well IA Water System Improvements Initial Contract: $4,931,035 Yelm,WA Final Contract: $4,895,602 Date of Award: July 15,2015 Completion Date: January 27,2017 Owner: City of Yelm 105 Yelm Ave. W. Yelm, WA 98597 Chad Bedlington (360)458-8406 Engineer: RH2 Engineers 950 Pacific Ave., Suite 1220 Tacoma, WA 98402 (253)272-3 059 Equip the well with a pump and motor and construct a treatment facility for the removal of manganese from the water. The treatment facility will include a pressurized filter vessel, sodium hypochlorite onsite generation and feed system, a backwash recycle system, an at-grade steel reservoir, electrical panels and controls,process automation, backup power supply, site improvements and of-site utilities. Henderson North CSO Reduction Initial Contract: $6,094,515 City of Seattle Final Contract: $6,254,839 Date of Award: May 13, 2015 Completion Date: March 23,2017 Owner: City of Seattle 700 Fifth Ave., Suite 4112 Seattle,WA 98134 CM: Hoffman Construction of WA 600 Stewart St, Suite 100 Seattle,WA 98101 (206)286-6697 The Henderson CSO Reduction project involved constructing an underground combined sewer overflow structure for the City of Seattle. The project required mass concrete placements including 6 ft.thick slabs with thermal control monitoring. The 4 ft.thick walls required a one-sided form system. Overall the project required 10,000 cubic yard structure to be completed in 6 months. The site location sitting between the shore of Lake Washington and residential homes provided a challenge for the project team. The site location allowed for crane access on one side of the structure by a narrow road,this resulted in concrete pumping and material delivery challenges and unorthodox construction practices to ensure the project was completed per the project schedule. Puyallup WPCP Biossolids Dewatering improvements initial Contract: $5,854,593 City of Puyallup Final Contract: $6,465,166 Date of Award: February 25,2015 Completion Date: 08/24/2016 Owner: City of Puyallup 333 S. Meridian Puyallup, WA 98371 (253) 841-5597 Engineer: Gray and Osborne 701 Dexter Ave.N., Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98109 (206)284-0860 Construct new biosolids dewatering improvements at the existing Water Pollution Control Plant. Modify two of the existing primary clarifiers into the new dewatering building. The main floor of the new building will house the new digested sludge dewatering equipment and electrical room. The basement will house new polymer blending and aging system;polymer feed pumps, inline sludge/polymer blenders,hydraulic pressure unit and two of the dewatered biosolids transport conveyors. Construct a new dewatered biosolids storage silo and haul truck loading facility. Install a series of four shaft-less screw conveyors to convey dewatered biosolids form the discharge of the dewatering screw press to the inlet to the dewatered biosolids storage silo. Bellefield Pump Station Capacity Improvements Initial Contract $7,783,319 City of Bellevue Final Contract: $7,899,490 Date of Award: January 20,2015 Completion Date: September 21, 2016 Owner: City of Bellevue 450— 110'Ave. NE Bellevue, WA 98009 Jay Hummel(425)452-4160 Engineer: RH2 Engineers 22722 29"Dr. SE Bothell, WA 98021 (425)951-5400 The Bellefield Capacity Improvements project consisted of the construction of a cast-in place concrete wet well and valve chamber; an above grade CMU building that consists of electrical,maintenance, and odor control rooms; site fencing,paving and landscaping, site work including deep excavation in poor soils, temporary shoring, dewatering,sewage pump station mechanical equipment, and utilities including installation of 8-inch water main, 8-inch gravity sewer main, 42-inch gravity sewer main, 30-inch gravity sewer main and dual 16-inch sanitary sewer force mains with appurtenance structures. Lake Tapps Headgate Project Initial Contract $937,389 Cascade Water Alliance Date of Award: November 5,2014 Completion Date: 06/30/2015 Owner: Cascade Water Alliance 11400 SE 8"'St., Suite 440 Bellevue WA 98004 Michael Gagliardo(425)453-0930 Engineer: HDR Engineering 500 108'Ave.NE Bellevue,WA 98004 Michael Blanchette (425)450-6200 The work included Gates#1 and#2 rehabilitation,Gate#1 mechanical and electrical equipment, standby generator, Gatehouse electrical modifications, and controls and SCADA system upgrades. Sumner Wastewater Treatment Facility Expansion Project City of Sumner Date of Award: June 7,2014 Initial Contract: $11,670,495 Completed Date: 01/29/2016 Owner: City of Sumner I t04 Maple St., Suite 260 Sumner, WA 98390-1423 Andrew Leach (253)299-5700 Engineers: Gray&Osborne, Inc. 701 Dexter Ave.N. Seattle, WA 98C109 Doug Welch(206)284-0860 This project consists of expanding the capacity of the existing Sumner W WTP to 6.10 mgd. The improvements include modifications to the existing influent pump stations and replacement of all existing pumps, installation of new grit handling equipment,modifications to the existing primary sludge pump station,modifications to existing Aeration Basin Nos. 1 and 2, construction of Aeration Basin No. 3, installation of a fourth aeration blower, construction of a new secondary clarifier with aluminum dome cover, construction of a new RAS/Stun pump station and chemical storage building, installation of additional UV effluent disinfection equipment,construction of a new sludge truck canopy, construction of a new centrate pump station and new centrate holding tank,and construction of a new storage equipment building Shelton W WTP and Front Street Pump Station Improvements—Phase 2 City of Shelton Date of Award: June 23,2014 Initial Contract: $1,652,514 Completed Date: 06/10/2015 Owner: City of Shelton 525 Cola St. Shelton,WA 98584 Bob Tauscher, (360)426-4491 Engineer: Parametrix 1019 39'h Ave. SE, Suite 100 Puyallup,WA 98374 (253)604-6600 Project includes the installation of a solids dewatering centrifuge;relocate unit heaters and construct ventilator fans;construct pumping stations and other mechanical systems; and construct instrumentation equipment. Nisqually Sanitary Sewer Water Reclamation Facility Initial Contract $9,704,300 Nisqually Indian Tribe Date of Award: December 2013 Completion Date: 06/12/2015 Owner: Nisqually Indian Tribe Public Works Department 4820 She-Nah-Num Drive SE Olympia, WA 98513 Tony Berkson (360)456-1115 Engineer: Parametrix 1019 39ih Ave SE, Suite 100 Puyallup, WA 98374 Randy Raymond(360)459-3609 This project consists of constructing a new membrane bioreaction water reclamation plant including concrete tanks, MBR equipment, screening and grit removal equipment masonry buildings,structural steel, electrical equipment, modification of the existing rapid infiltration basins and demolition of the existing temporary lagoon treatment system. West Point Treatment Plant Raw Sewage Engine Emissions Initial Contract $3,353,591 King County Date of Award: December 2013 Completion Date: 01/07/2016 Owner: King County Chinook Bldg 3" Floor 401 Fifth Ave. Seattle, WA 98104 Tina Phipps(206)263-9329 Engineer: CDM Smith, Inc. 1218 3`°Ave., Suite 1100 Seattle,WA 98101 Mike Hyland(206)336-4900 This project consists of constructing a new biogas treatment system,LAMBDA installation on four RSP engine drives,3 way catalysts on four RSP engine drives,and site/civil improvements. Green River Headworks Intake Structure Initial Contract $1,301,980 Hoffman Construction Date of Award: December 2013 Completion Date: August 20,2014 Owner: Tacoma Water 3628 S 35`s St. Tacoma, WA 98409 (253)502-8600 GC/CM: Hoffinan Construction, Co. 1505 Westlake Ave.N, Suite 500 Seattle, WA 98109 Ben Larson(360) 886-3530 This project consists of mechanical and structural improvements at the headworks structure of the Green River Filtration Facility. Mechanical work consisted of a new utility water system, sparger system, educator system, brush screen equipment, and a vane array. Structural improvements consisted of monorail support beams, catwalk framing, and brush screen support framing. Pump Station 2 and High Tank Booster Station Initial Contract $1,569,562 Alderwood Water& Wastewater District Date of Award: May 2013 Completion Date: August 11,2014 Owner: Alderwood Water& Sewer District 3626-156`s Street SW Lynnwood, WA 98087 Paul Richart: (425)743-4605 Engineer: Kennedy Jenks 32001 32nd Ave, Suite 100 Federal Way, WA 98001 Jeff Foray(253) 835-6400 This project consists of replacing three vertical turbine pumps, electrical upgrades,piping and valve upgrades, new roof and other miscellaneous improvements. Chambers Creek UV Improvements Initial Contract $5,656,376 Pierce County Date of Award: January 2013 Completion Date: January 3,2014 Owner: Pierce County Public Works& Utilities- Sewer Utility 9850 64th Street West University Place, WA 98467 Amanda Summers, PE (253)798-4130 Engineer: Carollo Engineers, Inc. 1218 3rd Ave., Suite 1600 Seattle,WA 98101 Karl W. Hadler, PE, PMP P: 206-684-6532 Constructing a new UV facility within the exiting contact chlorine basin. Work includes concrete demolition,new concrete basins and channel walls, installation of new UV equipment, metal building, instrumentation and controls. Multi-phased project in order to maintain existing UV equipment. Barton Pump Station Initial Contract $12,956,612 King County Final Contract: $13,817,255 Date of Award: May 2012 Completion Date: September 29,2015 Owner: King County Chinook Bldg 3`d Floor 401 Fifth Ave. Seattle, WA 98104 Glen Hiraki (206)263-1783 Engineer: Civil Engineer King County Wastewater Treatment Division Marybeth Gilbrough, PE, PMP 206-263-6156 Upgrading the existing pump station to extend the useful life of the facility,improve reliability, operability and safety. Constructing a new odor control structure to house equipment. Rehabilitating the existing pump station to include new structural and mechanical components. Constructing a new valve room within a sheet pile cell and attached to the existing pump station. Wet well bypassing,demolition,jet grout soil improvement,pumps, ground anchors, and site improvements included. Brightwater Odor Control Facility Initial Contract $1,791,846 King County Final Contract $2,180,576 Date of Award: March 2012 Completion Date: September 15,2013 Owner: King County Chinook Bldg Yd Floor 401 Fifth Ave Seattle, WA 98104 Tina Phipps(206)263-9329 Engineer: Jacobs Associates John Giaudrone (206)588-8131 Constructing two odor control facilities—one at the North Kenmore site and one at the Ballinger Way site. Work includes demolition,temporary odor control facilities,new odor control facilities, storm drainage facilities, site work,masonry buildings,instrumentation and controls. Mint Farm Regional Water Supply Project Initial Contract $ 18,772,221 City of Longview Final Contract $19,957,502 Date of Award: February 2011 Completion Date: May 2013 Owner: City of Longview 1525 Broadway Longview, WA 98632 Amy Blain(360)442-5206 Engineer: Kennedy Jenks 32001 32°d Ave S, Suite 100 Federal Way, WA Chuck McDonald(503)423-4056 Constructing a new 17MGD greensand filtration groundwater treatment facility and transmission main. Work consists of four vertical turbine well pumps, six greensand pressure filters, various chemical systems, metering pumps, and storage tanks. Other equipment includes a submersible filter drain pump station,two air scour blowers,three backwash recycle pumps,two backwash solids pumps,two polymer systems, a surge tank, standby generator, carrier water pumps, solids and dewatering geotextile bags. Structures include four well houses,a filter gallery building to house backwash recycle pumps and face piping of the greensand filters, two backwash storage tanks, and equipment building,operation building and a maintenance building. Sitework consists of mass excavation of preload material for site fill and structure subgrade. Landscaping and hardscape also included. Prospect Construction, Inc. Equipment List Description Compactor 90 Portable Air Comp Mechanical Van '63 Storage Van Pipe Fab Tools Shop Tools '89 Ingersol Rand 185 Air Compressor Trench Box Sumitomo Crawler Crane 1999 Trailer King Lowboy 1997 Nat'l 562C Crane Komatsu PC 120-6 Excav Komatsu Forklift 93 Great Dane 30' reefer trailer 450H Crawler Dozer Komatsu PC50 Excavator Compressor 2003 Gehl RS8 Forklift 2006 Komatsu PC 228 Excavator Plate Compactor 2005 IR Air Compressor Bomag 156DH3 Drum Roller 2000 Peterbilt 378 T/A Truck Tractor 2008 Link-Belt RTC8050 Crane 2007 Komatsu WA70-5 Loader 2005 Gradall 534D Telescopic Forklift 1998 Trailmobile 44 ft. Reefer/Trailer 1996 Grove RT-635C w/Crane 19 Ft. Electric Scissor Lift 2007 Komatsu PC 138USLC-2 Excavator 185 CFM Compressor 1994 Mack Dump Truck 2004 Terex TA27 Articulated Dump Truck 2005 John Deere 650 J LT Crawler Tractor 2000 Dynapac CA152D Vibratory Drum Roller 2006 Dump Trailer Intersoll-Rand Forklift Wells Cargo 8x24 Office Trailer Wells Cargo 8x20 Office Trailer Wacker Compactor 2002 JLG 1932E2 Electric Scissor Lift 1 . Prospect Construction, Inc, Equipment List Description 2006 Gehl RS6 6,000 lb. 4x4x4 Telescopic Forklift 2002 John Deere CrawlerTractor Ingersoll Rand Drum Roller 2005John Deere 310SG Backhoe/Loader 2014 Kubota Mini S/N 7636 Vibrator Plate,Wacker DPU6055 Office Conex 8 x 20 Office Conex 8 x 20 Job Conex 8 x 20 Job Conex 8 x 20 Job Conex 8 x 20 Job Conex 8 x 20 2004 1/11 185 Compressor 2006 I/R 185 Compressor 1996 Water Trailer Plate Compactor DPU 6055 Backhoe 2015 Black Lift Trailer 2008 Komatsu PC3000L-8 Excavator Snorkel Telescoping Boom SN:TB42 2007 Genie Forklift Variable Reach 2007 JLG Scissor Lift 2007 JLG Articulating Boom Scissor Lift 2015 Doosan 185 Portable Air Compressor 2014 Komatsu PC 138USLC-10 Excavator 2008 Genie Forklift Model GTH-842 Scissor Lift 32' Model SJ11116832 Sumitomo Crawler Crane Renovation 2017 Komatsu PC 45 Excavator 2017 Komatsu WA270-8 Loader 2005 Sterling Water Truck 2017 Komatsu PC45MR-5 Excavator 1993 Mack Dump Truck 2015 Komatsu PC210 Excavator 2017 Interstate Loadrunner Cargo Trailer 1999 Link Belt 138H Crane 2014 Bell Articulated Dump Truck BIDDER RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes I This certification is required by state law (RCW 39.04.350(2)) to be submitted to the City before the contract can be awarded. The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date (December 4, 2018), the bidder is not a 'willful" violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Pros' ect consul c'_Iora.. Inc.. Bid ' > Bi •, e ' artnp� ig ure of a horized Official* Ryan Sondgroth Printed Name Vice President Title 12/04/18 Puyallup WA Date City State * If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 17 October 31, 2018 Project Number. __ _f__ 17-7999.4 PROPOSAL SIGNATURE PAGE The undersigned bidder hereby proposes and agrees to start construction work on the Contract, if awarded to him/her, on or before ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed, and agrees to complete the Contract within two hundred (200) working days after issuance of the City's Notice to Proceed. The undersigned bidder hereby agrees to submit all insurance documents, performance bonds and signed contracts within ten (10) calendar days after City awards the Contract. The City anticipates issuance of the Notice to Proceed on the day of the preconstruction meeting. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of bid opening. The required bid security consisting of a bid bond, cashier's check or cash in an amount equal to 5% of the total amount is hereto attached. Notice of acceptance of this bid or request for additional information shall be addressed to the undersigned at the address stated below. Receipt of Addendum No.'s 1 , 2 to the plans and/or specifications is hereby acknowledged. Failure to acknowledge receipt of the addenda may be considered an irregularity in this proposal. By signing this Proposal Signature Page, the undersigned bidder agrees to accept all contract forms and documents included within the bid packet and to be bound by all terms, requirements and representations listed in the bid documents whether set forth by the City or by the Bidder. DATE;:. December 4, 2018 Prospect Construction, Inc., NAME BID " � ign eof * -zed resentative Ryan Sondgroth, Vice President (Print Name and Title) 116 23rd St. SE Address Puyallup, WA 98372 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 18 October 31, 2018 Project Number: ibaB+R j 7_7999.4 BID BOND FORM KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Prospect Construction, Inc as Principal, and Libertv Mutual Insurance Comoanv as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF KENT, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent y$ ,r of Bid Amount Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bond themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Project Number: 1. 16 3012 - 17-79Y9 y According to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal thereof, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the invitation to bid, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damaged, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 4th DAY OF December 2018, ss=zq Prospect(�QjQst In a��yquk"��y�ti✓fir, ��� Liberty Mutual Insurance Company w �f � any `p "r SURETY Aliceon A. Keltner, Attorney-in-Fact V✓� ��� '�tlwlN�� Ana 20 Received return of deposit in the sum of $ 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 19 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein,and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein staled. r^ Liberty Liberty Mutual Insurance Company Mutual. The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Certificate No 8197080 West American Insurance Company SURETY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire,that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts,and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana(herein collectively called the"Companies"),pursuant to and by authority herein set forth,does hereby name,constitute and appoint, heather L .._ ,— Furl Colley I-n Iretu Iacolh I Haddifick Dune M,Hurdinip,Brent l IInilexvlt„hO let Rlrrrlttll ( nllvd L.J uv AticcuoF1 kchacr lWmroo lno K suvo7n hem Ma y p ......_.. _..... —.."",... ..... 4 roe Ito eo ernes rna ulo Brandon f4@P Peter) 0ml . . ---- /unmennm _....._..__"_....._ ......""........ _,.� . "". arguocs Y1nneUll,y M It icYale Bvarslr C 4e�alsoix--_ all of the city of Tacoma state of W A each individually If there be more than one named,Its one and lawful attorney In-factto make, execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver,for and on its behalf as surely and as its act and deed,any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations,in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as If they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affxed thereto this III day of Octobcr 20IS Liberty Mutual Insurance Company eu 9NSYrgq Px'1v YN'S,[x �, 1MSUq� The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Jjaeav°rw,rt1^vm �s U�,w"umm, yd P uonWbNw, do West American Insurance Company >.. 1912 � 1919 1991 rs „},p �/�^ m ddv'°n rnvs<�,4b �4�YHnmvn+r�J f�xm,nernkab +x� x"'^f �� C C '9A) « N1e 3h•�f « h'M 3gy « N� BY David M,Carey,Assistant Secretary a -m State of PENNSYLVANIA >+ Min (a County of MONTGOMERY s., � m c U d1 On this I I th day of October 2018 before me personally appeared David M.Carey,who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of Liberty Mutual Insurance O 0 2 Company,The Ohio Casualty Company,and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such,being authorized so to do,execute the foregoing Instrument for the purposes - > therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer.. a IN WITNESS WHEREOF, have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at King of Prussia,Pennsylvania,on the day and year first above written. a 7a E CD C In / 11 PAq ", !f01 r ,`w ICOMMDNWEALTM OF PEN Now T�`^f" <a O Y Nla"ISei 1Mrt C pJf ff V e P III N I,P bl N Y I� UPC TMe T P M 1M ryC 021 By .."""""""""__,._( MyL m Ep M «292021 "' """ 0 m " eresa Pastefla„Notary Public ©4� M tF n, Membeo Pa eylw�eAcvri zro olN ladesCL CD dc N G} . C fin This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual O.S Insurance Company,and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows'. cu W E on ARTICLE IV-OFFICERS:Section 12 Power of Attorney, 0 N Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized far that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President,and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the '—�- 3 uP 73 President may prescribe,shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety c co M a any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations.Such attorneys-in-fact,subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney,shall s w m have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation.When se executed, such �� Z cz instruments shall be as binding as If signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary,Any power or authority granted to any representative or ahorney In-fact under the ui�cox provisions of this article may be revoked at anytime by the Board,the Chairman,the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority ARTICLE XIII—Execution of Contracts:Section 5„Surety Bonds and undertakings. rp Any officer of the Company authorized for tha:purpose in writing by the chairman or the president,and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,. bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations-Such attorneys in-fact subject to the limitations set forth In their respective powers of attorney,shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company.,When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary.. Certificate of Designation-The President of the Company,acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company,authorizes David M,Carey,Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys-in- fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Ccmpany to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization-By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors,the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company,wherever appearing upon a refined copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds,shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed, I, Renee C. Llewellyn,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company,Liberty Mutual Insurance Company,and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full,true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 4th day of Deccmber 2018 8Y:( ( ( Room C+/yL'4l�eWwel,lyya� Assistant S eraynary............ . LMS-12873 LMIC OCIC WAIC Muni Co 062018 CITY OF KENT COMBINED DECLARATION FORM: NON-COLLUSION, MINIMUM WAGE NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION I, by signing the proposal, hereby declare, under penalty of perjury under the laws of the United States that the following statements are true and correct: 1. That the undersigned person(s), firm, association or corporation has (have) not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the project for which this proposal is submitted. 2. That by signing the signature page of this proposal, I am deemed to have signed and to have agreed to the provisions of this declaration. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned, having duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wage as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station 6 30- q Project :o—vvrc 17-7999.4 NAME OF PROJECT Prospect Construction, Inc. NAME OF R DDER'S FIRM SIGN E OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF BIDDER Ryan Sondgroth, Vice President 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 20 October 31, 2018 Project Number: " 3612 17-7999.4 This change order form is for examj)lle purposes only. By submittinga bid, bidder agrees be bound by theterms f this rhange ordgr form for an change orders. CHANCE ORDER NO. [Enter # 1, 2, 3, etc.] NAME OF CONTRACTOR: [Insert Compan Nam] ("Contractor") I CONTRACT NAME & PROJECT NUMBER:[Insert Name of Original Contract & Proiect #k if applicable] ORIGINAL CONTRACT DATE: f Insert Date Original Contract was Signed1 This Change Order amends the above-referenced contract; all other provisions of the contract that are not inconsistent with this Change Order shall remain in effect. For valuable consideration and by mutual consent of the parties, the project contract is modified as follows: 1. Section I of the Agreement, entitled "Description of Work," is hereby modified to add additional work or revise existing work as follows: In addition to work required under the original Agreement and any prior Amendments, Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to: [Insert detailed description of additional materials, services, etc., that are needed which necessitate this change order - Be as detailed as possible. You may also refer to an attached exhibit, but clearly identify the exhibit by title and date] 2. The contract amount and time for performance provisions of Section II "Time of Completion," and Section III, "Compensation," are hereby modified as follows: Original Contract Sum, $ (including applicable alternates and WSST) Net Change by Previous Change Orders $ (incl. applicable WSST) Current Contract Amount $ (incl. Previous Change Orders) Current Change Order $ Applicable WSST Tax on this Change $ Order _............. .................. ..._................ Revised Contract Sum $ 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 21 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Original Time for Completion (insert date) Revised Time for Completion under prior Change Orders (insert date) i Days Required (f) for this Change working days Order Revised Time for Completion (insert date) In accordance with Sections 1-04.4 and 1-04.5 of the Kent Special Provisions and WSDOT Standard Specifications, and Section VII of the Agreement, the Contractor accepts all requirements of this Change Order by signing below. Also, pursuant to the above-referenced contract, Contractor agrees to waive any protest it may have regarding this Change Order and acknowledges and accepts that this Change Order constitutes final settlement of all claims of any kind or nature arising from or connected with any work either covered or affected by this Change Order, including, without limitation, claims related to contract time, contract acceleration, onsite or home office overhead, or lost profits. This Change Order, unless otherwise provided, does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with the guarantee and warranty provisions of the original contract, particularly those pertaining to substantial completion date. All acts consistent with the authority of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order, prior to the effective date of this Change Order, are hereby ratified and affirmed, and the terms of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order shall be deemed to have applied. The parties whose names appear below swear under penalty of perjury that they are authorized to enter into this contract modification, which is binding on the parties of this contract. 3. The Contractor will adjust the amount of its performance bond (if any) for this project to be consistent with the revised contract sum shown in section 2, above. IN WITNESS, the parties below have executed this Agreement, which will become effective on the last date written below. CONTRACT CITY OF KENT: (srg turej (signature) Print Name: Print Name: Timothv J. LaPorte. P.E. Its Vice President Itµ PNhlir Wnrkc Director (title) _ (title) DATE: December4.2018 DATE: APPROVED AS TO FORM: (applicable if Mayor's signature required) Kent Law Department 640 Pressure Zane Booster Station/Bond 22 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 BIDDER'S CHECKLIST The following checklist is a guideline to help the Contractor make sure all forms are complete. The bidder's attention is especially called to the following forms. Failure to execute these forms as required may result in rejection of any bid. Bidder's Package should include the following: Bid Document Cover Sheet filled out with Bidder's Name ....................9� Orderof Contents................................................................................. 2 Invitationto Bid...................................................................................P` Contractor Compliance Statement........................................................Grp'` Date............................................................................................GAY'" Have/have not participated acknowledgment.............................Vr Signatureand address ................................................................ @p Declaration - City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy ........Ca' Date and signature .....................................................................Ga' AdministrativePolicy ...........................................................................Gk' Proposal...............................................................................................2- First line of proposal - filled in ...................................................2' Unitprices are correct ................................................................ P" Subcontractor List (contracts over $100K) ............................................a- Subcontractors listed properly....................................................Er Signature ....................................................................................13' Subcontractor List (contracts over $1 million).....................................19" Subcontractorslisted properly....................................................©' Dateand signature .....................................................................Er Contractor's Qualification Statement ...................................................Mg Completeand notarized ..............................................................El' Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes.................... '" ProposalSignature Page......................................................................t3" All Addenda acknowledged .........................................................L ,- Date, signature and address .......................................................gk� BidBond Form .......................................................................................2' Signature, sealed and dated .......................................................IL3 Powerof Attorney....................................................................... (Amount of bid bond shall equal 50/o of the total bid amount) Combined Declaration Form .................................................................Iq Signature....................................................................................E! ChangeOrder Form.............................................................................. Bidder's Checklist ..................................................................,..............I The following forms are to be executed after the Contract is awarded: A) CONTRACT This agreement is to be executed by the successful bidder. B) PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND To be executed by the successful bidder and its surety company. The following form is to be executed after the Contract is completed: A) CITY OF KENT EOIJAL EMPLQYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE STATEMENT To be executed by the successful bidder AFTER COMPLETION of this contract. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 23 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND KENT TO CITY OF KENT Bond No. 023209013 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Liberty Mutual Insurance Campanv_..___.___.__ as Principal, and Prospect Construction a Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, as a Surety Corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become Surety upon bonds of Contractors with Municipal Corporations, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CITY OF KENT in the penal sum of $,.2,72;a,4a ao , together with any adjustments, up or down, in the total contract price because of changes in the contract work, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, and the Codes and Ordinances of the CITY OF KENT. Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to a motion, duly made, seconded and passed by the City Council of the City of Kent, King County, Washington, the Mayor of the City of Kent has let or is about to let to the above bounden Principal, a certain contract, the said contract providing for construction of 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Project Number: 16-3012 (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth: NOW, THEREFORE, for non-FHWA projects only, if the Principal shall faithfully perform all the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time herein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under the said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material men, and all persons who shall supply the Principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work and shall indemnify and hold the CITY OF KENT harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure Of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under said contract, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their separate seals. The name and corporate seal (if required by law) of each corporate party is hereto affixed and duly signed by its undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of its governing body. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 24 October 31, 2018 TWO WI"TNE55 Prospect Construction, Inc. PRINCIPAL (enter pnncipors name, uv¢) BY: ... t.. ^ dent .. .. ...... TITLE _.V�ra, Prac'.. ._._.....tea'(-F DATE: 12 /11 a DATE: _^tall31.2-0-L -- x ••� 1 Y, 1 ��1Y CORPORATE .._._..._ y Witness ntl Jay, PRINT NAME DATE: 12/13/2018 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company SURETY CORPORATE SEAL: BY: ( + - 7 — Aliceon A. Keltner DATE: 12/13/2018 TITLE: Attorney-in-Fact ADDRESS: 1001 4th Avenue, Suite 3700 Seattle, WA 98154 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE SEAL I hereby certify that I am the (Assistant) Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the within Bond; that Ryan Sondgroth Who signed the said bond on behalf of the Principal Prosaeconstruction. Inc. of the said Corporation; that I know his signature thereto is genuine, and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. SECRETARY OR ASSISTANT SECRETARY 540 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 25 October 31, 2018 This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein,and they have no authority to r bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. y i betty Liberty Mutual Insurance Company A ��-� ny The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Cedificate No 8197080 .....m.. ..... --- ----------- West American Insurance Company SURETY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire,that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts,and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana(herein collectively called the"Companies'),pursuant to and by authority herein set forth,does hereby name,constitute and appoint, Heather L. Allen,Holli Albers, Ionics H.Hindcr,Hmndon K.Hush,11cicr.L Comfort,Carley Fspiritu,Jacob T.Haddock,Diane M.Harding,Brent L.11ci1esen,Kyle J.I Iowat, m Cy nthia L Jay Alwcon A Kethict,Christopher Kmyon Jamlc L Marr)ucs,Annel Ics M_Riche,Karen C,Swan9on, Eric A.Zimmerman all of the city of Tacoma state of WA each individually if there be more than-one named its true and lawful attorray-in-factto make execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver,for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed,any and all undertakings,bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations,in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this IIhe day of October 2018 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company _ VN5ty 4vW oNgw. lN'S(/ q The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company ,�SaUnvaspr'Yy� y+3¢�gavowyr'i'v,� 0,4 gaworegr �4c, West American Insurance Company > a 1912 0 1919 1991 d qqq a (Agnmvs`"R By ---.-.---- "�_..-_- ...._......—_--- 'a David M.Carey,Assistant Secretary Jco Stale of PENNSYLVANIAno .� no County of MONTGOMERY m OY C1? O Q) On this I I th day of Oetobci 2018 before me personally appeared David M,Carey,who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of Liberty Mutual Insurance O o m Company,The Ohio Casualty Company,and West American Insurance Company,and that he,as such, being authorized so to do,execute the foregoing Instrument for the purposes —7- do > therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. o LLI T at 03 IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at King of Prussia,Pennsylvania,on the day and year first above written. E„ no Cy P O� COMMONWE4LTH OF PENNSYLVANIA N la'aal Se�l � , OO� "O do P Ifl Notary P bl O n TP, M t,r County By:IppA! "Iik) rti CT0Mn E ore Mm 26 2021 (Ep eroa Pastella,Notary Public 0 as par Ianon ar Nou�e: fl0 yo This Power of Attorney Is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Z on ©-c Insurance Company,and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: o at d 'E d ARTICLE IV-OFFICERS:Section 12.Power of Attorney. .� fl Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the m ca 'cz >« President may prescribe,shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to actin behalf of the Corporation to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety >o .M c any and all undertakings,bands, recognizances and other surely obligations.Such attorneys-in-fact,subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney,shall =N have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation, When so executed, such I"ea Z instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary.Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney-in-fact under the -ca M provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board,the Chairman,the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. a 6 ARTICLE XIII-Execution of Contracts:Section 5.Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president,and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, F— shall appoint such attorneys-in-fact,as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations,Such attorneys-in-fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney,shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company.When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation-The President of the Company,acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company,authorizes David M.Carey,Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys-in- fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make,execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds,recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization-By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors,the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company,wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds,shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Renee C. Llewellyn,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company,Liberty Mutual Insurance Company,and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full,true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,is in full farce and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 13th day of December , 2019 w eRSttp 41Y IMSr�q aBy: . ByRenee C.Llew Y ry LMS-12a]3 LMIC OCIC WAIC Multi Co 062019 CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, is entered into between the CITY OF KENT, a Washington municipal corporation ("City"), and Prw nartrnnctr„rtin Inc. organized under the laws of the State of Washinntnn located and doing business at 116 23rd St.SE,Puyallui).WA 98372 ("Contractor") WITNESS: In consideration of the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement and in the project documents, plans, and specifications all of which are a part of this Agreement, the parties agree as follows: 1 . The Contractor shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, and equipment for: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Project Number: 16-3012 in accordance with and as described in the Contract and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under the Contract and every part thereof. The Contract shall include all project specifications, provisions, and plans; the City's general and special conditions; the 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations, if applicable ("Standard Specifications") ; the City's bid documents; and the Contractor's response to the City's bid. The Contractor is responsible to obtain copies of the 2018 WSDOT Standard Specifications including the latest amendments issued by WSDOT as of the date of bid opening. Unless otherwise directed by the City, work shall start within ten (10) days after the City issues its Notice to Proceed and be completed within two hundred (200) working days. The Contractor shall provide and bear all expense of all equipment, work, and labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of materials and for constructing and completing all the work provided for in the Contract, except where the specifications allocate that responsibility to the City. 2. The City hereby promises and agrees with the Contractor to employ, and does employ, the Contractor to provide the materials and to do and cause to be done the above described work and to complete and finish the same according to the Contract and the terms and conditions herein contained and hereby contracts to pay for the same according to the Contract and the schedule of unit or itemized prices provided by Contractor in its response to the City's bid, at the time and in the manner and upon the conditions provided for in the Contract. 3, The Contractor for itself, and for its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, does hereby agree to the full performance of all covenants herein contained upon the part of the Contractor. 4. It is further provided that no liability shall attach to the City by reason of entering into this contract, except as expressly provided herein. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 26 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 5. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents, volunteers and assigns harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits, including all legal costs and attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with the performance of this contract, except for injuries and damages caused by the sole negligence of the City. The City's inspection or acceptance of any of Contractor's work when completed shall not be grounds to avoid any of these covenants of indemnification. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this contract is subject to RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers, the Contractor's liability hereunder shall be only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence. IT IS FURTHER SPECIFICALLY AND EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THE INDEMNIFICATION PROVIDED HEREIN CONSTITUTES THE CONTRACTOR'S WAIVER OF IMMUNITY UNDER INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE, TITLE 51 RCW, SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSES OF THIS INDEMNIFICATION. THE PARTIES FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE MUTUALLY NEGOTIATED THIS WAIVER. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this contract. 6. Contractor agrees, upon the City's written demand, to make all books and records available to the City for inspection, review, photocopying, and audit in the event of a contract related dispute, claim, modification, or other contract related action at reasonable times (not to exceed three (3) business days) and at places designated by the City. 7, The Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the term of construction and throughout the specified term of maintenance, insurance of the types and in the amounts described in Exhibit A attached and incorporated by this reference. 8, Contractor is responsible for locating any underground utilities affected by the work and is deemed to be an excavator for purposes of RCW Ch. 19.122, as amended. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with RCW Ch. 19.122, including utilization of the "one call" locator service before commencing any excavation activities. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 27 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 CITY OF KENT I BY: DANA RALPH, MAYOR DATE, r ATTEST KIMBERLEY A, MOTO, CITY CLE K AP P VED AS TO FORM: KENT LAW DEPARTMENT CONTRACTOR BY:: 4z�` PRINT NAME: Ryan Snndgrnth TITLE: Vice President DATE: 12/13/18 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 28 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 I EXHIBIT A INSURANCE REQU I REINVENTS IFOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A. Minimum Scope of Insurance Contractor shall obtain insurance of the types described below: 1 , Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence form CG 00 01 or its equivalent, with minimum limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1 year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. The Commercial General Liability insurance shall be endorsed to provide the Aggregate per Project Endorsement ISO form CG 25 03 11 85. The City shall be named as an Additional Insured under the Contactor's Commercial General Liability insurance policy with respect to the work performed for the City. All endorsements adding Additional Insureds shall be issued on form CG 20 10 11 85 or a form deemed equivalent, providing the Additional Insureds with all policies and endorsements set forth in this section. 2. Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned, hired and leased vehicles. Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office (ISO) form CA 00 01 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual liability coverage. 3. Workers' Compgnsation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance laws of the State of Washington. B. Voinitmurn Amounts of Insurance Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits: 1 . Commercial General) Liability insurance shall be written with minimum limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1 year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 29 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i EM I B 1 T A (Continued) 2. Automobile Liability insurance with a minimum combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of $1 ,000,000 per accident. C. Other insurance Provisions I The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions for Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability: 1 . The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect the City. Any insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage maintained by the City shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. 2. The Contractor's insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be cancelled by either party, except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City. 3. The City of Kent shall be named as an additional insured on all policies (except Professional Liability) as respects work performed by or on behalf of the contractor and a copy of the endorsement naming the City as additional insured shall be attached to the Certificate of insurance. The City reserves the right to receive a certified copy of all required insurance policies. The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall also contain a clause stating that coverage shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respects to the limits of the insurer's liability. D. Contractor's Insurance for Other Losses The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools, Contractor's employee owned tools, machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the Contractor, or the Contractor's agents, suppliers or contractors as well as to any temporary structures, scaffolding and protective fences. E. Waiver of Subrogation The Contractor and the City waive all rights against each other any of their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extend covered by Builders Risk insurance or other property insurance obtained pursuant to the Insurance Requirements Section of this Contract or other property insurance applicable to the work. The policies shall provide such waivers by endorsement or otherwise. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 30 October 31, 2012 Project Number: 16-3012 EXHIBIT A (Continued) F. Acceptability of insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than A:VII. G. Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the amendatory endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured endorsement, evidencing the Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance of the Contractor before commencement of the work. H. Subcontractors Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the same insurance requirements as stated herein for the Contractor. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 31 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Client#: 76012 PROSCONS1 ACORD,�., CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE D1212012018YY) 12/20/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. ....-...... __ .... ......... .. -_. .,..__,......,. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must he endorsed. lfSUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement.A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsements}, PRODUCER CONT NAME Joy 1 rakakl Propel Insurance QPHONE 8011 0 499-0933 FAX 866 577 1326 141C,No,FIRE _ ... .- L,grG.9,Y1. 6 Seattle Commercial Insurance E-MAIL AODftLSS, joy.arakaki aI,_'/propelinsurance com 601 Union Street, Suite 3400 I -- . OVERAGE NAICM Seattle,WA 98101-1371 ""'- iicny -- — CwsuRBRa:Th...- ncecan,pany 25623 INSURED INSURERB i ea opert 67 y ca:u�Ityco 254 Prospect Construction Inc. -- - - - -- - - - 116 23rd Street SE INSURERC near Am ea�eAe��s�r. =e _ 37532 Puyallup,WA 98372 INSURER T—riersl d mnty canpeny 25658 ._ . __ .. . ...... .. . INSURER E; INSURER F COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR _ ADOLSUBq POLICY EFF POLICY B%P " ITS TYPE OF INSURANCE I PpLIGY NUMBER POLICIYErr 1MMi0DIYYVY) LIMITS A X COMMERCIALCENERALuaewTv rlrX WX DTC0366K5504PHX18 t4101/2018 04/011201S EUCHOCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS X Du uR _laf C 'EN ErD nlnAt300,000.... ... ft3R. ru rEu X PDDed $2,500 MEDEXPUa,.,eRrF'sronj r5,000 ..__ ... ... .. ,.,. PER ONALSHOC rMuRy .. $1,0001000 ....... „ C EN L AGGREGA fE LIMIT APPLIES PER GEIIE RAL AG RE ArE s2,0001000 PROFOLIGY X ACT LOC PRODUCTS-COMIDOPAGG 52,000,DUD ......... .... .- .. --- OTHER. __ $ D AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY -- X X DT810366K55041ND18 4101/201804/01/2019 caatodn�;INOLE LOMn yt rrcm us,vrn _ 0 r000,000 X ArLANF0 BODILY INJURY(Par person? $ ALL OWNED 6Of EDULEC AUfO AUTOS BODILY INJURY(F ecudeOQ L X HIREDSUTOS X f.ON OWNED - PROPE Ail YDANIACk ...... ... - AU r0= ff¢rr Tuuiermtp $ r.. _..__........ .__ ...... __ _ .. .- „ UMBRELLA LIAB B.......� X X S J � 4101/2 01804101f2019E,cH�occuRR OCCURRENCE Lct . $5000,00_0 EXCESS CLAIMS MADE - , AGGREGATE $5„000,000 E10,00 A A COMPENSATION r � [ H AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY (WA Stop 4101/2018 04/01/201 tUU1E FF ( k0R/PARNEFACXEcurnEYLry X AlcVMm _ m..._ .. NIA U C DTC0366K5504PHX18 "ACN ACCIDENT s9000,00!0 N� t iMandator,In NH)If yYIIY dcscdba untlar LL DISEASE EAEMFLOYEE 51r ti00000A- Pollution w,rdw .,,_,.,,. ... 9I2312017 04/0112019, $2,000 000 occurrence EL DISEASE P0JCYLMIT a00,000 C Pollution/Prof PCM139885101 Liability $2,000,000 aggregate $25,0001 deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached if more space is required) RE: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station. Project Number: 17-7999.4 City of Kent is named as additional insured per attached endorsement. CERTIFICATIE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Kent SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 400 West Gowe ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Kent,WA 98032 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION.All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2014/01) 1 Of 1 The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD #S3474668/M3148621 JYA00 This page has been left blank intentionally, i POLICY NUMBER; DTC0366K5504PHX18 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART 1. WHO IS AN INSURED — (Section II) is amended c) The insurance provided to the additional in- to include any person or organization that you sured does not apply to "bodily injury" or agree in a "written contract requiring Insurance" "property damage" caused by "your work" to include as an additional insured on this Cover- and included in the "products-completed op- age Part, but: erations hazard" unless the "written contract a) Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", requiring insurance" specifically requires you "property damage" or "personal injury"; and to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the Insurance provided to b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or the additional insured applies only to such damage is caused by acts or omissions of "bodily injury" or "property damage" that oc- you or your subcontractor in the performance curs before the end of the period of time for of "your work" to which the "written contract which the "written contract requiring insur- requiring insurance" applies. The person or ance" requires you to provide such coverage organization does not qualify as an additional or the end of the policy period, whichever is insured with respect to the independent acts earlier, or omissions of such person or organization. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and by this endorsement is limited as follows. collectible "other insurance", whether primary, a) In the event that the Limits of Insurance of excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is this Coverage Part shown in the Declarations available to the additional insured for a lass we exceed the limits of liability required by the cover under this endorsement, However, if the "written contract requiring insurance", the in- .,written contract requiring insurance" specifically surance provided to the additional insured requires that this insurance apply on a primary shall be limited to the limits of liability re- basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, quired by that "written contract requiring in- this insurance is primary to "other insurance" surance". This endorsement shall not in- available to the additional insured which covers crease the limits of insurance described in that person or organization as a named insured Section III —Limits Of Insurance. for such loss, and we will not share with that b) The insurance provided to the additional in- "other insurance". But the insurance provided to sured does not a to "bodil in a ro the additional insured by this endorsement still is Pp y y I ry p P excess over any valid and collectible .'other of t damage" or "personal njury" arising out in- of surance", whether primary, excess, contingent or of the rendering of, or failure to render, any on any other basis, that is available to the addi- professional architectural, engineering or sur- veying tional insured when that person or organization is services, including: an additional insured under such "other insur- i. The preparing, approving, or failing to ance". prepare or approve, maps, shop draw- q As a condition of coverage provided to the ings, opinions, reports, surveys, field or- ders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or ap- a) The additional insured must give us written prove, drawings and specifications; and notice as soon as practicable of an "occur- ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or rcnce" or an offense which may result in a engineering activities. claim. To the extent (possible, such notice should include, CG D2 46 08 05 © 2005 The St. Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page I of 2 i COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY i. How, when and where the "occurrence" any provider of"other insurance"which would or offense took place, cover the additional insured for a loss we ii. The names and addresses of any injured cover under this endorsement, However, this persons and witnesses; and condition does not affect whether the insur- ance provided to the additional insured by W. The nature and location of any injury or this endorsement is primary to "other insur- damage arising out of the "occurrence"or ante" available to the additional insured offense, which covers that person or organization as a b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against named insured as described in paragraph 3. the additional insured, the additional insured above. must: 5. The following definition is added to SECTION V. I. Immediately record the specifics of the — DEFINITIONS: claim or"suit" and the date received, and "Written contract requiring insurance" means ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a The additional insured must see to it that we person or organization as an additional in- receive written notice of the claim or "suit" ass sured on this Coverage Part, provided that soon as practicable. the "bodily injury' and "property damage" oc- c) The additional insured must immediately curs and the "personal injury" is caused by an send us copies of all legal papers received in offense committed: connection with the claim or "suit", cooperate a. After the signing and execution of the with us in the investigation or settlement of contract or agreement by you, the claim or defense against the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. b. While that part of the contract or d) The additional insured must tender the de- agreement is in effect, and fense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to c. Before the end of the policy period. Page 2 of 2 G 2005 The St. Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. CG 02 46 08 05 I POLICY NUMBER: DTC0366K5504PHX18 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTORS XTEND ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE —This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to this Coverage Part, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only. Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. Aircraft Chartered With Pilot H. Blanket Additional Insured — Lessors Of Leased B. Damage To Premises Rented To You Equipment C. Increased Supplementary Payments I. Blanket Additional Insured — States Or Political D. Incidental Medical Malpractice Subdivisions—Permits J. Knowledge And Notice Of Occurrence Or Offense E. Who Is An Insured — Newly Acquired Or Formed Organizations K. Unintentional Omission F. Who Is An Insured — Broadened Named Insured L. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation —Unnamed Subsidiaries M. Amended Bodily Injury Definition G. Blanket Additional Insured — Owners, Managers N. Contractual Liability— Railroads Or Lessors Of Premises PROVISIONS INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LI- A. AIRCRAFT CHARTERED WITH PILOT ABILITY: The following is added to Exclusion g., Aircraft, Exclusions c. and g. through n. do not apply Auto Or Watercraft, in Paragraph 2. of SECTION to "premises damage'. Exclusion f.(1)(a) I — COVERAGES — COVERAGE A BODILY IN- does not apply to "premises damage" caused JURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: by This exclusion does not apply to an aircraft that a. Fire; Is: b. Explosion; (a) Chartered with a pilot to any insured, c. Lightning, (b) Not owned by any insured, and d. Smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, (c) Not being used to carry any person or prop- or lightning, or erty for a charge. e. Water, B. DAMAGE TO PREMISES RENTED TO YOU unless Exclusion f. of Section I — Coverage A 1. The first paragraph of the exceptions in Ex- — Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability clusion j., Damage To Property, in Para- is replaced by another endorsement to this graph 2. of SECTION I — COVERAGES — Coverage Part that has Exclusion — All Pollu- COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND tion Injury Or Damage or Total Pollution Ex- PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY is deleted. clusion in its title. 2. The following replaces the last paragraph of A separate limit of insurance applies to Paragraph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I — "premises damage' as described in Para- COVERAGES — COVERAGE A. BODILY graph 6. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF IN- SURANCE. CG D3 16 11 11 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company,All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I 3. The following replaces Paragraph 6. of SEC- C. INCREASED SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS TION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE 1. The following replaces Paragraph 1.b. of Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Prem- SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVER- ises Rented To You Limit is the most we will AGES A AND B of SECTION I — COVER- pay under Coverage A for damages because AGE. of "premises damage" to any one premises. b. Up to $2,500 for the cost of bail bonds The Damage To Premises Rented To You damage" required because of accidents or traffic Limit will apply to all "property g law violations arising out of the use of any proximately caused by the same "occur- vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability rence", whether such damage results from: Coverage applies. We do not have to fur- fire, explosion, lightning, smoke resulting from nish these bonds. such fire, explosion, or lightning; or water, or any combination of any of these causes. 2. The following replaces Paragraph 1.d. of SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVER- The Damage To Premises Rented To You AGES A AND B of SECTION I — COVER- Limit will be AGES: a. The amount shown for the Damage To d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the Premises Rented To You Limit on the insured at our request to assist us in the Declarations of this Coverage Part; or investigation or defense of the claim or b. $300,000 if no amount is shown for the 'suit", including actual loss of earnings up Damage To Premises Rented To You to $500 a day because of time off from Limit on the Declarations of this Coverage work. Part. D. INCIDENTAL MEDICAL MALPRACTICE 4. The following replaces Paragraph a. of the 1. The following is added to the definition of"oc- definition of "insured contract" in the DEFINI- currence" in the DEFINITIONS Section: TIONS Section: "Occurrence" also means an act or omission a. A contract for a lease of premises. How- committed in providing or failing to provide ever, that portion of the contract for a "incidental medical services", first aid or lease of premises that indemnifies any "Good Samaritan services"to a person. person or organization for "premises damage" is not an "insured contract' 2. The following is added to Paragraph 2.a.(1) of SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED; 5. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS Section: Paragraph (1)(d) above does not apply to "bodily injury" arising out of providing or fail- "Premises damage" means "property dam- ling to provide: age"to: (i) "Incidental medical services" by any of a. Any premises while rented to you or tem- your "employees" who is a nurse practi- porarily occupied by you with permission boner, registered nurse, licensed tactical of the owner; or g p nurse, nurse assistant, emergency medi- b. The contents of any premises while such cal technician or paramedic; or premises is rented to you, if you rent such premises for a period of seven or fewer (ii) First aid or "Good Samaritan services" by consecutive days. any of your "employees" or "volunteer 6. The following replaces Paragraph 4.b.(1)(b) workers", other than an employed or vol- of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL unteer doctor. Any such "employees" or LIABILITY CONDITIONS: volunteer workers" providing or failing to provide first aid or "Good Samaritan ser- (b) That is insurance for "premises damage", vices" during their work hours for you will Of be deemed to be acting within the scope 7. Paragraph 4.b.(1)(c) of SECTION IV — of their employment by you or performing COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CON- duties related to the conduct of your busi- DITIONS is deleted. ness. Page 2 of 6 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company, All rights reserved, CG D3 16 11 11 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 3. The following is added to Paragraph 5. of 4. Any organization you newly acquire or form, SECTION III —LIMITS OF INSURANCE other than a partnership, joint venture or lim- For the purposes of determining the applica- ited liability company, of which you are the ble Each Occurrence Limit, all related acts or sole owner or in which you maintain the ma- omissions committed in providing or failing to jority ownership interest, will qualify as a provide "incidental medical services', first aid Named Insured if there is no other insurance or"Goad Samaritan services' to any one per- which provides similar coverage to that or- son will be deemed to be one "occurrence" ganization. However: 4. The following exclusion is added to Para- a. Coverage under this provision is afforded graph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I — COV- only: ERAGES — COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY (1) Until the 180th day after you acquire or AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: form the organization or the end of the Sale Of Pharmaceuticals polic y y period, whichever is earlier, if you "Bodily injury" or "property damage' arising do not report such organization in writing out of the willful violation of a penal statute or to us within 180 days after you acquire or ordinance relating to the sale of pharmaceuti- farm it, or cals committed by, or with the knowledge or (2) Until the end of the policy period, when consent of, the insured. that date is later than 180 days after you 5. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS acquire or form such organization, if you Section: report such organization in writing to us "Incidental medical services" means: within 180 days after you acquire or form a. Medical, surgical, dental, laboratory, x-ray it, and we agree in writing that it will con- or nursing service or treatment, advice or tinue to be a Named Insured until the end instruction, or the related furnishing of of the policy period, food or beverages, or b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" b. The furnishing or dispensing of drugs or or "property damage' that occurred before medical, dental, or surgical supplies or you acquired or formed the organization: and appliances. c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal in- "Good Samaritan services" means any emer- jury" or "advertising injury' arising out of an gency medical services for which no compen- offense committed before you acquired or sation is demanded or received, formed the organization. 6. The following is added to Paragraph 4.b., Ex- F. WHO IS AN INSURED — BROADENED NAMED cess Insurance, of SECTION IV — COM- INSURED—UNNAMED SUBSIDIARIES MERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDI- TIONS: The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS The insurance is excess over any valid and ANINSURED: collectible other insurance available to the in- Any of your subsidiaries, other than a partnership, sured, whether primary, excess, contingent or joint venture or limited liability company, that is on any other basis, that is available to any of not shown as a Named Insured in the Declara- your "employees' or "volunteer workers' for tions is a Named Insured if you maintain an own- "bodily injury" that arises out of providing or ership interest of more than 50% in such subsidi- failing to provide "incidental medical ser- ary on the first day of the policy period, vices', first aid or "Good Samaritan services" No such subsidiary is an insured for"bodily injury' to any person to the extent not subject to or "property damage' that occurred,. or "personal Paragraph 2.a.(1) of Section II — Who Is An Insured injury" or "advertising injury" caused by an of- fense committed after the date, if any, during the E. WHO IS AN INSURED — NEWLY ACQUIRED policy period, that you no longer maintain an OR FORMED ORGANIZATIONS ownership interest of more than 50% in such sub- The following replaces Paragraph 4. of SECTION sidiary, II —WHO IS AN INSURED: CG D3 16 11 11 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY G. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — OWNERS, H. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — LESSORS MANAGERS OR LESSORS OF PREMISES OF LEASED EQUIPMENT The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED: AN INSURED Any person or organization that is a premises Any person or organization that is an equipment owner, manager or lessor and that you have lessor and that you have agreed in a written con- agreed in a written contract or agreement to in- tract or agreement to include as an insured on clude as an additional insured on this Coverage this Coverage Part is an insured, but only with re- Part is an insured, but only with respect to liability spect to liability for "bodily injury", "property dam- foju bodily injurtising ropertyinjury"thatmage", "personal age', 'personal injury' or"advertising injury that: a. Is "bodily injury' or "property damage" that a. Is "bodily injury" or 'property damage" that occurs, or is 'personal injury" or "advertising occurs, or is 'personal injury" or "advertising injury" caused by an offense that is commit- injury' caused by an offense that is commit- ted, subsequent to the execution of that con- ted, subsequent to the execution of that con- tract or agreement, and tract or agreement; and It. Arises out of the ownership, maintenance or b. Is caused, in whole or in part, by your acts or use of that part of any premises leased to omissions in the maintenance, operation or you, use of equipment leased to you by such equipment lessor. The insurance provided to such premises owner, The insurance provided to such equipment lessor manager or lessor is subject to the following pro- is subject to the following provisions: visions. a. The limits of insurance a. The limits of insurance provided to such provided to such equipment lessor will be the minimum limits premises owner, manager or lessor will be which you agreed to provide in the written the minimum limits which you agreed to pro- contract or agreement, or the limits shown on vide in the written contract or agreement, or the Declarations, whichever are less. the limits shown on the Declarations, which- ever are less. b. The insurance provided to such equipment lessor does not apply to any "bodily injury" or b. The insurance provided to such premises "property damage" that occurs, or 'personal owner, manager or lessor does not apply to: injury or "advertising injury' caused by an of- (1) Any "bodily injury' or "property damage' fense that is committed, after the equipment that occurs, or "personal injury" or "adver- lease expires. tising injury' caused by an offense that is c. The insurance provided to such equipment committed, after you cease to be a tenant lessor is excess over any valid and collectible n that premises; or other insurance available to such equipment (2) Structural alterations, new construction or lessor, whether primary, excess, contingent demolition operations performed by or on or on any other basis, unless you have behalf of such premises owner, lessor or agreed in the written contract or agreement manager. that this insurance must be primary to, or c. The insurance provided to such premises non-contributory with, such other insurance, owner, manager or lessor is excess over any in which case this insurance will be primary valid and collectible other insurance available to, and non-contributory with, such other in- to such premises owner, manager or lessor, surance. whether primary, excess, contingent or on I. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — STATES any other basis, unless you have agreed in OR POLITICAL SUBDIVISIONS— PERMITS the written contract or agreement that this in- surance must be primary to, or non- The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS contributory with, such other insurance, in AN INSURED, which case this insurance will be primary to, Any state or political subdivision that has issued a and non-contributory with, such other insur- permit in connection with operations performed by ance. you or on your behalf and that you are required Page 4 of 6 02011 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reseived. CG D3 16 11 11 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY by any ordinance, law or building code to include (ii) A manager of any limited liability as an additional insured on this Coverage Part is company, or an insured, but only with respect to liability for (iii) An executive officer or director of "bodily injury", "property damage", "personal in- any other organization; jury" or "advertising injury" arising out of such op- that is your partner, joint venture erations. member or manager; or The insurance provided to such state or political (b) Any "employee" authorized by such subdivision does not apply to. partnership, joint venture, limited li- a. Any "bodily injury," "property damage," "per- ability company or other organization sonal injury" or "advertising injury" arising out to give notice of an "occurrence" or of operations performed for that state or po- offense. litical subdivision, or (3) Notice to us of such "occurrence" or of an b. Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" in- offense will be deemed to be given as eluded in the "products-completed operations soon as practicable if it is given in good hazard". faith as soon as practicable to your work- J. KNOWLEDGE AND NOTICE OF OCCUR- ers' compensation insurer. This applies RENCE OR OFFENSE only if you subsequently give notice to us The following is added to Paragraph 2., Duties In of the "occurrence" or offense as soon as The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or practicable after any of the persons de- Suit, of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GEN- scribed in Paragraphs e. (1) or (2) above ERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS: discovers that the "occurrence" or offense may result in sums to which the insurance e. The following provisions apply to Paragraph provided under this Coverage Part may a. above, but only for the purposes of the in- surance provided under this Coverage Part to you or any insured listed in Paragraph 1. or 2. However, if this Coverage Part includes an en of Section II —Who Is An Insured: dorsement that provides limited coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" or pollution (1) Notice to us of such "occurrence" or of costs arising out of a discharge, release or es- fense must be given as soon as practica- cape of "pollutants" which contains a requirement ble only after the "occurrence" or offense that the discharge, release or escape of "pollut- is known by you (if you are an individual), ants" must be reported to us within a specific any of your partners or members who is number of days after its abrupt commencement, an individual (if you are a partnership or this Paragraph e. does not affect that require- joint venture), any of your managers who ment, is an individual (if you are a limited liability company), any of your "executive offi- K. UNINTENTIONAL OMISSION cers" or directors (if you are an organiza- The following is added to Paragraph 6., Repre- tion other than a partnership,joint venture sentations, of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL or limited liability company) or any "em- GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS: ployee" authorized by you to give notice The unintentional omission of, or unintentional of an "occurrence" or offense. error in, any information provided by you which (2) If you are a partnership, joint venture or we relied upon in issuing this policy will not preju- limited liability company, and none of your dice your rights under this insurance. However, partners, joint venture members or man- this provision does not affect our right to collect agers are individuals, notice to us of such additional premium or to exercise our rights of "occurrence" or offense must be given as cancellation or nonrenewal in accordance with soon as practicable only after the "occur- applicable insurance laws or regulations. rence" or offense is known by L. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION (a) Any individual who is: The following is added to Paragraph 8., Transfer (i) A partner or member of any part- Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, nership orjoint venture, of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LI- ABILITY CONDITIONS: CG D3 16 11 11 0 2011 The Travelers Indemnity company.All rights-reserved. Page 5 of 6 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I If the insured has agreed in a contract or agree- 3. "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, mental ment to waive that insured's right of recovery anguish, mental injury, shock, fright, disability, against any person or organization, we waive our humiliation, sickness or disease sustained by right of recovery against such person or organiza- a person, including death resulting from any tion, but only for payments we make because of: of these at any time. a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" that oc- N. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS curs, or 1. The following replaces Paragraph c. of the b. "Personal injury" or "advertising injury" definition of"insured contract" in the DEFINI- caused by an offense that is committed, TIONS Section: subsequent to the execution of that contract or c. Any easement or license agreement; agreement. 2. Paragraph f.(1) of the definition of "insured M. AMENDED BODILY INJURY DEFINITION contract" in the DEFINITIONS Section is de- The following replaces the definition of "bodily eted. injury" in the DEFINITIONS Section: Page 6 of 6 ©2011 The Travelers Indemnity Company,.All rights reserved. CG D3 16 11 11 POLICY NUMBER: DT810366K55041ND18 COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE —This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to the Coverage Pail, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only, Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsernent and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED USE — INCREASED LIMIT C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION EXPENSES — INCREASED LIMIT D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED J. PERSONAL PROPERTY E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED K. AIRBAGS LIMITS L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR F. HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- LOSS ERAGE—INDEMNITY BASIS M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE — GLASS N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS PROVISIONS A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED this insurance applies and only to the extent that The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is person or organization qualifies as an "insured" An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS under the Who Is An Insured provision contained LIABILITY COVERAGE: in Section It. Any organization you newly acquire or form dur- C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO ing the policy period over which you maintain 1. The following is added to Paragraph A.1., 50% or more ownership interest and that is not Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COV- separately insured for Business Auto Coverage, ERED AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: Coverage under this provision is afforded only un- An "employee" of yours is an "insured" while til the 180th day after you acquire or form the or- operating an "auto" hired or rented under a ganization or the end of the policy period, which- contract or agreement in an "employee's" ever is earlier. name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your bU51- B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ness. The following is added to Paragraph c. in A.1., 2. The following replaces Paragraph b. in B.S., Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED Other Insurance, of SECTION IV — BUSI- AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: NESS AUTO CONDITIONS, Any person or organization who is required under b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage Cover- a written contract or agreement between you and age, the following are deemed to be cov- that person or organization, that is signed and ered "autos" you own: executed by you before the "bodily injury" or (1) Any covered "auto" you lease, hire, "property damage" occurs and that is in effect rent or borrow, and during the policy period, to be named as an addi- (2) Any covered "auto" hired or rented by tional insured is an "insured" for Covered Autos your "employee" under a contract in Liability Coverage, but only for damages to which an "employee's" name, with your CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO permission, while performing duties (a) With respect to any claim made or "suit" related to the conduct of your busi- brought outside the United States of ness. America, the territories and possessions However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, of the United States of America, Puerto rented or borrowed with a driver is not a Rico and Canada: covered "auto" (i) You must arrange to defend the "in- D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED sured" against, and investigate or set- tle any such claim or "suit" and keep The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is us advised of all proceedings and ac- An Insured, of SECTION II —COVERED AUTOS tions. LIABILITY COVERAGE: Any "employee" of yours is an "insured" while us- (ii) Neither you nor any other involved "insured" will make any settlement ing a covered "auto" you don't own, hire or borrow without our consent. in your business or your personal affairs. I SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED (iii) We may, at our discretion, participate LIMITS in defending the "insured" against, or n the settlement of, any claim or 1. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(2), .,suit". of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- ITY COVERAGE: (iv) We will reimburse the "insured" for sums that the "insured" legally must (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (in- pay as damages because of "bodily cluding bonds for related traffic law viola- injury" or "property damage" to which tions) required because of an "accident" this insurance applies, that the "in- we cover. We do not have to furnish sured" pays with our consent, but these bonds, only up to the limit described in Para- 2. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(4), graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS ITY COVERAGE: LIABILITY COVERAGE. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the (v) We will reimburse the "insured" for "insured" at our request, including actual the reasonable expenses incurred loss of earnings up to $500 a day be- with our consent for your investiga- cause of time off from work. tion of such claims and your defense of the "insured" against any such I HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- "suit", but only up to and included ERAGE —INDEMNITY BASIS within the limit described in Para- The following replaces Subparagraph (5) in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of graph B.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- LIABILITY COVERAGE, and not in TIONS: addition to such limit. Our duty to (5) Anywhere in the world, except any country or make such payments ends when we jurisdiction while any trade sanction, em- have used up the applicable limit of bargo, or similar regulation imposed by the insurance in payments for damages, United States of America applies to and pro- settlements or defense expenses. hibits the transaction of business with or (b) This insurance is excess over any valid within such country or jurisdiction, for Cov- and collectible other insurance available ered Autos Liability Coverage for any covered to the "insured" whether primary, excess, "auto" that you lease, hire, rent or borrow contingent or on any other basis, without a driver for a period of 30 days or less I This insurance is not a substitute for re- and that is not an "auto" you lease, hire, rent quired or compulsory insurance In any or borrow from any your "employees country outside the United States, its partners (if you are a partnership), rtnership), members ter- ritories and possessions, Puerto Rico and (if you are a limited liability company) or Canada. members of their households. Page 2 of 4 O 2015 The Travelers Indemnity company.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance services Office, Inc.,with its permission. COMMERCIAL AUTO I You agree to maintain all required or (2) In or on your covered "auto", compulsory insurance in any such coun- This coverage applies only in the event of a total try up to the minimum limits required by theft of your covered "auto". local law Your failure to Comply with compulsory insurance requirements will No deductibles apply to this Personal Property not invalidate the coverage afforded by coverage, this policy, but we will only be liable to the K. AIRBAGS same extent we would have been liable The following is added to Paragraph B.3., Exclu- had you complied with the compulsory in- sions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE surance requirements. COVERAGE. (d) It is understood that we are not an admit- Exclusion 3.a. does not apply to "loss" to one or ted or authorized insurer outside the more airbags in a covered "auto" you own that in- United States of America, its territories flate due to a cause other than a cause of "loss" and possessions, Puerto Rico and Can- set forth in Paragraphs A.1.b. and A.1.c., but ada. We assume no responsibility for the only: furnishing of certificates of insurance, or a. If that "auto" is a covered "auto" for Comore- for compliance in any way with the laws hensive Coverage under this policy; of other countries relating to insurance, b. The airbags are not covered under any war- G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE — GLASS rarity; and The following is added to Paragraph D., Deducti- c. The airbags were not intentionally inflated, ble, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE We will pay up to a maximum of $1,000 for any COVERAGE: one "loss", No deductible for a covered "auto" will apply to L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than LOSS replaced. The following is added to Paragraph A.2.a., of H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF SECTION IV— BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: USE — INCREASED LIMIT Your duty to give us or our authorized representa- The following replaces the last sentence of Para- live prompt notice of the "accident" or "loss" ap- graph AA.b., Loss Of Use Expenses, of SEC- plies only when the "accident" or "loss" is known TION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, to: However, the most we will pay for any expenses (a) You (if you are an individual), for loss of use is $65 per day, to a maximum of (b) A partner (if you are a partnership); $750 for any one "accident". t„ PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION (c) A member (if you are a limited liability com- pany); EXPENSES—INCREASED LIMIT (d) An executive officer, director or insurance The following replaces the first sentence in Para- manager (if you are a corporation or other or- graph A.4.a., Transportation Expenses, of ganization), or SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVER- (e) Any "employee" authorized by you to give no- AGE: tice of the "accident" or"loss", We will pay up to $50 per day to a maximum of M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION $1,500 for temporary transportation expense in- The following replaces Paragraph A.5., Transfer curred by you because of the total theft of a cov- Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, ered "auto" of the private passenger type. of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- J. PERSONAL PROPERTY TIONS: The following is added to Paragraph AA., Cover- 5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against age Extensions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL Others To Us DAMAGE COVERAGE: We waive any right of recovery we may have Personal Property against any person or organization to the ex- tent required of you by a written contract We will pay up to $400 for "loss" to wearing ap- signed and executed prior to any "accident" parel and other personal property which is: or"loss", provided that the "accident" or"foss" (1) Owned by an "insured", and arises out of operations contemplated by CA T3 53 02 15 0 2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance services Office,Inc,with its permission, COMMERCIAL AUTO such contract. The waiver applies only to the The unintentional omission of, or unintentional person or organization designated in such error in, any information given by you shall not contract. prejudice your rights under this insurance. How- N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ever this provision does not affect our right to col- The following is added to Paragraph B.2., Con- lect additional premium or exercise our right of cealment, Misrepresentation, Or Fraud, of cancellation or non-renewal. SECTION IV— BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: Page 4 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance services Office,Inc.with its permission. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................... 1-1 1-01 Definitions and Terms....................................................... 1-1 1-02 Bid Procedures and Conditions.......................................... 1 -2 1 -03 Award and Execution of Contract....................................... 1-5 1 -04 Scope of the Work ... ....................................................— 1 -5 1 -05 Control of Work ................................ .......... ..--.... .......... 1 -8 1 -06 Control of Material .......................................................... 1-12 1 -07 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 1 -15 1 -08 Prosecution and Progress ................................................. 1 -19 1 -09 Measurement and Payment ............................... ......... I..... 1-22 1 -10 Temporary Traffic Control ................................................ 1 -24 DIVISION 2 EARTHWORK.......................................................... 2-1 2-07 Watering ....................................................................... 2-1 DIVISION 5 SURFACE TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS .............. 5-1 5-04 Hot Mix Asphalt ............................... ..................... ..... ..... 5-1 DIVISION 7 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, STORM SEWERS, SANITARY SEWERS, WATER MAINS, AND CONDUITS.............. 7-1 7-08 General Pipe Installation Requirements ..........I................... 7-1 7-09 Water Mains............................................................... .... 7-6 7-12 Valves for Water Mains —,... ........ . 7-10 DIVISION 8 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ......................... 8-1 8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control ....................... . 8-1 8-02 Roadside Restoration....................................................... 8-7 8-30 Project Signs............ ... ..... ............ . .... .... ...... ........ .... 8-12 DIVISION 9 MATERIALS............................................................ 9-1 9-02 Bituminous Materials ........ .............................. 9-1 9-03 Aggregates ............................................. ...................... 9-1 9-13 Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock For Erosion and Scour Protection and Rock Walls ...................... 9-3 9-14 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting ............................... 9-4 9-30 Water Distribution Materials ............................................. 9-7 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE KENT STANDARD PLANS ................................................................. A-1 WSDOT STANDARD PLANS............................,................................. A-2 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT............ ....„......„........... ..„.......,.......... A-3 NEW WATER MAIN CONNECTION PROCEDURES.............................. A-4 SAMPLE PROJECT SIGN .................................................................. A-5 PREVAILING WAGE RATES.............................................................. A-6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................... A-7 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 KEINIT SPEC 1 AL P'ROV 1 S 1 ONS The Kent Special Provisions ("Kent Special Provisions" or "KSP") modify and supersede any conflicting provisions of the 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations ("WSDOT Standard Specifications"). Otherwise all provisions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall apply. All references in the WSDOT Standard Specifications to the State of Washington, its various departments or directors, or to the contracting agency, shall be revised to include the City and/or City Engineer, except for references to State statutes or regulations. Finally, all of these documents are a part of this contract. I-al DEFINITIONS AND TERMS SECTION 1-01. 1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADD/NG THE FOLLOWING: 1-01.1 General When these Kent Special Provisions make reference to a "Section," for example, "in accordance with Section 1 -01 ," the reference is to the WSDOT Standard Specifications as modified by these Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 1-01.2(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-01 .2(2) Items of Work and Units of Measurement EA Each Eq. Adj. Equitable Adjustment FA Force Account FIR Hour M GAL Thousand gallons NIC Not In Contract SF Square Feet SECTION 1-01.3, "CONTRACT'DEFINITION, IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-01.3 Definitions Contract The written agreement between the Contracting Agency and the Contractor. It describes, among other things: 1 . What work will be done, and by when; 2. Who provides labor and materials; and 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 3. How Contractors will be paid. The Contract includes the Contract (agreement) Form, Bidder's completed Proposal Form, Kent Special Provisions, Contract Provisions, Contract Plans, WSDOT Standard Specifications (also including amendments to the Standard Specifications issued by WSDOT as of the later date of bid advertisement or any subsequent addenda), Kent Standard Plans, Addenda, various certifications and affidavits, supplemental agreements, change orders, and subsurface boring logs (if any). Also incorporated in the Contract by reference are: 1 . Standard Plans (M21 -01) for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association, current edition; 2. Manual on Uniform Tratfic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, current edition, and; 3. American Water Works Association Standards, current edition; 4. The current edition of the "National Electrical Code." Responsibility for obtaining these publications rests with the Contractor. SECTION 1-01.3, "DEFINITIONS" IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION: Incidental Work The terms "incidental to the project," "incidental to the involved bid item(s)," etc., as used in the Contract shall mean that the Contractor is required to complete the specified work and the cost of such work shall be included in the unit contract prices of other bid items as specified in Section 1 -04.1 (Intent of the Contract). No additional payment will be made. 1-02 61n PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS SECTION 1-02. 1 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.1 Qualification of Bidders Bidders shall be qualified by ability, experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the work called for in the Contract. The City reserves the right to take any action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the Bidder to perform the work satisfactorily. This action includes the City's review of the qualification information in the bid documents. The City will use this qualification data in its decision to determine whether the lowest responsive bidder is also responsible and able to perform the contract work. If the City determines that the lowest bidder is not the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, the City reserves its unqualified right to reject that bid and award the 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 contract to the next lowest bidder that the City, in its sole judgment, determines is also responsible and able to perform the contract work (the "lowest responsive and responsible bidder"). j SECTION 1-02.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.2 Plans and Specifications Upon awarding the Contract, the City shall supply to the Contractor, for its own use, up to ten (10) copies of the plans and specifications. If the Contractor requests more than ten (10) copies, the City may require the Contractor to purchase the additional sets. SECTION 1-02.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.5 Proposal Forms Prospective bidders may obtain Bid Documents including a "Bid Proposal" for the advertised project from the City upon furnishing a non-refundable payment as specified in the "Invitation to Bid" or by downloading at no charge at KentWA.uovld ine�business/bids-- rrrocua_cniem; however, a prospective bidder remains responsible to obtain Bid Documents, even if unable to download all or any part of the documents, whether or not inability to access is caused by the bidder's or the City's technology. Bid Documents may be requested by mail, or picked up at the Public Works Engineering Department, 400 West Gowe Street, Second Floor, Kent, Washington 98032. SECTION 1-02.6 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to obtain and incorporate all issued addenda into the bid. In the space provided on the Proposal Signature Page, the Bidder shall confirm that all Addenda have been received. All blanks in the proposal forms must be appropriately filled in. SECTION 1-02.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH: Proposals must contain original signature pages. FACSIMILES OR OTHER FORMS OF ELECTRONIC DELIVERY ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE AND ARE CONSIDERED NON-RESPONSIVE SUBMITTALS. SECTION 1-02.7 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.7 Bid Deposit A deposit of at least 5 percent of the total Bid shall accompany each Bid. This deposit may be cash, cashier's check, or a proposal bond (Surety bond). Any proposal bond shall be on the City's bond form and 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 shall be signed by the Bidder and the Surety. A proposal bond shall not be conditioned in any way to modify the minimum 5-percent required. The Surety shall: (1) be registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner, and (2) appear on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner. The failure to furnish a Bid deposit of a minimum of 5 percent with the Bid shall make the Bid nonresponsive and shall cause the Bid to be rejected by the Contracting Agency. SECTION 1-02.9 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal All bids must be sealed and delivered in accordance with the "Invitation to Bid." Bids must be received at the City Clerk's office by the stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail. SECTION 1-02. 10 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.10 Withdrawing, Revising, or Supplementing Proposal After submitting a Bid Proposal to the Contracting Agency, the Bidder may withdraw or revise it if: 1 . The Bidder submits a written request signed by an authorized person, and 2. The Contracting Agency receives the request before the time for opening Bids. The original Bid Proposal may be revised and resubmitted as the official Bids Proposal if the Contracting Agency receives it before the time for opening Bids. SECTION 1-02. 11 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.11 Combination and Multiple Proposals No person, firm or corporation shall be allowed to make, file, or be interested in more than one bid for the same work unless alternate bids are specifically called for; however, a person, firm, or corporation that has submitted a subproposal to a bidder, or that has quoted prices of materials to a bidder is not disqualified from submitting a subproposal or quoting prices to other bidders or from making a prime proposal. SECTION 1-02. 13 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEM 1(a) AND REPLACING ITEM 1(a) WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.13 Irregular Proposals a. The bidder is not prequalified when so required. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 ii SECTION 1-02. 14 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEM 3 AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders 3, The bidder is not qualified for the work or to the full extent of the bid. 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT SECTION 1-03. 1 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IN THAT SECTION: 1-03.1 Consideration of Bids The City also reserves the right to include or omit any or all schedules or alternates of the Proposal and will award the Contract to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder based on the total bid amount, including schedules or alternates selected by the City. SECTION 1-03.2 IS REVISED BYREPLACING "45 CALENDAR DAYS" WITH "60 CALENDAR DAYS"RELATING TO CONTRACT AWARD OR BID REJECTION. 1-03.2 Award of Contract SECTION 1-03.3 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-03.3 Execution of Contract No claim for delay shall be granted to the Contractor due to its failure to submit the required documents to the City in accordance with the schedule provided in these Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 1-03.7 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-03.7 Judicial Review Any decision made by the City regarding the award and execution of the contract or bid rejection shall be conclusive subject to the scope of judicial review permitted under Washington State Law. Such review, if any, shall be timely filed in the King County Superior Court, located in Kent, Washington. 1-04 SCOPE OF THE WORK 1-04.1 Intent of the Contract SECTION 1-04, 1(2) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.1 (2) Bid Items Not Included in the Proposal 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 5 October 31. 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 The Contractor shall include all costs of doing the work within the bid item prices. If the contract plans, contract provisions, addenda, or any other part of the contract require work that has no bid item price in the proposal form, the entire cost of labor and materials required to perform that work shall be incidental and included with the bid item prices in the contract. SECTION 1-04.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE WORDS, "KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS, KENT STANDARD PLANS"FOLLOWING THE WORDS, "CONTRACT PROVISIONS" IN THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH. SECTION 1-04.2 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEMS 1 THROUGH 7 IN THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING S ITEMS: 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions, Specifications, and Addenda 1 . Approved Change Orders 2. The Contract Agreement 3. Kent Special Provisions 4. Contract Plans 5. Amendments to WSDOT Standard Specifications 6. WSDOT Standard Specifications 7. Kent Standard Plans 8. WSDOT Standard Plans SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH (INCLUDING SUBPARAGRAPHS A AND B). 1-04.4 Changes SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING IT WITH THE FOLLOWING: For Item 2, increases or decreases in quantity for any bid item shall be paid at the appropriate bid item contract price, including any bid item increase or decrease by more than 25 percent from the original planned quantity. SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE EIGHTH PARAGRAPH (NEXT TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH) AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: Within 14 calendar days of delivery of the change order the Contractor shall endorse and return the change order, request an extension of time for endorsement or respond in accordance with Section 1 -04.5. The Contracting Agency may unilaterally process the change order if the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements. Changes normally noted on field stakes or variations from estimated quantities, will not require a written change order. These changes shall be made at the unit prices that apply. The Contractor shall respond immediately to changes shown on field stakes without waiting for further notice. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 SECTION 1-04.6 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.6 Variation in Estimated Quantities Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of Work performed and accepted in conformance with the Contract. SECTION 1-04.9 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.9 Use of Private Properties Staging and storage locations needed for the Project must be properly permitted for that use. Limits of construction are indicated or defined on the plans. The Contractor shall confine all construction activities within these limits. If a staging and storage area is shown on the plans, the City will obtain all permits and approvals necessary for the Contractor's use. Whether the City does or does not provide a staging area, if the Contractor selects its own staging and storage area(s), it is the Contractor's sole responsibility to obtain all necessary permits/approvals to use the private property, specifically including, without limitation, all permits or approvals subject to State Environmental Policy Act, Shoreline Management Act, and critical areas regulations. Before using any other property as a staging or storage area (or for any other use), the Contractor shall thoroughly investigate the property for the presence of critical areas, buffers of critical areas, or other regulatory restrictions as defined in Kent City Code, county, state or federal regulations, and the Contractor shall provide the City written documentation that the property is not subject to other regulatory requirements or that the Contractor has obtained all necessary rights of entry, permits and approvals needed to use the property as the Contractor intends. Upon vacating the private property, the Contractor shall provide the City written verification that it has obtained all releases and/or performed all mitigation work as required by the conditions of the permit/approval and/or agreement with the property owner. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or an extension of the time of completion of the Contractor for any work associated with the permitting, mitigation or use of private property. SECTION 1-04.11 ITEM 2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.11 rinal Cleanup 2. Remove from the project all unapproved and/or unneeded material left from grading, surfacing, paving, or temporary erosion control measures. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK SECTION 1-05.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE LAST FOUR PARAGRAPHS. 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviations From Plans and Stakes SECTION 1-05.4 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER PARAGRAPH 7: To the extent a conflict exists between the requirements of WSDOT Section 1-05.4 and Kent Special Provision Section 1-05.5, the requirements of KSP Section 1 -05.5 will prevail. DIVISION 1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-05.5 City Provided Construction Staking 1-05.5(1) General As used in this Section 1-05.5, the words, "stake," "mark," "marker," or "monument" will be deemed to include any kind of survey marking, whether or not set by the City. The City of Kent Land Survey Department will provide two (2) benchmarks to be used for elevations. The City of Kent will be responsible for providing stakes that solely relate to the point tables provided in the approved construction plans. The point table data shall also be provided in a text file to the City of Kent in a PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Zenith (Elevation), Description) format prior to construction. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for detailed dimensions, elevations, and excavation slopes measured from City furnished stakes and marks. The Contractor shall provide a work site clear of equipment, stockpiles and obstructions which has been prepared and maintained to permit construction staking to proceed in a safe and orderly manner. The Contractor shall provide staking requests for a reasonable amount of work to the Engineer at least 3 working days in advance to allow the survey crew adequate time for setting stakes. If the work site is obstructed so that survey work cannot be done, a new request for work shall be submitted by the Contractor so that the survey can be rescheduled once the site is properly prepared. Up to an additional 3 working days may be required depending on work load for the city survey crew to complete the rescheduled work. Note: A surveyor working day is a consecutive eight hour period between 7:00 AM and 6:00 PM, Monday through Friday, except holidays as listed in Section 1 - 08.5. It is illegal under Revised Code of Washington 58.09.130 and Washington State Administrative Code 332-120 to willfully destroy 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 8 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 i survey markers. Stakes, marks, and other reference points set by City forces, and existing City, State or Federal monumentation, shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately if it becomes apparent that a survey marker will be disturbed due to construction. The Contractor will allow ample time for City Survey Department personnel to acquire adequate information so that the monument may be replaced in its original position after construction. If the City is not notified, and a stake, marker or monument is disturbed or destroyed the Contractor will be charged at a rate of $270/hr for a city survey crew to replace the stake, marker or monument that was not to be disturbed or damaged by the Contractor's operations. This charge will be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Any claim by the Contractor for extra compensation by reason of alterations or reconstruction work allegedly due to error in the Surveyor's line and grade will not be allowed unless the original control points set by the Surveyor still exist, or unless the Contractor can provide other satisfactory substantiating evidence to prove the error was caused by incorrect city-furnished survey data. Three consecutive points set on line or grade shall be the minimum points used to determine any variation from a straight line or grade. Any such variation shall, upon discovery, be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report, the Contractor shall be liable for any error in alignment or grade. 1-05.5(4) Control Stakes Stakes that constitute reference points for all construction work will be conspicuously marked with an appropriate color of flagging tape. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform its employees and subcontractors of the importance and necessity to preserve the stakes. The Contractor shall determine appropriate construction stake offset distances to prevent damage to stakes by its construction equipment. Should it become necessary, for any reason, to replace these control stakes, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $270/hour for a city survey crew to replace the stakes. The Contractor may not charge the City for any standby or "down" time as a result of any replacement of control stakes. If the removal of a control stake or monument is required by the construction operations of the Contractor or its subcontractors, and advance notice of at least three (3) full working days is given to the City, the City will reference, remove, and later replace the stakes or monument at no cost to the Contractor. 1-05.8 City's Right to Correct Defective and Unauthorized Work If the Contractor fails to remedy defective or unauthorized work within the time specified by the Engineer, or fails to perform any part of the work required by the contract, the Engineer may provide the Contractor written notice establishing a date after which the City will correct and 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 9 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 remedy that work by any means that the Engineer may deem necessary, including the use of City forces or other contractors. If the Engineer determines that the Contractor's failure to promptly correct any defective or any unauthorized work creates a situation that could be potentially unsafe or might cause serious risk of loss or damage to the public, the Engineer may have the defective and unauthorized work corrected immediately, have the rejected work removed and replaced, or have the work the Contractor refuses to perform completed by using City or other forces. Direct and indirect costs incurred by the City attributable to correcting and remedying defective or unauthorized work, or work the Contractor failed or refused to perform, shall be paid by the Contractor. Payment may be deducted by the Engineer from monies due, or to become due, the Contractor. Direct and indirect costs shall include, without limitation, compensation for additional professional services required, compensation and engineering and inspection services required, and costs for repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of the Contractor's unauthorized work. No increase in contract time or compensation will be allowed because of the delay in the performance of the work attributable to the exercise of the City's rights provided by this section nor shall the exercise of this right diminish the City's right to pursue any other remedy available under law with respect to the Contractor's failure to perform the work as required. SECTION 1-05.9 IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SUBSECTION: 1-05.9 Equipment 1-05.9(1) Operational Testing It is the intent of the City to have at the Physical Completion Date a complete and operable system. Therefore when the work involves the installation of machinery or other mechanical equipment, street lighting, electrical distribution of signal systems, building or other similar work, it may be desirable for the Engineer to have the Contractor operate and test the work for a period of time after final inspection but prior to the Physical Completion Date. Whenever items of work are listed in the contract provisions for operational testing they shall be fully tested under operating conditions for the time period specified to ensure their acceptability prior to the Physical Completion Date. In the event the contract does not specify testing time periods, the default testing time period shall be twenty-one (21) calendar days. During and following the test period, the Contractor shall correct any items of workmanship, materials, or equipment that prove faulty or that 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 i are not in first class operating condition. Equipment, electrical controls, meters, or other devices and equipment to be tested during this period shall be tested under the observation of the Engineer, so that the Engineer may determine their suitability for the purpose for which they were installed. The Physical Completion Date cannot be established until testing and corrections have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The costs for power, gas, labor, material, supplies, and everything else needed to successfully complete operational testing shall be included in the various contract bid item prices unless specifically set forth otherwise in the contract. Operational and test periods, when required by the Engineer, shall not affect a manufacturer's guaranties or warranties furnished under the terms of the Contract. SECTION 1-05. 10 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-05.10 Guarantees In addition to any other warranty or guarantee provided for at law or in the parties' contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Agency any guarantee or warranty furnished as a customary trade practice in connection with the purchase of any equipment, materials, or items incorporated into the project. Upon receipt of written notice of any required corrective work, the Contractor shall pursue vigorously, diligently, and without disrupting city facilities, the work necessary to correct the items listed in the notice. Approximately sixty (60) calendar days prior to the one year anniversary of final acceptance, the Contractor shall be available to tour the project, with the Engineer, in support of the Engineer's effort to establish a list of corrective work then known and discovered. SECTION 1-05. 13 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor, and Equipment of Contractor Within ten (10) days of contract award, the Contractor shall designate the Contractor's project manager and superintendent for the contract work. SECTION 1-05. 13 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE THIRD PARAGRAPH (AS PRINTED IN THE 2018 WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS): If at any time during the contract work, the Contractor elects to replace the contract manager or superintendent, the Contractor shall only do so after obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 THE LAST PARAGRAPH OF 1-05. 13 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: Whenever the City evaluates the Contractor's qualifications or prequalifications pursuant to Section 1-02.1 or RCW 47.28,070, the City may take these or other Contractor performance reports into account. SECTION 1-05. 14 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-05.14 Cooperation With Other Contractors Details of known projects are as follows: N/A SECTION 1-05 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-05.16 Water and Power The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements, and shall bear the costs for power and water necessary for the performance of the work, unless the Contract includes power or water as bid items, or unless otherwise provided for in other bid items. 1-05.17 Oral Agreements No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after execution of the contract, shall affect or modify the terms or obligations contained in any of the documents comprising the contract. Such oral agreement or conversation shall be considered unofficial information and in no way binding upon the City, unless subsequently recorded and/or put in writing and signed by an authorized agent of the City. 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 1-06.2 Acceptance of Materials SECTION 1-06.2(2) IS DELETED /N ITS ENTIRETY. 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance SECTION 1-06 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-06.7 Submittals 1-06.7(1) Submittal Procedures All information submitted by the Contractor shall be clear, sharp, high contrast copies. Contractor shall accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal containing the following information: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 12 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 1 . Contractor's name and the name of Subcontractor or supplier who prepared the submittal. 2. The project name and identifying number. 3. Each new submittal shall be sequentially numbered (1 , 2, 3, etc.). Each resubmittal shall include the original number with a sequential alpha letter added (1 A, 1B, 1C, etc.). 4. Description of the submittal and reference to the Contract requirement or technical specification section and paragraph number being addressed. 5. Bid item(s) where product will be used. 1-06.7(2) Schedule of Submittals The Contractor shall create and submit three (3) copies of a schedule of submittals showing the date by which each submittal required for product review or product information will be made. The schedule can be modified, deducted, or added to by the City. The schedule shall be available at the preconstruction conference (see 1-08.0 of the Kent Special Provisions). The schedule of submittals must be accepted prior to the City making the first progress payment. The schedule shall identify the items that will be included in each submittal by listing the item or group of items and the Specification Section and paragraph number and bid item under which they are specified. The schedule shall indicate whether the submittal is required for product review of proposed equivalents, shop drawings, product data or samples or required for product information only. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 21 days for the Engineer's review of each submittal or resubmittal. All submittals shall be in accordance with the approved schedule of submittals. Submittals shall be made early enough to allow adequate time for manufacturing, delivery, labor issues, additional review due to inadequate or incomplete submittals, and any other reasonably foreseeable delay. 1-06.7(3) Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples The Contractor shall submit the following for the Engineer's review: 1 . Shop Drawings: Submit an electronic copy or three paper copies. Submittals will be marked, stamped and returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute any required copies for its superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Product Data: Submit an electronic copy or three paper copies. Submittals will be marked, stamped and returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute any required copies for its superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers. 3, Samples: Submit three labeled samples or three sets of samples of manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes unless otherwise directed. One approved sample will be returned to the Contractor. Content of submittals: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 13 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 1 . Each submittal shall include all of the items required for a complete assembly or system. 2. Submittals shall contain all of the physical, technical and performance data required to demonstrate conclusively that the items comply with the requirements of the Contract. 3. Each submittal shall verify that the physical characteristics of items submitted, including size, configurations, clearances, mounting points, utility connection points and service access points, are suitable for the space provided and are compatible with other interrelated items. 4. The Contractor shall label each Product Data submittal, Shop Drawing or Sample with the bid item number and, if a lump sum bid item, provide a reference to the applicable KSP paragraph. The Contractor shall highlight or mark every page of every copy of all Product Data submittals to show the specific items being submitted and all options included or choices offered. fhe City encourages a creative approach to complete a timely, economical, and quality project. Submittals that contain deviations from the requirements of the Contract shall be accompanied by a separate letter explaining the deviations. The Contractor's letter shall: 1 . Cite the specific Contract requirement including the Specification Section bid item number and paragraph number for which approval of a deviation is sought. 2. Describe the proposed alternate material, item or construction, explain its advantages, and explain how the proposed alternate meets or exceeds the Contract requirements. 3. State the reduction in Contract Price, if any, which is offered to the City. The Engineer retains the exclusive right, at his or her sole discretion, to accept or reject any proposed deviation with or without cause. The Engineer will stamp and mark each submittal prior to returning it to the Contractor. The stamps will indicate one of the following: 1 . "APPROVED AS SUBMITTED" — Accepted subject to its compatibility with the work not covered in this submission. This response does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown in the partial submission. 2, "APPROVED AS NOTED" — Accepted subject to minor corrections that shall be made by the Contractor and subject to its compatibility with the work not covered in this submission. This response does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown in the partial submission. No resubmission is required. 3. "AMEND AND RESUBMIT" — Rejected because of major inconsistencies, errors or insufficient information that shall be resolved or corrected by the Contractor prior to subsequent re- submittal. An amended resubmission is required. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 14 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Re-submittals that contain changes that were not requested by the Engineer on the previous submittal shall note all changes and be accompanied by a letter explaining the changes. 1-06.7(4) Proposed Equivalents The Engineer retains the exclusive right, at his or her sole discretion, to accept or reject any proposed equivalent with or without cause. 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC 1-07.2 State Taxes SECTION 1-07.2(1) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.2(1) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-171—Use Tax Without waiving the Contractor's obligation to understand and apply these tax rules correctly, the City has indicated those parts of the project that are subject to use tax under Section 1-07.2(1) in the proposal bid items. SECTION 1-07.2(2) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-170—Retail Sales Tax Without waiving the Contractor's obligation to understand and apply these tax rules correctly, the City has indicated those parts of the project that are subject to retail sales tax under Section 1 -07.2(2) in the proposal bid items. SECTION 1-07.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH BEFORE THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses The City has obtained the following permits: City of Kent Building Permit: RNEW-2182578 Washington State Department of Health — Project Approval SECTION 1-07.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH: A copy of each permit and/or license obtained by the Contractor shall be furnished to the City. Approved permits shall be furnished to the City upon completion of the project and prior to final acceptance. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 15 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 The Contractor shall promptly notify the City in writing of any variance in the contract work arising from the issuance of any permit. 1-07.9 Wages SECTION 1-07.9(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE SIXTH PARAGRAPH: 1-07.9(1) General To the extent allowed by law, the wage rates that will be in effect during the entire contract work period are those in effect on the day of bid opening, unless the City does not award the Contract within six months of the bid opening. 1-07.13 Contractor's Responsibility for Work SECTION 1-07. 13(4) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND DELETING THE LAST PARAGRAPH. 1-07.13(4) Repair of Damage SECTION 1-07. 14 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE BEGINNING OF THAT SECTION: 1-07.14 Responsibility for Damage To the extent a conflict exists between the terms of this Section 1 -07.14 and Section 5 of the Contract, the terms of the Contract will control. Any reference to the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, or all officers and employees of the State also will include the City, its officers and employees. 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution Prevention SECTION 1-07. 15(1) IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.15(1) Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan When the proposal form includes multiple bid schedules and the "SPCC Plan" bid item is present in only one bid schedule, the lump sum payment item for the "SPCC Plan" in that one schedule will apply to all bid schedules for all costs associated with creating and updating the accepted SPCC Plan, and all costs associated with the setup of prevention measures and for implementing the current SPCC Plan as required by this Specifications. SECTION 1-07. 17 IS REVISED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING SENTENCE TO THE END OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH: 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 16 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 i If a utility is known to have or suspected of having underground facilities within the area of the proposed excavation and that utility is not a subscriber to the utilities underground location center, the Contractor shall give individual notice to that utility within the same time frame prescribed in RCW 19.122.030 for subscriber utilities. SECTION 1-07.17 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-07.17(3) Utility Markings Once underground utilities are marked by the utility owner or its agent, and/or once new underground facilities have been installed by the Contractor, the Contractor/excavator is responsible to determine the precise location of underground fadilities that may conflict with other underground construction. The Contractor shall maintain the marks or a record of the location of buried facilities for the duration of time needed to avoid future damage until installation of all planned improvements at that location is complete. 1-07.17(4) Payment All costs to comply with subsection 1 -07.17(3) and for the protection and repair of all identified or suspected underground utilities specified in RCW 19.122 are incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor/excavator. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the unit bid prices of the contract. No additional time or monetary compensation shall be made for delays caused by utility re- marking or repair of damaged utilities due to the Contractor's failure to maintain marks or to locate utilities in accordance with this section. 1-07.17(5) Notification of Excavation Within ten business days but not less than two business days prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall provide written notice (or other form of notice acceptable to the Engineer) to all owners of underground facilities, whether public or private, that excavation will occur, and when excavation will occur. 1-07.17(6) Site Inspection Contractor warrants and represents that it has personally, or through its employees, agents and/or subcontractors, examined all property affected by this project and that it is knowledgeable of specific locations for water, gas, telephone, electric power and combined sewerage utilities within those areas. The following list of contacts is provided only as a convenience to the Contractor. It may not be accurate and may not constitute a complete list of all affected utilities. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 17 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 CenturyLink Comeast Alex Harb Bill Walker 206-345-4476 253-288-7538 253-831-0395 (cell) 206-255-6975 (cell) Pu et S and Energy Gas Puget Sound Energy Pgwer Glenn Helton Dennis Booth 253-395-6926 425-417-9188 (cell) 425-559-4647 (cell) Verizon Sprint. Property Services Scott Christenson 800-357-7641 425-636-6046 425-471-1079 (cell) SECTION 1-07. 18 IS REVISED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH BEFORE THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance To the extent a conflict exists between the terms of this Section 1 -07.18 and the insurance requirements in Section 7 of the Contract, the terms of the Contract will control. Any reference to the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, or all officers and employees of the State also will include the City, its officers and employees. SECTION 1-07.24 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.24 Rights of Way Street right of way lines, limits of easements and limits of construction are indicated or defined on the plans. The Contractor's construction activities shall be confined within these limits, unless arrangements for use of private property are made. It is anticipated that the City will have obtained all right of way, easements or right of entry agreements prior to the start of construction. Locations where these rights have not been obtained will be brought to the Contractor's attention prior to start of construction. The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the work in areas where right of way, easements or rights of entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the Contractor that the right of way or easement is available or that the right of entry has been received. SECTION 1-07.26 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.26 Personal Liability of Public Officers Neither the City, the Engineer, nor any other official, officer or employee of the City shall be personally liable for any acts or failure to 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 18 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 act in connection with the contract, it being understood that, in these matters, they are acting solely as agents of the City. 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION 1-08 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 1-08.0 Preconstruction and Preconstruction Conference The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with up to ten (10) copies of the plans and specifications. Additional documents may be purchased from the City at the price specified by the City or in the Invitation to Bid. Prior to undertaking each part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract and check and verify all pertinent figures shown and all applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy that the Contractor discovers. After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the work, a preconstruction conference will be held with the Contractor, the Engineer and any other interested parties that the City determines to invite. The purpose of the preconstruction conference will be: 1 . To review the initial progress schedule. 2. To establish a working understanding among the various parties associated or affected by the work. 3. To establish and review procedures for progress payment, notifications, approvals, submittals, etc. 4. To verify normal working hours for the work. 5. To review safety standards and traffic control. 6. To discuss any other related items that may be pertinent to the work. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, at or prior to the preconstruction conference the following: 1 . A price breakdown of all lump sum items. 2. A preliminary construction schedule. 3. A list of material sources for approval, if applicable. 4. Schedule of submittals. (See 1 -06.6(2)) 5. Temporary Erosion/Sedimentation Control Plan (TESCP) for approval. 6. Traffic Control Plan (TCP) for approval. 7. Request to sublet, for approval by the Engineer, of all subcontractors. SECTION 1-08.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed, Prosecution and Hours of Work 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 19 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 Notice to Proceed will be given after the contract has been executed and the contract bond and evidence of required insurance have been approved by and filed with the City. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not commence the work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall commence construction activities on the Project Site within ten working days of the Notice to Proceed Date. The Work thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously, and without unauthorized interruption until physical completion of the work. Voluntary shutdown or slowing of operations by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to complete the work within the time(s) specified in the Contract. Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the normal straight time working hours for the Contractor shall be any consecutive 8 hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified in the Kent Special Provisions, with a 5-day work week, plus allowing a maximum one-hour lunch break in each working day. The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the contract shall be established at the preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor commencing work. If a Contractor desires to perform work on holidays, Saturdays, Sundays, or before 7:00 a.m. or after 6:00 p.m, on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to work those times. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance (72 hours in advance for weekend work) so that the Inspector's time may be scheduled. Permission to work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. is not required. For any work outside of normal straight time working hours that requires city surveyors, all reasonable efforts shall be made by the Contractor to allow time for surveying to be completed during normal straight time hours. If city surveyors are required to work other than normal straight time hours at the convenience of the Contractor, all such work shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. Permission to work between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m. on weekends or holidays may also be subject to noise control requirements. Approval to continue work during these hours may be revoked at any time the Contractor exceeds the City's noise control regulations or the city receives complaints from the public or adjoining property owners regarding noise from the Contractor's operations. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or delays should this permission be revoked for these reasons. The Engineer may grant permission to work Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or other than the agreed upon normal straight time working hours, but may be subject to other conditions established by the City or Engineer. These conditions may include, but are not limited to the following: hours worked by City employees; impacts to the construction 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Band 1 - 20 October 31, 201B Project Number: 16-3012 i schedule; or accommodations to adjoining properties affected by the contract work. 1-08.4(A) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of City Employees Following is a non-exclusive list of work that may require Contractor reimbursement for overtime of City employees. The City will bill the Contractor at the OVERTIME RATE in order for locate crews to complete other work. If the locate request is for nights, weekend, holidays or at other times when locate crews are not normally working, all locate work and expenses, including travel, minimum call out times, and/or Holiday premiums will be borne by the Contractor. 1 . Locate work required to re-establish marks for City-owned underground facilities that were not maintained or recorded by the Contractor in accordance with RCW 19.122.030. 2. Work required by city survey crew(s) as the result of reestablishing survey stakes or markings that were not maintained or recorded by the Contractor or other work deemed to be for the convenience of the Contractor and not required of the City by the contract. 3. Work required by City personnel or independent testing laboratories to re-test project materials, utility pressure or vacuum tests, camera surveys or water purity tests as the result of initial test failure on the part of the Contractor. 1-08.4(B) General The City allocates its resources to a contract based on the total time allowed in the contract. The City will accept a progress schedule indicating an early physical completion date but cannot guarantee the City resources will be available to meet the accelerated schedule. No additional compensation will be allowed if the Contractor is not able to meet its accelerated schedule due to the unavailability of City resources or for other reasons beyond the City's control. Unless previously approved by the Engineer, the original and all supplemental progress schedules shall not conflict with any time and order-of-work requirements in the contract. If the Engineer deems that the original or any necessary supplemental progress schedule does not provide adequate information, the City may withhold progress payments until a schedule containing needed information has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Engineer's acceptance of any schedule shall not transfer any of the Contractor's responsibilities to the City. The Contractor alone shall remain responsible for adjusting forces, equipment, and work schedules to ensure completion of the work within the times specified in the contract. 640 Pressure Zone Booster station/Bond 1 - 21 October 31, 201B Project Number: 16-3012 SECTION 1-08.5 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.5 Time for Completion Contract time shall begin on the day of the Notice to Proceed. The Contract Provisions may specify another starting date for Contract time, in which case, time will begin on the starting date specified. SECTION 1-08.6 1S REVISED BY DELETING THE FIFTH, SIXTH, AND SEVENTH PARAGRAPHS AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.6 Suspension of Work If the performance of all or any part of the Work is suspended for an unreasonable period of time by an act of the Contracting Agency in the administration of the Contract, or by failure to act within the time specified in the Contract (or if no time is specified, within a reasonable time), the Engineer will make an adjustment for any increase in the cost or time for the performance of the Contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused by the suspension. However, no adjustment will be made for any suspension if (1) the performance would have been suspended by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor, or (2) an equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of the Contract. If the Contactor believes that the performance of the Work is suspended for an unreasonable period of time and such suspension is the responsibility of the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall immediately submit a written notice of protest to the Engineer as provided in Section 1-04.5. No adjustment shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than 10 calendar days before the date the Engineer receives the Contractor's written notice to protest. In any event, no protest will be allowed later than the date of the Contractor's signature on the Final Pay Estimate. The Contractor shall keep full and complete records of the costs and additional time of such suspension, and shall permit the Engineer to have access to those records and any other records as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer to assist in evaluating the protest. The Engineer will determine if an equitable adjustment in cost or time is due as provided in this Section. The equitable adjustment for increase in costs, if due, shall be subject to the limitations provided in Section 1 -09.4, provided that no profit of any kind will be allowed on any increase in cost necessarily caused by the suspension. SECTION 1-08.7 MAINTENANCE DURING SUSPENSION IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FOURTH AND SIXTH PARAGRAPHS. 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-09.9 Payments 640 Pressure zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 22 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i SECTION 1-09.9 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: i 1-09.9(2) City's Right to Withhold Certain Amounts In addition to the amount that the City may otherwise retain under the Contract, the City may withhold a sufficient amount of any payments otherwise due to the Contractor, including nullifying the whole or part of any previous payment, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections that, in the City'sjudgment, may be necessary to cover the following: 1 . The cost of defective work not remedied. 2. Fees incurred for material inspection, and overtime engineering and inspection for which the Contractor is obligated under this Contract. 3. Fees and charges of public authorities or municipalities. 4. Liquidated damages. 5. Engineering and inspection fees beyond Completion Date. 6. Cost of City personnel to re-establish locate marks for City-owned facilities that were not maintained by the Contractor in accordance with RCW 19.122.030 (3). 7. Additional inspection, testing and lab fees for re-doing failed, water, other utility tests. 1-09.11 Disputes and Claims SECTION 1-09. 11(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-09.11 (3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction This contract shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington. The venue of any claims or causes of action arising from this contract shall be exclusively in the Superior Court of King County, located in Kent, Washington. For convenience of the parties to this contract, it is mutually agreed that any claims or causes of action which the Contractor has against the City arising from this contract shall be brought within 180 days from the date of Final Acceptance of the contract by the City. The parties understand and agree that the Contractor's failure to bring suit within the time period provided shall be a complete bar to any such claims or causes of action. It is further mutually agreed by the parties that when any claims or causes of action that a Contractor asserts against the City arising from this contract are filed with the City or initiated in court, the Contractor shall permit the City to have timely access to any records deemed necessary by the City to assist in evaluating the claims or actions. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 1 - 23 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 SECTION 1-09. 13 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-09.13 Final Decision and Appeal All disputes arising under this contract shall proceed pursuant to Section 1 -04.5 and 1-09.11 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and any Kent Special Provisions provided for in the contract for claims and resolution of disputes. The provisions of these sections and the Kent Special Provisions must be complied with as a condition precedent to the Contractor's right to seek an appeal of the City's decision. The City's decision under Section 1 -09.11 will be final and conclusive. Thereafter, the exclusive means of Contractor's right to appeal shall only be by filing suit exclusively under the venue, rules and jurisdiction of the Superior Court of King County, located in Kent, Washington, unless the parties agree in writing to an alternative dispute resolution process. 1-10 TEMPORARYTRAFFIC CONTROL 1-10.2 Traffic Control Management SECTION 1-10.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-10.2(1) General The TCS shall be certified as a work site traffic control supervisor by one of the following: Evergreen Safety Council 401 Pontius Avenue North Seattle, WA 98109 1-800-521 -0778 or206-382-4090 The Northwest Laborers-Employers Training Trust 27055 Ohio Avenue Kingston, WA 98346 360-297-3035 The American Traffic Safety Services Association 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100 Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1022 Training Dept. Toll Free (877) 642-4637 or (540) 368-1701 SECTION 1-10.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-10.5 Payment No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for traffic control items required in connection with the movement of equipment or the hauling of materials outside of the reservoir site property. This cost shall be considered incidental to the various items on the project. 640 Pressure Zane Booster Station/Bond 1 - 24 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 D I V E 17 N 2 - EARTHWORK 2-07 WATERING SECTION 2-07.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2-07.4 Measurement The Contractor shall obtain a hydrant meter and permit from the City Maintenance Shop located at 5821 South 240th Street 253-856-5600 to measure the quantities of water used. Hydrant wrenches are also available at the City Maintenance Shops at the Contractors option. No additional deposit is required for the hydrant wrench. The City will provide all water that comes from the City water system. Prior to issuance of the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) and permit, the Contractor shall make a hydrant meter deposit to the City Customer Service Division located on the first floor of the Centennial Center at 400 West Gowe Street 253-856-5200. The said deposit is refundable provided the Contractor returns the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) to the City Maintenance Shops undamaged. The Contractor shall provide his own gate valve on the hose side of the hydrant meter with which to control water flow. The hydrant meter permit duration is two (2) months. At the end of the permit duration, the Contractor shall deliver the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) to the City Maintenance Shops for reading. If the Contractor requires another hydrant meter and permit at the time a meter is returned to the City Maintenance Shops, he shall request a meter and one shall be provided. An additional meter deposit will not be required. The Contractors initial hydrant meter deposit shall be transferred to the new meter issued. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 2 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 DIVISION 5 - SURFACE TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS NOTES: If the contract also includes underground utility construction, permanent surface treatments and pavements shall not be placed until an as-built survey and testing of the new underground utilities have been completed. Verification that utility construction conforms to the line and grade requirements of Section 7-08.3(2)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall be made by the Engineer prior to authorizing paving to begin. Also, each new utility must pass all appropriate tests specified herein for the type of utility prior to paving. 5-04 HOT MIX ASPHALT SECTION 5-04 IS DELETED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND REPLACED WIH THE FOLLOWING: 5-04.1 Description (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) This Work shall consist of providing and placing one or more layers of plant-mixed hot mix asphalt (HMA) on a prepared foundation or base in accordance with these Specifications and the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans. The manufacture of HMA may include warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in accordance with these Specifications. WMA processes include organic additives, chemical additives, and foaming. HMA shall be composed of asphalt binder and mineral materials as may be required, mixed in the proportions specified to provide a homogeneous, stable, and workable mixture. 5-04.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Asphalt Binder 9-02.1 (4) Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 9-02.1 (6) Anti-Stripping Additive 9-02.4 HMA Additive 9-02.5 Aggregates 9-03.8 Recycled Asphalt Pavement 9-03.8(3)B Mineral Filler 9-03.8(5) Recycled Material 9-03.21 Portland Cement 9-01 Sand 9-03.1 (2). (As noted in 5-04.3(5)C for crack sealing) Joint Sealant 9-04.2 Foam Backer Rod 9-04.2(3)A The Contract documents may establish that the various mineral materials required for the manufacture of HMA will be furnished in whole or in part by the Contracting Agency. If the documents do not establish the furnishing of any of these mineral materials by the 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall be required to furnish such materials in the amounts required for the designated mix. Mineral materials include coarse and fine aggregates, and mineral filler. The Contractor may choose to utilize recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) in the production of HMA. The RAP may be from pavements removed under the Contract, if any, or pavement material from an existing stockpile. The Contractor may use up to 20 percent RAP by total weight of HMA with no additional sampling or testing of the RAP. The RAP shall be sampled and tested at a frequency of one sample for every 1 ,000 tons produced and not less than ten samples per project. The asphalt content and gradation test data shall be reported to the Contracting Agency when submitting the mix design for approval on the QPL. The Contractor shall include the RAP as part of the mix design as defined in these Specifications. The grade of asphalt binder shall be as required by the Contract. Blending of asphalt binder from different sources is not permitted. The Contractor may only use warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in the production of HMA with 20 percent or less RAP by total weight of HMA. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the process that is proposed and how it will be used in the manufacture of HMA. Production of aggregates shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-01 . Preparation of stockpile site, the stockpiling of aggregates, and the removal of aggregates from stockpiles shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-02. ESAL's The minimum number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA in the contract shall be 3 million. 5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) If the contractor wishes to submit a mix design for inclusion in the Qualified Products List (QPL), please follow the WSDOT process outlined in Standard Specification 5-04.2(1). 5-04.2(1)A Vacant 5-04.2(2) Mix Design — Obtaining Project Approval (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) No paving shall begin prior to the approval of the mix design by the Engineer. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for all HMA not designated as Commercial HMA in the contract documents. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA and for other classes of HMA in the fallowing applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, and pavernenL repair. OLher nonslrucLural applications of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation shall be as approved by the Project Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Project Engineer. The Proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical evaluation. Nonstatistical Mix Design. Fifteen days prior to the first day of paving the contractor shall provide one of the following mix design verification certifications for Contracting Agency review; • The WSDOT Mix Design Evaluation Report from the current WSDOT QPL, or one of the mix design verification certifications listed below. • The proposed HMA mix design on WSDOT Form 350-042 with the seal and certification (stamp & signature) of a valid licensed Washington State Professional Engineer. a The Mix Design Report for the proposed HMA mix design developed by a qualified City or County laboratory that is within one year of the approval date.** The mix design shall be performed by a lab accredited by a national authority such as Laboratory Accreditation Bureau, L-A-B for Construction Materials Testing, The Construction Materials Engineering Council (CMEC's) ISO 17025 or AASHTO Accreditation Program (AAP) and shall supply evidence of participation in the AASHTO: resource proficiency sample program. Mix designs for HMA accepted by Nonstatistical evaluation shall; a Have the aggregate structure and asphalt binder content determined in accordance with WSDOT Standard Operating Procedure 732 and meet the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2), except that Hamburg testing for ruts and stripping are at the discretion of the Engineer, and 9-03.8(6). • Have anti-strip requirements, if any, for the proposed mix design determined in accordance with AASHTO T 283 or T 324, or based on historic anti-strip and aggregate source compatibility from previous WSDOT lab testing. At the discretion of the Engineer, agencies may accept verified mix designs older than 12 months from the original verification date with a certification from the Contractor that the materials and sources are the same as those shown on the original mix design. Commercial Evaluation Approval of a mix design for "Commercial Evaluation" will be based on a review of the Contractor's submittal of WSDOT Form 350-042 (For commercial mixes, AASHTO T 324 evaluation is not required) or a Mix Design from the current WSDOT 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 QPL or from one of the processes allowed by this section. Testing of the HMA by the Contracting Agency for mix design approval is not required. i For the Bid Item Commercial HMA, the Contractor shall select a class of HMA and design level of Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL's) appropriate for the required use. 5-04.2(2)B Using Warm Mix Asphalt Processes (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) The Contractor may elect to use additives that reduce the optimum mixing temperature or serve as a compaction aid for producing HMA, Additives include organic additives, chemical additives and foaming processes. The use of Additives is subject to the following: • Do not use additives that reduce the mixing temperature more than allowed in Section 5-04.3(6) in the production of mixtures. • Before using additives, obtain the Engineer's approval using WSDOT Form 350-076 to describe the proposed additive and process. 5-04.3 Construction Requirements 5-04.3(1) Weather Limitations (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) Do not place HMA for wearing course on any Traveled Way beginning October 1st through March 31s` of the following year without written concurrence from the Engineer. Do not place HMA on any wet surface, or when the average surface temperatures are less than those specified below, or when weather conditions otherwise prevent the proper handling or finishing of the HMA. Minimum Surface Temperature for Paving _._ ................ Compacted Thickness Wearing Course P!!45-F r Courses (Feet) Less than 0.10 55,F 0.10 to .20 45-F 35-F T................... . More than 0.20 35-F 35-F 5-04.3(2) Paving Under Traffic (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) When the Roadway being paved is open to traffic, the requirements of this Section shall apply. The Contractor shall keep intersections open to traffic at all times except when paving the intersection or paving across the intersection. During such time, and provided that there has been an advance warning to the public, the intersection may be closed for the minimum time required to place and compact the mixture. In hot weather, the Engineer may require the application of water to the pavement to 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 accelerate the finish rolling of the pavement and to shorten the time required before reopening to traffic. Before closing an intersection, advance warning signs shall be placed and signs shall also be placed marking the detour or alternate route. During paving operations, temporary pavement markings shall be maintained throughout the project. Temporary pavement markings shall be installed on the Roadway prior to opening to traffic. Temporary pavement markings shall be in accordance with Section 8-23. All costs in connection with performing the Work in accordance with these requirements, except the cost of temporary pavement markings, shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items involved in the Contract. 5-04.3(3) Equipment 5-04.3(3)A Mixing Plant (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) Plants used for the preparation of HMA shall conform to the following requirements: 1 . Equipment for Preparation of Asphalt Binder — Tanks for the storage of asphalt binder shall be equipped to heat and hold the material at the required temperatures. The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other approved means so that no flame shall be in contact with the storage tank. The circulating system for the asphalt binder shall be designed to ensure proper and continuous circulation during the operating period. A valve for the purpose of sampling the asphalt binder shall be placed in either the storage tank or in the supply line to the mixer. 2. Thermometric Equipment — An armored thermometer, capable of detecting temperature ranges expected in the HMA mix, shall be fixed in the asphalt binder feed line at a location near the charging valve at the mixer unit. The thermometer location shall be convenient and safe for access by Inspectors. The plant shall also be equipped with an approved dial-scale thermometer, a mercury actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or another approved thermometric instrument placed at the discharge chute of the drier to automatically register or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates. Thisdevice shall be in full view of the plant operator. 3. Heating of Asphalt Binder — The temperature of the asphalt binder shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the asphalt binder manufacturer nor shall it be below the minimum temperature required to maintain the asphalt binder in a homogeneous state. The asphalt binder shall be heated in a manner that will avoid local variations in heating. The heating method shall provide a continuous supply of asphalt binder to the mixer at a uniform average temperature with no individual variations exceeding 25°F. Also, 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 5 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 when a WMA additive is included in the asphalt binder, the temperature of the asphalt binder shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer of the WMA additive. 4. Sampling and Testing of Mineral Materials — The HMA plant shall be equipped with a mechanical sampler for the sampling of the mineral materials. The mechanical sampler shall meet the requirements of Section 1-05.6 for the crushing and screening operation. The Contractor shall provide for the setup and operation of the field testing facilities of the Contracting Agency as provided for in Section 3-01 .2(2). 5. Sampling HMA — The HMA plant shall provide for sampling HMA by one of the following methods: a. A mechanical sampling device attached to the HMA plant. b. Platforms or devices to enable sampling from the hauling vehicle without entering the hauling vehicle. 5-04.3(3)B Hauling Equipment (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) Trucks used for hauling HMA shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds and shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material of sufficient size to protect the mixture from adverse weather. Whenever the weather conditions during the work shift include, or are forecast to include, precipitation or an air temperature less than 45OF or when time from loading to unloading exceeds 30 minutes, the cover shall be securely attached to protect the HMA. The contractor shall provide an environmentally benign means to prevent the HMA mixture from adhering to the hauling equipment. Excess release agent shall be drained prior to filling hauling equipment with HMA. Petroleum derivatives or other coating material that contaminate or alter the characteristics of the HMA shall not be used. For live bed trucks, the conveyer shall be in operation during the process of applying the release agent. 5-04.3(3)C Pavers (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) HMA pavers shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, provided with an internally heated vibratory screed and shall be capable of spreading and finishing courses of HMA plant mix material in lane widths required by the paving section shown in the Plans. The HMA paver shall be in good condition and shall have the most current equipment available from the manufacturer for the prevention of segregation of the HMA mixture installed, in good condition, and in working order. The equipment certification shall list the make, model, and year of the paver and any equipment that has been retrofitted. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 The screed shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, segregating, or gouging the mixture. Acopy of the manufacturer's recommendations shall be provided upon request by the ConLracting Agency. Extensions will be allowed provided they produce the same results, including ride, density, and surface texture as obtained by the primary screed. Extensions without augers and an internally heated vibratory screed shall not be used in the Traveled Way. When specified in the Contract, reference lines for vertical control will be required. Lines shall be placed on both outer edges of the Traveled Way of each Roadway. Horizontal control utilizing the reference line will be permitted. The grade and slope for intermediate lanes shall be controlled automatically from reference lines or by means of a mat referencing device and a slope control device. When the finish of the grade prepared for paving is superior to the established tolerances and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, further improvement to the line, grade, cross-section, and smoothness can best be achieved without the use of the reference line, a mat referencing device may be substituted for the reference line. Substitution of the device will be subject to the continued approval of the Engineer. A joint matcher may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. The reference line may be removed after the completion of the first course of HMA when approved by the Engineer. Whenever the Engineer determines that any of these methods are failing to provide the necessary vertical control, the reference lines will be reinstalled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pins, brackets, tensioning devices, wire, and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation of the automatic control equipment. If the paving machine in use is not providing the required finish, the Engineer may suspend Work as allowed by Section 1 -08.6. Any cleaning or solvent type liquids spilled on the pavement shall be thoroughly removed before paving proceeds. 5-04.3(3)D Material Transfer Device or Material Transfer Vehicle (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) A Material Transfer Device/Vehicle (MTD/V) shall only be used with the Engineer's approval, unless otherwise required by the contract. Where an MTD/V is required by the contract, the Engineer may approve paving without an MTD/V, at the request of the Contractor. The Engineer will determine if an equitable adjustment in cost or time is due. When used, the MTD/V shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to laydown by the paving machine. Mixing of the HMA shall be sufficient to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. If a windrow elevator is used, the length of the windrow may be limited in urban areas or through intersections, at the discretion of 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 the Engineer. I To be approved for use, an MTV: 1 . Shall be self-propelled vehicle, separate from the hauling vehicle or paver. 2. Shall not be connected to the hauling vehicle or paver. 3. May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow. 4. Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into the paving machine. 5. Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. To be approved for use, an MTD: 1 . Shall be positively connected to the paver. 2. May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow. 3. Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into the paving machine. 4. Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. Additionally, a material transfer device or vehicle (MTD/V) is not required to be used on this project 5-04.3(3)E Rollers (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) Rollers shall be of the steel wheel, vibratory, oscilatory, or pneumatic tire type, in good condition and capable of reversing without backlash. Operation of the roller shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When ordered by the Engineer for any roller planned for use on the project, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer's recommendation for the use of that roller for compaction of HMA. The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture in compliance with the requirements of Section 5-04.3(10). The use of equipment that results in crushing of the aggregate will not be permitted. Rollers producing pickup, washboard, uneven compaction of the surface, displacement of the mixture or other undesirable results shall not be used. 5-04.3(4) Preparation of Existing Paved Surfaces (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) When the surface of the existing pavement or old base is irregular, the Contractor shall bring it to a uniform grade and cross-section as shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Preleveling of uneven or broken surfaces over which HMA is to be placed may be accomplished by using an asphalt paver, a motor patrol grader, or by hand raking, as approved by the Engineer. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 8 October 31, 2018 Project Nunber. 16-3012 Compaction of preleveling HMA shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and may require the use of small steel wheel rollers, plate compactors, or pneumatic rollers to avoid bridging across preleveled areas by the compaction equipment. Equipment used for the compaction of preleveling HMA shall be approved by the Engineer. Before construction of HMA on an existing paved surface, the entire surface of the pavement shall be clean. All fatty asphalt patches, grease drippings, and other objectionable matter shall be entirely removed from the existing pavement. All pavements or bituminous surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, soil, pavement grindings, and other foreign matter. All holes and small depressions shall be filled with an appropriate class of HMA. The surface of the patched area shall be leveled and compacted thoroughly. Prior to the application of tack coat, or paving, the condition of the surface shall be approved by the Engineer. A tack coat of asphalt shall be applied to all paved surfaces on which any course of HMA is to be placed or abutted; except that tack coat may be omitted from clean, newly paved surfaces at the discretion of the Engineer. Tack coat shall be uniformly applied to cover the existing pavement with a thin film of residual asphalt free of streaks and bare spots at a rate between 0.02 and 0.10 gallons per square yard of retained asphalt. The rate of application shall be approved by the Engineer. A heavy application of tack coat shall be applied to all joints. For Roadways open to traffic, the application of tack coat shall be limited to surfaces that will be paved during the same working shift. The spreading equipment shall be equipped with a thermometer to indicate the temperature of the tack coat material. Equipment shall not operate on tacked surfaces until the tack has broken and cured. If the Contractor's operation damages the tack coat it shall be repaired prior to placement of the HMA. The tack coat shall be CSS-1 , or CSS-1 h emulsified asphalt. The CSS-1 and CSS-1 h emulsified asphalt may be diluted once with water at a rate not to exceed one part water to one part emulsified asphalt. The tack coat shall have sufficient temperature such that it may be applied uniformly at the specified rate of application and shall not exceed the maximum temperature recommended by the emulsified asphalt manufacturer. 5-04.3(4)A Crack Sealing (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) 5-04.3(4)A1 General When the Proposal includes a pay item for crack sealing, seal all cracks '/4 inch in width and greater. Cleaning: Ensure that cracks are thoroughly clean, dry and free of all loose and foreign material when filling with crack sealant material. Use a hot compressed air lance to dry and warm the pavement surfaces within the crack immediately prior to filling a crack with the sealant 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 9 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i material. Do not overheat pavement. Do not use direct flame dryers. Routing cracks is not required. Sand Slurry: For cracks that are to be filled with sand slurry, thoroughly mix the components and pour the mixture into the cracks until full. Add additional CSS-1 cationic emulsified asphalt to the sand slurry as needed for workability to ensure the mixture will completely fill the cracks. Strike off the sand slurry flush with the existing pavement surface and allow the mixture to cure. Top off cracks that were not completely filled with additional sand slurry. Do not place the HMA overlay until the slurry has fully cured. The sand slurry shall consist of approximately 20 percent CSS-1 emulsified asphalt, approximately 2 percent portland cement, water (if required), and the remainder clean Class 1 or 2 fine aggregate per section 9-03.1 (2). The components shall be thoroughly mixed and then poured into the cracks and joints until full. The following day, any cracks or joints that are not completely filled shall be topped off with additional sand slurry. After the sand slurry is placed, the filler shall be struck off flush with the existing pavement surface and allowed to cure. The HMA overlay shall not be placed until the slurry has fully cured. The requirements of Section 1 -06 will not apply to the portland cement and sand used in the sand slurry. In areas where HMA will be placed, use sand slurry to fill the cracks. In areas where HMA will not be placed, fill the cracks as follows: 1 . Cracks 1/4 inch to 1 inch in width - fill with hot poured sealant. 2. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width — fill with sand slurry. Hot Poured Sealant: For cracks that are to be filled with hot poured sealant, apply the material in accordance with these requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. Furnish a Type 1 Working Drawing of the manufacturer's product information and recommendations to the Engineer prior to the start of work, including the manufacturer's recommended heating time and temperatures, allowable storage time and temperatures after initial heating, allowable reheating criteria, and application temperature range. Confine hot poured sealant material within the crack. Clean any overflow of sealant from the pavement surface. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor's method of sealing the cracks with hot poured sealant results in an excessive amount of material on the pavement surface, stop and correct the operation to eliminate the excess material. 5-04.3(4)A2 Crack Sealing Areas Prior to Paving (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) In areas where HMA will be placed, use sand slurry to fill the cracks. 5-04.3(4)A3 Crack Sealing Areas Not to be Paved (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) In areas where HMA will not be placed, fill the cracks as follows: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 a. Cracks '/4 inch to 1 inch in width - fill with hot poured sealant. b. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width — fill with sand slurry. 5-04.3(4)B Vacant 5-04.3(4)C Pavement Repair (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) The Contractor shall excavate pavement repair areas and shall backfill these with HMA in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and as marked in the field. The Contractor shall conduct the excavation operations in a manner that will protect the pavement that is to remain.. Pavement not designated to be removed that is damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall excavate only within one lane at a time unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not excavate more area than can be completely finished during the same shift, unless approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans or determined by the Engineer, excavate to a depth of 1 .0 feet. The Engineer will make the final determination of the excavation depth required. The minimum width of any pavement repair area shall be 40 inches unless shown otherwise in the Plans. Before any excavation, the existing pavement shall be sawcut or shall be removed by a pavement grinder. Excavated materials will become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a Contractor-provided site off the Right of Way or used in accordance with Sections 2-02.3(3) or 9-03.21 . Asphalt for tack coat shall be required as specified in Section 5-04.3(4). A heavy application of tack coat shall be applied to all surfaces of existing pavement in the pavement repair area. Placement of the HMA backfill shall be accomplished in lifts not to exceed 0.35-foot compacted depth. Lifts that exceed 0.35-foot of compacted depth may be accomplished with the approval of the Engineer. Each lift shall be thoroughly compacted by a mechanical tamper or a roller. 5-04.3(5) Producing/Stockpiling Aggregates and RAP (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) Aggregates and RAP shall be stockpiled according to the requirements of Section 3-02. Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of aggregate and RAP. Materials shall be removed from stockpile(s) in a manner to ensure minimal segregation when being moved to the HMA plant for processing into the final mixture. Different aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to the HMA plant. 5-04.3(5)A Vacant 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 5-04.3(6) Mixing (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) After the required amount of mineral materials, asphalt binder, recycling agent and anti-stripping additives have been introduced into the mixer the HMA shall be mixed until complete and uniform coating of the particles and thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral materials is ensured. When discharged, the temperature of the HMA shall not exceed the optimum mixing temperature by more than 25°F as shown on the reference mix design report or as approved by the Engineer. Also, when a WMA additive is included in the manufacture of HMA, the discharge temperature of the HMA shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer of the WMA additive. A maximum water content of 2 percent in the mix, at discharge, will be allowed providing the water causes no problems with handling, stripping, or flushing. If the water in the HMA causes any of these problems, the moisture content shall be reduced as directed by the Engineer. Storing or holding of the HMA in approved storage facilities will be permitted with approval of the Engineer, but in no event shall the HMA be held for more than 24 hours. HMA held for more than 24 hours after mixing shall be rejected. Rejected HMA shall be disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The storage facility shall have an accessible device located at the top of the cone or about the third point. The device shall indicate the amount of material in storage. No HMA shall be accepted from the storage facility when the HMA in storage is below the top of the cone of the storage facility, except as the storage facility is being emptied at the end of the working shift. Recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) utilized in the production of HMA shall be sized prior to entering the mixer so that a uniform and thoroughly mixed HMA is produced. If there is evidence of the recycled asphalt pavement not breaking down during the heating and mixing of the HMA, the Contractor shall immediately suspend the use of the RAP until changes have been approved by the Engineer. After the required amount of mineral materials, RAP, new asphalt binder and asphalt rejuvenator have been introduced into the mixer the HMA shall be mixed until complete and uniform coating of the particles and thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral materials, and RAP is ensured. 5-04.3(7) Spreading and Finishing The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface, spread, and struck off to the grade and elevation established. HMA pavers complying with Section 5-04.3(3) shall be used to distribute the mixture. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the nominal compacted depth of any layer of any course shall not exceed the following: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 12 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 HMA Class 1 " 0.35 feet HMA Class 3/4" and HMA Class 1/2" wearing course/final lift 0.17 feet other courses 0.25 feet HMA Class 3/8" 0.17 feet On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the paving may be done with other equipment or by hand. When more than one JMF is being utilized to produce HMA, the material produced for each JMF shall be placed by separate spreading and compacting equipment. The intermingling of HMA produced from more than one JMF is prohibited. Each strip of HMA placed during a work shift shall conform to a single JMF established for the class of HMA specified unless there is a need to make an adjustment in the JMF. Reference Section 8-20.3(14)C of the Kent Special Provisions for the placement of traffic signal detection loops. 5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) For HMA accepted by nonstatistical evaluation the aggregate properties of sand equivalent, uncompacted void content and fracture will be evaluated in accordance with Section 3-04. Sampling and testing of aggregates for HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. 5-04.3(9) HMA Mixture Acceptance (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical, or commercial evaluation. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of HMA unless Commercial Evaluation is specified. Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA and for other classes of HMA in the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, temporary pavement, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation shall be as approved by the Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. The mix design will be the initial JMF for the class of HMA. The Contractor may request a change in the JMF. Any adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of the Engineer and may be made in accordance with this section. HMA Tolerances and Adjustments 640 Pressure zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 13 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 1 . Job Mix Formula Tolerances — The constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances: ....._-. mercia Aggregate Percent Non-Statistical Coml Passing Evaluation Evaluation 1 ", 3/4", '/2", and 3/8" +/- 6% +/- 8% sieves ---- ............... -......... ................. No. 4 sieve +/-6% +/- 8% No. 8 Sieve +/- ........................ No. 200 sieve +/- 2.0% +/- 3.0% ............._..._..............................__ - ........ _,Asphalt Binder +/- 0.5% +/- 0.7% Air Voids, Va 2.5% min. N/A and 5.5% max These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control points, except the tolerance limits for sieves designated as 100 percent passing will be 99-100. 2. Job Mix Formula Adjustments — An adjustment to the aggregate gradation or asphalt binder content of the JMF requires approval of the Engineer. Adjustments to the JMF will only be considered if the change produces material of equal or better quality and may require the development of a new mix design if the adjustment exceeds the amounts listed below. a. Aggregates —2 percent for the aggregate passing the 1 Y2", 1 3/4", '/2", 3/8", and the No. 4 sieves, 1 percent for aggregate passing the No. 8 sieve, and 0.5 percent for the aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve. The adjusted JMF shall be within the range of the control points in Section 9-03.8(6). b. Asphalt Binder Content — The Engineer may order or approve changes to asphalt binder content. The maximum adjustment from the approved mix design for the asphalt binder content shall be 0.3 percent 5-04.3(9)A Vacant 5-04.3(9)B Vacant 5-04.3(9)C Mixture Acceptance — Nonstatistical Evaluation HMA mixture which is accepted by Nonstatistical Evaluation will be evaluated by the Contracting Agency by dividing the HMA tonnage into lots. 5-04.3(9)C1 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation — Lots and Sublots A lot is represented by randomly selected samples of the same mix design that will be tested for acceptance. A lot is defined as the total quantity of material or work produced for each Job Mix Formula placed. Only one lot per JMF is expected. A sublot shall be equal to one day's 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 14 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 production or 800 tons, whichever is less except that the final sublot will be a minimum of 400 tons and may be increased to 1200 tons. All of the test results obtained from the acceptance samples from a given lot shall be evaluated collectively. If the Contractor requests a change to the JMF that is approved, the material produced after the change will be evaluated on the basis of the new JMF for the remaining sublots in the current lot and for acceptance of subsequent lots. For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor's request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. Sampling and testing for evaluation shall be performed on the frequency of one sample per sublot. 5-04.3(9)C2 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation Sampling Samples for acceptance testing shall be obtained by the Contractor when ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall sample the HMA mixture in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with AASHTO T 168. A minimum of three samples should be taken for each class of HMA placed on a project. If used in a structural application, at least one of the three samples shall to be tested. Sampling and testing HMA in a Structural application where quantities are less than 400 tons is at the discretion of the Engineer. For HMA used in a structural application and with a total project quantity,less than 800 tons but more than 400 tons, a minimum of one acceptance test shall be performed. In all cases, a minimum of 3 samples will be obtained at the point of acceptance, a minimum of one of the three samples will be tested for conformance to the JMF: If the test results are found to be within specification requirements, additional testing will be at the Engineer's discretion. If test results are found not to be within specification requirements, additional testing of the remaining samples to determine a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) shall be performed. 5-04.3(9)C3 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation — Acceptance Testing Testing of HMA for compliance of Va will at the option of the Contracting Agency. If tested, compliance of Va will use WSDOT SOP 731 . Testing for compliance of asphalt binder content will be by WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 308. Testing for compliance of gradation will be by FOP for WAQTC T 27/T 11 . 5-04.3(9)C4 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation — Pay Factors For each lot of material falling outside the tolerance limits in 5-04.3(9), 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 15 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 i the Contracting Agency will determine a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) using the following price adjustment factors: .......... .._..._._.. Table of Price Adjustment Factors .... Constituent Factor "f^ ..._.........................._. ._................ _ All aggregate passing: 11/2", 1 ", 3/4", 1/2", 3/a" and No.4 2 sieves _.. ........... All aggregate passing No. 8 sieve 15 All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 20 Asphalt binder 40 .................... ................ Air Voids (Va) (where applicable) 20 Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the nonstatistical tolerance limits in the Job Mix Formula shown in Table of Price Adjustment Factors, the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1 -06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The nonstatistical tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1 .00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the Roadway shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. 5-04.3(9)C5 Vacant 5-04.3(9)C6 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation — Price Adjustments For each lot of HMA mix produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1 .00, a Nonconforming Mix Factor (NCMF) will be determined. The NCMF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1 .00 multiplied by 60 percent. The total job mix compliance price adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1 .00 in calculating the Composite Pay Factor (CPF). 5-04.3(9)C7 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation - Retests The Contractor may request a sublot be retested. To request a retest, the Contractor shall submit a written request within 7 calendar days after the specific test results have been received. A split of the original acceptance sample will be retested. The split of the sample will not be tested with the same tester that ran the original acceptance test. The sample will be tested for a complete gradation analysis, asphalt binder content, and, at the option of the agency, Va. The results of the retest will be used for the acceptance of the HMA in place of the original 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 16 October 31, 2018 Project Number 1B-3012 sublot sample test results. The cost of testing will be deducted from any monies due or that may come due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of $500 per sample. 5-04.3 (9)D Mixture Acceptance — Commercial Evaluation If sampled and tested, HMA produced under Commercial Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the commercial tolerance limits in the Job Mix Formula shown in 5-04.3(9), the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1 -06.7 to determine the appropriate CPF. The commercial tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1 .00. When loss than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. For each lot of HMA mix produced and tested under Commercial Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1 .00, a Nonconforming Mix Factor (NCMF) will be determined. The NCMF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1 .00 multiplied by 60 percent. The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1 .00 in calculating the Composite Pay Factor (CPF). 5-04.3(10) HMA Compaction Acceptance (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) HMA mixture accepted by nonstatistical evaluation that is used in traffic lanes, including lanes for intersections, ramps, truck climbing, weaving, and speed change, and having a specified compacted course thickness greater than 0.10-foot, shall be compacted to a specified level of relative density. The specified level of relative density shall be a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of not less than 0.75 when evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06,2, using a minimum of 92 percent of the maximum density. The maximum density shall be determined by WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 729. The specified level of density attained will be determined by the evaluation of the density of the pavement. The density of the pavement shall be determined in accordance with WSDOT FOP for WACTC TM 8, except that gauge correlation will be at the discretion of the Engineer, when using the nuclear density gauge and WSDOT SOP 736 when using cores to determine density. Tests for the determination of the pavement density will be taken in accordance with the required procedures for measurement by a nuclear density gauge or roadway cores after completion of the finish rolling. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 17 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 If the Contracting Agency uses a nuclear density gauge to determine density the test procedures FOP for WAQTC TM 8 and WSDOT SOP T 729 will be used on the day the mix is placed and prior to opening to traffic. Roadway cores for density may be obtained by either the Contracting Agency or the Contractor in accordance with WSDOT SOP 734. The core diameter shall be 4-inches minimum, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Roadway cores will be tested by the Contracting Agency in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 166. If the Contract includes the Bid item "Roadway Core" the cores shall be obtained by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer on the same day the mix is placed and at locations designated by the Engineer. If the Contract does not include the Bid item "Roadway Core" the Contracting Agency will obtain the cores. For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor's request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. A lot is represented by randomly selected samples of the same mix design that will be tested for acceptance. A lot is defined as the total quantity of material or work produced for each Job Mix Formula placed. Only one lot per JMF is expected. A sublet shall be equal to one day's production or 400 tons, whichever is less except that the final sublot will be a minimum of 200 tons and may be increased to 800 tons. Testing for compaction will be at the rate of 5 tests per sublot per WSDOT T 738. HMA mixture accepted by commercial evaluation and HMA constructed under conditions other than those listed above shall be compacted on the basis of a test point evaluation of the compaction train. The test point evaluation shall be performed in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train, required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving. HMA for preleveling shall be thoroughly compacted. HMA that is used for preleveling wheel rutting shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Test Results For a sublot that has been tested with a nuclear density gauge that did not meet the minimum of 92 percent of the reference maximum density in a compaction lot with a CPF below 1 .00 and thus subject to a price reduction or rejection, the Contractor may request that a core be used for determination of the relative density of the sublot. The relative density of the core will replace the relative density determined by the nuclear density gauge for the sublot and will be used for calculation of the CPF and acceptance of HMA compaction lot. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 1 B October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 When cores are taken by the Contracting Agency at the request of the Contractor, they shall be requested by noon of the next workday after the test results for the sublot have been provided or made available to the Contractor. Core locations shall be outside of wheel paths and as determined by the Engineer. Traffic control shall be provided by the Contractor as requested by the Engineer. Failure by the Contractor to provide the requested traffic control will result in forfeiture of the request for cores. When the CPF for the lot based on the results of the HMA cores is less than 1 .00, the cost for the coring will be deducted from any monies due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of $200 per core and the Contractor shall pay for the cost of the traffic control. 5-04.3(10)A HMA Compaction — General Compaction Requirements Compaction shall take place when the mixture is in the proper condition so that no undue displacement, cracking, or shoving occurs. Areas inaccessible to large compaction equipment shall be compacted by other mechanical means. Any HMA that becomes loose, broken, contaminated, shows an excess or deficiency of asphalt, or is in any way defective, shall be removed and replaced with new hot mix that shall be immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. The type of rollers to be used and their relative position in the compaction sequence shall generally be the Contractor's option, provided the specified densities are attained. Unless the Engineer has approved otherwise, rollers shall only be operated in the static mode when the internal temperature of the mix is less than 175°F. Regardless of mix temperature, a roller shall not be operated in a mode that results in checking or cracking of the mat. Rollers shall only be operated in static mode on bridge decks. 5-04.3(10)B HMA Compaction — Cyclic Density Low cyclic density areas are defined as spots or streaks in the pavement that are less than 90 percent of the theoretical maximum density. At the Engineer's discretion, the Engineer may evaluate the HMA pavement for low cyclic density, and when doing so will follow WSDOT SOP 733. A $500 Cyclic Density Price Adjustment will be assessed for any 500-foot section with two or more density readings below 90 percent of the theoretical maximum density. 5-04.3(10)C Vacant 5-04.3(10)D HMA Nonstatistical Compaction 5-04.3(10)D1 HMA Nonstatistical Compaction — Lots and Sublots HMA compaction which is accepted by nonstatistical evaluation will be based on acceptance testing performed by the Contracting Agency dividing the project into compaction lots. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 19 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 A lot is represented by randomly selected samples of the same mix design that will be tested for acceptance, with a maximum of 15 sublots per lot; the final lot for a mix design may be increased to 25 sublots. Sublots will be uniform in size with a maximum sublot size based on original Plan quantity tons of HMA as specified in the table below. The sublot locations within each density lot will be determined by the Engineer. For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor's request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. HMA Original Plan Quantity Sublot Size (tons) (tons) _....._........... <20,000 100 20,000 to 30,000 150 ............. .................._.___ >30,000 200 HMA mixture accepted by commercial evaluation and HMA constructed under conditions other than those listed above shall be compacted on the basis of a test point evaluation of the compaction train. The test point evaluation shall be performed in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train, required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving. HMA for preleveling shall be thoroughly compacted. HMA that is used to prelevel wheel ruts shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 5-04.3(10)D2 HMA Compaction Nonstatistical Evaluation — Acceptance Testing The location of the HMA compaction acceptance tests will be randomly selected by the Engineer from within each sublot, with one test per sublot. 5-04.3(10)D3 HMA Nonstatistical Compaction — Price Adjustments For each compaction lot with one or two sublots, having all sublots attain a relative density that is 92 percent of the reference maximum density the HMA shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When a sublot does not attain a relative density that is 92 percent of the reference maximum density, the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The maximum CPF shall be 1 .00, however, lots with a calculated CPF in excess of 1 .00 will be used to offset lots with CPF values below 1 .00 but greater than 0,90. Lots with CPF lower than 0.90 will be evaluated for compliance per 5-04.3(11). Additional testing by either a nuclear moisture-density gauge or cores will be completed as required to provide a minimum of three tests for evaluation. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 20 October 31, 2018 Project Numbers 16-3012 For compaction below the required 92% a Non-Conforming Compaction Factor (NCCF) will be determined. The NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1 .00 multiplied by 40 percent. The Compaction Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of CPF, the quantity of HMA in the compaction control lot intons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. 5-04.3(11) Reject Work (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) 5-04.3(11)A Reject Work General Work that is defective or does not conform to Contract requirements shall be rejected. The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives to removal and replacement of rejected material. Acceptability of such alternative proposals will be determined at the sole discretion of the Engineer. HMA that has been rejected is subject to the requirements in Section 1 -06.2(2) and this specification, and the Contractor shall submit a corrective action proposal to the Engineer for approval. 5-04.3(11)B Rejection by Contractor The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove any defective material and replace it with new material. Any such new material will be sampled, tested, and evaluated for acceptance. 5-04.3(11)C Rejection Without Testing (Mixture or Compaction) The Engineer may, without sampling, reject any batch, load, or section of Roadway that appears defective. Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into the pavement. Any rejected section of Roadway shall be removed. No payment will be made for the rejected materials or the removal of the materials unless the Contractor requests that the rejected material be tested. If the Contractor elects to have the rejected material tested, a minimum of three representative samples will be obtained and tested. Acceptance of rejected material will be based on conformance with the nonstatistical acceptance Specification. If the CPF for the rejected material is less than 0.75, no payment will be made for the rejected material; in addition, the cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor. If the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, the cost of sampling and testing will be borne by the Contracting Agency. If the material is rejected before placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at a CPF of 0.75. If rejection occurs after placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at the calculated CPF with an addition of 25 percent of the unit Contract price added for the cost of removal and disposal. 5-04.3(11)D Rejection - A Partial Sublot In addition to the random acceptance sampling and testing, the 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 21 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i Engineer may also isolate from a normal sublot any material that is suspected of being defective in relative density, gradation or asphalt binder content. Such isolated material will not include an original sample location. A minimum of three random samples of the suspect material will be obtained and tested. The material will then be statistically evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1 -06,2(2). 5-04.3(11)E Rejection - An Entire Sublot An entire sublet that is suspected of being defective may be rejected. When a sublot is rejected a minimum of two additional random samples from this sublet will be obtained. These additional samples and the original sublot will be evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1 -06.2(2). 5-04.3(11)F Rejection - A Lot in Progress The Contractor shall shut down operations and shall not resume HMA placement until such time as the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced: 1 . When the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of a lot in progress drops below 1 .00 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or 2. When the Pay Factor (PF) for any constituent of a lot in progress drops below 0.95 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or 3. When either the PF; for any constituent or the CPF of a lot in progress is less than 0.75. 5-04.3(11)G Rejection - An Entire Lot (Mixture or Compaction) An entire lot with a CPF of less than 0.75 will be rejected. 5-04.3(12) Joints (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) 5-04.3(12)A HMA Joints 5-04.3(12)A1 Transverse Joints The Contractor shall conduct operations such that the placing of the top or wearing course is a continuous operation or as close to continuous as possible. Unscheduled transversejoints will be allowed and the roller may pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture only when the placement of the course must be discontinued for such a length of time that the mixture will cool below compaction temperature. When the Work is resumed, the previously compacted mixture shall be cut back to produce a slightly beveled edge for the full thickness of the course. A temporary wedge of HMA constructed on a 201-1: 1V shall be constructed where a transversejoint as a result of paving or planing is open to traffic. The HMA in the temporary wedge shall be separated 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 22 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 from the permanent HMA by strips of heavy wrapping paper or other methods approved by the Engineer. The wrapping paper shall be removed and the joint trimmed to a slightly beveled edge for the full thickness of the course prior to resumption of paving. The material that is cut away shall be wasted and new mix shall be laid against the cut. Rollers or tamping irons shall be used to seal thejoint. 5-04.3(12)A2 Longitudinal Joints The longitudinal joint in any one course shall be offset from the course immediately below by not more than 6 inches nor less than 2 inches. All longitudinal joints constructed in the wearing course shall be located at a lane line or an edge line of the Traveled Way. A notched wedge joint shall be constructed along all longitudinal joints in the wearing surface of new HMA unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The notched wedge joint shall have a vertical edge of not less than the nlaxin-it rn aggregate size or more than '/2 of the compacted lift thickness and then taper down on a slope not steeper than 41-1:1V. The sloped portion of the HMA notched wedge joint shall be uniformly compacted. 5-04.3(12)B Bridge Paving Joint Seals 5-04.3(12)B1 HMA Sawcut and Seal Prior to placing HMA on the bridge deck, establish sawcut alignment points at both ends of the bridge paving joint seals to be placed at the bridge ends, and at interior joints within the bridge deck when and where shown in the Plans. Establish the sawcut alignment points in a manner that they remain functional for use in aligning the sawcut after placing the overlay. Submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the sealant manufacturer's application procedure. Construct the bridge paving joint seal as specified ion the Plans and in accordance with the detail shown in the Standard Plans. Construct the sawcut in accordance with the detail shown in the Standard Plan. Construct the sawcut in accordance with Section 5-05.3(8)B and the manufacturer's application procedure. 5-04.3(12)B2 Paved Panel Joint Seal Construct the paved panel joint seal in accordance with the requirements specified in section 5-04.3(12)B1 and the following requirement: 1 . Clean and seal the existing joint between concrete panels in accordance with Section 5-01 .3(8) and the details shown in the Standard Plans. 5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 23 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 The completed surface of all courses shall be of uniform texture, smooth, uniform as to crown and grade, and free from defects of all kinds. The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than Ys inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel to the centerline. The transverse slope of the completed surface of the wearing course shall vary not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from the rate of transverse slope shown in the Plans. When deviations in excess of the above tolerances are found that result from a high place in the HMA, the pavement surface shall be corrected by one of the following methods: 1 . Removal of material from high places by grinding with an approved grinding machine, or 2. Removal and replacement of the wearing course of HMA, or 3. By other method approved by the Engineer. Correction of defects shall be carried out until there are no deviations anywhere greater than the allowable tolerances. Deviations in excess of the above tolerances that result from a low place in the HMA and deviations resulting from a high place where corrective action, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not produce satisfactory results will be accepted with a price adjustment. The Engineer shall deduct from monies due or that may become due to the Contractor the sum of $500.00 for each and every section of single traffic lane 100 feet in length in which any excessive deviations described above are found. When utility appurtenances such as manhole covers and valve boxes are located in the traveled way, the utility appurtenances shall be adjusted to the finished grade prior to paving. This requirement may be waived when requested by the Contractor, at the discretion of the Engineer or when the adjustment details provided in the project plan or specifications call for utility appurtenance adjustments after the completion of paving. Utility appurtenance adjustment discussions will be included in the Pre- Paving planning (5-04.3(14)B3). Submit a written request to waive this requirement to the Engineer prior to the start of paving. 5-04.3(14) Planing (Milling) Bituminous Pavement The planning plan must be approved by the Engineer and a pre planning meeting must be held prior to the start of any planing. See Section 5-04.3(14)B2 for information on planning submittals. Locations of existing surfacing to be planed are as shown in the Drawings. Where planing an existing pavement is specified in the Contract, the Contractor must remove existing surfacing material and to reshape the 640 Pressure Zorc Booster Station/Bond 5 - 24 October 31, 2016 Project Number: 16-3012 surface to remove irregularities. The finished product must be a prepared surface acceptable for receiving an HMA overlay. Use the cold milling method for planing unless otherwise specified in the Contract. Do not use the planer on the final wearing course of new HMA. Conduct planing operations in a manner that does not tear, break, burn, or otherwise damage the surface which is to remain. The finished planed surface must be slightly grooved or roughened and must be free from gouges, deep grooves, ridges, or other imperfections. The Contractor must repair any damage to the surface by the Contractor's planing equipment, using an Engineer approved method. Repair or replace any metal castings and other surface improvements damaged by planing, as determined by the Engineer. A tapered wedge cut must be planed longitudinally along curb lines sufficient to provide a minimum of 4 inches of curb reveal after placement and compaction of the final wearing course. The dimensions of the wedge must be as shown on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer. A tapered wedge cut must also be made at transitions to adjoining pavement surfaces (meet lines) where buttjoints are shown on the Drawings. Cut buttjoints in a straight line with vertical faces 2 inches or more in height, producing a smooth transition to the existing adjoining pavement. After planing is complete, planed surfaces must be swept, cleaned, and if required by the Contract, patched and preleveled. The Engineer may direct additional depth planing. Before performing this additional depth planing, the Contractor must conduct a hidden metal in pavement detection survey as specified in Section 5- 04.3(14)A. Planing operations shall be performed no more than 7 calendar days ahead of the time the planed area is to be paved, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer in writing. 5-04.3(14)A Pre-Planing Metal Detection Check Before starting planing of pavements, and before any additional depth planing required by the Engineer, the Contractor must conduct a physical survey of existing pavement to be planed with equipment that can identify hidden metal objects. Should such metal be identified, promptly notify the Engineer, See Section 1 -07.16(1) regarding the protection of survey monumentation that may be hidden in pavement. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 25 October 31, 2012 Project Number: 16-3012 The Contractor is solely responsible for any damage to equipment resulting from the Contractor's failure to conduct a pre-planing metal detection survey, or from the Contractor's failure to notify the Engineer of any hidden metal that is detected. 5-04.3(14)B Paving And Planing Under Traffic 5-04.3(14)B1 General In addition the requirements of Section 1_-07.23 .and the traffic controls required in SecOm 1. 1_0, and unless the Contract specifies otherwise or the Engineer approves, the Contractor must comply with the following: 1 . Intersections: a. Keep intersections open to traffic at all times, except when paving or planing operations through an intersection requires closure. Such closure must be kept to the minimum time required to place and compact the HMA mixture, or plane as appropriate. For paving, schedule such closure to individual lanes or portions thereof that allows the traffic volumes and schedule of traffic volumes required in the approved traffic control plan. Schedule work so that adjacent intersections are not impacted at the same time and comply with the traffic control restrictions required by the Traffic Engineer. Each individual intersection closure or partial closure, must be addressed in the traffic control plan, which must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer, see Section b. When planing or paving and related construction must occur in an intersection, consider scheduling and sequencing such work into quarters of the intersection, or half or more of an intersection with side street detours. Be prepared to sequence the work to individual lanes or portions thereof. c. Should closure of the intersection in its entirety be necessary, and no trolley service is impacted, keep such closure to the minimum time required to place and compact the HMA mixture, plane, remove asphalt, tack coat, and as needed. d. Any work in an intersection requires advance warning in both signage and a number of Working Days advance notice as determined by the Engineer, to alert traffic and emergency services of the intersection closure or partial closure. e. Allow new compacted HMA asphalt to cool to ambient temperature before any traffic is allowed on it. Traffic is not allowed on newly placed asphalt until approval has been obtained from the Engineer. 2. Temporary centerline marking, post-paving temporary marking, temporary stop bars, and maintaining temporary pavement marking must comply with Section 8-23. 3. Permanent pavement marking must comply with Section 8- 2, 640 Pressure Zone Booster Statior/Bond 5 - 26 October 31, 2019 Project Number, 16-3012 5-04.3(14)B2 Submittals - Planing Plan And HMA Paving Plan The Contractor must submit a separate planing plan and a separate paving plan to the Engineer at least 5 Working Days in advance of each operation's activity start date. These plans must show how the moving operation and traffic control are coordinated, as they will be discussed at the pre-planing briefing and pre-paving briefing. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor must provide each operation's traffic control plan on 24 x 36 inch or larger size Shop Drawings with a scale showing both the area of operation and sufficient detail of traffic beyond the area of operation where detour traffic may be required. The scale on the Shop Drawings is 1 inch = 20 feet, which may be changed if the Engineer agrees sufficient detail is shown. The planing operation and the paving operation include, but are not limited tu, metal detection, ren-oval of asphalt and temporary asphalt of any kind, tack coat and drying, staging of supply trucks, paving trains, rolling, scheduling, and as may be discussed at the briefing. When intersections will be partially or totally blocked, provide adequately sized and noticeable signage alerting traffic of closures to come, a minimum 2 Working Days in advance. The traffic control plan must show where peace officers will be stationed when signalization is or may be, countermanded, and show areas where flaggers are proposed. At a minimum, the planing and the paving plan must include: 1 . A copy of the accepted traffic control plan, see Section 11-1CJ.2(2j.,, detailing each day's traffic control as it relates to the specific requirements of that day's planing and paving. Briefly describe the sequencing of traffic control consistent with the proposed planing and paving sequence, and scheduling of placement of temporary pavement markings and channelizing devices after each day's planing, and paving. 2. A copy of each intersection's traffic control plan. 3. Haul routes from Supplier facilities, and locations of temporary parking and staging areas, including return routes. Describe the complete round trip as it relates to the sequencing of paving operations. 4. Names and locations of HMA Supplier facilities to be used. 5. List of all equipment to be used for paving. 6. List of personnel and associated job classification assigned to each piece of paving equipment. 7. Description (geometric or narrative) of the scheduled sequence of planing and of paving, and intended area of planing and of paving for each day's work, must include the directions of proposed planing and of proposed paving, sequence of adjacent lane paving, sequence of skipped lane paving, intersection planing and paving scheduling and sequencing, and proposed notifications and coordination to be timely made. The plan must show HMAjoints relative to the final pavement marking lane lines. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 27 October 31, 201B Project Number: 16-3012 I 8. Names,job titles, and contact information for field, office, and plant supervisory personnel. 9. A copy of the approved Mix Designs. 10.Tonnage of HMA to be placed each day. 11 .Approximate times and days for starting and ending daily operations. 5-04.3(14)B3 Pre-Paving And Pre-Planing Briefing At least 2 Working Days before the first paving operation and the first planing operation, or as scheduled by the Engineer for future paving and planing operations to ensure the Contractor has adequately prepared for notifying and coordinating as required in the Contract, the Contractor must be prepared to discuss that day's operations as they relate to other entities and to public safety and convenience, including driveway and business access, garbage truck operations, Metro transit operations and working around energized overhead wires, school and nursing home and hospital and other accesses, other contractors who may be operating in the area, pedestrian and bicycle traffic, and emergency services. The Contractor, and Subcontractors that may be part of that day's operations, must meet with the Engineer and discuss the proposed operation as it relates to the submitted planing plan and paving plan, approved traffic control plan, and public convenience and safety. Such discussion includes, but is not limited to: 1 . General for both Paving Plan and for Planing Plan: a. The actual times of starting and ending daily operations. b. In intersections, how to break up the intersection, and address traffic control and signalization for that operation, including use of peace officers. c. The sequencing and scheduling of paving operations and of planing operations, as applicable, as it relates to traffic control, to public convenience and safety, and to other contractors who may operate in the Project Site. d. Notifications required of Contractor activities, and coordinating with other entities and the public as necessary. e. Description of the sequencing of installation and types of temporary pavement markings as it relates to planning and to paving. f. Description of the sequencing of installation of, and the removal of, temporary pavement patch material around exposed castings and as may be needed. g. Description of procedures and equipment to identify hidden metal in the pavement, such as survey monumentation, monitoring wells, street car rail, and castings, before planning, see Section 5-04.3(14)B2. h. Description of how flaggers will be coordinated with the planing, paving, and related operations. i. Description of sequencing of traffic controls for the process of rigid pavement base repairs. j. Other items the Engineer deems necessary to address. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 28 October 31, 201B Project Number. 16-3012 2. Paving — additional topics: a. When to start applying tack and coordinating with paving. b. Types of equipment and numbers of each type equipment to be used. If more pieces of equipment than personnel are proposed, describe the sequencing of the personnel operating the types of equipment. Discuss the continuance of operator personnel for each type equipment as it relates to meeting Specification requirements. c. Number of JMFs to be placed, and if more than one JMF how the Contractor will ensure different JMFs are distinguished, how pavers and MTVs are distinguished if more than one JMF is being placed at the time, and how pavers and MTVs are cleaned so that one JMF does not adversely influence the other JMF. d. Description of contingency plans for that day's operations such as equipment breakdown, rain out, and Supplier shulduwn or operations. e. Number of sublots to be placed, sequencing of density testing, and other sampling and testing. 5-04.3(15) Sealing Pavement Surfaces (March 5, 2018 APWA GSP) Apply a fog seal where shown in the plans. Construct the fog seal in accordance with Section 5-02.3. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, apply the fog seal prior to opening to traffic. 5-04.3(16) HMA Road Approaches (March 5, 2078 APWA GSP) HMA approaches shall be constructed at the locations shown in the Plans or where staked by the Engineer. The Work shall be performed in accordance with Section 5-04. SECTION 5-04.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING; 5-04.4 Measurement HMA Class 112", PG 581-1-22 will be measured by the ton in accordance with Section 1-09.2, with no deduction being made for the weight of asphalt binder, mineral filler, or any other component of the mixture. If the Contractor elects to remove and replace mix as allowed by Section 5-04.3(11), the material removed will not be measured. No measurement will be made for the installation, maintenance, and removal of temporary pavement markings. SECTION 5-04.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 5-04.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 , for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 29 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 The unit Contract priced per ton for "HMA Class V2" PG 58H-22" shall be full compensation for all costs incurred to carry out the requirements of Section 5-04 except for those costs included in other items which are included in the Subsection and which are included in the Proposal. This work shall include the cost to install an asphalt thickened edge and/or the pre-leveling work in the areas identified on the plans. The cost for anti-stripping additive and water shall be included in this bid item. No payment will be made for temporary pavement markings. Temporary pavement markings shall be incidental to the project and cost shall be included in the various items of the Contract. Payment shall be made upon actual square yards planed/grind, regardless of the full planing capacity of the equipment used. SECTIONS 5-04.5(1), 5-04.5(1)A AND 5-04.5(1)B ARE DELETED IN THEIR ENTIRETY. 5-04.5(1) Quality Assurance Price Adjustments 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture 5-04.5(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 5 - 30 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 DIVISION 7 - DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, STORM SEWERS. 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 7-08.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.2 Materials All pipe shall be of the type and material specified in the bid proposal, shown on the plans or specified herein. All materials used for construction of sanitary sewer and storm drainage systems and appurtenances shall be new and undamaged. All materials used shall be subject to inspection by the City prior to use. The Contractor shall provide the City with shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and certificates of materials as requested. The materials referred to herein, shall conform to the applicable provisions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the Kent Special Provisions and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. See the following Sections of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions: Hot Mix Asphalt ............................... 5-04.2 Cement Concrete Pavement .............. 5-05.2 Culverts ......................................... 7-02.2 Storm Sewers ................................. 7-04.2 Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins....,. 7-05.2 Sanitary Sewer................................ 7-17.2 Side Sewers .................................... 7-18.2 Crushed Surfacing ........................... 9-03.9(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding., 9-03.12(3) Gravel Borrow ................... ............. 9-03.14(1) Foundation Material Class I and 11 ...... 9-03.17 Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill .... 9-03.19 7-08.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-08.3(1)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(1)A Trenches If well points are used for dewatering pipe trenches, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the necessary dewatering and shall be sandpacked and/or other means used to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the sub-surface. A continual check by the Contractor shall be maintained to insure that the sub-surface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. Once commenced, the dewatering operation shall be continuous until construction and backfilling in the dewatered area is complete. Pump 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Band 7 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 shutdown shall be accomplished in an approved gradual manner. The Contractor shall provide enough facilities and personnel to maintain continuous operation once commenced. Such continuous operation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. In the event of damage to the trench foundation as determined by the Engineer, or to the ditch walls, or other operations resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the dewatering operation, the complete cost of all repairs shall be borne by the Contractor. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to dispose of all waters resulting from its dewatering operation. This responsibility also includes choice of method, obtaining regulatory agency approvals, complying with state water quality standards and other agency requirements. Each individual project and dewatering operation shall be evaluated individually to determine exact requirements; however, in general the following conditions will apply. 1 . Disposal into the existing storm drain facilities (pipes, channels, ditches, etc.) may be acceptable if the Contractor obtains the necessary permits and approvals. 2. Discharge to existing storm drain facilities shall not result in a violation of state water quality standards for surface water, Chapter 173-203 WAC. 3. The Contractor shall monitor discharge and receiving water(s) as required to verify that water quality standards are being met. 4. If necessary to meet standards and approval requirements, the Contractor shall treat the water prior to discharge. A settling pond may be an acceptable method of treatment. Any damage, as determined by the Engineer to properties or improvements resulting from an inadequate disposal (water) operation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, including repairs, replacements and/or restoration. Where required or where directed by the Engineer, stabilization of the trench bottom shall be in accordance with Section 7-08.3(1)A of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Excavation of the unsuitable material shall be considered as trench excavation. The unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Backfill unsuitable material excavations with Foundation Material Class I or I I meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.17 of the Kent Special Provisions with the class called for in the bid proposal, on the plans or by the Engineer in the field. Trench excavation shall include the required pavement removal for construction of the trench. See Section 2-02.3(3) of the Kent Special Provisions. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Band 7 - 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number; 16-3012 SECTION 7-08.3(1)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe Bedding shall be placed in accordance with Standard Plan B-55.20-00. Bedding material shall be in accordance with Section 9-03.12(3) of the Kent Special Provisions. Bedding material shall be tamped in layers under, around and above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe. The Contractor shall use compaction equipment approved by the Engineer to obtain adequate compaction of the bedding material. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, adequate compaction shall be construed to mean to at least 95 percent of the maximum density measured in accordance with ASTM D-1557. The pipe shall be protected from damage when compacting. At least two feet of cover is required over the pipe prior to using heavy compaction equipment. SECTION 7-08.3(2)B IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying - General At locations of pipe crossing between new or existing pipes the minimum vertical clearance shall be one and one-half foot unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If this clearance cannot be obtained, the Contractor shall install a 2-inch thick 1 -2 PSF Styrofoam cushion between the pipes. The cushion shall be installed longitudinally with the lower pipe. The cushion width shall be equal to the lower pipe diameter and the length shall be one foot greater than the upper pipe diameter. It should be noted that field adjustment of specified slopes for storm and sanitary side sewers are permissible, if approved by the Design Engineer, to obtain the minimum clearances. External or internal grouting or repair by use of collars on the new sanitary or storm sewer line will not be an acceptable means of repair, should repair be necessary. All pipe, adaptors, tees, and other fittings shall be used for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 7-08.3(2)G IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)G Jointing of Dissimilar Pipe Connections of Ductile or Cast Iron Pipe to Concrete Pipe or PVC Pipe will be done by the use of Cast Transition or reducing couplings (Romac 501 or equivalent). 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 SECTION 7-08.3(2)H IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections Where indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer, connections shall be made to the existing storm drain/sewer systems by the Contractor in accordance with applicable portions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and Kent Special Provisions in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Engineer. SECTION 7-08.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-08.3(2)J Pipe Laying - PVC For PVC pipe, the Contractor shall maintain a cover over the pipe to prevent temperature deformation caused by the sun and shall remove such cover only for a sufficient time to allow the pipe to be installed. When making field cuts of PVC pipe, a new reference line shall be marked on the spigot end a distance of 4-5/8 inches from said end. Said end will provide a visual means of determining whether full insertion of the spigot into the bell has been made during installation. SECTION 7-08.3(4) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(4) Plugging Existing Pipe Existing pipes being plugged shall be plugged with concrete at both ends and shall otherwise be in accordance with Section 7-08.3(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION 7-08.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-08.3(5) Street Restoration Unless otherwise shown on the plans, street restoration shall be in accordance with the following requirements: Where cuts have been made in either asphalt concrete pavement, or in oil mats, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench areas with a 3 inch thick asphalt concrete patch placed on a 2 inch thickness of crushed surfacing top course over a 4 inch thickness of crushed surfacing base course or as directed by the Engineer in the field. However, where cuts have been made in an asphalt concrete pavement section to be overlayed, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench with a 2 inch thick asphalt concrete patch with a 2 inch asphalt overlay for a total of 4 inches of asphalt concrete pavement over 2 inches of crushed surfacing top course over 4 inches crushed surfacing base course. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 In all cases, the asphalt and crushed surfacing thickness for the patch shall meet or exceed the existing pavement section. Upon approval of the Engineer, Controlled Density Fill may be used to back fill the narrow trenches where it is difficult to compact crushed surfacing. In these cases the asphalt concrete layer shall increase to a minimum of 2 inches greater than the existing section. Where cuts have been made in cement concrete pavement, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench area with a 6 inch thick cement concrete patch placed on a 6 inch thickness of crushed surfacing top course. In all cases, the cement concrete and crushed surfacing thickness for the patch shall meet or exceed the existing pavement section. Where there is an existing asphalt overlay over cement concrete pavement, the cement concrete shall be patched to original grade as above and then overlaid with an asphalt concrete patch to existing grade. All gravel shoulders shall be restored to their original condition and shape. The Contractor shall spread a 2 inch thick layer of crushed surfacing on the shoulder. The shoulder shall be finished with a grader after backfilling and compacting and before spreading the crushed surfacing. Permanent surface treatments and pavements shall not be placed until an as-built survey and testing of the new underground utilities have been completed. Verification that utility construction conforms to the line and grade requirements of Section 7-08.3(2)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall be made by the Engineer prior to authorizing paving to begin. Also, each new utility must pass all appropriate tests specified herein for the type of utility prior to paving. SECTION 7-08.4 IS REVISED BYDELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.4 Measurement Gravel backfill for foundation and gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be measured by the ton, including haul. SECTION 7-08.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.5 Payment The unit contract price per ton for "Pipe Zone Bedding" constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place bedding material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 5 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. Reference WSDOT Standard Plan B-55.20-00. The unit contract price per ton for "Foundation Material C asp s II and I I" constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place foundation material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The unit contract price per ton for "Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill" constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place the bank run gravel for trench Backfill as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The actual quantity for bank run gravel for trench backfill is unknown since selected materials will be used wherever possible. The City has entered a quantity in the proposal for the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders. The unit contract price per each for "Abandon Existing Storm Sewer Pipe" constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to abandon the existing pipe as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit price bid shall include but not be limited to concrete plugging the pipe at both ends, backfilling with gravel borrow, and compaction. 7-09 WATER MAINS SECTION 7-09.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.2 Materials All water main pipe shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Ductile Iron Water Pipe .............. 9-30.1 (1) Fittings for Ductile Iron Pipe ....... 9-30.2(1) The following aggregates shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Bedding Material ........... ............ 9-03.12(3) Foundation Material ................... 9-03.17 7-09.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-09.3(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 7-09.3(8) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Materials Where required or where directed by the Engineer, stabilization of the trench bottom shall be in accordance to Section 7-09.3(8) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications except that the foundation material shall meet the requirements of Kent Special Provisions 9-03.1 7. Excavation and disposal of the unsuitable material shall be considered as trench excavation. The unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. SECTION 7-09.3(9) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(9) Bedding the Pipe in most cases, import.-.d bedding is net requlrcd fvr 'vvatcr ,mai ii installations. The native material shall be worked to form a continuous and uniform trench bottom for all buried pipe. Bedding material shall be tamped in layers around the pipe and to a sufficient height above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe, compaction shall be 95 percent of maxiirlum dry density per ASTM D-1557. The Contractor shall use compaction equipment approved by the Engineer to obtain adequate compaction of the bedding material, so as to provide firm and uniform support for the full length of the pipe, valves and fittings. Care shall be taken to prevent any damage to the pipe or its protective coatings. Material larger than 1 112 inch diameter found in the trench shall be removed for a depth of at least two inches around the pipe. When specified, imported bedding material shall be used. All bedding material prior to use shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The responsibility for obtaining said approval shall rest solely with the Contractor. NOTE: Pea gravel will not be allowed as a bedding material. Bedding shall be placed 6 inches under and 6 inches over the pipe where, in the opinion of the Engineer, existing material is found to be unsuitable. SECTION 7-09-3(13) IS REVISED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH: 7-09.3(13) Handling of Pipe In addition, all installed lengths of pipe shall have a suitable swab or "pig" drawn continuously through them to remove all possible debris prior to flushing and disinfection. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i SECTION 7-09.3(19)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains Also see Appendix A-2 New Water Main Connection Procedures.. Connections to existing mains which require turning off the water, shall not be made without at least five (5) working days notice to the Engineer, the City Water Department, and affected water customers. Prior to purchase of materials, the Contractor shall field inspect the connection points to verify the exact fittings, adaptors, etc. required to make an approved connection. The Contractor shall furnish and install materials approved by the City. The City shall not be responsible for incorrect or unapproved materials purchased by the Contractor. Where various methods are possible, or if doubt exists as to what is required, the Contractor shall coordinate with the City prior to construction. The Contractor shall not make a connection to a live water main until after satisfactory pressure and purity tests. SECTION 7-09.3(20) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.31 Detectable Marking Tape Instead of tracer tape, 12 gage solid copper wire protected with plastic shall be installed over all non-metallic water lines including service lines. The tracing wire shall be placed as shown on Standard Plans and shall extend the full length of the line. SECTION 7-09.3(23) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test Hydrostatic pressure tests shall be made at a minimum pressure of 250 psi. SECTION 7-09.3(24) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24) Disinfection of Water Mains Following the pressure test, flushing procedure and disinfection of the pipe, the Contractor shall arrange with the Public Works Inspector for coliform (purity) tests to be taken by the Water Department. Two samples taken 24-hours apart, with no flushing between samples is required to be taken from each apparatus. The Contractor may elect to contract with a City-approved lab for the tests. Contractor shall pay for purity tests as required by the City. The Contractor shall install corporation stops at all locations required to take bacteriological test samples. If the original test sample proves 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 8 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 unsatisfactory, an additional charge will be assessed to the Contractor for processing each additional sample. SECTION 7-09.3(24)A /S SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)A Flushing The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of treated water flushed from mains. The sanitary sewer shall be the preferred option for disposal of all flushed water. The City shall approve disposal into available sanitary sewers, provided that the rate of disposal will not overload the sewer. All discharges to the storm system shall be tested for total residual chlorine using a portable "HACH" kit or equivalent, prior to discharge. NO DIcCuAocE TO 01 iREACE WATEnc no THE STORNn SYSTEM Is J VL JV 1� I ICJ VI\ III J V IVI J JI LJ ALLOWED AT CONCENTRATIONS OF TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE ABOVE 20 UG/1 (.02 MG/1). (Because the minimum detection limit for this test is about 10 ug/1 (.01 mg/1) under ideal conditions, field testing may lack precision.) If no acceptable discharge for the treated water is identified, the Contractor shall be required to dechlorinate the water prior to discharge. Water for testing and flushing, when taken from the City water mains shall pass through an approved reduced pressure backflow valve assembly. This activity must be coordinated with and approved by the City. SECTION 7-09.3(24)B IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)B Requirement of Chlorine All new, cleaned or repaired water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 . This Specification includes detailed procedures for the adequate flushing, disinfection, and microbiological testing of all water mains. SECTION 7-09.3(24)M IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)MChlorinating Connections to Existing Water Mains and Water Service Connections After the new piping has been flushed, pressure tested, disinfected, and all purity test sample results are satisfactory, connections to the existing main can be made. All closure pieces and fittings shall be swabbed with an appropriate chlorine solution (5-6 percent CI), in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 . Maximum length of swabbed section of water main pipe shall be less than 18 feet (1 section of pipe). 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 9 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS SECTION 7-12.2 IS REVISED BY SUPPLEMENTING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.2 Materials The following materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Gate Valves.,........... ............ ...9-30.3(l) Valve Boxes ........ ..........................9-30.3(4) Valve Marker Posts.........................9-30.3(5) Valve Stem Extensions ...................9-30.3(6) SECTION 7-12.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.3 Construction Requirements All valves shall have valve boxes installed with the cover lugs parallel to the direction of water flow. SECTION 7-12.3(1) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Posts Valve marker posts conforming to Kent Standard Plan 3-4 shall be located opposite each valve as directed by the Engineer. The 18 inches of exposed post shall be painted with two coats of approved white concrete paint, and then the size of the valve, the type of valve, and the distance in feet from the post to the valve shall be painted on the face of the post, using approved black paint and stencils which produce letters 2-inches high. SECTION 7-12.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 7-12.3(2) Replace Existing Valve Box Top Section and Lid See Section 9-30.3(4) of the Kent Special Provisions for material specifications. Where shown in the plans or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and install new Valve Box Top Section and Lid on existing water valves in accordance with the details shown in the plans, these Kent Special Provisions or as directed by the Engineer. Lid shall be the locking type. On asphalt concrete paving and/or asphalt resurfacing projects, valve box top section and similar structures shall not be adjusted and/or installed until the pavement is completed. The center of each structure shall be relocated from previously referenced measurements, 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material removed to permit removal of the old unit. The new structure shall then be installed to proper grade utilizing the same methods of construction as specified for new construction in Section 7-12 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions. All valves covered by new paving shall be uncovered and adjusted to grade within 72 hours. 7-12.3(3) Adjusting Valve Boxes to Grade On asphalt concrete paving and/or asphalt resurfacing projects, valve box top section and similar structures shall not be adjusted and/or installed until the pavement is completed. The center of each structure shall be relocated from previously referenced measurements, established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material removed to permit removal of the old unit. The new structure shall then be installed to proper grade utilizing the same methods of construction as specified for new construction in Section 7-12 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions. All valves covered by new paving shall be uncovered and adjusted to grade within 72 hours. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 7 - 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 V 8-01 EROS11ON CO%ITR L AND WATER PO LI IT!ON. rnR1TDr-61 SECTION 8-01. 1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.1 Description This work consists of temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures (TESCP) as shown on the construction plans, specified in these Kent Special Provisions, and ordered by the Engineer as work proceeds. The TESCP are intended to minimize erosion and sedimentation as well as protect waters of the state and the city's municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4) as required by law. SECTION 8-01.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions and the WSDOT Standard Specifications: Seed ....................................8-01 .3(2)B and 9-14.2 Fertilizer ...............................8-01 .3(2)B and 9-14.3 Mulch and Amendments ,.........8-01 .3(2)D and 9-14.4 Tackifier ...............................8-01 .3(2)E and 9-14.4(7) 8-01.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-01.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(1) General Preventing and controlling pollution, erosion, runoff, and related damage requires the Contractor to install temporary stormwater best management practices (BMPs) as per the plans and as directed by the City. As site conditions dictate, additional BMPs may be required. The Contractor shall anticipate the need for additional best management practices and propose necessary changes to the City. Should the Contractor fail to install the required temporary erosion and sediment control (TESC) measures or to perform maintenance in a timely manner, or fail to take immediate action to install additional approved measures, all fines, cost of cleanup, costs for delays and down time shall be borne by the Contractor. All cost for this work shall be paid for under the unit contract bid prices, The upgrading of the TESCP facilities shall not constitute a basis for additional working days for this project. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of two working days notice prior to clearing adjacent to any wetland, creek or other sensitive area. During the construction period, no disturbance beyond the flagged clearing limits shall be permitted. The flagging shall be maintained by the Contractor for the duration of construction. The TESC facilities shall be in accordance with and conform to the Kent Surface Water Design Manual, the WSDOT Standards Specifications, and the Ecology Construction Stormwater General Permit (if applicable), except as modified by the Kent Design and Construction Standards or these Kent Special Provisions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the City at once of any TESC deficiencies or changes in conditions such as rutting and or erosion that may occur during construction. The Contractor may recommend possible solutions to the Engineer in order to resolve any Piobleiiis that are occurring. The requirements of this section shall apply to all areas of the site subject to construction activity as described in the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the Kent Special Provisions and contract plans, including Contractor construction support facilities, Contractor personnel parking areas, equipment and material storage/laydown areas, and other areas utilized by the Contractor for completion of the work. Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor from complying with other contract requirements. SECTION 8-01.3(1)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(1)A Submittals Prior to the start of any construction activities, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's review and approval, the following, as necessitated by the work: 1, Dewatering Plan 2, Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 3, Stream Bypass Plan for in-water work 4, Name and contact info for Contractor's CESCL SECTION 8-01.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 8-01.3(1)F Applicable Regulations and Criteria All construction activities are subject to applicable federal, state, and local permits. The Contractor shall comply with requirements of applicable state and local regulatory requirements, including, but not limited to the following: 1 . WAC 173-201A Water Quality Standards for Surface Waters of the State of Washington 2. RCW 90.48.080 Discharge of pollutants in waters prohibited 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 2 October 31, 2018 Project Numbcr: 16-3012 3. City of Kent 2002 Surface Water Design Manual 4. Construction Stormwater General Permit — WA Department of Ecology 8-01.3(1)G Water Quality Monitoring Sampling of site stormwater discharges is only required if the project is covered under the WA Department of Ecology Construction Stormwater General Permit or if there is a suspected discharge that exceeds state water quality standards. If the project is covered under the Construction Stormwater General Permit, then the Contractor shall conduct sampling as per the conditions listed in the permit. Any results that are outside the appropriate range of compliance will require immediate implementation of adaptive management as outlined in applicable permits, stormwater pollution prevention plan, and as directed by the Engineer. All sampling records shall be submitted to the Engineer by the last day of the monitoring period. All necessary adaptive management requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to implement and maintain. All costs for this work shall be included in the various unit contract bid prices. 8-01.3(2) Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching SECTION 8-01.3(2)B IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: B-01.3(2)B Seeding and Fertilizing Topsoil and all other unpaved and unsodded areas within easements and right-of-way disturbed as part of this project shall be seeded. Hydroseeding shall be the method of seed application. Hydroseed shall consist of a slurry composed of water, seed, fertilizer, tackifier, and mulch and shall be evenly broadcast over areas to be seeded. All work shall conform in all respects to Section 8-01 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as modified herein. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of any hydroseeding operation and shall not begin the work until areas prepared or designated for hydroseeding have been approved. Following the Engineer's approval, hydroseeding of the approved slopes shall begin immediately. Hydroseeding shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise untillable. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Hydroseed mixture to be applied by an approved hydro seeder which utilizes water as the carrying agent, and maintains continuous agitation through paddle blades. It shall have an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend, and mix into a homogeneous slurry the specified amount of seed and water or other material. Distribution and discharge lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic discharge spray nozzles that will provide a uniform distribution of the slurry. The seed and fertilizer cannot be placed in the tank more than 30 minutes prior to application. The seed and fertilizer shall have a tracer added to visibly aid uniform application. This tracer shall not be harmful to plant and animal life. If wood cellulose fiber is used as a tracer, the application rate shall not exceed 25 pounds per acre. Areas where hydroseeding is not practical, must be seeded by approved hand methods as approved by the engineer. When seeding by hand, Contractor shall incorporate seed into the top 1/4 inch of soil. The hydroseed slurry shall consist of the following materials mixed thoroughly together and applied in the quantities indicated. 1 , Grass Seed: Mixture shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed. Seed to be mixed mechanically on the site or may be mixed by the dealer. If seed is mixed on site, each variety shall be delivered in the original containers bearing the dealer's guaranteed analysis. If seed is mixed by the dealer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer the Dealer's guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the percentage of purity and germination of each variety. Grass seed shall be purchased from a recognized distributor and shall be composed of the varieties mixed in the proportions indicated in the WSDOT Standard Specifications and Kent Special Provisions. Seed shall meet the minimum percentages of purity and germination specified in Section 9-14.2 of the Kent Special Provisions. Seed shall be applied at the rate of 120 pounds per acre. The Contractor shall protect seed from hydration, contamination, and heating during delivery, storage, and handling. Seed shall be stored in a cool dry location away from contaminants. Mix A shall be used as the standard hydroseed mix unless otherwise specified herein or on approved project plans. Mix B shall be used exclusively for seeded areas adjacent to grass lawns, within seeded medians, and within seeded traffic islands. In addition, Mix B shall be used for all seeded areas not specifically showing Mix A on the plans, or where otherwise directed by the Engineer. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 2. Water: The Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately after seeding for a minimum of ten (10) weeks or longer as needed. Water seeded areas before hydroseed slurry has completely dried out. Water slowly and thoroughly with fine spray nozzle. Water the hydroseeded areas at least twice daily (in the early morning and late afternoon) until the grass is well established as determined by the Engineer. Repeat watering operation as required by climatic conditions to keep areas moist for a minimum period of 2 weeks from the day of first watering and as necessary for healthy growth. 3. Mulch: As needed to meet requirements of Sections 8-01 .3(2)D and 9-14.4. 4. Fertilizer: All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation applied at the rate of 400 pounds per acre. All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer meeting the requirements of Section 9-14.3 of the Kent Special Provisions. Fertilizer shall not be applied on any creek sideslopes in order to avoid contamination of these creeks. 5. Hand Seeding: Seeding shall be applied at the rate of 6 pounds per 1 ,000 square feet. The seed shall be applied by an approved hand held spreader. The seed shall be evenly distributed over the disturbed area. Apply seed mix after fertilizing and rake the seed into the surface soil to a depth of 1/4-inch. 6. If the slurry is used for temporary erosion control it shall be applied at the following rates: EROSION CONTROL: Seed 170 Ibs/acre of "Mix A" unless otherwise directed by Engineer. Fertilizer 400lbs/acre Wood Fiber 2,000 Ibs/ acre Tackifier 80lbs/acre SECTION 8-01.3(2)D IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING; 8-01.3(2)D Mulching Wood cellulose fiber mulch conforming to Section 9-14.4 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall be used where mulch is called for on this project. The application rate shall be 2,000 pounds to the acre in accordance with Section 8-01 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Mulch shall be incorporated into the slurry of seed and fertilizer. Mulch of the type specified in Section 9-14.4(2) shall be included in the hydroseeding process. Wood cellulose fiber used as a mulch shall be suitable for application with hydroseeders as specified in Section 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 5 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 8-01 .3(2)B. The application of seed, fertilizer, and mulch shall be required in a single operation for all seed applications, unless otherwise directed. Mulch materials, shall be furnished, hauled, and evenly applied at the rates indicated, and shall be spread on seeded areas immediately after seeding unless otherwise specified. Distribution of straw mulch material shall be by means of an approved type mulch spreader, which utilizes forced air to blow mulch material on seeded areas. In spreading straw mulch, the spreader shall not cut or break the straw into short stalks. Straw mulch shall be applied at a rate to achieve a loose, overall thickness of three (3) inches. Areas not accessible by mulching equipment shall be mulched by approved hand methods and shall achieve similar results. Mulch sprayed on signs or sign structures shall be removed the same day. SECTION 8-01.3(2)E IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(2)E Soil Binders and Tacking Agents Unless specified otherwise, wood cellulose fiber mulch per Section 9-14.4(2) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall have tackifier incorporated into the mulch fiber during manufacture. If additional tackifier is required, the tackifier shall be Type A as specified in Section 9-14.4(7) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. When specified, soil binders and tacking agents shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 8-01.3(2)F IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST THREE PARAGRAPHS AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(2)F Dates for Application of Final Seed, Fertilizer, and Mulch Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the final application of seeding, fertilizing, and mulching of slopes shall be performed during the following periods: West of the summit of the Cascade Range - March 1 to May 15 and August 15 to October 1 . Where contract timing is appropriate, seeding, fertilizing, and mulching shall be accomplished during the spring period listed above. Written permission to seed after October 1 will only be given when physical completion of the project is imminent and the environmental conditions are conducive to satisfactory growth. SECTION 8-01.3(2)G IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(2)G Protection and Care of Seeded Areas Protect adjacent property, public walks, curbs and pavement from damage. Do not place soil directly on paved surfaces. Locate all underground utilities prior to the commencement of work. Keep streets 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 and area drains open and free flowing. Protect all seeding against wind, storm, and trespassing. Replace any plants that become damaged or injured. In seeded areas, treat and reseed damaged spots larger than one square foot. SECTION 8-01-3(2)H IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(2)H Inspection Inspection of seeded areas shall be made upon completion of seeding operations, at the end of the maintenance period, and at any time during the maintenance period. The Contractor shall reseed, re-mulch or re-fertilize as required to establish a uniform, thick stand of grass. A uniform stand of grass shall be defined as any grass area with no spots greater than one square foot. Areas failing to show a uniform thick, healthy stand of grass after the maintenance period shall be reseeded consistent with the Kent Special Provisions at the Contractor's expense. Reseeded areas will be subject to inspection for acceptance. 8-01.3(9) Sediment Control Barriers SECTION 8-01.3(9)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(9)D Inlet Protection Cleaning and maintenance of inlet protection shall not flush sediment, or sediment-laden water into the downstream system. SECTION 8-01-3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-01.3(17) Vehicle Maintenance and Storage Handling and storage of fuel, oil and chemicals shall not take place within 50 feet of waterways. Storage shall be in dike tanks and barrels with drip pans provided under the dispensing area. Shut-off and lock valves shall be provided on hoses. Fuel, oil, and chemicals shall be dispensed only during daylight hours unless approved by the engineer. Fencing shall be provided around storage area. Locks shall be provided on all valves, pumps, and tanks. Materials used to clean up fuel, oil, and chemical spills shall be disposed of as directed by the engineer. Water used for washing vehicles and equipment shall not be allowed to enter storm drains or other State waters. No processed waste water(s) of any kind shall be discharged onto the ground, to surface waters, or to stormwater conveyance systems. 8-02 ROAD IDE RESTORATION SECTION 8-02-1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 10-3012 8-02.1 Description Drawings and Specifications: Definitions: The word "provide" means "furnish and install" (for landscaping only). Dimensions and Measurements: Dimensions govern when shown. Scale is approximate. Contractor shall check all dimensions in the field and verify them with respect to adjacent or incorporated work. Any discrepancies in the drawings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer before work proceeds further. Number of Specified Items Required: Wherever in these Kent Special Provisions an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall include as many such items as are shown on drawiriys or required Lu complete the insLallaburi. SECTION 8-02. 1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-02.1 (1) Submittals The Contractor shall submit within 20 days after Notice to Proceed date a list of all plant material indicating source of supply, order invoice, size and quantity for such species or variety. All plant materials shall meet requirements of State and Federal laws with respect to inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plant material and submitted to the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Topsoil Type A, Type 3, and Type C............. 9-14.1 (1), (2), (3) Seed ....................................................... 9-14.2 Fertilizer.................................................. 9-14.3 Mulch and Amendments................ ............. 9-14.4 Wood Cellulose Fiber ................... ............. 9-14.4(2) Special Planting Mixture............................. 9-14.4(9) Erosion Control Devices ............... ............. 9-14.5 Plant Materials...................................... .... 9-14.6 Street Trees............................................. 9-14.6(1)A Stakes, Guys and Wrapping ....................... 9-14.7 Tree Ties ................................................. 9-14.7(1) Water for Plants...................................... ... 9-25.2 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 8 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Botanical identification and nomenclature of plant materials shall be based on descriptions by Bailey in "Hortus Third" or superseding editions and amendments. 8-02.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-02.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction The Contractor shall at all times keep the planted areas free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish. Upon completion of the planting work, the Contractor shall immediately remove all refuse and debris resulting from the planting activities. The project will not receive either preliminary or final approval if the cleanup does not meet with the approval of the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.3(3) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(3) Weed and Pest Control During the maintenance and establishment period, all weeds are to be removed by hand. SECTION 8-02.3(5) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(5) Planting Area Preparation The Contractor shall excavate planting pits to a depth of three feet below the top of adjacent sidewalks, or adjacent ground if trees are not being planted in sidewalk cutouts. Tree pits shall be about three feet in diameter, and shall be neat and uniform basins around each tree. The Contractor shall then place special planting mixture into the tree basins, bringing to grade about one and one-half foot below the top of the planter by compaction by repeated watering. Refer to Section 8-02.3(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, SECTION 8-02.3(7) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(7) Layout of Planting The location of plantings shall be according to the landscaping details, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall layout tree, shrub and herbaceous plant locations and receive the approval of the Engineer before planting begins. SECTION 8-02.3(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(8) Planting All plants shall be carefully placed in excavated holes to prevent damage to fibrous root systems during placement and backfilling 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 9 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 operations, with burlap or container removed. Plants shall be set vertically in the center of the pits, backfilled with native soil, watered and settled so that the crown of the root ball will have the same relation to finished grade as it bore to the grade of the ground from which it was dug. All street trees shall be planted in general conformance to Kent Standard Plan 6-55M. SECTION 8-02.3(9) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(9) Pruning, Staking, Guying, and Wrapping Pruning shall be limited to the minimum amount necessary to remove injured twigs and branches. Only cut injured limbs to the nearest lateral bud. Do not apply tree wound paint or petroleum product to tree cuts. The Contractor shaii use rucibdii brdcirly (tridnyie method) rather than staking or guying to support new trees. SECTION 8-02.3(11) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(11) Wood Chip Mulch Revise all references in this section from bark or wood chip mulch to "wood chip mulch." A sample of the wood chip mulch shall be provided to the Engineer or project Ecologist in a 1-gallon re-closable bag at least seven (7) days prior to application. SECTION 8-02.3(13) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment Plant establishment shall extend for a period of two calendar years. Plant establishment shall begin immediately upon written notification from the Engineer of the completion of initial planting for the project. The two calendar years shall be extended an amount equal to any periods where the Contractor does not comply with the plant establishment provisions. The entire body of plant establishment work including but not limited to removing foreign material, removing garbage, weeding, pruning, removing dead plant material, replacing rejected plants, replacing stolen or damaged plants, over the entire site shall occur on a frequency of no less than twice a year and be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Failure to comply,with minimum work frequency shall constitute justification for the Contracting Agency to take corrective steps and deduct all costs from monies due the Contractor. The Contractor shall operate the irrigation system to assure watering frequency and amount to maintain all shrubs in a thriving condition. 540 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Maintenance and operation of the irrigation system is critical to the survival of the shrubs. The contractor shall winterize the irrigation system in the fall before November 1". The Contractor shall energize the irrigation system each spring before May 15th. The Contractor will make all necessary repairs and perform all preventative maintenance" to assure proper irrigation system operation and longevity. Water for the irrigation system shall be provided by the Owner without charge to the Contractor. SECTION 8-02.3(14) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(14) Plant Replacement The Contractor shall replace all trees and shrubs which, in the opinion of the City Nursery Supervisor, have failed to establish themselves during the maintenance period at its sole expense. All replacement planting shall be conducted in conformance to these specifications. SECTION 8-02.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-02.3(17) Plant and Site Protection During Entire Construction Period The Contractor shall: 1 . Protect existing trees to remain and new plants against injury and damage, including but not limited to: cutting, breaking, or skinning of roots, trunk or branches, or smothering by stockpiling construction material, or compaction by equipment. 2. Keep all heavy equipment (e.g., backhoe) outside of the drip lines of all existing trees, so as not to damage the root systems. 3. Notify Engineer immediately if a conflict arises between construction activity and the protection of trees and shrubs; alter methods as necessary and as approved by the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.5 Payment "PSIPE Cornus Kousa (2 inch Caliper)„ PSIPE Dsmanthus Llelavayi (5 Gallon Container)" "PSIPE S !raea Japonica 2 Gallon Container)" The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for the plants, all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary for planting the plants in accordance with the plans and described in the specifications. This item includes but is not limited to mulch, soil, fertilizer, watering, planting mixture, pruning, cleaning, weeding and maintaining and establishing the plants for a period of not less than two calendar years from plant acceptance. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 8-30 PROJECT SIGNS 8-30.1 Description This work shall consist of providing all posts, braces, and hardware and installation and maintenance of City-furnished project signs where shown in the plans or where directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall pick up signs at the City Maintenance Shop on West James Street, telephone 253-856-5600. Contractor shall provide two weeks notice to the Shops prior to installation to schedule pickup. All project signs become the property of the City at the end of the project, and the Contractor shall return project signs to the same facility when so directed by the Engineer. 8-30.2 Materials Sign pusLS shall be 4 inch x 6 inch Fir. 8-30.3 Construction Requirements 8-30.3(1) Erection of Posts All posts shall be set reasonably vertical, and deep enough to sustain sign and expected wind loads as determined by the Engineer. 8-30.3(2) Design A Three (3) vertical 4 inch x 4 inch Fir posts shall be attached to the sign board. Three horizontal 2 inch x 4 inch Fir braces shall be attached to the back of the sign board, one each on the top, the bottom, and in the middle. Attachment of posts and bracing shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 8-30.3 Installation Fasten two (2) vertical 4 inch x 6 inch Fir posts evenly spaced at the back of the sign board. Posts shall be of break-away design with no more than 12,25 square inches of drilled shear area at a point 2 inches above the ground, or as directed by the Engineer. Attachment of posts and bracing shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 8-30.4 Measurement Project signs will be measured by the installed and maintained unit. Failure of the Contractor to adequately maintain the project signs—as determined by the Engineer—shall be deemed noncompliance with this Specification. 8-30.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1 -04.1 , for the following bid item when included in the Proposal: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 12 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 I The unit contract price per each for "project Siren" constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, supplies, equipment and materials, to fabricate, install, maintain project sign(s) for the life of the project and removal and delivery of sign(s) to the City Shops upon closeout of the project. Failure to adequately maintain and return project signs to the City Maintenance Shop shall be deemed reasonable grounds for the Engineer to adjust the payment made under this bid item. Said adjustment shall be determined solely by the Engineer and is not negotiable except at the Engineer's discretion. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 8 - 13 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 9-02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS SECTION 9-02. 1(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-02.1 (4) Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB) Performance Graded (PG) Asphalt Binder PG asphalt binder meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 332 Table 1 of the grades specified in the Contract shall be used in the production of HMA. For HMA with greater than 20 percent RAP by total weight of HMA, or any amount of RAS, the new asphalt binder, recycling agent and recovered asphalt (RAP and/or RAS) when blended in the proportions of the mix design shall meet the PG asphalt binder requirements of AASHTO M 332 Table 1 for the grade of asphalt binder specified by the Contract. In addition to AASHTO M 332 Table 1 specification requirements, PG asphalt binders shall meet the following requirements: Additional Requirements by Performance Grade PG Asphalt Binders Property Test Method PG58H-22 PGSSV-22 PG64H-28 PG64V-28 RTFO Residue: Average AASHTO T Percent 350' 30% Min. 25% Min, 30% Min.. Recovery @ 3.2 kPa 'Specimen conditioned in accordance with AASHTO T 240 — RTFO. The RTFO Jnrdiff and the PAV direct tension specifications of AASHTO M 332 are not required. 9-03 AGGREGATES 9-03.12 Gravel Backfill SECTION 9-03. 12(3) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE GRAVEL SPECIFICATION AND REPLACING /T WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding Pipe bedding shall be 5/8 inch minus crushed rock. Pea gravel is not allowed. All material shall conform with the following gradation: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 I Sieve Size passing 3/4 Inch 100% 5/8 Inch 95 - 100% 1/4 Inch 45 - 65% US No. 40 6 - 18% US No. 200 7.5 max. % % Fracture 75 min. Sand Equivalent 40 min. L.A. wear 500 rev. 35 percent max., degradation 25 percent min. Free from wood waste, bark and other deleterious material. 9-03.14 Borrow SECTION 9-03. 14(9) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow Gravel Borrow material shall consist of pit-run granular material conforming to the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent passing 3 Inch* 100 3/4 Inch 65 - 100 U.S. No. 4 25 - 70 U.S. No, 10 10 - 50 U.S. No. 40 0- 30 U.S. No. 200 0 - 5 Sand equivalent 50 min. The maximum passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve is limited to five percent (5%) based on the minus #4 inch fraction. Sieve analysis shall be used to verify that this requirement is met. Recycled materials such as broken concrete or asphalt, shall not be allowed unless specifically authorized in advance by the Engineer. Where additional materials are required to formulate the street sub- base to the cross section denoted in the plans, said additional material shall be Gravel Borrow. * The maximum size of stone for geosynthetic reinforced walls or slopes shall be 100 percent passing 1 1/4 inch square sieve and 90 to 100 percent passing 1 inch square sieve. All other sieve values continue to apply. SECTION 9-03. 17 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.17 Foundation Material Class I and Class I I Foundation Material Class I and Class I I shall be used to replace unsuitable material removed from unstable pipe trench bottoms. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Foundation Material Class I and Class I I shall conform to the following gradations: Percent Passing Sieve Size Class I Class II 6" square 100 --- 4" square --- 100 2" square 0 65-85 1 " square --- 40-70 1/4" square --- 20 max All percentages are by weight. In addition, all rock shall be sound, angular ledge rock or recycled cement concrete pavement meeting the following specifications. Suppliers of recycled cement concrete products shall have a quality assurance program reviewed and approved by the City. Each rock or piece of recycled cement concrete pavement shall have at least two fractured faces. Adsorption 3% max (Corps of Engineers CRD-C-107) Accelerated Expansion (15) days 15% max Soundness 5% max loss Density (solid volume) 155 pcf min Specific Gravity 2.48 min 9-03.21 Recycled Material SECTION 9-03.21(1)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.21 (1)D Recycled Steel Furnace Slag Steel Furnace Slag shall not be used for any purposes. 9-13 RI'PRAP, QUARRY SPALLS, SLOPE PROTECTION, AND ROCK FOR EROSION AND SCOUR PROTECTION AND ROCK WALLS SECTION 9-13 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-13.8 Rock for Ditches Rocks for ditches shall meet the following requirements for grading: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-301 2 i Sieve Size Percent Passing 12" 95, to 100 6" 40 to 60 3" 10 to 20 3/4" 0 to 5 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING 9-14.1 Topsoil -SECTION 9-14. 1(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.1(1) Topsoil Type A Topsoil Type A (Compost Amended Planting Soil) shall consist of 50 — 67% sand and/or sandy loam and 33 — 50% composted organic material by volume. Total organic matter shall be at least 5% by dry weight for areas where turf will be installed, and at least 10% by dry weight for all other landscape areas. Organic matter shall be determined by Loss-on-Ignition test. Acceptable tests include the most current version of ASTM D2974 "Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils," and TMECC 05.07A "Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method." Compost-Amended Planting soil shall not contain any viable seeds or roots capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weed, or invasive root-propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, ivy, clematis, knotweed, Scots broom, reed canary grass, Himalayan blackberry, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. A. The soil shall meet the following requirements, 1 . The mixed soil shall meet the following gradation; -...._..._.--......................... ... Screen Percent Size * Passinci 2 inch 100 1 inch 99-100 5/81, 90 — 100 1/4" 75-100 _ *Maximum particle length of 6 inches B. Shall have a pH range between 5.5 and 8.5. The pH shall be determined by soil test. C. Organic material shall consist of composted yard debris or organic waste material composted for a minimum of 3 months. Compost shall consist of 100% recycled content and meet all requirements for compost in section 9-14.4(8) of the Standard Specifications. D. Submit a certified laboratory analysis from an accredited soils testing laboratory indicating the Material source and compliance with 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number 16-3012 all planting soil and compost specifications to the Engineer or project Ecologist for approval no less than seven (7) days before delivery to the Project Site. The analysis shall be with a sample size of no less than 2 pounds. E. Site specific soil testing (after placement of material) may be required for projects requiring more than 50 cubic yards of compost- amended planting soil A Contractor provided accredited laboratory approved by the Engineer shall make recommendations for amendments required for optimum growth at no cost to the owner. The Contractor will be allowed five (5) Working Days to complete the testing from the time of written notice given by the Engineer. F. A sample of the compost amended planting soil shall be provided to the Engineer or project Ecologist in a 1 -gallon re-closable bag at least seven (7) days prior to application. SECTION 9-14.1(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION. 9-14.1 (1)C Sandy Loam Sandy loam shall consist of soil having a maximum clay content of ten percent by weight. In addition, soil particles shall meet the following requirements for grading: Passing 1 inch sieve (square opening) ...___ 100% Passing 1 mm sieve .................................. 80% minimum Passing 0,15 mm sieve .............................. 15% maximum SECTION 9-14.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING_ 9-14.2 Seed Hydroseed: Seed shall be "Blue Tag" or certified quality. The Contractor shall deliver in unopened containers with mixture seed content and inert material content plainly marked on the outside of the container. Grasses used shall meet the following specifications: Mix A (Roadside and Erosion Control Grass): Weight Seed Mix 'A" Min. % Min. % Max, Pr000rtion Ingredient Pure Seed Germination Weed Seed ._..........._,�......__.......... _- 40% Perennial Rvegrass 98% 90% 0.5% 40% Creeping Red Fescue 98% 85% 0.5% ......... ..........._... . 10% Colonial Bentarass 98% 90% 0.50/0 10% White Dutch Clover 98% 90% 0.5% (Pre-inoculated) 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 5 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Mix B (Landscaped Area Grass): g Min. /° Max. /° Weight Seed Mix "B" Min. % ° Proportion Ingredient Pure Seed Germination Weed Seed 15% Creeuincl Red Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 100/0 Chewings Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 40% Perennial Rvearass 95% 90% 0.5% 20% Alta Tall Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 15% Annual Ryeqrass 95% 90% 0.5% The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance for seed. A complete analysis of the seed shall be submitted to the City for approval including percent of pure seed, germination, other crop seed, inert and weed and the germination test date. The City reserves the right to reject any or all plant material at any time until final inspection or acceptance. The Contractor shall remove rejected plants immediately from site. The Contractor shall produce upon request sales receipt for all nursery stock and certificates of inspection. SECTION 9-14.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.3 Fertilizer Fertilizer for trees: Fertilizer shall consist of slow-release commercial fertilizer (6-10-8). Fertilizer for upland seeded areas: Lilly Miller or approved equal to provide the following nutrients: All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation: Total available Nitrogen ........... 16% of weight (of which 50% is derived from ureaform) Total available Phosphorous ..... 16% of weight Total available Potassium ......... 16% of weight Fertilizer for wetland seeded areas: All areas which are seeded in wetlands or in detention ponds shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation: Total available nitrogen ........... 21% (Analyzed as N) Available phosphorous......,....„. 0% (Analyzed as P205) Available potassium ................ 10% (Analyzed as K20) Above percentages are proportioned by weight. The Contractor shall deliver fertilizer to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade 640 Pressure Zane Booster Station/Bond 9 - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 name, trade mark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information. 9-14.4 Mulch and Amendments SECTION 9-14.4(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.4(8) Compost Compost shall not contain any sawdust, straw, green or under- composed organic matter, under-sterilized manure or toxic or otherwise harmful materials. SECTION 9-14.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.4(12) Wood Cellulose Fiber Wood cellulose mulch shall be specially processed 100 percent virgin wood fiber containing no growth or germination-inhibiting ingredients. It shall be manufactured in such a manner that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with water, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogenous slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material shall allow the absorption and percolation of moisture. Wood cellulose fiber shall be Weyerhaeuser Silva-Fiber Plus w/Tackifier or approved equal. Organic matter content shall be at least 93 percent on an oven-dry basis as determined by ASTM D 586. The moisture content shall be no more than 15 percent as determined by oven dried weight. Each package of the cellulose fiber shall be marked by the manufacturer to show the dried weight content. 9-14.6 Plant Materials 9-14.6(1) Description 9-14.7 Stakes, Guys, and Wrapping SECTION 9-14.7 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.7(1) Tree Ties Tree ties shall be patent "Tre-Ties" sufficient in size and number to adequately support the trees as determined by Quentin Poil, Nursery Supervisor at 253-856-5127. 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 9-30.1 Pipe 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i SECTION 9-30. 1(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BYADD/NG THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.1 (1) Ductile Iron Pipe Pipe for water mains shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron Class 52 and conforming to the latest revisions to the ANSI specifications. Connections shall be mechanical or push-on joint with rubber gaskets unless otherwise specified on the plans. 9-30.2 Fittings SECTION 9-30.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Cast or ductile iron pipe fittings shall have the same coating, lining and strength as the pipes to which they are connected. Fittings shall be flanged or mechanical joint. Mechanical joint fitting gaskets shall be vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber gaskets (SBR) in accordance with the most current version of AWWA standard C111/A21 .11 . Flanged joint fitting gaskets shall be full face synthetic rubber gaskets appropriate to meet the required pressure rating in accordance with the most current versionof AWWA standard C115/A21 .15. 9-30.3 Valves SECTION 9-30.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 to 16 Inches) Gate valves shall be resilient wedge gate type as manufactured by Clow, American Darling, Waterous, Dresser M&H, Mueller or an approved equal, with epoxy-coated valve interiors. They shall conform to AWWA specifications C-509, and shall have a working pressure rating of 250 psi, unless otherwise specified in the Kent Special Provisions. They shall be iron bodied bronze mounted, non-rising stem, and counterclockwise opening. Valve stems shall be provided with O-ring seals. SECTION 9-30.3(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried valves and conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-7M. The box shall be of cast iron, 2-piece design with a base corresponding to the size of the valve and the top section. The box shall be coal-tar painted by the manufacturer using industry standards. The valve box top section shall be an Olympic Foundry No. 940. The cover shall be an Olympic Foundry deep skirt No. 940 IDS, have the word "WATER" cast into it, and shall be of the non-locking type, unless a locking cover is specifically called for in the Kent Special 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 8 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Provisions or shown on the plans. The bottom section shall be an Olympic VB-1C or approved equal. A 3 feet x 3 feet x 6 inches concrete pad, flush with finish grade, shall be poured around each valve box top section not located within asphalt or concrete finished areas. Valve box covers shall have the lugs or stainless cap screws installed parallel to the direction of water flow. SECTION 9-30,3(5) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts Valve marker posts shall be constructed of Class 3000 cement concrete; shall be 4-inches by 4-inches by 42-inches long with a 6-1/4 inch by 4-inch base; shall cunfain une nurribei 3 reinfurcernenL bar ; and shall otherwise conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-4M. The exposed portion of the marker posts shall be coated with two coats of WHITE concrete paint. The FOG-TITS valve marker post is the pre-approved marker post. SECTION 9-30-3(6) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions Valve stem extensions shall conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-7M, Valve stem operating nuts shall be no shallower than one and one-half (1 1/2) feet. Valves with an operating nut more than 3 feet below finished grade shall have a solid steel valve stem extension rod assembly, with a rock guard, installed on the operating nut. SECTION 9-30.5 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5 Hydrants Fire hydrants shall be compression type, break-away (traffic model) hydrants conforming to AWWA C502 except as modified herein. Hydrant types shall be, Clow Medallion, M & H 929, or Mueller Super Centurion. SECTION 9-30-5(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions Hydrants shall conform with Kent Standard Plan 3-1 M. Valves and Nozzles — Fire hydrants should have a bottom valve size of at least five inches, one 4-1/2 inch pumper nozzle and two 2-1/2 inch nozzles shall have NST threads, with 1 -1/4 inch pentagonal nuts. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 9 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i Painting - Public owned hydrants shall be painted with two (2) coats of Farwest Wonderglow Quickset #1000 (white gloss alkyd enamel). Private hydrants shall be painted with two (2) coats of Farwest Wonderglow Quickset #X 3472 (case yellow gloss alkyd enamel). SECTION 9-30.5(6) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5(6) Guard Posts Guard posts shall be constructed of Class 3000 cement concrete; shall be 6-feet long and 9-inches in diameter; shall have 5 equally spaced number 3 reinforcement bars with a minimum of 1-112 inch cover; and shall otherwise conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-3M. The FOG-TITE hydrant guard post is the pre-approved guard post. All other posts require the approval of the Engineer. SECTION 9-30.6 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6 Service Connections 9-30.6(1) Saddles The body casting of saddles for service connections shall be of malleable or ductile iron, extending at least 160 degrees around the circumference of the pipe at the maximum range and at least 180 degrees when the saddle is tightened on the water main. The saddle body and/or straps shall be stamped with the size range of the saddle. The saddle shall have a groove for the neoprene or nitril gasket in order to prevent gasket movement. The saddle is to be tapped with an I.P. thread. The "U" straps shall conform to the outside diameter of the range stamped on the saddle. The service saddle shall be manufactured by Smith Blair, Romac, or Mueller. Service saddles shall be either double strapped or stainless steel full circumference band. 9-30.6(2) Corporation Stops All corporation stops shall be Ford ballcorp style. The following Ford model numbers shall be used for the respective sizes stated. Ford Corporation Stops Size Ford Model Number 3/4—in ch FB500-3 1 inch FB500-4 ........................ 1 1/2 inch FB500-6 2inch FB500-7 Connection to service pipes shall be by Ford pack joints (Section 9-30.6(4)) only. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 10 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 SECTION 9-30.6(3)B IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING; 9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe Polyethylene service pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) ultra-high molecular weight, high density polyethylene plastic meeting or exceeding the following standards: ID ASTM D-2239, SIDR-7, and PE 3408, AWWA C-901 , AWWA C-800, and National Sanitation Foundation Standards and conforming to all other applicable standards. This polyethylene pipe shall be rated at or above a working pressure of 200 psi. Polyethylene plastic pipe shall have a manufactured stainless steel insert stiffener at all compression packjoints. Driscopipe 5100 Ultra-Lien water pipe is an approved product meeting the above specifications. All other products require approval of the City Water Department after submittal of a sample length of pipe and the manufacturer's product literature. The City is not responsible for the purchase of materials not meeting the above specifications. SECTION 9-30.6(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings Ford Pack Joint Couplings (hereinafter Ford Pack Joint Couplings or Pack Joint Couplings) shall be used to connect the service line pipe to the corporation stop and meter setter at both ends. When the plans call for the installation of a new service line from the water main to the setter and/or new setter, the connection between the new service line on the private side of the setter and the existing private service line the Contractor shall use an adaptor. If the existing service line is long enough to connect to the setter directly without the need of an adaptor, a pack joint coupling shall be used for the connection to the setter. Packjoint couplings shall make a tight and permanentjoint on type K copper tubing or polyethylene plastic pipe as appropriate. Pack joint couplings shall be made of bronze, and shall have a gasket or 0-ring. Fittings used for copper and/or polyethylene tubing shall be Ford pack joint type only. Ford stainless steel stiffeners shall be used when utilizing compression fittings on polyethylene tubing. Insert Stiffeners The following table is a summary of the insert stiffeners that shall be utilized for the respective pipe sizes stated. Ford Insert Stiffeners _ Size Ford Model Number ...... ......... ........._ ......., „ „ ......... .............. 3/4 inch Insert-71 _._.......................... - 1 inch Insert-72 1 112 inch Insert-74 2..._nc.h..... .... Insert-75 _........................._.. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 11 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i Pack Joint Couplings The following table is a summary of Ford pack joint couplings that shall be utilized for the respective pipe sizes and types stated. _......m.m.m.m.m...................................... ..............._........... . ......... Ford Pack Joint for Straight CTS Pipe Ford Model Number Male Iron Pipe P.J. for CTS C84-34 3/4 inch 1 inch C84-44 1 inch 1 inch C84-66 1 1/2 inch 1 112 inch C84-77 2 inch 2 inch ........................ Ford Pack Joint for Polvethvlene Pipe Ford Model Number Male Iron Pipe P.J. for PEP C86-34 3/4 inch 1 inch C86-44 1 inch 1 inch ------ .._... m.--- C86-66-IDR7 1 1/2 inch 1 1/2 inch C86-77-IDR7 2 inch 2 inch SECTION 9-30.6(5) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(5) Meter Setters Meter setters shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable parts of AWWA C800. Meter setters shall have dual-purpose end connections for iron pipe thread male adapters on both ends. The meter setter shall have a brace pipe eye to hold the setter vertical. The setter shall be equipped with an angle shut off valve with padlock wings, and on the outgoing side a check valve to prevent backflow. The check valve shall be spring loaded, of brass and stainless steel construction with a removable back for maintenance purposes. In no case shall residential meter stops be equipped with a bypass. The following meter setters shall be used for the respective size meter setter listed: Meter Setter Size Type 3/4 inch Ford VH72 15W_11-33 1 inch _ Ford VH74-15W-11 -44 ..............w 1 1/2 inches Ford VBH76-15B-11-66 L/BP 2 inch Ford VFH77-15B-11-77 L/BP SECTION 9-30.6(7) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes Meter box requirements vary with respect to water meter size and location of the meter box. Meter boxes shall be as follows: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 12 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Meter Box Meter Size Location Type .......� 3/4 inch 'Planters Cars 1220 on -12 Sidewalks, Olympic Foundry driveways, #SM29 pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas _......_......_...................................................................................... m.....-.....................-................... .._._.. Meter Box __Meter Size Location Type 1 inch 'Planters Carson 1220-12 Sidewalks, Olympic Foundry driveways, #SM30 pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas 1 1/2 inch to 2 'Planters Carson 1730-15 inch Sidewalks, Olympic Foundry driveways, #SM30 pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas 3 inch and larger Concrete vaults per Kent Standard Plan __ 3-12a and 3-12b All plastic boxes shall be constructed of black polyethylene. I rriqation Box .._. DCVA or PRV Size Type 3/4 inch to 1 inch and Carson 1324-15G all PRV's Green solid lid 1324-21- .................................................w. Extension Boxes - 6 Carson 1324B-IL inch 1 1/4 inch to 2 inch Carson 1730C-1B for 15 inch high Carson 1730D-1 B for 18 inch high Green solid lid 1730-P21 SECTION 9-30.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-30.6(8) Water Meters Water meters 5/8 inch x 3/4 inch to 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the City Water Department. The City Water Department will not provide or set the water meter(s) until the Contractor has obtained the necessary permit(s), paid all associated fees, and receives a request from the project inspector. All water meters larger than 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. All 5/8 x 3/4 and full 3/4 meters shall be the short pattern. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 13 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 All water meters regardless of their respective size shall register in cubic feet. The following table is a list of respective meter sizes and meter types. Meter Size Type 5/8 inch x 3/4 inch Invensys SR 3/4 inch Invensys SR ................_ u 1 inch Invensys SR inch Invensys SR 2 inch Invensys SR 3 inch to 6 inch Invensys SRH Compound Compound meters for service connections 3 inches and larger shall be installed within a concrete vault and be constructed in accordance with Kent Standard Plan 3-12a and 3-12b. After installation of the compound meter, a certified testing laboratory shall certify the accuracy of the meter. A copy of the certification report shall be provided to the Kent Water Department. 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond 9 - 14 October 31, 2018 Project Number, 16-3012 I KENT STANDARD PLANS The following Kent Standard Plans supplement all other plans, which have been prepared for this project and are considered to be a part of the project plans. WATER 3-1 M Standard Fire Hydrant 3-3M Guard Post 34M Valve Marker Post 3-7M Valve Box and Operating Nut Extender 3-9aM Concrete Blocking 3-9bM Concrete Blocking 3-10M Service Connection 1 " Service 3-12a Compound Water Meter with By-pass (Sheet 1 of 2) 3-12b Compound Water Meter with By-pass (Sheet 2 of 2) 3-15M Irrigation/Booster Pump Installation 3-19M Standard 6" Blowoff Assembly 3-20M 2", 4" and 6" Combination Air/Vacuum Valve and Vault 3-22M Typical Water Main Trench STORN4 5-1M Catch Basin Type I STREET 6-55M Street Tree in Planter 6-64M Flexible Pavement Patching Transverse Cut 6-65M Portland Cement Pavement Patching Transverse Cut 6-66M Flexible Pavement Patching Longitudinal Cut 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 1 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 W W K Q Q a � Q 4 w W Y Q LL O J � O m V U W 2 w W p �. Z z a Q w p 2 p g E W LL 0 Z w M .. 2 0 K Ul y N O z V y ., w N > O Z Q O z f U a a LL w Y m N 2 F p 0 a K g HIiI w U W W Q� O Z W H H J W w lWL ¢ u LL Q aw [LpQ ¢ _ZJK O Zw pH p O O W vi pLL Q Z' W J V O Z w ¢ Z 1n ".¢ u Q w L�j u.i ^ a ¢ FwX UFO FS- U ¢ z H � K M O w w iwWi. cm) p F vl w w w w KY � Z tJ/1a xUl � r d � CC OR p = � � K = ow -- O J 5X � � � o ¢p � � � � LL K Q w x .. w .. O Q pw ¢ LL m C K H V m LL E J E a j 0 Y w w w w w w Q 4 Q > LD O m LL F Q H N Q j w a �.-.> 4 ........ w w aHOp � w w3 ¢Z �i W > IW CwU > 6w KUtn ¢ � M w W m p w p zK O w F w > u) � 0 ¢= p W < m W zw p .� z W V � W VI � O K03 m ,yam OZ W = oUpw >WO o Q LLw, W WH dwwy l~Zh Q K Ln 16 rlm of rn � a w w { z < 4 z LL o -. ..::................. _MINu } J o v z ¢ ',.2T UJ~I WE m WFm tiZw � �p• `+\� _w�d O HZY J W\ � =C7 p ZZ 0 K O .H2. WO ¢ V) U W O ¢ ¢O o Z ¢JW 0O ¢ Z HV - Q = 2 ¢ > z ¢ V "o 4 W WC Nwp (wV7 NU' Y .. S W K p < I� Yw Z � SwQ Q m J Z Q 0 - .� Z � In LV9 = v1 d' p OOa W JQ oHX F � KZlz Q B V = K � 0 > = W W o .: HK JOQ Q wp0 in0 ¢ ~ w V U az pwm w0 ui z ¢ LLO ¢ ur � r " zwz m m Z LL' V V ^p Z z¢ gN � waFLf; li t K Z W � op Q W Z a 2 Q 2 W Q p > S Z E V W u' toQ = 0 i O ¢ W O Q p Q H V J PI 4 p J 01- W O W W m G' "¢ 0 ¢ w O Q > Qom' z = pu~iQ 0 O U 0 w Q m �...._.C -W V "� V wOFzC F d W H Z � LLZ w O V' Q W W x O z ¢z 4 w a za 0 QJQO QYIf \+�\ Z Q w ti' a KtHitw � � Z Z � � F z0 V ~ W Z W F LL V Q J \ O C RD W U Y M Q O J 7 ¢z 6 N � ¢ o LL' w w � V ',.m Kp2 ZfM Eo1�1 �m N�� WIL Wa� } SZ pQypj Zd Uwmp oc wQ ZnLLrN,z ti� w� vuwrli JU=iOJ� NzuiEz D ao �dd OQ O O O ODz OgOVQ aQuLL2E-'' H�HUwI�Z X ¢ oO Q >p0 V> 00iU �W= N2 ITJ M O2R- OmoO V w NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT 4' NOMINAL r^ RE ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BYTHE �. �� ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT - ou ��'' Wt1,r9%.l�r�SYf.. THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, # �\ � CITY KENT W w ENGINEERINGNG DEPARTMENT ¢ H 1 �. ................ ...._._............w z 0i o w , , 1,^ s rw/ ,� O T STANDARD FIRE HYDRANT LL Z w ~~,,.�� 'A e 3829.6�y�("y � COK ..._ ...,.,_ — STANDARD FLAN P - SCALE___„„ NONE 6 DRAWN _._._._.- 'Y JO,IYAL ti> C� IGHEWED AUK DA_T_E LARCH, 201fl 3-1M IAPPRWED EIVGWEER 4'x4'x4"THICK CONCRETE PAD GUARD POST REQUIRED AROUND HYDRANT PER 1' _ —.3'x3'x4"THICK CONCRETE PAD REQUIRED STANDARD PLAN 3-1. 2%MAX. AROUND VALVE PER STANDARD PLAN 3-1. SLOPE AWAY FROM HYDRANT TYP. 2% MAX. SLOPE AWAY FROM VALVE TYP. ON PADS, SEE NOTE 5.-4 �. ---- '` - .�,, SEE NOTE S. 5- #3 REINFORCEMENT ti BARS; CLASS 3000 PRECAST CONCRETE--- FIR E HYDRANT_ � 3' MIN. if it _ 3 MIN r o CLEARANCE .. - G I ,i u _ ....._. .... , 110 IS LID ., WPIIR MAIN B , T LOWER LIMIT oa 2 MIN.TYP, 1, FOR PAINT " z a z —GUARD POST 3'MIN TYP, C, ALL SIDE$ . 1 , 3' MIN.TYP. C-;y In PROVIDE HAND �i,""`.'�'`' ALL SIDES RAIL IF GREATE777 R �� THAN 2 6 CUT FILL HYDRANT LOCATION (CUT OR FILL) NOTES; 1. THE FOG-TITE HYDRANT GUARD POST IS PRE-APPROVED.ALL OTHERS REQUIRE N.T.S. WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION 2. GUARD POST ARE INSTALLED WITH TOPS SET AT THE SAME HEIGHT AS THE HYDRANT. IF MORE THAN ONE POST IS SET, THEY SHALL BE SET AT THE SAME HEIGHT. 3. PAINT EXPOSED POST THE SAME COLOR,TYPE AND NUMBER OF COATS AS THE FIRE HYDRANT. SEE STANDARD PLAN 3-1 4. SEE STANDARD PLAN 3-1 FOR FIRE HYDRANT DETAILS. 5. CONCRETE FINISH SHALL MATCH NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL.ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT SURROUNDING STYLE. WHERE AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE,THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE ADJACENT CONCRETE DOES NOT ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT EXIST THE SURFACE SHALL BE 6Y WA�"AJ,rrs� THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST EBROOMDGE( HINE) INCLUDING A 4° CITY NG KENT EDGE(SHINE)AT PERIMITER. P1�j W b„� ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 6. GUARD POST SHALL BE LOCATED '�y�38296 ____ c .,ra OUTSIDE OF THE CLEAR ZONE. SEE KENT GUARD POST STANDARD PLAN 6-50. "' `�'C7fis"7'9' DESIGNED GOD _G NONE_ _NDARD PVN ---. ,S'ATrYp U"� cNEcreD sa _ Ivan oa ,enit .3-3M NAL _... APPROVED iF'me¢rH 4` 94°� r/r,.-------DIRECTIONAL ARROW°--- - --m ----J_...___,°°° FROM TYPICAL 2" HIGH BLACK �I DISTANCE FROM STENCIL MARKINGS ON / MARKER MAIN f.� THIS FACE ONLY. HOMERIGHT PAINT TO MAIN � _.._ coN�R�E INDICATES SIZE( V \ � C�SS 3o0o OF VALVE \ n 5PRI To Vpr F�NlSNR��� fog DISTANCETO VALVE y � � 3.� BLOWOFF CPAT5 A OAR Po�+ 140 PAINT STANNvpf) �ofe FAR t, M+ ------- PRECAST UNITS INCLUDE ° W�� RECESSED STAMP FOR TYPE ..... A R � ..._ � #3 R�NRNRcgO O R / lip. ti �11Q 53,60 NOTES: 1. FOR USE ON EASEMENTS OR WHENEVER THE WATER VALVE IS LOCATED IN AN UNPAVED AREA. 2. THE FOG TITS INC.VALVE MARKER NOTE; THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT POST WITH THE"WATER"LEGEND IS AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE THE PRE-APPROVED PRODUCT, ALL Y �° ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT OTHERS REQUIRE THE WRITTEN S l'�Y °A+Sf?' THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER PRIOR CITY OF KENT TO INSTALLATION. CITY y" CJ ENGINEERING, DEPARTMENT 3. LOCATE BEHIND WALK WHEN PRESENT OR BEYOND ROADWAY VALVE MARKER POST CLEAR ZONE. "� � 382e6 W� ��` °^.ry TdS'P1 °,yk} DEsicNFn .caK SCALE NONE STANDARD FLAN y{ �GIVAI. CHECKED A( _°° DATE 03 2015 3-4M APPROVED ErvcinEEn i - OLYMPIC FOUNDRY VB C/L 940 WITH TWO (2)INCH "DEEP SKIRT"COVER. THE COVER SHALL BE MARKED "WATER". SEE SLOPE AWAY 2%MAX(TYR) NOTES 3, 4,AND S. v 3' ,..w n,"" 4" SEE NOTE 3 n CARE SHALL BE TAKEN IN BACKFILL OPERATIONS ENSURING OPERATING NUT ,,., r M WATER MAIN IS IN CENTER AT ALL TIMES w - WATER �- `".,�, -IyI� DIRECTION BASE SECTION: RICH 24" �'T M !f�'OPERATGNG z Y k ___. '1 n.. _... .._.�.!... _... VALVE BOX BOTTOM, NUT EXTENDER .� AS NEEDED OLYMPIC NO.VB1C OR �C' n, aIf4 PRE-APPROVED EQUAL AND III (BELOW RIGHT) SHALL BE COMPATIBLE B: WITH TOP SECTION ¢ - -3'x3'x4"THICK CONCRETE > (3,000 PSI)PAD AROUND VALVE COVER IN UNPAVED AREAS PLAN VIEW 2" SQUARE OPERATING NUT C t i ! 1 1 E i ---ROCK GUARD, 4 1/4" DIA. t i 1/8" MIN,THICK 0 x w F- o VALVE BOX WITH z w w z OPERATING NUT EXTENDER J NOTES: -3/4"SOLID 1, EXTENSIONS ARE REQUIRED WHEN STEEL ROD, VALVE NUT IS MORE THAN THREE (3) FEET BELOW FINISHED GRADE. 2. EXTENSIONS SHALL BE SIZED AS NEEDED,AND PAINTED WITH TWO(2) COATS OF METAL PAINT. 3. EARS, LUGS OR STAINLESS CAP OPERATING NUT EXTENDER SCREWS (TRANSMISSION MAINS NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A'LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT ONLY)ON COVER SHALL BE ALIGNED AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE WITH DIRECTION OF WATER FLOW, �N"FR�I h ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT SEE PLAN VIEW. ?S p IM1'Y s1„'Af,.yra THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, 4. FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND 'S"'„c�'u' �p`'r1 CENGGINEINEERINNGG I` KENO' DEPARTMENT USE SEE CITY OF KENT DESIGN AND � �. �'' � ��.............�. CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3.193 �. VALVE BOX AND AND C OR KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS +�+� RbNT OPERATING NUT EXTENDER 9-30.3(4)AND(6). •<s SB29n / ";'" WA." "o.o. ^Po "`„,A- ,,V',F'/ Ozslrwc® col, _, _ ...... ._ 1�➢S r-r' .S SCALE raogE ernPwnF9 Fv.iv 5. VALVE BOX SHALL BE CENTERED OVER �;3r L,"+' mAWL—COK 2"SQUARE OPERATING NUT, ' /ONAL '�' CHECKED ,. DA1I rggmqnar aoifl a Fx� 3-7M STRAP DETAIL BELOW TYPE A BLOCKING VB S -...._ -----�.-.. ._ e....__. .. L BENDS �. FOR 111/y' AND 22� VERTICAL d L FUSION BONDED EPDXY COATED SHACKLE RODS(TYP.)-- o w LG -� m w p ,zu as < � um 0w LLou '. W � u Nr 1Zr W w O W v O Q Z O Z Z z O w W W O O ll1 Q W d F > " L f 8 2.... 18 4" 11 22 12 2/ II 12 2Y, 300 22 27 3 24 11 Y, 16 211, I ;s $ °✓ 223/� 43 3y 9 '.x w 12" 11% 64 4 1 36 14 FUSION BONDED EPDXY S a^) COATED SHACKLE RODS (TYP.)---_' _ TYPE A STRAPf DETAIL � wy;,r _.... ... ........... ., 6 r��r TYPE B BLOCKING .�•+ f FOR 450 VERTICAL BENDS d O � ww \a Z S w N Q C W w K rf rNr u F 2 F W O m Q `. O Q Z VI C Z O C V Mi a F O Ul Q w n xl 1, 4 3 6" 64 4 %4 20 8„ 300 45 125 5 �.._ S ........_...._.„..,� 12T 216 6 1 30 RR TYPE B NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT ''.. AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. � _ l CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT `w.✓' RENT CONCRETE BLOCKING d 38296 fydHp DESIGNED colt s soAI.E I'- srANOnaD t'W, rA� I �, S owss cap --- --- — - �(f,rylA1, U CHECKED DATE MARCF�_2U,8 E7iiEg 3-9aM aFFF«VED WRAP PIPE AND FITTINGS WITH 8-MIL POLYETHYLENE SHEETING AS BOND BREAK ,+ BETWEEN PIPES AND ,+ CONCRETETHRUST BLOCK F f .._. - ✓_--CONCRETE THRUST + y BLOCK VERT FL OF PIPE AND BLOCK BOTTOM FACE THRUST BLOCK AREA REFERS TO THE BOTTOM FACE OF BLOCK MEASURED IN SQUARE FEET.--m.m.m..-_...... _.. ...� �'^...., TYPE C TYPE C BLOCKING FOR 11 Y44", 22 Y2",450,AND 900 VERTICAL BENDS THRUST BLOCK AREA IN SQUARE FEET PIPE FIRM SILT OR COMPACT SAND .NOTES: ' SIZE FIRM SILTY SAND COMPACT SAND AND GRAVEL 1. LOCATION AND SIZE OF BLOCKING FOR PIPE LARGER THAN 12" d o o a DIAMETER AND FOR SOIL TYPES DIFFERENT THAN SHOWN o a ¢ a SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER. 2 ALL BLOCKING FOR VERTICAL FITTINGS (POURED IN PLACE) ti .z. rnm in w Qm rn m Ynw am `" m � ¢ am SHALL BEAR AGAINST UNDISTURBED NATIVE GROUND. 3. ALL POURED THRUST BLOCKS SHALL BE BACKFILLED AFTER a MIN. 1 DAY. PRESSURE TESTING SHALL OCCUR AFTER CONCRETE HAS REACHED MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH. 4" 5.8 4.2 1,7 2.9 2.1 1.0 2.2 1.6 1.0 4. ALL BLOCKING SHALL BE COMMERCIAL CLASS 3000 CONCRETE. 6" 133 9.4 3.8 6.7 4.7 1.9 5.0 3.5 1,4 S. AFTER INSTALLATION, SHACKLE RODS AND PIPE SADDLES SHALL BE CLEANED AND COATED WITH 2 COATS OF ASPHALTIC 8" 23.3 16.7 6.7 11.7 8.4 3.4 8.8 6.3 2.5 VARNISH, ROYSTON ROYKOTE#612M OR APPROVED EQUAL. 6. SHACKLE RODS SHALL BE FUSION BONDED EPDXY COATED 12" 53.0 37.5 15.0 26.5 18.8 7.5 20.0 14,0 5.6 ROUND MILD STEEL,ASTM A 36,WITH THREADS ON ENDS ONLY. AREAS CALCULATED ON 300 PSI TEST PRESSURE AND T-0" MIN COVER OVER WATER MAIN 7. BLOCKING AGAINST FITTINGS SHALL BEAR AGAINST THE GREATEST FITTING SURFACE AREA POSSIBLE, BUT SHALL NOT COVER OR ENCLOSE BELL ENDS,]DINT BOLTS OR GLANDS. REASONABLE ACCESS TO BOLTS AND GLANDS SHALL BE PROVIDED. NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT F R�, AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE I ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT '' Y WA,° RYA THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. a �i � CITY OF KENT ...... .....................................ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 4'a _.._.... KEAI? CONCRETE BLOCKING as9s 0 4` o. p� •A'' e ICI u w l: COK '.... . OI S P DRAW - SCALE Lowe 5FANLARD Puns 4y` tONAL Y, 4^r ETEe .FED LANE HAPCFL291a 3-9b Amwovm .e .-_,.. ms- r-- I-- -----� 3NIl 1N3W3S`d3 aO 1.1a3d0ad z N > w a F u� M/S RzR a a z J U J V W K Q ¢ W at~nC z o NTvw aa1vM o a p O w w m K z U w O Ow0 HN V7 W wZ 02 � > aYUt w � w �nwtn � � w wm w a (= Fw vi G � w 0 0 u z O Q Q p2 a Z w 2 -0 O 0 tiQd w Orw z � Oi H� z x m w w w O C w O J - m Z Z Z V U w I W V 1N3W35V3 _ x p c ¢ Y o m aw a0,LLa3d0ad ., o o a N W W Z O ',. J Z a _ CC C J W U J m W �a'"",.. 'r.•."'w... Z c mU' Otn EZm x O 2 H r p O c w IIYII ui " p O O z F Q w w UI O7 V1 O F W Q C z � g inuw V wz � "' a ¢ � I- W d w_ IUI Z W u J W o J J o Q a 0 Z m x m mo o Q wz s LL vQi w w ........ o o g ., p k J Nz Q `L U] l F p❑ N Q W U LL j t A 0 N d w w W Y O w4J ............. zm O O Z V U l F O K o H ZO F w H W Z = O LL w wwJ ZH Ow O - zp wwW 0 > G NO C7 God �00wwU ww JJZ UZw r�2z z„� Z Z m aY Y w LLti '-' O •• � �. W JQ W F C LLQJ VI p w2� O O m 3 w O C z wmz0 w `• z J J 1K � p < ¢ O w [C M QX w On W � � Z Oww � Z 0_ Z YZ xQ Z F- Y w Z w 0 was Z O Fa wO x w O " w 0 F w p w m w S V m H r z g V U m3 � u �zw oMc, w a � �aa orIn a go O G Q Q W aa' w� m 0wK w¢ O 0 G Z oW ' . mo w w z0' a w o O w N OQ oUFOQ V <�ZwJ 3�WioZn �0G2ZX QQw v] 16 o � � __30Va0 03HSINI3 MO139 Z ....-J.'-�.'" m NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT 3 rw- C a F R f,,`, AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE w z cN w t,r -[ ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT 5 THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. V a4 CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT .................SERVICE CONNECTION ,i� 1" SERVICE `"v,�a O.�S1'1: "t ",SyL 'oE i.NEo c"u'k X _............. ',,. ..AA E rANoow P�N I�YYD �"y CHEDRACKED LISP DAFF FEBRUARY ........................... GALE ON n aT `°' --- 3—1 0 M APPROVED EN°weer, 4'4' (4484 LA) 5 0 (5106 LA) Q J Y y n U p 4 O w LL p a N O w Q U } F W U wow (9 J = x k e U V ti LL ¢ 0 ' o W awe w I=- w a a z 2 3 x N z U � ;o z Z Z W Z 2 dX ¢ ¢ O z Q Y pyLL „�„➢ F- w Z rD z N 4 \ O= g S ¢ Q~ H W O > O u vYLL � W S } Q W LL N Z Ul pW w j 0 < 4 4 � 0 p z s In NS W 0 LL a ui E O f \ ` W Q Q 2 Z W m Q J O W N Z Z 0 0 4 O p m > W N N u � ... ,..., }JIB s � ¢ � � zod 3 ra 4 f1/',/ O g O d. m (J] W U Z rl N M V !�W UI r LL n a O ry I V O cn > o '..NOTE: THIS PLAN 15 NOT A LEGAL.ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE _ ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. o CITY OF KENT z ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT COMPOUND WATER METER '000KENT WITH BY-PASS - 1 ° SHEET 1 OF 2 T. SCAIE> < DRAWN _ �UUK ... ._.,. E STANMRD PIAIJ 01 W 5 LCKLN DATL MARCAPPROVED J018 3-12a I I LLX C9 J m w I 1 < t 4 I _ Q wUlw Q > > J N.a � # U _ W � Q p d m ¢ z0 O K O Q H Y � � z � OO Oz O ¢ l9 J BOO w U X n w m 0 Z E .y ON O w > rL > 2 w w a < 5 5 � a z o o g z o > o 2 Q d A J J ¢ Z ce Q J w O d F J m ... (n J f Ul w Z K U W ¢ wok O O K m g ¢ YO OU z m > w z V > O Q z ¢ 3 r�i V LL 0 w ¢ OO W U O FOH ¢ O r,.....{... ..... z �n a w C7 U �n O � U V z I m O Z J U � Y N ✓l V O z z EL w z - w a m I . V x z v<<, G�G J w Z w K xa � o � � a tih 214934 -- O Q L' x NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING IDOCUMEN°I BU7 AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE c: iENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT IHE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, Z CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT ..:..... .... "rlMllll► AIG ....__... ........ ........ COMPOUND WATER METER T WITH BY—PASS LL w. SHEET 2 OF 2 . ... ....... 1(4484 LA) z -C of icNm � r srnNDnru� Pi niv .� DRAWN GOY SCALE—__ NONE g cHEC Eo DATE MARCH. 1018 wEEry-- 3- 1 2 b A rI�'JlD i TO LANDSCAPE P.R.V.IF REQUIRED IRRIGATION FOR IRRIGATION --DOUBLE CHECK -,- VALVE ASSEMBLY------ ---P.R.V. IF REQUIRED FOR BUILDING (SEE STANDARD DEDUCT METER PLAN 3-13) ........ PROPERTY LINE OR EASEMENT LINE DOMESTIC -INSTALL TEE WATER IRRIGATION METER WATER METER--""'� AFTER PROPERTY LINE TYPICAL DEDUCT TI`PICAL IRRIGATION/ INSTALLATION BOOSTER PUMP ONLY INSTALLATION 0 a IRRIGATION BOX, --METER BOX SEE NOTE 2 6"VALVE BOX - ( „ DEDUCT" y{� o I METER UNION (TYP.) QUICK COUPLER z ANGLE mmm SWING METER .,, JOINT—. ry STOP.--.w -4—CHECK ELL DOUBLE-I IRRIGATION MAINLINE CHECK VALVE 6 (SIZE VARIES) ASSEMBLY METER SETTER PIPE BRACE OPTIONAL �,4L�r'r1 +'„ +� �� a,F 1,r. PRESSURE REDUCING (OPTIONAL) r+""4+1 H" a`r l( Lr('" 7' VALVE LOCATION, IF +�t ^( REQUIRED FOR SERVICE LINE 12 LAYER IRRIGATION, PER FROM DOMESTIC PEA GRAVEL STANDARD PLAN 3-13 WATER NOTES: 1. DRAWINGS ARE ILLUSTRATIONS ONLY.SIZE OF METER AND INSPECTION LID--� BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE PER THE APPROVED PLANS (OPEN,TYP) 2. BOXES OR VAULTS SHALL BE PER SECTION 3.10.E. 3. BACKFLOW PREVENTION SHALL BE PER METER BOX SECTION 3.16 AND 3.18. 3.18 SHALL ONLY BE USED WHEN REQUIRED ON CITY OF KENT CAPITAL CONSTRUCTION NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT PROJECTS; SPECIFIC MATERIAL ANDRE' i AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE SIZE REQUIREMENTS WILL BE '� 'y ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT CONTRACTIDENTIFIED SPECIAL P OVISIONS ON THE PLANS ORy1 'UI' Wqq�,, THE CITY OF KENT.A COPC ITMAY Y BTOFD UPON KERNTST. OQ w /�/M,�.y, ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 4 FOR IRRIGATION USE ONLY INSTALLATION „THE .�.�. IRRIGATION/BOOSTER PUMP IRRIGATION BOX SHALL BE T INSTALLATION INSTALLED PRIOR TO THE METER IRS r 38296 @" BEING SET.THE DCVA CAN BE ` � I+[yk`%' �"� DESIGNED cm of KENT "'�""" CERTIFIED AFTER INSTALLATION "Sa5yta cilc rdoNE sTalloaRo PLhIJ tOM I, �. CHECKED crmr qE ukNr.... ...__.. T UATE JANUARY. 2018 OF THE METER. --..::- .._..—.,..._. `. .'"_.. J�—1 S M APPROVED cB h[ek SEE NOTE 1 _.. _...._ _ BLOWOFF ASSEMBLY - SEE NOTE 1 SEE SEE NOTE 2-1 NOTE 1 6 MIL SEE NOTE 4 PLASTIC d � SHEETING -'---- �"' - � N BRASS — � � 2 1/2" NST HOSE MI PLUG T FITTING#D579. 3'xTx4" 3000 PSI CONCRETE PAD BRASS 1-2 1/2" AROUND VALVE COVER IN UNPAVED NST CAP#D5194 SEE AREAS.NOTE 2 SEE STANDARD PLAN 3-7— 6 MIL PLASTIC T� %`�/,. SHEETING RIGHT-OF-WAY UNDISTURBED SOIL PLAN VIEW OR EASEMENT NOT TO SCALE 2"COMPANION FLANG 1 EXISTING GRADE BLIND FLANGE 777777777 VALVE BOX TOP AND COVER SEE NOTE 3 I SEE NOTE 4 EXTENSION AS NEEDED SEE NOTE 3 VALVE BOX BOTTOM SEE NOTE 3---- 6 CU. FF., PEA GRAVEL CL SEE NOTE 1 -- 20" DEPTH MINIMUM WATER MAIN SEE , 6"TEE, FL 6"D.I. NOTE 1 PIPE— SEE NOTE f j SEE NOTE 2 i ✓' ... .......__BLIND FLANGE T SEE NOTE 1 CONCRETE BEARING SEE VARIES BLOCK,SOLID 2'X3'XV NOTE 2 4 MIL PLASTIC SHEETING 6 RESILIENT SEAT WEDGE GATE VALVE FLANGED TEE CONNECTION SEE NOTE 1 KDCS - KENT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS PROFILE NOTES: NOT TO SCALE 1. TEE,VALVE AND PIPING SHALL BE PER KDCS 3.19, 2, CONCRETE BLOCKING SHALL BE CLASS 3000 [SEE KCDS 3.20.C, AND WSDOT 7-09.3(21)] 3. VALVE BOX SHALL BE OLYMPIC FOUNDRY NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT VB940 WITH TWO(2)INCH "DEEP SKIRT" ,I+'RE+ ,, .AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE COVER,THE COVER SHALL 8E MARKED y ' "" 2, ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT "WATER"THE EARS SHALL ALIGN IN �. Q �{+' t' THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, THE DIRECTION OF FLOW,SEE KENT CITY KENT STANDARD PLAN 3-7. ®' ENGINEERINGNG DEPARTMENT "�b.} _ •L,Tsj #SM34 METER BOX AND .O�\ 73az9s °�''" � STANDARD 6 #LYMP C FOUNDRY TxTx BLOWOFF ASSEMBLY 4. OLYMPI CONCRETE PAD. 'Y ' �,21�r TS'�E � „y ocslcNEo cln of KENT STANDARD PUN DRAWN CITY OF KENT- SCALE m NDNE M1M1 _ A9CONAL *~ CHECKED. DATE JANUARY 2018 Z_1 9 I APPROVED EIIGINEER FOR 2" INSTALL: 6" NIPPLE USE UTILITY VAULT MODEL#444-LA OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH YXY INSTALL HATCH (H20 RATED) FOR PLANTER AREAS ONLY,SEE NOTE 1 90°BEND(TYP) STAINLESS FOR 4"AND 6"INSTALL: STEEL USE UTILITY VAULT MODEL#506-LA WITH 55-332P COVER,SEE NOTE 1 ?OPENSCREEN 2"MIN. LANGE BETWEEN 3'x3'x4" 3000 PSI FLANGES CONCRETE PAD IN EXISTING GRADE .-. MAX, *..- -SEE.NOTE 2 UNPAVED AREAS - _,�---COMPANION - �` FLANGE WITH BREAKAWAY BOLTS % UNIONS z ``Y "�DISCHARGE RISER � SEE NOTE 2 PLUG- a ANCHORS TEE-.,- SEE NOTE 2 6,"NIPPLE •-3' MINIMUM 3/4 ."VALVE BOX AND WASHED ROCK EXTENSION SEE KENT GROUT PENETRATION (TYP) STANDARD PLAN 3-7 -^•-2"MIN. • e .T ^'--- ,,�� FOR 2" INSTALL: VALVE#145C NO SPLICES OR ' �E.E,NC3TE 6 OR APPROVED EQUAL 2"ARCO ]DINTS ARE ALLOWED HEAVY DUTY AIR RELEASE WHEN LESS THAN 18 " FOR 4"AND 6"INSTALL: FEET IN LENGTH- f" VAL-MAT[C COMBINATION AIR 2 4"OR 6 RESILIENT dr 2" MIN, r VALVE MODEL VM-206C WEDGE MAINTAIN SIYROFOAM INSULATION GATE VALVE- POSITIVE �% ", "PEANUTS" IN HEAVY NYLON SLOPE 2 MIN L- " 1 ' v l " I •` MESH BAGS SEE NOTES FOR 2"INSTALL: SWING JOINT J ""'-3" MINIMUM 31 WASHED ROCK (2)STREET ELBOWFOR 4"AND 6"INSTALL: CL. 52 OPEN KNOCKOUT DUCTILE IRON 90° ELBOW FOR DRAINAGE(TYP) AND CONNECT TO TEE ". VAULT MODEL#444 T" VAULT MODEL#506•LA �`----FOR 2"INSTALL MIPT X MIPT CORPORATION ti w STOP FORD#FB 500 OR APPROVED EQUAL w FOR T' INSTALL: DOUBLE STRAP SADDLE SMITH BLAIR #313-18888-14 OR APPROVED EQUAL FOR 4"'AND 6" INSTALL: CL. 52 DUCTILE IRON TEE NOTES: 1. INSTALLATIONS IN AREAS REQUIRING TRAFFIC BEARING VAULTS REQUIRE APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER. INSTALLATIONS IN SIDEWALKS AND/OR PEDESTRIAN CIRCULATION PATHS REQUIRE A SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE, 2. DISCHARGE RISER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN PLANTER AREAS ONLY.ANCHOR RISER WITH 2"xI/4"STAINLESS STEEL STRAPS AND 3/8" HILTI EXPANSION BOLTS. PAINT THE ABOVEGROUND PIPING WITH TWO(2) COATS OF FARWEST WONDERGLO QUICKSET HI-PERFORMANCE ENAMEL, #1100 SERIES, WHITE, 3, FOR 2"INSTALLATION: PIPE AND FITTINGS TO BE BRASS FOR INLET SIDE OF AIR RELEASE VALVE. FOR 4"AND 6" INSTALLATION: PIPE AND FITTINGS TO BE CL. 52 DUCTILE IRON. 4. PIPE AND FITTINGS TO BE GALVANIZED FOR OUTLET SIDE OF AIR RELEASE VALVE, 5, OPTIONAL INSTALLATION FOR NOTE::THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT SHALLOW WATER MAIN DEPTHS, 1> AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE CITY 'i.�`�REI ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT 6. CENTER AIR VAC ASSEMBLY pY' WA,S THE CITY OF KENT, A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, .� !,� ,�' IN THE VAULT. p CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT ' ..... ....... .......... � � .M""'"�►�, 2", 4" AND 6" KENT..,. COMBINATION AIR/VACUUM sezee ry VALVE AND VAULT U,. '•.�G'pE+,I. ttx m DESIGNED . .�'" URAWN COD - SCALE NONE STANDARD PLAN C7 APPROVED _ � NmNe - MNAL IiC. D DATE JUNE. UNPAVED AREAS -----------PAVED AREAS --'PAVEMENT RESTORATION PER STANDARD PLANS 6-64 THRU 6-58 —EXISTING PAVEMENT SURFACE RESTORATION AS ......SAWCUT(TYP,) SURFACE SPECIFIED ON APPROVED PLANS z a kh GRAVEL BORROW PER WSDOT F+ 9-03.14 OR SUITABLE EXCAVATED ' ,y,r SEE STANDARD PLANS 6-64 MATERIAL COMPACT TO 90% ', �� THRU 6-68 FOR TRENCH MINIMUM OF MAXIMUM DENSITY RESTORATION UNDER 36" MIN. 48" MIN. IN UNPAVED AREAS ---------------'--"�--""y '''C; ,.^i PAVEMENTS 10"OR 12"OR h GREATER GREATER PIPE SIZE PIPE SIZE k, 4 w 12" MIN. ------ PIPE ZONE MATERIAL SHALL BE 5/8"CSTC PER WSDOT 9-03.15. ,f PIPE �r 4"MIN. i ..........SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE I NOTE: UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS 1, MAXIMUM WIDTH OF TRENCH AT TOP OF PIPE: 30" FOR PIPE UP TO AND INCLUDING 12"NOMINAL DIAMETER, O.D PLUS 16" FOR PIPE LARGER THAN 12" NOMINAL DIAMETER. 2. WHEN POOR QUALITY FOUNDATION MATERIAL IS ENCOUNTERED BELOW THE BEDDING MATERIAL,THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OVER-EXCAVATE AND IMPORT BACKFILL MATERIAL MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF WSDOT STANDARD SPEC 9-03.9(2)OR KENT SPECIAL PROVISION 9-03.17 WHEN DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.THE USE OF GEOTEXTILE SEPARATION FABRIC MAY ALSO BE REQUIRED TO STABILIZE THE BASE. 3. BENCH AS NEEDED FOR SHORING OR TRENCH BOX(TYP.)WHEN DEPTH OF TRENCH IS 4 FT.AND GREATER. NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A(LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT '.. RF AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE W .S{y 1 ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT qk e14C^,rfJlrt`� THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. - aW CITYENGINEERING KENT .. ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT ti d" 'arse * T TYPICAL WATER MAIN TRENCH W♦ N WtlW "Qy • 38296 Lp ,,,xy2 nS"1`^w5t,+�/ '2r ofic Nco cor _ .._ -"" SCALE NONE STANDARD PLAN i M • . .... Aa D�N LUY ... g R IONA1, 5'. CHECKED __ " DATE MAacri,_zoia I3-22M APPRWEo GMER t NOTES: 1.. CATCH BASIN TO BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH �' sT ✓"�" :. 4Y"TO 9" AASHTO M 199, (ASTM C 478, &ASTM C 890) UNLESS DEPENDING OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLANS OR NOTED IN THE WSDOT ON FRAME STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. AND GRATE REQUIRED 2. AS AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE TO REBAR,WELDED WIRE FABRIC HAVING A MINIMUM AREA OF 0.12 SQUARE INCHES FRAME AND GRATE PER FOOT MAY BE USED. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL SEE STANDARD PLANS 5-4 THRU 5-8 AND 5-12 COMPLY TO AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A 497). WIRE FABRIC SHALL NOT BE PLACED IN THE KNOCKOUTS. 3. PRECAST BASES SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH CUTOUTS OR �^'"��''..., ;✓'"�%"\ 3 KNOCKOUTS. THE KNOCKOUT DIAMETER SHALL NOT EXCEED 20". KNOCKOUTS SHALL HAVE A WALL THICKNESS OF 2" MINIMUM. PROVIDE A 1.5" MINIMUM GAP BETWEEN J,✓ THE KNOCKOUT WALL AND THE OUTSIDE OF THE PIPE. � 4. ALL JOINTS IN THE BRICKS, GRADE RINGS, RISERS AND CASTINGS SHALL BE SEATED IN MORTAR. PICK HOLES, 6 OR 12" CRACKS AND ANY OTHER JOINTS SHALL BE FINISH �., GROUTED TO PROVIDE A WATERTIGHT STRUCTURE. ALL.. 5. THE MAXIMUM DEPTH FROM THE FINISHED GRADE TO THE ONE#3 BAR HOOP FOR 6ti 6"WEIGHS 200 LBS. LOWEST PIPE INVERT SHALL BE 5 FEET. DEPTHS GREATER TWO#3 BAR HOOPS FORGHT 12"WEIGHS 580 LBS. THAN 5 FEET REQUIRE UPSIZING TO A TYPE II STRUCTURE, RECTANGULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION 6. NON-CEMENTIOUS MATERIALS ARE NOT ALLOWED IN SETTING OF FRAMES TO FINAL FINISH GRADE. STATION AND OFFSET POINT WHEN DESIGN AND LAYOUT PROVIDED BY THE CITY OF KENT,UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLANS L R "� ,.� ./`,✓�'� --MORTAR(TYP.) 3„ INSTALL MAX.MA 44" MANHOLE #3 BAR ,✓ ✓ ADAPTER, "SAND qq�� EACH CORNER """"'� COLLAR" 21, WHEN PIPE MIN, TYPE .1L,E, r REQUIRES #3 BAR f% ;.;,. EACH SIDE'`;�� ' ✓ „�' (TYP) ` MORTAR(TYP.) #3 BAR EACH WAY -----' 4" �—. 30" PRECAST BASE SECTION TYPICAL SECTION (WEIGHS 2170 LBS.) PIPE ALLOWANCES NOTE: THI PIPE MATERIAL S PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT MAX INSIDE , AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE DIAMETER '�",,�!..� �'' ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT REINFORCED OR h CYF WA5,y7.C%, yy THE CITY OF KENT, A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PLAIN CONCRETE 12'" � '� '"� "� CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT ALL METAL PIPE 151. KENT CATCH BASIN TYPE I 8296 F w WALL PVC �'OA .%1 a5'1F " � a DESIGNED coin --------------- SOLID --............. ..... (WSDOTSTD. SPEC. 15 AS' P1AS oaTc srNaonreo Pula F� 4 cNE�M4u _ sca6_E woy, ._. ................._CA DESIG wr, 'S"tp 1r"� — 9-os.1z(1)) _...._:........... ... ENGINEER .:::.. 5-1 M APfi kCWkU .. .. 5......MIN. .._...._....._.._� .. —FACE OF CURB TRUNX.-1 0 ,� B a. �_ 2 6 q�TREE 2'.,6" B Y � I Z TRUNK " - ROOTBALL —ROOT GUARD; "DEEP LAG BOLT, I ROOT", "BIO-BARRIER" WASHER AND OR EQUIVALENT MIN. TREE TIE OR SIDEWALK 101 x 2'D CENTER 4"'DIAMETER METAL BAND LENGTH ON TREE, BOTH SIDES OF WATERING TUBE CONCRETE FRAME-2X4, EACH SIDE TREE TREE STAKE AND GUV _ PLANTER STRIP tr� CONCRETE FRAME WIRE PARALLEL TO ROOTBALL TREE WELL WALK AND CURB.--- PLANTER STRIP 5'TREE WELL CONCRETE FRAME AROUND ALL STREET TREES WITH TREE GRATES- 2-APPROVED 1.5"TO 2.5" CALIPER F' D.I.TREE GRATE--- COMMERCIAL x'"/ STREET TREE TYPICAL 4"IRRIGATION RISER TREE TIES 2-2"x2"x12'STAKES PLACEMENT OR WATERING ATTACHED ATTACHED TO TREE TUBES.TWO PER TREE LOOSELY TO ""� REQUIRED, 24" DEEP(TYP.) k ALLOW FOR WITH LOOSELY TENSIONED APPROVED CL REE MINOR SWAYING---., Y a _ _ __ '�.� TREE TIES. INSTALL 3" LAYER OF o z '^� PARALLEL TO WALK AND BARK MULCH a w m ," CURB(NOT AS SHOWN) in -PLANT ROOT BALL SO SD" 9.5', 871 - 9.5"+ gq^': THE BOTTOM OF THE TREE TRUNK IS z SLIGHTLY ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ROOT BALL Co ROOT BALL -.TYPICAL 4"IRRIGATION SB DIAMETER v RISER PLACEMENT OR INSTALL 2 2X4'S SEE NOTE 3— I 1 1// WATERING TUBES TWO UNDER .' .-_-_ Y 3" LAYER PER TREE REQUIRED, CONCRETE FRAME w• SEE NOTE 3 < DEBARK 24" DEEP(TYP.) 24"DEEP ROOT BARRIER BELOW BOND BREAK. i? MULCH- -FINISHED GRADE MATERIAL AS MANUFACTURED BY"DEEP ROOT", cn CURB AND "BIO-BARRIER"OR EQUIVALENT, 10' LONG, 1� "/ CENTERED ON TREE, SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-36M- - a ,,� � " : GUTTER TREE WELL.SECTION A A I NOTES: It; 2 6 e 12 `^--24" DEEP ROOT 1. SEE STANDARD PLAN 6-36 FOR DOWNTOWN SIDEWALKS. BARRIER BELOW BOND BREAK 2. IF TREE IS LOCATED BEHIND THE SIDEWALK,A ROOT BARRIER "ROOT ly�� MATEERIIAL AS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE EDGE OF THE SIDEWALK. BARRIER MANUFACTURED (TYP') L BY"DEEP ROOT% 3. ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM TREE I "BID-BARRIER"O PITS. INSTALL 12 INCHES OF PLANTING SOIL AROUND ROOT ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, WATER EQUIVALENT, 10' BALL CONSISTING OF 75%SANDY LOAM AND 25%ORGANICS, SERVICES, ETC. SHALL BE PLACED LONG, CENTERED FILL REMAINDER OF TREE PIT WITH NATIVE SOIL. OUTSIDE THE TREE ROOT BARRIER ON TREE PLANTER STRIP SECTION A-A 4. IN TREE WELLS,THE ROOT BARRIER SHALL BE PLACED ALL AROUND THE TREE PIT NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AND STAPLED TOGETHER. N+`F AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE 1-> ��'-WA5; 1 ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT 5. FOR BURLAP GROWN TREES THE BURLAP :bG" K^' THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST, SHALL BE REMOVED AT PLANTING TO '7' �' ' „ '� CITY OF KENT A DEPTH OF AT LEAST THE ROOT BALL, vx _ 'K _ ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT DO NOT BURY BURLAP IN PIT. ____ ."""""""""......._'""_ 5. FOR CONTAINER GROWN TREES ALL 3e2ea ^ KENT STREET TREE IN PLANTER ROOT BOUND ROOTS SHALL BE CUT P. `1dn lop Si'T Yy " w� " AND SEPARATED. C `�,' utslct�En s i .. —.__..._....mm...._..._.._. �EIONAL DRAWN 00K yd.IE�. onko P .. _. GHECYE� f}A1C N4M'F IsA9,El?,,.",G,15 , 7. NO PRUNING OF THE TREES AT PLANTING, --�� ------ ---' "'""' 6—rJ rJM nNrlaoveu ""E�+ NOTES: FACE OF CURB OR 'MIN, 2'-6" V MIN. EDGE OF PAVEMENT— � ' � MIN, 1.�Y 1 1. ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX SHALL BE HMA PER KDCS 6.16, 2. ALL TRENCH BACKFILL SHALL BE CSTC,WSDOT STD. SPEC, 9-039(3),OR CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL. DI 3. CONTROL DENSITY FILL ABOVE THE PIPE ZONE BEDDING V f MATERIAL SHALL MEET WSDOT STANDARDS AS STATED IN WSDOT STD. SPEC. 2-09.3(1)E,TEMPORARY STEEL - PLATES, PINNING AND ASPHALT RAMPS REQUIRED WHILE CURING. 4. ALL SAW CUTS SHALL BE VERTICAL AND IN STRAIGHT LINES AS DIRECTED BY ENGINEER PER WSDOT STD. SPEC. 5-04.3(5). A p A v.� 5, UNIFORMALLY TACK ALL ASPHALT VERTICAL AND [[ HORIZONTAL FACES AND SEAL ALL SURFACE SAW CUT JOINTS PER WSDOT STD. SPEC. 5-04.3(5)AND 5.04.3(5)A. MECHANICAL APPLICATION OF TACK WHERE POSSIBLE,IF NOT, BROOM APPLY BY HAND TO ACHIEVE `� n+ '•� UNIFORMITY. 6. HOT MIX ASPHALT SHALL BE AT LEAST 6INCHES THICK ON LOCAL STREETS;8 TO 10 INCHES THICK ON ARTERIALS. 2S' " ,.....2��GRIND AND OVERLAY 7. PAVING FABRIC(IF FOUND) WILL NOT REQUIRE ................................................. 25 FEET EACH WAY OF REPLACEMENT. SEAL SURFACE JOINTS PLAN ARTERIAL CENTER OF WITH AR 4000(TYP) CROSSING 8. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC MARKINGS SHALL BE PLACED IN KIND IMMEDIATELY AFTER PAVING AND PERMANENT 2S'ARTERIAL ROADS EACH WAY 1/2 TRENCH WIDTH + 2 FT STRIPING SHALL BE REPLACED WITHIN 30 DAYS OF THE 2°GRIND AND OVERLAY EACH 2"WAY GRIND AND PAVING OPERATION. 2" HMA PER KDCS 6.16 OVERLAY ALL OTHER ROADS I 9. COMPACTION REPORTS ARE REQUIRED AS OUTLINED IN _ ___________ _ 4'-6" MTN. SECTIONS 2.4 AND 2.5 OF THE KDCS AND 2-03.3(14)D 1,MIN T-CUT AND E OF THE WSDOT STD, SPEC,ADEQUATE NOTICE Y'MIN.. FOR SCHEDULING THESE SERVICES SHALL BE GIVEN Y CONSIDERATION IN PERFORMING THE WORK. wL "'R��h •.- EXISTING ASPHALT KDCS = KENT DESIGN AND '�...,` y` �'�.,"`�, CONCRETE SURFACE(TYP) CONSTRUCTION s.,^f, EXISTING BASE STANDARDS. _ `—GRIND EDGE OR SAWCUT TO PROVIDE A VERTICAL FACE PER K OF HM I 11 ` � ' ` SEE NOTE 7 (Typ)SEE NOTES 4AND 5 PER KDCS 6.16 ROADWAY SEE NOTE 6 RESTORATION SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 2"CSTC REQUIRED s CLASSIFICATIONS IF ODE USED TO PIPE ZONE BEDDING 25 FEET 6-2, 6-3,6-4, 6-7 AND 6-8 BACKFILL TRENCH MATERIAL AS REQUIRED EACHWAY COMPACTED CSTC OR BY UTILITY 1/2 TRENCH CONTROLLED DENSITY "., , ' WIDTH + 6-5,6-9,6-10,6-11,6-12, FILL SEE NOTES 2 AND 3— 2 FT EACH WAY 6-13,6-14 AND 6-15 2 6 MIN SECTION NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE,THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE 7. ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT pl WtiSyfy"r`YT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. zd ^mYuCITNEn KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT KE* T FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PATCHING N TRANSVERSE CUT �y �y 38296 �Q. ... A CY , ' oESICNEo c[kl< _ _.......�.. _..----.... - "— . I I oenWN ok �c No' onao a N .. ZC1NA7, cuEc✓Eo o--- �ur�E. z�iW 6-64M -- ENGINEEfi HFPROVID KDCS = KENT DESIGN AND NOTES: EXISTING PANEL CONSTRUCTION WIDTH STANDARDS. 1. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SHALL BE CLASS 4000, EDGE OF CURB AND GUTTER 2. ALL TRENCH BACKFILL SHALL BE CSTC,WSDOT STD. DOWELING -TRENCH WIDTH SPEC.,9-03.9(3),OR CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL. NOT REQUIRED %' AS REQUIRED 3. CONTROL DENSITY FILL ABOVE THE PIPE ZONE BEDDING MATERIAL SHALL MEET WSDOT STD. SPEC. 2-09.3(1)E. PREPARATION AND FULL DEPTH POLYETHYLENE REPLACEMENT OF PCC PANEL ROOFING PAPER ALONG ALL 4. ALL SAW CUTS SHALL BE VERTICAL AND PERPENDICULAR SHALL COMPLY WITH WSDOT EXISTING CONCRETE OR PARALLEL TO THE ROAD CENTERLINE AS DIRECTED STANDARD SPEC. 5-01.3(4) SURFACES REQUIRED PER BY ENGINEER, MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS 5.01.3(4)OF WSDOT STD. SPEC. 5. FOR ASPHALT OVERLAYS TACK ASPHALT FACES OF SAW CENTERLINE OR LANE LINE _ CUTS AND SEAL SAW CUTS PER WSDOT STD.SPEC. A -., A 5-04.3(5)AND 5-04.3(5)A.ALSO THOROUGHLY TACK CONCRETE SURFACE TO RECEIVE HMA. 6. FOR RIGID PAVEMENT OVERLAID WITH ASPHALT FOR STREET WITH AN PAVEMENT, PANEL REPLACEMENT SHALL BE PERFORMED ASPHALT OVERLAY MATCH FIRST AND THEN GRIND AND OVERLAY ASPHALT PER EXISTING THICKNESS KENT STANDARD PLAN, 5-66, AN ASPHALT IMPREGNATED (2"MIN.) WOVEN FABRIC SHALL BE PLACED BETWEEN THE CONCRETE AND ASPHALT PAVEMENT TO REDUCE REFLECTIVE CRACKING THROUGH THE ASPHALT. TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION LONGITUDAL CONSTRUCTION 7. FULL CONCRETE PANEL(S) REPLACEMENT IS REQUIRED,. JOINT DOWEL BARS 1-1/2" 0 VARIES I JOINT TIE BARS#5 REBAR x x 18"LONG @ 12"O.C, -----RIES 30" LONG @ 36"O.C. 8. A MINIMUM 4-DAY CURING PERIOD WILL BE REQUIRED PRIOR TO OPENING TO TRAFFIC.ON ARTERIALS OR SMOOTH DOWELS, EPDXY PLAN WHERE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED BY THE ENGINEER, COATED WITH CARTING COMPOUND SUCH AS GREASE ADDITIVES MAY BE REQUIRED TO REDUCE THE CURING -- TIME TO 3 DAYS OR LESS. FULL PANEL WIDTH EXISTING 9. COMPACTION REPORTS ARE REQUIRED AS OUTLINED IN h LENGTH VARIES -" SECTION 2 4 AND 2.5 OF THE KDCS AND 2-03.3(14)D 1' MIN. 1 MIN. AND E OF THE WSDOT STD. SPEC.ADEQUATE NOTICE 7YH'j -- ,��----�— FOR SCHEDULING THESE SERVICES SHALL BE GIVEN 18` CONSIDERATION IN PERFORMING THE WORK, 9„ SAWCUT,SEE .- NOTES 4 AND 5(TYP) —MECHANICALLY CUT AND SEALED CONSTRUCT N 30INT PER �,., `' A, • • • • ,>A,�, FOR REMOVAL WSDOT STD, SPEC.PEC. x 1 5 53(8) MIN SIZE 3 16" EXISTING CONCRETE MAX SIZE 5/16"WIDE x 1/4 DEPTH OF PANEL. HAND HELD 4 c:. PAVEMENT ,.� AMD PUSHED SAWS ALLOWED. 2"CSTC REQUIRED IF �.�, I '� / A .-. DOWEL OR TIE BARS CDF USED TO BACKFILL t �� - DOWEL-TIE BAR TO EXISTING TRENCH SEE NOTE 9�--< . v H'^r I PANELS.SEE WSDOT STD PLAN AS REQUIRED OF lr '✓'V,, "' � A-60.10AND A-4D.10 (TYP) "�""'�(, ^� CONSTRUCTION JOINT. PIPE ZONE BEDDING MATERIAL AS CONCRETE PATCH SHALL REQUIRED BY UTILITY - MATCH EXISTING THICKNESS (MIN.THICKNESS IS 6") ,. „„. -FULL DEPTH BOND FINISH REQUIREMENTS 'yM'^�,,."`�,,"�"",` BREAK FILM. COMPACTED CSTC OR - PER WSDOT 5-05 3(11) . VK CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL SEE NOTES 2 AND 3 2-6 MIN, SECTION A-A NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT t AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL,SIGNED BY THE 5 r R�-{'!' ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT ` yUG WASt � THE CITY OF KENT.A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. CITY OF KENT �z;P ,.. �" a�. � ENGINEERING DEVARTMENT `. KENT PORTL4ND CEMENT PAVEMENT „v ,,, PATCHING TRANSVERSE CUT 58296 4� l'� IoorsavcrNN EoOt7 SCALE TANDAko FUN wG% J(JNAL � ICHECKEo '"-oarE curlE._zois APPROVED 6-65M JEER ' _ i i 7,,5 d STANDARD VEHICLE WHEEL PATH 3'MIN. 4'-6"MIN. _ 3' MIN. ------------ LANE LINE .m...........m T-CUT MARKING ---- 1 MIN. 1' MIN, SEE NOTE 6 SEAL WITH lFllo0/f�0ff�y,l Jf llll���.ffflll/ll/l�111111.IIIIIII Iy� u SURFACE JOINT "•T "u `�. 'a �, `�,", ` AR 4000 EXISTING ASPHALT "-""' """"' """' "" d EDGE OF PAVEMENT SAWCUT k l ` AND SEAL PER WSDOT STD. SPEC. 017' MIN. HMA PER KDCS 6 16 ')—' GRIND AND OVERLAY ------ v. If i<v ,n 5-04.3(5)A OR EDGE OF CURB w v1 1 f rlfl "I t o rlf w AND GUTTER, NO SAWCUT INITIAL TEMPORARY TRENCH PATCH �' Ei ,'II,�"' REQUIRED,SEAL PER WSDOT 0,25' MIN. HMA PER KDCS 6.16 STD. SPEC. 5-04.3(5)A PIPE ZONE BEDDING —6"-10" MIN. OF HMA PER KDCS MATERIAL AS 6.16 OR COMMERCIAL HMA 1" REQUIRED BY UTILITY ` PER KDCS 6.16 SEE NOTE 5 �`--2'CSTC REQUIRED IF CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL USED CRUSHED ROCK OR CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL. 95%COMPACTION 2'-6" MIN, REQUIRED ON CSTC. FULL LANE WIDTH GRIND AND OVERLAY START AND END 10 FT BEYOND TRENCH LIMITS (TYP) KDCS = KENT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, NOTES: 1, ALL TRENCH BACKFILL SHALL BE CSTC PER WSDOT STD. SPEC, 5. HOT MIX ASPHALT SHALL BE AT LEAST 6 INCHES THICK ON 9-039(3), OR CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL. LOCAL STREETS;8 TO 10 INCHES THICK ON ARTERIALS. 2. CONTROL DENSITY FILL ABOVE THE PIPE ZONE BEDDING SHALL 6. PAVING FABRIC(IF FOUND)WILL NOT REQUIRE REPLACEMENT. MEET WSDOT STD. SPEC. 2-09.3(1)E.TEMPORARY STEEL PLATES, PINNING AND TEMPORARY ASPHALT RAMPS ARE 9. COMPACTION REPORTS ARE REQUIRED AS OUTLINED IN REQUIRED DURING CURING. SECTION 2.4 AND 2.5 OF THE KDCS AND 2-03.3(14)D AND E OF THE WSDOT STD.SPEC. ADEQUATE NOTICE FOR SCHEDULING 3. ALL SAW CUTS SHALL BE VERTICAL AND IN STRAIGHT LINES AS THESE SERVICES SHALL BE GIVEN CONSIDERATION IN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER PER WSDOT STD.SPEC.SECTION PERFORMING THE WORK. 5-04,3(5). 10. ALL DEPTHS ARE MINIMUM COMPACTED DEPTHS. 4. UNIFORMALLY TACK ALL ASPHALT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL FACES AND SEAL ALL SURFACE SAW CUT]DINTS PER WSDOT STD. SPEC. 5-04.3(5)AND 5.04.3(5)A. MECHANICAL APPLICATION OF TACK WHERE POSSIBLE,IF NOT, BROOM APPLY BY HAND TO ACHIEVE UNIFORMITY. NOTE:THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT FZ�S,t AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE.THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE 1� ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT S 0� WScjf 'j'b THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. CITY OF KENT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PATCHING 38296 LONGITUDINAL CUT wti / Otn.,�`L.�,JPF4°� DESIGNED GOY STANDARD PLAN oanwN 479M souE NZ DRAWN � pOMAL bCny, GHEGYED, DATE JlNE. 2018 6-66M APPR.OVED^^nmmm ENGINEER W" 'DDT STANDARD PLANS DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS B-55.20-02 Pipe Zone Bedding and Backfill SITE PRESERVATION AND EROSION CONTROL 1-10.10-01 High Visibility Fence 1-30.10-02 Silt Fence with Backup Support 1-30.15-02 Silt Fence 1-30.16-00 High Visibility Silt Fence with Backup Support 1-30.17-00 High Visibility Silt Fence 1-30.30-01 Wattle Installation on Slope 1-30.40-01 Compost Sock 1-40.10-00 Temporary Silt Fence for Inlet Protection in Unpaved Areas 1-40.20-00 Storm Drain Inlet Protection 1-50.20-01 Check Dams on Channels 1-80.10-02 Miscellaneous Erosion Control Details 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 2 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 r a.a j _ yAymr ArH�I Mr3 w p trp4 Tye fn' wQ Ir �o-jurv�t \ Z M IL 00 O > E w h o TM c c c P77 upi wa Fp 3' rh B �rtr�'rya nk �I"INii �I{ 1�'� �� � A a x'• V�J d�t,2" p Y�' SE � N 1 p u m S d W n E m L i s W m Ll pr g ELforam °- 5 - z U 6 t Z f w q a .Ir µws J JR' w "Iw �O a � LL a � � wwy ua o n z n{r ° ow ci 9. _P x � 14W COY 1Nra?Adl .� rnnCL n. Z o w f1 2 x > > Il¢�d oa �, r uj 7 W tl e o 5 � Z O I ) ...-. 1"Mr Vie. Fs „ � r " Sa�''✓.:.lW 1J ri f o 3 sor ty z 2 �a ILL] m ILI n ILI "`I Eua � r 'I'1300f1 rvl.4i AB NMbtlO I G 1 Lu 0ra y 17 r ca VVV y 2 A W C C UY � 4 � w w � DDk pp � � gl , F ter, r N r z I4 C z�c F w4 � y r✓ ,� r k f/Y I y g rr J a. LL" 5NE]NJtI'I IIF] :AN NMYU� n t' r a. y Z E g g lj?W L65Ig J- a — a w q f n ry a k pp 3 _ � rcmns way° Nw f ��w{S" 4Y� 4= 4 b F" A I 1 QNz y£F K��@Ik ul a z sN3v3p T6J LE wuVNp �yR N P —43 " q7�y x `cf ci w LuIL _ Y r Po'w 5a m �¢ O in —9� ❑ !)'n; wow N r aw � � 4 A L O 2 V+ � �.- ry of a p - V W.n 6 O ft o 4 U Y LL F6r 1 � V— � �wn q y w a �r ' icy Y , T �� �� 1 i ,•_� � / �{figg w �a �ti /p/� 1Ya � WZ ��yy e_ xH Ow p�id LL c_ ungywc z SN383B TI9 dXW0 a SPA n Ww �&fb..5IY M v jag z h 5[ MFE N N VI 16 HL wl M r" f Iwh W4 +, s" ryS 'S ell .ON . .,.._ fa µ -1 . t � as � d O } a 6 O � k � ` o r- f// Q�'���.Ir Av'�vIMP�'��T'i��.UYM'�f,gt�yA7tM`!�kC11114�91A5Pt8�W ttl 'N �, p �..,P �, e'o q b FJ n F K � J 'WF 4sr- z siaaaao��m Ana wmvea ..................... 0 g gc ' g "yu W��i W� Loo '� �l Ll C € E E � FF W " mr way 1 "w vIwpie '4v / ,'nky "b Cm � ti��z Yfi " 4d d,�f{i,�� n✓ "M" ��� LLR Y rt f,',x avr.a r 1 we {` Nan , ; � zW MA PL a �u Seflll!I1 v}IEI g a n Z �y Cp yr = MST yJL^ S� � S !d O I t a7, T J % p Y our w,6o , M� W w e o g w `b � � i HO 2 J�rp Q m N 0 0 b� �m 'b' kV1M Ni� �✓l �+ 4 +4""' w J 'ill NAMd ^v O e r o n w 3 � Q y, !ri•,.0 X q r lX v r � r ,a y b b io , { y, • w � f 4 ✓ ✓ l � w b 1130a11 NN3J -A[i NMbaO R ° 3 IE is IL Qa m gG' 23 n w ' a +r � V " �� $ m ' ' k or W O} s P w,nin�xlavina, n I O W Y O 4 J 4i 0` < '. f .n•a` a x � m U l d.uFI NB3d 0.a l.vtl. WZ O S ZOyr � lo Wig S m' Ski iSi a CF JO� Z u, �. Sl IL s'c r6� � o v€ -. Cf ASt\V � FYI d27 ® Q �� F � < � t Luo— w,,, f ( ✓d l a d o A p J /➢ ��M1 J V� p Y FIY S7 1 f ui o (ttg%%1 t N U� M ea z �ti�h �p F NIW O•.Z N04.9^,L U 4 r a u N t f/I F J fr f W W O s FW U W (FU} W U ObOdAa,*5R 'd f wva. C �. pppppp n c wr LL`oi O Gn� O r� ¢O 'E m E6 N E o u pnu �0L 9 0 � e w v G^"� n wo cat �€ o `° R a m , J o xa P J � F 1!✓ 0 t G w u° u a 4 O o LL$ y s OSOAAO vsn :A9 Wm o I a G E N J w x ryg O y too 66 w x w p E L Az 7r U �K cEo V N E A-6 n c� ell jvQ9 Est a Ua=m o $ `E ¢ w ra ?gym° s ■ 'fig a cBN v;p b E" .rt mE ,61 §�m9 d E 5 0 ¢gan 88 m � -[y]4 � E �iLg d ow m E R 05 lid mi o 0 i yy N w w gqasfj�: V � u x ❑Z Q �++ 2 ❑ Y TY U s = m k , a Q ` h g z ❑ sy wa, s ❑ , � ;�� w a� I� w °o �w a PO 10—n MR AG WWI yy o ' S f/ I � x ap n. :5 Fro f` w p N N J G ° All iyyM 7 O m u is M i( J Z w N d q W wo W ; � JV p z U°� Na 4 rc ✓ � r' o y �' � w o Z. 7 �Yn src� J m ..f f 0 w K w m a ��rco i V co i0 m Wip� ryryo ~ti� � bl�;lll, N� L K� wU',�rc N NVi �U Q pp J ILLF � Iv k _ hAt " a wr 7""'1✓ �"7� w m - o> Qa "f� y} F gg w W 'WA w- } 4w a' O o Q a a`dv o� Fn 1 UJU Y Gu qy ON WN pNb �� � v h`Y Qd2 ZLA YY e �✓ \\ U t 2 gU ¢� l�✓ a 4 r� s4 Z !� • xx�. 9 o �,m,LLd ujawuj,gw -_ of 1130011 Ntl]i �A9 IYMVHO GE TEC1-1N1 CAL REPORT 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 3 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 F� E II!M 4'. rtl Pd Ilx pp IR py p' IG IIY June 13,2018 PanGEO Project No. 17-030 Mr. Russ Porter, P.E. Gray & Osborne, Inc. 701 Dexter Avenue North, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98109 Subject: GEOTECHNiCAL REPORT Blue Boy Reservoir Proposed Booster Pump Station Building 11300 Southeast 23611 Place, Kent, Washington Gray & Osborne 1PN#16227 Dear Mr. Porter, PanGEO has completed a geotechnical study to assist the project team with the design and construction of the proposed booster pump station building at 11300 Southeast 236`h Place in Kent, Washington. The results of our study and our recommendations are summarized in the attached report. Based on the results of our subsurface exploration program, the site is generally underlain by a thin layer of existing fill in-tuna underlain by medium dense to dense glacial till. It is our opinion that the booster pump station building may be supported on a conventional shallow foundation, provided the foundation bears on competent native soil or on newly placed structural fill. Additional design recommendations are outlined in the attached report. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service. Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely, ~ Q4&— Siew L. Tan, P,E. Principal Geotechnical Engineer TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 GENERAL............................................---.......................... ..........................,.....,...1 2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION ....................................................................1 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS...........................................................................2 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.................................................................................3 4.1 GEOLOGY........................................................................................................3 4.2 SOILS ..............................................................................................................3 4.3 GROUNDWATER..................................................................................................3 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS ...........................................................4 5.1 SE[SMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS........................................................................4 5.2 SOIL LIQUEFACTION.........................................................................................4 5.3 FOUNDATION.....................................................................................---......A 5.4 FLOOR SLABS...................................................................................................6 5.5 NEW UTILITIES....................................................................................................6 5.5.1 Trench Excavation .......................................................................—6 5.5.2 Pipe Support and Bedding..............................................................6 5.5.3 Trench Bac�-fi11................................................................................6 6.0 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................,...............7 6.1 SITE PREPARATION.,............. ........ ....---...... ............--..................-.7 6.2 TEMPORARY EXCAVATIONS..............................................................................7 6.3 MATERIAL REUSE.............................................................................................9 6.4 STRUCTURAL FILL AND COMPACTION...........................................................-8 6.5 WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................9 6.6 SURFACE DRAINAGE........................................... ............................9 7.0 UNCERTAINTY AND LIMITATIONS ...................................................................9 8.0 REFERENCES...........................................................................................................12 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1. Vicinity Map Figure 2. Site and Exploration Plan LIST OF APPENDICES Appendix A— Summary Test Pit Log Figure A-1. Terms and Symbols for Boring and Test Pit Logs Figure A-2. Lou of Test Pit TP-1 I GEOTEC INICAL REPORT BOOSTER PUMP STATION BUILDING 11300 SOUTHEAST 236TH PLACE KENT,WASHINGTON 1.0 GENERAL PanGEO completed a geotechnical engineering study to for the proposed booster pump station building at 11300 Southeast 236°i Place in Kent, Washington. Our work was performed in accordance with,our proposal dated October 14, 2016, which was subsequently authorized by Gray & Osborne on February 7, 2017. The purpose of our geotechnical study was to evaluate subsurface conditions at the site and, based on the conditions encountered, provide geotechnical engineering recommendations pertinent to the design and construction of the proposed booster pump station building. Our services included conducting a site reconnaissance, reviewing pertinent geologic publications, observing excavation of one test pit, and developing the conclusions and recommendations presented in this report. 2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION We understand that the booster pump station building will be constructed at the existing Blue Boy Tank reservoir site located at 11300 Southeast 236'h Place in Kent, Washington (see Figure 1, Vicinity Map). The proposed booster pump station building will be located within the relatively level lawn area southwest of the existing reservoir tank (see Plate 1 on the following page and Figure 2). We understand the proposed booster pump station building will be a relatively small single-story at-grade structure of concrete masonry unit (CMU) construction with an on-grade concrete floor. As such, we anticipate that grading for this project will be minimal. Utility trench excavations associated with the booster station are anticipated to generally be less than about 5 feet deep. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Juno 13, 201.1 -- ---- - Plate 1.Vicinity of proposed booster pump station building at existing reservoir facility,facing north. 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS One test pit (TP-1) was excavated on February 26, 2017, to explore subsurface conditions at the site. The approximate test pit location was measured from existing structures and features. The approximate location of the test pit is indicated on Figure 2. The test pit was excavated to 4 feet below grade using a Caterpillar 305C mini-excavator owned and operated by the City of Kent, Washington. A geologist from PanGEO was present during the field explorations to observe the test pit excavation, obtain representative soil samples, and to describe and document the soils encountered in the explorations. A summary test pit log is presented in Appendix A which provides descriptions of the materials encountered, depths to soil contacts, and depths of seepage or caving, if present, observed in the test pit sidewalls. The relative in-situ density of cohesionless soils, or the relative consistency of fine-grained soils, was estimated from the excavating action of the excavator, probing the sidewalls with a '/z-inch diameter steel rod, and the stability of the test pit sidewalls. Where soil contacts were gradual or undulating, the average 17-010 Blue Bay BPS.Kent-Finn) Page 2 PanGEO, Inc, i Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA depth of the contact was recorded in the log. After the test pit was logged, the excavation was backfilled with the excavated soils and the surface was tamped and re-graded smooth. 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4.1 GEOLOGY According to the Geologic Map of the Renton Quadrangle (Mullineaux, 1965), the sur6cial geologic unit mapped in the vicinity of the site is ground moraine deposits (Map Unit Qgt). Mullineaux describes ground moraine deposits as mostly ablation glacial till over lodgment glacial till. Glacial till is a very dense heterogeneous mixture of silt, sand, and gravel laid down at the base of an advancing glacial ice sheet. Glacial till typically exhibits low compressibility and high strength characteristics. 4.2 SOILS In summary, approximately one foot of loose to medium dense existing fill consisting of sandy silt was encountered at test pit TP-1. The existing fill was characterized by the presence of numerous quarry spalls. Underlying the existing till, dense silty sand with gravel that we interpret to be consistent with the mapped glacial till was encountered to the maximum exploration depth of 4 feet below grade. From approximately 1 to 2 feet below grade, the glacial till was weathered to a loose to medium dense condition. In general, an increase in relative density with depth was noted. Review of well logs available on the Washington Department of Ecology's websitc indicate that glacial till (i.e. hardpan) extends 70 feet or greater below the ground surface in the vicinity of the site. 4.3 GROUNDWATER Perched groundwater seepage was encountered 2 feet below grade in the test pit at the time of excavation (February 2017). The perched groundwater is indicative of groundwater collecting above the low permeability dense glacial till soils. Limited amounts of groundwater seepage may also be encountered in sandy and gravelly zones of glacial. till. Groundwater elevations and seepage rates may vary depending on the season, local subsurface conditions, and other factors. Groundwater levels are normally highest during the winter and early spring. 17-010 Blue Boy BPS,Kent-Final Page 3 PanGEO, Inc. Gcotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Time 13 7.01 R 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS 5.1 SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS We understand the seismic design of the booster station will be accomplished using the 2015 edition of the International Building Code (IBC), which specifies a design earthquake having a 2% probability of occurrence in 50 years (return interval of 2,475 years). The table below presents the seismic design parameters in accordance with the 2015 IBC, which are consistent with the 2008 USGS seismic hazard maps. 'fable I - 2015 IBC Summary Seismic Design Parameters Design Spectral Spectral Site Spectral Acceleration at Acceleration Coefficients Response Site Class 0.2 sec. (g) at 1.0 sec. (g) Parameters Ss Si 17,� F, SDS Sul C 1.314 0.494 1.000 1.31 0,876 0.430 5.2 SOIL LIQUEFACTION Soil liquefaction is a condition where saturated cohesionless soils undergo a substantial loss of strength due to the build-up of excess pore water pressures resulting from cyclic stress applications induced by earthquakes. Soils most susceptible to liquefaction are loose, uniformly graded sands and loose silts with little cohesion. In our opinion, liquefaction is not a design consideration for this site because of the dense nature of the soils underlying the site and the depressed groundwater level. 5.3 FOUNDATION Based on the subsurface conditions encountered in the test pit at the site, it is our opinion that conventional spread footings are an appropriate foundation type to support the proposed booster pump station building, provided that the foundation bears on medium dense to very dense glacial till. Based on the subsurface conditions encountered at TP-1, we anticipate soils suitable for foundation support will be encountered at the design footing subgrade elevation. The following recommendations should be incorporated into design and construction of the foundation. 17-03 D Blue Boy BPS,Kent-Final Page 4 PanGEO, Inc, Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Jun.c 11-2 l IS- Allowable Bearing Pressure—To limit post-construction settlement to about '/ inch or less, we recommend that a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot (pst) be used to size foundation elements bearing on competent glacial till deposits. The onsite soils should not be used as structural fill below the footing elements. For allowable stress design, the recommended bearing pressure may be increased by one-third for transient loading, such as wind or seismic forces. Continuous and individual spread footings should have minimum widths of 18 and 24 inches, respectively. Footing Embedment —For frost heave considerations, exterior footings should be placed at a minimum depth of 18 inches below final exterior grade. Interior spread foundations should be placed at a minimum depth of 12 inches below the top of slab. Estimated Settlement - Footings designed and constructed in accordance with the above should experience total settlement of less than one inch and differential settlement less than about '/2 inch. Most of the anticipated settlement should occur during construction as dead loads are applied. Lateral Load Resistance - Lateral loads on the structure may be resisted by passive earth pressure developed against the embedded near-vertical faces of the foundation system and by frictional resistance developed between the bottom of the foundation and the supporting subgrade soils. For footings bearing on granular soils, a frictional coefficient of 0.35 may be used to evaluate sliding resistance developed between the concrete and the subgrade soil. Passive soil resistance may be calculated using an equivalent fluid weight of 350 pcf, assuming the footings are backfilled with structural fill. The above values include a factor of safety of 1.5. Unless covered by pavements or slabs, the passive resistance in the upper 12 inches of soil should be neglected. Footing Excavations and Subgrade Protection - All footing subgrades should be carefully prepared. Any loose or softened soil should be removed from the footing excavations and replaced with granular structural fill such as Gravel Borrow or crushed rock. Footing excavations should be observed by PanGEO to confirm that the exposed footing subgrade is consistent with the expected conditions and adequate to support the proposed structure. The site soils are moisture sensitive and the footing subgrade will likely become disturbed or softened when exposed to moisture and/or constriction activities such as forming or placing reinforcing steel. As a result, it may be necessary to place 2 to 3 inches of lean-mix concrete or about 4 inches of clean, crushed rock to protect the subgrade. 17-030 Blue Boy BPS,Ken[-Final Page 5 PanGEO, Inc. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Test Pit Backtill—If test pit backfill is encountered within the footprint of the building, the backfill material should be overexcavated and the excavation should be backfilled with crushed rock compacted to the requirements of structural fill. 5.4 FLOOR SLABS It is our opinion that conventional concrete slab-on-grade floors are appropriate for this site. The onsite soils, crushed rock or Gravel Borrow are considered suitable to support the floor slab, provided the slab subgrade is compacted to the project requirements for structural fill. In areas where interior space is sensitive to moisture, a 10-nrll polyethylene vapor barrier should also be placed directly below the slab. 5.5 NEW UTILITIES 5.5.1 Trench Excavation We understand that shallow utilities (less than 5 feet deep) will be installed as part of the project. Trench excavations may be accomplished using conventional excavation equipment. All excavations in excess of 4 feet in depth should be sloped in accordance with Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155, or be shored. It is the contractor's responsibility to maintain safe working conditions, including temporary excavation stability. 5.5.2 Pipe Support and Bedding We anticipate loose to medium dense fill and weathered glacial till overlying dense glacial till will be encountered in utility trench excavations. Utility installation should be conducted in accordance with the 2016 WSDOT Standard Specifications or other applicable specifications for placement and compaction of pipe bedding and backfill. hi general, pipe bedding should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches in thickness, and compacted to a firm and unyielding condition. Bedding materials and thicknesses provided should be suitable for the utility system and materials installed, and in accordance with any applicable manufacturers' recommendations. Pipe bedding materials should be placed on relatively undisturbed native soil.. Soft soils, if present, should be removed from the trench and replaced with pipe bedding material 5.5.3 Trench Baekfill In non-structural areas, the onsite soils may be utilized for trench backfill provided they can be compacted to the project specifications. If the onsite soils cannot be adequately compacted, 17-030 Blue Boy BPS,Kent-Final Page 6 PanGEO, Inc, Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA June. 11a 7018 trench backfill should consist of select granular material, meeting the requirements for Gravel Borrow as specified in Section 9-03.14(1) of the 2016 WSDOT Standard Speciijications, or an approved equivalent. Within structural areas such as paved driveways, the trench backfill should consist of Gravel Borrow. The trench backfill should be placed in 8- to 12-inch thick, loose lifts and compacted using mechanical equipment to at least 90 percent of its maximum dry density, per ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). In paved areas, the upper 2 feet of the backfill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density, per ASTM D1557. Heavy compaction equipment should not be permitted to operate directly over utilities until a minimum of 2 feet of backfill has been placed. 6.0 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS 6.1 SITE PREPARATION Site preparation for the proposed project includes removing the topsoil and sod and excavating to the design subgrade. The topsoil and sod at TP-1 was approximately 3 inches thick. Following excavating to the design subgrade, the exposed subgrade beneath the new structure should be compacted to a dense and unyielding condition. Soil in loose or soft areas, should be over- excavated and replaced with compacted granular structural fill. 6.2 TEMPORARY E%CAVATIONS We understand utility trenches are anticipated to be less than 5 feet deep. We anticipate that the excavations will largely encounter loose to dense silty sand with gravel. All temporary excavations should be performed in accordance with Part N of WAC (Washington Administrative Code) 296-155. The contractor is responsible for maintaining safe excavation slopes and/or shoring. For planning purposes, the temporary excavations may be sloped as steep as 1 H:1 V in existing fill and weathered glacial till and ''/2H:1V in dense to very dense glacial till. The inclination of temporary slopes should be re-evaluated in the field during construction based on actual observed soil conditions. During wet weather, the cut slopes may need to be flattened to reduce the potential for erosion. 17-030 Blue Boy BPS,Kent-Final Page 7 PanGEO, Inc. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA June 13 ,201_9 6.3 MATERIAL REUSE It is our opinion that the on-site soils may be considered for use as structural fill or trench backfill provided the soil can be compacted to the project requirements for structural fill. The contractor should be aware that the surficial soils that exist at the site are moisture sensitive, and will become disturbed and soft when exposed to inclement weather conditions and/or construction traffic. 6.4 STRUCTURAL FILL AND COMPACTION Imported structural fill, if needed, should consist of clean, free-draining granular soils that are relatively free from organic matter or other deleterious materials. Such materials should be less than 4 inches in maximum dimension, with less than 7 percent tines (portion passing the U. S. Standard No. 200 sieve), as specified for Gravel Borrow in Section 9-03.14(1) of the 2016 WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. The fine- grained portion of structural fill soils should be non-plastic. A fines content greater than 7 percent may be acceptable if the earthwork is performed during relatively dry weather and the contractor's methods are conducive to proper compaction of the soil. The use of material with a fines content greater than 7 percent should be approved by the project engineer prior to use. All structural fill should be moisture conditioned to within about 3 percent of optimum moisture content,placed in loose,horizontal lifts less than 8 inches in thickness, and compacted to at least 95 percent maximum density, determined using ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor). The procedure to achieve proper density of a compacted fill depends on the size and type of compacting equipment, the number of passes, thickness of the layer being compacted, and certain soil properties. In areas where the size of the excavation restricts the use of heavy equipment, smaller equipment can be used, but the soil must be placed in thin enough layers to achieve the required relative compaction. Generally, loosely compacted soils are a result of poor construction technique or improper moisture content. Soils with high fines contents are particularly susceptible to becoming too wet, and coarse-grained materials easily become too dry, for proper compaction. Silty or clayey soils with a moisture content too high for adequate compaction should be dried as necessary, or moisture conditioned by mixing with drier materials, or other methods. 17-030 Blue Boy BPS.Kent-Final Page 8 PanGEO, Inc. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Tune 13 201 S 6.5 WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION General reconunendations relative to earthwork performed in wet weather or in wet conditions are presented below. The following procedures are best management practices recommended for use in wet weather construction: « Earthwork should be perforned in small areas to minimize subgrade exposure to wet weather. Excavation or the removal of unsuitable soil should be followed promptly by the placement and compaction of clean structural fill. The size and type of construction equipment used may have to be limited to prevent soil disturbance. • During wet weather, the allowable fines content of the structural fill should be reduced to no more than 5 percent by weight based on the portion passing 1/4-inch sieve. The fines should be non-plastic. • The ground surface within the construction area should be graded to promote run-off of surface water and to prevent the ponding of water. • Bales of straw and/or geotextile silt fences should be strategically located to control surface water and to limit erosion. s Excavation slopes and soils stockpiled on-site should be covered with plastic sheets during periods of wet weather. 6.6 SURFACE DRAINAGE Surface runoff can be controlled during construction by careful grading practices. Typically, this includes the construction of shallow, upgrade perimeter ditches or low earthen berms in conjunction with silt fences to collect runoff and prevent water from entering excavations or to prevent runoff from the construction area from leaving the immediate work site. All collected water should be directed under control to a positive and permanent discharge system. Permanent control Of surface water should be incorporated in the final grading design. Adequate surface gradients and drainage systems should be incorporated into the design such that surface runoff is directed away from the structures and away from the top of slopes. 7.0 UNCERTAINTY AND LIMITATIONS We have prepared this report for use by Gray & Osborne and other project team members. Recommendations contained in this report are based on a site reconnaissance, a subsurface 17-030 Slue Boy BPS,KcW-F109I Page 9 PanGEO, hic. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA June 13. 2018 exploration program, review of pertinent geologic publications, and our understanding of the project. The study was performed using a mutually agreed-upon scope of work. Variations in soil conditions may exist between the locations of the explorations and the actual conditions underlying the site. The nature and extent of soil variations may not be evident until construction occurs. If any soil conditions are encountered at the site that are different from those described in this report, we should be notified immediately to review the applicability of our recommendations. Additionally, we should also be notified to review the applicability of our recommendations if there are any changes in the project scope. The scope of our work does not include services related to construction safety precautions. Our recomlendations are not intended to direct the contractors' methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, except as specifically described in our report for consideration in design. Additionally, the scope of our work specifically excludes the assessment of environmental characteristics, particularly those involving hazardous substances. We are not mold consultants nor are our recommendations to be interpreted as being preventative of mold development. A mold specialist should be consulted for all mold-related issues. This report.may be used only by the client and for the purposes stated, within a reasonable time from its issuance. Land use, site conditions (both off and on-site), or other factors including advances in our understanding of applied science, may change over time and could materially affect our findings. Therefore, this report should not be relied upon after 24 months from its issuance. PanGEO should be notified if the project is delayed by more than 24 months from the date of this report so that we may review the applicability of our conclusions considering the time lapse. It is the client's responsibility to see that all parties to this project, including the designer, contractor, subcontractors, etc., are made aware of this report in its entirety. The use of information contained in this report for bidding purposes should be done at the contractor's option and risk. Any party other than the client who wishes to use this report shall notify PanGEO of such intended use and for permission to copy this report. Based on the intended use of the report, PanGEO may require that additional work be performed and that an updated report be reissued. Noncompliance with any of these requirements will release PanGEO from any liability resulting from the use this report. Within the limitation of scope, schedule and budget, PanGEO engages in the practice of geotechnical engineering and endeavors to perform its services in accordance with generally 17-030 Blue Boy BPS,Kent-Final Page 10 PanGEO, Inc. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Tlrac 7 3 211. accepted professional principles and practices at the time the Report or its contents were prepared. No warranty, express or implied, is made. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. Please feel free to contact our office with any questions you have regarding our study, this report, or any geotechnical engineering related project issues. Sincerely, 11 01 gf Steven T. Swenson, L.G. Siew L. Tan, P.E. Project Geologist Principal Geoteclmical Engineer 17-030 Blue Boy BPS,Knit-Final Page 11 PanGEO, Tue. Geotechnical Engineering Report Blue Boy Reservoir Booster Pump Station Bldg., Kent, WA Tillie 1 I, 7Qt R 8.0 REFERENCES International Building Code (IBC), 2015, International Code Council. Mullineaux, D. R., 1965, Geologic Map of the Renton Quadrangle, King County, Washington, scale 1:24,000,U.S.G.S. Geologic Quadrangle Map GQ-405. WSDOT, 2016, Standard Specifications fw-Road, Bridges, and Municipal Construction. 17-0M Blue Soy BPS,Kent-Final Page 12 PanGEO, Inc. u y ' (:77 �a , a, P �w ar W` Project Site 7 � e� ii1 _w 1 a� �o ,. X Image Source: Google Maps I IV Not to Scale Blue Boy Reservoir �'/j Booster Pump Station Building VICINITY MAP I�,/ 11300 Southeast 236th Place , IN a u R m R R R T e. R Kent, WA f r(v ut.No, i Igure: Pdo, 77-030 1 rwl , o I 4 I ! i jV i iV i d tttb: r Approximate Vicinity of Proposed E3uilding Existing �el1 Tower : I_eg Pn�i_ °""E Anprox. Tost Pit I ocation Not To Scale Note: Imagery obtained from King County iMap website. 5-foot contour interval for reference only. r '7��I a .■ ' Biuc boy Reservoir BLI Boosler Puma Station building SITE iai�i� EiCPi�O87l�Tivfv Pi.tiid 11300 :southeast 236th Place A n q 9r F Kent, WA 17-030 2 APPENDix A SUMMARY TEST PIT LOG RELATIVE DENSITY/CONSISTENCY TEST SYMBOLS for to Situ and Laboratory Tests SAND I GRAVEL SILT I CLAY listed in"Other Tests"column. Density SPT Approx.Relative i Consistency SPT Approx.Undrained Shear ATT Atterberg Limit Test N-values Density(%) N-values Strength(psf) Comp Compaction Tests Very Loose <4 <15 Very Soft <2 <250 Con Consolidation Loose 4to 10 15-35 Soft 2to4 250.500 DO Dry Density Med.Dense 10 to 30 i 35-65 Med.Stiff 4to8 500-1000 IDS Direct Shear Dense 30 to 50 65-85 '.' Stiff 8 to 15 1000-2000 %F Fines Content Very Dense >50 85-100 Very Stiff 15 to 30 2000-4000 GS Grain Size u Hard >30 >4000 Perm Permeability PP Pocket Penetrometer UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM R R-value MAJOR DIVISIONS GROUP DESCRIPTIONS SG Specific Gravity i OW: Well-graded GRAVEL TV Torvane Gravel GRAVEL <5%fines 50%or more of the coarse oti GP ? Poorly-graded GRAVEL TXC Trlexia Compression fraction retained on the#4 ".......""""'.....""""......"" ...... UCC Unconfined Compression sieve.Use dual symbols(eg, "a GM: Silty GRAVEL ors%to 1Y°/fines. . ..GRAVEL(>72%fines) ....,<..Clayey Situ to S intervals GC i Clayey GRAVEL SYMBOLS GP-GMLf......................._S. ....,........................ .,.::. .............................. ... Samplelln S' test types d' t SW: Well-graded SAND Sand SAND(<5%fines) •° •••.•• 2-inch OD Split Spoon,SPT 50%or more of the coarse ay. SP Poorly-graded SAND (140-Ib.hammer,30"drop) fraction passing the#4 sieve Use dualsymbols a SP-SM SM Silty SAND for 5%to 12%finesg ) SAND(>I2°/fines) ............••. SC : Clayey SAND 3.25-inch OD Spilt Spoon ... . .. ... .. . .. . ... .. ..... ... . ..... (300-lb hammer,30"drop) ML SILT i ......................... ........................... Liquid Limit<50 CIL Lean CLAY ® Nan-standard penetration ................ "' ' ' "' test(see boring log for details) Silt and Clay OL Organic SILT or CLAY 50%or more passing#2d0 sieve ........ ...... " MH; Elastic SILT ® Thin wall(Shelby)tube Liquid Limit>50 CH i Fat CLAY OH : Organic SILT or CLAY .. ... . .......... .... ......................................... . ................... . ........ Grab Highly Organic Soils PT i PEAT Notes: I, Sol exploration tosw in material descriptions based on visu'alobserv'ationand Red testsusirl(asystem Intss9ed from the Un11,on8 tClasslYaallSystemppUSCS) Wholeneoess lab0na1ary tests haveneon Pock core '.. conducted(as noted in the"Other Tesls"column) inbrldwApton,may include ta classification,Rease refer tothe dr%ossions hrr the report text lot a more complete destr oCion of the subsurface conditions, 2. The graphic symbols given above are not inclusive of all symbols that miay apppear on the borehole toggs. ® Vane Shear Other symbols may be used where field observations Indicated mixed soil r�vnsti deals or dual oanstiluent materials, DESCRIPTIONS OF SOIL STRUCTURES Layered: Uhnsofmata i�M clishng¢¢shedbyoilorandlor Fissured: Breaks along defined planes MONITORING WELL composite, mmatenal units aboveand below Slickensided: Fracture planes that are polished or glossy Q Groundwater Level at Laminated: Layers of soil typically 0.05 co form thick,max.1 cm Blocky: Angular soil lumps that resist breakdown time of drilling(ATD) Lens: Layer of soil that pinches out laterally Disrupted: soil that is broken and mixed 1 Static Groundwater Level Interla eyed: Alternating layers of differing soil material Cement/Concrete Seal Y 9 Y 9 Scattered: Less than one per foot Pocket: Erratic,discontinuous deposit of limited extent Numerous: More than one per foot Bentonite grout l seal Homogeneous: Soil with uniform color and composition throughout BCN: Am le batmen deciding plane and a plane 'I Silica sand backfll nar'mal to core axis COMPONENT DEFINITIONS slotted tip is � COMPONENT SIZE I SIEVE RANGE COMPONENT SIZE!SIEVE RANGE slough Boulder: >12 inches Sand Bottom of Boring r"u Cobbles: 3 to 12 inches Coarse Sand: #4 to 910 sieve(4.5 to 2.0 mm) MOISTURE CONTENT do ta 0 Gravel Medium Sand: #10 to#40 sieve(2.0 to 0.42 mm) Dry Dusty,dry to the touch Coarse Gravel: i 3 to 314 inches Fine Sand: #40 to#200 sieve(0.42 to 0.074 mm) Moist Camp but no visible water n Fine Gravel: i 314 inches to#4 sieve Silt 0.074 to 0.002 mm Wet Visible free water o Clay : <0.002 mm 3 Is G Terms and Symbols for e o a P o a a r E , Boring and Test Pit Logs Figure A-1 Phone: 206.262.0370 i TEST PIT LOG ......�....................... ........... Test Pit TP-1 Location: See Figure 2 Approximate ground surface elevation: Not Available Topsoil and Sod: 3 inches thick ------ Depth ft Material Description _........._ _................................... Loose to medium dense, dark brown sandy SILT to silty SAND, moist 0 - 1 to wet. (Fill) .................................... Numerous quarry spalls Loose to medium dense, orangish-brown, silty SAND with gravel, moist to wet. (Weathered Glacial Till) ] 2 -Occasional fine organics -- - _Ir_on_oxide staining — — — — — 2 4 Dense, silty SAND to sandy SILT with gravel, moist. (Glacial Till) -Iron-oxide staining near top of unit Test Pit terminated approximately 4 feet below ground surface. Groundwater seepage encountered 2 feet below grade at the time of excavation. u a I! 0 d � IF H Figure A-2 NEW "IIHI►ATER MI A I N CONNECTION PROCEDURES 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 4 October 31, 2018 Project Number. 16-3012 PUBLIC WORKS OPERATIONS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES 9.0 WATER 9.3 New Water Main Connection Procedures PURPOSE: To avoid connections between the City potable water system and unsafe or newly constructed water systems that have the potential to contaminate the City water system, and to provide optimal cleaning, disinfection and connection procedures for new water mains to ensure safe,potable drinking water for human consumption. Note: These procedures shall be done in the following sequence or as directed by the City Inspector. 9.3.1 Connection to an Existing Water Main A physical separation between all untested and potentially contaminated water mains (or main extensions) and the city's existing water system shall be maintained at all times unless the connection is protected by an approved Department of Health backflow device (See diagram on page 5). A hydrant meter and an approved backflow prevention device shall be used whenever drawing water from the city system (see Page 5 for schematic details). Hydrant meters and backflow devices may be obtained from the Public Works Operations Division/Water Section at 5821 S. 240°i Street by completing the billing forms for a hydrant meter permit and making the required damage deposit. There will be a charge for all water used in accordance with Kent City Ordinance section 7.02.180 "Temporary Water Meters". Prior to the new water main being installed, the contractor has the option of cutting in the connection tee on the existing water main, or providing potable water from another source to provide a temporary water supply. If the Contractor chooses the option of installing the new connection tee, the Contractor shall install new resilient wedge gate valves on all sides of the tee, or as required by the City. A mechanical joint plug with a 2"minimum tap and proper blocking shall be installed on the new incoming mainline valve at the new tee, with piping accessible to accommodate filling the new water main. The City inspector shall notify the Water section of Public Works Operations a minimum of five full working days before the valve and tee installation is scheduled. This will allow water section employees time to schedule the water main shutdown and notify the customers affected. 1':SOI's\Water\9.3NeivWatermainGmnecfionProcedurec Approval Date L. ,_',4 ,y ,p „i„17/9„S,ll,'��_Revisinn Date: Page 1 9.3.2 Cubing Foam cubes (pigs) shall be inserted into and pushed through the new water main to remove any residue, dirt, debris, obstruction or possible foreign material in the new water main. A. The Water Section shall be responsible for supplying the foam cubes to the contractor based on the water system design as shown on the approved construction plans. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for picking up the cubes at the Public Works Operations located at 5821 S 240`I'St Kent, Washington, andshall install two foam cubes at the initial connection and two foam cubes at each lateral connection six inches in diameter and larger (downstream of each connecting valve), as the new main is installed. This would include all six-inch diameter lateral runs to hydrants that are longer than two full pipe lengths, or have more than a single joint in them. C. A mechanical joint cap with a 2"minimum tap shall be installed with proper blocking at the initial connection point on the new main with piping accessible to accommodate both flushing and chlorine injection. D. The Water Section shall retrieve the foam cubes when the contractor performs the cubing process. All cubing and flushing shall be under the supervision of the Water Section or a City Inspector. E. To accommodate the launch and the retrieval of the cubes, the minimum blow-off size shall be four-inch diameter for six-inch and eight-inch mains. A six-inch diameter blow-off shall be installed for 10-inch and 12- inch mains per City of Kent Standards. F. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to properly dispose of all flush water per City of Kent Standards as well as locating and retrieving any "lost" or missing cubes or partial cubes from the water main. G. In the event that the initial cubing does not adequately clean the new water mains, the contractor shall be required to provide additional point(s) for launching and retrieval of additional cubes, and re-cube those sections of main that have debris in them until clean, as determined by the Water Section. 9.3.3 Pressure and Leakage Test All new water mains, extensions of existing mains, water system appurtenances and water services shall then be pressure tested for leakage in accordance with Section 7-09.3(23) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Water services and appurtenances 2" and smaller installed prior to water main testing shalt also be pressure tested with the water main. At no time will the temporary water system connection or backflow device remain connected or in place during the pressure test procedures. P:SOPdWater19.3NewWatermainCnnnectionPrncedures Approval Date L.L,B 0 7/15/03,Revision Date: Page 2 9.3.4 Chlorine 1'n'ection After the Contractor has cleaned the water main by cubing and flushing, the Contractor shall inject a liquid chlorine solution evenly throughout the new main and appurtenances for optimal disinfection. The chlorine dosage shall be in accordance with W SDOT 7-09.3(24)13 at a minimum of 50 mg/L (see the table on page 4 of this document) and a maximum of 100 mg/l. AWWA C651-99 Standards include detailed procedures for the adequate disinfection, flushing and microbiological testing of all water mains. If the contractor wishes the Water Section to do the injection, the City Inspector shall give the Water Section three working days notification to perform the chlorine injection. The Contractor must sign a waiver holding the City harmless for any failure of purity samples due to the work performed by the Water Section, as well as agreeing to reimburse the city for all city costs associated with the disinfection process. Work maybe scheduled after hours due to manpower or workload constraints, in which case the Contractor will reimburse the Water Section for city employee overtime associated with the work performed. The Chlorine shall remain in the main for the time specified according to the procedure used from AWWA Standards C651-99. After the 24-hour disinfection period, the remaining residual throughout the water main and appurtenances shall not be lower than 25 mg/L. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all chlorinated water. Chlorinated water shall be disposed of in an approved sanitary sewer. If a sanitary sewer is not available, or the capacity of the sanitary sewer will be at risk, the Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of the water per City of Kent Construction Standards. Amount of Chlorine needed to produce 50 mg/L in 18ft of pipe (one pipe length) for 5.25% household bleach (with no additives), 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite solutions and 65% available dry Calcium Hypochlorite. Diameter 5.25a/nfal 12.5%(gal) 65%a(Ibl 4" 0.009 0.005 0.007 6" 0.022 0.011 0.017 8" 0.039 0.019 0.029 10" 0.061 0.031 0.052 12" 0.087 0.044 0.047 16" 0.156 0.078 0.119 18" 0.197 0.098 152 24" 0.352 0.176 271 30" 0.548 0.275 jjOj422 P:SOPslWater19.3NeivWatermalnConneeRonProcedures Approval Date L g.,131a4i,J c dA'/15/03 Revision Date: Page 3 Example: How many gallons of fresh 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite will be required to disinfect 5,000 ft of 8" main? 5,000 ft- 18 ft=278 lengths of 8" pipe 278 x 0.039 = 11 gallons required 9.3.5 Bacteriological purity Samles Two consecutive sets of acceptable purity samples, taken at least 24 hours apart, shall be collected from representative points of the new main and appurtenances. Water section personnel shall take the first bacteriological purity sample(s) after the chlorine is removed, flushing is completed and the chlorine level is no greater than nor less than the level present in the adjacent distribution system. Water services two inches and smaller installed prior to water main testing shall also be purity tested with the water main. The second set of purity samples shall be taken no less than 24 hours after the first set of samples. A representative background sample of the City water system may be taken from the distribution source at the same time purity samples are taken from the new main. In the event that the Water Section or the City Inspector determines that trench water, dirt or debris has entered the new main during construction, the first purity samples shall be not be taken until the water has stood in the new main for at least 16 hours after final flushing. As above, the second set of purity samples shall not be taken until the water in the new main has stood for an additional 24 hours. Note: No water shall be flushed during the 16- or 24-hour incubation periods described above, or prior to the purity samples being taken. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to make arrangements to transport the sample(s) to a state-certified laboratory approved by the Water Section. The contractor shall be responsible for paying all costs for the purity samples excluding the representative background sample at the distribution source. Note: Two consecutive samples, 24 horns apart, must show no coliform presence before performing final connections to the existing water system. The Water Section may be available during normal working hours, depending upon workload, (7:30 ant to 4:00 pm) excluding holidays and weekends, to take purity samples, assist with cubing and chlorine injections. The Contractor shall reimburse the city for all associated costs, including labor, vehicles, materials and overhead charges. Outside of normal working hours, the contractor shall reimburse the City at the most current hourly overtime rate for labor, vehicles, materials and other associated costs. 9.3.6 final Connection(s) to the Existing Water Main PSOPs\Water\9.3NewWatermainConnecNnuPracedures Approval Date L „ Date: Page 4 i When both sets of purity sample results are satisfactory and received in writing from the state-certified laboratory, and all other City of Kent water system standards have been met, the contractor shall be allowed to connect the new mains to the existing distribution system following City of Kent and AW WA standards. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to prevent, at all times, the contamination of the new and existing water mains with trench water, dirt, debris, or other foreign material. A City of Kent inspector and/or Water Section representative must be present to witness the final connection(s) to the existing water system, to turn on and flush the new water system, and to place the new water system and appurtenances into service. Aypraued Cmss Conn.....Lon..vl kwt and*o, Disoberflelffuahing DaeMRatrination Sampling Faucet �i Temporary Test „,,....-Supply Hose Y If l Blocking -----Cpntrol Valve- i id, t.Wit a Nm;. l�l New Water Main UTTemporary Cap or Plug hpproudcor . C...... C.*n ne✓.e sd M110er Discharge/flushing Decnlonnation imnparary Illucking / Sampling Faucet j 1 —Comml Valve. _��- - New Water Main TUTemporary Cap or Plug P:SOPs\Water\9.3NewWatermainConneetion Procedures Approval hate L.'(s' x3laig(,}1{u,r^GW7 1.O03_Revision Date: Page 5 I SAMPLE PROJECT S I GN 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 5 October 31, 2016 Project Number: 16-3012 / (%) C14 i o MCL / v ;r • r ,�,i / / , IMr e G, LU 1 ; / P'REVA 1 L 1 NG WAGE RATES 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 6 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 Page 1 of 15 State of Washington Department of Labor & Industries Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone 360-902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, worker's wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements are provided on the Benefit Code Key. ....... . .. _._._. __.._._. Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date. 12/04/2018 Count Trade Job Cdassificat€on Wage Holiday Overtime Note King Asbestos Abatement Workers Journey Level $46.57 5D 1H King Boilermakers Journey Level _ $66.54 5N 1C ......................... King Brick Mason Journey Level $57.32 5A 1M King Brick Mason Pointer-Caulker-Cleaner $57.32 5A 1M King Buitdrnrl Servrce l-n3 loyees Janitor $24.63 5S 2F King f iYlc3roug 5er vice Emp-90 Traveling Waxer/Shampooer $25.08 5S 2F King Lit itding 5nvdcc Ern plo ees Window Cleaner (Non-Scaffold) $28.13 5S 2F King. Buitcling service EmtaCoyees Window Cleaner (Scaffold) $29.03 5S 2F King CtabinEt Makers (In ShcLP. Journey Level $22.74 1 King CsalpLa79?ers Acoustical Worker $60.04 5D 4C King CarrpenteTs Bridge, Dock And Wharf Carpenters $60.04 5D 4C King Cap'i7trrtets Carpenter $60.04 5D 4C King Caarpentef Carpenters on Stationary Toots $60.17 5D 4C King Cafl?cnters Creosoted Material $60.14 5D 4C King Camr&,-af:Us Floor Finisher $60.04 5D 4C King Carpenters Floor Layer $60.04 5D 4C King Caarpgmi crs Scaffold Erector $60.04 5D 4C King Cement Masons Journey Level $60.07 7A 4U_ King Divers a Tenders Bell/Vehicle or Submersible $113.60 5D 4C Operator (Not Under Pressure) King, Divers It Tenders Dive Supervisor/Master $76.33 5D 4C King Divers R Tenders Diver $113.60 5D 4C 8V King Divers £t Tenders Diver On Standby $71.33 5D 4C King Di.2, s6 Tenders Diver Tender $64.711 5D 4C King Divers & Tenders Manifold Operator $64.71 5D 4C King, DivewrswEt_Tenders Manifold Operator Mixed Gas $69.71 5D 4C King Divers Et Tenders Remote Operated Vehicle $64.71 5D 4C Operator/Technician King Divers a Tenders Remote Operated Vehicle Tender $60.29 5A 4C King Dredge Workers Assistant Engineer $56.44 5D 3F King Digjd , , W rTkeg. Assistant Mate (Deckhand) $56.00 5D 3F King Dtcdye Workers Boatmen $56.44 5D 3F King Da k}fie Woirkers Engineer Welder $57.51 5D 3F King Dredge,Workers Leverman, Hydraulic $58.67 5D 3F King Crec;Grc Wor@<ers Mates $56.44 5D 3F Kdrrog 13i°eri+e Vdo°g(cr_s Oiler 1 $56.001 5D 3F httDs://fortress.wa.aov/lni/wacielookuD/r)rvWacielookLin.asox 1 n/31 /7r11 R Page 2 of 15 King Urywati A lie: tut, Journey Level $58.481 5D 1H King Dry.w tt 1 aJaers Journey Level $59.32, 5P 1 E King Electrical Fixture Maintenance Journey Level $28.99 5L I Workers King Electricians -Inside Cable Splicer $77.51 7C 4E King Electricians - Inside Cable Splicer (tunnel) _$82.841 7C 4E King Electricians - Inside Certified Welder $74.90 7C 4E King Electricians - Inside Certified Welder (tunnel) $80.37#7C44E King Electricians - Inside Construction Stock Person $39.694E King Electricians - Inside Journey Level $72.304E King Electricians - Inside Journey Level (tunnel) $77.514E King fjq.E„.tricians - Mot',or,Sla2l�, Journey Level $45.081B King Electricians - Powerline Cable Splicer $79.434D Construction King Electricians - Powerline Certified Line Welder $69.75 5A 4D Construction _-. King Electricians Powerline Groundperson $46.28 5A 4D Construction King Electricians - Powerline Heavy Line Equipment Operator $69.75 5A 4D Construction King Electricians - Powerline Journey Level Lineperson $69.75 5A 4D Cnnstrrrction King Electricians - Powerline Line Equipment Operator $59.01 5A 4D Construction King Electricians - Powerline Meter Installer $46.28 5A 4D 8W Construction King Electricians - Powerline Pole Sprayer $69.75 5A 4D Construction King Electricians - Powerline Powderperson $52.20 5AF4;:AA Construction King Electronic Technicians, Journey Level $48.06 7E King Elevator Constructors Mechanic $91.24 7DKing Elevator Constructors Mechanic In Charge $98.51 7D King Fabricated Precast Concrete_ All Classifications - In-Factory Work $17.72 5B 1 R Products Only King Fence Erectors Fence Erector $41.45 7A 31 King Fence Erectors Fence Laborer $41.45 7A 31 King Fl�gers, Journey Level $41.45 7A 31 King Glaziers Journey Level $63.06 7L 1y King Heat Et Frost Insulators And Journeyman $73.58 5J 4H Asbestos Workers King Heating_Equipment Mechanics Journey Level $82.51 7F 1E King j E r fa 1L S1 J„ Journey Level $50.42 ZA I King Industrial Power Vacuum Cleaner Journey Level $11.50 1 King Inland Boatmen Boat Operator $61.41 5B 1K King Inland Boatmen Cook $56.48 56 1K King Inland BoatmenDeckhand $57.48 5B 1K King Inland Boatmen Deckhand Engineer $58.81 5B 1K King Inland Boatmen Launch Operator $58.89 5B 1K King Inland Boatmen Mate $57.31 5B 1K King Insrsectiwi/Ctean�nglSealia7 f Cleaner Operator, Foamer Operator $31.49 1 Sewer Et Water Systems By Rt ntgvlr�a 'Control httDs://fortress.wa.aov/Ini/waaelookUD/DrvWacelookuD.asDx 10/31/2018 Page 3 of 15 King in aptl r:Cr on/_C,6+2a Grout Truck Operator $11.50 1 Sewer Et Wat ern,, LSy I ern!L King in Head Operator $24.91 1 Sewer to Wajc+r Remote, Contr of King l mp ectiguL CjfejijLiLwl5 - ii Of Technician $19.33 Sewc,r tt_nL?L.5.ys�tp Control King Of Tv Truck Operator $20.45 Sewer Et Water_5yLlejja,By Remote Control King lnsulationAj."�L)Jrotors Journey Level $60.04 5D 4C King Ironworkers Journeyman $69.28 7N 10 King Laborers Air, Gas Or Electric Vibrating, Screed $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Airtrac Drill Operator $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Ballast Regular Machine $48.90 7A 31 King is 2rers Batch Weighman $41.45 7A 31 King Laborers Brick Pavers $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Brush Cutter $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Brush Hog Feeder $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Burner $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Caisson Worker $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers -Carpenter Tender $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Caulker $48,901 7A 31 King Laborers Cement Dumper-paving $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Cement Finisher Tender $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Change House Or Dry Shack $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers r�s Chipping Gun (under 30 Lbs.) $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Chipping Gun(30 Lbs. And Over) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Choker Setter $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Chuck Tender $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Clary Power Spreader $49.81 7A 31 ....................... King Laborers Clean-up Laborer $48.90, 7A 31 King Laborers Concrete Dumper/chute Operator $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Concrete Form Stripper $48.90 7A 31 King laborers Concrete Placement Crew $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Concrete Saw Operator/core Driller $49.81 7A if King Laborers Crusher Feeder $41.45 7A 31 King La!jqrers Curing Laborer $48.90 7A 31 King Lab_qrers Demolition: Wrecking 6t Moving $48.90 7A 31 (inc[. Charred Material) King Labo ers Ditch Digger $48.90 7A 31 King --Laborers Diver $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Drill Operator (hydraulic,diamond) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Dry Stack Walls $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Dump Person $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Epoxy Technician $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Erosion Control Worker $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Fatter Et Bucker Chain Saw $49.81 7A 1 31 King Laborers Fine Graders $48.901 7A 11 King Laborers FirewaLch $41.45 7A 31� ................... .. I - httDS://fortress.wa.ciov/1ni/wacielookun/r)rvWanpinnkiin-a-,ny 1 n/'3 1 /?nl R Page 4 of 15 King Laborers Form Setter $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Gabian Basket Builders $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers General Laborer $48.90 7A 31 M King Laborers, Grade Checker Et Transit Person $50.42 7A 31 King, Laborers Grinders $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Grout Machine Tender $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Groutmen (pressure)including Post $49.81 7A 31 Tension Beams King Laborers Guardrail Erector $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level A) $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level B) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level C) $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers High Scaler $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Jackhammer $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Laserbeam Operator $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Maintenance Person $48.901 7A 31 King Laborers Manhole Builder-mudman $49.81 7A 31 King, Laborers Material Yard Person $48.90, 7A 31 King Laborers Motorman-dinky Locomotive $49.81 1 7A 31 King Laborers Nozzleman (concrete Pump, Green $49.8fl 7A 31 Cutter When Using Combination Of High Pressure Air Ft Water On Concrete @ Rock, Sandblast, Gunite, Shotcrete, Water Bla King Laborers Pavement Breaker $49.81 7A 31 ::.:...::..=........................_._....................................__ _ ..�. .. - ... ._. _ King Laborers Pilot Car $41.45 7A 31 King Laborers Pipe Layer Lead $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Pipe Layer/tailor $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Pipe Pot Tender $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Pipe Reliner $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Pipe Wrapper $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Pot Tender $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Powderman $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Powderman's Helper $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Power Jacks $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Railroad Spike Puller - Power $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Raker - Asphalt $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Re-timberman $50.42 7A 31 King Laborers Remote Equipment Operator $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Rigger/signal Person $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Rip Rap Person $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Rivet Buster $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Rodder $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Scaffold Erector $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Scale Person $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Sloper (over 20") $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Sloper Sprayer $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Spreader (concrete) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Stake Hopper $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Stock Piler $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers $49.81 7A 31 httas://fortress.wa.aov/Ini/waaelookuo/orvWaoelookuo.asox 10/31/2018 Page 5 of 15 Tamper Et Similar Electric, Air Et 1 - Gas Operated Tools j King Laborers Tamper (multiple 3 Self-propelled) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Timber Person - Sewer (tagger, $49.81 7A 31 Shorer & Cribber) King .Laborers Toolroom Person (at Jobsite) $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Topper $48.90 7A 31 Kin Track Laborer g Laborers_......_ $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Track Liner (power) $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Traffic Control Laborer $44.33 7A 31 8R King Laborers Traffic Control Supervisor $44.33 7A 31 8R King Laborers Truck Spotter $48.901 7A 31 King Laborers Tugger Operator $49.81 7A 31 King ',..LabOrei's Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $107.60 7A 31 8� Worker 0-30 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $112.63 7A 31 Worker 30.01-44.00 psi g Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $116.31 7A 31 8� Kin Laborers, _ Worker 44.01-54.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $122.01 7A 31 Worker 54.01-60.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $124.13 7A 31 Worker 60.01-64.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $129.23 7A 31 Worker 64.01-68.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $131.13 7A 31 Worker 68.01-70.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $133.13 7A 31 g Worker 70.01-72.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air $135.13 7A 31 8g Worker 72.01-74.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Guage and Lock $50.52 7A 31 Tender King Laborers Tunnel Work-Miner $50.52 7A 31 King Laborers Vibrator $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Vinyl Seamer $48.90 7A 31 King Laborers Watchman $37.67 7A 31 King Laborers Welder $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Well Point Laborer $49.81 7A 31 King Laborers Window Washer/c(eaner $37.67 7A 31 King I_a,trorrnr -- Underground Sewer Er General Laborer Et Topman $48.90 7A 31 Water King I aa_t7rers - Uattlea'tyrraund Sewer' fe Pipe Layer $49.81 7A 31 Water - King Landscape.Construction Landscape Laborer $37.67 7A 31 King Landscape Conslrrrction Landscape Operator $59.49 7A 3C 8P King Lathers Journey Level $58.48 5D 1H King Marble Setters Journey Level $57.32 5A 1M King Mrwta,liabritation (In_SLLQ_aj Fitter $15.86 1 King t ctal f l7orratico (Ir ';lips) Laborer $11.50 1 King htet, l frtlarrcat,ivary--)pn Shop). Machine Operator $13.04 1 King h/,elal f r b�nation (In "iLign) Painter $11.50 1 King M �t.L I ,abrication In Shy-) Welder $15.48 1 httos://fortress.wa.anv/Ini/waaelonkuo/nrvWAnelnnI<i in_acnx 1 n/'�1 /7n1 R Page 6 of 15 King Nli [Wri nht Journey Level $61.541 SD 4C King MMgktar Bunldin,ns Cabinet Assembly $11.56 1 King Modular Buildings Electrician $11.56 1 King Modular Buildings Equipment Maintenance $11.56 1 King Modular Buildings Plumber $11.56 1 King Modular Buildings Production Worker $11.50 1 King ,Modular Buildings Tool Maintenance $11.56 1 King Modular_BL]ildings Utility Person $11.561 1 King Mnelrrlar BuRdirruas Welder $11.56 1 King Painters Journey Level $42.50 6Z 2B King lEite Driver Crew Tender $54.99 5D 4C -------------------------------- - - - - - - King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $74.87 5D 4C Worker 0-30.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $79.87 5D 4C Worker 30.01 - 44.00 PSI (King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $83.87 5D 4C Worker 44.01 - 54.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $88.87 5D 4C Worker 54.01 - 60.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $91.37 5D 4C Worker 60.01 - 64.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $96.37 SD 4C Worker 64.01 - 68.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $98.37 5D 4C Worker 68.01 - 70.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $100.37' 5D 4C -- ......... _ - Worker 70.01 - 72.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air $102.37 5D 4C Worker 72.01 - 74.00 PSI King Pile Driver Journey Level $60.29 5D 4C King Plasterers Journey Level $56.54 7D 1R King PI_ayg:q..and.ft; P.rark_Egrtaiizrttgitq, Journey Level $11.50 1 Installers King Plumbers tC PipefitteIs Journey Level $83.69 _ 6Z 3G King Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Plant Operators $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Cower rqurj3mR_ t Qperators Assistant Engineer $56.90 7A 3C BP' King Barrier Machine (zipper) $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Batch Plant Operator, Concrete $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Pow-)f as rerxt OTC toffs Bobcat $56.90 7A 3C 8P King Pcaw r Fcluirge l Ope_ralns Brokk - Remote Demolition $56.90 7A 3C 8P Equipment King { xavcr' Lquitr el lexators Brooms $56.90 7A 3C 8P' King Power Equipment Operators Bump Cutter $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Tv P L9-LL1P rlP-ct 020- rta s Cableway_s $60.49 7A 3C 88PP King Po ver' Ccyur r ainT OperaCoa s, Chipper $59.96 7A 3C SP King Praw ��' Ecjjj r7ueruC Opc�ral.ors Compressor $56.90 7A 3C BP King Peen cMi Ecru mcl t 0p ators Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With $60.49 7A 3C 8P Boom Attachment Over 42 M King Powev L!Ipmrl O ratcars Concrete Finish Machine -laser $56.90 7A 3C 8P Screed - King Pn,rww r: [cgaiip nci�' gxgr.atqrs Concrete Pump - Mounted Or Trailer $59.49 7A 3C 8P ® - High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure. httos://fortress.wa.aov/Ini/wacelookUD/DrvWaaelookuD.asDx 10/31/2018 Page 7 of 15 King NnLQquo P.Inf n2lt..QpeIatm Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With $59.96 7A 3C 8P Boom Attachment Up To 42m King ipLit -.raLors Conveyors 7A 3C 8P _.LL _Q12L_ $59.49 King Power F.clui nr rato rs�pp.. . Cranes Friction: 200 tons and over $62.33 7A 3C 8P King PowerLo.l.ninL411 One ra tr s Cranes: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons $59.96 7A 3C 8P With Attachments King LO-Wor f9L-1 ip MI-el I LgpffaiqEs_ Cranes; 100 Tons Through 199 Tons, $61.10 7A 3C 8P Or 150' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments) King Power EqUi erators, Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or 250' $61.72 7A 3C 8P ............... of boom including jib with attachments King Eqwtr Ec&!J2rnent.0perators Cranes: 300 tons and over or 300' of $62.33 7A X 8P boom including jib with attachments King Lowe_rE_mimnmt.�gperA!g Lis Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, $60.49 7A 3C 8P Under 150' Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments) King Power-EauiDment Operators Cranes; A-f rame - 10 Tons And $56.90 7A X 8P Under King Powei r( op mtOx ratqis Cranes: Friction cranes through 199 $61.72 7A 3C 8P �tons King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Through 19 Tons With $59.49 7A 3C 8P Attachments A-f rame Over 10 Tons King E2w�ent Operators Crusher _$59.96 7A 3C 813 King uAmment Oporators Deck Engineer/deck Winches $59.96 7A 3C 8P (power) King 1Power Eguipine it Ol?grators Derricks, On Building Work 7A 3C 8P L_ $60.49 King Power Equipment Operators Dozers D-9 a: Under $59.49 7A X 8P King Power Equipment Operators Drill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck Or $59.49 7A 3C 8P Crane Mount King ze-rirots Drilling Machine $61.10 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Elevator And Man-lift: Permanent $56.90 7A X 8P And Shaft Type King Power fguiL)ment Operators Finishing Machine, Bidwell And $59.96 7A 3C 8P Gamaco Et Similar Equipment King Forklift: 3000 Lbs And Over With $59.49 LA L 8P Attachments King (aowe itors Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With $56.90_L�quipment.Operc - -7A 3C 8P- Attachments King Power f gqi2l�Zl LcLt S_ Grade Engineer; Using Blue Prints, $59.96 7A 3C 8P Cut Sheets, Etc King Eqyttr u_Ipn)ent_pRg raLors Gradechecker/stakeman $56.90 LA 3C 8P E King Power Equipment Operators Guardrail Punch $59.96 7A X 8P King Power, EguJipmerApperaLors Hard Tail End Dump Articulating $60.49 7A X 8P Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. ft Over King 2_0_W,(tL1Lm=rrLe Hard Tail End Dump Articulating _$59.96 7A 3C 8P Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards King P-owgr-Egm,12_011 L Ckpnratc are, Horizontal/directional Drill Locator $59.49 7A 3C 8P King Llom-,L_LcLa rnt1_1_' (2m-TaLo-rs Horizontal/directional Drill $59.96 7A 3C 8P Operator King Power Eguipment OperaLor-5 Hydralifts/boom Trucks Over 10 $59.49 7A 3C 8P Tons King Power Equipment Operators 'Hydra lifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons $56.90 7A X 8P And Under httr)s://fortress.wa.c3ov/1ni/wacieIoc)kun/nrvWacieIonkiin-a,;ny i nr i /?n1R Page 8 of 15 King JEIOWLLl;z�Uj )eratqrs Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. Et Over 1 $61.10 7A LC 8P King Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not $60.49 7A 3C 8P Including 8 Yards King Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Paver�quriznlep?t rators Loaders, Plant Feed $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Loaders: Elevating Type Bell --$59.49 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Locomotives, All $59.96 7A 3C 8P King 1'2ML�E.SjAJ)rneq) Material Transfer Device $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Mechanics, All (teadmen - $0.50 Per $61.10 7A 3C 8P Hour Over Mechanic) King Power Eqt ipnnent Operators Motor Patrol Graders $60.49F LA 3C 8P King Power' Egtjpnniant OL)erators Mucking Machine, Mote, Tunnel $60.49 7A 3C 8P Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield King Rqw(Lr_E_qui_p t Oj i ator� Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution $56.90 7A 3C 8P ,'L __�q_ - - - EL Mulch Seeding Operator King Fewer Equipment Operators Outside Hoists (elevators And $59.49 7A 3C 8P Mantifts), Air Tuggers,strato King jPower' EcluipmentOperators Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 $59.96 7A 3C 8P Tons Through 44 Tons King Power Enuipment O[Lei�atons Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons $61.10 7A 3C 8P And Over King Power E_quipnnent 02gralars; Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons $60.49 7A 3C 8P Through 99 Tons King Pqw�q Eq!AP-10 en ILI� O rators Pavement Breaker $56.90 7A 3C 8P - i King EqVtE..f aklo.rs, Pile Driver (other Than Crane $59.96 7A 3C 8P Mount) King Power Equiprnent Ope ators Plant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $59.49 7A 3C 8P King Power ECILAP111('11t Operators Posthole Digger, Mechanical $56.90 7A 3C 8P King L3qwer EQUiDroellt Operator5 Power Plant $56.90 7A 3C BP King Lower_E_qujpmentOperators Pumps - Water $56.90 7A 3C 8P King (!tm�uipmLT1 Ot7c;iators Quad 9, Hd 41, D 10 And Over $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Power Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 $56.90 7A 3C 8P Feet In Height Based To Boom King R_ower Equipment Operators Remote Control Operator On Rubberl $60.49 7A 3C 8P .......................................................................... Tired Earth Moving Equipment King Power Fc ul Lment Operators Rigger And Bellman $56.90 7A 3C BP King Power FcLuprmatett )era )rs Rigger/Signal Person, Bellman $59.49 7A 3C 8P (Certified) King Po-w-erEcluIP-111-ent (AXN-aux 5 Rollagon $60.49 7A LC -8P King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Other Than PlantMix $56.90 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift $59.49 7A 3C 8P Materials King Power EquMnierdt Operator s Rato-milt, Roto-grinder $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Power -Lfl],P-ipLll-!Lllt--QL)tar�A-�%tL� Saws - Concrete $59.49 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Scraper, Self Propelled Under 45 $59.96 7A 3C 8P Yards King Powel-L( LILO 'Al2L PeLL Is Scrapers - Concrete & Carry All $59.49 77A 3C 8P King PowerEguillment Operators Scrapers, Self-propelled: 45 Yards $60.49 7A 3C 8P And Over King Power EutJonnent Operators Service Engineers - Equipment $59.49 7A 3C 8P ...... ......... ..... - King Power Equipment Operators Shotcrete/gunite Equipment $56.90 7A 3C 8P King EqwsL Cc u pm nLL920-LILLf-5 Shovel , Excavator, Backhoe, $59.49 7A 3C 8P Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons, httos://fortress.wa.ciov/lni/wacielookUD/r)rvWaqelookuD.aSDX 10/31/2018 Page 9 of 15 King 6 wcs CetJPppnent 02n or Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe: Over $60.49 7A I 3C 8P 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons ___ t p ._.e L__.. $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Pcrn r Ecur anent _reraCerrs Shovel Excavator Backhoes Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons King Pgwer Equipgja it Ope ator5. Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over $61.10 7A X 8P 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons King Power Eatnorn___ent Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over $61.72 7A 3C SP 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Slipform Pavers $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Spreader, Topsider Et Screedman $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Prawcr F(ir1 iprneaV O -tals Subgrader Trimmer $59.96 7A 3C BP King Power Equipment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $59.49 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators, Tower Crane Up To 175' In Height $61.10 7A 3C 8P Base To Boom King Power Equipment Operator; Tower Crane: over 175' through $61.72 7A 3C 8P 250' in height, base to boom King Power Equipment Operators Tower Cranes: over 250' in height $62.33 7A 3C 8P from base to boom King Power Equipment Operators Transporters, All Track Or Truck $60.49 7A 3C 8P Type King Ptawcr° Equipment Operators Trenching Machines $59.49 7A 3C 8P .... _ _ King 11ower Erturtn tgn.t Oprr r,tr>rs Truck Crane Oiler/driver - 100 Tons $59.96 7A 3C 8P And Over King E0 yjj2nrigilLOOp rgLg s Truck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 $59.49 7A 3C 8P Tons King Power E,grirrri orzk_G7acrptc rs, Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Power Fauipment Operators Welder $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Power EguipmenP Ooera'('.ors Wheel Tractors, Farman Type $56.90 7A 3C 8P King Ppwea Cc1ut{2opu rttGratars Yo Yo Pay Dozer $59.96 7A 3C 8P King Power Eouipment Operatrar.s-, Asphalt Plant Operators $60.49 7A 3C 8P Uncle*rrround Sewn fi Water - King Power Equipment Operators- Assistant Engineer $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underr rr nd ewt:r & Watcrr King Power Equipment Operators- Barrier Machine (zipper) $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Batch Plant Operator, Concrete $59.96 7A ff3C 8P U'nderp,round 5ewe°r R Water King Power Eguuipment Op-ere tors- Bobcat $56.90 7A8P Undergrouu_id Sewcr_Ep_Wa�ter King Power Equipment Operators- Brokk - Remote Demolition $56.90 7A8P Underground Sewer Et Water EquipmenteN CclKing Ppwwgrner)t Jperrgtors_ Brooms $56.90 7A 8P Underground Sewer Er Water _ King Power Equipment Opel attrr - Bump Cutter $59,96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Power Equip rro cnt 7<ratryrs- Cableways $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Ft Water King V"'Q2 qr E ur)lnent Operators- Chipper $59.96 7A 3C 8P lJrrc9grauntY Sgwcwr tt -Japer King faowcr Eclirir73er7t_Op >rators- Compressor $56.90 7A 3C 8P Under round Sewer tt Water King power Ecrtiiprltent Op_ci ators- Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With $60.49 7A 3C 8P Uderground Sewer Et Water Boom Attachment Over 42 M King Power Eguiurnent Operators- Concrete Finish Machine -laser $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Screed httos://fortress.wa.ciov/Ini/wac3elookuD/DrvWaaelnc)kiin.agn)( 1 n n 1 /7n1 R Page 10 of 15 King Pas er Ccgu1J717_rnt Oper7t.�r:s_. Concrete Pump - Mounted Or Trailer $59.49 7A 3C 81 Underground Sewer fi Water High Pressure Line Pump, Pump .....-- ---------- High Pressure. _ King Power Eouipo'neiztCgckrrttcrrs-, Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Boom Attachment Up To 42m King (n�: E,%upmei LCP. stators- Conveyors $59.49 7A 3C 8P Usdeimgrouncl 5ewer L Water King FoweLEcfuff_)mCat gn gkqu sIT Cranes Friction: 200 tons and over $62.33 7A 3C 8P UndergLggLid Sezwt r ke Witter King Power EguipmerroC Operak,c is Cranes: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water With Attachments ---- .=.....................-........ _. _........ ......... _- King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 100 Tons Through 199 Tons, $61.10 7A 3C 8P Underground.Sewer Ft Water Or 150' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments) King PgwerwwEquipment_Operators-- Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or 250' $61.72 7A 3C 8P Under round Setwer n Water of boom including jib with _ attachments King Power_Equipment Operators- Cranes: 300 tons and over or 300' of $62.33 7A 3C 8P _Underground Sewer Et Water boom including jib with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Ft Water Under 150' Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments) v',,. r__ e e rp King Pswdea'..Ertrit 'r�ret-Ct4=r�,tti, ��anes: A-frame - 10Tor, And g66.90 7A 3C 8P UndergroundSewer a Water Under King power Equipment Operators- Cranes: Friction cranes through 199 $61.72 7A 3C 8P Underground Sew(. r Er. Water tons King Bower Eclunp ment Opseratr ns- Cranes: Through 19 Tons With $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Watea Attachments A-frame Over 10 Tons King Power Equiorni L Opergttrrs, Crusher $59.96 7A 3C 8P Undergrocand Sewer Et Water _ King Power Eauipment Operators- Deck Engineer/deck Winches $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water (power) King Power Equlpmelrt Operators._ Derricks, On Building Work $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer ft Water King Power Equipment Operators- Dozers D-9 Et Under $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Power Egeng�mGi t Open rtoi s- Drill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck Or $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground ;ewer' ft Water Crane Mount King Power Equipment Operators- Drilling Machine $61.10 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Es Water King Power Equipment Operators- Elevator And Man-lift: Permanent $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water And Shaft Type King Power EcmpLnent O aratgIs,a Finishing Machine, Bidwell And $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Gamaco Et Similar Equipment King Power Lquiprnent Operators- Forklift: 3000 Lbs And Over With $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Attachments King Power Eratnpmenrt Operators- Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With $56.90 7A 3C 8P !Underground Sewer ft Watcn Attachments King Power EcLuriptnent_O.nc_r�ators._ Grade Engineer: Using Blue Prints, $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Cut Sheets, Etc King Poweu Eguiprnc It Operators- Gradechecker/stakeman $56.90 7A 3C 8P Qndergronnd 5etL"r ft Water King Powe*r EcLuipne mt Op7 rators_ Guardrail Punch $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Pgwer E9LIitament OPTatoo's- $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Fe Water httDs://fortress.wa.00v/Ini/wagelookUD/DrvWacielookUD.aSDX 10/31/2018 Page 11 of 15 Hard Tait End Dump Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. a Over King Ls- Hard Tait End Dump Articulating $59.96 7A X 8P UndeL5L!rid Sewc,)�q -r ft Water Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards King Horizontal/directional Drill Locator $59.49 7A 3C 8P UndergroundSewer d.-Water King �entOpp,ators- Horizontal/directional Drill $59.96 7A 3C 8P Undc.2rnroutid Sewer 8jL W5Ltej Operator King PowerEaumi-rient Operators- Hydralifts/boom Trucks Over 10 $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer 6. Water Tons King Hydratifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons $56.90 7A 3C 8P Under r0lund Sewer ft Water And Under King Power EuifIrliL�rt.( Et Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. Over $61.10 7A 3C 8P cl Underground Sewer Et Water King Power EcLyjmLii�ijLO -s- Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not $60.49 7A 3C 8P L _j)eraLqi__ UnderarOlJnd Sewer a Water Including 8 Yards King power Fct Up arneilt Operator- Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Loaders, Plant Feed $59.96 7A 3C 8P Undeiwound Sewer Et Water I I King Power Egui P -s- Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $59.49 7A 3C 8P UndeLr?,Cggnd Sewer a Wattled" King E�Ower Egui ment 'tors Locomotives, All $59.96 7A 3C 8P ul �2pgr� UndtiLground Sewer R Water King Power Eguip'nent Opc ajatori- Material Transfer Device $59.96 7A 3C 8P Undergrowfict,Sewer ft Water King Power Eguirimenl: Operators- Mechanics, All (leadmen - $0.50 Per $61-10 7A 3C 8P Under ground'.kwer It Water" Hour Over Mechanic) King Power Equipment Oireratoi-s- Motor Patrol Graders $60.49 7A 3C 8P U 11(le Lrprou rid StWej' et Water King Power EcuiDment Operators- Mucking Machine, Mote, Tunnel $60.49 7A 3C 8P gL�L4¢ Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield I King PowPi E(IuLip nefIt Op erators- Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution $56.90 7A 3C 8P L- Underground Sewer Et Water Et Mulch Seeding Operator King Eoter Eomoment Operators- Outside Hoists (elevators And $59.49 7A 3C 8P Undo rotund Sewer Waterr Mantifts), Air Tuggers,strato King Power EquilLment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 $59.96 7A 3C 8P Linderpnoun ter Tons Through 44 Tons King E0�2ff L9L J�Da(�Ilt Opelat()Fs- Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons $61.10 7A 3C 8P Ur _ _ — —i(t t[p,Lq_qrLd Se�r (t Water And Over King Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer & Water Through 99 Tons King Power Ec7triram�^rr4`� Or eratur�s- Pavement Breaker $56.90 7A 3C 8P Under�prpynjcl..Sewer Et Water King Power Eo ij?,qnvq! .rators- Pile Driver (other Than Crane $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Mount) King Power EgulDnI erators- Plant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $59.49 7A 3C 8P under-ound Sewer Et Water King ELLW2 LF Posthole Digger, Mechanical $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Powerboul en L 7A 3C 8P In _.-Operators- Power Plant $56.9 Underground Sewer Et Water. King Power EsjiLmffUL2nerators- Pumps - Water $56.90 7A 3C 8P LlndeiLo.round Sewer LiWjtter httDs://fortress.wa.cov/lni/wacielookUD/r)rvWaoplc)nktin.avn)( 1 nr�i /?niR Page 12 of 15 King Power Ejc Opei atoi s- Quad 9, Hd 41, D1 0 And Over $60.49 7A 3C 8P UndergLcqijd SeVeLU,Watei King Power Equil:Lment a Op rtoi Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 $56.90 7A 3C 8P e _ - - Under el- Feet In Height Based To Boom King Power Equipment Operators- Remote Control Operator On Rubber $60.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Tired Earth Moving Equipment King Power, Equipment Operators- Rigger And Bellman $56.90 7A X 8P Uridery ,rotjjjcl-SewQE It Water King Dower Lq -nent 0 er2tots- Rigger/Signal Person, Bettman $59.49 7A X 8P jjUnder round Sewer Et Water (Certified) King Power Equipment Operators- Rollagon $60.49, 7A 3C 8P -�Underground-Sewer U Water King EgLiip i ie -rat�Li s- Roller, Other Than Plant Mix $56.90 7A 3C 8P ---,round Sewer Ft Water King Power Equipment 02erators- Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer F! Water Materials King :itqu- Roto-mitt, Roto-grinder $59.96 7A X SP Underground Sewer Ft Water King Power Equipment Operators- Saws - Concrete $59.49 7A X 8P U1 tdelj�j-qL�Lltij WaLet King Scraper, Self Propelled Under 45 $59.96 7A X 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Yards King_ Power Equi-prnent Operators- Scrapers - Concrete EL Carry_ All $59.49 7A X 8P Underground Sewer a Water I King Equi Power 11 s- Scrapers, Self-propelled: 45 Yards $60.49 7A 3C 8P - - - Undorqn,ound Sewer IL Water And Over King Service Engineers - Equipment $59.49 7A 3C 8P UnclefLqrrLund Sewer 8. Water King Power Equipment Operators- Shotcrete/gunite Equipment $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel , Excavator, Backhoe, $59.49 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons. King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe: Over $60.49 7A X 8P Underground Sewer Et Water -.30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons King No-werr-1-19 UJP-m elmt--02-0-rato-rs- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, $59.96 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer ft, Water Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons King Power Egraiprraer€t Op,aerators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over $61.10 7A X 8P 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons King Power lguiiarnent Operators_ Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over $61.72 7A X 8P Uncler�Uound Sewer a Water 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Stipform Pavers $60.49 7A X 8P UnderRrOUrd Sewer Et Water King Spreader, Topsider Et Screedman $60.49 7A X 8P Underground Sewer & Water King Power' EQUiDn'lellt OPPJ-at0r5: Subgrader Trimmer $59.96 ZA 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King POWel' -. Uipn1e1A.OP Tower Bucket Elevators $59.49 7A X SP Underground ter King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane Up To 175' In Height $61.10 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer &Water Base To Boom King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane: over 175' through $61.72 7A 3C L I UndergroqrIdSewer 8 Water 250' in height, base to boom King LOwer 1q-(11LM-e1Lt-0j)e1-atof Tower Cranes: over 250' in height $62.33 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer ft Water from base to boom King Power Equip nent.0perators- Transporters, All Track Or Truck $60.49 7A 3C BID Under ground Sewer a Water Type htti)s://fortress-wa.ciov/1ni/wacielookuD/r)rvWaaelookuD.asDx 10/31/2018 Page 13Of15 King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Crane Oiler/driver 100 Tons $59.96 7A 3C 8P King '4to�r s- Truck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 $59.49 7A 3C 8P Urdcrp.round Sewer Et Water Tons King Rowoi Fcj LjiRgLent g gLa- Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $59.96 7A 3C SP Underground Sewer It Water- King Wheel Tractors, Farmall Type $56.90 7A 3C 8P Underground SLwer ft Water King Power Line, Clearance Tree Journey Level In Charge $49.96 5A 4A Trimmers King Power Line Clewarice. Tree Spray Person $47.37 5A 4A Trimmers King Power Line Ctearanre Tree Tree Equipment Operator --�49.96 �A 4A Trimmers King Power Line Clear ance Tree Tree Trimmer $44.57 5A 4A Ti imi-ners King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Trimmer Groundperson $33.60 5A 4A Trimmers Mechanics King �2sjdcntia� Brick Mason Journey Level $57.32 5A 1M King Residential Ccment Masons Journey Leve[ $60.071 7A 41-1 King Residential Drywall Aj)D[icatoLs Journey Level $45.05 5D 4C King Residential Electricians Journey Level $37.26 5Q 20 King Residential Marble Setters Journey Level $57.32 5A 1M King Residential Painters Journey Level $42.50 6Z 2B King Residential P[W-bers &..PjjLcf!t.teL� Journey Level $51.37 5A 1G King Residential Refriaeration a Art, Journey Level $51.37 5A IG King Se�identra( Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $50.01 7F 1R King Residential Soft Journey Level $49.43 5A 3J King �esjdential Stone Masons Journey Level $57.32 5A 1M King Residential Jerrazzo Workers Journey Level $52.61� 5A 1M King Residential Terra7ZO/Tite Finishers Journey Level $43.44 5A 1B King Residential Tile. Setters Journey Level $52.61 5A IM King Roofers Using Irritable Bituminous Materials $54.52 5A 3H King Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $82.51 7F 1E F httD5://fO[fD25S.VV3.OUV/1ni/vv8UplUAkuo/nn/VVaoelnokun a,;nx 10r�1 /7M1A Page 14 of 15 King Sii a2 rJ,nld-9- ;,Slr(� RoJz3,1i. New Construction Crane Operator $36.36 7V 1 King 517a,pt uslthiat; EtmmShr ficpai,r New Construction Electrician $36.36 7V 1 King 2-iu u 1, In -Ex rahir- Rey54i� New Construction Heat It Frost $73.58 5J 4H Insulator King Shir�bualding..Et Ship..Repair New Construction Laborer $36.36 7V 1 King Sh,rabtarldi g E#, ht �aaia New Construction Machinist $36.36 7V 1 King SIhiptxjik ur E_Ship Req aao. New Construction Operating $36.36 7V 1 Engineer King Shivbuitdinp. h Shir) Re oak, New Construction Painter $36.361 7V 1 King, Shipl uildina I Ship Repair New Construction Pipefitter $36.36 7V 1 King, Shipbuilding Et Shp Repair New Construction Rigger $36.36 7V 1 King ahi> R(j)air New Construction Sheet Metal $36.36 7V 1 King SYviobufldin Et Ship Repair New Construction Shipfitter $36.36 7V 1 King Shi,toikling a Shi) Rct au New Construction $36.36 7V 1 Warehouse/Teamster King ShffrhOd np B Ship Repair New Construction Welder / Burner $36.36 7V 1 King SYrf2taitrRtn� E),mShiJa Rrf> lr Ship Repair Boilermaker $44.95 7X 4J King Ship Repair Carpenter $44.95 7X 4J King Shipbuilding& Ship Repair Ship Repair Crane Operator $44.06 7Y 4K King ILIALUiVcBtrae ft Ship Rkaar Ship Repair Electrician $44.95 7X 4J __ King S bbgdtduais. Et Ship Etcnadr Ship Repair Heat Et Frost Insulator $73.58 5J 4H ....... . ., ......... ..... King Shjp)gHjins,_FJ pa Sh Pieor Ship Repair Laborer $44.95 7X 4J King Shilahtda¢Grn_4�, SWP EearMr Ship Repair Machinist $44.95 7X 4J King Shipburldhi, fl Ship Repair Ship Repair Operating Engineer $44.06 7Y 4K King St'li btaillLlm fi:,ShiP%�r2LaLr Ship Repair Painter $44.95 7X 4J King ShipbUildinp ft. Ship Repair Ship Repair Pipefitter $44.95 7X 4.1 King Shipbuilding IT ShiE) Rye aar Ship Repair Rigger $44.95 7X 4J King Shtr)bg!IcluP Et Slim>,12 i;r Ship Repair Sheet Metal $44.95 7X 4J King Siupbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Shipwright $44.95 7X 4J King SNrF�2t�arh9m l_SW2 Rojmir Ship Repair Warehouse / Teamster $44.06' 7Y 4K King Sign Malttas (a InstallerUEtectr9ca 'Journey Level $49.70 0 1 King snra MaIPc s E Installers (Non- Journey Level $31.52 0 1 Electrical ,_r ._ - - King Soft Floor_LuL-s Journey Level $49.431 5A 3J King Solar Controls For Windows Journey Level $12.44 1 Kin Sprinkler Fitters (Fire Protection) Journey Level $77.39 5C 1X g ............................................ _.......r_..............................._, s King (Non Journey Level $13.23 1 Structural) King Slone Masons iJourney Level $57.32 5A 1M King S(rct And Pt7rkrr Lat Swe�J er Journey Level $19.o9 1 Workers King Sur c-'yar5 Assistant Construction Site Surveyor ' $59.49 7A 3C 8P King aurveywrs Chainman $58.93 7A 3C 81' King 5unLv yoi-ti Construction Site Surveyor $60.49 7A 3C 8P King Telecommunication Technicians Journey Level $48.06 7E 1E King Telephone Line Construction.,-_ Cable Splicer $41.22 5A 2B Outside - _ King Telephone line Construction Hole Digger/Ground Person $23.12 5A 2B Outside King Te.!g?.iranrr Line Constructionmm Installer (Repairer) $39.53 5A 2B Outside ............. King Special Aparatus Installer I $41.22 SA 2B httDs://fortress.wa.aov/lni/wacielookuD/DrvWaaelookur).aSDX 10/31/2018 Page 15 of 15 ]±12lIh9l7e Line Construction . Outside King leVeohone Lime Con sUuclion Special Apparatus Installer II $40.41 5A 2B Outside King Telephone Line Con tr"uctlon_: Telephone Equipment Operator $41.22 5A 2B Outside (Heavy) —....-- King Tth-�ahone—1-Me(OrLIlrnG1,01) • Telephone Equipment Operator $38.36 5A 2B Outside (Light) King Telephone Line Construction - Telephone Lineperson $38.36 5A 2B Outside King Telephone Line Construction - Television Groundperson $21.92 5A 2B Outside King Telephone__Line Construction - Television Lineperson/Installer $29.13 5A 2B Outside King T lerjhonc Line Construction Television System Technician $34.68 5A 2B Outside King 7elephonemLine Construction ,, Television Technician $31.18 5A 2B Outside King Telephone Lune Construction - Tree Trimmer $38.36 5A 2B Outside King Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $52.61 5A 1M King Tile Setters Journey Level $52.61 5A 1M King Tite, Marble Lt Terrazzo Finishers Finisher $43.44 5A 1B King Traffic Control Stripers Journey Level $45.53 7A 1K King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix Over 16 Yards $54.30 5D 3A 8L King Ti uck Drivers Asphalt Mix To 16 Yards $53.46 5D 3A 8L King Truck Drivers Dump Truck $53.46 5D 3A 8L King Truck,Dr,iyers Dump Truck E& Trailer $54.30 5D 3A 8L King Truck Drivers Other Trucks $54.30 5D 3A 8L King Truck Drivers - RE,adv Mix Booster 9 Yards and Over $52.78 5A 4T King Truck Divers Rcady.6 ix Non-Booster Loads Under 9 Cubic $52.53 5A 4T Yards King Well Drillers 8 Irrigation Pump Irrigation Pump Installer $17.71 1 .Installers jngWe(l Well Drillers ft Irrigation PumpOiler $12.97 1 Installers Drillers Ec Irrigation Pump Well Driller _ $18.00 1 Installers httDs://fortress.wa.anv/Ini/waaelnnkiin/nrvWaaelnnk[in.asn)( 1nr i /7n1R Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Overtime Codes Overtime calculations are based on the hourly rate actually paid to the worker. On public works projects, the hourly rate must be not less than the prevailing rate of wage minus the hourly rate of the cost of fringe benefits actually provided for the worker. 1. ALL HOURS WORKED 1N EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40)HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. C. The first two (2) hours after eight(8) regular hours Monday through Friday and the first ten (10) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other overtime hours and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. D. The first two (2)hours before or after a five-eight(8)hour workweek day or a four-ten(10) hour workweek day and the first eight(8)hours worked the next day after either workweek shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.All additional hours worked and all worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. E. The first two (2) hours after eight(8) regular hours Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other hours worked Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. F. The first two (2)hours after eight(8) regular hours Monday through Friday and the first ten(10) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other overtime homy worked, except Labor Day, shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. G. The first ten(10)hours worked on Saturdays and the first ten(10)hours worked on a fifth calendar weekday in a four- ten hour schedule, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of ten (10)hours per day Monday through Saturday and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. H. All hours worked on Saturdays(except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement weather conditions or equipment breakdown) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked Monday through Saturday over twelve(12)hours and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 1. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall also be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 1 The first two (2) hours after eight(8) regular hours Monday through Friday and the first ten (10) hours on Saturday shall be paid atone and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked over ten(10)hours Monday through Saturday,Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. K. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. M. All hours worked on Saturdays(except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement weather conditions)shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. N. All hours worked on Saturdays(except makeup days) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 1 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Overtime Codes Continued 1. O, The first ten(10)hours worked on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays,holidays and after twelve(12)hours,Monday through Friday and after ten(10)hours on Saturday shall-be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. P. All hours worked on Saturdays(except makeup days if circumstances warrant)and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Q. The first two (2) hours after eight (8) regular hours Monday through Friday and up to ten (10) hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half limes the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of ten (10) hours per day Monday through Saturday and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Christmas day)shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Christmas day shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. R. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. S. The first two (2)hours after eight(8)regular hears Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays and all other overtime hours worked, except Labor Day, shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. U. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at two tines the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. V,. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Thanksgiving Day and Christmas day) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Thanksgiving Day and Christmas day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. W. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays (except make-up days due to conditions beyond the control of the employer))shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. X. The first four(4)hours after eight(8)regular hours Monday through Friday and the first twelve(12)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked over twelve (12) hours Monday through Saturday, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. When holiday falls on Saturday or Sunday, the day before Saturday, Friday, and the day after Sunday, Monday, shall be considered the holiday and all work performed shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Y. All hours worked outside the hours of 5:00 am and 5:00 pm (or such other hours as may be agreed upon by any employer and the employee)and all hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours per day(10 hours per day for a 4 x 10 workweek) and on Saturdays and holidays(except labor day) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. (except for employees who are absent from work without prior approval on a scheduled workday during the workweek shall be paid at the straight-time rate until they have worked 8 hours in a day(10 in a 4 x 10 workweek)or 40 hours during that workweek.) All hours worked Monday through Saturday over twelve (12) hours and all hours worked on Sundays and Labor Day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Z. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.All hours worked on holidays shall be paid the straight time rate of pay in addition to holiday pay. 2 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Overtime Codes Continued 2. ALL HOURS WORKED 1N EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40)HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. C. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. F. The first eight(8)hours worked on holidays shall be paid at the straight hourly rate of wage in addition to the holiday pay. All hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. G. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on paid holidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of wage including holiday pay. H. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All how s worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage, O. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. R. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked over sixty(60)in one week shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. U. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked over 12 hours in a day or on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. W. The first two (2)hours after eight (8)regular hours Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other hours worked Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. On a four-day, ten- hour weekly schedule, either Monday thru Thursday m Tuesday flu Friday schedule, all hours worked after ten shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. The first eight(8) hours worked on the fifth day shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other hours worked on the fifth, sixth, and seventh days and on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 3, ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF FIGHT(8)HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY(40)HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A, Work performed in excess of eight(8)hours of straight time per day, or ten(10)hours of straight time per day when four ten (10) hour shifts are established, or forty (40) hours of straight time per week, Monday through Friday, or outside the normal shift, and all work on Saturdays shall be paid at time and one-half the straight time rate. Hours worked over twelve hours (12) in a single shift and all work performed after 6:00 pm Saturday to 6:00 am Monday and holidays shall be paid at double the straight time rate of pay. Any shift starting between the hours of 6:00 pm and midnight shall receive an additional one dollar ($1.00)per hour for all hours worked that shift. The employer shall have the sole discretion to assign overtime work to employees.Primary consideration for overtime work shall be given to employees regularly assigned to the work to be performed on overtime situations. After an employee has worked eight(8) hours at an applicable overtime rate, all additional hours shall be at the applicable overtime rate until such time as the employee has had a break of eight(8)hours or more. C. Work performed in excess of eight(8)hours of straight time per day,or ten(10) hours of straight time per day when four ten (10) hour shifts are established, or forty (40) hours of straight time per week, Monday through Friday, or outside the normal shift, and all work on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All work performed after 6:00 pm Saturday to 5:00 am Monday and Holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. After an employee has worked eight(8)hours at an applicable overtime rats, all additional hours shall be at the applicable overtime rate until such time as the employee has had a break of eight(8) hours or more. 3 Benefit Code Key— Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Overthyle Codes Continued 3. E. All hours worked Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. Each week,once 40 hours of straight time work is achieved,then any hours worked over 10 hours per day Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double the hourly wage rate. F. All hours worked on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on paid holidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of wage including holiday pay. H. All work performed on Sundays between March l6th and October 14th and all Holidays shall be compensated for at two (2) times the regular rate of pay. Work performed on Sundays between October 15th and March 15th shall be compensated at one and one half(1-1/2)times the regular rate of pay. 1. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate Of Wage. In the event the job is down due to weather conditions during a five day work week(Monday through Friday,) or a four day-ten hour work week (Tuesday through Friday,)then Saturday may be worked as a voluntary make-up day at the straight time rate. However, Saturday shall not be utilized as a make-up day when a holiday falls on Friday. All hours worked Monday through Saturday over twelve (12)hours and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. J, All hours worked between the hours of 10:00 pm and 5:00 am, Monday through Friday, and all hours worked on Saturdays shall he paid at a one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 4. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY(40)HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. All hours worked in excess of eight(8) hours per day or forty(40)hours per week shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. B. All hours worked over twelve(12)hours per day and all hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. C. On Monday through Friday, the first four (4) hours of overtime after eight(8) hours of straight time work shall be paid at one and one half(1-1/2)times the straight time rate of pay, unless a four(4) day ten(10)hour workweek has been established. On a four (4) day ten (10) hour workweek scheduled Monday through Thursday, or Tuesday through Friday,the first two (2)hours of overtime after ten (10)hours of straight time work shall be paid at one and one half(1-1/2) times the straight time rate of pay. On Saturday, the first twelve(12)hours of work shall be paid at one and one half(1-1/2)times the straight time rate of pay, except that if the job is down on Monday through Friday due to weather conditions or other conditions outside the control of the employer, the first ten (10)hours on Saturday may be worked at the straight time rate of pay. All hours worked over twelve(12)horns in a day and all hours worked on Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at two(2) times the straight time rate of pay. 4 Benefit Code Key— Effective 8/31/2019 thru 3/2/2019 Overtime Codes Continued 4. D. All hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Saturday,Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate ofpay.Rates include all members of the assigned crew. EXCEPTION. On all multipole structures and steel transmission lines, switching stations, regulating, capacitor stations, generating plants, industrial plants, associated installations and substations, except those substations whose primary function is to feed a distribution system,will be paid overtime under the following rates: The first two (2) hours after eight(8)regular hours Monday through Friday of Overtime on a regular workday, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.All hours in excess of ten(10)hours will be at two(2)times the hourly rate of wage. The first eight(8) hours worked on Saturday will be paid at one and one-half(1-112) times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours on Saturday,and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays will be at the double the hourly rate of wage. All overtime eligible hours performed on the above described work that is energized, shall be paid at the double the hourly rate of wage. E, The first two(2) hours after eight(8) regular hours Monday through Friday and the first eight(8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other hours worked Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. On a four-day, ten-hour weekly schedule, either Monday thru Thursday or Tuesday thru Friday schedule, all hours worked after ten shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.The Monday or Friday not utilized in the normal four- day,ten hour work week, and Saturday shall be paid at one and one half(I5'z)times the regular shift rate for the fast eight (8) hours. All other hours worked Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. F. All hours worked between the hours of 6:00 pm and 6:00 ant, Monday through Saturday, shall be paid at a premium rate of 20% over the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. G. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked Monday through Saturday over twelve (12) hours and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. H. The first two(2) hours after eight(8)regular hours Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All other overtime hours worked, except Labor Day, and all hours on Sunday shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of wage. 1- The First eight(8) hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) per day on Saturdays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. J. The first eight(8)hours worked on a Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times thee hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight(8) hours on a Saturday shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked over twelve(12) in a day, and all hours worked on Sundays and Holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. K. All hours worked on a Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage, so long as Saturday is the sixth consecutive day worked. All hours worked over twelve (12)in a day Monday through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and Holidays shall be paid at double the horsily rate of wage. 5 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 4. L. The first twelve(12)hours worked on a Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on a Saturday in excess of twelve (12)hours shall be paid at double the hourly rate of pay. All hours worked over twelve (12) in a day Monday through Friday, and all hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on a holiday shall be paid at one and one-half limes the hourly rate of wage, except that all hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of pay. M, All hours worked on Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate. Any employee repotting to work less than nine (9) hours from their previous quitting time shall be paid for such time at time and one-half times the hourly rate. N. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays, and all work performed between the hours of midnight(12:00 AM)and eight AM(8:00 AM) every day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. 0. All hours worked between midnight Friday to midnight Sunday shall be paid at one and one-half the hourly rate of wage. After an employee has worked in excess of eight (8) continuous hours in any one or more calendar days, all additional hours shall be at the applicable overtime rate until such time as the employee has had a break of six (6) hours or more. All hours worked on Holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. P. All hours worked on Holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. Q. The first four(4)hours after eight(8)regular hours Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked over twelve (12) hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double the hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall bepaid at double the hourly rate of wage. R. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage, so long as Saturday is the sixth consecutive day worked. A]I hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. R. Placeholder Holiday C rides 5, A. holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day(7). B. Holidays: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day,the day before Christmas,and Christmas Day(8). C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day,Memorial Day, Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,And Christmas Day(8), Hatlidat Circles Continued 5, D. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(8), H. Holidays: New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Thanksgiving Day,the Day after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas(6). 6 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 5. 1. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6). J, Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve Day, And Christmas Day(7). K. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday After Thanksgiving Day, The Day Before Christmas, And Christmas Day(9). L. Holidays:New Year's Day,Martin Luther King Jr. Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day,Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(8). N. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans' Day, Thanksgiving Day,The Friday After Thanksgiving Day,And Christmas Day(9). P. Holidays:New Year's Day, Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday And Saturday After Thanksgiving Day, The Day Before Christmas, And Christmas Day (9). If A Holiday Falls On Sunday, The Following Monday Shall Be Considered As A Holiday. Q. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day(6). R. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day After Thanksgiving Day, One-Half Day Before Christmas Day,And Christmas Day. (7 1/2). S. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day,Presidents' Day,Memorial Day,independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(7). T. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day,The Friday After Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day,And The Day Before Or After Christmas(9). Z. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,And Christmas Day(8). 6. A. Paid Holidays:New Year's Day, Presidents' Day,Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(8). E. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Day Before Or After New Year's Day, Presidents Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and a Half- Day On Christmas Eve Day. (9 1/2). G. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,Veterans'Day,Thanksgiving Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day, and Christmas Eve Day(11). H. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day,New Year's Eve Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day,Friday After Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day, The Day After Christmas, And A Floating Holiday(10). L Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memm ial Day, independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday After Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(7). 7 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Holiday Codes Continued 6. T. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day,The Friday After Thanksgiving Day,The Last Working Day Before Christmas Day,Arid Christmas Day(9). Z. IIolidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day (7). If a holiday falls on Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be considered as the holiday. If a holiday falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered as the holiday. T A. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day,And Christmas Day(8).Any Holiday Which Falls On A Sunday Shall Be Observed As A Holiday On The Following Monday. If any of the listed holidays falls on a Saturday,the preceding Friday shall be a regular work day. B. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(8). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. C. Holidays:New Ycar's Day,Martin Luther King Jr.Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day (8). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. D. Paid IIolidays: New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day (8). Unpaid Holidays: President's Day. Any paid holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any paid holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. E. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(7). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. F. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,the last working day before Christmas day and Christmas day (8). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. G. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (0). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. H. Holidays:New Year's Day,Martin Luther King Jr.Day,Independence Day,Memorial Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the Last Working Day before Christmas Day and Christmas Day (9). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. Roliday Codes Continued 1. Holidays: New Year's Day, President's Day,Independence Day,Memorial Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, The Friday After Thanksgiving Day, The Day Before Christmas Day And Christmas Day(9). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be 8 Benefit Code Key— Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. 7, J. IIolidays:New Year's Day,Independence Day,Memorial Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day(6). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. K. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, "Thanksgiving Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(8), Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. L. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Labor Day, Independence Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Last Work Day before Christmas Day, And Christmas Day (7). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. M. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, the Day after or before New Year's Day, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, And the Day after or before Christmas Day (10). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. N. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day(7). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. When Christmas falls on a Saturday,the preceding Friday shall be observed as a holiday. P. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, And Christmas Day (7). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on fire following Monday. Q. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,the Last Working Day before Christmas Day and Christmus Day(8). Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday.If any of the listed holidays falls on a Saturday,the preceding Friday shall be a regular work day. It Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, the day after or before New Year's Day, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and the day after orbefore Christmas Day(10).if any of the listed holidays fall on Saturday,the preceding Friday shall be observed as the holiday. If any of the listed holidays falls on a Sunday, the day observed by the Nation shall be considered a holiday and compensated accordingly. S. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day,the Day after Christmas, and A Floating Holiday(9). if any of the listed holidays falls on a Sunday, the day observed by the Nation shall be considered a holiday and compensated accordingly. 'L Paid IIolidays: New Year's Day, the Day after or before New Year's Day, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and The Day after or before Christmas Day. (10). If any of the listed holidays falls on a Sunday, the day observed by the Nation shall be considered a holiday and compensated accordingly. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. V. Holidays: New Year's Day, President's Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,the day before or after Christmas,and the day before or after New Year's Day. If any of the above listed holidays falls on a Sunday,the day observed by the Nation shall be considered a holiday and compensated accordingly. 9 Benefit Code Key— Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 lloliday Codes Continued 7. W. Holidays: New Year's Day, Day After New Year's, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve Day, Christmas Day,the day after Christmas, the day before New Year's Day, and a Floating Holiday. X Holidays:New Year's Day,Day before or after New Year's Day,Presidents'Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and the day before or after Christmas day. If a holiday falls on a Saturday or on a Friday that is the normal day off,then the holiday will be Laken on the last normal workday. If the holiday falls on a Mondaythat is the normal day off or on a Sunday.then the holiday will be taken on the next normal workday. Y. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. (8)If the holiday falls on a Sunday,then the day observed by the federal government shall be considered a holiday and compensated accordingly. Z. Holidays: New Year's Day,President's Day, Independence Day,Memorial Day,Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, The Friday After Thanksgiving Day,And Christmas Day(8).Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. Any holiday which falls on a Saturday shall be observed as a holiday on the preceding Friday. 15, A. Holidays: New Ycafs Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,the day before Christmas Day and Christmas Day. (8)Any holiday which falls on a Sunday shall be observed as a holiday on the following Monday. B. Holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King.Jr. Day, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. (9) C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,the day before Christmas Day and Christmas Day.(8) D Holidays:New Year's Day,Presidents'Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day,Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day,and the day after Christmas. Note Codes 8. D. Workers working with supplied air on hazmat projects receive air additional$1.00 per hour, L. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows -Level A: $0.75, Level B: $050, And Level C: $0.25. M. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows: Levels A & B: $1.00, Levels C & D: $0,50. N. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows -Level A: $1.00,Level B: $0.75,Level C: $0.50,And Level D:$0.25. 10 Benefit Code Key—Effective 8/31/2018 thru 3/2/2019 Note Codes Continued 8. P. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows -Class A Suit: $2.00, Class B Suit: $1.50, Class C Suit: $1.00,And Class D Suit$0.50. Q,. The highest pressure registered on the gauge for an accumulated time of more than fifteen (15) minutes during the shift shall be used in determining the scale paid. R. Effective August 31,2012—A Traffic Control Supervisor shall be present on the project whenever flagging or spotting or other traffic control labor is being utilized.A Traffic Control Laborer performs the setup,maintenance and removal of all temporary traffic control devices and construction signs necessary to control vehicular,bicycle, and pedestrian traffic during construction operations.Flaggers and Spotters shall be posted where shown on approved Traffic Control Plans or where directed by the Engineer. All flaggers and spotters shall possess a current flagging card issued by the State of Washington,Oregon, Montana,or Idaho.These classifications are only effective on or after August 31,2012. S. Effective August 31,2012—A Traffic Control Supervisor shall be present on the project whenever flagging or spotting or other traffic control labor is being utilized. Flaggers and Spotters shall be posted where shown on approved Traffic Control Plans or where directed by the Engineer.All flaggers and spotters shall possess a current flagging card issued by the State of Washington, Oregon, Montana, or Idaho. This classification is only effective on or after August 31, 2012. T. Effective August 31,2012—A Traffic Control Laborer performs the setup,maintenance and removal of all temporary traffic control devices and construction signs necessary to control vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic during construction operations. Flaggers and Spotters shall be posted where shown on approved Traffic Control Plans or where directed by the Engineer. All flaggers and spotters shall possess a current flagging card issued by the State of Washington,Oregon,Montana,or Idaho. This classification is only effective on or after August 31,2012. U. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows—Class A Suit: $2.00.Class B Suit: $1.50, And Class C Suit: $1.00. Workers performing underground work receive an additional $0.40 per hour for any and all work performed underground, including operating, servicing and repairing of equipment. The premium for underground work shall be paid for the entire shift worked. Workers who work suspended by a rope or cable receive an additional $0.50 per hour.The premium for work suspended shall be paid for the entire shift worked. Workers who do "pioneer" work(break open a cut, build road, etc.)more than one hundred fifty (150) feet above grade elevation receive an additional $0.50 per hour. V. In addition to the hourly wage and fringe benefits, the following depth and enclosure premiums shall be paid. The premiums are to be calculated for the maximum depth and distance into an enclosure that a diver reaches in a day. The premiums are to be paid one time for the day and are not used in calculating overtime pay. Depth premiums apply to depths of fifty feet or more. Over 50'to 100'-$2.00 per foot for each foot over 50 feet. Over 101'to 150'-$3.00 per foot for each foot over 101 feet. Over 15l'to 220' -$4.00 per foot for each foot over 220 feet. Over 221' -$5.00 per foot for each foot over 221 feet. Enclosure premiums apply when divers enter enclosures (such as pipes or runnels) where there is no vertical ascent and is measured by the distance travelled from the entrance. 25' to 300' -$1.00 per foot from enhance. 300' to 600' - $1.50 per foot beginning at 300'. Over 600' -$2.00 per foot beginning at 600'. W. Meter Installers work on single phase 120/240V self-contained residential meters.The Lineman/Groundmen rates would apply to meters not fitting this description. 11 a b v �, m� ., . , . .. M :�m .�m w av ..a ,. ... . . . ,� M �n x �p FX. i wi.. �.. m mM w� � � � � '� mu �; °� � �.mp�.. Vu�u �. y,. p�� m� � � I���. w, w m �, I�. 'w „�mu ^M �I � �� ° � .�. i � aim i�M d' ���� �� " .,. ° ' rs.� IIW M as M u �M i mu�� I �r � IIIWII V w �^ ,�� q pW UW tl C 0 M� M J. III .« � � ��. � «:.lN m ��. � ��ii iw,� ° � wr I� m M MN W M M m mh ,v. .. i, Ilia y A�d� �i�l IW q � � �. W .. M Mu u.n � w QY ax µ N W M �`WI W W w 'IMPoI�II wwi m .m ii uV a ." � M M � � � �• � pl �; � ;"Wli NV � a � 0 � @V��,. M .� M QM M Qlli MV �V M w! @V W' � 01 M � � ° � � � �.�VW � � u1° � � . M i� 'Ir W � } � m m m ry u M i m � p I� �. � III I m uo: „m ai-u p, Wi;M: i ^Wiw .w Sul � M � wu �, m �n mm,��ii �w..x,u.wimrv�Mp N� u^ M � � Wi � w 0 . r e � � . t m m m � �� �, . w. �"" IIII � �� III �� IIIIIIIIIV���� uwi .„:... ,,,,� � r I� IU��IIIIIII!!I�� II�I� � �� ;� � �; � �W . �� �.� �� �; „M ��f� ' uw�' u � ^. '� III � _ m �ti a i WENT Agenda Item: Bids 10A, TO: City Council DATE: December 11, 2018 SUBJECT: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station - Award MOTION: Award the 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project to Prospect Construction, Inc. in the amount of $2,728,427.90 and authorize the Mayor to sign all necessary documents, subject to final terms and conditions acceptable to the City Attorney and Public Works Director. SUMMARY: This project will construct a new booster pump station, including site work, new single-story building containing an equipment room and a diesel generator, HVAC system, horizontal split case pumps, VFD, electrical power, control, instrumentation and SCADA, diesel fuel storage and HMS landscaping. The bid opening for the 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station Project was held on December 4, 2018 with seven bids received, all were responsive. The lowest responsible and responsive bid was submitted by Prospect Construction, Inc. in the amount of $2,728,427.90. Bid Tab Summary O1. Prospect Construction, Inc. $2,728,427.90 02. Harbor Pacific Contractors, Inc. $2,912,800.00 03. Gary Harper Construction, Inc. $2,936,132.10 04. TEK Construction Inc. $3,068,021.00 05. McClure and Sons, Inc. $3,081,034.00 06. Granite Petroleum, Inc. $3,547,328.40 07. Saybr Contractors, Inc. $4,587,449.90 Engineer's Estimate $2,927,727.00 EXHIBITS: 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station bid tabulation RECOMMENDED BY: Public Works Director BUDGET IMPACTS: Included in budgeted Water Fund expenses. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The following specification, written in the CSI format, supplement all other plans and specifications which have been prepared for this project and are considered to be a part of the Kent Special Provisions for this project, 640 Pressure Zone Booster Station/Bond A - 7 October 31, 2018 Project Number: 16-3012 i UITY OF KENT KING COUNTY WASHINGTON AMML KEOTT wasmiNcroN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISIONS 1 - 16 for 640 ZONE BOOSTER STATION L, . � M. dV 01 W4 _moo v r 4}Y SB 4;`� ,p 40276 4r ANAL SJONAL ( (� (o// G&O #16627 OCTOBER 2018 CONSULTING ENGINEERS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE Division 1 General Technical Requirements 01110 Surmnaiy of Work.................................... .................01110-1 01200 Measurement and Payment-......... ..............01200-1 01300 Submittals ........................................................................................01300-1 01310 Project Meetings .............................................................................. 01310-1 01320 Progress Schedules........................................................................... 01320-1 01400 Quality Control ................................................................................01400-1 01505 Mobilization and Demobilization.................................................... 01505-1 01520 Field Offices and Storage Sheds......................................................01520-1 01720 Record Drawings ............................................................................. 01720-1 01740 Cleanup............................................................................................ 01740-1 01770 Contract Closeout............................................................................. 01770-1 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training............................................ 01800-1 01900 Salvage and Demolition................................................................... 01900-1 Division 2 Sitework 02050 Locate Existing Utilities ..................................................................02050-1 02230 Clearing and Grubbing.....................................................................02230-1 02240 Dewatering.......................................................................................02240-1 02250 Temporary Shoring and Bracing.......................................................02250-1 02300 Earthwork............ ............................--........ ....................... ......... 02300-1 02305 Wet Weather Earthwork ..................................................................02305-1 02370 Erosion Control................................................................................02370-1 02511 Connection to Existing System........................................................02511-1 02530 Utility Structures..............................................................................02530-1 02700 Gravel Materials......................... ...... .. 02710 Gravel Surfacing........................... .............. ...........02710-1 02900 Landscaping.....................................................................................02900-1 02910 Planting Irrigation............................................................................02910-1 Division 3 Concrete 03200 Concrete Reinforcement ..................................................................03200-1 03300 Cast in Place Concrete .....................................................................03300-1 Division 4 Masonry 04200 Masonry......................... .................................................................04200-1 04210 Architectural Face Brick.................................................................. 04210-1 Division 5 Metals 05120 Structural Steel................................................................................. 05120-1 05500 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications ................................................... 05500-1 i I I SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE Division 6 Wood and Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry............----..........................................................06100-1 06190 Prefabricated Wood Trusses....-......................................................06190-1 Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07110 Bituminous Dampproofing............................. .......... ................07110-1 07210 Batt and Rigid Insulation.................................................................07210-1 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels............................................................07410-1 07900 Caulking and Sealants......................................................................07900-1 Division 8 Doors and Windows 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames..................................................... 08110-1 08310 Metal Access Hatches...................................................................... 08310-1 08625 Skylight Tubular Daylight System...................................................08625-1 08700 Finish Hardware...............................................................................08700-1 Division 9 Finishes 09250 Gypsum Wallboard............. ,.,.........09250-1 09300 Tile Work.............................................................. —........,,.........,...09300-1 09900 Painting—,..... ........ ............................ ............. ..........09900-1 Division 10 Specialties 10300 Safety Equipment.................................„................,.,,....................... 10300-1 Division 11 Equipment 11000 Equipment General Provisions .............................................._........, 11000-1 11010 Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations ........................................ 11010-1 11211 Potable Water Booster Pumps ......................................................... 11211-1 Division 12 Furnishings Not used Division 13 Special Construction 13417 Pressure Gauges........................................ ...................................... 13417-1 13419 Pressure Transmitters.............. ................ 13419-1 13426 Magnetic Flow Meters..................................................................... 13426-1 13433 Chlorine Analyzer System............................................................... 13433-1 13451 PLC Programming.................................................................... ...... 13451-1 13452 HMI Programming........................................................................... 13452-1 Division 14 Conveying Systems 14620 Trolley Hoists................................................................................... 14620-1 ii SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE Division 15 Mechanical 15050 Piping System.................................................................................. 15050-1 15100 Valves ................................---..................---............................. 15100-1 15150 Diesel Generator Fuel System ......................................................... 15150-1 15400 Plumbing.......................................................................................... 15400-1 15440 Submersible Sump Pumps ............................................................... 15440-1 15550 Generator Engine Exhaust System.........................................„......... 15550-1 15700 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning..................................... 15700-1 Division 16 Electrical 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ..--............... ...... ........... 16050-1 16060 Grounding and Bonding................................................................... 16060-1 16120 Conductors and Cables ......................................................................... 16120-1 16130 Raceway and Boxes......................................................................... 16130-1 16140 Wiring Devices ................................................................................ 16140-1 16230 Generator Assemblies...................................................................... 16230-1 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ......................................... 16410-1 16415 Automatic Transfer Switch.............................................................. 16415-1 16420 Enclosed Controllers.................... ................................................... 16422-1 16440 Panelboards...................................................................................... 16440-1 16d42 NAntnr f nntm] FnninMr nt _ _ _ „ 16dd2-1 16460 Low Voltage Transformers.............................................................. 16460-1 16510 Interior Luminaires .......................................................................... 16510-1 16520 Exterior Luminaires......................................................................... 16520-1 16910 PLC Hardware and Software Procurement—,.......---........ ........ 16910-1 16940 Control Panels.................................................................................. 16940-1 iii DIVISION 1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of the 640 Zone Booster Station, as shown on the Plans, and hereinafter specified, at the existing Blue Boy Reservoir site. Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: A. Demolish existing Blue Boy Reservoir control structure. B. Remove existing light pole and install new light pole in new location. C. Remove existing asphalt pavement as indicated on the plans. D. Provide new asphalt pavement as indicated on the plans. E. Coordinate three phase power service installation to the site with the utility provider including determining the aligmnent of the utility service and the location of the components. F. Perform site work, including excavation, backfill, compaction, and final grading. G. Construct one CMU building with architectural brick fapade, concrete foundation and floor slab, metal roof, and HVAC systems. H. Provide and install booster pumps. I. Provide and install valves, flow meter, piping, and necessary appurtenances. J. Provide and install all associated electrical and instrumentation and telemetry systems. K. Provide and install chlorine analyzer system including wall mounted chlorine analyzer, water storage tank, recirculating pump, and associated piping. L, Provide and install generator assembly including generator fuel system and transfer switch. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01110-1 I M. Provide and install new utility vault and accessories. N. Provide startup and completion of all punch list items for project closeout. O. Provide site restoration, landscaping, and irrigation. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION The Contract Documents show the location, arrangement, and type of work to be petfonned under the proposed project. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper notification to, and coordination with all utility districts, service districts, and all other persons and services that will be affected by this project at least one week in advance of beginning any construction that affects them. The Contractor shall notify the Owner(or other water utility purveyor) at least 48 hours in advance of any proposed water system shut downs. The Contractor shall also be responsible for notifying all impacted water users 48 hours in advance of any water shutoff. Water system shutdowns will be scheduled with the appropriate agency, under strict supervision, with an approved plan of construction. The Blue Boy Reservoir on the booster station site must remain in service at all times during the Project. Water staff will. isolate(not drain) the Blue Boy tank one time during the Project for up to 48 consecutive hours to accommodate the Contractor's piping and tee installations on the tank inlet/outlet line. The Contractor shall install a 6-inch-diameter temporary blowoff on the branch of the tee closest to the tank for Bushing prior to putting the tank back online. Coordinate this work with the Owner at least 2 weeks in advance. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions required to prevent damage to existing piping, utilities, and structures above or below ground during construction. Verification of elevations and locations of existing items shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All electrical equipment installed on the project shall be labeled and listed by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory for the application, or approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for installation on this Project. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 011 10-2 All electrical work by the Contractor on existing equipment shall be performed such that is does not invalidate the "UL" listing and labeling. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, he shall provide a"Site Evaluation" by an L&1 approved testing laboratory to satisfy L&I requirements or the local authority having jurisdiction. The Site Evaluation and all work required to reestablish the components "UL" listing shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. It is the intent and purpose of these Contract Documents to have constructed complete facilities in good working order for the least practical cost to the Owner. Suggestions,recommendations, as well as inquiries from the Contractor that will serve this purpose are welcome and will be given consideration by the Owner and the Engineer. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES Construction operations shall be limited to the areas noted on the Drawings and subject to the approval of the Owner and per KSP 1-08.4. 1.4 ORDER OF WORK The order of work will be at the option of the Contractor, in keeping with good construction practice, time restrictions, and requirements of the permits applicable to this project. The Contractor shall conduct the order of work to allow the existing facilities to remain operational during the construction of the Project and shall coordinate all of his activities through the Engineer with the Owner's operations and maintenance staff. The Contractor shall prepare a complete project schedule in accordance with Section 01320. The implementation of any measure required to protect the environment shall supersede any order of work designated within these Specifications. The Contractor shall meet the conditions as outlined in any and all permits and requirements of the Federal, State, County, and City regulatory agencies. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01110-3 SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This Section further defines Measurement and Payment for certain items for this project. Not all items are included in this Section. Measurement and Payment for other proposal items are included in the Section referenced in the Proposal documents. Any item not specifically included in a Measurement and Payment description shall be considered incidental to the project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01110 Summary of Work 01300 Submittals 1.3 MEASUREMENT Measurement for all items shall be as indicated in these Specifications for unit price and lump sum price bid items. Bid items are outlined in detail in this Specification Section and listed in the Proposal. Measurement shall be in accordance with Section 1-09.1 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Volumes of gravel materials and concrete volumes shall be measured by the Engineer in the field and quantities will be limited to the relative neat line dimensions shown on the Plans or as approved by the Engineer in the field. Weighing equipment, scale verification checks, load tickets for quarry spalls,rock riprap, cobbles, gravel materials, hot mix asphalt, bituminous construction materials, etc., shall conform to Section 1-09.2 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Load tickets shall include all gravel materials, cast-in-place concrete, cement grout, CDF,hot mix asphalt, ATB, and reinforcing steel. The Owner will pay for no material received by weight unless they have been weighed as required in this Section or as required by another method the Engineer has approved in writing. All costs incidental to weighing shall be merged into the various unit prices bid. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-1 1.4 PAYMENT BID ITEMS A. GENERAL The following is a partial list of bid items for the project. The Contract price for each item constitutes full compensation for furnishing all equipment, labor, materials, tools, supplies, appurtenances, and incidentals, and performing all operations necessary to construct and complete the various bid items in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for each item shall be considered as full compensation, notwithstanding that minor features may not be mentioned herein. Work paid for under one item will not be paid for under any other item. If a particular item of work shown on the Plans or described in Specifications is not described in a specific bid item, this item of work shall be considered as incidental to the work and the costs for this work shall be merged into the various respective unit price and lump sum bid items. B. PARTIAL BID ITEM LIST 1. Locate Existing Utilities a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for LOCATE EXISTING UTILITIES shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein for furnishing utility location markings of all existing utilities within areas to be disturbed on the site. 2. Potholing a. Measurement: Will be measured per each. b. Payment: The unit price bid per each for POTHOLING shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein for potholing, backfill, and restoration. 3. Temporary Erosion Control a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein for installation and maintenance of City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-2 i i all temporary erosion and sediment control measures and best management practices (BMPs), as shown on the Plans and as further described in Section 02370, except catch basin protection. 4. Catch Basin Protection a. Measurement: Will be measured per each. b. Payment: The unit price bid per each CATCH BASIN PROTECTION shall include all costs per Paragraph l A.A. herein to install, maintain, and remove the catch basin protection as indicated on the Plans. 5. Excavation Safety Systems a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to provide sheeting, shoring, and/or bracing of trenches and open excavations as required to meet the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 RCW and as further described in Section 02250. These costs shall not be considered incidental to any other bid item. 6. Earthwork a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for EARTHWORK shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein for asphalt demolition and earthwork excavation as required to construct site improvements and to restore site to elevations shown on the Plans and as further described in Section 02300 and Section 02305. 7. Unsuitable Excavation a. Measurement: Will be measured by the cubic yard, in place and shall be to the limits as designated by the Engineer. There shall be no payment if the Engineer believes removal of materials is needed because of damage caused by the Contractor's operations City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-3 All quantities will be measured and recorded by the Engineer in his Daily Report and the Contractor shall be responsible for reconciling his quantities with the Engineer on a daily basis. b. Payment: The unit price bid per cubic yard for UNSUITABLE EXCAVATION shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to excavate and wastehaul unsuitable native subgrade materials. The Contractor is advised that the excavation of any and all unsuitable material must be authorized by the Engineer in writing prior to the commencement of said excavation by the Contractor. 8. Foundation Gravel a. Measurement: Will be measured per ton and shall be to the limits shown on the Plans and as approved by the Engineer. b. Payment: The unit price bid per ton for FOUNDATION GRAVEL shall include all costs per Paragraph IA.A. herein for furnishing, installing and testing foundation gravel as shown on the Plans and as described Sections 02300 and 02700. 9. Booster Station Building a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for BOOSTER STATION BUILDING shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish and install concrete ramps and sidewalks, foundation, CMU, brick, wood trusses, roofing, siding, trim, doors, faux windows, plumbing, insulation, hardware, grating, trolley hoist, painting and HVAC, including excavation and the furnishing, placement, compaction, and testing of structural fill, as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 10. Booster Station Site Piping a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-4 b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for BOOSTER STATION SITE PIPING shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish, install and test complete and in-place, the piping, fittings, accessories, and thrust blocks, including excavation and the furnishing,placement, compaction, and testing of pipe zone bedding and trench backfill, connections to existing piping, as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The limits of this payment section shall be outside the walls of the booster station building associated with this Project. 11. Booster Station Building Piping a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for BOOSTER STATION BUILDING PIPING shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish, install and test complete and in-place, the piping, fittings, accessories, painting, and pipe supports, as shown on the Plans and as specified herein, as well as accessories such as pressure gauges, transducers, meters, and the chlorine analyzer system. The limits of this payment section shall be inside the walls of the booster station building associated with this Project. 12. Check Valve Utility Vault a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for CHECK VALVE UTILITY VAULT shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish and install the precast vault, sump pump, piping, valves, painting, access hatches, and ladder, as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 13. 20-hp Horizontal Split Case Pumps a. Measurement: Will be measured per each. b. Payment: The unit price bid per each for 20-HP HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMP shall include all costs per Paragraph 1.4.A. herein to furnish, install and test the pumps, motors, gauges, and accessories as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-5 14. 125-lip Hotizoutal Split Case Pumps a. Measurement: Will be measured per each. b. Payment: The unit price bid per each 125-HP HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMP shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish, install and test the pumps, motors, gauges, and accessories as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 15. Electrical a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for ELECTRICAL shall include costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to furnish and install electrical components of this Project including conduit, wiring, motor control centers, panel boards, receptacles, fixtures, and demolition and/or abandonment, as shown on the Plans and as described in Division 16 herein. This item shall also include all costs associated with coordinating with PSE to provide primary power source to the site. Owner will pay the actual invoice cost of the service installation directly to PSE. 16. Instrumentation and SCADA a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein to fabricate, program, test, furnish, install and commission complete and in place, control panels, and associated communication hardware, software, and progratmning including all radio communications as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 17. Generator, Fuel Tank, and Transfer Switch a. Measurement: Will be measured by lump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for GENERATOR, FUEL TANK, AND TRANSFER SWITCH shall include all costs per Paragraph IA.A. herein to furnish, install and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-6 test this equipment as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 18. Site Restoration/Landscaping a. Measurement: Will be measured by hump sum. b. Payment: The lump sum price bid for SITE RESTORATION/LANSCAPING shall include all costs per Paragraph 1 A.A. herein for cleanup, surface restoration, landscaping, crushed surfacing top course, and irrigation systems, not included in other lump sum or twit price bids, as shown on Plans and as specified herein. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01200-7 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes requirements that apply to all equipment and materials supplied on the Project. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. The Contractor shall verify that all features of all products conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or series of equipment that are being submitted for review. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the Engineer in each case where his submittal may affect the work of another contractor or the Owner. The Contractor shall ensure coordination of submittals among the related crafts and subcontractors and shall verify such coordination on all submittals. Where noted in the Contract Documents, the structural, mechanical, and electrical designs associated with the indicated equipment items are specific to the manufacturer and model number specified. Any structural, mechanical, or electrical modifications required to utilize an approved substitution to the specified equipment shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Where approved substitutions of specified equipment affect other materials or equipment, mechanical, structural, or electrical work, the Contractor shall note in the equipment submittal any necessary changes to accommodate the substituted equipment. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate other mechanical, structural, or electrical equipment submittals to make sure that all changes necessary to accommodate the substituted equipment are addressed in these submittals as well. See General Condition 3.04.3. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01720 Record Drawings 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training 11000 Equipment General Provisions 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#i 6627 01300-1 1.3 WORK INCLUDED Submittals required for this work shall include any or all of the following as required by the particular specification section and the submittal schedule: A. Construction Schedule B. PRODUCT SUBMITTALS 1, Manufacturer's Literature Shop Drawings 3. Color and Material Samples 4, Design Calculations 5. Test Reports C. Equipment Operation and Maintenance Manuals D. Post-Construction (Record) Drawings (see Section 01720) 1.4 SUBMITTAL INFORMATION Shop, catalog, and other appropriate drawings and information shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to fabrication or ordering of all equipment and materials specified. The number of copies of submittal information to be submitted shall be as indicated below. All submittal information shall be sent to the Engineer through the Contractor. The Contractor shall assign a separate submittal number to each item or group of items that relate to each specification section. Submittal numbers shall be assigned in consecutive ascending order, with the first project submittal assigned the number"L" Resubmittals shall be numbered using the same number followed by an alphabetical suffix. All submittals shall bear the Contractor's certification that he has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal information prior to transmitting to the Engineer. The submittal number and related specification section shall be marked on each submittal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 01300-2 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL When the Contract Documents require a submittal the contractor shall submit the following number of documents. Tvve of Submittal Number of Copies Schedules or Plans 5 Product Submittal A Desi�,r Calculations 5 Test Reports 5 Preliminary Equipment Manuals 3 Final Equipment Manuals 4 IT requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer and Owner, the Contractor may submit one copy of submittals electronically in lieu of submitting hard copies for all submittals except Equipment Manuals. Hard copies of Equipment Manuals must be submitted. If submittals are provided electronically, only one reviewed cony will be returned to the Contractor. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL When indicated in the Contract Documents the contractor shall submit product data for review by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, within 30 calendar days after receipt of the submittal, the Engineer shall review the submittal and return three copies of the marked-up submittal. The reproducible original will be retained by the Engineer. The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions: 1, If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method complies with the project Specifications, submittal copies will be marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN." In this event, the Contractor may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal. 2. if the review indicates limited corrections are required, copies will be marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." The Contractor may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in operation and maintenance data, a corrected copy shall be provided. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 013 00-3 i 3. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will be marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT." Except at his own risk, the Contractor shall not tmdertake work covered by this submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted, and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." 4. if the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method does not comply with the project Specifications, copies of the submittal will be marked "REJECTED - SEE REMARKS." Submittals with deviations that have not been identified clearly may be rejected. Except at his own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." B. MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE Where the contents of submitted literature include data not pertinent to the submittal, the portions) of the contents being submitted for the Engineer's review shall be clearly indicated. C. SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings shall be submitted in the form of blue-line or black-line prints of each sheet. Blueprint submittals will not be acceptable. All shop drawings shall be accurately drawn to a scale sufficiently large enough to show pertinent features and method of connection orjoining. On all shop drawings, figure dimensions shall be used as opposed to scaled dimensions. D. COLOR AND MATERIAL SAMPLES All material samples shall be of the exact article proposed to be furnished for the work and shall be submitted in the quantity required. Samples shall be returned to the Contractor, with one retained by the Engineer. Unless the precise color is specifically described in the Contract Documents, or whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, accurate color charts shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and selection. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 01300-4 E. DESIGN CALCULATIONS Where required in the Specifications, design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer. Design calculations shall be complete, concise, and in an easy-to-read format. All design calculations shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. F. TEST REPORTS Copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. 2.3 EQUIPMENT MANUALS A. GENERAL For all items of equipment,prelitninary manufacturer's equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. One copy will be returned to the Contractor with comments. The following information shall be furnished for all items of equipment installed on the project requiring operational and/or maintenance procedures, and for any additional items indicated by the Engineer. 1. Lubrication Information This shall consist of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the lubricants to be used and the lubrication schedule to be followed. 2. Electrical and Control Diagrams Diagrams shall show internal and connection wiring. 3. Startup Procedures These instructions consist of equipment manufacturer's recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 4. Operating Procedures These instructions consist of the equipment manufacturer's recommended step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping the equipment under specified modes of operation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 01300-5 5. Preventive Maintenance Procedures These instructions consist of the equipment manufacturer's recommended steps and schedules for maintaining the equipment. 6. Overhaul Instructions These instructions consist of the manufacturer's directions for the disassembly, repair, and reassembly of the equipment and any safety precautions that must be observed while performing the work. 7. Parts List This list consists of the generic title and identification number of each component part of the equipment. 8. Spare Parts List This list consists of the manufacturer's reconmiendations of number of parts, which should be stored by the Owner and any special storage precautions, which may be required. 9. Exploded View Exploded or cut views of equipment shall be provided if available as a standard item of the manufacturer's information. When exploded or cut views are not available, plan and section views shall be provided with detailed callouts. 10. Test Documentation Reports, records, data and forms documenting the results of equipment factory tests, including pump and blower performance curves, shall be provided, with the operating points for the specific equipment designated. When a special factory test of the supplied equipment is not performed, the manufacturer's standard performance reports and curves, with specified operating points, shall be provided for the supplied equipment. 11. Specific Information Where items of information not included in the above list are required, they will be provided as described in the specifications for the equipment. City of Kcnt 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01100-6 12. Warranty Information. 13. Maintenance Information Summaries (see below for requirements). In addition, the following items of equipment shall be provided with Maintenance Information Summaries in each appropriate section of the equipment manuals, prepared according to the format specified herein: « Potable Water Booster Pumps « Pressure Gauges « Pressure Transmitters/Transducers • Magnetic Flow Meters « Chlorine Analyzer System Components « Trolley Hoists • Piping System « Valves • Valve Operators « HVAC Equipment w Diesel GeueraLor, Fuei System, Siorage Tarix, and Transfer jwILCH « Submersible Sump Pumps • Telemetry Equipment « Electrical Equipment Maintenance information summaries shall be prepared on 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch paper only and shall contain the following information compiled from manufacturer's recommendations in the order shown. 1. Description or name of item of equipment. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of local manufacturer's representative. 4. Serial number (where applicable). The Contractor shall verify that it matches the equipment installed on the project. 5. Equipment nameplate data including model number. 6. Recommended maintenance procedures: a. Description of procedures. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01300-7 b, Maintenance frequency required. C. Lubricant(s) or other materials required(where applicable), including type of lubricant, lubricant manufacturer, and specific compound. d. Additional information as required for proper maintenance. 7. Recommended spare parts (where applicable). The maintenance information summary shall be placed at the beginning of the manual. All operation and maintenance information shall be comprehensive and detailed, and shall contain information adequately covering all normal operation and maintenance procedures. For ease of identification, each manufacturer's brochure and manual shall be appropriately labeled with the equipment name and equipment specification number as it appears in the project Specifications. The information shall be organized in binders. The binders shall be provided with a table of contents and tab sheets to pemlit easy location of desired information. Lubricants shall be described in detail, including type, recommended manufacturer, and manufacturer's specific compound to be used. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all operation and maintenance materials are obtained. Material submitted must meet the approval of the Engineer prior to project acceptance. B. EXTRANEOUS DATA Where the contents of the manuals include manufacturers' standard brochures or catalog pages, the exact item(s) used in this installation shall be clearly indicated and all manufacturers' data which is extraneous shall be clearly deleted. C. FINAL EQUIPMENT MANUALS The Contractor shall be responsible for tracking and coordinating each separate manufacturer's equipment operation and maintenance manual submittal and shall resubmit, as necessary, until the Engineer's review indicates that the submittal is acceptable. The Contractor shall maintain City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station c&o#t 6627 01300-8 cquipiueot ivauual files until final appluval copies an: delivered to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for collating the approved operation and maintenance submittal sections into complete final manufacturers' equipment operation and maintenance manuals bound in post binders which are indexed to the Specifications. The Contractor shall deliver the complete final operation and maintenance manuals to the Engineer prior to project completion. All copies final manufacturers' equipment manuals submitted will be retained by the Engineer or Owner. The Contractor shall also supply three CD-Rom copies of the final equipment manuals in a tabbed, searchable, .pdf format, with a table of contents bookmarked to provide a navigation link to each section of the. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal showing the date of transmittal, specification section, or drawing number to which the submittal pertains, submittal number, and a brief description of the material submitted. B. RESUBMITTALS When material is resubmitted for any reason, it shall be submitted under a new letter of transmittal and referenced to the previous submittal. 3.2 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS The Engineer will review all submittals for general conformance with the design and other requirements of the Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. Submittals may be rejected based on inadequate information and/or not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. Rejection of submittals requires action on the part of the Contractor to correct the reason for the rejection. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, and for techniques of assembly and installation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01300-9 i i j 3.3 COORDINATION OF PRODUCT SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL Prior to submittal for review by the Engineer, all data shall be fully coordinated, including the following: 1. All field dimensions and conditions. 2. All trades and public agencies involved, including necessary approvals. 3. All deviations from the Contract Documents. B. GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS 1. All submittals shall be grouped with associated items,uiless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer. 2. The Engineer may reject the submittals in their entirety or any part thereof, if not in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. CERTIFICATION Submittals shall bear the Contractor's certification that he has reviewed, checked, and approved the shop drawings prior to forwarding them to the Engineer. 3.4 TIMING OF PRODUCT SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL 1. All submittals shall be made far enough in advance of installation to provide all required time for reviews and securing necessary approvals. 2. In scheduling, the Contractor shall allow for the time indicated in Part 2.2A for the Engineer's review following his receipt of the submittal. B. DELAYS No additional or separate payment will be made for costs of delays occasioned by tardiness of submittals on the part of the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01300-10 3.5 EQUIPMENT MANUALS The preliminary copies of the manufacturer's equipment manuals shall be delivered to the Engineer for review not later than the time of equipment delivery to the project site. The Contractor will not be paid for more than 90 percent of the purchase value of an item of equipment until the Engineer has received the preliminary equipment manual for that item of equipment. Final copies of the manufacturer's equipment manuals shall be delivered to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to requesting payment in excess of 90 percent completion for the project. Progress payments for work in excess of 90 percent completion will not be made until the final equipment manuals have been received and accepted by the Engineer. Prior to submittal of the final equipment manuals, the Contractor shall check the manuals for accuracy and completeness and shall verify that prior review comments have been addressed. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01300-11 i SECTION 01310 PROJECT MEETINGS PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes information pertaining to the various meetings that will be held during the course of constructing this project. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE As soon as possible following the award of the Contract, a preconstruction conference shall be scheduled for representatives of the Owner, the Contractor, the Engineer, funding agencies, regulatory agencies, and affected utilities. 1.3 PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS The Owner and the Engineer will schedule and attend regular weekly meetings with the Contractor for coordination, administrative, and procedural requirements of the project. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS The Contractor shall schedule and hold regular meetings during the project: A. Safety Meetings (Contractor's subcontractors shall attend if they are working onsite.) B. Project Progress Meetings C. Equipment Installation Meetings D. Coordination Meetings E. Startup and Testing Meetings The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer in advance of all meetings. The meetings may or may not be attended by the Owner and Engineer. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01310-1 SECTION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section further defines the progress schedule requirements. This Section specifies the procedures for preparing and revising the cost-loaded constriction schedule used for planning and managing construction activities. The schedule provides a basis for determining the progress status of the project relative to the completion time, specific dates, and for determining the acceptability of the progress payment estimates. 1.2 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall prepare a time-scale network schedule using a critical path method(CPM). A general guide for preparing such a schedule is contained in "The Use of CPM in Construction, a Manual for Contractors," published by the Associated General Contractors of America. The schedule shall depict all significant construction activities and all items of work listed in the breakdown of contract prices submitted by the Contractor. Assigned values for each part of the work shall be indicated. The dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established what effect the progress of any one activity has on the schedule. Completion time and all specific dates and sequencing requirements shall be shown on the schedule. Activities making up the critical path shall be identified. No activity on the schedule shall have a duration longer than 14 days or an assigned value greater than $25,000, except activities comprising only fabrication and delivery, which may extend for more than 14 days. Activities, which exceed these limits, shall be divided into more detailed components. The scheduled duration of each activity shall be based on the work being performed during the normal 40-hour workweek with allowances made for legal holidays and normal weather conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS The CPM Progress Schedule shall be prepared using a computerized system. The schedule shall be submitted in the form of an arrow diagram or precedence diagram with activity listings. The following shall be included: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01320-1 i A. Network diagram shall show in detail and in order of sequence all significant activities, their descriptions, durations, and dependencies, as necessary and as required to complete all work and each separate part of the work. B. The activity listing shall show the following information for each activity shown on the network diagram: l: Description 2. Duration 3. Start and finish dates 4. Total float time and free float time C. Milestone activity completions shall be shown and clearly defined. D. The critical path shall be clearly indicated. E. A legend defining any abbreviations used on the schedule shall be provided. F. All CPM schedules shall conform to the requirements of the Owner's overall Project schedule and the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit four hard copies (bluelines or blacklines)plus all electronic file with each schedule submittal. The hard copies shall be 24 inch x 36 inch in size. All schedule reports shall be 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch format. The Contractor shall provide, in chronological order, a list of constraints used, if any, in the preparation of the schedule. Within 14 days after receipt of the schedule, the Owner and Engineer will return a copy of the schedule to the Contractor with comments. Review of the schedule is for purposes of evaluating the Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract time. Review shall not constitute approval or acceptance of the Contractor's constriction means, methods, or sequencing. Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule with each application for payment or whenever actual constriction progress deviates significantly from the current schedule and shall provide a written plan of activities to the Engineer and Owner each Thursday for the following week, for review and coordination with existing facility operations. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01320-2 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART1 CENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the control tests, test sample collection, required field-testing, and special inspections as specified herein, and indicated on the Plans. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 02300 Earthwork 02700 Gravel Materials 02710 Gravel Surfacing 02740 Hot Mix Asphalt 03300 Reinforced Concrete 1.3 PAYMENT All testing as required by this Section shall be coordinated and scheduled by the Contractor in accordance with the Owner and with the Owner's designated testing agency. Within a minimum of 2 working days, the Owner will contract with, and pay for, a testing agency to conduct all field and laboratory tests and special inspections as designated herein. Retesting and reinspection required because of defective work and testing performed for the convenience of the Contractor shall be paid for by the Contractor. Costs for retesting (beyond that which is required herein) will be reimbursed to the Owner in the form of a credit on a change order at the time of project acceptance. All costs for scheduling, sampling, coordinating, and retesting of defective work shall be considered as incidental to the work and merged into the respective unit and lump sum prices bid. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOILS AND GRANULAR MATERIALS A. COMPACTION CONTROL Optimum moisture content and maximum density tests shall be determined by the following method: ASTM D1557 —Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort B. IN-PLACE TESTS In-place density and moisture content tests shall be made by an independent testing laboratory according to the following methods: ASTM D 1556—Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method ASTM D6938 —Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 2.2 AGGREGATES All aggregates shall be tested in accordance with applicable WSDOT test methods: Title Test Method Sampling AASHTO T2 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 104A Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Aggregates 102A Percentage of Particles Smaller than 0.025 nun and 0.005 nmr 603A Organic Impurities 111A Abrasion of Coarse Aggregates by Use of the Los Angeles Machine IOTA Sand Equivalent 109A City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-2 2.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Cast-in-place concrete shall be tested in accordance with applicable parts of Chapter 16 of ACT 301. Concrete reinforcement and concrete special inspections shall be performed in accordance with local Building Official and WABO requirements. 2.4 HOT MIX ASPHALT Paving asphalt shall be tested in accordance with the following Washington State Department of Transportation test methods: Characteristics Test Method Tests on Residue from RTFC Procedure 208 Absolute Viscosity at 140 degrees F, poise 203 Kinematic Viscosity at 275 degrees F, cSt, min. 202 Penetration at 77 degrees F, 100 g15 see., mni.0) 201 Percent of Original Penetration at 77 degrees F, min. 2 Ductibility at 45 degrees F, cm, min. Flashpoint, (Cleveland Open Cup), degrees F min. (test on original asphalt) 206 Solubility in Trichloroethylene percent, min. (test on original asphalt) 214 (1) Original penetration,as well as penetration after RTFC loss shall be determined by AASHTO Test Method T 49. A. COMPLETE EXTRACTIVE OF UNCOMPACTED MIX Test methods shall be in accordance with the following: 1. AASHTO T68 2. ASTM D2172 3. AASHTO T30 B, DENSITY OF COMPACTED MIX Test method shall be in accordance with AASHTO T166, 1, The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule an independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner to conduct complete extraction tests on the uncompacted asphalt concrete pavement mix. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-3 2. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an affidavit from the asphalt supplier of the characteristics of the paving asphalt. The paving asphalt shall be tested in accordance with Washington State Department of Transportation Construction Manual and Standard Specifications, latest editions. PART EXECUTION 3.1 SAMPLING AND TESTING FREQUENCY A. GENERAL The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and scheduling of a certified independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner to provide the following quality control tests at the number and frequency described herein. The precise location of the tests shall be designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel employed to conduct the density testing, sampling of material(s), and special inspections. The Contractor shall provide safe access within the work site for laboratory personnel such that density testing and visual inspection can be performed. The Contractor shall provide samples of materials to be tested in the quantities required and herein specified to the appropriate laboratory personnel. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, tools, and materials necessary to obtain and deliver samples as herein designated. He shall also provide and repair any test holes required in order to facilitate the testing and sampling and to provide for the testing laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples until removed to the laboratory. Any areas tested and further failing compliance with the Specifications shall be recompacted and retested at the Contractor's expense,until a successful density test indicating compliance with these Specifications has been achieved. B. SOIL TESTING The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate with the Owner-employed independent testing laboratory to conduct the following quality control tests at the given frequency: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-4 Minimum Sampling & Material Test Testing Frequency Backtill for foundations, Gradation One for every 500 cy or one per walls,trenches and roads' day,whichever is more frequent, for each type of soil or fill material with quantities exceeding 25 cy. For trenches,one per day and one every 250 feet of trench. In-Place One every 500 ey or one per day Densityz'A for each type of soil or fill material with quantities exceeding 25 cy. For trenches, one per day and one every 250 feet of trench. Moisture-Density One prior to start of backfilling Relationship' operation, one every 20 densities and any time material type changes. Pipe Bedding' Gradation One every 750 feet of trench. Suberade and Fills' In-Place Densitv2,' One every 500 ev of each tvne material. Moisture-Density One for every 20 densities for each Relationship material. Gradation One for every moisture-density. 1. All acceptance tests shall be conducted from in-place samples. 2. Additional tests shall be conducted when variations occur due to the Contractors,operations,weather conditions,site conditions, etc. 3. The nuclear densometer, if properly calibrated,may be used but only to supplement the required testing frequency and procedures. The densometer shall be calibrated and is recommended for use when the time for complete results becomes critical. 4. Depending on soil conditions,it is anticipated that compaction tests shall be required at depths of 2 feet above the pipe and at each additional 5 feet to the existing surface plus a test at the surface. C. HOT MIX ASPHALT TESTING FREQUENCY The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate with the Owner-employed testing laboratory to conduct the following quality control tests at the stated frequency: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-5 i Minimum Sampling& Material Test 'Testing Fremxency Compaction One per SO tons asphalt concrete, with not less than one test per 4001f of traffic lane or french restoration,by nuclear density gauge testing,for all classes of HMA. Mix Design(By Submittal Design Mix(include test results). Contractor) Aggregate(each size)—100 pounds. Asphalt- I gallon. Mineral Filler—10 pounds. Asphalt(including prime Sample and Tests Submit a 1-quart sample and and tack coat) material certification with test results for each shipment or lot of asphalt. A duplicate 1-quart sample shall be retained by the Contractor until the completion of the job. Aggregates(from bins or Gradation One test prior to start of paving source) operation and one every 1,500 tons or 1,000 cy. Fractured Faces Same as gradation. LA Abrasion One test prior to start of paving and one test every 10,000 tons thereafter. Specific Gravity Same as gradation. Asphalt Concrete Marshall Method One initial test during mix design (including Asphalt Treated Test and one per 3,000 tons thereafter. Base) Specific Gravity One per each Marshall test. D. CONCRETE TESTING All testing shall conform to applicable portions of ACI. Special inspections of concrete and concrete reinforcement shall comply with WABO requirements. All concrete must meet the specified requirements for minimum 28-day compressive strength. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-6 All concrete cylinders shall be molded and tested for strength by an Owner-employed testing laboratory scheduled and coordinated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all concrete required for molding of the cylinders. In cases where cylinders are stored at the project site, the Contractor shall provide storage and protection for the cylinders in accordance with ACI requirements. Concrete tests and testing frequency shall be in accordance with the more stringent of the testing requirements specified in Section 03300-3.17 of these Specifications, and the following table: Minimum Sampling& Material Test TcsP.ing Frequency Coarse Aggregate(for each Gradation One test every 500 cy of concrete. grading size)' Deleterious One test initially and thereafter Substances when appearance makes the u _at.,__:al �nm . ouepw.. L.A.Abrasion One every 2,000 tons of aggregate. Moisture specific One initially and every 250 cy gravity and thereafter. One moisture to be absorption' conducted prior to any hatching and more frequently if hauling and storage does not provide a consistent moisture content. Fine Aggregate' Gradation and One every 250 cy of concrete. fineness modules Deleterious (same as coarse aggregate). Substances Moisture, specific (same as coarse aggregate). gravity and absorption' Concrete Slump Conduct one test every day of placement and one additional test for every 50 cy placed and more frequently if batching appears inconsistent. Conduct in conjunction with taking concrete cylinders. Entrained Air Conduct with each slump test. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-7 i Minimum Sampling& Material Test Testing Frequency Ambient and Conduct with each slump test. concrete temperatures Concrete Compressive For all concrete placement,take strength and one set of four cylinders per day evaluation of and one additional set of cylinders results per ACI for every 50 cy of each class of 214. (includes unit structural concrete. Cylinders shall weight of each be 4 inch by 8 inch. Test one cylinder) cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days. Fourth cylinder shall be held in reserve. A plot and statistical evaluation shall be maintained in accordance with AC 214 for compressive strength results. Field cure cylinders shall be made when insim strengths are required to be known. I. Aggregate moisture tests are to be conducted in conjunction with concrete strength tests for water/cement(w/c)calculations. E. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all required Special Inspections per WABO requirements (Chapter 17 of the IBC) with the Owner designated testing agency. Special inspections include cast-in-place concrete, concrete reinforcement, structural welded connections,bolted connections, concrete masonry units (CMU), compaction testing for building and structure foundations, and epoxy adhesive bolting. See Sheet S-1 of the Plans for special inspection schedule. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01400-8 SECTION 01505 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of mobilization and demobilization. Mobilization consists of preconstruction activities and preparatory work for the project necessary to mobilize labor, materials, and equipment to the project site. Demobilization consists of activities to remove materials and equipment from the project site upon project completion, including final cleanup. Items which are not considered mobilization or demobilization include but are not limited to: A. On-going activities throughout the duration of construction. B. Profit, interest on borrowed money, overhead, or management costs,. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item Division 1 General Technical Requirements PART2 PRODUCTS Products and materials required for mobilization and demobilization are described in the various sections of Division 1 and in other parts of the Contract Documents, PART 3 EXECUTION Complete mobilization and demobilization as required by the various sections of Division 1 and other parts of the Contract Documents. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01505-1 i SECTION 01520 FIELD OFFICES AND STORAGE SHEDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section describes the requirements for field offices on this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD OFFICES Daring the performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall maintain a suitable office at the site of the work, which shall be the headquarters of the Contractor's representative. Office location on the site shall be approved by the Owner and Engineer. 2.2 STORAGE SHEDS The Contractor shall provide storage for the protection of equipment, materials, supplies, and tools and shall ensure that a building be used for the storage of materials that deteriorate when exposed to moisture. Workshops and storage buildings shall be located in the general area of the work and shall be clean and in proper order. Storage of materials at the project sites shall not obstruct access or use by the Owner's employees of existing facilities. PART 3 EXECUTION All storage sheds shall be maintained as long as required for the safe and proper completion of the work. The Contractor shall remove such temporary facilities as rapidly as progress of the work will permit or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer's field office and accessories shall remain in service until the project is accepted by the Owner. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01520-1 SECTION 01720 RECORD DRAWINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the record drawings, which shall be maintained and annotated by the Contractor during construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 1.3 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE OWNER The Contractor will be provided with the following items to maintain record drawings for the project: A. One bill size paper set of Plans. B. One set ofAutoCAD drawing files for the Project. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall maintain the following record drawings for the project: A. A neat and legibly marked set of Contract Plans showing the final location of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, outlet boxes and cables; B. Additional documents such as schedules, lists, drawings, and electrical and instrumentation diagrams included in the Contract Documents; and C. Contractor layout and installation drawings. Unless otherwise specified, record drawings shall be full size and maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 01720-1 construction purposes and shall be available for review by the Engineer during normal working hours at the Contractor's field office. At the completion of the work, prior to final payment, all record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer. Marking of the drawings shall be kept current and shall be done at the time the material and equipment are installed. Annotations to the record documents shall be made with an erasable colored pencil conforming to the following color code: A. Additions - Red B. Deletions - Green C. Comments - Blue D. Dimensions - Graphite Legibly mark drawings to record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground raceways, cables, and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. The Contractor's record drawings (full-size hard-copy) will be reviewed monthly for completeness by the Engineer prior to preparing the progress estimate for payment. If the record drawings do not reflect the work performed, payment for that item of work will not be included in the progress estunate. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01720-2 SECTION 01740 CLEANUP PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the maintenance of the building, structures, and site(s) in a standard of cleanliness throughout the construction period as described herein. Throughout the construction period, the Contractor shall maintain the cleanliness of the site and structures as described herein. The Contractor is also to maintain access to all existing, operating equipment such that the equipment may be serviced and operated. Dust of all kinds, including concrete dust produced by constriction activities, shall be controlled to avoid damage to existing, operating equipment. Enclosures, ventilation, and air scrubbing may be required where significant potential for damage is determined by the Engineer. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with all requirements for cleaning up when described in other sections of these Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSPECTION The Contractor shall conduct daily site inspections, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements are being met. B. CODES AND STANDARDS in addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with all pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Provide all required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01740-1 I 2.2 COMPATIBILITY Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material or as approved by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. GENERAL Retain all stored materials and equipment in an orderly fashion allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage or traffic, and providing protection. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for this work. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from the project site. Provide adequate storage for all materials awaiting removal from the project site, observing all requirements for fire protection and protection of the environment. B. SITE Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Move these items into a place designated for their storage until disposal becomes available. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site, restack, arrange, or otherwise service all arrangements to meet the requirements above. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times so as to meet the approval of the Engineer. C. STRUCTURES Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up all scrap, debris and waste material. Move these items into a place designated for their storage until disposal becomes available. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 01740-2 Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep clean all interior spaces. "Clean" shall be interpreted to mean free from dust and other materials that can be swept with a broom using reasonable diligence. In preparing to install succeeding materials, clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material. Use all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness. D. STREETS All paved and unpaved streets in the vicinity of the project shall be kept free of material tracked from the project site(s) or dropped from vehicles entering and leaving the site(s). The Contractor shall inspect roads in each active area daily, and all material deposited on the road from the Contractor's activities shall be removed prior to the end of the workday. This shall include sweeping, as required, to collect any mud, dirt and dust from the surface. All catch basins and culverts in the work area shall be inspected before completion and cleaned as directed by the Engineer. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. DEFINITION Except as otherwise specifically provided, "clean" shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by commercial building maintenance equipment and materials. B. GENERAL Prior to final inspection, remove from the jobsite all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final project cleaning as described below. C. STRUCTURES 1. Exterior Visually inspect all exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste, smudges, and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01740-3 water, the Engineer may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior Visually inspect all interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste, smudges, and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove all paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only appropriate cleaning materials and equipment. 3. Glass Clean all glass inside and outside. D. TIMING Schedule final cleaning as approved by the Engineer to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean project, ready for occupancy. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01740-4 SECTION 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section specifies that upon completion of the construction, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work areas. The work areas shall be cleaned of all constriction rubbish and other materials remaining from the work. The Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities installed to accomplish the work and leave the site in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. All waste material disposed in the designated waste areas shall be neatly graded. All finished areas shall be self-draining. 1.2 GUARANTEE PERIOD REPRESENTATIVE Prior to final acceptance and payment, the Contractor shall designate one of his employees to act as the Contractor's representative during the 1-year guarantee period. It shall be the responsibility of this representative to act as a contact person for the Owner and Engineer for any problems that arise during the guarantee period, and to be fully responsible for resolving any problems including notifying subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers and others as required. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner and Engineer the name of this representative prior to the release of the retainage. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01770-1 i SECTION 01800 TESTING, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the installation, testing, connnissioning, and training for all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation systems and completed portions of the work. See also Section 16050 for additional electrical and instrumentation system testing requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01110 Scope of Work 01300 Submittals 15050 Piping Systems 15400 Plumbing 15700 HVAC 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLATION All mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment provided under this Contract shall be installed in conformity with the Contract Documents, including the manufacturer's requirements. Should a manufacturer's installation recommendation conflict with specific requirements of this Contract Document, the Contractor shall bring the matter to the attention of the Engineer. Any additional costs arising out of changes authorized by the Engineer to accommodate manufacturer's installation recommendations will be considered extra work. Any costs incurred by the Contractor through failure to timely notify the Engineer of a difference between Contract Document and manufacturer's installation requirements shall be home by the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01800-1 B. TESTING 1. General Requirements All equipment and partially complete or fully completed portions of the work included in this Contract shall be tested and inspected to prove compliance with the Contract requirements. Unless otherwise specified, all costs of testing, including temporary facilities and connections, shall be borne by the Contractor. For the purpose of this Section, equipment shall mean any mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, or other device with one or more moving parts or devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic, or hydraulic connection. Installed leakage tests and other piping tests shall be as specified in Sections 15050 and 15400. Installed tests for heating and ventilation systems shall be as specified in Section 15700. Installed tests for electrical and instrumentation devices and systems shall be in accordance with Division 16. No tests specified herein shall be applied until the item to be tested has been inspected and approval given for the application of such test. Tests and inspection shall include: a. The delivery acceptance test and inspections. b. The installed tests and inspections. These tests may be performed with water or the process fluid, as described in the accepted test plan. C. The operational testing of completed sections of the facility. These tests may be performed with water or the process fluid, as described in the accepted test plan. d. The comnussioning of completed sections of the facility by Owner's personnel. The commissioning shall be performed with the process fluid at normal flows. Tests and inspections,unless otherwise specified or accepted, shall be in accordance with the recognized standards of the industry. The Contractor shall see that scheduling and performance of all tests are coordinated with involved subcontractors and suppliers. The Contractor shall allow for up to two additional setpoint changes during testing. No extra costs or time allowances shall be provided as long as this setpoint allowance is not exceeded. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01800-2 The form of evidence of satisfactory fulfillment of delivery acceptance test and inspection requirements shall be, at the discretion of the Engineer, either by tests and inspections carried out in his presence or by certificates or reports of tests and inspections carried out by approved persons or organizations. The Contractor shall provide and use forms that include all test information, including specified operational parameters. The content of the forms used shall be acceptable to the Engineer. A master test log book shall be maintained by the Contractor, which shall cover all tests including piping, equipment, electrical, and instrumentation. The master test log book shall be provided with loose-leaf pages that shall be copied weekly after updating for transmittal to the Engineer. The master test log book shall be transmitted to the Engineer upon completion of the project. 2. Delivery Acceptance Tests and hnspections The delivery acceptance tests and inspections shall be at the Contractor's expense for any equipment specified herein and shall include the following: a. Test of items at the place of manufacture during and/or on completion of manufacture, comprising hydraulic pressure tests, electric and instrumentation subsystems tests, performance and operating tests and inspections in accordance with the relevant standards of the industry and more particularly as detailed in individual clauses of these Specifications to satisfy the Engineer that the items tested and inspected comply with the requirements of this Contract. Tests other than those specified shall be in accordance with Section 01400. b. Inspection of all items delivered at the site or to any authorized place of storage so that the Engineer may be satisfied that such items are of the specified quality and workmanship and are in good order and condition at the time of delivery. The Contractor shall be prepared to remove all coverings, containers, or crates to permit the Engineer to conduct his inspection. Should the Engineer find, in his opinion, indication of damage or deficient quality of workmanship, the Contractor shall provide the necessary documentation or conduct such tests deemed necessary by the Engineer to demonstrate compliance. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16621 01800-3 3. histalled Tests and Inspections a. General All equipment shall be tested by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer before any facility is put into operation. Tests shall be as specified herein and shall be made to determine whether the equipment has been properly assembled, aligned, adjusted and connected. Any changes, adjustments, or replacements required to make the equipment operate as specified shall be carried out by the Contractor as part of the work. b. Procedures i. General The procedures shall be divided into two distinct stages; preoperation checkout and water test. Testing procedures shall be designed to duplicate, as nearly as possible, all conditions of operation and shall be carefully selected to ensure that the equipment is not damaged. Once the testing procedures have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall produce checkout, alignment, adjustment and calibration sign-off forms for each item of equipment to be used in the field by the Contractor and the Engineer jointly to ensure that each item of electrical, mechanical and instrumentation equipment has been properly installed and tested. The Contractor is advised that failure to observe these precautions may place the acceptability of the subject equipment in question, ii. Preoperation Checkout The installed tests and inspection procedures shall incorporate all requirements of these Specifications and shall proceed in a logical, step-wise sequence to ensure that all equipment has been properly serviced, aligned, connected, calibrated, and adjusted prior to operation. Preoperation checkout procedures shall include,but not necessarily be limited to: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 01800-4 (1) Piping system pressure testing and cleaning as specified in Division 15. (2) Electrical system testing as specified in Division 16. (3) Alignment of equipment. (4) Preoperation lubrication. iii. Water Test Once all affected equipment has been subjected to the required preoperational checkout procedures and the Engineer has witnessed and has not found deficiencies in that portion of the work, individual systems may be started and operated under simulated operating conditions to determine as nearly as possible whether the equipment and systems meet the requirements of these Specifications. Test media for these systems shall either be the intended fluid or a compatible substitute. The equipment shall be operated a sufficient period of time to determine machine operating characteristics, including temperatures and vibration, to observe performance characteristics, including performance throughout the specified range for blowers, and to permit initial adjustment of operating controls. When testing requires the availability of auxiliary systems such as electrical power, compressed air, control air, or instrumentation which have not yet been placed in service, the Contractor shall provide acceptable substitute sources, capable of meeting the requirements of the machine, device, or system, at no additional cost to the Owner. Disposal methods for test media shall be subject to review by the Engineer. If under test, any portion of the work should fail to fulfill the Contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed or replaced, tests on that portion when so adjusted, altered, removed or replaced, together with all other portions of the work as are City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O A16627 01800-5 affected thereby, shall, if so required by the Engineer, be repeated within reasonable time and in accordance with the specified conditions. The Contractor shall pay to the Owner all reasonable expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of repeating such tests. Once simulated operation has been completed, all machines shall be rechecked for proper alignment, realigned, if necessary, and doweled in place. All equipment shall be checked for loose connections, unusual movement, excessive temperature, noise, and/or vibration or other indications of improper operating characteristics. Any deficiencies shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All machines or devices, which exhibit unusual or unacceptable operating characteristics shalt be disassembled and inspected. They shall then be repaired or removed from the site and replaced at no cost to the Owner. Test results shall be within the tolerances set forth in the detailed Specification sections of the Contract Documents. If no tolerances have been specified, test results shall conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice. Where, in the case of an otherwise satisfactory installed test, any doubt, dispute, or difference should arise between the Engineer, and the Contractor regarding the test results or the methods or equipment used in the performance of such test, then, the Engineer may order the test to be repeated. If the repeat test, using such modified methods or equipment as the Engineer may require, substantially confirms the previous test, then all costs in connection with the repeat test will be paid by the Owner otherwise the costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Where the results of any installed test fail to comply with the Contract requirements for such test, then such repeat tests as may be necessary to achieve the Contract requirements shall be conducted by the Contractor at his expense. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide at no expense to the Owner, all water, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01800-6 i power, fuel, compressed air supplies, labor and all other necessary items and work required to complete all tests and inspection specified herein. The Contractor shall provide, at no expense to the Owner, temporary heating, ventilating, and air conditioning for any areas requiring it in the case where permanent facilities are not complete and operable at the time of installed tests and inspections. Temporary facilities shall be maintained until permanent systems are in service. 4. Operational Testing After completion of all installed testing and review by the Engineer that all equipment complies with the requirements of the Specifications, the Contractor shall conduct operational testing. All domestic water, oil, fuel, and chemical systems shall be filled with the specified fluid. The Contractor shall operate the completed facility for a period of not less than that specified in Part 3.4 of this Section during which all systems shall be operated as a complete facility at various loading conditions, as directed by the Engineer. Should the operational testing period be halted for any reason related to the facilities constructed or the equipment furnished under this Contract, or the Contractor's temporary testing systems, the operational testing program shall be repeated until the specified continuous period has been accomplished without interruption. All process units shall be brought to full operating conditions, including temperature, pressure, and flow. Record drawings of facilities involved must be accepted and ready for turnover to the Owner at the time of operational testing. All costs for water, fuel, power, and chemicals required during operational testing shall be borne by the Owner. 5. Commissioning After completion of the operational testing and certifications by the Engineer that the systems meet all performance requirements, conunissioning will begin. The commissioning period for all systems shall be 30 days. The Contractor shall remove all temporary piping that may have been in use during the operational testing and shall assist the Owner with the placement of the facility City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 01800-7 into its fully operational mode handling potable water. The Owner's operations and maintenance personnel will be responsible for operation of the facility or portion of the facility during this period of time. The facility or portion thereof shall be fully and continuously operational, accepting all normal flow called for in design and performing all functions as designed. The Contractor shall be available, with all appropriate subcontractors and trades, at all times during commissioning periods to provide immediate assistance in case of failure of any portion of the system being tested. This assistance shall be available, if needed, on a 24-hour basis. The Engineer will not issue a certificate of Substantial Completion until the end of the commissioning period (including training) and then only when all corrections required to assure a reliable and completely operational facility have been complete. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs in excess of the Owner's normal expected costs of operations during the eormnissioning period. The Contractor shall bear the costs of all necessary repairs or replacements, including labor and materials, required to keep the portion of the plant being commissioned operational. The commissioning period will be considered completed when the facility has been continuously operated without major interruption, equipment failure, or system breakdown for the specified comnissioning period. A major interruption, failure or breakdown shall be a condition or event that prevents the facility from continuously and adequately handling normal flow, cannot be repaired or corrected immediately by the Contractor, and is not caused by improper operation and maintenance of the facilities by the Owner. An interruption of the commissioning period under these circumstances will require a re-start of commissioning once required repairs and corrections are made by the Contractor. Should the commissioning period be halted for any reason related to the facilities constructed or the equipment furnished under this Contract, the commissioning shall be repeated until the specified continuous period has been accomplished without interruption. Final O&M manuals for the facilities must be accepted and ready for turnover to the Owner before the start of commissioning. C. TRAINING During the phase of water testing of equipment, the Contractor shall make available experienced factory-trained representatives of the manufacturers City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O N16627 01800-8 i of all the various pieces of equipment, to train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance thereof. The time required for this training shall be as covered in the specifications for the specific piece of equipment. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time of the training at least 10 days prior to the start time of the training. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. STARTUP AND TESTING PLAN Prior to receipt of any progress payments in excess of 60 percent of the Contractor's total bid for the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer five copies of a startup and testing plan with details of the installed tests and inspection procedures he proposes to adopt for testing and startup of all equipment to be operated singly and together. B. TRAINING OUTLINE The Contractor shall submit five copies of a detailed outline of training activities to be performed by each manufacturer's representative 10 days prior to the start time of the training. This outline shall indicate how the manufacturer's representative is going to allocate the required specified number of training hours to fulfill these contractual obligations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTALLATION Materials employed in the installation shall conform to the requiretents of the Contract Documents and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers. 2.2 TESTING A. GAUGES, METERS, RECORDERS, AND MONITORS Gauges, meters, recorders, and monitors shall be provided by the Contractor as required to supplement or augment the instrumentation system provided under this Contract to properly demonstrate that all equipment fully satisfies the requirements of the Specifications. All devices employed for the purpose of measuring the performance of the facility's equipment and systems shall be specifically selected to be consistent with the variables to be monitored. All instruments shall be recently calibrated, and the Contractor shall be prepared at all times to demonstrate, through recalibration, the accuracy of all instruments employed for testing purposes. Calibration procedures shall be in City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Gx o#16627 01800-9 accordance with applicable standards of ASTM, ISA, and IEEE. The adequacy of all gauges, meters, recorders and monitors shall be subject to review by the Engineer. B. RECORDS The Contractor shall provide sign-off forms for all installed and operational testing to be accomplished under this Contract. Sign-off forms shall be provided for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment provided or installed under this Contract and shall contain provisions for recording relevant performance data for original testing and not less than three retests. Separate sections shall be provided to record values for the preoperation checkout, as well as signatures of representatives of the equipment manufacturers, the Contractor, and the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION All equipment and apparatus used in testing shall be installed by specialists properly skilled in the trades and professions required to assure first-class workmanship. Where required by detailed Specifications, the Contractor shall cause the installation of specific equipment testing items to be accomplished under the supervision of factory-trained installation specialists furnished by the equipment manufacturers. The Contractor shall be prepared to document the skills and training of all workmen engaged in the installation of all testing equipment furnished either by the Contractor or the Owner. 3.2 TESTING Testing shall proceed on a step-by-step basis in accordance with the Contractor's written testing procedures. The Contractor's testing work shall be accomplished by a skilled team of specialists under the direction of a coordinator whose sole responsibility shall be the orderly, systematic testing of all equipment, systems, structures, and the complete facility as a unit. Each individual step in the procedures shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. During the facility operational testing period, all equipment and systems in operation shall be operated to the greatest extent practicable, at conditions, which represent the full range of operating parameters as defined by the Contract Documents. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01800-10 I 3.3 TRAINING Training of the Owner's personnel shall be done by experienced technical manufacturers' representatives. Training shall be provided during a scheduled, dedicated session and shall not be combined with other field services such as equipment testing, startup and check-out. When required by these specifications, the training sessions shall be video and audio-taped by the Contractor and the final DVD delivered to the Owner. These manufacturers' representatives shall follow the outline presented here: GENERAL OUTLINE FOR MANUFACTURER PRESENTATIONS A. FAMILIARIZATION 1. Overview explaining theory of operation. 2. Show catalog, parts lists, drawings, etc., in the shop drawings and O&M manuals. Clearly identify the model or identification number of the equipment for which training is being provided. 3, Check out the installation of the specific equipment items. 4, Demonstrate the unit and show that all parts of the Specifications are met. 5. Answer questions. B. SAFETY 1. Point out safety references. 2. Discuss proper precautions around equipment. C. OPERATION 1, Point out reference literature. 2. Explain all modes of operation (including emergency). 3. Check out Owner's personnel on proper use of the equipment. (Let them do it). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01800-11 D. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE(PM) l. Pass out PM list including: a. Reference material. b. Daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, serni-annual, and annual jobs. 2. Show how to perform PM jobs. 3, Show Owner's personnel what to look for as indicators of equipment problems. E. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 1. List possible problems. 2. Discuss repairs - point out special problems. 3. Open up equipment and demonstrate procedures, where practical, F. PARTS 1. Show how to use parts list and order parts. 2. Check over spare parts on hand. Make recommendations. G. LOCAL REPRESENTATIVES 1. Where to order parts: Name, address, telephone, fax, e-mail. 2. Service problems: a. Who to call. b. How to get emergency help. 3.4 FACILITY OPERATIONAL TESTING The systems described below shall be tested to demonstrate the performance of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and control subsystems together as an integrated system. Where the testing described in this Section conflicts with the testing requirements specified for individual equipment, or the manufacturer's recommended testing procedure, those requirements and procedures shall prevail. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#r 6627 01800-12 Unless otherwise noted, a time period of 3 days shall be allowed for the facility operational test. A. BOOSTER PUMPS Testing of the booster water pumps shall be according to Section 11211. B. HEATING AND VENTILATING Testing and balancing of the heating and ventilating systems shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 15700. C. GENERATOR Testing of the generator shall be according to Section 16230. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01800-13 SECTION 01900 SALVAGE AND DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section covers the demolition of existing structures, piping, equipment, and sitework, and the salvage of existing materials and equipment as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. The Plans show the major items to be demolished and removed. The Contractor shall, however, remove any other incidental above-grade items, which are not to be used in the completed project. 1.2 SALVAGE Salvageable equipment and material shall be removed with care so as not to impair future uses and shall include all equipment and material so indicated on the Plans. Salvaged equipment and material not reused or rejected by the Owner shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion and weather and stored by the Contractor at the new 640 Zone Booster Station site. Reuse of salvageable equipment and material by the Contractor will not be permitted except where specifically indicated on the Plans and Specifications or where approved by the Engineer and Owner. Salvageable equipment and materials rejected in writing by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and be disposed of away from the site without additional cost to the Owner. 1.3 DEMOLITION The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with current City, County, State, and Federal codes and regulations related to demolition. The Contractor shall notify all affected utilities and comply with their respective requirements for abandonment of such utilities including power, telephone, natural gas, water, sanitary sewer, and storm sewer utilities. The Contractor shall maintain access for the Owner's employees during the demolition period and provide barricades, fences, etc., as required for job site safety. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01900-1 Demolition of concrete, masonry, roofing, asphalt, and other materials shall be done so as to avoid damage to existing structures intended to remain. Demolition or cutting required to add to or modify existing structures shall be done in such a manner that the appearance and utility of the existing structure is not impaired and so that a neat transition from new to old material may occur. All piping and appurtenances located less than 4 feet below finished grade shall be removed and hauled to an approved disposal site. All piping and appurtenances located four feet or more below finished grade may be abandoned in place, unless shown otherwise on the Plans, as long as Contractor fully seals all pipe and appurtenance openings with grout. All waste materials from demolition or cutting shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and hauled to an approved waste disposal site, if declared surplus by the Owner. All materials and equipment, however, are property of the Owner unless declared surplus. Some equipment and materials scheduled for salvage and delivery to the Owner are noted on the Plans. 1.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORT AND DISPOSAL The Contractor shall comply with all federal, state, and local regulations regarding the collection, containment and transportation of hazardous materials, including but not limited to WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulation, and shall ensure that all subcontractors comply as well. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 01900-2 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK i SECTION 02050 LOCATE EXISTING UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the anticipated conflicts, which may exist with existing utilities. A reasonable attempt has been made to locate the existing utilities; however, the exact location, and/or depth are unknown in most instances. Locations and dimensions shown in the Plans for existing facilities are in accordance with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate existing utilities and their depth. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item Ol 200 Measurement and Payment 02300 Earthwork PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall detcnnine the difficulties to be encountered in constructing the Project and his locate effort based upon the information provided on the Plans, field investigation, and the Contractor's contacts with the existing utility companies. The Contractor shall determine the extent of exploration required to first prevent damage to those existing utilities, and secondly to determine if the proposed improvements are in conflict with existing utilities. The Contractor shall locate existing utilities sufficiently ahead of construction, including potholing if determined necessary by the Engineer, so that the Engineer can modify the alignment, or grade prior to construction. Where underground utilities are found to be in the way of construction, such condition shall not be deemed to be a changed or differing site condition. If necessary, pipe alignment or grade shall be modified at the Contractor's expense. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02050-1 The Contractor shall call the Utility Location Request Center(One Call Center), for field location, not less than 2 nor more than 10 business days before the scheduled date for commencement of excavation that may affect underground utility facilities,unless otherwise agreed upon by the parties involved. A business day is defined as any day other than Saturday, Sunday, or a legal local, State, or Federal holiday. The telephone number for the One Call Center for this project is (800) 424-5555 (or 811). If no one-number locator service is available, notice shall be provided individually to those owners known to or suspected of having underground facilities within the area of the proposed excavation. The Contractor is alerted to the existence of Chapter 19.122 RCW, a law relating to underground utilities. Any cost to the Contractor incurred as a result of this law shall be at the Contractor's expense. No excavation shall begin until all know facilities in the vicinity of the excavation area have been located and marked. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02050-2 i SECTION 02230 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the clearing, grubbing, and stripping of the proposed project areas in preparation of foundation and pipeline installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 02305 Wet Weather Earthwork 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 1.3 DEFINITIONS "Clearing, grubbing, and stripping debris" as hereinafter used shall be considered as all material removed by the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operations. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL OF CLEARING AND GRUBBING DEBRIS Clearing and grubbing debris shall be disposed of by hauling to waste and disposal sites approved by the Owner. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Clearing and grubbing shall be performed as required to complete the work shown on the Plans to a minimum depth of 8 inches in order to remove the root zone of existing vegetation. This work shall include removal and disposal of all trees, logs, brush, stumps, roots, and minor ma invade structures to include but not limited to concrete, asphalt abandoned metal and equipment, rubbish and debris to the limits indicated City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02230-1 on the plans or as required and approved by the owner. This work shall be to a depth necessary to remove stumps, large roots and all other objectionable material. This work shall also include the protection from injury or defacement of trees, bushes, shrubs, and other objects designated to remain. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 02230-2 i SECTION 02240 DEWATERING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes dewatering excavations of any kind and location, including but not limited to groundwater, surface water, and precipitation, until backfilling has been completed to finished grade. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan in accordance with Section 01300 containing both a graphical and narrative presentation identifying proposed methods, equipment sizes and contingency plans should dewatering cause settlement of any adjacent facilities. The dewatering plan shall show specific locations, in plan and section, where dewatering is expected as well as a general discussion of methods to be employed should water be encountered in other locations. The plan shall detail the depth, diameter and anticipated flow for dewatering wells, well points or sumps. Acceptance by the Owner of the method, installation, and operation and maintenance details submitted by the Contractor shall not in any way be considered to relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for errors therein or from the entire responsibility for complete and adequate design and performance of the system in controlling the water level in the excavated areas, and for control of the hydrostatic pressures to the depths specified herein. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper design, installation, proper operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the dewatering system. 1.4 REFERENCES "Rossum J.R., 1954, Control of'Sand in Water Systems, Journal American Water Works Association, Volume 46, pp. 123-132" City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Gx O#16627 02240-1 Geotechnical Report, Blue Boy Reservoir Proposed Booster Pump Station Building, PanGEO, Inc., June 13, 2018. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to control the rate and effect of the dewatering efforts to avoid all objectionable settlement and subsidence. The Contractor shall comply with local codes and ordinances of governing authorities with regard to disposal of water pumped from dewatering operations. Proposed discharge points shall be approved by the Owner prior to implementation of dewatering. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all reasonable precautions necessary to ensure continuous, successful operation of the system. PART 2 PRODUCTS Dewatering shall be in accordance with the guidance stated in the Geotechnical The Contractor shall have sufficient pumping equipment and/or other machinery available onsite, including tankage,before operations begin to assure that the operation of the dewatering system can be maintained. This shall include providing backup pumps of similar capacity and a standby generator of the capacity required to continuously operate the Contractor's dewatering system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION During excavation, the installation of piping, conduits and structures and during the placing of hackfill, excavations shall be kept free of water, subsurface. nr otherwise. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment necessary to dewater the excavations and shall dispose of the water so as not to cause a nuisance or menace to the public. The dewatering system shall be installed and operated by the Contractor so that the groundwater level outside the excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property. The release of groundwater to its static levels shall be performed so as to maintain the undisturbed state of the foundation soils, prevent disturbance of backfrll and prevent movement of all strictures and pipelines. Design implementation and maintenance of any dewatering system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Boostcr Station G&O 916627 02240-2 The Contractor shall design filters and screen slot sizes for all sumps, wells and well points which prevents the movement of fines during pumping. The Contractor shall develop the wells such that they produce no more than 10-ppm silica as measured with a Rossum Sand Tester (Rossum, 1954) or equivalent. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A continual check by the Contractor shall be maintained to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. The Contractor shall test all dewatering discharge using a Rossum Sand Tester or equivalent to determine the silica content of the discharge. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to testing. Where critical structures or facilities exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering, reference points shall be established and observed at frequent intervals to detect any settlement that could develop. Should settlement be observed, the Contractor shall cease dewatering operations and implement contingency plans as outlined in the Contractor's approved dewatering plan. The responsibility for conducting the dewatering operation in a mariner that protects adjacent strictures and facilities rests solely on the Contractor. The cost of repairing any damage to adjacent structures and restoration of facilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Permanent piping systems, existing or new, shall not be incorporated into the Contractor's dewatering system. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02240-3 SECTION 02250 TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the temporary shoring and bracing for excavations including the trench excavation safety systems as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 1.3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT A Geotechnical Report was prepared by PanGEO, Inc., Proposed Booster Pump Station Building. June 13, 2018, and is included within the Appendix. 1.4 WORK INCLUDED The extent of temporary shoring and bracing work includes, but is not limited to: A. Temporary shoring and bracing necessary to protect the following against loss of ground or caving embankments: existing structures, buildings, roads, walkways, utilities, electrical transmission towers and support wiring, other facilities and improvements where required to comply with codes and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Trench excavation safety systems, pursuant to RCW Chapter 49.17 and WAC 296-155-655. C. Maintenance of shoring and bracing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SHORING CONSULTANT The Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified geotechnical engineer and qualified structural engineer registered in the State of City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02250-1 I Washington to design temporary shoring and bracing when required by applicable regulations. B. SHORING DESIGN The Contractor shall provide layout and design drawings and specifications for shoring and bracing when a trench box is inadequate for the purpose or will not be used and trench depth exceeds 4 feet and back sloping will not be used. Temporary shoring and bracing system design and calculations shall be prepared, stamped, and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington. C. REGULATIONS The Contractor shall design sheeting, shoring and bracing in accordance with the Washington State Safety Code and any local codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shoring and bracing layout and design drawings, calculations and other backup data to the Owner for review in accordance with Section 01300 prior to the start of construction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. SOILS INFORMATION A soils investigation has been conducted for this Project and a copy of the report is included as part of the Contract Documents. The Geotechnical Report was prepared for the exclusive use of the Owner and its agents to assist in the design of the subject facility. It is made available to the Contractor to assist in the design of the shoring systems. They are made available to bidders and contractors for information on factual data only, and not as a warranty of subsurface conditions, such as those interpreted from the boring and/or test pit logs and discussion of subsurface conditions included in the Reports. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings and/or soil test pits. It is expressly understood that the Owner and its agents shall not be responsible for interpretations of conclusions drawn by the Contractor from the Geotechnical Report. This data is made available solely for the convenience of the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02250-2 B. SITE SURVEY The background survey information provided on the Plans is shown for clarity only. The Contractor shall determine, before commencing work, the exact location of all existing features that may be disrupted by new construction, including existing underground utilities. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all damages, which might be caused by the Contractor's failure to exactly locate and/or preserve existing site features. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall check and verify governing dimensions and elevations. 1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES The Contractor shall protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electrical, and other utility services and structures that may be present. This shall also include all pipelines, services, and strictures that are the property of the Owner. PART2 PRODUCTS The Contractor shall provide suitable shoring and bracing materials, which shall support loads imposed. Materials for shoring systems need not be new, but shall be in serviceable conditions. PART EXCAVATION 3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately if, during constriction, subsurface conditions are different from those encountered in the exploratory holes or as described in the Geotechnical Report. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION The Contractor shall provide shoring systems adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures at locations as needed to support excavations during construction. The Contractor shall locate required bracing to clear all permanent work. Bracing which must be relocated shall be installed prior to the removal of original bracing. The Contractor shall not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except as otherwise acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall maintain bracing until structural elements are rebraced by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02250-3 3.3 REMOVAL The Contractor shall remove shoring and bracing in stages to avoid disturbances to adjacent and underlying soils and damage to structures,pavements, facilities and utilities. The Contractor shall repair or replace, as acceptable to the Owner, adjacent work damaged or displaced through the installation or removal of shoring and bracing work. 3.4 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS All work shall be carried out with due regard for public safety. Open trenches shall have proper barricades and at night they shall be distinctly indicated by adequately placed lights, as provided for elsewhere in the Specifications. The Contractor is reminded that the Owner has not so delegated, and the Owner's Representative does not purport to be a trench or excavation system safety expert, is not so engaged in that capacity under this Contract, and has neither the authority nor the responsibility to enforce construction safety laws, rules, regulations, or procedures or to order the stoppage of work for claimed violations of trench or excavation safety, or for the Contractor's failure to properly perform the work necessary for proper trench and excavation safety. The furnishing by the Owner of resident representation and inspection personnel shall not make the Owner responsible for the enforcement of such laws, rules, regulations, or procedures, nor shall such make the Owner responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences,procedures, or for the Contractor's failure to properly perform the work necessary for proper trench and excavation safety. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent - 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02250-4 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the earthwork, including excavation and backfill for piping, excavation and backfill for structures, and finish grading. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02250 Temporary Shoring and Bracing 02305 Wet Weather Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 02700 Gravel Materials 02900 Landscaping PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVEL MATERIALS All gravel materials shall conform to Section 02700, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Excavation may commence once all erosion control measures are in place in accordance with the Plans and Section 02370 and to the satisfaction of the Owner, 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Excavation, compaction and backfill for structures, pipelines and the final site contours shall be formed by either excavating or compacting fill, as required, to provide the cross-sections as shown on the Plans. All excavation performed on this Project shall be considered unclassified. Excavation shall consist of the removal of any and all material encountered, including debris,rubble, concrete, metal, topsoil, Cutting and removal of existing City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02300-1 surfacing, tree stumps, trees, logs, abandoned rail ties, abandoned piping, piling, riprap, etc. Excavations shall be kept free of water, both surface water and groundwater, during the excavation, installation of pipelines and structures, and the placement of backfill. For additional requirements see Section 02240. The Contractor's attention is also called to the depth of the structures and piping; for this reason, special shoring and bracing may be required. All shoring and bracing or sheeting required to perform and protect the excavation and to safeguard the employees, shall be furnished by the Contractor. For additional requirements see Section 02250. No timber bracing, lagging, sheathing or other lumber shall be left in any excavation except with permission of the Engineer and in the event such permission is granted, no separate payment shall be allowed for burying such material. All stockpiles shall be covered with plastic and no stockpile shall be higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES Excavation and backfill for structures shall be in conformance with Section 2-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, and as further described herein. All excavation for structures shall be done to the dimensions and levels indicated on the Plans or specified herein. Excavation shall be made to such width outside the lines of the structures to be constructed as may be required for proper working methods, the erection of forms and the protection of the work. Excavation shall consist of the removal of any and all material encountered to the elevations shown on the Plans. Excavations for structures and vaults shall be continued down to the subgrade which is defined as 12 inches below concrete foundations, concrete footings, and slab on grade floors for the installation of foundation gravel material, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Fill material placed under structures, including footings and floor slabs, shall be Foundation Gravel free from debris and organics, as specified in Section 02700. In the event unsuitable material is encountered below the subgrade shown on the Plans and described herein, the Contractor, as required by the Engineer, shall over-excavate until a suitable foundation is reached. If over-excavation of unsuitable material is required by the Engineer, it will be under the unit price bid item entitled "UNSUITABLE EXCAVATION" as described in Section 01200. The Contractor shall then replace the material with compacted foundation gravel, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02300-2 as specified in Section 02700. If imported foundation gravel is required; it will be paid under the unit price bid item titled"FOUNDATION GRAVEL". Quantities shall be calculated by neat line measurement to the depth agreed to in the field by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when excavation for compacted fill or structures is complete. No forms, reinforcing steel, or concrete shall be placed until the excavation has been inspected by the Engineer. Fill material placed around structures shall be Structural Fill as specified in Section 02700. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FOUNDATION SURFACES Care shall be taken to preserve the foundation surfaces shown on the Plans in an undisturbed condition. If the Contractor unnecessarily over excavates or disturbs the foundation surfaces shown on the Plans or specified herein without written authorization of the Engineer the Contractor shall replace such foundations with concrete fill or other suitable material approved by the Owner in a manner which will show by test an equal bearing capacity with the undisturbed foundation material. No additional payment shall be made for the added quantity of concrete fill or other suitable material used because of unnecessary over excavation caused by the Contractor or his operations. 3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR TRENCHES Excavation and backfill for trenches shall be in conformance with Sections 7-08 and 7-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, and as further described herein. The width of the trench at or below a point 12 inches above the top of the outside diameter of the pipe shall be carefully controlled and maintained to ensure the strength of the pipe is not compromised and prevent pipe failures. Backfilling shall proceed as follows: A. SUBGRADE PREPARATION The subgrade for piping is defined as the elevation of the bottom of the pipe bedding material as shown on the Plans. In the event unsuitable material is encountered below the subgrade shown on the Plans and described herein, the Contractor, as required by the Engineer, shall over-excavate until a suitable foundation is reached. If over-excavation of unsuitable material is required by the Engineer, it will be under the unit price bid item entitled "UNSUITABLE EXCAVATION" as described in Section 01200. The Contractor shall City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02300-3 then replace the material with compacted foundation gravel, as specified in Section 02700. If imported foundation gravel is required; it will be paid under the unit price bid item titled"FOUNDATION GRAVEL". Quantities shall be calculated by neat line measurement to the depth agreed to in the field by the Engineer. B. PIPE ZONE BEDDING Above the foundation material, if any, the bedding material shall be Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding as specified in Section 02700. This material shall be placed in lifts of approximately 8 inches up to a point 12 inches above the pipe. This material shall be hand shoveled in place and carefully worked under and around the pipe. C. TRENCH BACKFILL Partial backfill to protect the pipe will be permitted immediately after the pipe has been properly laid in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications. Complete backfilling of trenches will not be permitted. until the section of pipe installed has been inspected by the Engineer. From the point 12 inches above the top of the pipe barrel, the backfill material to be used in the trench section shall be Structural Fill as specified in Section 02700, The Contractor shall place backfill in horizontal lifts not to exceed 8 inches in thickness. During placement of the initial lifts, the backfill material shall not be bulldozed into the trench or dropped directly over the pipe with less than 3 feet of backfill material above the top of the pipe. 3.6 ROCK EXCAVATION It is not anticipated that solid rock will be encountered. Should such material be encountered, however, it will be paid for by change order as directed by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. Boulders or broken rock less than 2 cubic yards in volume as measured in the field by the Engineer, will not be classified as rock, nor will so-called "hard-pan" or cemented gravel, even though it may be advantageous to use explosives in its removal if blasting were allowed. For the purpose of this contract,rock excavation shall be defined as mineral matter in place and of such hardness and texture that, when it is encountered, cannot be loosened by three passes of a ripper tooth mounted on the larger of a tracked backhoe of at least 25,000 pounds operating weight and 75 horsepower or the largest backhoe being utilized on the job by the Contractor. Where rocks occur as boulders that are smaller than the larger of: (1)2 cubic yards in volume, or (2) the City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02300-4 volume that can be readily handled by the largest backhoe being utilized on the job by the Contractor, they shall be considered incidental to excavation. Where removal of a boulder results in a void below the desired elevation of the intended excavation, backfilling of the void shall be handled in the same manner as the replacement of unsuitable excavated material. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL It is the intent of this Contract that excavated native material shall not be reused. Excavated materials shall be hauled to an approved waste site(s), as selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a list of approved waste haul site(s) to the Owner prior to the commencement of hauling of waste materials. Any permits required for waste haul and disposal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.8 FINAL SITE GRADING The site shall be graded consistent with the elevations shown on the Plans. The slopes between elevations shall be uniform or as shown on the Plans. Excavations and backfill shall be to the elevations required for the placement of all surface restorations, such as asphalt, concrete, gravel surfacing, or landscaping. All areas shall be graded to provide proper drainage. The final ground surface shall be smooth, raked free of debris and stones, and prepared for restoration as specified in Section 02900. 3.9 STRUCTURE COMPACTION The material placed underneath structures shall be moisture conditioned to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content and shall be placed in loose,horizontal layers. The thickness of layers placed before compaction shall not exceed 8 inches for heavy equipment compactors and shall not exceed 4 inches for hand- operated mechanical compactors. Water settlement is not allowed for compaction. Layers shall be compacted to a dense state equaling at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, using the Modified Proctor, per ASTM D1557. Prior to the placement of fill below structures, any and all groundwater and surface water shall be drained or pumped from areas to be filled. Wall backfill material shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximuun dry density, using the Modified Proctor, per ASTM D1557. Any and all compaction within 5 feet of all walls shall be accomplished by means of hand- operated mechanical equipment rather than heavy equipment compactors. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#i 6627 02300-5 i 3.10 TRENCH COMPACTION The material placed within trenches shall be moisture conditioned to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content and shall be placed in loose, horizontal layers. Water settlement is not allowed for compaction. Layers shall be compacted to a dense state equaling at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, using the Modified Proctor, per ASTM D1557. Prior to the placement of fill, any and all groundwater and surface water shall be drained or pumped from areas to be filled. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 02300-6 SECTION 02305 WET WEATHER EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the procedures to be followed if earthwork is to be accomplished in wet weather or in wet conditions where control of soil moisture is difficult. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 02700 Gravel Materials PART2 PRODUCTS The size or type of construction equipment shall be selected as required to prevent soil disturbance. In some instances, it may be necessary to limit equipment size or to excavate soils with a backhoe, Gradall, or equivalent type of equipment to minimize subgrade disturbance caused by constriction traffic. Material used as structural fill during wet weather earthwork shall generally consist of clean granular material containing less than 5 percent fines (material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 sieve), based on wet sieving the fraction passing the 3/4-inch sieve. The fines shall be non-plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WET WEATHER EXCAVATION AND FILL PLACEMENT QUALITY CONTROL Excavation and placement of fill or backfill material will be observed on a full-time basis by the Owner, to determine that all work is being accomplished in accordance with these Specifications. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GRO#16627 02305-1 i 3.2 WET WEATHER EARTHWORK PROTECTION The ground surface shall be sloped away from construction areas to promote the rapid runoff of precipitation and prevent ponding of water. Earthwork shall be accomplished in small sections to minimize exposure to wet weather. Excavation or the removal of unsuitable soil shall be followed immediately by the placement and compaction of a suitable thickness (generally 8 inches or more if approved by the Owner) of clean foundation gravel. No soil shall be left uncompacted and exposed to moisture. A smooth drum vibratory roller, or equivalent, shall be used to seal the ground surface after placement of fill or backfill materials. All wet weather work shall meet local, state and federal codes as specified herein and as indicated on the Plans. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02305-2 SECTION 02370 EROSION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the temporary erosion and sedimentation control (TESC) in and around the site caused by the actions of the Contractor as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. Work under this Section shall be directed towards site areas disturbed during construction as well as all off-site storage and parking areas maintained by the Contractor. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02240 Dewatering 02300 Earthwork 1.3 CERTIFIED EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL LEAD (CESCL) The Contractor shall designate a Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (CESCL) for this project. The CESCL shall have, for the life of this Contract, a current Certificate of Training in Construction Site Erosion and Spill Control signed by the WSDOT Water Quality Program Manager. Duties of the CESCL shall include,but are not limited to: A. Inspecting temporary erosion and spill control Best Management Practice (BMPs) for proper location, installation, maintenance, and repair. Inspections shall be made as noted on the Plans and after each significant precipitation event, including those that occur during weekends and after working hours. A Temporary Erosion and Spill Control Inspection Report shall be prepared for each inspection and shall be included in the Temporary Erosion and Spill Control file. The inspection report shall include, but not be limited to: 1. When BMPs are installed, removed or changed; 2. Repairs needed or made; City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02370-1 I i 3. Turbidity monitoring results; 4. Observations of BMP effectiveness and proper placement; 5. Recommendations for improving performance of BMPs. B. Prepare and maintain a Temporary Erosion and Spill Control file on site that includes but is not limited to: I. Temporary Erosion and Spill Control Inspection Reports; 2. Stornwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP); 3. Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan; 4. All project permits, including but not limited to grading and building permits; 5. Manufacturer instructions for all products used for TESC BMPs; 6. City of Kent 2002 Surface Water Design Manual. 1.4 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN The CESCL shall be responsible for preparing a Stonmwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The intent of the SWPPP is to reflect the Contractor's operations by supplementing the TESC Drawings, details, and notes shown on the Plans to provide comprehensive stormwater pollution control at the construction site, staging areas, stockpiles, and borrow sites. The SWPPP shall be prepared by the CESCL for the project and submitted in accordance with Section 01300. The SWPPP shall be submitted to the Owner for approval at the preconstruction conference. No work shall begin until the Contractor's SWPPP, as approved by the Owner, is implemented. The SWPPP shall address, at least, the following items: • Identification of construction haul routes and location of BMPs (e.g., stabilized construction entrance, silt fences, storm drain inlet protection). • Waste disposal methods and locations. * Detailed construction sequence and schedule, including identifying dates scheduled for BMP installation,removal, clearing, grading, seeding, and landscaping. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02370-2 Details for any temporary flow diversions, dewatering systems, and BMPs (in accordance with the City of Kent 2002 Surface Water Design Manual) proposed by the Contractor. Calculations for temporary sedimentation ponds, if used • A list of products to be used, including Material Safety Data Sheets. • Identification of stockpile and staging areas, and BMPs to be implemented at these locations. The SWPPP shall be prepared in accordance with details shown on the Plans, these Specifications, and Chapter 4, Volume II—BMPs from the current edition of the City of Kent 2002 Surface Water Design Manual, which are hereby referenced and made a part of the Contract Documents. Only those sections of the City of Kent 2002 Surface Water Design Manual that address preparation, implementation, and maintenance of permanent and temporary erosion and sedimentation control BMPs are applicable. The SWPPP shall include best manaeement practices to control windblown dust. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SILT FENCES Silt fences shall conform to the details shown on the Plans and the fabric shall conform meet the requirements of Geotextile for Temporary Silt Fence of Section 9-33 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2.2 STORM DRAIN INLET (CATCH BASIN) PROTECTION Storm drain inlet protection shall be with a "silt sack," as manufactured by ACE Environmental or equal. 2.3 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET On all disturbed slopes steeper than 2H:IV, an erosion control blanket shall be placed and secured per manufacturer's recommendation with a biodegradable means. The erosion control blanket shall be temporary, biodegradable and is to remain in place. The erosion control blanket shall be`Biomac C" as manufactured by MacCaferri, Inc. or "Curlex II," as manufactured by American Excelsior Co., or Equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 02370-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Site preparation work shall be performed only during periods when beneficial results can be obtained. When drought, excessive moisture or other unsatisfactory conditions prevail, the work shall be stopped. 3.2 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPS) Silt fences and straw bale dams shall be constructed to control erosion and migration of soils disturbed during construction. The fences and dams shall provide temporary protection and shall be removed only upon approval of the Owner. All areas or drainage ways downstream of the construction site shall have Best Management Practices (BMPs) installed prior to the beginning of any clearing activities. Runoff from cleared or disturbed area shall be directed through the BMPs. Disturbed ground shall be stabilized at the end of each work day. Permanent soil stabilization and erosion and sedimentation control shall be implemented upon reaching finish grade. Slope protection shall be immediately implemented upon any soils showing signs of erosion. This shall be done in a manner approved by the Owner. All BM Ps shall be inspected, maintained and kept in a condition sufficient to provide effective erosion and sedimentation control at all times. The site shall be inspected to ensure the BMPs are properly located, constructed and operating as designed during the first storm. Any necessary adjustments or repairs shall be made immediately and be approved by the Owner. The BMPs shall be inspected thereafter as noted on the Plans and after all significant storm events. Turbidity monitoring will be held on a weekly basis at a minimum, or more frequently if necessary as determined by the CESCL. All BMPs shall be removed no later than 30 consecutive calendar days after final site stabilization has been achieved as determined by the Owner. BMPs such as storm drain inlet protection, straw bales, silt fences and supports and plastic coverings shall be removed and properly disposed of offsite by the Contractor. Areas disturbed by removal of these BMPs shall be immediately stabilized in a manner approved by the Owner. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02370-4 SECTION 02511 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the connection of pipelines being constructed under this project to existing water mains as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 15050 Piping Systems PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION All cut-in connections to the existing system shall be made after a successful pressure test of the new main has been witnessed by the Owner and after purity tests has been satisfactorily evidenced except as allowed by the Owner. The location, type and size of existing facilities have been determined from available records and are approximate. It is anticipated that connections to these existing facilities may be made, in general, as shown on the Plans except adjustments may be required for vertical and horizontal alignment. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to detenuine the exact location and ascertain the type and size of the existing facilities prior to starting work on each connection and to provide any alternations as required in the connection detail. Connections to existing facilities shall be made with the use of fittings, valves, flexible couplings, solid sleeves, shackling and other miscellaneous fittings, and thrust blocks as shown on the Plans or with additional pipe or fittings as approved by the Owner and as indicated in Piping Systems to connect the new construction under this Project to the existing pipelines. All pipe and fittings used for the connection shall be new, clean, and disinfected with a minimum 5 percent chlorinated solution irmnediately prior to making said City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GB.O#16627 02511-1 connection. The Contractor shall take extra precautions to ensure the tightness of the connections, nuts, and bolts. The existing water main shall be placed back into service by the Owner and the connection observed by the Owner prior to backfilling the pipe. All valves shall be operated by Owner personnel only. Where it is necessary to shut off the existing mains to make a connection, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and all water customers affected 48 hours in advance of such shut off, and the Owner will shut off the mains. Once the water has been shut off, the Contractor shall diligently pursue the connection to completion so that the time required for the shut off is held to a minimum. All connections to existing mains shall be completed the same day as they are started. The Contractor shall time its operations so that the water will not be shut off overnight or over weekends or during City-observed holidays. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02511-2 SECTION 02530 UTILITY STRUCTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes precast concrete vaults,manholes, catch basins, castings, and steps for a complete installation as shown on the Plans and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 08310 Metal Access Hatches 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Name Number Check Valve Vault 01 VLT 02 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL The exterior finish of all precast concrete utility structures shall be smooth with no imperfections larger than 1/8 inch in diameter. The interior finish of all precast concrete utility structures shall be smooth and sacked with non-shrink cementitious materials and epoxy bonding agent. No bug holes, fins, projections, or other defects are acceptable. 2.2 PRECAST VAULTS Precast concrete vaults shall be cast in an established precast yard. Precast vaults shall be designed for H-20 loads. Submit design calculations and shop drawings with engineer's stamp for review and approval prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall detail wall thickness, concrete strength,reinforcing requirements, and shall include all appurtenances, such as access hatches, floor drains, and other items called for on the Plans. Precast vaults shall be by Granite Precast, Inc. No others will be allowed. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 02530-1 I All vaults shall be constructed with a minimum of 4-inch-thick solid walls. The access hatches shall be as specified in Section 08310. 2.3 STEPS Polypropylene manhole steps shall be made of a copolymer polypropylene, superior in its resistance to corrosion, meeting the requirements of ASTM D4101 Type 11, Grade 16906, and shall completely encapsulate a deformed 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rod conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Polypropylene steps shall be factory installed in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. This shall be accomplished by predrilling two parallel 1-inch holes, 3-3/4-inch deep, and 13-inches on center in the cured concrete base, riser, and taper sections of the manhole. The insertion ends of the step shall be fully coated with non- shrink epoxy grout then driven into the holes to the prescribed depth. In no case will the predrilled hole be allowed to penetrate through the wall of the manhole section. Steps shall be Lane International Corporation Manhole Step or equal. 2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE CATCH BASINS Precast components shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478. All Portland cement used in the manufacture of the precast sections shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C150 and shall be Type 11 or Type V. Thickness of a Type 1 catch basin shall be 4 inches minimum and reinforced with welded wire fabric having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot. Welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A497. "Knockouts" shall be free of welded wire fabric and provided on four sides to accommodate the pipe size, invert elevations, and direction as shown on the Plans. Standard precast riser sections shall consist of rectangular sections to accommodate a Type 1 catch basin. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASTM C497. Minimum height of a riser section shall be 6 inches. The height of riser and base sections shall be arranged so no pipes pass through the joining surfaces. Precast base sections for Type 2 catch basins shall conform to the requirements for precast riser sections. The base shall be a minimum of 6-inches thick underneath the pipe invert. Catch basins Type 2 shall contain steps in accordance with Section 2.5. Standard precast riser sections shall consist of circular sections in standard nominal inside diameter as shown on the Plans. Reinforcement shall be in City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 02530-2 accordance with ASTM C478. Minimum height of a riser section shall be 1 foot. The height of riser and base sections shall be arranged so no pipes pass through the joining surfaces. Openings for pipe shall be circular, tapered toward the inside of the section, and shall be of the minimum size possible to accommodate the size of pipe to be inserted and to effectively seal the joint. 2.5 FRAMES AND GRATES Frames and grates shall be per 2018 WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-05.15(2). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CATCH BASINS Catch basin installation shall be as shown on the Plans. Precast sections with damaged joint surfaces or with cracks or damage that would permit infiltration shall not be installed. Precast base sections shall be set on a prepared bedding material. Before the precast base is set, the gravel shall be carefully leveled to provide full bearing for the entire base slab. The frame shall be set carefully to the established surface grade in a full bed of cement grout. The catch basin rim elevation shall be set flush with the pavement or improved areas. Catch basins with PVC pipe shall use sand collars. 3.2 PRECAST VAULTS Precast vaults shall be installed as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANUP After installation is complete, the Contractor shall cleanout all precast structures prior to placing the new facilities into service. The adjustment of castings shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. Adjustment shall be done only with precast grade rings. Bricks are unacceptable. Grouting and final adjustment of castings shall be done with non-shrink grout. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GRO#16627 02530-3 i SECTION 02700 GRAVEL MATERIALS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the various types of granular materials that are to be used in trenches and other excavations as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 02305 Wet Weather Earthwork 1.3 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall provide certificates of laboratory tests in accordance with Section 01300, indicating particle size distribution for review for each type of granular material furnished and proctor test reports for all aggregate fill materials, The certificates and proctor test reports shall be provided to the Owner at least 5 calendar days prior to placement. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FOUNDATION GRAVEL Foundation gravel shall be crushed surfacing base course per Section 9-03.9(3). 2.2 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall meet the requirements of Section 9-03.12(3) of the 2018 WSDOT Standard Specifications except that no more than 5 percent passing shall pass the No. 200 Sieve. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02700-1 2.3 STRUCTURAL FILL Structural fill shall be Gravel Borrow in conformance with Section 9-03.14(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2.4 CRUSHED SURFACING Crushed surfacing base course and top course shall conform to Section 9-03.9(3) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2.5 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS Gravel backfill for drains shall be per Section 9-03.12(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FOUNDATION GRAVEL Foundation gravel shall be placed and compacted underneath all structures in accordance with Section 02300. 3.2 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be placed and compacted around all pipe in accordance with Section 02300. 3.3 STRUCTURAL FILL Structural fill shall be placed and compacted in all general backfill areas around structures and within trenches in accordance with Section 02300, 3.4 CRUSHED SURFACING Crushed surfacing base course and/or top course shall be placed as subgrade or finished grade surfacing in accordance with Section 02710. 3.5 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS Gravel backfill for drains shall be installed as shown on the Plans. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02700-2 i SECTION 02710 GRAVEL SURFACING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the installation of crushed surfacing materials. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 02700 Gravel Materials PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVEL MATERIALS All gravel materials shall conform to the requirement of Section 02700, PART EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION The subgrade shall be prepared as per Section 2-06.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. As the rolling of the subgrade proceeds, all soft or spongy areas shall be removed and the resulting holes filled with crushed surfacing base course. The Contractor shall dispose of excess materials resulting from the preparation of the subgrade. Rollers shall not be operated adjacent to structures where such use may cause damage. Where the subgrade abuts structures and compaction with a roller is not possible for practical reasons, the area shall be compacted with mechanical tampers or other approved equipment. 3.2 GRAVEL MATERIAL Gravel materials shall be placed in the layers and thickness as shown on the Plans and in accordance with Section 4-04.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall place gravel materials in a uniform layer over the entire area to receive gravel materials without segregation of sizes, to such depth that when City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02710-1 compacted with a roller, the course shall have the required thickness. The maximum layer thickness for compaction with a roller shall be 6 inches for base course and 4 inches for crushed surfacing. The gravel material shall be bladed with a grader and rolled while damp with a power roller until the course is thoroughly and uniformly compacted and until its surface is smooth and conforms to grade and crown requirements shown on the Plans. The cross-section of the finished surface shall be subject to reasonable variations as approved by the Owner to meet the varying conditions encountered. The surface shall be maintained in its finished condition until the succeeding layer is placed. Rollers shall not be operated adjacent to structures where such use may cause damage. Where the gravel surfacing abuts structures and compaction with a roller is not possible for practical reasons, the area shall be compacted with mechanical tampers or other approved equipment. 3.3 COMPACTION All materials shall be compacted to a dense, unyielding state of at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, using the modified Proctor, per ASTM D 1557. ***END OF SECTION*** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02710-2 i SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Install landscaping using the materials as shown in the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Specifications. Install landscape to grades and conform to areas as shown in the Contract Drawings, 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, equipment, labor and related items necessary to complete the work shown in the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Specifications. The work included in this section (whether mentioned or not) consists of all labor, tools, materials, tests, permits and other related items necessary for the provision and installation of all plant materials in a first quality workmanlike manner. B. Coordinate the layout and installation of plant materials with the installation of the irrigation system to ensure complete and full irrigation coverage of the planted areas. C. This section includes a Guarantee Period of 2-year duration from Physical Completion to ensure the health and establishment of plant materials. 1.3 REFERENCES A. This specification section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. 1. American Nursery & Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z60.1, American Standard for Nursery Stock(ASNS). 2. international Society of Arboriculture Best Management Practice Series. 3. Tree Care Industry Association (TCIA): Standards for Tree Care Operations ANSI A300, Latest Edition. 4. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Federal Seed Act and Soil Classification. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#]6627 02900-1 5. Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification, latest edition. B. Tn case of conflict between the requirements of this specification section and the listed documents, the requirements of the contract specification sections must prevail. C. All standards must include the latest additions and amendments as of the date of advertisement for bids. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 02300 Earthwork 02910 Planting Irrigation 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Nomenclature for plants and varieties must be in accordance with the current edition of: 1. Horms Third, The Staff of the L. H. Bailey Hortorium. 1976, MacMillan Publishing Co.,New York, or 2, Flora of the Pacific Northwest, Hitchcock and Chronquist, University of Washington Press, 1998, or 3. PLANTS Database Website, as published and maintained by the United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service, (http Ilj)l+nts.usdaZZo"vl). B. The term "Contractor" as used in this Specification section must refer to the Landscape Contractor. C. Trees and shrubs will hereinafter be collectively referred to as, "plants" or "plant material." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work must be perfortned by a licensed and bonded Contractor registered in the State of Washington and must be qualified for landscaping work through certification by the Washington Association of City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GRO#16627 02900-2 i Landscape Professionals (WALP) or by the Washington State Nursery and Landscape Association(WSNLA). B. Contractor must have 5 years of documented experience in performing landscape work of comparable size, scope, and quality. C. Contractor must be familiar and comply with "American Standard for Nursery Stock" (ANSI Z60.1) published by the American Nursery & Landscape Association. D. The Contractor must continuously maintain a competent superintendent or foreman during the progress of the work, with the authority to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to the landscape work. That individual, who must direct the work, must be thoroughly familiar with the types of materials being installed and the proper methods for their installation. E. Site Inspections will be made by the Owner Representative. 1. Request Owner Representative inspections at least 48 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. 2. Inspections for the following critical path items are required: a. Preconstruction meeting prior to start of landscape work. b. When subgrade has been established and scarification completed. C. Observance of the subgrade percolation test. d. During soil preparation and soil installation activities. e. Finish grading prior to any planting. f. Inspection of plant materials before planting. g. Layout of plant material. h. Tree planting and proper staking. i. Installation of mulch. j. Installation of seed. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-3 k. For Substantial Completion of all work(development of physical punch list items). 1. For Physical Completion of all work(physical punch list items satisfactorily completed). 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. PLANT MATERIAL DOCUMENTATION l. Within 30 calendar days after award of a Contract, submit written documentation to the Owner's Representative that all specified plant materials have been ordered or procured. 2. List plant suppliers' names, addresses, and phone numbers and list respective growing or storage locations with addresses. 3. Submit color photographs of representative specimens of each type of tree and shrub on the plant list from the respective nursery. Photos must be minimum 300 DPI digital *.jpg format, taken from an angle that depicts the size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Photos will show foliage, form, rootball, and trunk conditions. A scale rod or other measuring device must be included in the photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photos that show the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be provided. Label each photograph with the plant name, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. 4. Approval of plant material documentation must not be considered as final acceptance of the plant material itself. B. SOIL TESTS 1. Submit Soil Test Reports for: a. Planting Soil. C. SOIL COMPONENT SUBMITTALS 1. Submit supplier Certifications and Test Reports for: a. Compost. b. Sand. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O N16627 02900-4 i C. Sandy Loam. d. Mulch. 2. Submit a sample of each of the following items: a. Planting Soil (I-poundbag). b. Mulch (1-pound bag). C. Compost (1-pound bag). D. WATERING SCHEDULE Prior to physical completion of the Landscaping, the Contractor must submit a written "watering schedule" to the Owner's Representative, coordinated with the Irrigation Contractor, to ensure adequate watering of all plant materials during the Guarantee Period of this Contract. E. Weed and Pest Control Plan (including Invasive Species Removal Plan), F. HYDROSEEDING COMPONENTS 1. Submit manufacturer's data sheets for: a. Wood Cellulose Fiber. b. Tackifier. C. Seed Analysis. G. SUPPLIERS, SOURCES, AND CATALOGUE CUTSHEETS 1, Submit suppliers, source locations, and photographs of representative examples for: a. Geotextile Fabric. b. Aluminum Edging. c, Perforated Pipe. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-5 H. SEED ANALYSIS See Lawn Seed as specified herein. L SUBSTITUTIONS 1. The manufacturers, products, and suppliers are acceptable as specified herein. Substitutions may be allowed if proof of equivalent quality, suitable product specifications, manufacturer's literature, and other detailed information is provided to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 1 No substitution of plant material, species, size, grade, or variety, will be permitted unless evidence is submitted in writing to the Owner's Representative that a specified plant cannot be obtained and has been unobtainable since the Award of the Contract. Provide the names and telephone numbers of at least five nursery suppliers that the Contractor has contacted. If substitution is permitted, it can be made only with written approval by the Owner's Representative The nearest variety, size, and grade as approved by the Owner must then be furnished. 3. Should at any time, the procured nursery stock is lost or compromised due to weather or other natural occurrences, notify the Owner's Representative immediately of the need to locate new material. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Inspect the site before proceeding with any work, carefully check all grades, elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or deviations between the Contract Drawings, Specifications, and site conditions must be immediately communicated to the Owner in writing for clarification. Work done after discovery, unless authorized by the Owner's Representative and extra work arising from failure to notify the Owner is at the Contractor's risk and expense. B. Existing known utilities have been shown in the Contract Drawings and additional information will be made available from the Owner or the Utility Companies. Verify, locate, and protect all known underground and above-ground utilities prior to digging or other earthwork activities. Promptly notify the Owner's Representative of any conflict between proposed work and obstruction(s). Failure to follow this procedure places City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#1662, 02900-6 upon the Contractor the responsibility and expense of making any and all repairs for damage from work therefrom. C. In the event that undisclosed boulders, soils contaminated with toxic substances or underground construction work and/or obstructions are encountered in any plant excavation work to be done under this Contract, alternate planting locations may be selected by the Owner's Representative. Where alternate planting locations are not approved, the obstruction must be removed to a depth of not less than 3 feet below the bottom of ball or roots when plant is properly set at the required grade or other solutions to the planting problem will be reviewed with the Owner. The Contractor must be paid for work required to solve the planting problem, such as, the removal of such boulders, contaminated soils, or underground obstruction encountered at a unit price basis and agreed upon by a Change Order prior to commencement of work. 1.9 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY, AND PERSONS Take all necessary precautions to protect work in progress, all property,persons, walks, curbs, rooftop membranes and structures, utilities,pavement, and buildings from any damage that might be incurred arising from this Contract. The Contractor must pay for any damage incurred by failure to take precautions at the Contractor's expense. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO PHYSICAL COMPLETION A. Begin maintenance immediately after each plant is planted. Water, mulch, weed, fertilize, cultivate, and otherwise maintain and protect plants and landscape work on a regular basis (at least weekly) until Physical Completion. No herbicides or pesticides shall be used on site. B. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. C Maintain mulch in planting beds at required compacted depths indicated in Contract Drawings. D. Contractor must notify Owner 1 week prior to scheduled maintenance. 1.11 GUARANTEE PERIOD A. The Guarantee Period must not begin until: 1, All landscape items on the list of items to be completed or corrected have been resolved. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 02900-7 2, All planting is alive, healthy, growing and installed as specified. 3. The landscape work is deemed Physically Complete. B. Guarantee Period must be 2 years after the Physical Completion date of the landscape, including irrigation system(s), to ensure healthy, vigorous growth and establishment of plant material and will end with Final Acceptance. C. Guarantee the work of this specification section against all defects of materials and workmanship, and plant material is established, remains alive, and is in a healthy, vigorous condition. D. PLANT REPLACEMENT DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD 1. The Contractor must be responsible for providing enough plants for replacement of unacceptable plant material through the Guarantee Period. Unacceptable plant material includes trees, shrubs, and seed areas that have died, been damaged, are missing, or that are, in the opinion of the Owner in unhealthy or unsightly condition, or that have lost their natural shape and symmetry due to dead branches, excessive and unnecessary pruning, incorrect staking, or excessive defoliation. 2. Any plant material that is 25 percent or more dead or disfigured must be considered dead and must be replaced at no charge. A tree must be considered dead when the main leader has died back or when 25 percent of the canopy is dead. 3, All plants are subject to replacement per item during the Guarantee Period. Replace dead plants with the same species, caliper, and/or equal size as the plants they replace. Replacements and lawn repairs must be in accordance with original Specifications. 4, Plant material replacements made by the Contractor must be completed during the spring (March 15 to May 15) or autumn planting periods (Sept 20 to Nov 15) unless otherwise approved by Owner's Representative. 5. After each replacement, the Contractor must submit a marked planting plan showing the exact location of each item replaced and the date when the replacement was made. Guarantee all replaced material during the Guarantee Period for an additional 365 calendar days from the date of replacement. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-8 E. SITE ACCESS Contractor has the right to enter upon the property for inspection and curative treatment of any plants and materials needing such, and which are still under guarantee during the entire Guarantee Period. Owner is to be notified in advance of any inspection, corrective treatment measures, or curative treatment measures so as to arrange for convenient access to the area. F, The guarantee must be applicable to any growing conditions through which plants of like kind could be expected to survive. G. INSPECTION Plants and lawn areas will be inspected quarterly by the Owner's Representative during the Guarantee Period. 1. Should the Owner's Representative determine that the landscape plantings display unacceptable growth, Owner will provide Contractor Written Notice of required corrections. 2. The Contractor must reply to the Owner's Representative within 5 working days of the date of the Written Notice with proposed corrections. Such corrective measures must occur within 14 days after the date of the Written Notice unless the Owner's Representative agrees otherwise. Notify the Owner's Representative when the corrective work is complete. H. FINAL ACCEPTANCE Final Acceptance of the landscaping will be provided in writing by the Owner at the end of the Guarantee Period. 1.12 WEED AND PEST CONTROL PLAN A. Submit a Weed and Pest Control Plan for review and approval to the Owner's Representative prior to starting any landscape work. 1. The Weed and Pest Control Plan must include: a. Methods of removal and scheduling of removal of weeds that occur in newly planted areas. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 02900-9 b, Methods of removal and scheduling of removal of invasive species and/or noxious weeds that occur within the newly planted areas. No chemical herbicides or pesticides shall be used on site. 2. The plan mast be prepared and signed by a licensed commercial operator with a. Washington State Department of Agriculture (WSDA) Commercial Applicator pesticide license. a. Identify and list the target weeds and unwanted vegetation to be removed specific to the project site. B. All noxious weeds (Class A, B & C) as defined by the County Weed Control Board and invasive weeds, including but not limited to Horsetail (Equisetum sp.), reed canary grass, English Ivy, Himalayan blackberry, evergreen blackberry, policeman's helmet, bamboo, yellow flag iris, and Japanese knotweed must be completely removed from the project site. 1. Where noxious or invasive weeds exist, the weed's foliage and roots, planting soil and subgrade soils must be removed and replaced to a depth necessary to completely remove all viable weed seeds, roots, corms, and rhizomes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Provide all materials and equipment as required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as described in the Specifications. 2.2 SOIL TEST REPORTS A. Provide soil analysis and test reports from an approved soil testing laboratory. Soil amendments must not be incorporated in the planting work until the Soil Test Reports are approved by the Owner's Representative. Provide Soil Test Reports for: 1. One sample of subgrade soil consisting of a composite of soils collected from a 1-inch, 8-inch, and 16-inch depths. 2. One representative sample of planting soil mix. B. The cost for all soil testing must be home by the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-10 i C. The Contractor may be paid for the soil amendments that may be required to improve the subgrade soils greater than 24-inch depth, as recommended by the soil testing laboratory. Costs must be determined on a unit price basis and agreed upon by a Change Order prior to commencement of subgrade soil amendment work. D. The Contractor must be responsible for cost of the soil amendments that may be required for the planting soil mix, as recommended by the soil testing laboratory. E. Testing must be performed in accordance with the most current edition of Methods of Soil Analysis published by the Soil Science Society of America, Inc. The Soil Test Reports must include the following: 1. Fertility Analysis a. Extractable Analytes Nitrate, nitrogen, ammoniacal nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium, calcium, magnesium, copper, zinc, manganese and iron. b. Saturation Extract Values Calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, boron, sulfate, pH, lime content, salinity and sodium adsorption ratio. 2. Mechanical Analysis a. Organic percent by over-dried weight. b. USDA particle size and gradation. 3. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC). 4. Permeability or hydraulic conductivity testing must be performed in accordance with ASTM D 2434, Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils. Assume a relative compaction of 85 percent of modified maximum dry density(ASTM D 1557). 5. The Soil Test Report must make recommendations for fertilizers and soil amendments to effectively amend and develop a productive soil. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-11 6. The Soil Test Report must include a written statement from the soil testing laboratory that the laboratory has reviewed the planting plan and this planting specification, and that its recommendations respond to the specific needs of the Contract. 2.3 EXISTING SUBGRADE SOIL A. Soil tests of the subgrade soil must be made per Soil Test Reports section herein. B. Submit Soil Test Reports to the Owner's Representative for review and acceptance prior to procuring soil amendments and incorporating soil amendments into the subgrade soil. 2.4 PLANTING SOIL A. PLANTING SOIL MIX Planting Soil must be a three-way mix soil consisting of 40 percent compost, 40 percent sand and 20 percent sandy loam by volume thoroughly mixed together with the soil amendments as required by the Soil Test Report. Planting Soil must have pH range of 5.0 to 7.0 and an organic content between 8 percent and 15 percent by weight as tested by the Loss on ignitions method. B. Compost, Sandy Loam, and Sand must be as specified herein. C. Planting soil mix must be free of pests, toxic substances and other undesirable material harmful or detrimental to ornamental plant growth. Soil mixes must not contain any viable seeds, roots, or rhizomes capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weeds or invasive root propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, English ivy, clematis, knotweed, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials must be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 2.5 SOIL COMPONENTS A. GENERAL 1. Submit planting soil supplier's certification of sand, sandy loam, and compost, as applicable for Owner's Representative's review and acceptance prior to use on project site. 2. Certification tests must be dated within 90 days of proposed installation of soil on the project site. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-12 i B. COMPOST 1. Compost must be Fine Compost and comply with the requirements of Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification 9-14.4(8). 2. The compost must be tested within 90 calendar days of proposed use. 3. Compost sources must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review and approval prior to use on the project site. Approved sources: a. Red-E Topsoil; Redmond, WA; (425) 868-6500, b. Cedar Grove Compost; Maple Valley, WA; (425) 432-2395. C. SAND 1. Sand must be "Washed Building Sand" and meet the following analysis: Size Sieve Percent 1/4"& 3/8" ASTM E-11 100 #4 & #6 ASTM E-11 95 — 100 #10 ASTM E-11 65 — 75 #18% ASTM E-11 35 — 50 #20% ASTM E-11 < 30 #40 ASTM E-11 <20 #100 ASTM E-11 2— 10 #200 ASTM E-11 1 —5 2, Permissible Chemical Ranges a. Salinity(milliohms per centimeter of saturation extract @ 25 degrees C): Nil—3.0 b. Boron (saturation extract concentration): Nil— l.Oppm C. Sodium (sodium absorption ratio—SAR): Nil—6.0 City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-13 D. SANDY LOAM 1. Sandy Loam must be topsoil as defined by the United States Department of Agriculture Classification system and the requirements as described herein. 2, Sandy Loam must consist of loose, moderately well-drained, and friable soil. And be free of stones, debris, and/or similar objects. 3. Sandy Loam must be free of pests, toxic substances and other undesirable material harmful or detrimental to ornamental plant growth. Sandy loam must not contain any viable seeds, roots, or rhizomes capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weeds or invasive root propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, English ivy, clematis, knotweed, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials must be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4. Sandy Loam must have a pH between 5.0 to 7.0 and organic matter percentage of 2 percent min. — 10 percent max. (by weight). Drainage must be a minimum of 1.5 inches per hour. Permeability or hydraulic conductivity testing must be performed on accordance with ASTM D 2434, Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils. Assume a relative compaction of 85 percent of modified maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). Particle Size must meet the following sieve requirements: Sieve Size percent P'assine 1" 100 % 1/2" > 90% #10 > 70% 2.6 MULCH Mulch must be derived from bark of Douglas Fir and Western Hemlock tree species. Bark is defined as the outermost coarse protective layer of the tree, located outside of the cambium layer. It must be ground so that a minimum of 95 percent, by volume, of the material will pass through a 1-inch sieve. Ground bark must not contain elements in quantities that would be detrimental to plant life. Wood cellulose tissue of fiber (wood pulp), wood waste, wood shavings, wood sawdust, wood chips, or any product that contains greater than 5 percent, by volume, of the hard, lignified wood portion of the tree will not be accepted. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 02900-14 i 2.7 FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS Fertilizer and soil amendments application rates must meet Soil Test Report recommendations. 2.8 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH (FOR HYDROSEEDING) A. Wood cellulose fiber must be specially processed 100 percent virgin wood fiber in which 30 percent of the fibers must be 0.15 inches long or longer and containing no growth or germination-inhibiting ingredients. B. Wood cellulose fiber must be dyed a suitable color to facilitate inspection of placements of the material. It must be manufactured in such a manner that after addition and agitation in slung tanks with water, the fibers in the material become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material must allow the absorption and percolation of moisture. 2.9 TACKIFIER (FOR HYDROSEEDING) A. Tackifier must not contain growth or germination-inhibiting materials and must not reduce infiltration rates. B, Tackitiers must hydrate in water and readily bond or blend with other slurry materials, and must meet requirements of Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification 9-14.4(7). 2.10 WATER A. Contractor must make, at Contractor expense,whatever arrangements are necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this Contract. B. Contractor shall coordinate with City to set up an account for the irrigation meter. C. Contractor shall meet all requirements of Kent Special Provisions (KSP) 2-07. D. Contractor must also furnish necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of planted areas as required to complete the work specified. E. All costs for water incurred during the contract period will be bonne by the Owner. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-15 2.11 PLANT MATERIAL A. The Contractor has two options to secure approval of plant materials: 1. Have plant material available at the project site for review during scheduled site visits. 2. Have Owner's Representative review plants at the place of growth at the Contractor's expense. B, Owner reserves the right to reject any or all plant material at any time until final review and acceptance. Remove rejected plants immediately from the site. C. All plant material furnished by the Contractor must conform to the requirements of the current issue of"American Standard for Nursery Stock" (ASNS) and in addition, must comply with the following provisions: 1, No less than 10 percent of each variety and/or species of plant delivered to the project must be accurately labeled with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing the legible designation of the common name and full scientific name and size of plant. hiclude the nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar. Whether or not labeled, any plants, which do not conform to the Plant Schedule and/or Contract Drawings, must be replaced inmiediately with plants that conform to specifications. 2. All plant material must meet State and Federal requirements with respect to plant health and absence of diseases and insect infestation. 3, Plant material must not have weeds at the tops of rootballs or any foreign plant growth. 4. Root balls of all plant materials must be solidly held together by a fibrous root system and must be composed only of the soil in which the plant has been actually growing. The ball must be securely wrapped with non-treated,jute burlap, or other packing material that is not injurious to the plant's life. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-16 i 5. Trees a. Trees must have been grown with sufficient spacing to allow for symmetrical branch development and full canopy which reflects the natural characteristics of the species. b. Trees grown in fabric bags must have a well-established root system reaching the sides of the fabric bag to maintain a firm ball when the fabric is removed, but Must not have excessive root growth encircling the fabric bag. Fabric bags must be entirely removed prior to planting. 6. Container-Grown Stock a. Plants grown in a pot or container must have been given a sufficient length of time for new fibrous root system to have developed to hold its soil together and keep the root mass firm and whole when removed from the container. b. Container stock must not be pot or root bound. 2.12 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Mirafi 140N geotextile fabric supplied by ACF West Goosynthetics, Inc.; 15540 Woodinville-Redmond Road; Woodinville, Washington 98072; (800)423-4567 or approved equal. B. ALUMINUM EDGING 1, Must be SURE-LOC Aluminum Landscape Edging. Edging must be 1/8 inch thick, 4 inches deep by 16 feet in length, black anodized aluminum with 18 inch length Extra Wide Aluminum stakes or approved equal. 2. Manufactured and supplied by Sure-loc Edging, 494 E. 64"h Street, Holland, MI49423; (800) 787-3562; wvnv.surelocedging.com; rhaverdink@,sureloced�,ning.com or approved equal. C. TREE STAKING MATERIALS 1, Tree stakes must be installed as shown on Contract Drawings. Stakes trust be 8-foot long 2-inch diameter pressure-treated City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-17 lodgepole pine wood stakes, with chamfered tops and 6-inch long conical points. a. Fastening must be webbed fabric tape, 1/2"— 1" wide, "Arbor Tie" or approved equal. D. PERFORATED PIPE Must be Advanced drainage Systems (ADS) Single Wall perforated, HDPE, 4-inch diameter, corrugated pipe or approved equal. E. DRAINAGE GRAVEL Gravel Backfill for Drains per WSDOT Standard Specifications 9-03.12(4). F. CRUSHED SURFACING TOP COURSE Crushed Surfacing Top Course per WSDOT Standard Specifications 9-03.9(3). 2.13 LAWN SEED A. A complete analysis of the seed must be submitted to the Owner's Representative, including percent of pure seed, germination, other crop seed, inert and weeds, and the germination test data. The seed mixture must be no less than 98 percent pure, have a minimum germination rate of 90 percent, contain more than 1/2 percent weed seed, and contain less than 1.5 percent inert material. All crop seed in excess of 1 percent must be itemized. Provide a complete copy of manufacturer's container label or seed technical data with the seed analysis for each seed mix specified. B. Seed of the type specified must conform to the standards for "Certified grade seed or better as outlined by the State of Washington Department of Agriculture "Rules for Seed Certification." C. All seed mixes must be free of weed seed listed as primary noxious by the Washington State Seed Law singly or collectively in excess of the labeling tolerance specified by the Washington State Seed Law. Reference Specification; Chapter 15.49, Washington State Seed Act. D. Seed must be packed in clean, sound containers of uniform weight. Deliver mixed seed to the project site in the original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis,manufacturer's name, trademark, and conformance with law. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-18 1. Containers must so the following information clearly marked for each kind of seed in accordance with applicable state and federal law: a. Common name of seed and it's strain. b. Lot number. C. Net weight. d. Percentage of purity. e. Percentage of germination. f. Percentage of weed seed content and inert material. g. Place of origin. h. Amount of Pure Live Seed per bag. E. SEED MIX 1. Lawn Seed mixture must be composed of the following, by weight: a. 50 percent Turf-type Perennial Ryegrasses (two or more varieties). Turf-type Perennial Ryegrass varieties must be from those varieties ranked "Best"by the most current succeeding year's WSU "Turfgrass Cultivars Evaluated in Western Washington/Oregon in Recent Years" list. b. 30 percent Clhewings Fescue. C. 20 percent Hard Fescue. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All areas as indicated in Contract Drawings must be finish graded and approved by the Owner's Representative before commencement of planting. All grades must flow smoothly into each other and produce positive drainage. The Contractor is responsible for any adverse drainage conditions that may affect plant growth unless the Contractor contacts the Owner's Representative immediately indicating any possible problem. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station C&O#16627 02900-19 Verify all grades with Owner's Representative before commencement of planting. B. The Contractor must protect soil and provide adequate and proper care of all plant material and landscape work, including irrigation, done on the project from the time of installation to Physical Completion. 3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Verify the existence of proper rough grading and subgrade elevations prior to beginning soil preparation work. All planting area excavation must allow for planting soil, and mulch depths as indicated in Contract Drawings. B. Subgrade must be cleaned of all debris including concrete, stumps, sticks, roots, and rocks or lumps larger than 1 inch. C. PERCOLATION TEST After the subgrade has been prepared, a percolation test must be performed. This must be accomplished by excavating two pits that are 2 feet in depth and minimrun 2 feet in diameter. Location of the pits must be per Owner's Representative field directive. Fill each pit with water and allow the pit to drain for 24 hours. After 24 hours,refill the pit with water. If the time required for the pit to drain completely after being filled the second time is greater than 24 hours, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative immediately. D. Subgrade preparation and percolation tests must be reviewed and approved by Owner's Representative prior to proceeding with the placing of planting soil. E Placing of planting soil constitutes acceptance of subgrade conditions by Contractor. 3.3 SOIL PREPARATION A. GENERAL Soil must not be placed, rototilled, or worked when the ground or planting soil is frozen, excessively wet, there is ponding water, or, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, in a condition detrimental to the Work. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02900-20 B. SUBGRADE SCARIFICATION l. Apply soil amendments and scarify to depths as shown in Contract Drawings. If additional scarification is required to eliminate surface water ponding, notify Owner's Representative of problem areas. 2. After scarification, remove all debris or rocks over 1 inch in size and establish proper grades. 3. Application of amendments and the scarification process must be observed and approved by Owner's Representative prior to installing planting soil. C. PLACING SOIL AND SOIL AMENDMENTS 1. For Planting Areas a. See soil preparation details. Compact each lift of planting soil before installing the additional lift of soil. Compact by rolling with a 200 pound roller. Owner's Rep must review and approve soil preparation work between steps. b. Incorporate soil amendments by broadcasting over planting soil at an even distribution and rate prior to installation of plants. Then, mix the amendments into the top 6 inches of planting soil. i. Soil amendments for planting areas must be applied per soil testing laboratory recommendations. D. FINISH GRADING 1. Establish a finish grade with the compacted depths of planting soil and amendments as shown on the Contract Drawings and a specified herein. 2. Finish grade is defined as the top surface of soil prior to the installation of mulch and seed lawn unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings. 3. After settling, finish grades in seed lawn areas must.be 1/2 inch below all walks, curbs and/or other hard surfaces. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-21 4. After settling, finish grades in planting areas must be 3 inches below all walks, curbs, and/or other hard surface edges. 5. The top of the mulch must be flush with the top of any adjacent paved surface improvement such as sidewalk, curb, and other pedestrian walking area. 3.4 TRANSPORT AND MOVING PLANT MATERIAL A. Move all plants carefully. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of plant materials. Prevent damage to all plant materials. 1. Trees must be handled by rootball only, not the trunks, stems, or tops. 2. Container grown plants must be handled by container only, not the stems or tops. B. Plant material damaged in any way from transport and moving activities must be rejected, discarded and replaced with undamaged materials at no cost to Owner. 3.5 TEMPORARY STORAGE OF PLANT MATERIAL A. Plants that cannot be planted within 24 hours after arrival to the project site must be "heeled-in" in accordance with accepted horticultural practice and the following requirements: 1, Protect rootball of balled and burlapped or fabric-grow bag plants with moist earth, sawdust,bark mulch, or other acceptable material and the material must be kept continuously moist. Do not use straw or hay to retain moisture. 2. Protect plant materials at all times from mechanical damage, excessive wet conditions, drying out, and extreme weather including drying winds and direct sun. 3, The root system of all plants must not be permitted to dry out at any time. Set plants in shade and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, soil or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. 3.6 PLANT LAYOUT Plants must be placed at the spacing and locations as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Plant layout and staking (or otherwise marking the location of each City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-22 plant) must be the responsibility of the Contractor. No work must start on the installation of plant material until plant layout and staking has been verified and approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.7 PLANT INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. All plant material must be inspected and determined by the Owner's Representative to be acceptable for planting, prior to installing. 2. Do not install plants in weather conditions detrimental to plant material. 3. Soak all tree rootballs and container plants which have become dry prior to planting. 4. Dig pits or planting holes for plant material as indicated on Contract Drawings and consistent with good horticultural practice. B. TREES 1, Before planting, completely remove all twine, burlap, wrapping material, fabric grow bags, and wire baskets and completely remove material from the planting hole. 2. Set trees in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set trees upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. C. SHRUBS Plants supplied in containers must be kept moist at all times and must be removed from the container in a manner that prevents damage to the root system. D. PRUNING AND STAKING 1. Pruning Pruning of trees must be performed at the nursery by the nurseryman and only to remove small or minor broken or damaged branches, or for aesthetic purposes unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-23 2. Staking and Fastening All trees must be staked at the time of planting as indicated on Contract Drawings. Each tree must be staked as indicated and tied to the stake with Webbed Fabric Tape to allow for trunk growth. E. Mulch planting areas with required inulch material at 3 inches deep immediately after planting. 3.8 SEED INSTALLATION Seeding must be accomplished in the spring (April 10 to May 31) or fall (September 1 to October 20) of the year and/or when weather conditions are favorable for proper working of the soil and seed germination as determined by Owner's Representative. Seed must be spread by an acceptable hand-mechanical (hopper or culti-packer) or hydro-seed/mulch methods only. 1. Hydro-seeding must include first application with seed and 10 percent mulch fiber: second application with no seed and 90 percent mulch fiber. ?. For hand-mechanical seeding, rake seed and fertilizer into top 1/2 to 1 inch of soil. After raking, roll the finished grade one direction for a flat, uniform surface and water thoroughly. Seeding must be done only after finish grading and adjacent construction and plantings have been completed. Finish grades must be rolled with a standard, water filled, 200 pounds per square foot ground pressure roller. If soil is dry, lightly sprinkle with water prior to rolling. The seed area must be rolled in two directions, the second rolling at right angles to the first. Grades after rolling must be flat and approved by the Owner's Representative prior to seeding. B. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch must be added at the following rates: 2,000 pounds per acre. C. Tackifier must be applied at a rate of at 80 pounds per acre. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-24 i D. Any seeded areas that have become compacted prior to seeding must be scarified to a depth of 4 inches by acceptable means, then finish graded as herein before described. E. The application rate for Lawn Seed must be 8 pounds of seed per 1,000 square feet. F. Water seeded area thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after seeding. Provide 1 inch average application of water without uncovering seed, washing seed away, and without causing erosion or sedimentation. G. WATERING Watering must be accomplished once a week from March through September. At a minimum, a uniform application of 1 inch of water must be required over all lawn areas each week. The Contractor must be prepared to water more frequently should very dry conditions persist and based on input from Owner. H. MOWING The Contractor shall be responsible for mowing, bagging, and disposing (off site) all seed lawn areas in contract for one year following seed installation. I. INSPECTION Check for barren areas, maximum 3 inches square, in seed bed approximately 21 days after seeding and over-seed as originally specified and at such time as weather and season permit for proper seed germination or as accepted by the Owner's Representative. J, Seed Lawn must be deemed physically complete when uniform,healthy, green, and vigorous growth is evident, with no dry or dead spots larger than 3-inch square, and after the fifth mowing has occurred. 3.9 PLANTING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install Geotextile Fabric as indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Install Tree stakes as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Install Aluminum Edging as indicated on Contract Drawings and per manufacturer's written directions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-25 D. Install Crushed Surfacing Top Course as indicated on Contract Drawings. E. Install Perforated Pipe as indicated on Contract Drawings. F. Install Drainage Gravel as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Perform cleaning during installation of the landscape work. Water, dirt, debris, and rubbish to be kept off of all paved areas, pathways, and permeable pavements. Wash clean all paved areas. B. Upon completion of landscape work, all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment must be removed from the site. 3.11 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Inspection to determine Substantial Completion of turf and planted areas will be made by the Owner's Representative, upon the Contractor's request. Provide notification at least 5 working days before requested inspection date. 1. Turf and planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02900-26 SECTION 02910 PLANTING IRRIGATION PART GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL Furnish and install an automatically-controlled, underground irrigation system and associated equipment, labor, and materials as indicated. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install a complete underground sprinkler irrigation system to provide efficient and even irrigation with head-to-head coverage of all planting areas shown on the Contract Drawings. Irrigation system must have minimum overspray onto paved or non-planted areas and no overspray onto buildings and be complete and ready for operation. B. The work included in this Specification (whether mentioned or not) must consist of all tools, materials, tests,permits and other related items necessary for the installation and operation of the irrigation system. Included must be all labor necessary for installation, including trenching, plumbing, back-filling, electrical wiring, adjustments, and all other items of labor necessary for a satisfactory operating system. C. Irrigation piping layout is schematic. Avoid conflicts with plant materials, architectural features, above and below ground utilities, and drainage systems. D. Any item of labor, material or equipment not specified or shown in detail, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of the system, must be furnished by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 02900 Landscaping City of Kent 646 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-1 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER A. Contractor must be a bonded irrigation contractor. The sprinkler irrigation system must be installed by an experienced irrigation mechanic, Certified Irrigation Technician, or Journeyman Plumber. B. All electrical service connection work must be completed by a licensed Electrical Contractor. C. All potable water system components must be installed by a Washington State Licensed Plumber. D, All testing of the backflow prevention equipment must be done by a Washington State Certified Backflow Assembly Tester(BAT). 1.5 VERIFICATION A. Before proceeding with any work, inspect the site, carefully check all grades and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work in order to proceed safely. Changes or alterations to the system to meet actual conditions must be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Report to the Owner's Representative all deviation and/or conflicts between Drawings, Specifications and site conditions. Extra work arising from failure to do so must be completed at the Contractor's expense. C. Prior to the start of any work,verify available static water pressure (psi) and gallons per minute (GPM) at pointof-comrection to water service. Submit written verification of available PSI to Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. Any replacement, relocation or additional materials required as a failure to check (PSI) must be completed at the Contractor's expense. 1.6 CHANGE ORDERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do no work for extra compensation without prior written approval of the Owner in the form of a Change Order. B. The intent of the Contract Drawings and Specifications is to provide a totally integrated irrigation system. Substitutions will be accepted only if they are proven to be wholly compatible with this system. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-2 i i 1.7 PERMITS, CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Apply for and pay for all necessary pen-nits and fees as required by Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and must comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work. 1.8 INTERPRETATION OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Irrigation Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact location of such items as piping, valves, controllers, and other equipment. Locate these items as closely as possible or as per related details to curbs, aluminum edging or edges of paving. B. Pipe lines shown parallel on the Contract Drawings may he placed in a common trench. Sprinkler heads are shown accurately and must be installed as indicated by center of symbol. 1.9 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONS Take all necessary precautions to protect work in progress, all property, persons, utilities,walks, curbs, pavement and buildings from any damage that might be incurred arising from this Contract. Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner, at Contractor's expense, any damage to the above and existing landscape. 1.10 CONDUCT OF WORK A. Continuously maintain a competent superintendent or foreman during progress of the work, with the authority to act in all matters pertaining to the work. The Contractor must give personal attention to the fulfillment of the contact and must keep the work under control. B. Confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner, including material and equipment storage. C. Progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the work proceeds. Keep streets, sidewalks and site clean, free from debris and affected drains open and free flowing at all times. D, Locate and identify all underground utilities prior to digging. E. Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner any damage to existing utilities. Existing known utilities have been shown on the Contract Drawings and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02910-3 additional information will be made available from the Owner and/or Utility Companies. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to verify utility locations on the ground with a pipe-finder or by other means. Contact Utility Locate at 1-800-424-5555 in advance of any digging to have existing utilities located and marked on-site. The Contractor must be responsible for the protection of existing known utilities. Should the ditching intercept and damage any existing utilities, all further work within said area must stop until the Owner is advised and the Owner can review a repair method and schedule. F, The Contractor must bear sole responsibility for damage to and/or water leaks on the Owner's property and any property located outside of the project site, which is caused by the Contractor's negligence during construction of the project. The Contractor must also bear sole responsibility for any pollution of rivers, streams, groundwater or other waters that may occur as a result of construction operations. The Contractor must replace, repair and pay for all damages caused by his/her negligence to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to final payment. 1.11 SYSTEM PROTECTION As a part of the guarantee under this Contract, the Contractor is responsible for the deactivating and draining of the system prior to the onset of the freezing season and for reactivating the system at the onset of the spring growing season. 1.12 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the irrigation system for all workmanship and material for the contract warranty period. Repair and/or replace defective irrigation equipment as determined by the Owner for the duration of the guarantee period. Repairs and/or replacements must be made in the same mariner as specified for the original irrigation system and must be completed at no cost to the Owner. B, Should any unacceptable conditions develop which, in the opinion of the Owner, is due to inferior or faulty material and/or workmanship, the unacceptable condition must be corrected, without delay, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at the Contractor's expense. C. Any settling of backfilled trenches must be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-4 i 1.13 MAINTENANCE It is expressly understood the Owner will be responsible during the warranty period for normal maintenance of the project. 1.14 TESTS A. Pretest for Pressure Test and Coverage Test prior to the Owner's Representative's review of said tests to confirm that the irrigation system will meet the requirements of the specified tests. B. Once pretests are completed and acceptable results are confirmed by the Contractor, tests must be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor must give at least 48 hours advance notice of tests. 1.15 SUBMITTALS A. IRRIGATION MATERIAL DOCUMENTAT[ON Submit two sets of samples and/or manufacturer's "Catalog Cuts" of all material as noted in Specifications. B. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION/MAINTENANCE/OPERATION INFORMATION 1. The Contractor must provide two sets of the following, in three- ring binders with sections indexed and tabbed. a. List of authorized distributers and service representatives for each item of equipment used, including names, addresses and phone numbers. b. Winterization and startup procedures. C. Controller wire color code chart. C. WATERING SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL Contractor must cooperate with Landscape Contractor in providing Owner with a written "watering schedule" to ensure adequate watering of all plant materials during the Guarantee Period of this Contract. D. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS See As-Built Drawing Section herein. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-5 E. Backflow Preventer inspection and test results. F. Written documentation of the date the irrigation system was winterized. G. Written documentation of existing static water pressure (psi) and flow (gpm). H. SPARE PARTS 1. The Contractor must provide to the Owners Representative the following items as spare parts at no additional cost. a. Two sets of Controller cabinet keys. b. Two sets of Quick Coupler keys with hose swivels. a Two of each type and size of head and nozzle used on this project. 1.16 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor must be responsible for maintaining a current and accurate record of all equipment installed and record any deviations to the plans (all deviations to the plans must be approved by the Owners Representative). As-Built records must be updated daily on site and must be available for review by Owners Representative at any time. Upon completion of the system and prior to acceptance, the Contractor must provide the Owner's Representative with a neat and clean reproducible hard copy set of As-Built drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL All materials and equipment must be new and of the best quality. All items of equipment or material must be as specified or approved equal. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe upstream and downstream of the control valves must be Schedule 40 complying with ASTM D1785. B. PVC PIPE SLEEVING Schedule 40 and conform to all requirements of ASTM D 1785. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02910-6 C. All glued and threaded fittings for lateral lines must conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466 Schedule 40 PVC. All fittings must be of the solvent weld type except where risers, valves, etc. require threaded transition fittings. D. All threaded fittings for mainlines must conform to requirements of ASTM D2464 Schedule 80 PVC. All glued fittings for mainline must conform to requirements of ASTM D2466. E. All pipe must be marked with manufacturer's name, class of pipe and NSF seal. Pipe must bear no evidence of interior or exterior extrusion marks. Pipe walls must be uniform, smooth and glossy. Pipe may be pre-belled or with individual solvent-weld couplings. F. All threaded fittings for mainlines must conforn to requirements of ASTM D2464 Schedule 80 PVC. All glued fittings for mainlines must conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Schedule 40 PVC, G. PVC THREADED NIPPLES Schedule 80, complying with ASTM D1785. H. All pipe must be delivered in at least 20-foot lengths. I. All PVC pipe and fittings must conform to the following minimums: 1. Tensile Strength 78F: 5,000 psi 2. Izod Impact Strength (Notched): 0.65 ft. lb./in. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: 300,000 psi 4. Compressive Strength: 8,500 psi 5. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi 2.3 PVC PIPE JOINT COMPOUND AND PRIMER A. JOINT COMPOUND Slow drying, heavy-duty PVC solvent cement type. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-7 B. PRIMER Tinted, compatible with joint compound. 2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Must be of the type,manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. B. Controller wiring that is above ground must be installed in UL Listed Schedule 80 grey electric conduit. 2.5 POP-UP SPRAY HEADS Must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES Must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.7 CONTROL`VIRE FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE OPERATIONS A. Control wire must be insulated single strand copper designed for 24 to 50 volts and UL approved as Type U.F. (Underground Feeder). UL and U.F. designations must be clearly marked on insulation jacket of wire. B. Copper conductor must meet or exceed ASTM B-3 requirements. C. Minimum wire size must be No. 14 AWG. Size wire to control valve per valve manufacturer's recommendations. D. Rod color must be available for lead (hot) wires. E. White color must be available for common ground wires„ F. Yellow color must be provided for spare wires G. Wire Splice Corrections: 3M, DBY, Rainbird Penn-Tite, Seotchlok or approved equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02910-8 I 2.8 QUICK COUPLING VALVES Must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.9 MANUAL GATE VALVES Must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.10 RAIN SHUTOFF VALVE Must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.11 VALVE BOXES A. Unless otherwise specified, all automatic valves and manual gate valves must be enclosed in Carson Industries with locking lid or approved equal. B. Quick coupler valves must be enclosed in a Carsons industries 910-128, 10-inch round box with green bolt down cover or approved equal. C. Backflow preventers must be enclosed in a Carson Industries Number 1730 PB-18 Body Box or approved equal. D. Size valve boxes as required to provide approximately 3 inches clear between valve box and valve on all sides. Provide and install valve box extensions as required. 2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER Backflow Preventer shall be a Double Check Valve Assembly and must be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. All backflow preventers must be inspected and approved by the controlling agency before final acceptance. 2.13 IRRIGATION WATER METER See Civil Drawings City of Kent 640 Zone Boaster Station G&O#16627 02910-9 2.14 BACK ILL MATERIALS A. GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS Per WSDOT Standard Specifications 9-03.12(4). B. SAND (BACKFILL SOILS AROUND PVC PIPE) Fine granular material naturally produced by rock disintegration and free from organic material, loam, clay and other deleterious substances. C. NATIVE MATERIAL(BACKFILL SOIL AROUND PVC PIPE) Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1-inch diameter. 2.15 POLYETHYLENE SWING RISER All polyethylene swing risers must be "Rainbird SA Swing Pipe; "Hunter SJ Swing Joint' or approved equal. 2.16 OTHER SUPPLIES A. Electrical tape must be black plastic, 3/4 inch wide and a minimum of 0.007 inches thick and the all-weather type. B. All quick coupling valve pipe joints must be "Triple Swing Joint' or approved equal. C. All electrical wire splices must be made watertight with sealing 3M Direct Burial Splice Kit or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING Trenches must allow for 12 inches of cover over lateral lines, 18 inches of cover for irrigation main lines unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Maintain a minimum clearance of 3 inches between irrigation lines within a common trench. Trenches for sleeves must allow for a minimum of 18 inches of cover unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Excavate no wider at any point than is necessary to lay pipe or install equipment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-10 3.2 INSTALLATION A. PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (INCLUDES PIPE SLEEVES) 1. Due to the nature of PVC pipe and fittings, the Contractor must exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing to avoid damage. Any pipe that has been dented or damaged must be discarded until such damage has been cut out and the pipe is rejoined with a coupling. 2. PVC pipe ends must be cut to 90 degrees to the pipe length and cleaned of all cutting burrs prior to cementing. Use approved reaming tool. Pipe ends must be wiped clean with a rag lightly wetted with PVC thinner. Cement must be applied with a light coat on the inside of the fitting and a heavier coat on the outside of the pipe. Pipe must be inserted into the fitting and given a quarter turn to seat the cement. Excessive use of cement is not permitted. Pipe will be tested-as indicated elsewhere in these specifications. No backfilling will be permitted other than at the centers of pipe lengths until the pressure test is completed. 3, All threaded joints on mainline pipe must have Teflon tape installed per manufacturer recommendations. B. HEAD LOCATIONS Heads immediately adjacent to walks, curbs, pavement, shrub/groundcover planting bed edge, etc., must have l-inch clearance between head and walks, curbs,pavement, shrub/groundcover planting bed edge etc., unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. C. CONTROL WIRE 1, Control wires are to be taped together at 5-foot intervals; then this bundle is to be taped to the bottom of the supply line at 10-foot intervals with at least 3 wraps of electrical tape. 2. All wire splices must be made watertight with sealing 3M Direct Burial Splice Kit and contained in valve boxes. 3. The control wires must be color coded as follows: a. Ground Wire—White b. Lead(Hot) Wire—Red City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-11 C. Spare Wire—Yellow 4. Arrange valve stations to operate in sequence shown on"As-Built" Drawings. 5. One spare wire must be provided to all control valves. The spare wire must be shared by all the valves and must complete the circuit back to the controller. Wire sizes must be the same as the sizing chart provided by the control valve manufacturer. D. RISERS 1. All sprinklers and quick coupler head risers must be installed per details shown on Contract Drawings. The pipe risers must have the same inlet size as the sprinkler and quick coupler heads. 2. Minimum riser size must be the pipe size of the sprinkler head. 3. Risers are to be capped after installation to keep inside of pipe clean. 4. Care must be taken not to over-tighten the threaded pipe into the PVC fittings. E. AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER(S) 1. Electrical wiring must be installed according to local code requirements. The cost of all electrical work necessary to make the automatic equipment operate properly at the electrical service stub- out to the controller must be included in this contract. Electrical service from an approved source to the controller location must be provided by the General Contractor. 2. Controller location and type of mounting of controller must be as specified and as shown on the Contract Drawings. Contractor must coordinate location and installation of the Automatic Controller with the General Contractor prior to installing the irrigation system. 3. The Contractor must use readable handwriting to post the valve schedule in the controller to facilitate the selection of the valves to be operated. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-12 F. BACKFLOW PREVENTER 1. Install in accordance with local plumbing code. See Double Check Valve Assembly detail shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Verify location with Owners Representative prior to installation. 3. Inspect and test the backflow preventer assembly before use in accordance with applicable portions of the Washington Administrative Code and other applicable regulations as set forth by the Washington State Department of Health and local jurisdiction. 4. These inspections and tests are to be completed and results recorded by a licensed Backflow Assembly Tester. 5. Contractor must be responsible for all testing and testing fees. G. AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES 1. Install per detail shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Before installation of any automatic valves, the supply line must be thoroughly flushed. 3, All automatic valves must be enclosed in valve boxes set above finish grade as shown on details. Valve box extension may be required. Locate valve boxes in shrub and groundcover planting beds wherever possible and at points of easy access from paved and/or lawn areas. H. RAIN SHUT-OFF VALVE Install per manufacturers reconnnendations. I. MANUAL GATE VALVE Install per detail shown on the Contract Drawings. J. QUICK COUPLING VALVES Install per detail show on the Contract Drawings. Locate all quick couplers in shrub and/or groundcover planting beds when possible and at points of easy access from paved and/or lawn areas. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-13 K. IRRIGATION WATER METER See Civil Drawings, L. BACKFILLING 1. In refilling trenches, the bedding around the pipe and fittings must be approved `Backfill Materials" and must be well tamped. If necessary,provide suitable imported backfill. Trenches must be thoroughly compacted and water-settled. 2. Before backfilling, all underground appurtenances including risers, valves,backflow preventers, drain valves, etc., must remain exposed so that they can be viewed during testing. Leave all joints exposed; then complete backfilling after flushing, pressure testing, inspection and preparation of"As-Built Drawings." 3.3 COVERAGE TESTING Before acceptance of the sprinkler system, the Contractor, in the presence of the Owner's Representative, must perform an irrigation water "Coverage Test" to determine if the water coverage and operation of the entire irrigation system is complete and satisfactory. If any part of the system is inadequate, it must be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense and the test repeated until accepted. The Contractor must give 48 hours written notice to the Owner's Representative prior to the field review. 3.4 CLEANUP Clean and remove all debris from work areas including paving, curbs, catch basins, manholes and planting areas, etc. caused by the Contractor's work on this project prior to watering. All hard surfaced areas must be washed clean. 3.5 SYSTEM FAMILIARIZATION A. Upon acceptance of the system by the Owner, the Contractor must provide the Owner necessary keys and/or other tools necessary to operate/drain/activate the system and spend sufficient time with the Owner to ensure that the system operation/in aintenance/winterizing can continue after the departure of the Contractor. The Contractor will be liable for all damages or losses resulting from failure to comply with the provisions of this paragraph. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 02910-14 B. The Contractor must cooperate with Landscape Contractor in providing the Owner with a written "watering schedule" to ensure adequate watering of all plant materials during the Guarantee Period of this Contract. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 02910-15 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes reinforcement and associated items for all concrete, including, but not necessarily limited to: reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric, and accessories for cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 04200 Masonry 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI SP-66 American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual ANSI/ASTM A82 Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement ANSI/ASTM A185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement ANSUAWS DIA Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit in accordance with provisions of Section 01300, A. SHOP DRAWINGS Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03200-1 B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE Certify that reinforcing bar and welded wire fabric meet or exceed specified requirements. Submit certified copies of mill test reports of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform Work in accordance with ACT 301. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings, and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. REINFORCING STEEL ASTM A615, deformed bars: Grade 40 for #3 bars and smaller, Grade 60 for#4 bars and larger, unless noted otherwise on the Plans. B. WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC ASTM At 85 Plain Type; in flat sheets; plain. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. TIE WIRE Minimum 16-gauge annealed type. B. CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, BAR SUPPORTS, SPACERS Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load-bearing pad on bottom where required to prevent vapor barrier puncture. C. SPECIAL CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, BAR SUPPORTS, SPACERS ADJACENT TO WEATHER EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES Plastic-coated steel type; size and shape as required. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03200-2 D. MECHANICAL BAR SPLICES Comply with ACI 31& requirement of minimum tensile strength of 125 percent of specified yield for reinforcement. Subject to compliance with the requirements and approval of the Engineer, products, which may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: BAR-LOCK(MBT) Coupler Systems "ERICO"REBAR SPLICING E. ADHESIVE ANCHORS Injection adhesive system shall consist of a dual-cylinder adhesive refill pack, a mixing nozzle, and dispenser. The adhesive shall be formulated to include resin and hardeners. 1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. HIT RE 500 Injection Adhesive Anchor, Hilti, Inc. b. SET-XP, Simpson Strong Tie, Inc. C. PEI000+, Powers Fasteners, Inc. 2.3 FABRICATION Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACT SP-66. Obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to welding reinforcing steel. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSFAWS DIA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Accurately position, support, and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03200-3 secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal/plastic chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Install reinforcing bars with clearance indicated on the Plans. Provide laps as shown and stagger locations to minimize the concentration of multiple reinforcing at joints. Bar lap splicing shall have full contact. Where full contact cannot be achieved, the maximum space between the spliced bars shall not exceed 2 inches. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, provide two #5 minimum trim bars around all openings and penetrations. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with tie wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 03200-4 I SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes schedules, notes, and details for the construction of cast-in-place concrete structures, landings, equipment piers, housekeeping pads and slabs on grade. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 03200 Concrete Reinforcement Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary ACI 212.3 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete ACI 350.1 Tightness Testing of Reinforced Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-1 ASTM C131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C143 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C535 Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C618 Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. A. GENERAL The submittal for each included concrete mix shall include, as a complete package, the following as defined below: l. Concrete Mix Design 2. Certified Test Results 3. Sieve Analysis 4, Product Data An incomplete concrete mix submittal package may render a rejection of the mix or could delay the review process. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#t 6627 03300-2 B. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN Submit mix design for the proposed mix to be used on the Project, indicating components, and proportions by weight, including any admixtures. Mix design shall state chloride content. Mix designs to be provided are: 1. Unspecified Concrete 2. Lean Concrete 3. Cement Grout C. CERTIFIED TEST RESULTS Submit laboratory test results indicating compressive strength of concrete in compliance with requirements specified herein and in accordance with ACI 301. D. STEVE ANALYSIS Submit sieve analysis for proposed coarse and fine aggregates indicating components, source, gradation, and WSDOT aggregate source approval report, including WSDOT Aggregate Source ID, E. PRODUCT DATA Provide product data on all proposed admixtures, accessories, and embedded items to be used on the Project, including, but not limited to: 1. Cement; source and type 2. Air Entraining Agent 3. Water Reducing Admixtures 4. Pozzolans 5. Bonding Agents 6. Curing Compounds/Floor Hardeners 7. Non-Shrink Grout; Non-metallic and Metallic 8. Waterstops City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-3 9. Plastic Joint Formers 10. Vapor Barriers 11. Stair Nosings For admixtures other than those proposed for air entrainment, submit a letter from the manufacturer describing the benefits of its use for the project and effect of its use on the properties of the concrete. Product data shall expressly state admixtures are chloride free, or the manufacturer shall submit a letter certification stating the same. F. MATERIAL DELIVERY TICKETS Provide copies of all concrete and grout material delivery tickets for the Project to the Engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. Acquire cement and aggregates from same source for all work performed on the Project. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. Conform to ACT 306 when concreting during cold weather. Provide or coordinate field and laboratory testing as described later in this Section and under provisions of Section 01400. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate work in accordance with provisions of Section 01310. Coordinate the placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel- type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-4 I B. FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Plywood, limber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. FORMS FOR CYLINDRICAL COLUMNS AND SUPPORTS Metal, fiberglass reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes. Construct paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. D. FORM COATINGS Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. E. FORM TIES Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length,removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units, which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to surface. Unless noted otherwise on Plans, provide ties with plastic cone devices which, when removed, will leave holes not larger than I-inch diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. CEMENT ASTM C150, Type II— Moderate or Type I - II. Use one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Provide low alkali cement where Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) mitigation measures are required by WSDOT Aggregate Source Approval. B. FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES Comply with ASTM C33. Provide aggregates from a single source. Coarse aggregate shall be size designation 467 (Nominal size 1-1/2 inch to No. 4 sieve) for all liquid containing structures, and size designation 67 (Nominal size 3/4-inch to No. 4 sieve) for all other concrete. Aggregates shall show a loss of weight not exceeding 35 percent after 500 revolutions in a Los Angeles wear machine, when tested in accordance with ASTM City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-5 C131 or ASTM C535. Aggregates shall be from a WSDOT approved source. C. WATER Clean,potable, and not detrimental to concrete, in compliance with ASTM C94, 2.3 ADMIXTURES Except for air entrainment, use of all other admixtures used shall be subject to approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. Only admixtures expressly stated by the manufacturer as being chloride-free shall be used. Subject to compliance with requirements, products, which may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. AIR ENTRAINMENT ASTM C260 certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other proposed admixtures. Master Builders MB AE 90 or MICRO-AIR Sika AER W.R. Grace Daravair or Darex Series B. WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE ASTM C494 Type A. Master Builders PolyHeed Sika Plastocrete 161 W.R. Grace WRDA Series C. ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE ASTM C494 Type C. Master Builders Pozzolith NC534 Sika Plastocrete 161 FL W.R. Grace Polarset or DCI City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-6 I D. WATER REDUCING, RETARDING ADMIXTURE ASTM C494, Type D, Master Builders Pozzolith 100XR Sika Plastiment W.R. Grace Daratard Series E. WATER REDUCING, ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE ASTM C494, Type E. Euclid Chemical Co. Accelguard 80 Master Builders Pozzutec 20 W.R. Grace Daraccel F. HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCER (HRWR) ASTM C494, Type F. Master Builders Rheobuild 1 00 013 000 FC Sika Sikament 10 ESL W.R. Grace ADVA 100 G. HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCER AND RETARDER ASTM C494, Type G. Master Builders Pozzolith 440N W.R. Grace Daracem-100 H. POZZOLAN ASTM C618 - CLASS F, with a CaO maximum content of 10 percent. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. BONDING AGENT ASTM C881, Type 1 and 11, Grade 2, Class C, Epoxy Resin. Subject to Contract requirements, provide one of the following or equal: Sika Armatee 110 Conspec SpecBond 100 W.R. Meadows Sealtight Rezi Weld 1000 City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 03300-7 B. CURING COMPOUND/CHEMICAL FLOOR HARDENER ASTM C309, Type I, Class A and B. Subject to Contract requirements, provide one of the following or equal: W.R. Meadows Sealtight I I00-Clear Conspec RX cure Chemrex, Inc. Masterkure Burke Spartan-Cote WB C. GENERAL PURPOSE NON-SHRINK NON-METALLIC GROUT Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi (17 Mpa) in 48 hours and 7,000 psi (48 Mpa) in 28 days. Subject to Contract requirements, provide one of the following or equal: Sika SikaGrout 212 Conspec 100 Non Metallic Chemrex, Inc. Masterflow 928 Grout W.R. Meadows Sealtight 588 D. WATERSTOPS Provide waterstop of type and size at construction joints and other joints as indicated on the Plans. 1. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Serrated(ribbed), 3/8 of an inch minimum thickness for 6 inches and larger and 3/16 of an inch minimum thickness for 4 inches. Comply with Corps of Engineers CRD-C-572. No reclaimed PVC will be allowed in waterstop. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: Greenstreak Vinylex Corporation W.R. Meadows City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-8 i 2. Cold Joint Waterstop In stall where shown on the Plans or at locations approved by the Engineer. Cold joint waterstop shall be certified by the manufacturer to be compatible for use in wastewater (sewage) containment structures. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: Hydrotite, Greenstreak E. PLASTIC JOINT FORMER Provide and install, per manufacturer's recommendations, where shown on the Plans or at locations approved by the Engineer. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: Greenstreak Vinylex Corporation W.R. Meadows F. STAIR NOSINGS American Safety Tread Co., Inc., Style 816 with steel wing anchors with nuts and anchor bolts or equal. G. VAPOR BARRIER Six-mil fabric reinforced plastic film. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. GENERAL Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method is used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as that used for field quality control testing. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-9 The maximum water soluble chloride ion content, expressed as a percent of the cement, contributed from all ingredients of the concrete mix, including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures, shall not exceed 0.10 percent. Pozzolans maybe counted as part of the total cementitious material in the concrete mix design. The cementitious material is the "minimum cement content" specified in the mix design for each type of concrete. When pozzolans are used as part of this "cement content," the minimum content shall be 15 percent by weight of the total cementitious materials (Portland cement and pozzolans) and not more than 20 percent. Where ASR mitigation measures are required by W SDOT, provide a minimum of 15 percent pozzolan included in the cementitious material in the design mix. B. MIX DESIGNS Provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, unless noted otherwise on the Plans. 1. Concrete for Stnictures Structural concrete of general use in structures, sidewalks and where no specific class of concrete is designated. Minimum compressive strength @ 28 days: 4,000 psi Minimum cement content: 6 sacks per cubic yard Maximum water cement ratio by weight: 0.45 Nominal coarse aggregate size: 1-1/2" to No. 4 (size designation 467) 2. Lean Concrete Concrete for pipe thrust blocks or for use as noted as "Concrete Fill" on the Plans. Minimum compressive strength a 28 days: 2,500 psi Minimum cement content: 5 sacks per cubic yard 3. Cement Grout Material for filling guard posts or for other uses as shown on the Plans. Cement grout shall be sand and cement only and shall not contain coarse aggregate. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-10 Minimum compressive strength @ 28 days: 2,500 psi Minimum cement content: 6.5 sacks per cubic yard Maximum water cement ratio by weight: 0.54 C. ADMIXTURES 1. Air Entrainment Use air-entraining admixture in all exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement in accordance with ASTM C173 or C231 having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1 percent within the following limits: 5.5 percent for 1.5 inch max. coarse aggregate size 6.0 percent for 1.0 inch max. coarse aggregate size 7.0 percent 0.50 inch or less max. coarse aggregate size 2. Other Admixtures Use of all other admixtures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with ACI 212.3 and Manufacturer's recommendations. Only admixtures stated by the manufacturer to be chloride free shall be used. D. SLUMP LIMITS Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump (1 inch t of the maxiinum) at the point of placement in accordance with ASTM C143 as follows: Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: 3 inches. Reinforced foundation systems: 3 inches. Other concrete: 4 inches. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super-plasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of HRWR to site-verified 2- to 3-inch slump concrete. E. CONCRETE MIXING Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 03300-11 During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than that specified in ASTM C94 may be required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with AC1347. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished strictures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly buttjoints and provide back up at all joints to prevent leakage of cement paste, Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-in-place concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Provide Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete, Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. Chamfer all exposed corners and edges and other areas shown on the Plans, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 03300-12 Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.3 JOINTS AND WATERSTOPS A. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Locate and install construction joints where indicated, or locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, except as otherwise shown on the Plans. B. WATERSTOPS Provide waterstops in construction joints of all water containment structures and where shown on the Plans. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recorrunendations. All waterstops shall be tied into place using hog rings and/or tie wire to keep the waterstop from moving during placement of concrete. Provide manufacturer's written warranty for all waterstop installations. C. ISOLATION JOINTS IN SLABS-ON-GRADE Unless otherwise noted, construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as colunm pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as shown on the Plans. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7, D. SLAB (CONTROL) JOINTS Construct joints in slabs-on-grade as shown on the Plans. Use saw cuts 1/8 of an inch wide x 1/4 of the slab depth or inserts 1/4-inch wide x 1/4 of the slab depth. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-13 E. PREMOLDED (CONTROL) JOINTS Insertpremolded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. F. EDGE FORMS AND SCREED STRIPS FOR SLABS Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. GENERAL Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use installation drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be embedded. B. CLEANING AND TIGHTENING Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. C. REGLETS Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing, and to receive thru-wall flashing as shown at lintels,relieving angles, and other conditions. 3.5 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION Following leveling and tamping of granular base material for slabs on grade, place vapor barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete placement. Lap joints a minimum of 6 inches and seal with appropriate approved tape. After placement of vapor barrier, cover with sand material and compact to depth as shown on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GR O#16627 03300-14 3.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT See Section 03200. 3.7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Thin form coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.8 PREPARATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE SURFACES The Contractor shall bush hammer all existing concrete surfaces that are to have new concrete cast against them. Apply epoxy bonding agent prior to placing concrete. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. GENERAL Comply with ACI 304 and as herein specified. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Apply temporary protective covering to lower 2 feet of finished walls adjacent to poured floor slabs and similar conditions, and guard against spattering during concrete placement. B. PLACING CONCRETE IN FORMS Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-15 Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside fonns. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. C. PLACING CONCRETE SLABS Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. D. COLD WEATHER PLACING Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength, which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. When au temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C),uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), and not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-16 i E. HOT WEATHER PLACING When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F (32 degrees Q. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is at Contractor's option. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Fog spray forms,reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. Upon approval, water- reducing retarding admixture (Type D)may be used when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. 3.10 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES Provide smooth form finish for all formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view including all surfaces exposed to water or wastewater, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as veneer plaster, painting, or other similar type of system. Provide smooth form finish for surfaces to be waterproofed or dampproofed. Surfaces must comply with recommendations of the manufacturer of the-product being utilized. Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finished work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. A. SMOOTH FORM FINISH This is to be the as-cast concrete surface obtained utilizing selected foil facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams, and as specified herein. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas, with all fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed, by one of the following methods: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 03300-17 1, Provide smooth rubbed finish to concrete surfaces after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and tub with carbonmdum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the ribbing process. 2. Provide grout"sacked" cleaned finish. The sacking grout shall be one part Portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mixed with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives such as epoxy bonding agents or adhesives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard Portland cement and white Portland cement, amounts to be determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep sacked surfaces damp by fog spray or other acceptable method so surfaces do not dry out. B. ROUGH FORM FINISH This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 of an inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. All "bug holes" exceeding 1/2 inch in diameter and exceeding 1/4-inch depth shall be repaired or filled in. C. RELATED UNFORMED SURFACES At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring at adjacent formed surfaces, continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES 1. Variations from the plumb: a. In the lines and surfaces In any 10 feet of length— of columns, pier, walls 1/4 inch. Maximum for entire and in arises length— 1 inch b. For exposed corner In any 20 feet of length — colunms, control-joint 1/4 inch. Maximum for entire grooves, and other length— 1/2 inch conspicuous lines City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GRO#16627 03300-18 2. Variations fi-om level or from the grades indicated on the Plans: a. In slab soffits, In any 10 feet of length — ceilings, beam soffits, 1/4 inch. In any bay or opening, and in arises, or in any 20 feet of length—3/8 measured before of an inch. Maximum for entire removal of supporting length— 3/4 inch shores b. In exposed lintels, in any bay or opening, or in any sills, parapets, 20 feet of length— 1/4 inch. horizontal grooves, Maximum for entire length— and other conspicuous 1/2 inch lines 3. Variations in the linear In 20 feet of length— 1/2 inch. building lines from the Maximum for entire length— established position in plan 1 inch view 4. Variations in distance 1n any 10 feet of distance— between walls, columns and 1/4 inch. In any bay or opening partitions — 1/2 inch. Maximum total variation — 1-inch. 5. Variations in the sizes and Minus — 1/4 inch locations of sleeves, floor Plus — 1/2 inch openings and wall openings 6, Variations in cross-sectional Minus— 1/4 inch dimensions of columns and Plus— 1/2 inch beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls 7. Variations in footings: a. Variation from Minus— 1/2 inch dimensions on Plans Plus-2 inches when formed or plus 3-inches when placed against unformed excavations City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o# 16627 03300-19 b, Misplacement of 2 percent of the footing width in eccentricity the direction of the misplacement, but not more than 2 inches C. Reduction in thickness Minus— 5 percent of specified thickness 8. Variations in steps: a. In a flight of stars Riser— 1/8 of an inch Tread- 1/4 inch In. In consecutive steps Riser— 1/16 of an inch Tread- 1/8 of an inch 3.11 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: A. SCRATCH FINISH Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping, including grout finishes where indicated on plans, or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. Slope surfaces uniformly to floor drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. B. FLOAT FINISH Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a unifonn, smooth, granular texture. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-20 C. TROWEL FINISH Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph up through applied floor covering system. D. TROWEL AND FINE BROOM FINISH Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. NON-SLIP BROOM FINISH Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, landings, steps, and ramps, sidewalks and elsewhere as indicated. immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Owner before application. F. CHEMICAL-HARDENER FINISH Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior exposed concrete floors and steps, unless noted otherwise. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. G. TOLERANCES FOR MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES The flatness of the concrete shall be carefully controlled and the tolerances shall be measured by the straight edge system as specified in paragraph 4.5.7 of ACI 117, using a 10-foot straight edge, within 72 hours after floor slab installation and before shores and/or fornis are removed. The listed tolerances shall be met at any and every location at which the straight edge can be placed. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-21 Bullfloated 1/2 inch Float Finish 3/16 inch Trowel Finish 1/8 inch Straightedges 5/16 inch 3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. GENERAL Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep concrete continuously wet for not less than 7 days. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried out. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 curing methods. Avoid rapid drying of concrete at the end of final curing period. B. CURING METHODS Perform curing of concrete by use of curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. Provide moisture curing by the following methods. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water, or provide continuous water-fog spray. Covering concrete surface with absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,placed in wide as practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. hmnediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs,walls, sidewalks, and curbs, as follows: Apply curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs and walls as soon as initial curing operations are complete or immediately after the forms have City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 1#t 6627 03300-22 been stripped (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Completely cover the concrete surfaces with curing and sealing compound. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair any damage during curing period. Do not use membrane curing compor ids on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet),painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. C. CURING FORMED SURFACES Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period and until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. CURING UNFORMED SURFACES Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by application of an appropriate curing method. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture retaining cover. 3.13 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. GENERAL Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, and as herein specified. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures four stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support work without excessive stress or deflection. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required, until all concrete has attained its required 28 day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-23 B. REMOVAL OF FORMS Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits,joints, suspended slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained 70 percent of the design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens, representative of concrete location or members. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.14 REUSE OF FORMS Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Provide new form facing material. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork prior to reuse of forms. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forns for exposed concrete surfaces, unless approved by the Engineer and acceptable to the Owner. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. FILLING-IN Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. Fill-in all form tie holes and other forming system holes with non-shrink grout. City of Kent 040 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-24 i B. CURBS Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. BASE PLATE, EQUIPMENT BASES AND FOUNDATIONS Provide machine and equipment bases (housekeeping pad/pier) and foundations, as shown on the Plans. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment with template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturers furnishing machines and equipment. Provide 4-inch-high, square or rectangular concrete pad around all conduits and small diameter pipes that penetrate through floor slabs. Provide leveling grout under base plates and equipment frames using non- metallic, non-shrink grout. Minimum thickness for leveling grout shall be 1/2 inches unless noted otherwise on the Plans or specified by equipment manufacturer. D. STA1R NOSINGS Provide stair nosings at all exterior cast-in-place concrete stairs or steps. The stair nosings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. PATCHING DEFECTIVE AREAS Repair and patch defective areas immediately after removal of forms. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids or bugholes over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush- coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. For water and wastewater containment structures, utilize an epoxy resin bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-25 mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. REPAIR OF FORMED SURFACES Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, bug holes, honeycomb,rock pockets; furs and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and form bolt holes, fill with non-shrink grout, or precast concrete cone plugs or ribber plugs secured in place with bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete.All repairs shall be approved by the Engineer. if defects carrot be repaired, the Contractor shall remove and replace the concrete. C. REPAIR OF UNFORMED SURFACES Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects,which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 inches wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1-inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3 inches of clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 03300-26 i concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cutout holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to approval of the Engineer. If acceptable repairs cannot be made, the Contractor shall remove and replace the concrete at no cost to the Owner. 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. GENERAL Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete shall include the following: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2. Slump ASTM C143: one test at point of discharge for each day's placement of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 3. Air Content ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's placement of each type of air- entrained concrete. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 03300-27 4. Cuncrete Temperature Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and below, and when 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 5. Compression Test Specimen ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests ASTM C39; one set for each day's placement exceeding 5 cubic yards plus additional sets for each 50 cubic yards over and above the first 25 cubic yards of each concrete class placed in any 1 day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cubic yards, Engineer may waive strength test if, in his judginent, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in- place concrete. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours after testing. FAX of test results is acceptable; however, mailing hard copies of test results is also required. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28-day tests. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 03300-28 7. Nondestructive Testing Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection of concrete. 8. Additional Tests The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in a structure, as directed by the Owner. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for cost of such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. 3.18 WATERTIGHTNESS All water and wastewater holding tanks, basins and strictures listed on the Structural Plans shall be tested for watertightness. Each tank, structure or basin shall be tested independently. Watertightness tests shall be made after the concrete has obtained at least 90 percent of its required 28-day compressive strength, but in no case sooner than 20 days after placement. Watertightness shall conform to the requirements of ACI350.1. Leakage testing shall not be conducted during periods of time with measurable precipitation. Evaporation correction shall be made on the basis of an evaporation pan. Suitable evaporation pan shall be approved by Owner and shall be provided by Contractor. Watertightness testing may follow backfill of the structure, at the Contractor's option. However, if the structure does not pass the test, re-excavation to locate leaks shall be required. All costs associated with location (re-excavation and backfilling) and repair of leaks shall be borne by the Contractor. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 03300-29 DIVISION 4 MASONRY SECTION 04200 MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes masonry construction as indicated on the Plans and schedules. The types of masonry work include but are not limited to the following: Concrete masonry units (CMU) and brick masonry, notes and details to show size and location of units and typical connections for installation and construction of units. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 01400 Quality Control 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents; Reference Title ACI SP-66 ACT Detailing Manual ASTM A82 Steel Wire,Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C67 Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile ASTM C90 Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C404 Aggregates for Masonry Grout ASTM C476 Grout for Masonry ASTM C578 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Themral Insulation ASTM C780 Preconstruction and Constriction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry ASTM C 1363 Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-1 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practiced and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. A. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI SP-66. B. PRODUCT DATA Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other types of manufactured products. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, provide a color palette of at least six colors for color selection by Owner. C. CERTIFICATES Submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that each product meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS 1. Installer Company specializing in performing the work specified in this Section shall have minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-2 C, TESTING Test the following materials by the methods indicated: 1. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Test each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit per ASTM C140. 2. Mortar Test each mortar type per ASTM C780. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, or other causes. Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover and in dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration and accumulation of dirt. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. PROTECTION OF WORK During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. B. STAINING Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-3 Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar. C. COLD WEATHER PROTECTION Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. Perform the following constriction procedures while masonry work is progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 degrees F (6 degrees Q. Range: 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures. Range 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F(4 degrees C) Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of workday. Range: 25 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-4 I (49 degrees C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of workday. Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat sources. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees Q) maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C)to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees Q at end of workday. Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) at time of laying. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at least 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for 24 hours after laying units. Do not heat water for mortar and grout above 160 degrees F (71 degrees C). Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 04200-5 Range: 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. Range: 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (4 degrees C) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistant membrane for at least 24 hours. Range: 25 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistant insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry. 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry, maintain heated enclosure to 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for 48 hours. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. GENERAL Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated, applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners,jambs, sash control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. Provide square- edged units for outside comer, except where indicated as bullnose. All material for exterior block walls shall contain the manufacturer's recommended amount of the Dry Block System Admixture for water repellency. All mortar for exterior block walls shall contain the recommended amount of the Dry Block Mortar Admixture for water repellency and to assure proper bond strength. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 04200-6 Provide units complying with characteristics indicated for grade, type, face size, exposed face, and weight classification. B. HOLLOW LOAD-BEARING BLOCK UNITS ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1, moisture controlled, medium weight (density shall exceed 110 pco. 1. Size Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, provide manufactured standard units with nominal face dimensions 16 inches long by 8 inches tall (15-5/8 niches x 7-5/8 inches actual) by thickness shown on the Plans. 2. Color and Pattern Interior Wall Units: Smooth faced, natural color. Exterior Wall Units: Split faced, Owner to select color. Provide color palette of at least six colors for Owner selection. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. PORTLAND CEMENT ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. Mortar color shall coordinate with block color. Provide mortar color options to the Owner for selection. B. HYDRATED LIME ASTM C207,Type S. C. AGGREGATE FOR MORTAR ASTM C 144. D. AGGREGATE FOR GROUT ASTM C404, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 04200-7 E. ADMIXTURES Comply with Section 03300. Dry Block Mortar Admixture. F. WATER Clean,potable and free of oils. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. REINFORCING BARS Comply with Section 03200. B. SINGLE WYTHE JOINT REINFORCEMENT Truss or Ladder type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82, 3/16 of an inch (4.8 mm) side rods with 3/16 of an inch (4.8 mm) cross ties; manufactured by National Wire, or equal. 2.4 FLASHINGS A. COPPER/KRAFT PAPER FLASHINGS 3-oz/sq. ft. (915-g/sq. m) sheet copper bonded to fiber-reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper; manufactured by York Manufacturing, or equal. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS Synthetic Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints, manufactured by Williams Products, Inc., or equal. B. CLEANING SOLUTION Not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. Do not use Muriatic Acid. Subject to compliance with requirements, product(s), which may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-8 Fabrikleen Masonry Cleaner,by Fabrikem Chemicals, hiternational C. DAMPPROOFING Apply a clear siloxane sealer with an active solids content of 6.5 percent on the exterior of all CMU (follow manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and application instructions). Provide one coat of Chemprobe Corporation Prime-A-Pell Plus and then one finish coat of Chemprobe Corporation Conformel clear. Apply coating at a maximum rate of 150 square feet/gallon. D. INSULATED CMU WALLS Provide insulated CMU walls as shown on the Plans. The expanded polystryene insulation shall be individually molded to have a minimum density of 1.0 lb/ft3, and shall conform to ASTM C578 Standard Type 1. Thermal capabilities of insulated CMU walls when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363: ................__ .......... U, Value for 2 Core Nominal CMU Wall Insulated CMU Wall Thickness Svstem 8-Inch 0.19 __--.__..._ 10-Inch 0.17 12-Inch 0.15 Subject to compliance with requirements, the products, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: ICON Universal Inserts by Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Inc. (CBIS, Inc.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION For Insulated CMU Walls install insulation in block cores at the block manufacturer's plant in conformance with Korfil installation requirements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O 416627 04200-9 Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. Match masonry coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry work with existing masonry work. Provide smooth exterior face CMU where the masonry is to receive attachments such as light fixtures, water faucets, electrical boxes, etc. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. VARIATION FROM PLUMB For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any story. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. VARIATION FROM LEVEL For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 foot maximum. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 of an inch between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16 of an inch within width of a single unit. C. VARIATION OF LINEAR BUILDING LINE For position shown on the Plans and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 3/8 of an inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-10 i D. VARIATION IN CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed minus 3/8 of an inch nor plus 3/8 of an inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. E. VARIATION IN MORTAR JOINT THICKNESS Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 of an inch or do not exceed head joint thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8 of an inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. 3.3 TEMPORARY FORMWORK Provide temporary formwork and shoring as required for support of masonry construction. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown on the Plans. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during constriction. Allow not less then the following minimum time to elapse after completion of members before removing shoring or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. Ten days for girders and beams Seven days for slabs --- Seven days for reinforced masonry soffits 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. GENERAL Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials that will reduce bond to mortar or gout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Plans or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or one inch (whichever is greater). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-11 For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown on the Plans, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown on the Plans. Splice reinforcement bars where shown. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. Provide not less than minimum lap shown on the Plans. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8 of an inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap units not less than six inches at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and"T" units to provide continuity at comers and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fire-proofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B. ANCHORING Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as shown on the Plans. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A, GENERAL Do not wet concrete masonry units (CN U), Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate openings, movement- type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs and wherever possible at other locations. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around build-in items. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zane Booster Station G&o#16627 04200-12 I Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and road mortar or grout into core to completely fill the masonry unit. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout three courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8-inch joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls, which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound comers orjambs to shift adjacent stretcher units, which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. Use special blocks as required to provide solid CMU face at all surfaces including, but not limited to,jambs, headers and sills. Exposed ends of CMU cores are not allowed. B. FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at, or above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetration in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4 inches into masonry each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches and through the inner wythe to within I inch of the interior face City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-13 of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, tarty flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches. At heads and sills turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Provide weep holes in the head joints where shown on the Plans. C. WALLS 1. Pattern Bond Lay CMU wall units in half-running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Bond and interlock each course at confers and intersections. Use special shaped units where shown, and as required for corners,jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities,which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. 2. Option Where all vertical cores are not shown to be grouted, Contractor may elect to fill all vertical cores with grout, in which case requirements for mortar bedding of cross-webs and closing of core spaces below bond beams do not apply. D. LINTELS Install steel lintels where shown on the Plans. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1 foot for brick size units and 2 feet for block size units are shown without structural steel or City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-14 other supporting lintels. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. E. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown on the Plans. Build in related items as the masonry work progresses. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and atjunetures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. Build flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units into masonry. Build in non-metallic joint fillers where shown on the Plans. F, COLUMNS, PIERS, AND PILASTERS Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown on the Plans, use units that provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcement bars shown on the Plans. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to maximum pour height specified. G. GROUTING Use "Fine Grout"per ASTM C476 for filling spaces less than 4 inches in one or both horizontal directions. Use "Coarse Grout"per ASTM C476 for filling 4 inch spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. Use "Concrete Mix" for filling spaces 10 inches or larger. H. GROUTING TECHNIQUE 1. General At the Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to requirements that follow. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-15 2. Low-Lift Grouting Provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 foot height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 foot height, stop poor at course below bond beam. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than 1 hour. Tenninate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below top course of pour. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 3. High-Lift Grouting Do not use high-lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity dimension and area is 3 inches and 10 square inches, respectively. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells, which are to be filled with grout. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5 feet and grout pour to a maximum height of 24 feet for single wythe hollow concrete masonry walls,unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Place before or after laying masonry units, as required by job conditions. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where shown and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 04200-16 thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcement bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing shown on the Plans. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints where indicated. Place as masonry units are laid, at vertical spacing shown. Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcement bars, embed additional lateral tie reinforcement in mortar jousts. Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as required to prevent grout blowout or rupture of CMU face shells,but provide not less than No. 2 bars or 8-gauge wire ties spaced 16 inches on center for members with 20 inches or less side dimensions, and 8 inches on center for members with side dimensions exceeding 20 inches. I. PREPARATION OF GROUT SPACES Prior to grouting inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing if required, before starting grouting operations. Place groat by pumping into grout spaces imless alternate methods are acceptable to the Owner. Limit grout pours to sections, which can be completed in 1 working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts that do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than 1 hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-17 Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1 inch of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2 inches of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. J. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. General Contractor shall employ, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field quality control tests for masonry as specified in Section 01400. 2. Unit Test Method a. Brick Tests For each type and grade of brick indicated, test units by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM C67 except select five bricks at random for each 10,000 units or fraction thereof installed. b. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests For each type, class and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, test units by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C140. c, Mortar Tests For each type indicated, test mortar by ASTM C780 methods for sampling and testing. Conduct tests no less frequent]y than that required to evaluate mortar used to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are taken for testing. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Ga o#t 6627 04200-18 K. REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING 1. General Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 2. Pointing During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. 3. Final Cleaning After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape, hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Owner's approval of sample wall cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry, Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. For masonry made of clay or shale, clean masonry with cleaning solution in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Muriatic acid shall not be used. Apply acidic cleaner in compliance with directions of cleaner manufacturer. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek"bulletins. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-19 Provide final protection of masonry work and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Owner that ensures unit masonry work to be without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04200-20 SECTION 04210 ARCHITECTURAL FACE BRICK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes brick masonry construction as indicated on the Plans and schedules. The types of brick masonry work include but are not limited to the following: Brick masonry, notes and details to show size and location of units and typical connections for installation and construction of units. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 01400 Quality Control 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C216 Standard Specification for Facing Brick ASTM C404 Aggregates for Masonry Grout ASTM C476 Grout for Masonry 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0 13 00, A. PRODUCT DATA Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of brick masonry unit, accessory, and other types of manufactured products. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, provide a color palette of at least six colors for color selection by Owner. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-1 B. CERTIFICATES Submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that each product meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS Company specializing in performing the work specified in this Section shall have ininumum 5 years of documented experience. B. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY Obtain exposed brick masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. Obt r mortar :rgredients of uuil'enm quality, mcladi:rg color f- exposed brick masonry, from manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. C. TESTING Test the following materials by the methods indicated: 1. Face brick masonry units Test each type, class, and grade of brick masonry unit per ASTM C67. 2. Mortar Test each mortar type per ASTM C780. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver masomy materials to project in undamaged condition. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, or other causes. Store brick masonry materials off ground, under cover and in dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-2 i Store accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration and accumulation of dirt. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. PROTECTION OF WORK During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. Do not apply mvform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building brick masonry walls or columns. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building brick masonry walls or columns. B. STAINING Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of brick masonry to be left exposed or painted, hu nediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar, C. COLD WEATHER PROTECTION Do not lay brick masonry units that are wet or frozen. Remove any ice or snow formed on brick masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. Remove brick masonry damaged by freezing conditions. Perform the following constriction procedures while brick masonry work is progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout inaterials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 degrees F (6 degrees Q. Range: 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-3 Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees Q. Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures. Range 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (A degrees C) Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout; Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of workday. Range: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) Mortar„ Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of workday. Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat sources. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 20 degrees F (-7 degrees Q and below: Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 416627 04210-4 I (49 degrees C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of workday. Brick Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) at time of laying. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at least 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for 24 hours after laying units. Do not heat water for mortar and grout above 160 degrees F (71 degrees C). Protect completed brick masonry and brick masonry not being worked on in the following manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. Range: 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. Range: 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistant membrane for at least 24 hours. Range: 25 degrees F(0 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistant insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry. 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) for 24 hours using enclosures and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 04210-5 supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry, maintain heated enclosure to 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for 48 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK MASONRY UNITS The brick masonry units shall be face brick, Grade SW as produced by Mutual Materials, or equal. Brick masonry units shall conform to ASTM C 216. Brick masonry units shall be of dimensions 3-1/2 inch wide by 3-1/2 inch high by 11-1/2 inch long. Provide all units with straight cut edges and square corners unless otherwise noted or shown. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. PORTLAND CEMENT e eTn/r C 150, T,Ne I ept T, ,e Irr may he ,.,ed f. old , other construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. Mortar color shall coordinate with block color. Provide mortar color options to the Owner for selection. B. HYDRATED LIME ASTM C207, Type S. C. AGGREGATE FOR MORTAR ASTM C144. D. WATER Clean, potable and free of oils. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. REINFORCING BARS Comply with Section 03200. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-6 i B. ANCHORS AND TIES Anchors and ties shall be two-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between brick masonry veneer and backup parallel to plane of veneer but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. Ties shall be constructed of galvanized steel wire with a minimum thickness of 9 gauge. Veneer ties shall be Wire-Bond Ladder Adjustable Tab Lock, or equal. 2.4 FLASHINGS A. COPPER/I{RAFT PAPER FLASHINGS 3-oz/sq. ft. (915-g/sq. m) sheet copper bonded to fiber-reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper; manufactured by York Manufacturing, or equal. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS Synthetic Rubber material. Provide with center and tee accessories, cement fused joints,manufactured by Williams Products, Inc., or equal. B. CLEANING SOLUTION Not harmful to brick masonry work or adjacent materials. Do not use Muriatic Acid. Subject to compliance with requirements, product(s), which may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Fabrikleen Masonry Cleaner, by Fabrikem Chemicals, International C. CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL Cavity drainage material shall be installed at the base of the wall cavity and at all supports and other blockages in the cavity that require weep holes and flashing. Cavity drainage material shall be Hohmann & Barnard Mortar Trap, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-7 D. WEEP HOLE Weep holes shall be spaced at 24 inches O.C. at the base of the wall and all supports. Use Hohmann & Barnard Mortar Trap Weep Vents, or equal in the weep holes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual tlniekness of the brick masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of brick masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete brick masonry work to match ...,...x....x..,u.ux...y uu�u........ ... ..... ..pennng. Cut brick masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Match brick masonry coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry work with existing masonry work. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. VARIATION FROM PLUMB For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4 inch fit 10 feet, corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any story. For vertical alignment ofhead joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. VARIATION FROM LEVEL For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 foot maximum. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 of an inch between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16 of an inch within width of a single unit. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-8 I C. VARIATION OF LINEAR BUILDING LINE For position shown on the Plans and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 3/8 of an inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum. D. VARIATION IN CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed minus 3/8 of an inch nor plus 3/8 of an inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. E. VARIATION IN MORTAR JOINT THICKNESS Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 of an inch or do not exceed head joint thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8 of an inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. 3.3 TEMPORARY FORMWORK Provide temporary formwork and shoring as required for support of brick masonry construction. Construct formwork to conform to shape, lone and dimensions shown on the Plans. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. Allow not less then the following minimum time to elapse after completion of members before removing shoring or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. • Ten days for girders and beams • Seven days for slabs • Seven days for reinforced masonry soffits 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BRICK MASONRY A. GENERAL Veneer shall be laid in pattern as shown in the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 04210-9 Veneer shall be clean and free of dust and shall be laid with not less than one inch of air space between veneer and the backing wall. All joints shall be filled solidly with mortar. Provide tooled concave mortar joints unless otherwise specified or noted on the Plans. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. Lay units plumb, level and true to lines appropriate to veneer system. Veneer ties shall have at least 5/8 inch of mortar coverage from exterior surface to prevent corrosion. Anchors shall be installed to provide not less than the support as recommended by the brick and tie manufacturers. Anchors shall be installed in such a manner as to eliminate looseness or improper bends or kinks in wire. Joint dimension shall not be less than 1/4 inch nor more than 1/2 inch and shall meet control heights indicated on Plans. Lay masonry units plumb, true to lure, and with accurately spaced level courses. Vertical joints shall fall on centerline of unit below. Install cavity drainage material at all interruptions in the wall cavity including shelf angles and base of the wall. B. CONTROL JOINTS Provide expansion joints in brick veneer at same locations they occur in substrate construction or as shown in the Plans. Provide elastomeric joint filling. C. CI.FANINC: Mortar stains shall be removed with clear water as work progresses. Upon completion, all exposed surfaces shall be cleaned with cleaning agents and water, removing all stains with fiber brushes and the washing with clean water. In the event ordinary cleaning is not adequate, the Contractor shall use special cleaning methods such as sandblasting, acid washing, chipping, etc. as approved by the Engineer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#16627 04210-10 I At the conclusion of masonry work, the Contractor shall remove all scaffolding and equipment used in the work along with all debris, refuse and surplus masonry materials from the premises. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O#16627 04210-11 DIVISION 5 METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes structural steel work as shown on the Plans, including schedules, notes, and details to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. Miscellaneous metal fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM A36 Structural Steel ASTM A53 Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating(Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM A490 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes ASTM A501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing ASTM A572 High-Strength Structural Steel ASTM A992 High-Strength Structural Steel AWS A2.4 Standard Welding Symbols AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code A1SC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 05120-1 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. A. SHOP DRAWINGS Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations, and complete details of structural members, to include openings, cuts, camber, fasteners, connections, and other pertinent data. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. B. MANUFACTURER'S MILL CERTIFICATE Submit under provisions of Section 01300 certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. MILL TEST REPORTS Submit under provisions of Section 01300 Manufacturer's Certificates, indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. D. WELDERS' CERTIFICATES Submit under provisions of Section 01300 Manufacturer's Certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following, except otherwise indicated: Standard Title AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-2 American Welding Dl.l "Structural Welding Code— Steel" Society(AWS) ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use" 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver material to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices that are to be embedded in cast-in- place concrete or masonry in ample time as to not delay work. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosiou and deterioration. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting strictures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES ASTM A992, High-Strength Structural Steel. B. STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES AND BARS ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise. C. STRUCTURAL TUBING Cold-Formed: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy-46KSI Hot-Formed: ASTM A501, Fy=36KS1 D. STEEL PIPE ASTM A53, Type E or S Grade B. E. HEADED STUD-TYPE CONNECTORS ASTM A108, Grade 1015, forged steel, uncoated. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-3 F. HIGH-STRENGTH THREADED FASTENERS Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts and hardened washers as follows: Quenched and tempered medium carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers complying with ASTM A325. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts and washers complying with ASTM A490 where indicated. Provide and install bolts with load indicator devices (load indicator washers or snap-off heads). G. ANCHOR BOLTS AND THREADED RODS ASTM F1554, Grade 36, unless noted otherwise. ASTM A276, stainless steel. H. UNFINISHED THREADED FASTENERS ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. 1. EXPANSION ANCHORS Provide size and type indicated. Expansion anchors shall be one piece stud type, wedge-style anchor. Carbon steel expansion anchors shall meet the following: • Stud: ASTM A108 and zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 • Wedge: AISI 1010 carbon steel • Nut: ASTM A563 Grade A • Washer: SAE 1005-1020 Stainless steel expansion anchors shall meet the following: • Stud: ASTM F593, AISI 304 or 316 • Wedge: AISI 304 or 316 • Nut: ASTM F594 • Washer: AISI 304 or 316 conforming to ASTM A240 City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-4 i Subject to compliance with the requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: KW1K Bolt 3, Hilti, Inc. Strong-Bolt 2, Simpson Strong Tie, Inc. Power-Stud+ SDI, Powers Fasteners, Inc. J. FLUSH TYPE EXPANSION ANCHORS Provide size to match fastener indicated, conforming to AISI 12L14, meeting ASTM At 08, and zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC I, Type III. Subject to compliance with the requirements products, which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: HDI Anchor, Hilti, Inc. Drop-In Anchor, Powers Fasteners, Inc. K. ADHESIVE ANCHORS 1. Adhesive capsules shall be self-contained two-part component consisting of a vinyl urethane resin with a Dibenzoyl Peroxide Hardener. Subject to compliance with the requirements products, which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: HVU Adhesive capsule, Hilti, Inc. Chem-Stud Capsule,Powers Fasteners, Inc. 2„ injection adhesive system shall consist of a dual-cylinder adhesive refill pack, a mixing nozzle, and dispenser. The adhesive shall be formulated to include resin and hardeners. Subject to compliance with the requirements products,which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to, the following: HIT RE 500 Injection Adhesive Anchor, Hilti, Inc. SET-XP, Simpson Strong Tie, hie. PEI000+, Powers Fasteners, Inc. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-5 3, For hollow-base materials such as concrete masonry units (CMU), provide galvanized screen tubes as required by the manufacturer. Subject to compliance with the requirements products, which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: HIT HY 70 Adhesive Anchor System for Unreinforeed Masonry, Hilti, hic. Pure 110+, Powers Fasteners, Inc. L. WELDING MATERIALS AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX; AWS A5.17, E70S-X; AWS A5.20, E70XT-X. Comply with AWS code. M. GROUTING MATERIALS Shall comply with Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." N. STRUCTURAL STEEL PRIMER PAINT Epoxy Primer per Section 09900, SSPC SP-10. 2.2 FABRICATION A. SHOP FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence, which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 05120-6 B. CONNECTIONS Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated on the Plans or as specified. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other comnections are indicated. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are indicated. C. HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTED CONSTRUCTION Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." D. WELDED CONSTRUCTION Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Assemble and weld built- up sections where indicated by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. E. SHEAR CONNECTORS Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Shop weld shear connectors, spaced as shown, to beams and girders in composite construction. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. F. STEEL WALL FRAMING Select members, which are true and straight for fabrication of steel wall framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square and true members in completed wall framing. Where indicated, build up welded doorframes attached to structural steel framing. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug weld steel bar stops to frames, except where shown removable. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10-inches oc, unless otherwise indicated. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing member, as shown on final shop drawings. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-7 Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. GENERAL Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed, or the exposed portions and initial two inches of embedded areas only. Do not paint surfaces that are to be welded or are high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. Apply two coats of paint complying with Section 09900 to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. B. SURFACE PREPARATION After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: SP-10 "Near-White Blast Cleaning." C. PAINTING Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with Section 09900 and manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils DFT. Use painting methods, which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. D. ZINC COATING Unless noted otherwise, where structural steel (ferrous metal) is exposed to weather, it shall be zinc coated or galvanized by the "hot-dip"method in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide the following minimum coating weight per square foot of actual surface. (a) Steel 1/8 inch 2.0 Ounces Average and 3/16 inch 1.8 Ounces Minimum (b) Steel 1/4 inch 2.3 Ounces Average and heavier 2.0 Ounces Minimum City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GR O#16627 05120-8 Provide galvanized fasteners with zinc-coated items. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS Testing and analysis of components will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. PART EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. GENERAL Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final comiections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. B. SETTING BASES AND BEARING PLATES Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. Pack non-shrink grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces,protect installed materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. FIELD ASSEMBLY Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05120-9 Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. D. ERECTION BOLTS On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. Comply with AISC Specification for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing member. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. E. GAS CUTTING Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members, which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Engineer. F. TOUCHUP PAINTING Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Painting shall conform to the requirements of Section 09900. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel is included in Section 09900. G. REPAIR OF GALVANIZED WORK Galvanized surface touchup shall comply with Section 09900. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 05120-10 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. GENERAL Comply with Section 01400 for independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. Provide testing agency access to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, the Engineer reserves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports indicate as not in compliance with requirements. The performance of additional tests, at the Contractor's expense,may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work, as well as to show compliance of corrected work. B. SHOP-BOLTED CONNECTIONS Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications. C. SHOP WELDING Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows: Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Perform tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedures listed are to be used at Contractor's option. City of Kent 640 Zone Boostcr Station GAO#16621 05120-11 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION Liquid Pentrant Inspection: ASTM E165 Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94 Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164 D. FIELD-BOLTED CONNECTIONS Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. E. FIELD WELDING Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Perform tests of welds as follows: Liquid Pentrant Inspection: ASTM E165 Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94 Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164 ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zane Booster Station G&O#t 6627 05120-12 i SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the miscellaneous metal fabrication work including, but is not limited to, the following: ladders, floor plates and covers, custom fabricated pipe brackets, supports, and pipe sleeves. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 04200 Masonry 05120 Structural Steel 09900 Painting 1.3 REFERENCES This section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM A36 Structural Steel ASTM A53 Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A240 Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels ASTM A283 Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes ASTM A501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-hon Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 05500-1 ASTM B241 Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Steel Tube NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, "Metal Bar Grating Manual" AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AWS DLL Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. STRUCTURAL STEEL Structural steel members and sections as defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" are specified in Section 05120. B. STEEL CASTINGS Comply with ASTM A27. Grade 65-35, medium strength carbon steel. C. CAST IRON Comply with ASTM A48, Class 20. D, STAINLESS STEEL Comply with ASTM A276,Type 316. E. ALUMINUM ALLOY EXTRUDED BARS, RODS, WIRE, SHAPES AND TUBES Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6061-6. F. WELDING MATERIALS As specified in Section 05120, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05500-2 i G. ZINC COATING Comply with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153. H. FASTENERS, ANCHORS, AND ANCHOR BOLTS As specified in Section 05120. L PAINTING Comply with Section 09900. J. GROUT MATERIALS As specified in Section 03300. 2.2 FABRICATION Fit and shop assemble components in the largest practical size for delivery and installation at site. A. STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AND SECTIONS Fabrication of structural steel members and sections shall comply with Section 05120. Provide galvanized fasteners with zinc coated items except as noted below. For all items installed in submerged, intermittently submerged, or areas subject to splash and spill, or corrosive atmospheres, fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. The term fasteners includes nut, bolts, washers, leveling nuts, and U-bolts. B. ACCESSORIES Provide necessary accessories as required for complete installation of products. Provide anchors, anchor bolts, plates, angles, hangers, struts, and other items required for connecting stairs to structure. C. ANCHORAGE TO SUPPORTING STRUCTURES For anchorage to supporting structures, provide 316 stainless steel fasteners for all aluminum items. Provide tapered washers where required to avoid point loading of structural members. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 05500-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive the work. 3.2 PREPARATION Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates. Paint embedded aluminum items in accordance with Section 09900. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. TOLERANCES Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Comply with the following tolerances: Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-accumulative. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Handrail installation shall be sturdy and without play. B. BOLTING AND WELDING Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Field weld components as indicated on the Drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or AWS D1.2. Obtain Owner's approval prior to field cutting or making adjustments not scheduled on the shop drawings. C. COATINGS After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete complying with City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station C&O#16627 05500-4 Section 09900. Field galvanizing shall be done by the hot-stick method utilizing Galy-bar, or equal. Spray-on zinc paint is not acceptable. D. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS Avoid direct fastening of dissimilar metals to one another. Connections shall include means as required to isolate dissimilar metals from one another. Possible methods of isolation include, but are not limited to, non- metallic bushings/washers at bolts, and epoxy paint coating of contact surfaces. Intended means of isolation shall be noted on the submitted shop drawings. See Section 09900 for epoxy paint requirements. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 05500-5 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shows the extent of rough carpentry work on the Plans, including, but not limited to, the following: wood fi aming, timber posts and beams, rooftop support curbs, wood nailers and blocking, fascia, soffits, and sheathing. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section item 01300 Submittals 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ALSC PS 20 American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSO): American Softwood Lumber Standard APA PRP-108 American Plywood Association (APA): Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels APA PS 1 American Plywood Association (APA): Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM D226 Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing AWC NDS American Wood Council(AWC): National Design Specification for Wood Construction AWC WFCM American Wood Council (AWC): Wood Frame Construction Manual for one- and two-family dwellings AWPAUI American Wood-Preservers' Association(AWPA) Standard WCLIB 17 West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for Douglas Fir, Western Hemlock, Western Red Cedar, White Fir, Sitka Spruce Lumber City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-1 1.4 SUBMITTALS Comply with provisions of Section 01300. Submit a certificate of compliance from the supplier certifying that the materials provided meet or exceed specified requirements. Certificate shall itemize materials provided on the Project and refer to pertinent specifications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and underneath temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. For lumber and plywood that is pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, provide a sticker between each course to provide air circulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Lumber shall comply with ALSO PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Each piece of lumber shall be factory marked with Grade Stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill that produced the product. Nominal sizes are indicated on the Drawings, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by ALSC PS 20, with moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FRAMING LUMBER AND FASCIA BOARDS Provide Douglas Fir - Larch No. 2 or better. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 06100-2 2.3 BEAMS, STRINGER, POSTS AND TIMBERS Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, provide Douglas Fir - Larch No. 1 or better. Glue Laminated Lumber: Douglas Fir, coast region. Bottom lamination shall be free of unsound knots or defects larger than 1/2-inch diameter. Provide industrial Appearance Grade. Each member shall bear the American Institute of Timber Construction (AiTC) stamp. See Drawings for additional requirements. 2.4 TRIM BOARDS Unless noted otherwise, provide No. 2 Common Boards or better complying with WWPA rules. Where boards are exposed to finish work,provide 19 percent maximum moisture content. Exterior trim shall be cedar, Grade A or better. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, wood trim, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown or required. Provide Standard Grade Douglas Fir or better. Provide 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. 2.6 SHEATHING Provide APA-rated Exposure 1 unless noted otherwise, span rating and thickness as noted on the Plans. Comply with PS 1 "Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, comply with APA PRP-108. Factory-mark each panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2.7 PLYWOOD OTHER THAN SHEATHING A. BACKING PANELS For Plywood Backing Panels (or Boards) used for mounting electrical, telephone or communications system equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated on the Drawings. If not otherwise indicated, provide minimum thickness of 15/32 of an inch. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-3 B. MARINE APA, A-A exterior thickness as indicated on the Plans. HDO (High Density Overlay) faces are acceptable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable federal specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended fasteners. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to the weather, in ground contact, or in an area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153. 2.9 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "P.T." or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Preserver's Association (AWPA) Standard U1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with waterborne preservatives to comply with AWPA Standard U 1. After treatment, kiln dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent Pressure treat items indicated on the Plans and all of the following: wood cants, nailer, curbs, top plates, equipment support bases, equipment curbs,plywood, blocking, stripping, and similar members utilized in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. All wood items including plywood used for or around roof penetrations shall be pressure treated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Discard units of material with defects that could impair the quality of the work or with units too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-4 Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of the AWC WFCM. Do not splice structural members between supports. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with the AWC NDS. Firestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at the ceiling line of the top story. Where firestops are not automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely fitted wood blocks of nominal 2—inch-thick lumber of the same width as framing members. 3.4 STUD FRAMING Provide stud framing of size and spacing indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of the following sizes and spacings. Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using 2-inch-thick members with widths equaling that of studs. Nail or anchor plates to supporting constriction. Unless noted otherwise, provide the following minimum framing: 1. For exterior walls provide 2" x 6" wood studs spaced 24-inches on center. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-5 2. For interior partitions and walls provide 2" x 4" wood studs spaced 16-inches on center. Construct comers and intersections with not less than three studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid-height of walls and partitions 8 feet high and greater, using 2-inch-thick members of same width of wall or partitions. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. For non-bearing partitions,provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inches deep for openings 3 feet or smaller in width, and not less than 6-inches deep for wider openings. For load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs for openings 6 feet or smaller in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown. Provide diagonal bracing in stud framing of exterior walls, except as otherwise indicated. Brace both walls at each external corner, full story height, at a 45-degree angle, using either a let-in 1" x 4" or 2" x 4"blocking or metal diagonal bracing. Omit bracing where plywood sheathing, siding and/or gypsum wallboard are indicated to be provided. 3.5 FLOOR AND ROOF JOIST FRAMING Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. histall with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 3 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or masonry. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal connectors; frame to wood supporting members with metal framing connectors. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 feet. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 113 depth of joist or locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking(2-inches thick by depth of joist) at ends of joists unless flush framed to supporting member. At interior supports, for end bearing of 4 inches (nominal) or less, lap members framing from opposite sides of support (beams, girders or partitions) not less than City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Statiou G&0#16627 06100-6 6 inches or securely tie opposing members together with strap tie. Provide solid blocking (2-inches thick by depth of joist) over supports. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs of partition walls and/or, provide double joists separated by solid blocking under partition walls. Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth-to-thickness ratio exceeds 4, at intervals not to exceed 8 feet max. Use bevel-cut 1" x 4" or 2" x 4" wood bracing, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists, or use solid wood bridging 2-inch thick by depth of joist, end-nailed to joist. 3.6 RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. CEILING JOISTS Provide member size and spacing shown, and as previously specified for floor joist framing. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. Where principal ceiling joists are at right angle to rafters, frame as indicated with additional short joists from wall plate to first joist at spacing equal to principal ceiling joists; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and to principal ceiling joists. B. RAFTERS Provide member size and spacing shown. Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing (if any), and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. At valleys, provide valley rafter of size shown, or if not shown, provide rafter twice as thick as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafter. At hips, provide hip rafters of size shown, or if not shown, provide of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafters. Provide collar beams (ties) as shown, or if not shown, provide 1" x 6" boards between every third pair of rafters. Locate below ridge member, 1/3 of distance to ceiling joists. Cut ends to fit slope and nail to rafters. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-7 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING A. GENERAL Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the APA "Engineered Wood Constriction Guide," for types of construction panels and applications indicated. B. FASTENING METHODS Fasten panels as indicated on the Plans. Include metal H clips between sheathing panels. C. PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS Nail to supports with minimum 10d at 6-inches on center edge nailing and 12-inches on center at intermediate framing. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06100-8 SECTION 06190 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART ] GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The extent of Prefabricated Wood Trusses work is shown on the drawings and shall include all labor and materials for the fabrication and installation of the type and configuration of prefabricated wood trusses shown on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A879 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Electrolytic Process ASTM A924 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process TPI Truss Plate Institute ANSUTPI I National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Construction WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber W WPA Western Wood Products Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS Comply with provisions of Section 01300. A. PRODUCT DATA Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling, and erection. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that trusses to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06190-1 B. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design values, location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. Provide calculations, which have been signed and stamped by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. C. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY FOR CONNECTOR PLATES Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TPI STANDARDS Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." "BCSI Bl —Guide for Handling, Installing, Restraining and Bracing Trusses." "Commentary for Permanent Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." B. WOOD STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARD Comply with applicable requirements of"National Design Specification for Wood Construction" published by American Wood Council(AWC). C. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS Trusses shall be manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." Trusses shall be designed to support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Washington. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 06190-2 Provide trusses by a manufacturer, which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similar to type, indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control: Fabricator participates in TPI "Quality Assurance hrspection Program" as a licensee authorized to apply TPI marks to trusses. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. Truss Span Tacoma Truss Systems, Inc. 2.2 LUMBER Lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference lumber grades and species include the following: NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). SPIB - Southem Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA _ Western Wood Products Association. Provide lumber to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with requirements indicated below: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 06190-3 Dressed, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inch or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. 2.3 FRAMING LUMBER Unless noted otherwise, provide Douglas Fir - Larch No. 2 or better. 2.4 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORAGES Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with the following requirements: A. HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, Grade 33; zinc coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A924, Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036 inch. B. ELECTROLYTIC ZINC-COATED STEEL SHEET Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A879 Designation 30Z, and, for structural properties, with ASTM A653, Grade 33; zinc-coated by eleetro-deposition; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.047 inch. 2.5 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES Provide size, type, material, and finish indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring devices. 2.6 FABRICATION Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#t 6627 06190-4 Assemble truss member in design configuration nidicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. Fabricated wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate Institute. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. Do not cut or remove truss members. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 06190-5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07110 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to install bitutninous dampproofing on all backfill wall surfaces, or as shown on the Plans, and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 03300 Cast-hi-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing ASTM D449 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Damproofing and Waterproofing ASTM D1187 Standard Specification for Asphalt Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings ASTM D1227 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Bituminous dampproofing shall be W.R. Meadows or equal product foundation coating. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07110-1 2.2 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS Cold asphaltic materials shall be in accordance with the following reference standards: Material Reference Standard Sealmastic Emulsion Type II ASTM D1227, Type H PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL All surface preparation, primer and finish coat applications shall be in accordance with these specifications and with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 EXAMINATION The Contractor shall verify that surfaces are durable, and free of matter detrimental to adhesion of dampproofing. The Contractor shall verify items ..,1,1..1, —r r.. .- Ate..,.,...-....+:.,.. �.,,�,�.�1- ;,,�r�n-A v..u.... t..,,...u...... ,,.......... ... ........... ...... .t,}i ..,,....e .,..., ,,.,...,...,y ., �.........,. 3.3 PREPARATION The Contractor shall protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. The Contractor shall clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. The Contractor shall maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and continuously during application until dampproofing membrane has cured. 3.4 APPLICATION The Contractor shall prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall apply two coats of dampproofing with roller at a maximum coverage rate of 40 square feet per gallon. Dampproofing shall be applied on all foundation walls from 2 inches below finish grade elevation to the outside top edge of footings. The Contractor shall seal items projecting through dampproofed surfaces with mastic. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07110-2 SECTION 07210 BATT AND RIGID INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to install batt and rigid insulation, as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 06190 Prefabricated Wood Trusses 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following document: Reference Title ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal insulation ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thenual Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing ASTM C1289 Standard Specification for Faced Rigid, Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board ASTM C 13 20 Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal and vapor and air barriers at building enclosure elements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G RO#16627 0721 O-1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Owens Corning, Johns Manville, CertainTeed, DOW, or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. BATT INSULATION Type III preformed, foil-faced, glass fiber batt or roll confonning to ASTM C665, to the thicknesses needed to meet the R-values shown on the Plans and as required by code. B. RIGID BELOW-GRADE INSULATION Type IV rigid, closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation conforming to ASTM C578, to the thicknesses needed to meet the R- values shown on the Plans and as required by code. C. VAPOR BARRIER Polyamide (nylon) vapor retarding, 2 mil, sheeting with a variable permeanee ranging from 1 perm, or less, up to 10 perms, or greater, based on varying levels of ambient humidity; MemBrain Continuous Air Barrier & Smart Vapor Retarder by Certainteed, or equal. D. TAPE Pressure sensitive, aluminum foil tape; Specialty Tape #425 by 3M, or equal. E. INSULATION FASTENERS Galvanized steel impale spindles and clips on 2-inch square flat bases with self adhering backing and length to suit insulation thickness. Include galvanized steel retaining washer(s) of not less than 1-1/2-inches in diameter capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place; by Gemco, or equal. F. BUILDING WRAP Mechanically attached water-resistive, vapor permeable air barrier membrane system including primary sheet membrane, self-adhered City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07210-2 flashing tape, and flashing primer(as needed). Entire system shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Tyvek CommercialWrap by DuPont, WrapShield 1T by VaproShield, or equal. G. INSULATION BAFFLES Rigid polystyrene or PVC insulation baffles;Raft-R-Mate by Owens- Corning, AccuVent by Brentwood, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify site conditions before beginning installation. Verify that substrate and adiacent materials are ready to receive insulation, and free of all projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 GENERAL Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated with vapor barriers placed to face the interim (warm) side of the envelope. Fill all voids with insulation, fit tightly around all obstructions and tight to the exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-values. All miscellaneous voids shall have insulation installed to prevent gaps in insulation using either fiberglass batt compacted to approximately 75 percent of normal maximum volume, or spray polyurethane foam applied according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Prior to installation of finished surfaces, all vapor-retarder joints and ruptures shall be taped and sealed in each continuous area of insulation to ensure an airtight installation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GAO 416627 07210-3 3.3 INSTALLATION BELOW GRADE On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger all joints and butt all panels together for tight fit. 3.4 INSTALLATION 1N FRAMED CONSTRUCTION Install blanket insulation in all cavities formed by framing members. Use insulation widths and lengths that fully fill the cavities. If more than one length is required to fill cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members, and lap all ends and side flanges of facings over framing members. Prior to installation of attic insulation, install eave insulation baffles between roof h, ,- ..,, rl,P .,„A1 ,,JA. . f r.,. f Aa.rl,:,,,,;,, ;, 1 fo 1 vented eaves. For metal-framed wall cavities, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. For unfaced blankets, located vapor barrier joints over member faces and extend vapor barrier tight to the full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames, as well as other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Fully tape seal in place. Provide airspace at exterior plane of insulation for ventilation as recommended by manufacturer. For wood-framed wall cavities, install blankets according to ASTM C1320 and as specified herein. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once. finish material is installed over it. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07210-4 i SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing and installing of all metal roofing, siding, metal fascia, gutters, downspouts, and accessories as indicated on the Plans and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and as specified herein. A. PRODUCT DATA Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for Metal Roof and Wall Panels used. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. SAMPLES Prior to ordering products, submit manufacturer's standard color samples for Owner's selection. C. SHOP DRAWINGS Show panel layout, trim installation, and panel attachment. Include gutters and downspouts. D. WARRANTY 1. Manufacturer's Product Warranty Manufacturer's standard coating performance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental conditions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07410-1 2. Contractor's Warranty Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners, and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for 2 years following project substantial completion date. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of 5-years documented experience in metal panel projects of this nature. B. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10-years experience supplying metal roofing/siding to the region where the work is to be done. C. REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS Comply with IBC and local Building Code requirements if more stringent than those specified. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect panels against damage and discoloration. Handle panels with non-marring slings and do not bend panels. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage, Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. If panels become wet, numediately separate sheets, wipe dry and allow to air dry. Remove any strippable film prior to installation and do not allow too remain on panels in extreme cold, heat or in direct sunlight. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURER AEP SPAN, The Bryer Company, Metal Sales, or approved equal. Panel Designations: Roof: Interlocking standing seam with net coverage of 16 inches and panel surface striations. Klip-Rib, by AEP Span, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07410-2 Gables: Interlocking, hidden fastener horizontal panel with a net coverage of 12 inches and 10 inch/2 inch panel reveals. Flex Series by AEP Span, or equal. Soffits: Interlocking, hidden fastener, perforated flush panel with net coverage of 12 inches. Flush Panel by AEP Span, or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. PANELS 1. Base Metal Steel conforming to ASTM A924/ASTM A792 Grade 40 or ASTM A446 Grade C, thickness 22 gauge. 2. Coatings Protective coatings conform to ASTM A525 G90 or ASTM A924/ASTM A792, AZ50. 3. Finish Exterior finish includes a 0.2 mil thick corrosion-resistant primer and a 0.8 mil thick finish coat of Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVF2), full 70 percent Kynar 500®/Hylar 50009 for a total 1.0 mil dry film thickness. 4. Color Manufacturer's standard selection of not less than 12 colors. B. ACCESSORIES 1. Fasteners Per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Sealant a. Gumiable Grade Caulking: Single component Urethane Caulk. b. Tape Sealant: Butyl. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07410-3 3. Profile Closures Neoprene or polyethylene foam, die-cut or formed to panel configuration. 4. Flashing Material, gauge, and finish to match panels. Do not use lead or copper. 5. Underlayment Self-adhered ice and water shield meeting ASTM D1970. C. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Provide gutters and downspouts of same material as roof panels. Gutters are to be continuous and seamless. Downspouts are to be rectangular. D. FABRICATION Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous one-piece lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. Roofing panels shall be factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptable. 2.3 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT Gutters and downspouts shall be formed from flat sheets. Downspouts anchorage shall conform with SMACNA requirements. Fasteners shall be same material and finish as panel, with soft neoprene washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Contractor shall inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue. Verify that installation can be performed in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07410-4 3.2 PREPARATION A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify prior to installation. If field measurements differ from Plan dimensions, notify Engineer prior to fabrication. B. PROTECTION Treat, or isolate with protective material, any contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic corrosion, comply with Section 09900. Require workmen who will be walking on roofing panels to wear clean, soft-soled shoes that will not pick up stones or other abrasive material, which could cause damage and discoloration. C. SURFACE PREPARATION Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying sealant. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. PANELS L Follow metal panel manufacturer's directions and printed instructions. 2. Install roof panel seams vertically. 3. Install wall panel seams: horizontally. 4. Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction. 5. Do not stretch or compress panel side-lap interlocks. 6. Secure panels without warp or deflection. B. ALLOWABLE ERECTION TOLERANCE Maximum Alignment Variation: 1/4 inch in 40 feet. C. FLASHING 1 Follow manufacturer's directions and Engineer-approved shop drawings. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#16627 07410-5 2. Overlap roof panels at least 6 inches. 3. install flashings to allow for thermal movement. 4. Remove any strippable protective film, if used, immediately preceding flashing installation. D. CUTTING AND FITTING 1. Provide neat, square and true. Torch cutting is prohibited where cut is exposed to final view. 2. Openings 6 inches and larger in any direction: Shop fabricate and reinforce to mairitain original load capacity. 3. Where necessary to saw cut panels, debut and treat with galvanic paint coating to match factory color. 3.4 CLEANUP AND CLOSEOUT A. PANEL DAMAGE AND FINISH SCRATCHES Do not apply touch-up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor scratches. Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate damage shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. B. CLEANING AND REPAIRING At completion of each day's work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashing and gutters clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings, or scraps to accumulate. Remove debris from project site upon work completion, or sooner, if directed by the Owner. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07410-6 SECTION 07900 CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to install caulking and sealants, as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. All exterior wall joints and interior and exterior joints between all differing or dissimilar materials and at windows, doors, roof penetrations, louvers and similar types of openings shall receive sealants to make the joint air and watertight. This includes concrete to CMU, concrete to wood, CMU to wood, concrete to sheet metal, CMU to sheet metal, etc. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 04200 Masonry 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title AAMA 800 Sealant Manual, Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Joint Sealants ASTM C1311 Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07900-1 ASTM D5249 Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints ASTM D7174 Standard Specification for Preformed Closed-Cell Polyolefin Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects PART PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYURETHANESEALANTS Provide a one-component, gunnable grade, non-sag, solvent-free polyurethane sealant. The sealant shall cure under the influence of atmospheric moisture. Sealant shall meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, under uses NT, T, M, G, I, A, and O. Performance characteristics shall include a 175 psi 21-day tensile strength, a minimum 500-percent ultimate elongation, and a maximum Q 110re "A" "arA.,oil, 047 A 4z Polyurethane sealants shall be Sikaflex-la, as manufactured by the Sika Corporation, or equal by Tremco, Inc. or BASF Corporation. 2.2 SILICONE SEALANTS Provide a one-component, grantable grade, neutral cure, silicone sealant. Sealant shall meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, under uses NT, M, G, A and O. Performance characteristics shall include a 200 psi 21-day tensile strength, a minimum 700-percent ultimate elongation, and a maximum Shore "A" Hardness of 25. Silicone sealants shall he Sikasil WS-295, as tnanufacfired by the Sika Corporation, or equal by Tremco, Inc. or BASF Corporation. 2.3 ACRYLIC LATEX CAULK Provide a one-component, gunnable grade, pure acrylic latex sealant. Sealant shall meet ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18 'C. Performance characteristics shall include a maximurn 25-percent shrinkage, and a movement capability of plus/minus 12.5-percent. Acrylic latex sealants shall be Tremflex 834, as manufactured by the Tremco, Inc, or equal by BASF Corporation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07900-2 2.4 TAPE SEALANT Provide a 100-percent solid, isobutylene preformed sealant tape. Tape sealant shall meet the American Architectural Manufacturer's Association AAMA 807.3 standard. Performance characteristics shall include a density of L5 and a minimum peel adhesion of 8 pounds per inch. Tape sealant shall be Sikalastomer-95, as manufactured by the Sika Corporation, or equal by Tremco, Inc. or BASF Corporation. 2.5 PREFORMED FLEXIBLE JOINT MATERIAL Provide a closed-cell, polyolefin preformed foam joint material. Foam joint material shall meet ASTM D7174. Performance characteristics shall include an expansion recovery greater than 99-percent, a maximum 50-percent compression strength of 15 psi, and a maximum water absorption of 0.25-percent by volume. Foam joint material shall be Ceramar, as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or equal. 2.6 PREFORMED FLEXIBLE JOINT BACKER MATERIAL Provide a closed-cell, polyolefin preformed foam backer rod material. Backer rod material shall meet ASTM D5249 and shall be compatible with the proposed cold-applied sealant. Backer rod material shall be Kool-Rod, as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or equal. 2.7 PRIMERS Provide primer materials made by or recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the conditions of the application, including the materials to be sealed at the joints and the type of sealant or caulking material to be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL All sealant and primer work shall comply with ASTM C1193 and with the manufacturer's written instructions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 07900-3 The Contractor shall confirm that the proposed sealant and primer materials are compatible with any concrete curing compound used, or the Contractor shall lightly sandblast and thoroughly clean concrete joint surfaces prior to application of sealant materials. All priming and sealant work shall be done under temperature and moisture conditions that are within the requirements of the manufacturer's written instructions. All exterior dissimilar materials shall be sealed with elastomeric sealants at the joints between the different materials. 3.2 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. PREPARATION OF JOINTS Inspect profiles and surfaces of all joints prior to application. Verify joint dimensions are adequate for development of the sealant movement capability. All joints shall be solvent cleaned, dry, and free of dust, oils shall be wire brushed, free of laitance or other residues. Aluminum or other metal surfaces to be in contact with sealants shall be wiped clean with xylol or an MEK solvent to remove any coatings or contamination. Joint sealants shall be installed before other surface Finishes are applied. Proceed with joint sealant work only once conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements. B. BACKINGS Install filler and backer materials in as long of lengths as practicable. Stretch and force into joints with tool designed for that purpose, to a uniform depth, as indicated on the Plans or as required by the manufacturer, allowing for installation of sealant and caulking,. Provide filler material in slab shapes for joints 1/2 inch or more in depth, and in 3/4 inch or more wide joints to receive sealing material. Provide extruded rod backer material in all other joints to receive sealant. Filler or backer material shall be of a depth as required to bring the top surface to within 1/2 inch of the slab surface, or as indicated on the Plans. All joints shall include a suitable bond breaker between backing materials and sealant. C. MASKING Both sides of joints shall be masked with tape to prevent soiling floor, slab, or wall beyond limits of the joint. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07900-4 D. PRIMING Apply primer to all surfaces of joints in contact with sealant materials. Apply full strength and undiluted in a uniform coating of surface. Allow to set or cure prior to proceeding. Do not prime surfaces at back of joint. E. APPLICATION Sealant shall be gun applied, giving the joint a full bead of sealant. Skin beads are not acceptable. Tool the bead immediately after application to ensure a fine and full contact with the inner faces of the joint. Joints in sills and other wash surfaces shall be filled slightly convex to obtain a flush joint when dry. Entire perimeter,of openings in concrete surfaces shall be sealed. Do not apply sealants to wet or damp surfaces nor in temperatures below 50 degrees F, and as required by the manufacturer. Strike off excess sealant with tooling stick or a knife so that finished bead is slightly below surface. Remove excess sealant as work progresses. Sealants in masonry wall joints are to be a maximum of 1/2-inch deep and not less than 1/4 inch in each dimension. When applying sealant, do not permit thickness of sealant to exceed 1/2 of the width of the joint.Any joints over 1/2-inch wide shall be reported to the Owner and instructions for correcting the applications will be given. 3.3 CLEANUP Upon completion, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of masking materials. Remove any excess materials and clean adjacent surfaces free from any soiling or staining resulting from the sealing and caulking operations. *** END OF SECTION *** Ct(y of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 07900-5 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section covers furnishing and installing hollow metal doors, frames, and glazing as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 04200 Masonry 07900 Caulking and Sealants 08700 Finish Hardware 09900 Painting 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ANSUSDI A250.8 Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSUSDI A25011 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-iron Alloy-Coated (Galvarmealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass ASTM E2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation HMMA 840 Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Hollow metal doors and frames shall conform to applicable requirements of ANSUSDI A250.8. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 081 10-1 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. hidicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, and finish. Indicate door elevations and internal reinforcement. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable Building Codes for frame and door requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The hollow metal doors and frames shall be as manufactured by Carries, Ceco, Republic, Steelcraft, or any other SDI member. 2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES Location Classification Exterior Doors and Frames ANSFSDI A250.8 Level 3, Model 2 Interior Doors and Frames ANSFSDI A250.8 Level 3, Model 2 Provide door and frame types and sizes as shown on the Plans. 2.3 DOOR CORE CONSTRUCTION Insulated doors shall contain a polyurethane core. Minimum U-value shall be as shown on the Plans. Non-insulated doors shall contain a honeycomb core, 2.4 ACCESSORIES Glazing stops shall be rolled steel channel shape with mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamperproof screw. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08110-2 2.5 FABRICATION Provide fully welded frames for all new construction. Provide fabricated frames of knock down field assembly type for retrofit applications or for existing door openings. Mullions for double doors shall be removable type. Provide metal T shaped astragals for double doors. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. Prepare frames of interior doors for silencers. Provide three rubber silencer locations for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side, and two silencer locations on frame head at double doors without mullions. Close top edge of exterior doors flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal weld and grind smooth all door joints watertight. Caulking or filling with body filler of door seams is not acceptable. 2.6 FINISH Both interior and exterior doors and frames shall be made from galvannealed zinc coated steel per ASTM A653, A60 material with a minimum application rate of 0.60 oz/ft2. Finish painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900 of these Specifications. The inside of the metal frame profile shall be coated with the dissimilar metals system per Section 09900 of these Specifications. 2.7 GLAZING Doors with glass retires shall be furnished with formed steel glazing strip frame with attachment screws allowed only on the non-secure side. Glazing for insulated doors shall consist of insulated glass units preassembled with two 1/4- inch thick glass panels separated by a 1/2-inch nominal dehydrated interspace. Insulated glass panels shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM E2190. Glazing for non-insulated doors shall be nominally 1/4-inch thick. All glazing shall be fully-tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048 and shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z97.1. City of Kcnt 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08110-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Frames shall be installed plumb, level and rigid in accordance with AN A250.11 and with HMMA 840. Doors shall be installed in accordance with HMMA 840. Coordinate with wall construction for proper anchor placement and with installation of glazing. All door frames installed in masonry construction shall be completely filled with the masonry mortar utilized to install the masonry units or be fully grouted with non-shrink grout after installation of the frame. Install door hardware per Section 08700 of these Specifications. Contractor shall protect doors and frames as necessary during construction of the Proj ect. 3.2 CLEARANCES Clearance between the door and frame head and jambs shall be 1/8 of an inch. Clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 3/16 of an inch plus or minus 1/16. Maximum diagonal distortion shall be 1/8 of an inch, measured with straight edge, from corner to corner. Clearance between the face of door and the door frame stops shall be 1/16 to 1/8 on an inch. 3.3 ADJUSTING DOORS Adjust doors and hardware for smooth and balanced door movement. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 08110-4 SECTION 08310 METAL ACCESS HATCHES PART ] GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of the Contractor furnishing and installing aluminum access hatches and accessories as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 02530 Utility Structures 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Access hatches shall be guaranteed against defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of 10 years by the manufacturer. 1.4 EQUIPMENT LIST The metal access hatches to be installed are as follows: Location Clear 0penina Check Valve Vault 481, x, 80°" PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Metal access hatches shall be as manufactured by Halliday Products, Inc., Bilco, L. W. Hatch, or equal. 2.2 ACCESS HATCH Access hatches shall be Halliday W2S series (double leaf), or equal. The hatches shall have a 1/4-inch-thick one-piece mill finish, extruded aluminum channel frame, incorporating a continuous concrete anchor. A 1-1/2-inch drainage coupling shall be located in the front left corner of the channel frame, unless shown otherwise on the Plans. A bituminous coating shall be applied to the frame exterior where it comes in contact with concrete. The door panels shall be 1/4-inch aluminum diamond plate reinforced to withstand a live load of 300 psf. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 08310-1 The doors shall open to 90 degrees and automatically lock with a stainless steel hold-open arm shall incorporate an enclosed stainless steel compression spring assist. The doors shall close flush with the frame and rest on a built-in neoprene cushion/gasket. Hinges and all fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. The unit shall have a hasp assembly that shall accommodate a City-provided padlock. The unit shall be guaranteed against defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of 10 years. PART 3 EXECUTION Units shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The units shall be connected with drain piping as shown on the Plans, and shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations for safe and proper storage. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 08310-2 SECTION 08625 SKYLIGHT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish and install skylight tubular daylighting devices and frames; as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The Contractor shall also install all accessories for proper flashing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 07900 Caulking and Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES This section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E547 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference WDMA IS2 North American Fenestration Standard Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ftz aperture with a pressure differential of 1.57 psf and water penetration shall resist a pressure differential of 10.7 psf. The units shall be able to withstand dead loads and live loads and the pressure and suction of wind acting vertically with no breakage or permanent damage, to a design pressure of 150 psf and a design suction of 70 psf. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 08625-1 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS The manufacturer shall specialize in the products specified in this Section and shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. A. PRODUCT DATA Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for skylight. Include specific data prepared for this project B. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, connection details, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. C. CERTIFICATES Submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that each product meets or exceeds specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Tubular daylighting devices shall be transparent, roof-mouted skylight domes with reflective tubes and ceiling diffuser assemblies. Tubular daylighting devices shall be the Model 330 DS Series by Solatube hrternational, Inc., or equal. 2.2 ROOF DOME Skylight roof domes shall be manufactured of UV inhibiting, impact resistant, injection molded acrylic, sealed to a base section with a thermal break tube ring. Domes shall include stainless steel security bars and exterior security fasteners. Mounting shall be by a two-piece, aluminum metal roof flashing assembly sized for the metal roof rib profile provided on the project. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 0862E-2 Reflective tubes shall be constructed from 0.018-inch aluminum. Ceiling diffuser shall be manufactured from acrylic plastic and be designed to mount to a pitched ceiling. 2.3 ACCESSORIES Aluminum extension tubes shall have reflective interiors and shall include the necessary top and bottom connectors and angular transition pieces as required. Interior diffuser assemblies shall be suitable for closed ceilings and shall include the necessary round to square metal transition box along with a prismatic diffuser lens. All anchoring and fasteners shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 FABRICATION The plastic unit skylights shall be free of visual distortion and defects and shall be fabricated to provide a weather tight assembly. Bituminous paint shall be applied to all aluminum surfaces of the units in contact with dissimilar metals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION The Contractor shall coordinate the dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachments of this work with all other adjacent work. The Contractor shall also verify that the openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive the work specified in this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION The Contractor shall install all units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate the installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element performs properly as a system and that finished installation is weather tight. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08625-3 Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separations as recommended by manufacturer. Align and install skylights to be free of warp or twist, and to maintain dimensional tolerances. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting and correct any noted deficiencies. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08625-4 SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section specifies that the Contractor shall provide complete finish hardware and suitable fastenings for the project. Quantities listed in any instance are for supplier convenience only and are not guaranteed. Finish hardware includes items known commercially as "builders' hardware" required, for swinging doors. Hardware specified in the same section as the door and/or doorframe will be furnished by the supplier of that Section. All hardware furnished in this Section shall comply with the requirements of all applicable codes. All items specified in this Section shall be furnished by a factory-authorized distributor maintaining parts, stocks, and services for standard specified items. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title UL Building Materials List PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S Finish hardware shall be as manufactured by the suppliers listed in the following sections and in the Hardware Groups. 2.2 BUTTS Butts shall be 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (minimum 1.4 lbs. each) for doors Y-0" and under wide, and 5" x 4-1/2" (minimum 1.67 lbs. each) for doors over Y-0" wide, except City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08700-1 as required for 180-degree swing and shall be of the type listed. Doors up to and including 90 inches in height shall have 1-1/2 pair and doors over 90 inches in height shall have two pair. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size, and quantity recommended by the butt manufacturer. All exterior-outswinging doors shall have non-removable pins. Concealed bearing hinges shall have bearing designs that eliminate metal-to-metal contact between knuckles and between the pin and barrel. Butts shall be as manufactured by Stanley, or equal. 2.3 LOCKSETS Locksets shall be Grade I mortise locksets with 2-3/4-inch backsets and 3/4-inch antifriction latch bolts, as manufactured by Corbin Russwin, or equal. All locksets and latchsets shall be the product of one manufacturer. All locksets and latchsets shall be heavy-duty mortise type UL approved. Functions as indicated in the hardware groups. Deadbolt functions shall be l-inch projection. Locksets and latchsets shall be furnished with sufficient curved strike lips to protect trim. (note: 3/4-inch latch bolts require 3/4-inch minimum clearance for trim, otherwise extended lip strikes must be furnished). All locks shall have wrought box strikes. 2.4 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS Manual flush bolts shall be as manufactured by Rockwood, or equal. 2.5 DOOR CLOSERS Door closers shall be ANSI Al56.4, Grade 1, as manufactured by Corbin Russwin, or equal. Drop plates shall be furnished where required. Hex nuts and bolts shall be furnished for all doors. Closers shall have a 10-year guarantee. 2.6 STOPS All interior doors are to have a wall or floor stop unless otherwise specified. Where wall stops are specified but cannot be used, substitute a floor stop. If wall stop or floor stop cannot be used, advise the Owner of the specific door during submittal process. Provide proper height floor stops to suit conditions. Contractor to provide solid backing for all wall mounted stops. Stops shall be as manufactured by Trimco, or equal. 2.7 GASKETS AND THRESHOLDS Gaskets and thresholds shall be as manufactured by Pemko, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08700-2 2.8 KEYING All cylinder items shall be furnished with visual key control with key code stamped on the face of the keys and marked on the back or side of the cylinders. All standard cylinder items shall be furnished with construction-keyed cylinders. The Contractor shall provide final keying for all locksets and shall coordinate the keying with the Owner to match their current keying protocols. 2.9 KEY QUANTITIES Keys shall be furnished in the following quantities: Type Quantity MKs 6 each Construction Keys 6 each Change keys per keyed cylinder 2 each Control keys 2 each 2.10 HARDWARE GROUPS A. MANUFACTURER'S LIST Manufacturer Abbreviation Stanley ST Corbin Russwin CO Pemko PE Rockwood RW Trimco TR B. Refer to door schedule and related information concerning the following hardware groups: HWl (exterior insulated single door) Butts CB199, 32D ST 1 ea. Lockset ML2051 LWA, 630 CO 1 ea. 7-Pin IC Cylinder 1080-112-AO2, 630 CO 1 ea. Door Closer 8210, A 12, M71, M73, M75, 630 CO 1 ea. Threshold 1715 AK PE 1 ea. Door Bottom 210 DPK PE 1 set Gaskets 2891, 290 DPK PE City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08700-3 HW2 (exterior insulated double door) Butts CB199, 32D ST 1 ea. Lockset ML2051 LWA, 630 CO 1 ea. 7-Pin IC Cylinder 1080-112-AO2, 630 CO 1 ea, Door Closer 8210, Al2, M71, M73, M75, 630 CO 2 ea. Flush Bolts 557 RW 1 ea. Dustproof Strike 570 RW 1 ea. Astragal 355 DPK PE 1 ea. Threshold 1715 AK PE 2 ea. Door Bottom 210 DPK PE 1 set Gaskets 2891, 290 DPK PE HW3 (interior insulated double door) Butts CB199, 32D ST 1 ea. Latchset ML2010 LWA, 630 CO 1 ea. Door Closer 8210, Al2, M71, M73, M75, 630 CO 2 ea. Flush Bolts 557 RW 1 ea. Dustproof Strike 570 RW t ea. Astragai 355 DPK PE 1 ea. Threshold 1715 AK PE l ea. Door Bottom 210 DPK PE 1 set Gaskets 2891, 290 DPK PE HW4 (exterior insulated over-sized double door) Butts CB199, 32D ST 1 ea. Lockset ML2051 LWA, 630 CO 1 ea. 7-Pin 1C Cylinder 1080-112-AO2, 630 CO 2 ea. 12" Surface Bolts 585-12, 626 RW w/Mortise Bottom Strike 1 ea. 12" Surface Bolt 585-12, 626 RW w/ITniversal Strike 1 ea. Security Astragal 3572, S.S. PE w/ Gasket 1 ea. Threshold 1715 AK PE 2 ea. Door Bottom 210 DPK PE 1 set Gaskets 2891, 290 DPK PE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Refer to A.S.A.H.C., B.H.M.A., and S.D.I. for mounting heights. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#t 6627 08700-4 i Unless a conflict arises, the following are standard mounting heights on some products. If a question or conflict should arise, the hardware supplier, if requested, shall assist the Contractor and Owner in determining mounting heights. All measurements are from finish floor except top butt. A. BUTTS Top 11-3/4-inch center of butt to top of door. Intermediate equal distance between top and bottom butts. Bottom 13-inch center of butt. B. LATCHES 40-5/16 inch to center of strike C. DEADLOCKS 60 inch to center of strike. D. EXIT DEVICES 40-5/16 inch to center of strike E. DOOR CLOSERS As per manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 ADJUSTING Hardware shall be adjusted for correct operation. After installation of hardware and before the building is accepted, Contractor shall inspect the installation and certify that the hardware is correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Hardware installer shall make any necessary adjustments. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 08700-5 DIVISION 9 FINISHES i SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART ] GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specifiedui this Section consists of all labor, materials, and equipment for all gypsum wallboard, zinc-coated trim, taping, spackling, and texturing necessary to complete all the work indicated on the Plans and as specified. The work shall include installation of gypsum board, exterior and interior grounds, corner beads, taping, spackling, sanding, and texturing of all joints and nail or screw heads to obtaiin finished walls ready for painting. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 06100 Rough Carpentry 09900 Painting 1.3 REFERENCES This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents: Reference Title ASTM C36 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C79 Test Method for Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C514 Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C630 Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C840 Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C1002 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 1047 Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE All gypsum wallboard products and joint treatment products shall be obtained from a single manufacturer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16621 09250-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Gypsum wallboard products and joint treatment products shall be as manufactured by National Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific, USG Corp., or approved equal. 2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Gypsum wallboard shall be moisture and abuse resistant, conforming to ASTM C1629. Thickness shall be 5/8-inch. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim-beads, U-type edge trim-beads, and one-piece control joint beads. Unless specifically noted as compound. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS Provide materials complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C840 and recotnmendations from the Manufacturer for the applications indicated. Provide 2- 1/2-Niches wide, perforated tape for joints. Provide two separate grades of ready- mixed, vinyl-type joint compound. One type shall be for bedding tapes and tilling depressions. The second type shall be for taping and sanding. 2.5 FASTENERS Screws shall conform to ASTM C1002 with beads, threads, points, and finish as recommended by the manufacturer. Nails shall conform to ASTM C514 with heads, threads, configurations, and finish as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL All workmanship and materials shall be of the best quality and any defective work shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. Keep the premises free of accumulations of debris and dust connected with this work and protect adjacent finished surfaces from damage by this work. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09250-2 The Contractor shall establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C840. For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum wallboard to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F. 3.2 INSTALLATION All drywall sheets shall be set with staggered joints and screws and/or nails set deep enough to receive a cover of spackle, spaced in accordance with Wallboard Manufacturer's standard specifications. Install approved zinc-coated corner molds at openings and terminations of wallboards. Cut all wallboard close to and around wall penetrations and electrical outlets. Provide a complete, covered installation in all areas where gypsum wallboard is to be installed. 3.3 FINISHING After the wallboard has been installed, it shall be finished. Apply joint compound or bedding compound and embed tape leaving uniform thickness of materials underneath tape. Cover nail or screw heads smooth with finished surface of board after each application of joint material. After initial application has been complete, it shall be allowed to dry and then sanded smooth. Additional coats of joint compound shall be applied and finish sanded until a finish comparable to the paper surface of the gypsum board has been achieved. All wallboard not covered by other finishes shall be lightly textured (orange peel or similar) and left in condition to receive paint. Obtain Owner's approval prior to applying paint. 3.4 ESCUTCHEONS Provide escutcheons around all pipe, conduit, and similar types of penetrations through gypsum wallboard walls and ceiling. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09250-3 SECTION 09300 TILE WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section applies to all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete all the tile work indicated on the Plans and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 04210 Architectural Face Brick 1.3 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS !`..., 0 Eli, F.,l l,.... .,.. ..t... .1....1 ..:F.....t;...,� N,a R.,.. .,00.- ,,.7..0.. applicable, and as supplemented and modified herein. A. TILE "Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile,"issued by the American National Standards Institute, and hereinafter called ANSI Al37.1. B. CERAMIC TILE, INSTALLATION METHOD "Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar," and hereinafter called ANSI A118.4. C. MORTAR "Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar for Installation of Ceramic Tile," and hereinafter called ANSI Al18.3. D. INSTALLATION Tile Council of America, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09300-1 1.4 SAMPLES Submit sample panel of color and type of tile proposed, at least four tiles per sample; type of trim shape and accessory proposed, and type of grout proposed. Obtain approval of panel before proceeding with the Work. 1.5 HANDLING AND STORAGE Storage and handling shall be in accordance with ANSI A108.3, Paragraph 2.(o), A108.4, Paragraph 2.(m), and A108.5, Paragraph 2.(m). Do not open containers or remove labels or seals until the Engineer inspects and approves; store in a dry place and protect from damage until installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide Standard Grade complying with the requirements of ANSI A137.1, with no "seconds" allowed, except as maybe supplemented or modified herein: packaged in grade-sealed containers, in accordance with the Standard Specifications. Furnish Tile Council of America"Master Grade Certificate" stating grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile containers, name, and location of the Project, and bearing the signature of the Manufacturer issued when shipment was made. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Tile products shall be the Sierra Series as manufactured by Daltile, or approved equal. 2.2 WALL TILE Provide glazed ceramic tile. Size: square, 12 inch x 12 inch, nominal. Thickness: 5/16 inch, with eased edges. Color to be selected from Manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 SPECIAL TILE SHAPES Provide cut tile, cove, bull nose, trim or special shapes to match adjacent tiles, as required, to suit job conditions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09300-2 2.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS Provide glass mesh reinforced Portland cement backer board, per ANSI At 18.9; 1/2-inch thickness. 2.5 GROUT Provide per ANSI A118.3, epoxy grout suitable for exterior use. Use pigments provided by Manufacturer to color the grout. 2.6 MORTAR BED Provide one part Portland cement; 1/2 part lime; and five parts damp sand up to one part Portland cement; one part lime and seven parts damp sand, by volume. 2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT Provide per ASTM C150, Type 1. 2.& IF 11X4V Provide per ASTM C206, Type S, or ASTM C207, Type S. 2.9 SAND Provide per ASTM C144. 2.10 WATER Provide potable water. 2.11 GROUT SEALER Provide silicone or acrylic grout sealer as recommended by the tile manufacturer. 2.12 OTHER MATERIALS Provide other materials, as required, in accordance with the Standard Specifications. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09300-3 i PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL All workmanship, cutting, fitting, mixing, installation, and protection shall be in accordance with ANSI A108.4 and A108.10. Extend tile work into recessed areas, for a complete and waterproof installation. Joints shall align. Inspect the substrate prior to installation. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of irregularities or substances, which may affect the performance of the tile. Any fillers or underlayment materials shall be compatible with mortar. Provide properly prepared and primed surfaces. Variations shall not vary more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet at floors and 1/8 inch in 8 feet at walls. 3.2 CEMENTITIOUS BACKING UNITS At wall conditions, screw to studs, with 1-1/4-inch wood screws at 8-inches on center in both directions, between 3/8-inch and 5/8-inch from ends and edges. Pit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Pre-cut boards to required size and make necessary cut-outs. Prefill joints with tile setting mortar and then immediately embed tape and level joints. 3.3 CLEANINGTILE Clean all tile surfaces in accordance with ANSI A108.4 and as specified in the Installation Paragraphs. 3.4 SEALING GROUT Apply grout sealer at all grout joints as recommended by the tile manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION Leave finished installation free of cracked, chipped,broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. Protect all floor tile installation with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during the Construction Period, to prevent staining or damage. No foot or wheel traffic shall be permitted on the floor for at least 7days after grouting. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09300-4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section covers the furnishing and installation of protective coatings, complete-in-place. Special shop coatings and/or factory- applied finishes on manufactured or fabricated items may be specified elsewhere. Regardless of the number of paint coats previously applied, at least two field coats of paint shall be applied to all surfaces unless otherwise specified herein. Field painting is not required for factory prefinished equipment items such as pumps, blowers, motors, etc. Touchup of the factory applied coatings may be required. The word"paint" as used herein shall be taken to include all protective coatings and incidental materials as required with the exception that anodized aluminum or zinc galvanized coatings shall not be considered as paint. Unless specifically noted otherwise in these Specifications or on the Plans, all work performed under this Contract(both new work and modifications to existing facilities) shall be painted. if an existing wall or ceiling (or similar surface) is modified in someway, the entire wall or ceiling surface is to be painted. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 03300 Concrete 04200 Masonry 08100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Division 5 Metals Division 11 Equipment Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS The following standards are referenced and shall be considered a part of these Specifications: American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A159.1, Surface Preparation Specifications; Z53.1, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-1 I American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 101, Life Safety Code Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SP-1, Solvent Cleaning SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning SP-5, White Metal Blast Clearing SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning SP-10,Near-White Blast Cleaning SP-11, Power Tool Cleaning SP-13 Surface Preparation for Concrete Surfaces VIS-89, Visual Standard 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. PAINT Includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, alkyds, latex, enamels, thinners, stains, epoxies, vinyls, urethanes, shellacs, varnishes and any other applied coating specified within these Specifications or shown on the Plans. B. FINISHED ROOM OR SPACE One that has a finish called for on Room Finish Schedule, or is indicated on the Plans, or is specified herein, to be painted. C. PAINTING COVERAGE RATE Coverage's expressed in SF/GAL/coat are the manufacturer's published theoretical coverage's in square feet per gallon per coat. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS In addition to the general submittal requirements listed in Section 01300, the following shall be submitted: 1. Written acknowledgment and certification that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced in this Section. 2. Manufacturer's application instructions for primer and finish coats. 3. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. 4. Manufacturer's full line of color samples for color selection by Owner. 5. If products being used are manufactured by a company other than the specified reference standard, the Contractor must provide a complete comparison of the proposed products with the specified rerefence products per Part 2.1 requirments, including application procedure, coverage rates, and verification that product is designed for intended use. Information must be provided that demonstrates that manufacturer's products are equal to the performance standards of products manufactured by the Tnemec Company, which is the reference standard. 6. Manufacturer's approval of protective coating systems applicator. 7. List of Applicator's experience and qualifications. A minimum of 5-years of experience in the painting of wastewater treatment plant facilities required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The following is an approved coating systems manufacturers list subject to compliance with the Specifications contained herein: l. Ameron Protective Coatings Division. 2. Sherwin Williams. 3. Tnemec Company. 4. Or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-3 The specified coating shall be understood as establishing the type and quality of coating desired. Other manufacturers' products will be accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Engineer to determine that the coatings proposed are equivalent to those named. Proposed coatings shall be submitted for review in accordance with these Specifications. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted from anyone except the Contractor, and such requests shall not be considered until after the Contract has been awarded. No substitutions shall be allowed that change the number of coats, thickness or generic type of paint required. All materials shall be brought to the jobsite in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. No coating materials other than those specified shall be brought to the jobsite. Thinners, driers and oils brought to the jobsite shall be only those recommended and approved by the paint manufacturer. All paint shall conform to the applicable air quality regulations at the point of application. Any paint material which cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturer to comply, whether specified by product designation or not, shall not be used. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the compatibility of the field painting products which will be in contact with each other or which will be applied over shop painted or previously painted surfaces. Paint used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to the underlying paint. Tnemec Company products are the reference standard and Tnemec designations for product type are used herein. Requirements for an approved equal product are listed below: 1. For approval of an equal manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner in writing a detailed side-by-side comparison of the proposed equal Products Characteristics, Performance Characteristics, and Application Conditions for each Tnemec coating specified in this specification. For consideration for approval this written comparison shall be certified and notarized by an officer of the proposed manufacturer as true and correct. 2. For Products Characteristics this detailed side-by-side comparison shall include for example, but not limited to, Volume Solids, Weight Solids, VOC, Mix Ratio, Zinc Content in Dry Film (by Weight), Spreading Rate per coat, Drying Schedule, Shelf Life and Flash Point. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-4 3, For Performance Characteristics this detailed side-by-side comparison shall include for example,but not limited to, Abrasion Resistance, Corrosion Weathering, Direct Impact Resistance, Dry Heat Resistance, Flexibility, Moisture Condensation Resistance, Pencil Hardness, Salt Fog Resistance, Slip Coefficient and Wet Heat Resistance 4. In addition to the detailed side-by-side comparison for approval of an equal manufacturer, The Contractor shall provide to the Owner in writing five similar installations that have had the proposed or equal coating system and date coating system was put into service. In addition the installations names, locations, and owner's name with contact person and telephone number shall be provided. 5. For consideration for approval as an equal coating system the detailed side-by-side comparison shall be submit, with successful bidder's Shop Drawing at the time of the Preconstruction Conference, along with any proposed monetary adjustments to the contract price. As with all shop drawings, final approval rests with the Owner. 6. As a minimum standard any equal coating system shall have a 5-year service history on its coating system. 2.2 PAINT SYSTEMS A. NON-SUBMERGED METAL 1, Scope This Section shall apply to all metal. 2. Surface Preparation Near-white blast cleaning, SSPC-SP-10. 3. Coatings Shop Primer System: Coat One Product: Omnitbane Series 1 MDFT: 2.5 to 3.5 mils Field Finish System: Coat One Product: Hi-Build Epoxoline Tnemec Series N69 MDFT: 4 to 6 mils City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-5 Coat Two Product: Endura-Shield III Tnemec Series 73 MDFT: 3 to 5 mils Total MDFT: 10.0 mils B. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. Scope This Section shall apply to exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings and materials. 2. Surface Preparation Provide surface profile in accordance with ASTM D 4417, Method C 3. Coatings Primer System: Coat One Product: Omnithane Series 1 MDFT: 2.5 to 3.5 mils Finish System: Coat One Product: Hi-Build Epoxoline Tnemec Series N69 MDFT: 4 to 6 mils Coat Two Product: Endura-Shield III Tnemec Series 73 MDFT: 3 to 5 mils Total MDFT: 10.0 mils C. GALVANIZED SURFACE TOUCHUP 1. Scope This Section shall apply to all galvanized surfaces, which have received minor damage to the galvanized surface during construction. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-6 2. Surface Preparation Power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP-3. 3. Coatings Paint System: Product: Tnemec-Zinc Tnemec Series 90-97 MDFT: 3 to 5 mils Total MDFT: 3.5 mils D. DISSIMILAR METALS 1. Scope This Section shall apply to all surfaces, which are conducive to corrosion due to interactions between dissimilar metals, or to chemical reactions, to include embedment,,; in cast-in-place or precast concrete or masonry grout. This Section applies to aluminum, hot-dipped galvanized steel, and any other metals that have a dissimilar metals or chemical reaction concern when installed or embedded in concrete, or against concrete, mortar or grout. 2. Surface Preparation Lightly sand with 150 grit sandpaper to degloss and roughen surfaces. Solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP-1. 3. Coatings Finish Coat Product: Hi-Build Epoxoline Tnemec Series N69 MDFT: 4 to 6 mils Total MDFT: 4.0 mils E. GYPSUM WALLBOARD 1. Scope This Section shall apply to all exposed gypsum wallboard. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-7 2. Surface Preparation Sandpaper smooth, dust and contaminant free. 3. Coatings Primer System: Coat One Product: Tuemec Series 151-1051, Elaso-Grip FC MDFT: 1.5 to 2.5 mils Finish System: Coat One Product: Tnemec Series 1029, EnduraTone MDFT: 2 to 4 mils Coat Two Product: Tnemec Series 1029, EnduraTone MDFT: 2 to 4 mils Total MDFT: 5.5 mils F. ARCHITECTURAL METAL AND METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Scope This Section shall apply to all interior and exterior architectural metal and hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Surface Preparation All hollow metal doors and frames shall be bonderized, pickled or phosphatized, which will serve as the primer for and shall be compatible with the finish coats to be applied in the field. Prior to field coat application, the surface shall be solvent cleaned SSPC-SP-1, and shall be clean, dry and free of all dirt, oil, grease and any other contaminants. 3. Coatings Primer System: Coat One Product: Tnemec Series 27, F.C. Typoxy MDFT: 3 to 5 mils City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-8 Finish System: Coat One Product: Tnemec Series 73, Endura-shield MDFT: 3 to 5 mils Total MDFT: 6.0 mils G. PAINTED WOOD AND WOOD TRIM 1. Scope This Section shall apply to all exposed to view interior and exterior wood and wood trim for buildings and structures. Color shall be selected by the Owner. 2. Surface Preparation Wood surfaces shall be clean and dry. Sand wood as required. 3. Coatings Primer System: Product: Electrogrip, Tnemec Series 151 MDFT: 1.5 to 2 mils Finish System: Coat One: Product: Envirocrete, Tnemec Series 156 MDFT: 3 to 4 mils Coat Two: Product: Envirocrete, Tnemec Series 156 MDFT: 3 to 4 mils Total MDFT: 9 mils 2.3 COLORS A. GENERAL Paint colors used for the finish coatings on process equipment, piping and building surfaces shall conform to the following schedules. All finishes shall be glossy unless otherwise specified. Finish coatings, which are applied in the shop by the manufacturer, shall conform with this color schedule wherever possible. Factory coatings which are damaged during City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GRO#16627 09900-9 i i shipment or installation, or which are not of suitable color, as determined by the Engineer, shall be recoated in the field in accordance with these Specifications. Color samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to application of any field coatings. B. PIPING COLOR SCHEDULE Pi Tin p Identification: Exposed piping and piping inaccessible chases shall be identified with lettering or tags designating the service of each piping system, shall have flow directional arrows, and shall be color coded as scheduled below. Piping scheduled to be color coded shall be completely painted with the indicated colors, except surfaces specified to be unpainted shall have segments painted with the specified coding color long enough to accommodate the required lettering and arrows. All other piping specified to be painted shall match adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Location: Lettering and flow direction arrows shall be provided near equipment served, adjacent to valves, on both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the foregoing requirements will result in an excessive number of labels or arrows on a rum of pipe, the number required can be reduced. Nlet'al "fags: Where the outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, metal tags shall be provided instead of lettering. Tags shall have the specified identifying lettering stamped in, and shall be fastened to the pipe with suitable chains. Metal tags and chains shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Where tags are used, pipe shall be color coded as specified. Lettering: Lettering on piping shall be painted, stenciled, or snap-on markers. Snap-on markers shall be plastic sleeves as manufactured by Brady `Brady snap-on B-915," Seton "Setmark," or equal. Letter sizes shall be as follows: Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters ._............................... g .�.........c 5/8 inch and smaller Metal tags - 1/4 inch 3/4 inch through 4 inch 3/4 inch 5 inch and larger 2 inches Color Coding and Lettering Schedule: All piping for the following services shall be color coded and identified using the process names given City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-10 below. Where scheduled, bands shall be 6-inches-wide spaced along the pipe at 5-foot intervals. Color of Process Abbreviation Color of Pipe Letters Water W Dark Blue White All exposed piping shall be color coded and lettered. Pipes not tabulated above shall be color coded and lettered as determined by the Engineer. Electrical conduit shall be painted to match adjacent ceiling or wall surfaces as approved by the Engineer All valves shall be identified with a valve identification number. Contractor shall provide a computer file (Excel spreadsheet) with this information to the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL It is the intent of these Specifications that materials and workmanship be provided such that the highest quality job is obtained. The completed work, prior to acceptance, must be free from runs, skips, mars and any other disfiguring mark due to faulty workmanship or care of the completed work. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all surfaces are prepared in accordance with the written recommendations and directions of the paint manufacturer whose paint is applied. Approval of conditions shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to applying any or all coats of paint; however, such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility of conformance with these Specifications and conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent settling of dust or the occurrence of other conditions detrimental to the finished quality of the job and to repair any damaged paint at no additional cost to the Owner. Materials or equipment delivered with prime coats shall be touched up as required prior to the application of additional coating(s). The Contractor shall apply each coating at the rate and in the manner specified by the paint manufacturer. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built-up to the same thickness City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-11 achieved with undiluted material. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s) of paint. Film thickness shall be determined when dry by the Engineer with a magnetic dry film thickness gauge. The thickness gauge shall be calibrated with test shims. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint and for the particular purpose shall be allowed. All thimring shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as well as with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer. No paint shall be applied when the surrounding air temperature, as measured in the shade, is below 40 degrees F. No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface to be painted is below 35 degrees F. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces and shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog or mist or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. No paint shall be applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 85 percent or that the air temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 18 hours after the application of the paint. Dew or moisture condensation should be anticipated and if such conditions are prevalent, painting shall be delayed until conditions improve to be certain that the surfaces are dry prior to application of paint. No paint shall be applied when the ambient temperature is less than 5 percent F. above the dewpoint. Further, the day's painting shall be completed well within advance of the probable time of day when condensation will occur, in order to permit the paint film an appreciable drying time prior to the formation of moisture. Manufacturer's recommended drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions." Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times shall be necessary. The manufacturer's recommendations for recoating time intervals shall be strictly adhered to. Adequate ventilation, which will effectively remove solvents, shall be provided for proper drying of paints on interior surfaces. A minimum of 7-consecutive calendar days at 70 degrees F following the application of the final coat on submerged surfaces shall be required before submergence. Longer periods shall be allowed prior to submergence if recommended by the paint manufacturer or if weather conditions require a longer curing time. 3.2 MIXING AND THINNING Paint shall be thoroughly mixed each time any is withdrawn from the container. Paint containers shall be kept tightly closed except while paint is being withdrawn. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 09900-12 Paint shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for hot weather application without thinning. Thinning will be permitted only as necessary to obtain recommended coverage at lower application temperatures. Only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer shall be used. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied paint be reduced, by addition of paint thinner or otherwise, below the thickness recommended by the paint manufacturer. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. GENERAL Surfaces shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials with all defects filled or removed. All trades employed shall leave the surfaces of their work in such a condition that only minor cleaning, sanding and filling is required of the painting trade for surface preparation. Hardware, switchplates, fitting bolts and nuts, machined surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures and all other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided, where necessary, to avoid spotting of surfaces adjacent to the item being painted. Working parts of electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surface preparation and painting operations. Ferrous metal cleaning shall be in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications (SSPC). Descrinti on SSPC White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-5 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-6 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP-7 Near-White Blast Cleaning SP-10 Preparation of Concrete SP-13 The words "blast cleaning" or equivalent phrases of equal intent shall be taken to refer to the applicable SSPC specification when used in the paint manufacturer's recommendations or these Specifications. Hand tool cleaning shall be used when power tool cleaning is not possible. Hand and power tool cleaning shall be in accordance with SSPC Specifications SP-2, SP-3 or SP-1 I, respectively. The blast cleaning profile depth shall be not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils. In the case of equipment to which the manufacturer applies a City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-13 primer coating in the shop after fabrication, the blast profile depth needs to be as noted above. B, FERROUS METAL, GALVANIZED METAL AND HOLLOW METAL SURFACES The Contractor shall assure that fabrication, welding or burning is completed prior to the sandblasting operation. The Contractor shall chip or grind off flux, splatter, slag or other laminations left from welding. The Contractor shall remove all mill scale. The Contractor shall grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections. The Contractor shall near-white blast clean, in accordance with SSPC SP-10, submerged surfaces and surfaces to 12 inches above highest liquid level, and areas subject to splash or spillage. The Contractor shall commercial blast clean, in accordance with SSPC SP-6, all interior and exterior structural steel surfaces, surfaces located 12 inches above submerged areas, and surfaces located in areas not subject to splash or spillage where exposed to open bodies of liquids. The Engineer reserves the right to accept preparation of these surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-3 for areas not practical or possible to sandblast to SSPC SP-6 requirements. The Contractor shall near-white blast clean, in accordance with SSPC SP-10 surfaces, subject to heat in excess of 600 degrees F. The Contractor shall power tool or hand clean in accordance with SSPC SP-2 or SSPC SP-3. The Contractor shall apply prime coat on cleaned surfaces within 2 hours of cleaning. The Contractor shall solvent clean galvanized surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-L C. GYPSUM WALLBOARD The Contractor shall repair minor irregularities left by finishers, avoid raising the nap of the paper and verify that the moisture content is less than 8 percent before painting. Contractor shall install sealant as required at edges of wallboard where it abuts different materials prior to painting. D. CONCRETE AND CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY The Contractor shall allow new concrete and concrete block masonry to cure for a minimum of 28 days and shall verify that the moisture content contained in the concrete is stable and not in motion. The Contractor shall verify by performance of a Wet Matt Test per ASTM D4263. The City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-14 Contractor shall fill concrete surface cracks and irregularities with Portland cement grout to provide a uniform surface texture and shall fill concrete block masonry surface with an epoxy block filler as specified. As a minimum, the Contractor shall brush off blast clean surfaces. The Contractor shall prepare the surface as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.4 APPLICATION A. GENERAL The Contractor shall mix and apply coatings by brush, roller or spray in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Spraying equipment shall be inspected and approved in writing by the coating manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide complete coverage's to the mil thickness specified. The thickness specified shall be dry film mil thickness. All paint systems are "to cover." In situations of discrepancy between the manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness requirements govern. When color or undercoats show through, the Contractor shall apply additional coats until paint film is of unifomt finish and color. The Contractor shall not apply consecutive coats until the Engineer has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats. The Contractor shall apply materials under adequate illumination, shall evenly spread and flow on to provide full, smooth coverage, shall work each application of material into corners, crevices,joints and other difficult to work areas, shall avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid intercoat contamination. shall clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat and shall immediately smooth out runs or sags, or remove and recoat entire surfaces. The Contractor shall assure that preceding coats are dry before recoating, shall recoat within the time limits specified by the coating manufacturer and shall allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed. The Contractor shall coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. All fabricated and structural steel shall have prime coat(s) applied in the shop and finish coat(s) applied in the field. During application of either prime or finish coats, brush coat all weld seams, edges, angles, fasteners and other irregular surfaces to insure a monolithic film, pinhole free surface. Finish coats of paint shall be uniform in color and sheen without streaks, laps, runs, drips, sags or missed areas. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-15 All submerged or intermittently submerged materials shall have surface preparation and coatings applied rior to installation unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All pipe, pipe supports, and pipe hangers that will be painted shall have surface preparation and coatings applied prior to installation. B. PRIME COAT INSTALLATION The Contractor shall prime all surfaces indicated to be painted, shall touch-up damaged primer coats prior to finish coats and shall assure field- applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied coatings. If coatings are not compatible, and if approved in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply a 2-mil-thick universal barrier coat recommended by the paint manufacturer prior to applying field coats or completely remove factory coatings and reprime. The Contractor shall prime ferrous metals bedded in concrete to a minimum of 1 inch below exposed surfaces. The Contractor shall backroll all primer coats applied to existing or new CMU block. The Contractor shall assure sandblasting operations do not result in the embedment of sand particles in paint film. The Contractor shall brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to primer application over the entire surface being coated. The Contractor shall backroll concrete, masonry, gypsum board and plaster surfaces with a roller if the primer has been spray applied. C. FINISH SCHEDULE All work performed under this Contract (both new work and modifications to existing facilities) shall be painted. if the finish schedule requires wall surfaces to be painted in a particular space, the Contractor shall paint all appurtenant surfaces unless specifically noted not to be painted on the Plans. Items to be painted shall include; 1. Piping, valves, fittings, etc. 2. Conduit and appurtenances. 3. Ferrous metals. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 09900-16 4. Exposed woodwork. 5. Concrete block to be sealed. The Contractor shall not paint the following elements unless specifically noted on the Plans to be painted: 1. Stainless steel surfaces except as required to identify piping. 2. Exposed to view aluminum surfaces. 3. Galvanized metal surfaces. 4. Fiberglass surfaces except fiberglass piping and piping appurtenances. 5, Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits. 6. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units. 7. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates. 8. Piping, ductwork, or pipe conduit when enclosed between suspended ceiling and overhead slabs or located in pipe chases or surfaces to be lagged. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible for performing, testing and assuring conformance with all requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall maintain daily records showing: s Start date of work in each area. Date of application for each following coat. « Moisture content and surface temperature of substrate. Also record weather conditions, ambient air temperature and dew point. • Provisions utilized to maintain temperature and humidity of work area within paint manufacturer's recormnended ranges. The Contractor shall measure the surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gauges specifically designed for such use. The Contractor City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 09900-17 shall measure substrate humidity with humidity gauges specifically designed for such use. The Contractor shall measure wet paint with wet film thickness gauges. The Contractor shall measure paint dry film thickness with a Mikrotest gauge calibrated against the National Bureau of Standards `Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards." The Engineer may direct measurement of paint thickness at any time during the project to ensure conformance with these Specifications. A sufficient number of dry film thickness measurements shall be made so that there is approximately one measurement for each 100 square feet of surface area painted. Where a wall or ceiling or other type of surface is disturbed and patched, the Contractor shall repaint entire wall or ceiling. The Contractor shall provide wet paint signs as necessary. The Contractor shall touch all damaged finish coats using the same material as specified for the finish coat. At the conclusion of all painting activities, Contractor shall submit a painting field test report to the Engineer showing the above information plus results of wet film and dry film thickness tests. Provide four copies of final test report. 3.6 PAINTING SITE Either shop painting or field painting and surface preparation shall be acceptable when painting work is performed in conformance with this Section, unless the painting is activity specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.7 PAINT THICKNESS All paint thicknesses specified herein are minimum dry film thickness (MDFT). The thickness of paint over metallic surfaces shall be measured with a magnetic thickness gauge; paint thickness over wood or masonry shall vary in accordance with surface texture, but in no case shall the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate be exceeded. The minimum thicknesses given are total coating thickness for the coating specified, including multiple coats of the same material, where applicable. *** END OF SECTION * k City of Kent 640 Zone Boaster Station G&o#16627 09900-1 S DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES i SECTION 10300 SAFETY EQUIPMENT PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish and install safety equipment items as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. Fire extinguishers shall be furnished and installed in each of the following locations. A. Two installed in Pump Room. B. Two installed in Generator Room. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS The fire extinguishers shall be 10-pound monoammonium phosphate, dry chemical, nitrogen pressurized, Underwriter's Laboratories listed. The chemical shall be suitable for Class A, B, and C tires. Fire extinguishers shall have metal valve pressure gauges and corrosion resistant handles and wall hooks. PART 3 EXECUTION Safety equipment shall be installed in the general areas specified Specific locations shall be determined by a Safety Inspector with the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. The Safety Inspector's visit shall be arranged by the Contractor. Any costs associated with the Safety Inspector's site visit shall be included in the Contractor's cost for the project. °* END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 10300-1 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11000 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The provisions of this Section apply to all Sections of Divisions 11, 13, 14, 15, and 16, unless specifically revised therein. The Contractor shall direct the attention of all subcontractors and suppliers of equipment and related appurtenances for the work to the applicable provisions in the Contract Provisions wherever they may occur. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01600 Materials and Equipment 01800 Testing, Commissioning and Training 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 09900 Painting 11010 Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations Division 11 Equipment Division 13 Special Construction Division 14 Conveying Systems Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical 1.3 STANDARDS FOR THE WORK Pipe, fittings, wiring and supports shall be provided to produce complete, operable systems with all elements properly interconnected as shown in schematic diagrams or to provide specified operations. if a specific dimensioned location is not shown for interconnections or smaller system elements, the Contractor shall select appropriate locations and show them on Shop Drawing submittals for review. Equipment and material shall be new and without imperfections and shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner; aligned, leveled, cleaned and adjusted for satisfactory operation; installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and the best standard practices for this type of work so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be readily made and City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 11000-1 so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Oil and lubrication fittings shall be located clear of and away from guards, base, and equipment and within reach from the operating floor. In order to meet these requirements with equipment as furnished, minor deviation from the Plans may be made as authorized by the Engineer. All such minor deviations from the Plans that may include extending oil and lubrication fittings for accessibility and safety shall be executed at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS The recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers of products used in the work are hereby made part of these Specifications, except as they may be superseded by other requirements of these Specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL Product Submittals shall be provided to the Engineer for all equipment specified in Divisions 11, 13, 14, 15, and 16, in accordance with Specification 01300, this Section and the respective equipment specification section. Submittals shall be dated and signed as certified for use in construction of this project. B. MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE Manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for equipment, including, as applicable, performance characteristics, fan curves and pump curves, motor data sheets and methods of assembly. The following minimum requirements shall accompany all manufacturers' literature Submittals: 1, Description of materials. 2. Rating data - Mechanical and Electrical as applicable. 3. Motor Data including bearing and enclosure information. 4. List of any special tools and/or spare parts required and to be furnished, if any. 5. Exceptions taken to the specification and detailed explanation why the exception is being taken. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-2 i 6. Additional specific information that is specified in the equipment sections. 7. For motor driven equipment served by variable frequency drives (VFDs),provide vibration and critical speed requirements of the equipment, minimum speed requirements of motor and driven machinery, acceleration and deceleration requirements of the equipment, and torque and speed information as per Part 1.6 of this Section. C. SHOP DRAWINGS Shop Drawings shall be submitted showing sizes and arrangement of equipment, foundations and anchor bolts required, control diagrams, wiring diagrams, pipe hanging details, ductwork layouts and connections to other work. The arrangement of mechanical equipment and appurtenant piping shown on the Plans may be varied as necessary to fit the certified manufacturer's installation drawings. However, the manufacturer's drawings shall not deviate from the Plans and Specifications as to location, size, type and design of equipment. The following minimum requirements shall accompany all shop drawing submittals: 1. Overall dimensions. 2. Mounting arrangement and dimensions. 3. Connection sizes and orientation. 4. Capacity and location of lifting eyes. 5. Motor arrangement showing location of electrical connections. 6. Detail electrical wiring diagrams, showing component designation and rating, and the connection points and associated terminals and cable identification for connection to the process control system. 7. The Contractor shall ascertain the location of all electrical (power and control) connections in order to properly orient electrical conduits. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O #16627 11000-3 D. DESIGN CALCULATIONS Seismic design calculations shall be submitted for equipment and for supports and anchorage for equipment. Special seismic certification shall be submitted for all active mechanical and electrical equipment that must remain operable following an earthquake in compliance with ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Chapter 13 Seismic Design for Nonstructural Components. E. FACTORY TEST REPORTS Factory tests shall be performed for each piece of equipment where specifically called for in the Section specifying that equipment. Note that factory tests are inherent in many reference standards. The requirement for a factory test in a referenced standard shall make that requirement a part of these Specifications. Conduct factory tests at the same speeds at which the equipment will operate in the field except as noted. Where specifically noted, the Engineer may witness performance test. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in sufficient time to allow arrangements to be made for witness of such tests. When non-witnessed tests are performed, certified results shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer. Factory testing of pumps shall be done in accordance with the requirements and standards of the Hydraulic Institute. Tests of other equipment shall conform to the requirements set forth in these Specifications. F. IDENTIFICATION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT Each piece of equipment delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by a completed fonn which will contain at least the following information: 1. Owner's name and location of project. 2. Contractor's name and subcontractor if applicable. 3. Name of item being submitted. 4. Specification reference by section, paragraph and page. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-4 5. Data on item (manufacturer, general descriptive data, dimensions, size of connections, speeds, performance curves, serial number). 6, Motor data, type, voltage, frequency, phase, full load amperes, starting method, frame size, enclosure, insulation type, NEMA Code letter, dimensions, service factor, serial number. 7. Date and signature of person certifying performance. G. MANUFACTURER'S AFFIDAVITS Equipment manufacturers, or their authorized representatives, shall each submit a signed and dated written report with respect to his equipment certifying the following: l. The equipment has been properly installed and lubricated 2. The equipment is in accurate alignment I The manufacturer was present when the equipment was placed into operation 4. The manufacturer has checked, inspected, and adjusted the equipment as necessary 5. The equipment is free from any undue stress unposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts 6. The equipment is not imposing any undue stress on any connecting members 7, The equipment has been operated satisfactorily under full load conditions $ The manufacturer has inspected his equipment during the operational demonstrations and system validation tests to the extent specified 9. The equipment is fully covered under the terms of the guarantee City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN All equipment shall be designed for the service intended, of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection and during continuous or intermittent operation, shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored, and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance, safety, and utility shall be given consideration in the design of equipment. Materials of constriction shall be cathodically compatible. 2.2 STANDARD REQUIREMENTS A. MATERIALS Design, fabricate and assemble equipment and systems with new materials and in accordance with acceptable engineering and shop practices. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gauges so repair parts can be installed in the field. Make like parts of duplicate units interchangeable. Do not place equipment in service at any time prior to delivery except as required for factory or shop tests. B. UNIFORMITY Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of the same type or classification used for the same purpose shall be the product of the same manufacturer and shall be the same model. C. SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS Supports and anchorage of equipment(s) shall comply with the requirements of the 2015 International Building Code (IBC) Section 1613 and ASCE 7-10 Minirnuni Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Chapter 13 Seismic Design for Nonstructural Components, as referenced and amended by the IBC. For the following design parameters: Building Occupancy Category IV r Site Class C + The component Importance Factor: Ir = 1.5 « Design response acceleration coefficients: Sus = 0.876g SDI = 0.43g City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1 1000-6 0 Seismic Design Category D D. STANDARDS Provide equipment and materials suitable for service conditions and meeting standard requirements of ANSI, ASME, AWWA, ASTM, NEMA, IBC, NPC, UL and OSHA. 2.3 LUBRICATION Provide lubricants of types recommended by equipment manufacturers, in quantities sufficient for a minimum of 1-year's consumption prior to completion, testing and final acceptance. 2.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND BEDPLATES Mount equipment assemblies on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel bedplate on a grout or concrete base unless otherwise shown or specified. Provide bases and bedplates with machined support pads, vibration pads,tapered dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. Corners shall be rounded or chamfered and ground smooth. Continuously weld seams and contact edges between steel plates and shapes, and grind welds smooth. Do not support machinery or piping on bedplates other than that which is factory installed. Provide leveling screws in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in leveling prior to grouting. 2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS Each equipment manufacturer shall ftimish the required anchor bolts, nuts and washers of adequate design for securing bases and bedplates to concrete bases. Provide anchor bolts of length to allow for 1-1/2 inch of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete unless otherwise shown or specified. The manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer design calculations regarding recommended sizing and type of anchor bolts, nuts, and washers for securing the equipment, in accordance with the project seismic requirements. Anchor and assembly bolts and nuts shall be of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All leveling nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All motor-driven equipment shall be furnished with cast-in-place anchor bolts or drilled-in anchors set with epoxy adhesive. Do not provide expansion type anchors for motor-driven equipment, or equipment or piping subject to vibration. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-7 Expansion type anchors are not to be used for any submerged applications unless specifically noted on the Plans. Anchor all non-motor-driven equipment with cast-in-place anchor bolts or drilled- in anchors set with epoxy adhesive except that, where specifically allowed by note on the Plans, expansion type anchors may be used. 2.6 SAFETY GUARDS Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts on all sides with safety guards conforming to all applicable Federal, State, and local codes and regulations; conform to the mast restrictive requirement. Design guards for easy installation and removal, complete with necessary supports, accessories, and fasteners, all hot-dip galvanized. Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water. Provide tachometer test opening in line with ends of shafts. Typically, guards shall be expanded metal on a structural steel frame except that outdoor guards may be of solid material. Provide spring loaded hinged doors with latch for service and lubrication access. All pipes, manifolds, heaters, and other surfaces, which have a surface temperature sufficient to burn human tissue, shall be covered with a thermal insulating material or otherwise guarded against contact. Guards shall comply with the requirements of these Specifications, WISHA Standards, and "The Principles and Techniques of Mechanical Guarding" (OSHA 2057, 1973), whichever is more stringent. 2.7 LIFTING EYES All equipment weighing over 100 pounds shall be supplied with lifting eyes. Parts of equipment assemblies, which are normally serviced separately, such as motors, shall have individual lifting eyes. 2.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Equipment shall be manufactured, fabricated and installed in a manner which permits conduit connection to electrical power and control equipment from below the connection point, terminal box, or connection box without offsets or bends such that the conduit will drain away from the equipment. Electric motors, control panels, accessories, etc., shall conform to the requirements of Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 ('Equipment items) and Division,16, Electrical. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1 1000-8 i If any motor fails during the warranty period, the Contractor shall replace the motor with a new motor. Rewinding a failed motor shall not be acceptable. All electrical components shall be recognized or labeled and listed by a recognized electrical testing laboratory for the application, or approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for installation on the Proj ect. 2.9 MOTOR PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND DOCUMENTATION The Contractor shall maintain a spreadsheet or database list of the motor characteristics that are necessary to size, select, and/or set the various motor protective devices, such as thermal overloads, breaker trip devices, motor protection relays, etc. This list shall also include any additional information needed to set-up, program or adjust the variable frequency drive which serves motor driven equipment such as minimum speed, acceleration, etc. The list shall be sent with each equipment submittal for motor driven equipment and shall be updated to reflect the motor information for the submitted equipment The Contractor shall record the size and/or settings of each motor protective device at the time of startup and after any subsequent adjustments on the motor characteristics list described in the preceding paragraph. In addition, the Contractor shall take a digital photo of each motor nameplate when the motor arrives at the jobsite. Each digital photo shall be emailed to the Engineer, noting any discrepancy between the motor nameplate data and the submitted motor data. 2.10 NAMEPLATES/DATA PLATES/IDENTIFICATION Each piece of equipment and its driver shall be furnished with a stainless steel metal nameplate fastened to the item in an accessible position. This nameplate shall contain the manufacturer's name, equipment rating, capacity, size, model, serial number and speed. Data for motors shall be NEMA standard. All information written or printed shall be in English. Each item of equipment shall bear a different serial number. Measurement units shall be given for ratings and capacity. Nameplates for tanks and pressure vessels shall give working pressure, test pressure, vessel plate thickness and ASME Code data. Each piece of rotating equipment shall have a direction of rotation arrow. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-9 Each piece of equipment shall be labeled using a plastic laminate label with the functional name and number of the equipment shown on the Plans or provided by the Engineer. Name and number shall correspond to those used on Motor Control Centers and Panels. Labels shall be fastened to the equipment base or other acceptable location. The letters shall be at least '/cinch high with a border trim on all sides not less than inch. Color shall be green background with white letters. Fasteners shall be brass or stainless steel screwed into inserts, anchor shields or tapped holes in equipment or base. Units of measure shall be shown on the indicating and totalizing dials of all meters, gauges and other measuring devices. 2.11 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation shall be provided between adjacent surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, non-metallic separators or washers. Connections of dissimilar piping materials shall utilize dielectric unions, flanges, couplings or bushings. 2.12 PAINTING Painting of all equipment shall be in accordance with Section 09900 of these Specifications. 2.13 NOISE Mechanical and electrical equipment shall not create sound levels that are in excess of that permitted by WISHA for 8 hours per day worker exposure unless otherwise noted for the specific piece of equipment involved. 2.14 VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS Mechanical and electrical equipment shall meet the vibration and critical speed limitation requirements described in Section 11010. 2.15 PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTIONS Provide tapped and plugged suction and discharge gauge connections on the pump nozzles or flanges. Where this is not possible, provide gauge connections on the piping immediately adjacent to the pump. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-10 i i 2.16 PUMP SEAL WATER The Plans show a seal water system applicable to some pump installations. The Contractor shall review each pump installation with the pump manufacturer and shall provide seal water installations in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION Inspect each item of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. Inspect previously installed related work and verify that it is ready for new equipment installation. 3.2 PREPARATION Prior to installing equipment, ensure that the areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are completed. Maintain the areas in a broom-clean condition during installation operations. Clean, condition, and service the equipment in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals and specific requirements included in applicable Sections of these Specifications. 3.3 SPARE AND LOOSE PARTS Prior to equipment startup provide an inventory of spare and loose parts supplied under the project. Turn over inventory and parts to the Owner. The Owner's written acknowledgment of receipt is required for project completion. Loose parts are defined as items such as special tools, keys, safety equipment, and portable equipment. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. EQUIPMENT Equipment shall conform to the approved submittals and Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals. Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified. Use specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial indicators, gauges, and micrometers, as applicable. Produce acceptable installations free of vibration or other defects. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1 1000-11 B. ANCHOR BOLTS Deliver bolts with templates or setting drawings and verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed. Prior to assembly, the Contractor shall coat all stainless steel bolts and nut threads with anti-seizing coInpound. C. BASE AND BEDPLATE GROUTING Do not place grout until initial fitting and alignment of connected piping is completed. Level and align equipment on the concrete foundations, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with grout. Bevel exposed grout at 45-degree angle, except around exposed grout at horizontal surfaces for drainage. Trowel or point exposed grout to a smooth, dense finish and damp cure with burlap for 3 days. When grout is fully hardened, remove jacking screws and tighten nuts on anchor bolts. Check the installation for alignment and level, and perform corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the applicable Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual. The Contractor shall make an allowance of at least 1-1/2 niches for grout under the equipment bases, whether or not shown on the Plans. Shuns used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the complete work. Unless otherwise authorized, all grout shall be a non-shrink, non-metallic grout as stated in Section 03300. Where practicable, the grout shall be placed through the grout holes in the equipment base and worked outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamfer around the top edge of the finished foundation. D. PRESSURE GAUGES Pressure gauges shall be installed on all pump discharge piping at a location where the gauges can be easily read. The gauges shall be located upstream of the isolation valves, if possible. Gauges shall be installed on other equipment items as specified. The gauges are specified in Division 13 and shall be installed as detailed on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-12 i 3.5 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND ADJUSTMENT The Contractor, at his/her own expense, shall arrange for an authorized factory- trained representative of the company or companies supplying the various items of equipment to: • Supervise the equipment installation in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual. • Be present when the equipment is first put into operation. • Inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and approve the installation. • Repeat the inspection, check and adjust until all trouble or defects are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are acceptable. b Witness and supervise operational demonstrations and system validation tests to the extent specified. C Prepare and submit the specified Manufacturer's Affidavit. The representative shall be experienced and knowledgeable regarding the equipment being tested. The Contractor shall give initial lubrication to all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and report forms for recording data. The Contractor shall submit the report forms to the Engineer prior to operational testing. All equipment shall be field tested and demonstrated to the Engineer that proper operation and capacity have been hilly complied with. For pumps, this shall include measurement of suction and discharge pressure at the pump and measurement of pumping rate by volumetric means, or through a suitably calibrated meter for two points on the performance curve. Current draw and voltage on the motor for each phase shall be measured for each pumping rate measurement. For two-speed pumps, such tests shall be conducted at both speeds. For variable speed pumps, blowers or fans, these tests shall be conducted at minimum and maximum speeds and at the specified duty point. The Contractor shall furnish and test equipment or measuring devices (including portable flow meters) required that are not part of the permanent installation. Tests City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 11000-13 for variable speed pumps, blowers, and other equipment shall be performed at 60 Hz and at the initial anticipated flow or capacity levels. The field test shall demonstrate under all conditions of operation that the equipment: + Has not been damaged by transportation or installation. U Has been properly installed. M Has no mechanical defects. • Is in proper alignment. O Has been properly connected. • Is free of overheating of any parts. W Is free of vibration in excess of the limits in Section 11010, 0 Is free of excessive noise. • Is free of overloading of any parts. +, Shall operate as specified with the specified control system. • Is free of critical speeds as specified in Section 11010. In addition, the entire facilities shall be demonstrated to be in full operating order prior to the acceptance of the work. Should any equipment or part thereof fail to operate as intended, it shall be immediately removed and replaced, all at the Contractor's expense. Equipment start-up and adjustment shall take place before instruction of the Owner's personnel is performed. 3.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL Conduct an instruction program for up to six operations personnel designated by the Owner in accordance with Specification Section 01800. Furnish the services of qualified instructors from the various equipment manufacturers for the duration specified in each specific Section. Include instruction covering basic system operation theory, routine maintenance and repair, and "hands on" operation of equipment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11000-14 Provide the instruction program at the Owner's convenience before contract closeout. The Contractor shall audio- and video-record all training sessions, and also provide the Owner with any audio-visual trailing materials the manufacturer utilizes (i.e., DVDs, PowerPoint presentations, videocassettes etc.). Cost of instruction and audio-visual training materials shall be included in the bid price for the equipment. 3.7 SOUND LEVEL TESTING Measure the sound level developed by all mechanical and electrical equipment provided under the Contract Provisions. Perform testing in all rooms and spaces containing such equipment during the final operation test program with all equipment operating. Use OSHA approved instruments and record the highest sound levels developed when measured according to OSHA standards in each room and space. Deliver a certified copy of records to the Engineer. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 11000-15 SECTION 11010 VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This Section specifies vibration and critical speed limitations for rotating mechanical equipment. Individual equipment specification sections may specify more stringent requirements, which shall then govern. Field-testing and vibration measurements shall be taken on all rotating mechanical equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 11000 Equipment General Provisions 11211 Potable Water Booster Pumps 13433 Chlorine Analyzer System 1.3 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided when specified in the individual equipment specification sections: A. Manufacturer's certified calculations and data showing location of critical speeds in relation to operating speeds. B. Report of Vibration Analysis on the pump after installation. 1.4 VIBRATION LIMITATIONS A. GENERAL B. CENTRIFUGAL 1. Machines with Sleeve Bearings: Unless otherwise specified, centrifugal machines with sleeve bearing shafts shall not exhibit unfiltered Root Mean Square (RMS) readings for vibration displacement in excess of the following: Shaft: speed ranee, rpin Displacement, peak to iwak, tails Up to 900 3.5 901 — 1,800 3.0 1,801 —3,000 2.5 City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11010-1 3,001 —4,500 2.0 Above 4,500 1.6 Displacement measurements shall be taken radially on the shaft at two points at each bearing. Measuring points shall be 90 degrees apart. 2. Machines with Antifriction Bearings: Unless otherwise specified, centrifugal machines with antifrictionbearing shafts shall not exhibit unfiltered RMS readings for vibration velocity in excess of 0.12 inches per second. Velocity measurements shall be taken on one point of each bearing housing. C. TESTING The Contractor shall retain the services of Balancing Services Company or Owner-approved company to perform a vibration analysis on the pump after installation and prepare a report of the findings. The report shall be provided to the Owner prior to the startup witnessed by the Owner operations personnel. For variable speed equipment vibration testing shall be provided at 1 Hz increments throughout the entire operating range. Diagnosis shall include, but not be limited to, unbalance, misalignment, bent shaft,journal bearing related problems, rolling contract bearing problems, mechanical looseness, resonance, foundation flexibility, electrically induced problems, pump problems, coupling problems, and electric motor induced vibration form VFD or VFD carrier fi equency. 1.5 CRITICAL SPEED REQUIREMENTS Unless otherwise specified, rotating mechanical equipment shall not exhibit critical speeds within the specified range of operating speeds. Critical speeds for equipment with rigid rotor systems shall be at least 20 percent greater than maximum operating speed or impeller blade pass frequency, whichever is greater. Critical speeds for equipment with flexible shaft-rotor systems shall be at least 15 percent below mininnum operating speed and 20 percent above maximum operating speed or impeller blade pass frequency, whichever is greater. *"* END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11010-2 SECTION 11211 POTABLE WATER BOOSTER PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing horizontal split case pumps at the booster station as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning and Training 09900 Painting 11000 Equipment General Provisions 11010 Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations 15050 Piping Systems Division 16 Electrical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Equipment numbers are as follows: Item Equipment Number Pump 1 01 BP O1 Pump 2 01 BP 02 Pump 3 01 BP 03 Pump 4 01 BP 04 Pump 5 (future) 01 BP 05 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The multi-stage centrifugal booster pumps shall meet the following performance requirements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 1121 1-1 Parameter Specification ----- . ._.. _� _........-__..min....... .._........____..._.... 01 BP 01, 01 BP 02 Shut Off(0 gpm) 89 ft Design Operating Point(967 gpm) 6( ft Efficiency 80% _.._ .. Parameter Specification ...__n-__...__S -- Pump peed 1 800 rpm 01 BP 03, 01 BP 04, 01 BP 05 (FUTURE) Shut Off(0 _-pm) 225 ft Design Operating Point(2,250 gpm) 175 ft Efficiency 80/o .�.m.mmmmmmmmmmmmm...._ _. � Pump Speed 1,800 rpm 1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, crated and delivered to protect against damage during shipment. All exposed flanges shall be covered and sealed with shrink-wrap to prevent the entrance of moisture. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide a warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for 2 years following the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be in printed form, shall apply to all similar units, and shall include parts and labor. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The pumps furnished under this Section shall be manufactured by Aurora. The horizontal split case booster pumps shall be electric motor driven and shall be installed as shown on the Plans. The units shall conform to the operating conditions as shown above. The units for 01 BP 01 and 01 BP 02 shall be Aurora Model 5x6x11A horizontal split case, single stage, double suction. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1121 1-2 The units for 01 BP 03 and 01 BP 04 shall be Aurora Model 6x8xl5 horizontal split case, single stage, double suction. The structural, mechanical and electrical designs shown on the Plans are based on the equipment manufactured by Aurora. Any modifications to the mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation and control and other portions of work that may be required to adapt the general layout and details shown on the Plans to the equipment actually furnished shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary revisions shall be made at Contractor's sole expense. All redesign shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted for review prior to incorporating any redesign into the work. 2.2 HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE SINGLE STAGE PUMPS The pumps shall be of the single stage, double suction, horizontal split case design; split on the horizontal axis and shall be bronze fitted construction. Suction and discharge connections shall be located on opposite sides of the lower casing, allowing removal of the rotating element without disturbing the system piping connections. The pump rotation viewed from driver end shall be counterclockwise. The pump casing material shall be a minimum of class 35 cast iron. Water passageways shall be smooth to permit maximum efficiency. Casing shall be hydrostatically tested at 150 percent of the maximum working pressure under which the pump could operate at design speed. The suction flange shall be drilled 125 lb. ANSI. The discharge flange shall be drilled 125 lb. ANSI. The bearing brackets shall be cast as an integral part of the lower casing and have removable bracket caps. The bearing housing shall be doweled for location and anti-rotation. The pump feet shall also be cast as an integral part of the lower casing. Bronze renewable casing rings shall be furnished, doweled and shouldered in the casing. Ring dowels shall be located in slots on the split surface of the Lower casing. The impeller shall be of one piece cast nickel aluminum (ASTM 148-C 95200) bronze, double suction type. Silica bronze impellers shall not be allowed. The impeller shall be balanced, keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial position by threaded shaft sleeves. The impeller skirt shall be grooved and fit with close tolerances to the casing ring to permit a minimum of recirculation between the impeller and the casing ring for maximum efficiency, with wear rings installed on both impeller and casing, made of 316 stainless steel or better. Sealing of the pump liquid cavity shall be with a face type mechanical seal with Ni-resist stationary seat, carbon sealing washer, Buna rubber flexible members, stainless City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-3 steel metal parts and spring. Seal to be rated 225 degrees F (107°C) dI 150 psig (10-34 bar) maximum. Mechanical seals shall be mounted over stainless steel shaft sleeves. The shaft shall be stainless steel, adequately sized for the loads transmitted. Shaft deflection shall not exceed .002 inches at the face of the stuffing box when operating between 95 percent and 105 percent of capacity at best efficiency at the pump's maximmn 60 Hz. speed and with full diameter impeller. The shaft shall be protected through the stuffing box by means of bronze shaft sleeves and they shall be threaded against shaft rotation and locked in place with setscrews. The sleeves shall be sealed with`O" rings at the inside diameter to eliminate leakage between the shaft and sleeve. Bearings shall be single row, deep groove ball type; the inboard bearing shall be arranged for radial loads only. The outboard bearing shall be arranged for both radial and axial loads. Both bearings shall be grease lubricated with grease flush through the bearing housing. Bearings shall be designed for an average life of 100,000 hours, and shall be sealed type. Bearings shall be protected from liquid entry by means of rubber deflectors mounted on the shaft and lip seals in the bearing housing. Outboard bearing cover shall have a plugged opening for tachometer connection. Bearing housing lubrication design must be capable of being changed from grease to oil lubrication type without replacement of bearing housing or the lower pump casing. The outboard bearing shall have retaining ring retention. The pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel base with drip rim. The base shall have capacity to move the pump and motor independently for alignment. The base shall include alignment set screws to allow for alignment adjustment in the horizontal plane. Pump and driver shall be laser aligned and bolted in place prior to factory shipment. Final alignment must be performed at the jobsite in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and the pump installation, operation and maintenance instructions. Base is to be tilled with grout to a thickness at least 1 inch above equipment pad to eliminate vibration. A flexible coupling shall be provided between the pump and driver. A coupling guard shall be furnished over the coupling for protection. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-4 2.3 MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Motors shall be by US Motors. No other manufacturers shall be accepted. B. MOTOR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Specification 01 MTR 011 and 01 MTR 02 ... .. Motor Size 20 hp Operating Volta e 480 VAC Phase 3 Frequency 60 Hz Synchronous Speed 1,800 rpm In verter Duty Rated? Yes Motor Overtemperature Protection? _ Yes Classified Environment? No 101 MTR 031 and 101 MTR 041 __....____................_........., Operatina Voltave 480 VAC ............................................... Phase 3 Frequency 60 Hz Snlchronous Speed 1,800 rpm Inverter Duty Rated? Yes Motor Overte_m_perature Protection? Yes Classified Environment? No C. GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS The motors shall be standard horizontal, TEFC premium efficiency, electric induction motors meeting NEMA MG-1 and other applicable NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. Motors shall be constructed with Class H (VFD applications) insulated windings, Class B 30,000 antifriction bearings, cast iron frame and end bells. The motor nameplates shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degrees C ambient temperature with a 1.15 service factor. The rotors and short-circuit rings shall be made of copper. Motor design shall be Type B (Standard). Motors shall meet the efficiency requirements of the Washington State Energy Code regardless of whether or not a particular motor is exempted from meeting this efficiency by the Washington State Energy Code. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-5 Motors shall be recognized or labeled and listed by a recognized electrical testing laboratory approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, or the motor shall be specifically approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for installation on the project. Motor manufacturer shall verify that the submitted motor is suitable for use with the motor starting method shown in the Plans. If any motor fails during the warranty period, the Contractor shall replace the motor with a new motor. Rewinding a failed motor shall not be acceptable. D. MOTORS USED WITH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES Motors being used in conjunction with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated and shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Parts 30 and 31. They shall be coordinated with the thermal, electrical, and mechanical characteristics of the variable frequency drives actually supplied in accordance with Division 16, Electrical. E. MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE DETECTION The method of motor over temperature detection shall be as follows. 1. Thermal switches Where selected, thermal switches shall be Normally Closed (NC) and shall be sized by the motor manufacturer to open 10 degrees C below the maximum allowed operating temperature for the insulation class and ambient ratings specified herein. These switches shall be internally series connected by the manufacturer with two insulated leads brought to the motor junction box for user connection. These switches shall be suitable for 120 VAC or 24 VDC control circuit applications at 5 Amps. 2.4 MOTOR PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND DOCUMENTATION Motor overcurrent protection shall be sized by the motor manufacturer. The Contractor shall maintain a spreadsheet or database list of the motor characteristics that are necessary to size, select, and/or set the various motor protective devices, such as thermal overloads, breaker trip devices, motor protection relays, etc., for inclusion in the O&M manuals. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1121 1-6 This list shall also include any additional information needed to set-up, program or adjust the variable frequency drive, or solid state drive (soft start) which serves motor driven equipment. The Contractor shall record the size and/or settings of each motor protective device and drive configuration. In addition, the Contractor shall take a digital photo of each motor nameplate when the motor arrives at the jobsite. Spreadsheet of motor nameplate information, motor settings, drives configuration (if applicable), and photo of each nameplate shall be included in the O&M manuals. 2.5 FACTORY PUMP TESTS Perform certified factory performance tests in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Level A Test Standards for each pump. Provide the Owner with these test results. Upon receipt of the Owner's approval, the pumps may be shipped to the job site. Notify the Owner of testing dates as the representative may wish to witness pump tests. Tests shall be sufficient to determine the curves for capacity, Kilowatt input horsepower, water horsepower, and overall efficiencies for heads from shut off to a point beyond the minimum specified head for the pumping units. Sufficient test data shall be submitted to enable computation and plotting of curves for brake horsepower and pump efficiency for full range operation. A minimum of four points, including shutoff, shall be taken for each test run. One point of the four shall be taken as near as possible to the rated condition of head and discharge. One point shall be taken near the maximum capacity point of the standard curve. Discharge shall be expressed in gallons per minute on the curves. Five certified copies of the curves showing the results of the factory shop performance and hydrostatic tests, shall be famished to the Owner's representative for approval. Shipment of the pumping units shall not be made until the Owner has approved the test data curves. 2.6 SPARE PARTS The booster pumps shall be supplied with one set of manufacturer's spare parts in labeled wooden boxes, with moisture protection and labeled contents. The spare parts shall include: 1 Set Mechanical Seals for Each Pump Type City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-7 I Set Gaskets for Each Pump Type 1 Set Bearing for Each Pump Type i Set Pipe Seals for Each Pump Type 2.7 PAINTING Pumps and motors shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900-2.2 B. of these Specifications. Nameplates, drain holes, vent openings, or lubrication fittings shall not be painted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Booster pumps shall be installed as shown on the Plans and in strict accordance with the pump manufacturer's recommendations. Pump bases shall be securely anchored to the concrete using stainless steel bolts in size and strength to that as recommended by the Manufacturer. The space between the concrete and the pump base shall be filled with non-shrink grout. The pump base shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout. The Contractor shall take special care in handling and installing new pumps. All manufacturer's recommendations and instructions shall be followed to ensure protection of pump seals, bearings, shafts, and motors. Final alignment must be performed at the jobsite by the pump supplier in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and the pump installation, operation and maintenance instructions. The alignment shall be aligned by a Laser alignment method with an electronically generated report. The Contractor shall make certain the suction and discharge lines are free from debris, metal shavings, wire, etc., that would easily damage the pumps. The pumps shall be tested at start-up and voltage, current, pressure, flow and other significant parameters recorded. The Manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and forms for recording data. 3.2 FIELD TESTING Field-test all pumps for conformance with the design conditions in this section. See Section 01800 for additional operational testing requirements. The Contractor shall employ an independent pump vibration testing company to perform initial vibration testing of the pumps. Contractor shall provide all records to Owner for review and approval. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-8 After installation within the booster station, the pumping unit shall be subjected to a field running test under actual operating conditions. The field test shall be made by the Contractor and pump supplier in the presence of and as directed by the Owner or Engineer. The field test shall demonstrate under all conditions of operation that the pump assembly: 1. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation. 2. Has been properly installed. 3. Has no mechanical defects. 4. Is in proper alignment. 5. Has been properly connected. 6. Is free of overheating of any parts. 7. Is free of all objectionable vibration, as specified in Section 11010. 8. Is free of excessive noise. 9. Is free of overloading of any parts. 10. Shall operate as specified with the specified control system. 11. Is free of critical speeds. 12. Meets the specified design criteria. Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet requirements of the Specification shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor and/or pump supplier. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES The services of a factory-trained representative of the booster pump manufacturer shall be provided. Services shall include 1 day (one visit) on site for the supervision of equipment startup, testing and instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, and the cost of these services shall be included in the bid price. The representative shall be available for two additional service calls during the initial 1-year period of operation. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 11211-9 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13417 PRESSURE GAUGES PART ] GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing new suction and discharge pressure gauges, as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Discharge pressure gauges shall include all necessary connectors and hardware on all process piping for pumps, blowers, fans, and compressors and at the various locations for a complete and workable installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 11000 Equipment General Provisions 15050 Pining Cvatem- Division 15 Mechanical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Name Number 01 PRV 01 Suction Side 01 P 01 01 PRV 01 Discharge Side 01 P 02 01 BP 01 Suction Side 01 P 03 01 BP 01 Discharge Side 01 P 04 01 BP 02 Suction Side 01 P 05 01 BP 02 Discharge Side 01 P 06 01 BP 03 Suction Side 01 P 07 01 BP 03 Discharge Side 01 P 08 0 t BP 04 Suction Side 01 P 09 01 BP 04 Discharge Side 01 P 10 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Pressure gauges shall be capable of measuring the following pressure ranges: Location Pressure Rai= Suction Side 0-160 psi Discharge Side 0-;160 psi City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13417-1 Unless otherwise indicated, the discharge pressure gauge scales shall be selected so that the normal operating pressure falls between 50 and 80 percent of full scale. The suction pressure gauges on pumps, blowers, and compressors shall be equivalent to the discharge pressure gauges with a lower range of 30-inch IT,-. Pressure scale range for each pressure gauge shall be in the form of a summary table including all process piping pressure gauges. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, skid mounted, crated and delivered to protect against damage during shipment. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide an extended warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for 2 years following the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be in printed form, shall apply to all similar units, and shall include parts and labor. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft Duragage 1279, or approved equal. The structural, mechanical and electrical designs shown on the Plans are based on the equipment manufactured by Ashcroft. Any modifications to the mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation and control and other portions of work that may be required to adapt the general layout and details shown on the Plans to the equipment actually furnished shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary revisions shall be made at Contractor's sole expense. All redesign information prepared by the contractor shall be submitted for review prior to incorporating the redesign into the work. 2.2 GENERAL The pressure gauges shall be glycerin filled type and shall have all internal parts immersed. Pressure gauges shall be minimum 4 1/2-inch dial size, with non-metallic case, stainless steel bourdon tube with plastic bushings and pinion, and stainless steel selector. Gauges shall be ANSI grade A or better with an accuracy of±0.5 percent. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13417-2 Gauges measuring liquids shall be supplied with bronze pressure snubbers. 2.3 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools. All parts and tools shall be suitably identified and effectively protected from moisture and corrosion with appropriate wrappings or coatings or a combination thereof. All parts and tools shall be faruished in sturdy labeled boxes. At a minimum these shall include all special tools and appliances necessary to service, repair, and adjust the equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The pressure gauges and accessories shall be installed as shown on the Plans and as specified herein and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING The equipment shall be fully tested at the manufacturer's plant before shipment. Tests shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under anticipated field conditions. Certified copies of test report(s) shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. 3.3 FIELD TESTING The Contractor shall perform the field testing described in Sections 01800 and 11000. The field test shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under field conditions. The manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and report forms for recording data. The Contractor shall submit the report forms to the Engineer prior to operational testing. Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet requirements of the Specification shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13417-3 SECTION 13419 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing pressure transmitter as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The pressure transmitters shall be complete with all necessary accessories and hardware for a complete and workable installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training 11000 Equipment General Provisions Division 16 Electrical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Name Number Suction Piping 01 PT 01 Discharge Piping 01 PT 02 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The pressure transmitters shall be provided with the following pressure range for the specified applications and locations. Parameter Value Reference Accuracy (percent of span) 0.065% Long Term Stability (2 year max, percent) 0.1% of URL Span Drift(percent) None measurable .._..... ........ Turndown Capacity 100:1 _.m.m.............. __._.______--...___w Total Response Time 100 ms Pressure Range 0— 300 psig Measurement Media Water Maximum Media Temperature 100 V City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13419-1 1.5 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide an extended warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for 2 years following the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be in printed form, shall apply to all similar units, and shall include parts and labor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, crated and delivered to protect against damage during shipment. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The pressure transmitter shall be Emerson Rosemount Model 205IT, Siemens SITRANS P DS 111, or ABB Model 266 HSH. No other manufacturers or models shall be accepted. 2.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER The pressure transmitter shall be a digital transmitter with piezoresistive or capacitance-based sensor and Type 316 stainless steel diaphragtn seal. The pressure sensitive element shall be Type 316 stainless steel, silicone oil filled, and shall be calibrated for the range as specified in the performance Requirements. The transmitter pressure sensor shall be protected from the effects of pressure swings and spikes up to the maximum working pressure (body rating) of the pressure capsule. The process connection shall be Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch diameter, NPT 14 thread. The process connection shall be connected to a Type 316 stainless steel block-and-bleed manifold with a Type 316 stainless steel isolation valve and a bleed vent. The manifold shall permit removal of the sensor for maintenance or replacement with minimal leakage of process air during compression removal of the sensor. The transmitter shall be a true two-wire loop-powered device, 24 VDC, without the requirement of a separate power supply at the transmitter. The unit shall be modular plug-in designs. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13419-2 i The non-wetted transmitter housing shall be stainless steel and shall meet NEMA 4X standards. The pressure transmitters shall display the measured pressure on the front of the unit enclosure and all units shall have a menu-driven keyboard on the front panel of the transmitter. The transmitter shall have an LCD display for indicating the pressure in real engineering units (psig). The display shall be rotatable in 90 degree increments. The unit shall be capable of recalibration in the field by the menu-driven keyboard. The keyboard shall allow for viewing control of results, the error messages, the operating modes, and the digital display. The controller shall be supplied with one isolated 0/4-20 mA standard DC (direct current) analog output; with 0.004 mA (12-bit) resolution and capability to drive up to 500 Q loads. The digital information shall be evaluated in the microcontroller, its linearity and temperature response corrected and converted in a digital-to-analog converter into an analog output current. The transmitter shall have the ability to electronically compensate for the effects of mounting position on the sensor. Furthermore, the transmitter shall be able to force the loop current to various values to aid in loop setup and testing. The transmitter shall have online diagnostics and registers to detect and store various parameters such as ruin/max electronics temperature, min/max pressure, capsule temperature, and min/max process pressure to help diagnose process problems. The transmitter shall also have dual timer registers that allow the transmitter to signal when a settable time has elapsed for preventative maintenance or calibration. Analog instruments shall operate without loss of loop accuracy due to electromagnetic interference, resistive or inductive losses or similar problems related to field interconnection of components when connected with shielded copper wire in the manner shown on the Plans. The pressure transmitters shall be listed and labeled by an electrical testing laboratory recognized by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries or be acceptable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for installation on this project. 2.3 SPARE PARTS The manufacturer shall provide the manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools. All spare parts and tools shall be suitably identified and effectively protected from moisture and corrosion with appropriate wrappings or coatings or a combination thereof. All parts shall be furnished in sturdy labeled boxes. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#16627 13419-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION The pressure transmitters shall be installed at the locations shown on the Plans in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All mounting hardware and supports shall be provided by the Contractor, 3.2 FACTORY TESTING The equipment shall be fully tested at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Tests shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under anticipated field conditions. Certified copies of test report(s) shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. 3.3 FIELD TESTING The Contractor shall perform the field testing described in Sections 01800 and 11000. The field test shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under field conditions. The manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and report forms for recording data. The Contractor shall submit the report forriis to the Engineer prior to operational testing. Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet requirements of the Specification shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES The services of a factory-trained representative of the pressure transmitter manufacturer shall be provided. Services shall include a minimum of 1 day on site. Services shall include inspection and supervision of installation, initial configuration, programming, startup, and adjustments and instruction of the Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance for the pressure transmitters. Instruction and training of the Owner's_personnel shall not take place until startup is complete and the pressure transmitters are fully operational and shall be at a time and location agreed to by the Owner. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13419-4 SECTION 13426 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing magnetic flow meters as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The flow meters shall include all necessary accessories and hardware for a complete and workable installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training 11000 Equipment General Provisions Division 16 Electrical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Equipment numbers are as follows: Item Equipment Number Suction Piping Flow Meter 01 FE 01 Bypass Piping Flow Meter 01 FE 02 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The magnetic flow meters shall have a minimum accuracy of t0.5 percent of the flow rate at velocities of 3.0 ft/sec'or greater. The flow meters shall be provided with the following size and flow range for the specified application and location. Size mFlow Range Transmitter Flow Meter (inches) (¢pm) Location -----....-..----------- ._...............'_.. ..........,�......_�............. _.................. MFM 0l 16 100-10,000 Integral _ ........................—— MFM 02 6 30-3,000 Integral The liquids to be measured will be potable water varying in temperature from approximately 50 degrees F to 100 degrees F. City of Kent 640 Zone Boogtor Station G&o#16627 13426-1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, crated and delivered to protect against damage during shipment. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide an extended warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for 2 years following the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be in printed form, shall apply to all similar units, and shall include parts and labor. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The magnetic flow meters and transmitter shall be ABB Water Master, no equal. 2.2 GENERAL The magnetic flow meters shall be of the low frequency and short form coil design. The field principle of electromagnetic induction shall produce a positive DC pulsed signal directly and linearly proportional to the liquid flow rate. The metering tube shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel with Class 150 ANSI flanged end connections. Electrodes can either be protruding (bullet nose) or flush for the meters, but shall be of Type 316 stainless steel, HastelloyD, or zirconium constriction. The material of construction of the liner shall be NBR hard rubber, Neoprene rubber or chloroprene rubber. The meter shall secure its power from the transmitter. No electronics shall be mounted in the meterhng tube of the magnetic flow meter. The transmitters shall be integral to the flow head where specified in Part 1.4. Transmitter shall be interchangeable without reprogramming the meters or disconnecting the cables. The transmitters shall convert the output signal from the flow meters and transmit the signal via an isolated analog 4-20 mA signal directly proportional to flow rate. The transmitter shall have automatic zero correction. The transmitters shall be designed to operate from a 120 VAC, power source. The transmitters shall generate power for the flow tube. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13426-2 The transmitters shall produce a totalization of flow dry contact output pulse signal or opto-isolated transistor pulse signal, which is directly and linearly proportioned to totalization of flow and which is suitable for use with a 24 VDC discrete input with an input impedance of at least 2 M. The minimum pulse duty cycle shall be adjustable to be at least 250 ms. The magnetic flow meter tube and transmitter shall be NEMA 3R. The units shall be listed and labeled by an electrical testing laboratory recognized by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries or be acceptable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for installation on this project. Each meter system shall be wet-calibrated at the manufacturer's facility against the master system. A calibration certificate shalt be furnished for each meter. Provide grounding rings or grounding electrodes with each flow meter as required to maintain the specified accuracy. The flow meters shall be capable of accidental submergence to 3 feet for a period of 30 minutes. 2.3 ANALOG INSTRUMENTATION The flow meters shall be of the manufacturer's latest design. The equipment shall have 4 to 20 milliamperes standard DC (direct current) isolated floating outputs and shall conform to ISA 50.1. Each output shall be provided with adjustments for gain and bias. The resultant output shall be 4-20 mA DC into approximately 750 oluns. Accuracy shall be ±0.25 percent of full scale output. Analog instruments shall operate without loss of loop accuracy due to electromagnetic interference, resistive or inductive losses or similar problems related to field interconnection of components when connected with shielded 2/conductor#18 gauge copper wire in the manner shown on the Plans. 2.4 SPARE PARTS All spare parts shall be suitably identified and effectively protected from moisture and corrosion with appropriate wrappings or coatings or a combination thereof. All parts shall be furnished in sturdy labeled boxes. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING The equipment shall be fully tested at the manufacturer's plant before shipment. Tests shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under anticipated City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13426-3 field conditions. Certified copies of test report(s) shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. PART EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION The flow meters shall be installed as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. If ground rings are required to maintain the specified accuracy, they shall be installed with the units and bonded to grounding conductor where recommended or required by the Manufacturer. 3.2 FIELD TESTING The Contractor shall perform the field testing described in Sections 01800 and 11000. The field test shall insure that the equipment will operate as desired under field conditions. The manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and report forms for recording data. The Contractor shall submit the report forms to the Engineer prior to operational testing. Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet requirements of the Specification shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES The services of a factory-trained representative of the magnetic flow meter manufacturer shall be provided. Services shall include a minimum of 1 day onsite. Services shall include inspection of the installation, initial configuration, programming, startup, and adjustments and instruction of the Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance. Instruction and training of the Owner's personnel shall not take place until startup is completed and the magnetic flow meters are fully operational and shall be at a time and location agreed to by the Owner. The representative shall provide for two additional service calls during the initial 2 years of equipment operation. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13426-4 SECTION 13433 CHLORINE ANALYZER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing the chlorine analyzer, sample return pump, water storage tank, and associated piping as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The chlorine analyzer system shall include all necessary appurtenances for a complete and workable installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training 11000 Equipment General Provisions Division 16 Electrical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Name Number Chlorine Analyzer 01 CLA 01 Chlorine Analyzer Recirculating Pump 01 CAP 01 Chlorine Analyzer Water Storage Tank 01 RP 01 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The chlorine analyzer shall meet the following requirements: Operating Ranae Resolution 0 - 5 mg/L Chlorine 0.01 mg/L Accuracy: +/- 5% 1.5 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide an extended warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for 2 years following the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be in printed form, shall apply to all similar units, and shall include parts and labor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 13433-1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CHLORINE ANALYZER The chlorine analyzer shall be Capital Controls Series 1770. Not will be allowed. The chlorine residual analyzer shall continuously analyze a sample using the amperometric method and produce a current proportional to the chlorine residual in the sample. The wall mounted residual analyzer shall measure 0 to 1 mg/L of free chlorine residual in water, 5 percent of range, The chlorine residual analyzer shall not require any reagent addition and shall have fixed electrodes and a continuous in-situ cleaning system. The amperometric analyzer is EPA approved for on-line chlorine residual monitoring in drinking water. The sample flow to the cell(150 nil/minute) shall be kept constant by a built-in gravity flow regulator and shall have automatic temperature compensation. The ambient and sample temperatures shall be between 0 and 50 degrees C (32 and 120 degrees F) and response time shall be within 4 seconds from sample entry to display indication. The output signal shall be 4-20 mAdc and all electronics shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure with 3-1/2 digit LED display indication. Separate high and low set points shall be provided and shall be adjustable from the front of the unit from 0 to 100 percent of the range. The analyzer shall operate from a 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase power supply. The analyzer shall include a pressure reducing valve assembly, Capital Controls BM-415. The analyzer shall include a flushing Y strainer, Capital Controls BM-5097. The following residual analyzer spare parts shall be provided: One set residual analyzer PVC cleaning spheres. One set residual analyzer O-rings. 2.2 CHLORINE ANALYZER SAMPLE RETURN PUMP The chlorine analyzer sample return pump shall be of the end suction close coupled centrifugal type with an output of 28 gallons per minute at a total City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#i 6627 13433-2 I dynamic head of 85 feet. The pump shall be a Goulds model MCC/1 MC lxl- 1/4x6, or approved equal. Pump shall be designed for indoor use. Pump shall run intermittently, but be rated for continuous duty. Pump shall be powered by 120 VAC, single phase power source. The pump shall nm solely on the float switch located in the chlorine analyzer tank. The pump shall not be controlled with a pressure switch. The pump shall be no larger than 1.5 hp. Provide one spare parts service kit for the pump, including a spare pump head. 2.3 CHLORINE ANALYZER TANK The chlorine analyzer tank shall have a maximum capacity of 120 gallons. It shall be constructed of polyethylene and shall be rotationally molded one piece with rigid walls. Tank shall be provided with a sealing lid. The tank shall be compliant in NSF inspected facilities. The tank shall be a Snyder hidustries Model Number 1003600W, or equal. 2.4 CHLORINE ANALYZER TANK ANCHORING SYSTEM The chlorine analyzer tank anchoring system shall be designed by the tank manufacturer. 2.5 CONTROLS The chlorine analyzer system shall be fully integrated. Control shall be through a two-stage float system that will call the pump to run to draw the collection tank down and turn off when the tank is near empty. Control panel shall be UL Listed. High and Low Level Alarm shall be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The chlorine analyzer system shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 MANUFACTURER SERVICES The services of a factory-trained representative of the chlorine analyzer manufacturer shall be provided. Services shall include a minimum of 1 day onsite. Services shall include inspection of the installation, initial configuration, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13433-3 programming, startup, and adjustments and instruction of the Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance. Instruction and training of the Owner's personnel shall not take place until startup is completed and the magnetic flow meters are fully operational and shall be at a time and location agreed to by the Owner. The cost of these services shall be included in the bid price. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 13433-4 SECTION 13451 PLC PROGRAMMING PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and Operator Interface Unit(ON) programming requirements, internal testing, witness testing, conunissioning, and training responsibilities. All programming shall be by: Systems Interface, Inc. 10802 47`h Avenue West Mukilteo, WA 98275 Attn: Mr. Rob Schommer 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 13452 Human Machine Interface(HMI)Programming 16910 PLC Hardware and Software 1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Reference Specification 16910 for PLC hardware and software procurement. Reference Specification 13452 for HMI programming requirements. 1. The system includes programmed algorithms which run on the PLC hardware to provide a complete and functional process control system for the facility. 2. The system includes programmed screens which run on the OIU hardware to provide status, alarming, and setpoint modification for the process. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Ga 0#16627 13451-1 B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1, The installed system performs the functional and operational algorithms required for control of the process. 2. The installed system allows the operator to view process information and configure operator adjustable parameters in the PLC. 1.4 DEFINITIONS Reference Specification Section 16050. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of Specification Section 01300. B. PRODUCT DATA 1, Submit, at least i month before the start of commissioning, all proposed ON screens including the following: a. Description and pictorial of proposed screen layout(s). b. Description and pictorial of graphic symbols used to represent process equipment. C. Displayed operator configurable parameters and setpoints C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1„ After acceptance of the final programmed product, provide the following: a. Electronic copy of the final annotated source code of system programming, final cross reference, and final 1/0 and register lists. Provide this information on USB memory sticks and/or CDs. i. Annotations include the following: (1) Description of each rung's intended function. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 13451-2 i (2) Description of each coil, contact, timer, counter, or similar function block component. it. Aliasing section where each 1/0 point is aliased to a logical function name. Use dot fields if available. iii. Schedule of system UO including internal register address of each 1/0 point iv. Listing of auxiliary registers and values such as setpoints, operating parameters, control loop tuning parameters, and similar registers or values used, including the following associated data: (1) Each value or parameter with its register type, register address, descriptive name, and function in the program or algoritlmi. b. Include information for obtaining assistance from the programmer. 2. Description of proposed screens including the following data: a. Throughout the programming process, provide intermediate versions of the program to Engineering on request. b. Include documentation detailing Operator control. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS 1. Prograimner has experience successfully programming the PLCs and OIU listed in specification 16910 for a minimum of two projects of similar size and complexity. Utilize one lead PLC programmer for the entire project. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. INSTALLATION AND STARTUP 1. Sequence the installation and startup of the PLC program in coordination with the scheduled startup of portions of the facility. This sequencing may involve startup and operation of portions of City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13451-3 the system under the new control system while monitoring I/O from other portions of the system also on site. Coordinate with Owner to maintain required monitoring and process with minimal coordinated outages. 2. Sequence the installation and startup of the OIU program with the PLC program sequencing. PART 2 PRODUCTS Provide the final complete annotated source code program on USB memory sticks and/or CDs per Section 1.5. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Provide programming to accomplish all control and monitoring requirements indicated or specified. B. PROGRAM ORGANIZATION 1. Organize and format the PLC programs in each processor consistently. 2. Buffer all UO in a cotmnon section of the program. 3. Organize the program by Process Area. 4. Organize the code sections logically within the Process Areas. Annotate each section. 5. Program using ladder logic. 3.2 PROCESS CONTROL ALGORITHM A. MASTER PLC INPUTS The primary function of the PLC at the site will be to monitor analog and digital inputs, and control the booster station motors. The complete list of digital and analog inputs and outputs are detailed on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13451-4 B. PLC PROGRAMMING The following algoritlmis and functions shall be provided in the PLC programming. l. PUMP ROOM a. GENERAL CONDITIONS -Pumps 1 and 2 will be called "on" individually by the water surface elevation (WSE) of the 640 Zone Reservoir. When the reservoir's WSE drops below 635 feet, Pump 1 will be called "on." If the 640 Zone Reservoir continues to drop and reaches 630 feet, Pump 2 will be called "on" and the VFD will synchronize their speeds. If the 640 Zone Reservoir continues to drop and reaches 625 feet, and Pumps 1 and 2 are operating at 100%, either Pump 3 or Pump 4 will be called "on." These inputs shall be operator entry. The WSE drop must hold for 1 minute prior to pump startup. The duration for the WSE drop can be adjusted if the station operation needs to be fine-tuned. The PLC in the BPS will be programmed to alternate the pump starts of Pumps 1 and 2 to exercise the pumps and to even the wear on the pumps and motors. The pumps will be called"off' when the 640 Zone Reservoir's WSE reaches 644 feet. This input shall be operator entry. The VFD will modulate their speeds. All pumps shall be modulated by the VFD to maintain a minimum suction pressure of at least 10 psi (operator entry). Once a pump is started, the VFD will control the speed to maintain a predetermined pressure set point (operator entry). The speed of the pump will be a function of the 640 Zone Reservoir level providing suction-side head, the suction-side head losses as a function of flow, and the flow rate required to maintain the pressure set point. if more flow is required, the VFD will increase the speed of the motor; if less flow is required, the VFD will reduce the speed of the motor. HIGH FLOW CONDITIONS—Pumps 3 and 4 will also be called "on"individually by pressure measured by the pressure transducer on the discharge piping within the BPS City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GB O#16627 13451-5 building indicating a high flow demand in the system. If the pressure drops below a predetermined minimum pressure (operator entry), Pump 3 will be called "on". Once Pump 3 is on, the PLC will monitor the 640 Zone Reservoir's suction piping propeller meter to determine if flow is going into the reservoir. As long as no flow is detected into the reservoir, the VFD will increase the speed of Pump 3 until 100 percent is reached. Once Pump 3 reaches 100 percent Pump 4 will be called "on." When Pumps 3 and 4 are running, the PLC will match pump speeds as long as both pumps are running together. The VFD will increase the speed of both pumps until flow is detected going into the 640 Zone Reservoir. Once flow is detected into the 640 Zone Reservoir, the PLC will monitor the difference in flow between the BPS flow meter and the 640 Zone Reservoir. The VFD will adjust pump speeds to maintain a flow difference of 500 gpm with the additional flow through the BPS meter. The high flow pumps will continue to run until the pressure transducer on the discharge piping within the BPS building reaches a predetermined pressure (operator entry) and holds for a period of time (operator entry). C. ON PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL SCHEMATIC SCREEN REQUIREMENTS The following are general guidelines for schematic OIU screens: a. Dynamically set the color of graphical functions per the table below. Function Color ..._. _...... . -� . ---- .................... .. ... Stopped Per District Standard Running Per District Standard Open Per District Standard Closed Per District Standard ........................................ Al .......... ...... arm Acknowledged Per District Standard ........... ...._... Alarm UnacknowledgedI Per District Standard b, Background shall be light gray; text shall be black. C. Pump Run Time shall be displayed in a tabular format above or below the pumps. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GP.o#16627 13451-6 d. Level—The level shall be graphically displayed on the screen, in feet, with a numeric value shown just to its left. e. Start Sequence Position—The starting sequence of the pumps shall be able to be set from the pump's schematic screen. This shall be accomplished by picking a button labeled "Start Sequence Position." The button shall be located to the left side of the first pump, adjacent to its label. The button shall open a popup screen that will allow the user to associate a pump with a function: "Lead," "Lagl," "Lag2" or"Lag3." This popup screen shall include a "Cancel" and "Confirm" button. The "Cancel" button shall take the user back to the pump's schematic screen without making any changes to the screen. The "Confirm" button shall only be accessible when each pump is associated with only one function. When the "Confirm" button is selected, the pop-up screen shall disappear and the pump's schematic screen shall be active with the new assigned functions. f. All screens shall have a look and layout similar to other City Water facilities. 2. Event Log Screen An event log screen shall be provided that details events and the time they occur. The event screen shall show up to 48 hours of events on each screen. The operator shall be able to scroll forward and back in time to review events. Events shall be color coded for control events, alarm events, and alarm acknowledge events. 3. Alarm Log Screen An alarm log screen shall be provided that summarizes all alarm events. Past alarm events shall be grey. Acknowledged alarm events shall be red. Unacknowledged alarm events shall be flashing red. The operator shall be able to acknowledge all alarms or individual alarms from this screen. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 13451-7 3.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. DESIGN TESTING 1. Operate the program through all possible input paths and check for correct operation including program operation, loop controls, indications, alarm responses, and on/off sequencing control. 2. Simulate or emulate UO conditions to verify proper operation of programming. B. FIELD TESTING, PRIOR TO COMMISS10NING Assist in PLC commissioning. Provide a PC and software during testing to allow viewing of system parameters. Verify remote communication and transfer of data. Verify proper transfer of data through all networked devices. Test and calibrate PLC scaling against actual instruments. 1. Assist in verifying all field UO connectivity.. 2 Test all analog UO scaling and internal setpoints against actual instruments. 3. Test proper control operation of program. 4. Test PLC.communication and process data and control with all networked devices (OIU, HMI, motor starters, etc.). C. FIELD TESTING, DURING COMMISSIONING Provide for programming personnel to be present on site at startup of the system(s): 1. Demonstrate PLC communication and process data and control with all networked devices (OIU, HMI, motor starters, etc.). 2. Demonstrate proper operation of the process control program, alarming functions, and setpoint input functions with the Process Engineer and the Owner. 3. Make adjustments to parameters, setpoints, and program as required to satisfy control requirements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#t 6627 13451-8 4. Provide Owner with a written statement that software program appl ication has been properly started up, operates per requirements, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. D. DEMONSTRATION Demonstrate the system in accordance with Section 01800 "Testing, Commissioning, and Training." E. ON-SITE TRAINING 1. Provide the following formal training sessions at the Owner's facility for Owner's operating and maintenance personnel by an instructor familiar with both the manufacturer's commercially available applications provided, and the specific progranmled applications provided for this project, after the system has successfully completed commissioning and acceptance procedures. a. Initial 4 hours of training during startup. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13451-9 SECTION 13452 HMI PROGRAMMING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of Human Machine Interface (HMI) and peripheral support device programming, internal testing, witness testing, commissioning, and training responsibilities. All programming shall be by: Systems Interface, Inc. 10802 47t" Avenue West Mukilteo, WA 98275 Attn: Mr. Rob Schommer 1.2 P.UL TE^ `NORKS SPEC:FIE^ ELSE *'HERE Section item 01300 Submittals 13451 PLC Programming 16910 PLC Hardware and Software Procurement 1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements 1, Program new algorithms, screens, pop-up windows, data storage, and alarm features for the HMI computer as described herein. 2. The style of additional screens shall match the overall appearance of existing HMI screens for other similar facilities in the City's water system. 1.4 DEFINITIONS Reference specification 16050. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of Section 01300, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13452-1 B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit, at least 1 month before the start of commissioning, all proposed IIMI screens including the following: a. Description and pictorial of proposed screen layout(s). b. Description and pictorial of graphic symbols used to represent process equipment. C. Displayed operator configurable parameters and setpoints C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Final copies of annotated computer system configuration,. Annotations include: a. Logins and passwords b. Protocols installed and associated configurations. C. Services installed and associated configuration. d. Description of the functions and controls on each screen. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS 1. The Contractor shall have programmed two similar applications. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. INSTALLATION AND STARTUP 1. Sequence the installation and startup of the HMI programming in coordination with the scheduled startup of portions of the system and the PLC programming. This sequencing may involve startup and operation of portions of the system under the new control system while other portions remain in operation under an older control system. Provide for operation of the new and revised portions of the plant under the new control system, while City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13452-2 maintaining operation of other parts of the facility under the old system until they are moved onto the new system. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATION A. CREATE TAG NAME DATABASE AND SCRIPTS 1. Provide programming to accomplish all operator control and monitoring requirements indicated or specified in Specification Section 13451 —PLC Programming. 2. Provide system programming required for communication between facilities via selected telemetric technology. B. PROGRAM ORGANIZATION 1. Organize and format additions to the tag name database logically a .._.,..._.:.,, .u,. auu wii3io wuuy vviui yin, a. Assign tag names in a consistent manner which identifies the general purpose of the actual variables. b. Programming and annotation for any given program or script shall be formatted and organized similarly to other comparable scripts in the system. 2. Organize and format the screens logically and consistently. a. Assign screen names in a consistent manner which identifies the general purpose of the screen. b. Objects, symbols, cells, and screens denoting similar equipment, systems, or plant processes shall be formatted and displayed similarly in the system. hi addition, new objects shall be displayed and formatted similarly to the existing ones. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#16627 13452-3 3. Create the program to utilize system memory and resources in an efficient and logical manner. a. Assign or use tag names, scripts, and memory space to minimize complexity, and memory space, but not at the expense of logical order or function. C. PROCESS DESCRIPTION 1. Review the process algorithm descriptions in Section 13451 and coordinate the program and screens with the requirements described therein. Provide displays or screens for information described there and identified on the UO tables of the Plans. 2.2 HMI PROGRAMMING AND SCREENS A. GENERAL 1. Error Traps a. Include error traps to prevent miskeyed or erroneous values from being entered into the system. This includes items such as, but not limited to: i. Non-numerical keystrokes or entries for numerical values. ii,. Values outside expected ranges, iii, Provide warning when low setpoints being higher than high setpoints. iv. Provide warning when high setpoints being lower than low setpoints. b. Include confirmation steps for operator entered values such that entry of a new value is a two-step process requiring entry of the number plus a confirmatory keystroke not likely to occur by accident. 2. Alarm Groups a. Alarm groups shall be assigned according to the process areas of the facility. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13452-4 b. Tag names shall be assigned to alarm groups in accordance with the location of the equipment with which they are most closely associated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COMPUTER CONFIGURATION A. Install HMI software and licenses on HMI computers. B. Install alarm dialer software and licenses on HMI computers. C. Configure system for remote access. 3.2 HMI PROGRAMMING The HMI software shall be programmed to provide the screen displays and functionality as described in the following sections. In addition to the functions A..scr. L-CA L,_l.___. A._ IINAI _ ..L._ll L,_ —_,__.:A-A ._.:aL -11 _f d_._ Ll.._..L:_._.. _P�l__ ul.Jl.l lulu ul.LV w, Lul lllvll JYJLllll Juau .1 VILJv ul.0 "HAI ail 01 LIIV 1LIlll LlVlIJ Vl ulc current HMI system. A. VO ADDITIONS 1. Display all I/O which are identified in the plans as having a display requirement, B. GENERAL SCHEMATIC SCREEN REQUIREMENTS The following are general guidelines for Schematic HMI Screens: 1. Colors of graphical functions such as running status and alarming shall match that of the Operator Interface Unit described in Specification 13451, 2. Modify existing event log and alarm screens as necessary, 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstrate the system in accordance with Section 01800 "Testing, Commissioning, and Training." City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13452-5 B. ON-SITE TRAINING 1. Provide the following formal training sessions at the Owner's facility for Owner's operating and maintenance personnel by an instructor familiar with the both the manufacturer's commercially available applications provided, and the specific programmed applications provided for this project, after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. a. Initial 4 hours of training during startup. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 13452-6 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14620 TROLLEY HOISTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes fumishiig and installing new Trolley Hoists as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section item 01300 Submittals 05120 Structural Steel 09900 Painting Division 11 Equipment 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Equipment numbers are as follows: Item Equipment Number Pump Room Trolley Hoist 01 TH O1 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The trolleys and hoists shall have the following characteristics: Lifting Max. Capacity Height Headroom Hoist (tons) (ft) (inches) Ol TH Ol 1-1/2 8 16 Lifting height shall be defined as the distance between the bottom of the trolley beam to the top of the lowest piece of equipment to be lifted. The Contractor shall provide adequate length of lifting cable to satisfactorily lift this piece of equipment. Maximum headroom shall be defined as the distance between the bottom of the trolley beam and highest elevation of the trolley hoist hook. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 14620-1 1.5 SUBMITTALS In addition to the general Submittal requirements, the following shall be submitted: A. The make, model, and weight of each trolley and hoist equipment assembly. B. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of construction, and specifications on trolley and hoist drive systems, monorail track stops, wheels, shafting, gear and bearings, hooks, brakes, and accessories. 1.6 WARRANTY The manufacturer shall provide a warranty. The warranty shall be valid for a period of 2 years,beginning on the date of substantial completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPRUVLDIVIANUtACIURLRS The trolleys and hoists shall be Yale, Budgit, Columbus McKinnon, or equal. 2.2 TROLLEY A. HAND GEARED TROLLEYS The Trolley Hoists shall have hand-geared trolleys. The Trolleys shall have a rigid lug suspension. The rigid mount trolleys shall be designed for especially for use with lug suspended hoists. The trolleys shall attach directly to lug brackets on the hoists, thereby forming an integral trolley-hoist combination. The trolley shall be of all steel construction. The wheels shall have hardened treads and operate on ball bearings for easy travel. The hand chain operated wheel shall turn a pinion which meshes with wheel gears for ease of operation and accurate spotting. The chain guide shall keep the chain aligned with the wheel and help prevent fouling. The wheel gears and drive pinion shall have machine cut teeth. The trolleys shall be equipped with anti-tilt rollers designed to eliminate tilting of the trolley on the beam when operating with a light load or no load. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 14620-2 2.3 HOIST A. MANUAL HOISTS The hoists shall be hand chain hoists. The hoist frame shall be impact resistant, lightweight,heat-treated,permanent mold cast aluminum alloy, The frame shall be designed primarily for rigidity to hold the gears and bearings in perfect alignment. The frame shall be provided with covers enclosing all operating parts protecting them from dirt and weather. The hand chain wheel shall be a two-piece pressed steel weldment treated for corrosion resistance. The chain wheel, in addition to having pockets accurately formed to receive the links of the hand chain, shall also form a part of an overload device. The overload device shall be calibrated for the capacity of the hoist and factory installed as an added measure of protection for the load, hoist, and operator. The gearing shall be single reduction straight spur gears. The gears and pinions shall be generously proportioned and precision cut from alloy steel and heat-treated for maximum strength and durability. All gears shall be grease packed in a grease tight gearcase. The hoist shall be equipped with an automatic, screw actuated, Weston- type load brake that shall hold under all conditions and permit fine smooth control in lowering. The brake shall be self-adjusting with long wearing friction washers. The load sprocket and gear shall be machined from a one-piece forging. The chain guide shall be heat-treated, spring steel, flexible guide which shall provide heat-treated smooth surfaces that flex in the firame, controlling the load without binding. The load chain shall be closely calibrated chain links of special analysis alloy steel formed and heat-treated for unusual strength case hardened to]- long wear and usage. The links shall be accurately formed to fit the pockets of the load sprocket. The hoist shall also be equipped with a hoist chain container. The hand chain shall be welded steel plated for corrosion resistance. The chain links shall be accurately formed to 6t the pockets of the chain wheel for gag-resistant operation in the chain wheel and guide arrangement. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 14620-3 The hooks shall be drop forged steel and shall be tough and ductile so that they will open noticeably when subjected to excessive overload. The hooks shall be equipped with hook latches. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. GREASE FITTINGS The manufacturer shall extend all grease fittings into one location on the platform side of the trolley, so that it shall be possible to service all lubrication areas from this location. B. LIFTING LUGS Equipment weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. 2.5 FIELD TESTS The Contractor shall conduct field load tests with the equipment in its installed position. Tests shall include a load test in compliance with OSHA requirements allA Aci--ons,r—, -_ — 1-- '1--------- 1—----'--a,-]- ------'------- '--' ---�]�]-- �'-- allU lLG1fIV115 Li aL1V11 LV LIX L1lg Ml Cl L11dL u1111G1 L1ll5111de llntti-a 110ad COhditiO 1 Llle equipment performs satisfactorily throughout the complete range of operation. Provide a written report to the Engineer of the field test results. 2.6 DATA PLATES Data plates shall contain the manufacturer's name, hoist size and type, serial number, speed, capacity, and other pertinent data in accordance with Section 11000 (2.9). Data plates shall not be painted. 2.7 PAINTING Exposed metal surfaces of equipment and accessories specified herein shall be shop primed. Preparation of metal surface and application of manufacturer's standard primer shall be as specified in Section 09900 of these Specifications. Final painting shall be as specified in Section 09900 (2.2.13) of these Specifications. The type of primer shall be coordinated with the final paint system. All factory painted equipment shall have documentation provided on the equipment concerning the paint applied, coating thickness, product name and date of coating application. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 14620-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Trolley Hoist erection, including hoist and trolley assembly, and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. The equipment shall be provided with all necessary lubrication fittings and lubrication. Before the initial startup at the final installation, all bearings, gears, etc., shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 14620-5 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SECTION 15050 PIPING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section describes process and utility piping, fittings, supports, and accessories shown on the Plans, described in these Specifications and as required to completely interconnect all equipment with piping for complete and operable systems. The Contractor shall direct the attention of all subcontractors and suppliers of piping systems and related appurtenances for the work to the applicable provisions in the Contract Documents wherever they may occur. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 02250 Temporary Shoring and Bracing 02300 Earthwork 02511 Connection to Existing System 09900 Painting 15400 Plumbing 1.3 STANDARDS FOR THE WORK Pipe, fittings, and supports shall be provided to produce complete, operable systems with all elements properly interconnected as shown on the Plans, in schematic diagrams or as necessary to provide specified operations. If a specific dimensioned location is not shown for interconnections or smaller system elements, the Contractor shall determine appropriate locations as approved by the Engineer. Piping systems and materials shall be new and without imperfections and shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner; aligned, leveled, cleaned and adjusted for satisfactory operation; installed in accordance with the best standard practices for this type of work so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be readily made and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. In order to meet these requirements minor deviation from the Plans may be made as approved by the Engineer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15050-1 1.4 PIPE MATERIALS The materials to be utilized for the various pipe sizes and applications on the project shall be as follows, unless otherwise noted on the Plans or herein: Process Inside Buried Drain D Solvent Welded PVC(80) Cast Iron, No Hub Perforated Drain PERF --------- Perforated PVC Water>2" W Ductile Iron, FL Ductile Iron,NIJ Sample S Solvent Welded PVC(80) -------- 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submittal data shall be supplied in accordance with Section 01300. Submit data to show that the following items conform to the Specification requirements: A. Pipe, fittings, and accessories. B. Valves. C. Couplings and couplers. D. Pipe supports and seismic braces. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Pipe sizes are nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted. All materials delivered to the job site shall be new, free from defects, and marked to identify the material, class and other appropriate data such as thickness for piping. Acceptance of materials shall be subject to strength and quality testing in addition to inspection of the complete product. Acceptance of installed piping systems shall be based on inspection and leakage tests as specified in Part 3—Execution of this Section. All water piping shall be certified under NSF 61 for potable water use. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-2 2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron water pipe shall be delivered to the site with the ends wrapped or with pipe plugs and these shall remain in place until the pipe is installed. Ductile iron pipe shall be centrifugal cast pipe conforming to AWWA C151, Class 52, unless otherwise noted. The pipe interior shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104, lined to a minimum thickness of 1/1 6-inch meeting NSF standards for potable water. All flanged spools shall be Class 53. Each length shall be plainly marked with the manufacturer's identification, year, cast, thickness, class of pipe and weight. Above ground piping shall be flanged joint pipe unless otherwise specified or indicated. Flanged joint pipe shall comply with AWWA C115. Below ground piping shall be push on joint or mechanical joint pipe unless otherwise specified or indicated. Mechanical joint pipe shall comply with AWWA Clll. Below ground restrained pipe joints shall be restrained with TR FLEX© gaskets as furnished by U.S. Pipe, or equal. Gripper rings are not acceptable. All mechanical joints shall be restrained joints with a restrainer. The mechanical joint restrainer shall utilize the full circumference of the pipe for restraining and utilize standard MJ gaskets and bolts. The mechanical joint restraint device shall have a working pressure of at least 250 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2:1. The restrainer shall be Grip Ring as manufactured by Romac Industries, Mega-Lug as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., or equal. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall comply with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, cement mortar lined, 350-psi minimum pressure. Fittings shall be mechanical joint for below ground applications and flanged joint for above ground applications. Fittings shall not be "Tyton" or other push-on type joint. The exterior of buried ductile iron pipe and pipe in contact with concrete shall be coated with an asphaltic coating. The exterior surface of ductile iron pipe inside of buildings, structures, and vaults shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 of the Specifications. All bolts, buried and unburied, shall be coated with Armite Anti-Seize Compound No. 609, or equal, prior to installation. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 15050-3 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. GRAVITY Gravity PVC sewer or drain pipe shall be solid wall PVC pipe or approved equal. Gravity PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3034 (I 5-inchand smaller) or ASTM F679 (18-inch and larger), for standard dimension ratio (SDR) 35 pipe. PVC pipe and fittings shall be furnished with integral, gasketed, bell-and-spigot,push-on type joints conforming to ASTM D3212. Elastomeric gaskets shall have a solid cross-section, be factory-installed and securely locked in place in the bell, and conform to ASTM F477. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown on the Plans. Nominal laying lengths shall be 13 or 20 feet. B. PRESSURE PIPE All PVC pipe 3-inch and smaller shall be Schedule 80. Pipe shall be constructed of material that meets or exceeds ASTM D2241 and D1784 and Cormnercial Standard CS 256. Joints shall be solvent weld with press fit. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466 and D2467 for socket type and ASTM D2464 for threaded pipe. Provisions for pipe expansion shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. C. GROUNDWATER AND SLOTTED DRAIN PIPE Groundwater sub-drain pipe shall be Type 1, Grade 1 PVC, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D1785, socket end. Fittings shall confonii to ASTM D2467, socket ends. Slotted pipe shall have slot perforations symmetrically located in two rows, one on each side of the pipe centerline. Slot perforations shall be located within the lower quadrants of the pipe with slots no wider than 1/8 inch and spaced not to exceed 11 times the perforation width. The perforations shall provide a minimum opening of 0.22 square inches per foot for 4-inch pipe and 0.44 square inches per foot for 6-inch pipe. 2.4 COPPER PIPE Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type K(buried) or Type L or M (aboveground), when used as water service lines, and Type L tube, when used as waste, vent or drainage lines. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-4 2.5 POLYETHYLENE TUBING HDPE tubing for water service shall meet the requirements of AW WA C901. Tubing shall be high molecular mass with a 200 psi rating. Tubing shall be SR 9 (copper tubing size). Fittings shall be brass, either compression or stab type. Stab types fittings shall utilize an internal grip ring and 0-ring seal. Stainless steel liners shall be used when utilizing compression fittings on HDPE tubing. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS A. DISMANTLING JOINT Dismantling joints shall be Romac DJ400 or approved equal. B. FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS Flexible couplings shall be Romac 501 or approved equal. Middle ring and follower shall have fusion bonded epoxy coating. All buried flexible couplings shall be furnished with stainless steel bolts and nuts. Harness lugs and tie bolts for harnessed joints on steel pipe shall comply with AW WA M-11, Third Edition and as shown on the Plans. All buried harnessed joints shall be furnished with stainless steel tie bolts and nuts. C. FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS Flanged coupling adapters shall be Rockwell (Smith-Blair) Type 912 Dresser Style 127 or equal. D. ADAPTER FLANGES Adapter flanges for ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Flange dimensions shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1, 125-lb. pattern. Gasket shall be Buna-N. Setscrews shall be AISI 4140, high strength, low alloy steel. The adapter flanges shall be Uni-Flange Series 400, or equal. E. RESTRAINED FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS Restrained flanged coupling adapters shall comply with AWWA C219 and shall be manufactured of high-strength ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 64-45-12. Gaskets shall be compounded for water service in accordance with ASTM D2000. Restrained flanged coupling adapters shall be Smith- Blair Type 911, Romac RFCA, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-5 F. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AND EXPANSION JOINTS Flexible connectors and expansion joints shall be provided where shown on the Plans. The flexible connectors and expansion joints shall be provided with Class 125 ANSI flanges and be single arch-type multiple ply rubber or synthetic elastomers, complete with steel retaining rings, as manufactured by the Red Valve Company, Inc., the Metraflex Company, or equal. G. DIELECTRIC INSULATED UNIONS Dielectric insulated unions shall be used to connect dissimilar metals. They shall separate the metals so that the passage of more than one percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact, is prevented. Unions shall be of the same material as the pipe to which attached, and pressure and temperature ratings shall be no lower than that of the piping system in which it is installed. H. WALL SLEEVES AND SEALS Wall and/or floor pipe penetrations shall be made by means of a sleeve capable of being bolted directly to the formwork to prevent misalignment. Seal of the atmular space between the can•ier pipe and the sleeve shall be by means of a confined ribber gasket and capable of withstanding 350 psi. Sleeve shall be manufactured from Ductile Iron with an integrally cast waterstop of 1/2-inch minimum thickness and 2-1/2-inch minimum height. Wall sleeves shall be omni*sleeve or equal. Seals for pipe sleeves shall be bolt-up type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the sleeve. When bolts are tightened the rubber sealing elements shall expand to result in a watertight seal. Bolts and pressure plate nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in below grade or "wet" locations, and of carbon steel at other installations. Rubber links shall be suitable for use in water, moist enviromnents, normal atmospheric conditions, and-40 degrees F to 250 degrees F temperatures for standard service. 2.7 HOSES The Contractor shall furnish hoses, nozzles and fittings sized for each yard hydrant and hose bib where shown on the Plans and as described below. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-6 A. HOSE Washdown hose shall be flexible light-duty discharge hose, Gen-Line Series 400, Uniroyal P340 or equal. Size shall be 1-1/4 inch, 1 inch, or 3/4 inch as shown on the Plans. Each section shall be 50-feet long have male and female brass couplings with adapters sized to fit yard hydrants and hose bibs. Each Hose shall have a nozzle. B. NOZZLES, 1-1/4-INCH AND 1-INCH SIZE Nozzles to fit 1-1/4-inch and 1-inch hoses shall be one-piece bronze, with inlet size to match base, 8-inch-long nozzle and 5/16-inch outlet. C. NOZZLES, 3/4-INCH SIZE Nozzles to fit 3/4-inch hoses shall be adjustable thermoplastic, with inlet size to match base, Grainger 1 P650 or equal. 2.8 DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The Contractor shall furnish and install detectable marking tape over all nonmetallic water mains and service pipes as shown on the Plans. The tape shall extend its full length. Detectable marking tape shall be as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products, or equal, and shall be a minimum of 6 inches in width, a minimum of 5 mil (0.0050") overall thickness, and shall have no less than 0.35 mil solid aluminum foil core. The foil shall be visible from both sides of the tape and shall be Safety Blue in color to identify buried water systems and shall be printed to identify same. Printing shall be encased in the plastic jacket to avoid ink rub-off. Adhesives used to bond the plastic jacket to the foil shall not contain any dilutants, pigments, or contaminants and shall be specifically formulated to resist degradation by elements normally encountered in the soil. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish and install 14-gauge coated copper wire, taped to the top of nonmetallic water main and service pipe. The wire shall be brought up and tied off in valve boxes and meter boxes (as applicable). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. GENERAL HANDLING AND PLACING All types of pipe shall be handled in a manner that will prevent damage to the pipe, pipe lining, or coating. Pipe and fittings shall be loaded and unloaded using hoists and slings in a manner to avoid shock or damage, and under no circumstances shall they be dropped, skidded, or rolled against other pipe. If any part of the coating or lining is damaged, repair thereof shall be made by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner and in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. Damaged pipe shall be rejected, and the Contractor shall inmiediately place damaged pipe apart from the undamaged and shall remove the damaged pipe from the site within 24 hours. Methods of pipe handling and storage shall be corrected by the Contractor should the Owner deteniune that these methods are damaging to the pipe. Pipe shall be stacked in such a manner as to prevent damage to the pipe, to prevent dirt and debris from entering the pipe, and to prevent any movement of the pipe. The bottom tiers of the stack shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, or other similar supports. Pipe shall not be strung across driveways, in ditches, or in the construction zone without specific on-site Owner approval. Valves and fittings shall be stored on pallets or similar materials to keep them off the ground and prevent dirt and debris from entering them. All piping constructed on this project shall be performed in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. These Plans do not detail all items such as complete venting, etc.; however, it is understood that this work shall be included as a part of this Section and all costs included in the lump sum bid. Pipe and accessories shall be handled in such a manner as to insure delivery on site in sound, undamaged condition. Particular care taken not to injure pipe coating. No other pipe or material of any kind shall be placed inside of lined pipe or fitting after lining has been applied. All pipe and fittings shall be unloaded, stored, handled in such a manner as to insure against damage. Dropping of pipe or fittings shall be cause for rej ection. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-8 i The types and sizes of pipes to be used shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. Where sizes of small pipe are omitted from the plans and not mentioned in the Specifications, the sizes to be used shall correspond to plumbing code requirements. In any event, undesignated pipe sizes shall be proper for the function to be performed and as accepted by the Engineer. All pipe shall be carefully placed and supported at the proper lines and grades and where possible shall be sloped to permit complete drainage. Piping runs shown on the Plans shall be followed as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features. If major relocations are required, they shall be approved by the Engineer. Unions shall be installed in all threaded joint piping to facilitate the removal of sections for maintenance and repair in accordance with the best trade practice. Unions shall be ground joint, malleable iron type. Where unions connect dissimilar materials, the union shall be protected from reaction with dissimilar metals by installation of insulating materials and dielectric unions at contact points. The interior of all piping shall be cleaned after assembly and before connecting to equipment. All piping for which no location dimensions are shown shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with best trade practice. Wherever possible rums and rises shall be grouped and kept parallel. Properly lay out all miscellaneous piping to clear obstructions such as passageways, equipment, larger sized pipes, ventilation ducts, lights, etc. Whenever pipe requires field cutting to fit in line, work shall be done by a machine in a satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. All piping to be buried below structures, foundations, or slabs shall be installed with extreme care. When all joints have been made, Contractor shall demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction that all of piping is watertight and that all lines are clear before proceeding with any work above this piping. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to see that these lines are kept clear until final acceptance of the project, providing suitable tight wooden bulkheads or plugs for open end pipes. Any blockage of these systems due to earth, debris, cement slurry or anything else shall be rectified at Contractor's expense before project is accepted. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#166z7 15050-9 All pipe shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and/or specifications, and best commercial trade practice. Any special tools required for laying,jointing, cutting, etc., shall be supplied and properly used. All pipe shall be kept thoroughly clean until acceptance of completed work, and shall conform accurately to lines and grades given. At all times during pipe laying operations keep trench free of water either by pumping, bailing, or drainage. Seal end of line with a fight-fining plug when pipe is not being laid. Valves shall have interiors cleaned of all foreign matter and inspected, both in open and closed positions prior to installation. All pipes running through concrete walls below water surface or where subject to groundwater pressure shall be assembled as shown on the plans. Pipes running through concrete not subject to water pressure may be installed through standard steel sleeves, one or two pipe sizes larger than pipe in question. The pipe shall be free of all dirt and grease and thoroughly cleaned to insure a tight bond with the concrete. All buried, submerged, or intermittently submerged piping that is bolted together or uses bolts to hold materials together shall use 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers. This requirement applies to a distance of 12 inches above the highest water level in any tank, channel, or structure. Otherwise, bolts, nuts, and washers may be hot-dip galvanized steel. B. GENERAL EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION Unless shown otherwise, piping shall be installed parallel to building lines, plumb, and level. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing. All pipe flanges shall be set level, plumb, and aligned. All flanged fittings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in flanges shall straddle vertical centerline of pipes. Flexible couplings shall be provided for all piping comiections to motor- driven equipment and where otherwise shown in the Plans. The Contractor may install additional flexible couplings at approved location to facilitate piping installation, provided that he submits complete details describing location, pipe supports, and hydraulic thrust protection. Unions or flexible couplings shall be installed where shown on the Plans, and at all non-motor-driven equipment to facilitate removal of the equipment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-10 Where equipment drain connections are provided, they shall be valved, with the discharge pipe carried to the nearest floor drain, drain trench, or sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, drain valves shall be piped to 1 inch above the floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform to the requirements of the system served. All exposed or submerged piping shall be painted and color-coded in accordance with Section 09900, unless otherwise specified. 3.2 EXCAVATION All earthwork, excavation, bedding, backfill and compaction shall meet the requirements of Section 02300. 3.3 TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING Temporary shoring and bracing, including trench excavation safety systems, shall meet the requirements of Section 02250. 3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION (BELL AND SPIGOT) All bell and spigot connections shall be made up in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and all pipe manufacture and handling shall meet or exceed the AW W A recommended specifications, current revisions. Dirt or other foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe or pipe joint during handling or laying operations, and any pipe or fitting that has been installed with dirt or foreign material in it shall be removed, cleaned, and relayed. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or by other means approved by the Engineer to ensure cleanliness inside the pipe. Pipe handling after the gasket has been affixed shall be carefully controlled to avoid disturbing the gasket and knocking it out of position, or loading it with dirt or other foreign material. Any gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned, relubricated if required, and replaced before the rejoining is attempted. Care shall be taken to properly align the pipe before joints are entirely forced home. Dining insertion of the tongue or spigot, the pipe shall be partially supported by hand, sling or crane to minimize unequal lateral pressure on the gasket and to maintain concentricity until the gasket is properly positioned. Since most flexible gasketed joints tend to creep apart when the end pipe is deflected and straightened, such movement shall be held to a minimum once the joint is home. City of Kont 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15050-11 Sufficient pressure shall be applied in making the joint to assure that it is home, as described in the installation instructions provided by the pipe manufacturer. Sufficient restraint shall be applied to the line to assure that joints once home are held so, until fill material under and alongside the pipe has been sufficiently compacted. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide the degrees of flexibility in the joint following installation. Unless otherwise specified, fusible polyvinylehloride pipe lengths shall be assembled in the field with butt-fused joints. The Contractor shall follow the pipe supplier's written guidelines for this procedure. All fusion joints shall be completed as described in this specification. 3.5 CUTTING PIPE Whenever it becomes necessary to cut a length of pipe, the cut shall be made by abrasive saw or by a special pipe cutter. Pipe ends shall be square with the longitudinal axis of the pipe and shall be reamed and otherwise smoothed so that good corrections can be made. Oxyacetylene torch cutting of ductile iron pipe shall not be allowed. The Contractor shall have the approval from the Owner and notification shall be given to the Owner before any pipe cutting on existing water mains will be allowed. The Contractor shall comply with all the conditions established by the Owner. The Contractor shall give the Owner a minimum notice of 48 hours before cutting any water main. No pipe cutting will be allowed on holidays or weekends, unless specifically agreed to by the Owner. 3.6 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM Connection to existing system work shall be as specified in Section 02511. The Contractor shall notify (i.e., door hangers) all of the Owner's customers who will experience a scheduled service interruption. The notices shall be hand delivered not less than 48 hours or more than 72 hours before the scheduled "shutdown." 3.7 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING Fittings shall be adequately"blocked" with poured-in-place concrete,poured within wooden forms shaped to establish a firm minimum bearing area, against an undisturbed earth wall as shown on the Plans. Timber blocking or dry blocking will not be permitted. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster station G&O#16627 15050-12 Concrete thrust and/or anchor blocking, as indicated on the Plans, shall be placed at bends, tees, dead ends, crossed, and as designated by the Engineer. Blocking shall be 3,000 psi concrete mix cast in place. All concrete thrust blocking configurations and sizes shall be per the Plans. The poured in place concrete thrust and/or anchor blocks shall be in place at least 24 hours before beginning the pressure test, to allow the concrete to set. Longer durations may be required to insure adequate curing has been established to conduct the necessary testing. All blocking dimensions shown on the Plans are considered as minimums with the ideal trench excavation results, and consideration shall be given to unusual circumstances, soil conditions, and topography. All valves and all fittings requiring a concrete block shall first be covered with 4-mil Visqueen plastic sheets, before concrete is poured. At no time shall the concrete be allowed to cover joints, bolt heads, or nuts. 3.8 PVC PIPING PVC piping socket weld connections shall be made up in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: Where pipe is cut, remove all buns and ream inside to provide smooth flow line. Bevel the plain end pipe 1/16 inch to 1/32 inch. Joints shall be first cleaned with cleaner before making up. Apply primer to the female joint. Apply primer to the male joint. Reapply primer to the female joint. Apply glue to the male joint. Apply glue to the female joint. Reapply glue to the male joint. Join pipe quickly with a 114 turn. If joint cannot be made up to full depth of socket, cut out and discard. Wipe off excessive cement. Hold for 30 seconds and do not move for 15 minutes after making up joint. Pipe joining below 40 degrees F will not be permitted. Cleaner and cement types shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the size of pipe being used. 3.9 FLANGED PIPING Flanged joints shall be made in accordance with best trade practice. Screwed flanges for piping shall be run until pipe projects beyond face and no more than one thread is exposed on backside. All flange faces shall then be machined so as to be perfectly parallel. All flanged pipe shall be accurately dimensioned; no "drawing-up" will be allowed. Gaskets shall be full face, rubber. 3.10 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPING Mechanical joint piping shall be installed in best trade practice with torque wrenches used to avoid overstressing bolts. Piping shall be installed using City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-13 recommended procedures outlined in "Handbook of Cast Iron Pipe" as published by Cast Iron Research Association which in part requires that all contact surfaces of rubber seal with pipe be wire brushed, spigot be centrally located in bell. When tightening bolts, it is essential that the gland be brought up toward pipe flange evenly, maintaining approximately same distance between gland and face of flange at all points around socket. 3.11 COPPER PIPE All copper water service lines shall be tested, cleaned, and chlorinated, as described below. All waste, vent or drainage lines shall be flushed clean, and shall be tested by plugging the lowest point and filling the waste, vent or drainage piping with water to the level of the top of the vent pipe, but no joint in the system shall be submitted to a test of less than 10 feet of head. Under this condition, all joints shall remain watertight for a period of not less than 1 hour. Piping shall be pressure-tested with water to a pressure of 125 psi. 3.12 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPING HDPE pipe shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. Pipe trenching shall be done in accordance with ASTM D2321 . Pipe bedding materials shall be Class I or II as specified by ASTM D2321 Section 6. Bedding and compaction rates for pipe installation shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D2321 Section 8. 3.13 PIPE SUPPORTS Provide all necessary supports, tie rods, bracing, brackets or other types of supports which may be required, as shown on the Plans, or as specified in Section 15066. 3.14 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS Flexible couplings shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and used where indicated on the Plans. Finished joint shall be airtight or watertight under test pressure of pipeline. Buried flexible couplings shall be coated with asphalt base paint after assembly. 3.15 HYDRANT ASSEMBLIES Hydrants shall be installed where shown on the Plans. In addition, a minimum 3-foot radius unobstructed working area shall be provided around all hydrants. The sidewalk flange shall be set 2 inches above finished grade. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-14 I All hydrants shall be set on concrete blocks as shown in the Plans. The hydrant barrel drain shall waste into a pit of porous gravel material situated at the base of the hydrant as shown on the Plans. After installation,hydrants, auxiliary gate valves, and other appurtenances shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test and disinfection procedures as specified herein. After all installation, flushing, and testing is complete, the exposed portion of the hydrant shall be field painted with two coats of paint following the manufacturer's recommendations. Paint shall be national standard yellow. Any hydrant not in service shall be identified by covering with a burlap or plastic bag properly secured. 3.16 TESTING A. GENERAL All piping shall be tested and inspected in accordance with the provisions of Division 7 APWA/WSDOT, except as modified herein. Where new piping systems are being connected to existing piping systems the existing piping systems shall be tested prior to connecting to the new pipe to the existing piping. Once the new piping system has been connected to the existing piping system the entire system shall be tested again. All piping systems will be tested to demonstrate leak tightness prior to acceptance. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor necessary to perform all testing required herein, the costs to be included in the lump sum bid price. Each particular piping system shall be tested as hereinafter specified. All leaks shall be repaired or defective material replaced and the test repeated as directed by the Engineer. After compliance with test requirements and approval of the Engineer, the field painting, where required, may be started. All pressure testing shall be done prior to any finish painting or pipe insulating. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage resulting from or caused by Leak testing. All thrust blocks shall be in place for at least 7 days to allow concrete to cure before testing. Install adequate blocking or other means of resisting test pressure. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-15 B. PRESSURIZED LIQUID PIPING Plant potable and non-potable water piping shall be pressurized with water to 125 psig and remain leaktight for a period of 1 hour. All cross connection protection equipment shall be tested by a certified inspector prior to putting the piping into service. Submit test report to Owner. C. DISINFECTION Before being placed into service, all new and modified potable water pipe and appurtenances shall be sterilized and a satisfactory bacteriological report obtained in accordance with Section 7-09.3(24) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. As each pipe is laid, sufficient high-test dry calcium Hypochlorite (65 to 70 percent chlorine) shall be placed in the pipe to yield a dosage of not less than 50 mg/1 available chlorine, calculated on the volume of water which the pipe and appurtenances will contain. Minimum free chlorine residual after 24 hours shall be 25 mg/l. During the process of sterilizing, all valves, hydrants, and/or other appurtenances shall be operated to insure complete contact. All closure Fittings shall be swabbed with a very strong chlorine solution at least as strong as liquid household bleach (5 to 6 percent chlorine). Following chlorination, all pipe shall be flushed to remove any solids until a test shows no more than 0.2 parts per million available chlorine. If no hydrant is installed at the end of the main, then a tap shall be provided large enough to develop a velocity of at least 2.5 FPS in the main. Before placing the lines into service, a satisfactory report shall be received from the local or state health department on samples collected from representative points in the new pipe after the 24-hour sterilization period has elapsed. Samples for bacteriological tests in the presence of the Owner and transported by the Owner. Should the initial treatment result in an unsatisfactory bacteriological test or should corrective work be required because of testing, then the chlorination procedure shall be repeated by the Contractor at his own expense until satisfactory results are obtained. These repeat procedures shall follow Section 7-09.3(24) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, as appropriate and as necessary for the addition of chlorine. The cost of disposal of water used for disinfection shall be borne by the Contractor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15050-16 I 3.17 FLUSHING Flushing shall be done through hydrants or temporary taps. Water for flushing will be available from the Owner's system. The pipes shall be flushed at a minimum velocity of at least 2.5 fps for a sufficient time to insure a minimum of 3 turnouts of water through the pipe and lower the chlorine residual to the background level in Owner's distribution system. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of treated water flushed from the pipelines. The treated water shall be neutralized in accordance with the provisions ofAWWA C651, Appendix B. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t16627 15050-17 SECTION 15100 VALVES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shall consist of valves and accessories as shown on the Plans, described in these Specifications, and as required to completely interconnect all equipment with piping for complete operable systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Payment 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning and Training Division 11 Equipment Division 15 Mechanical 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit Catalog cuts and shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 to demonstrate that the valves and appurtenances conform to the Specifications requirements. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's installation and operation manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists for all valves. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE All materials and equipment furnished under this Section shall be by the manufacturer specified. See Section 15400 for Plumbing specifications and requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE A. EQUIPMENT LIST Item Ecatilmnent Number Bypass Piping Pressure Relief Valve 01 PRV 01 City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15100-1 B. GENERAL Pressure relief valve shall be designed to maintain a constant upstream pressure. The valve shall have an adjustable opening speed and shall close gradually to prevent surges. The valve shall include a check feature. The valve shall be capable of relieving pressures between 20 and 100 psi. The valve shall have a limit switch indicating when the valve is closed. The valve shall be an angle pattern Cla-Val Model 50-01 Pressure Relief Valve, no equal. 2.2 GATE VALVES Gate valves larger than 3 inches shall be ductile iron body, bronze mounted, resilient seat, wedge disc, counterclockwise opening, high-strength bronze stem, double 0-ring complying with AWWA C509 or A W WA C515. Gate valves shall be non-rising stem unless otherwise noted. Valves shall be rated at 250 psi minimum working pressure and furnished with either flanged and/or mechanical joints as shown on the Plans. All surfaces, interior and exterior, shall be epoxy-coated, meeting NSF standards for potable water. Buried Valves shall be provided with a 2-inch square operating nut while exposed valves shall be provided with hand wheels. Above ground gate valves shall be provided with handwheels. Valves shall be Clow, M&H, Mueller, Kennedy, U.S. Pipe, American Series 2500, or equal. 2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES Butterfly valves for liquid service shall have iron body and disc, Bona N seats attached to the valve body, stainless steel shaft, corrosion resistant bearings, and flanged style body and shall comply with AW WA C504. Extension bormets shall be sealed from liquid intrusion and shall encase the valve torque tube from the valve trunnion to the top-mounted geared handwheel actuator. The entire assembly shall be factory assembled and tested. Liquid service butterfly valves shall be DeZurik, Pratt 2FII, or equal. Buried Valves shall be provided with a 2-inch square operating nut while exposed valves shall be provided with hand wheels. Where butterfly valves are installed adjacent to check valves or other fittings, which interfere with the valve's full range operation, flange fillers, or other spacers, shall be installed between the valve and the obstructing fitting as City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15100-2 necessary to insure unrestricted operation of the butterfly valve from full open to closed. 2.4 CHECK VALVES Check valves for liquid service 3 inches and smaller shall be swing check, bronze body, composition disc, 125 pound service. Check valves for liquid service larger than 3 inches shall be swing check, outside lever and spring, iron body, stainless steel shaft, bronze mounted with bronze and stainless steel fittings, 125 pound service, Millikin, Mueller A2600 or equal. 2.5 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM VALVES The combination air and vacuum release valve shall allow unrestricted venting or re-entry of air, through it, during filling or draining of the pipeline, to prevent water column separation or pipeline collapse during vacuum. The air-vacuum release valve shall incorporate one upper and one lower stainless steel float connected by a common stainless steel float guide, thereby maintaining an air gap between the bottom float and top shut-off float. The internal baffle shall be fitted with a guide bushing and act to protect the shut-off float from direct air flow. The baffle shall retain the 45 Durometer Buna-N seat in place, without distortion, for high shutoff. All internals shall be easily removed through the top cover without removing the main valve from the lines. Both floats shall withstand 1,000 psi or more. Valve shall be fitted with blow off valves, quick disconnect couplings and a mininnum of 6 feet of hose, to permit back flushing after installation without dismantling the valve. The combination air-vacuum release valves shall be APCO Model Series Series 100, or equal, with a shut-off and outlet valve, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Air release valves on potable and non-potable water pipes shall be APCO Models 50 or 55, or equal. Each air valve shall be provided with an isolation valve for isolation on the inlet side. A vent pipe shall be routed from the valve to within 12 inches of the floor, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Orifice shall be sized for maximum system pressure. Valve body shall have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi. Pins, levers, retaining rings, float ball and internal screws shall be stainless steel. 2.6 PVC BALL VALVES Ball valves shall be PVC Class 1245 4-B, conforming to ASTM D1784, true union type, threaded per ANSI B 1.20.1, full port design, rated 150 psi, Nibco Chemtrol Tru-Block, Asalii/America, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15100-3 2.7 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of cast iron, two-piece with tabs, adjustable with 0-ring, minimum 5-inch inside diameter with base corresponding to the size of the valve. Valve box shall be painted with coal-tar epoxy by the manufacturer. Cover shall have the work"Water" cast into it. Valve boxes shall be Olympic Foundry No. 940 or equal. 2.8 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS Each shut-off or control valve, shall be provided with a 1-1/2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag. Tags shall bear the identifying number of the valve and one or more identifying letter symbols of the service line. Numbers and letters shall be block type with 1/2-inch-high numbers and 1/4-inch-high letters stamped on the tags and filled with black enamel. Attach tags to the valves by split-key rings soldered so that the ring and tag cannot be removed. Furnish a drawing and a neatly typed valve directory listing each valve number, type of valve and its location. Submit the directory and drawing to the Owner for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VALVES All valves and accessories shall be installed in a mamner and location as shown on the Plans or as required for the application and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Valve size is fully equal to line piping in which the valve is installed unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Support all valves where necessary. In case on conflict between these Specifications and a governing code, the more stringent standard shall prevail. All valves of the same style or type shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, Provide all accessories necessary for proper valve operation as specified or required for the application. Buried valves shall be installed with square operating nuts and adjustable cast iron valve boxes with covers. Valve boxes shall be set such that the slots in the boxes are in line with the run of pipe the valves are in. Provide two sets of T wrenches for buried valve operation. Buried valves shall be provided with I-inch solid steel extension stems with rock guards if the operating nut will be 18 inches or more below the ground surface. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15100-4 Valves shall be installed with the operator in a position for convenient operation. Particular care shall be taken to insure that space is available for operation of lever or handwheel operated valves without interference to walls, piping or equipment. Any valve which is installed, in the opinion of the Engineer, in a manner that operation is inconvenient shall be modified or removed and reinstalled in a manner suitable to the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor. Operations for manual valves shall be lever or handwheel as is standard with the manufacturer unless another type of operator is specified or required by the manufacturer. For submerged valves, provide stem guides as recommended by the valve manufacturer on a spacing of 6'-0". As an alternate, provide valves with extended bonnets where practical. Provide supports for extended bonnets as required. Stem guides and supports shall be 316 stainless steel. All installation fasteners for submerged valves, guides, and supports (nrrts, bolts and washers) shall be 316 stainless steel. 3.2 VALVE BOXES The lower casting of the unit is installed first, in a manner as to be supported by a minimum backfill or by a Styrofoam collar not less than 2 inches in thickness. The casting shall not rest directly upon the body of the valve or upon the water main. Backfill shall be carefully tamped around the valve box to a distance of 3 feet on all sides or to the undisturbed face of the trench if it is closer. The cast iron valve box cover shall be set flush with the roadbed or finished paved surface,. The flared end of the valve box shall be set at the bottom elevation of the 2-inch operating nut to allow space for rocks to be moved laterally from the operation nut. The valve box shall be placed over the valve or valve operator in such a manner that the valve box does not transmit shock or stress loads to the valve. The casting shall not rest directly upon the body of the valve or upon the water main. The axis of the valve box shall be common with the projected axis of the valve stem. The tops of the adjustable valve boxes shall be set to the existing or established grade, whichever is applicable. Valve boxes shall be set such that the slots in the boxes and/or ears in the valve box lid are in-line with the run of the pipe being installed. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15100-5 In areas where the valve box is not in concrete or asphalt, a 24-inch-diameter by 4-inch cement concrete block shall be installed around the valve box at finished grade. The valve box shall be flush with the top, and centered. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15100-6 SECTION 15150 DIESEL GENERATOR FUEL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this section shall consist of a diesel fuel supply system, including diesel fuel tank, and associated equipment to include remote leak detection sensor, level sensors, fill accessories, valves and filters as shown on the Plans and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 09900 Painting 16230 Generator Assemblies Division 16 Electrical 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest Washington State adopted, published edition of a reference shall be applicable. B. All Washington State amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. International Building Code (IBC), Current Edition 2. International Fire Code (IFC), Current Edition 3, International Mechanical Code (IMC), Current Edition 4. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 5. NFPA 37 Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines 6. NFPA 704 Hazardous Identification System City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-1 7. ASME A13.1 Standard for the Identification of Pipes 8. ASME B 16.3 Malleable Iron Treaded Fittings 9. ASTM B 16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 10. ASME B31.3 Code for pressure piping 11. ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping 12. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 13. ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stauiless Steel Pipes 14, ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts 15. ASTM A395 Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures 16. UL 2085 Protected Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquid Storage 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MANUFACTURER Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified herein with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. B. INSTALLER Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum of five years documented experience. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15150-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA Provide product data on pipe materials, fuel tank, tank accessories, remote fuel equipment, pipe fittings, valves, pipe paint finish and electrical wiring diagrams. B. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit copies of shop drawings for each tank, location of ports and accessories with specific dimensions indicated. C, APPROVAL Contractor shall receive drawing approval prior to product fabrication. D. CERTIFICATION Each tank shall bear the UL 142 or UL 2085 label for aboveground liquid storage. E. CALCULATIONS Provide anchorage and seismic design calculations in accordance with the seismic requirements listed in Specification Section 16230. Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer. F. OPERATION ANT)MAINTENANCE DATA Submit under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK (AST) A. INSULATED DOUBLE WALL 1. Materials and Construction Only new material shall be used in the manufacturing process. The tails design, materials, fabrication and construction shall comply with NFPA 30. The tank shall be steel, light weight concrete insulated double wall, UL-2085 listed and meet the requirements for"protected"tank and "fire resistant' tanks as defined by UL City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-3 including impact resistance, ballistics protection criteria. The tank shall be horizontal type mounted on stationary support saddles. The tank shall have openings of sufficient size to meet normal and emergency venting requirements for both primary and secondary containments as stated in UL 142, IFC, and NFPA 30. 2. Dimensional Requirements a. Nominal capacity of the tank shall be 2,000 gallons. Contractor shall provide fuel storage and available volume calculations for the fuel tank. The fuel tank shall be sufficiently sized to store enough fuel for 72 hours of generator runtime at full load. b. Nominal primary diameter of the tank shall be 65 inches. C. Nominal primary length of the tank shall be 145 inches. 3. Loading Conditions a. Internal Load: Tank shall withstand an air pressure test of 5 psi. b. Tank shall be designed to support accessory equipment such as ladders, steps, pumps, etc. when installed according to manufacturer's instructions and limitations. a Tank shall be provided with suitably designed and located lifting lugs. 4, Product storage requirements a. Tank(s) shall be capable of storing diesel fuel. 5, Accessories a. Certification placard UL label shall be affixed to each tank. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-4 b. Fittings/Purls All open fittings/ports shall be protected using threaded plugs or suitable closure caps. i. Fittings Schedule: ......................--............... ..............,.,..., ...__. ..... Size Description (FPT) ----- -- -m—.....- — .. ......._._.._ .__. ...._._.......................... Fuel Port 4 inch Gauge Port 4 inch Manual Gauge Port 2 inch Dispensing Port 4 inch Nornial Vent Port 4 inch* ............................... ........ Primary Emergency Vent Port IT mmmm 6 inch* Secondary Emergency Vent Port6 inch* ....................... Secondary Containment Leak Detection 2 inch Auxiliary Port 1 4 inch Auxiliary_Port 2 4 inch * Or as determined by tank manufacturer. ii. Location: as shown on the Plans. C. Stair Steps Steel construction and designed using accepted engineering practices. Provide at the locations shown on the Plans. Each step surface shall be slip resistant. The steps shall be less than 12 inches high at the first step. Rise and run of the steps, and the upper platform, or final step, shall be in accordance with the Building Code. d. Support Saddles Design and quantity of the steel support saddles shall be per approved UL listing and shall safely support the weight of the tank filled to capacity under seismic conditions. e, Grounding Lug Steel lug for electrical grounding at lowest point of tank. f. Manufacturer Ace Tank Fireguard, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-5 2.2 FUEL AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GROUND Copper, brass, aluminum or galvanized piping or fittings shall not be used in the fuel piping system. A. STEEL PIPE 1, Schedule 40 black, Type E or F, Grade A, conforming to ASTM A53. 2. Fittings Malleable iron, class 150, NPT, conforming to ASME B16.3. B. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE 1. Schedule 40 stainless steel, Type 304L, conforming to ASTM A312. 2. Fittings Stainless steel, class 150, NPT, conforming to ASTM A351. C. THREAD SEALANT Provide high temperature thread sealant with PTFE for tapered pipe threads. 1. Temperature Range: -65 degrees F to 400 degrees F 2. Chemical Resistance Gasoline, oil, water, glycol, hydraulic fluid, Freon, transmission fluid, brake fluid. 3. Manufacturer High Temperature Sealant with PTFE, Permatex or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-6 2.3 FUEL PIPING, BELOW GROUND A. SECONDARY CONTAINED FLEXIBLE PIPE Provide UL listed, double wall flexible pipe designed for direct burial. Construction shall include of an exterior barrier layer which protects the pipe from chemical and microbial attack, and an outer containment jacket constructed to create an interstitial space between the primary piping and outer containment jacket. The primary piping shall have a smooth inner bore. 1. Primary Layer Material: Nylon 12 2. Pressure Rating: minimum 125 psi, 29 inches Hg vacuum 3. Temperature rating: Minimum 125 degrees Fahrenheit 4„ Manufacturer and Model: Franklin Fueling Systems XP Pressure/Suction pipe or equal B, CLAMSHELL FITTINGS Provide clamshell non-swivel fittings to adapt to steel pipe from secondary contained flexible pipe. 1. Construction: Stainless steel 2. O-rung Material: Viton 3. Connection: Secondary contained to NPT 4. Manufacturer and Model: Franklin Fueling Systems, XP Clannshell Non Swivel or equal C. ACCESS PIPE Provide access pipe constructed of corrugated HDPE conforming to H-20 loading requirements. The access pipe shall be capable of accommodating a minimum: two 1-inch diameter secondary contained flexible pipes or a single 2-inch-diameter secondary contained flexible pipe. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems 4-Inch Ducting or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-7 D. DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The Contractor shall furnish and install detectable marking tape over all buried fuel lines. The tape shall extend its full length. Detectable marking tape shall be as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products, or equal, and shall be a minimum of six inches in width, a minimum of five mil (0.0050") overall thickness, and shall have no less than 0.35 mil solid aluminum foil core. The foil shall be visible from both sides of the tape and shall be Yellow in color to identify buried fuel systems and shall be prunted to identify same. Printing shall be encased in the plastic jacket to avoid ink tub-off. Adhesives used to bond the plastic jacket to the foil shall not contain any dilutants,pigments, or contaminants and shall be specifically formulated to resist degradation by elements normally encountered in the soil. 2.4 BELOW GRADE TO ABOVE GRADE TRANSITION A. GRADE LEVEL TRANSITION SLEEVE ASSEMBLY Transition assembly shall provide a contained housing for transitioning from secondarily contained flexible pipe to steel pipe. The transition assembly shall consist of transition sleeve, HDPE pipe, hose clamps, steel rod, flexible bulkhead ducting boot, top boot assembly, and bottom boot assembly. The transition sleeve shall accommodate 3/4-inch pipe to 1-inch pipe or a combination of both in one run as required by sytem requirement. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems Transition Sleeve Assembly or equal. B. GRADE LEVEL TRANSITION SUMP Transition grade sumps shall be constructed of FRP designed for a minimum 30-inch burial depth. The sump shall be complete with H-20 rated composite cover. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems Grade Level Transition Sump or equal. C. TRANSITION SUMP Transition sump shall be two piece, FRP top and FRP sump. The top shall be removable and the containment chamber shall be ribbed to provide structural rigidity. Provide sump height extender as required to accommodate burial depth. Manufacturer and model shall be OPW PST 4630 or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16621, 15150-8 D. FLEXIBLE DOUBLE ENTRY BOOT Double entry boot shall allow 3/4-inch and 1-inch pipe sizes or a combination of the two pipes or electrical conduits to pass through a single sump entry boot opening. The boot shall be manufactured of nitrile rubber and be complete with an encapsulated backer plate, compression plate stainless steel studs and corrosion resistant nuts and washers. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems, FDB Series, or equal. E. DUCTED FLEXIBLE DOUBLE ENTRY BOOT Ducted Double entry boot shall allow 3/4-inch and 1-inch pipe sizes or a combination of the two pipes or electrical conduits to pass through a single sump entry boot opening and allow the connection of 4-inch access pipe at the exterior side. The boot shall be manufactured of nitrite rubber and be complete with an encapsulated backer plate, compression plate stainless steel studs and corrosion resistant nuts and washers. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems, DDB Series, or equal. F. FLEXIBLE ENTRY BOOT Entry boot shall allow 1/2-inch to 4-inch pipe or electrical conduit to pass through a single sump entry boot opening. The boot shall be manufactured of nitrile rubber be complete with an encapsulated backer plate, compression plate stainless steel studs, clamps and corrosion resistant nuts and washers. The boot size shall be as shown on the Plans. Provide Franklin Fueling Systems, FEB Series, or equal. G. DUCTED FLEXIBLE ENTRY BOOT Entry boot shall allow 1-1/2-inch to 2-1/2-inch pipe to pass through a single sump entry boot opening and allow the connection of 4-inch access pipe at the exterior side. The boot shall be manufactured of nitrite rubber be complete with an encapsulated backer plate, compression plate stainless steel studs, clamps and corrosion resistant nuts and washers. The boot size shall be as shown on the Plans. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems, DEB Series, or equal. H. SECONDARY TEST BOOT Test boot shall allow for the testing of secondarily contained flexible piping. The test boot shall have an air chuck for applying pressure to the secondary containment jacket. The boot shall be manufactured of nitrile City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-9 rubber with brass air chuck and stainless steel clamps. Manufacturer and model shall be Franklin Fueling Systems, STB-100 or equal. 2.5 FUEL TANK APPURTENANCES A. DROP TUBE Provide aluminum drop tube. The drop tube with diffuser shall terminate 6 inches from the bottom of the tank and installed in a manner, which avoids excessive vibration. Manufacturer and model shall be Morrison Bros., 419A or equal. B. DIFFUSER Provide an aluminum diffuser, slip-on style, sized to fit the drop tube for which it is to be installed. Manufacturer and model shall be Morrison Bros., 539 or equal. C. SUCTION STRAINER Provide suction strainer at the bottom of the tank on the of generator fuel supply piping inlet. 1. Material: Brass 2, Screen: Stainless steel, 20 mesh 3. Connection: 2-inch NPT 4. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 157 or equal D. UPDRAFT VENT Provide an updraft vent for "normal' atmospheric venting of the fuel tank. Terminate the vent pipe with installed updraft vent 12 feet above adjacent ground level. 1. Construction: Aluminum body 2. Screen: 40 mesh, brass 3. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 354 or equal City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-10 E. PRIMARY/SECONDARY EMERGENCY VENT Provide UL listed emergency vent for pressure relief of primary and containment portions of the fuel tank. Vent shall conform to NFPA 30. 1. Construction: aluminum body with powder coated cast iron cover and Viton O-ring seat material. 2. Connection: 6 inch, NPT. Tank manufacturer to verify size depending on tank capacity 3. Pressure setting: 8 oz. per square inch 4. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 244 or equal. F. SPILL CONTAINER Provide spill container at the fill point of the fuel tank. The spill container shall be pad-lockable, equipped with push type drain with fluoroelastomer o-ring and finished with a powder coat finish. L Construction: Steel 2, Capacity: 7.5 gallons 3. Manufacturer & Model: Morrison Bros., Fig 518 or equal G. OVERFILL PREVENTION VALVE Provide overfill prevention valve installed at the fuel tank fuel fill port. The valve shall terminate flow automatically based on preset level. The valve shall be supplied with a test mechanism, 2 inch cam adapter and an adapter to mount an aluminum drop tube. 1. Construction: Anodized aluminum body a. Internal Components: Stainless steel/brass b. Linkage: Stainless steel 2. Connection: 2-inch NPT 3. Code Compliance: NFPA 30 4, Manufacturer & Model: Morrison Bros., Fig 9095ATM City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15150-11 H. CLOCK STYLE LEVEL GAUGE Provide clock gauge calibrated for feet and inches. The gauge shall be constructed vapor tight and swivel 360 degrees. The float shall be installed within a drop tube. 1. Construction Material: Aluminum 2. Connection: 2-inch NPT 3. Float: Stainless steel 4. Cable: Stainless steel 5. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., Fig 818 I. DECALS, PLACARDS AND SIGNS Provide decals, signs and placards in an easily visible location. The decals shall be self sticking, adhesive-backed, vinyl. 1. Material Identification Provide material identification decal adhered next to the fuel fill and on the tank in a place that is easily visible from the point of normal approach. a. Label Content: "DIESEL FUEL" b. Quantity: 1 minimum C. Size: 5" X 7" d. Letter Color: Black e. Background Color: White f Material: Laminated vinyl 2. Warning Provide warning decals adhered to each door, interior side. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Gx O,U 6627 15150-12 a. Label Content: "DANGER/ DIESEL FUEL/NO SMOKING/ NO OPEN FLAMES" b. Quantity: 2 minimum C. Size: 7" x 10" d. Letter Color: Black C. Background Color: White f Material: Laminated vinyl 3. Hazard Material Identification Provide hazardous decals in accordance with NFPA 704. Decal shall be adhered to each side of the tank and at each exterior side of the doors. a. Label: Diamond shape b. Quantity: 5 minimum C. Size: Minimum 10 inches in height d. Letter Color: Black e. Background Color: 4 colored regions: Blue, Red Yellow, White f. Material: Laminated vinyl 4. Fuel Fill Provide a permanent sign at the fill point of the fuel tank. The sign shall include the filling procedure and tank calibration chart. The filling procedure shall require the person filling the tank to determine the gallon quantity required to fill it to 90 percent of capacity before commencing the fill operation. a. Quantity: I b. Size: Minimum 6 inches in height, width as required C. Letter Color: Black City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-13 d. Background Color: White e. Material: Laminated vinyl 5. Fuel Tank Approval Certification placard: UL label shall be affixed to each tank. 2.6 FUEL TANK ALARM AND SENSORS A. ALARM/CONTROL CONSOLE The alarm console shall be capable of four alarm functions and housed in a NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure. The Alarm condition shall be indicated by a red light and a minimum 85 dB audible alarm. Reset and test buttons shall be provided to silence the alarm and to test alarm circuit, respectively. The visual indication should remain on until the alarm condition is corrected. The transition sump leak alarm shall close the solenoid valve upon a leak indication alarm. The low and high level switches and leak detection switch shall alarm only. 1. Electrical Requirements: 120V, 1ph, 60hz. 2, Control Output Relay: Dry contact, SPDT rated for 3 A at 120V. 3. Manufacturer and Model: Pneumercator, LC103 or equal B. HIGH/LOW LEVEL SENSOR Provide a UL approved multiple point level float switch with a manual test in the fuel tank to alarm at preset levels. The Contractor shall coordinate with the tank manufacturer to determine proper probe length. 1. Float Material: Stainless steel 2. Probe Material: Stainless steel 3. Connection: 2-inch NPT 4. Wiring: 2 conductor, 18 AWG each switch 5. Float Switch: SPST rated 100 W resistive load, 400 V max at 3 amp City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-14 6. Operating Temperature: -40— 180 degrees Fahrenheit 7. Pressure rating: Full vacuum to 150 psig 8. Repeatability: 1/8 inch per year 9. Housing: Aluminum, NEMA 4, 1/2-inch conduit fitting 10. Approvals: UL 913 Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D 11. Alarms a. Low Level: 10 percent tank capacity, NC contacts b. High Level: 90 percent tank capacity, N.O. contacts 12, Manufacturer and Model: Pneumercator, LS600 or equal C. LEAK DETECTION SENSOR Provide UL approved float actuated leak sensor in the secondary containment area of the fuel tank. The sensor shall be suspended to a maximum of 1" from the bottom. 1. Float Material: 316 stainless steel 2. Housing: 316 stainless steel and Teflon 3. Stem: 316 stainless steel 4. Cable: 2 conductor, Teflon-jacketed 5. Operating Temperature: -20 — 175 degrees Fahrenheit 6. Pass Thru Opening Size: 2-inch 7. Approvals: UL Class 1, Division 1, Groups C &D. 8. Manufacturer and Model: Pneumercator, LS600-LD or equal. 2.7 FUEL POLISHING SYSTEM Provide a self-contained, automated fuel polishing system. The system shall be designed for diesel fuel circulation and shall include pump, motor, particulate filter, water separator, programmable controls, alarm circuitry, and enclosure. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-15 Pump and motor shall be sized to pump 2.8 GPM of fuel with up to 15 ft of lift. Motor shall be powered by 115/208-240 VAC, single phase. Filter shall be capable of removing particulates larger than 2 microns. Water separator shall be capable of removing water to 5 PPM. Control unit input power shall be 115/208-240 VAC. Control unit shall be capable of visual alarm indicators for plugged filter, water separator level, enclosure leak, and motor overload. Unit shall have audible horn and alarm output if any of the above alarms are activated. Enclosure shall be of steel construction with a powder coat finish. Enclosure shall have a removable door and fluid leak detection. Enclosure shall be manufactured to NEMA 3R standards. Polishing system shall be FM Approved and NFPA compliant, Model FTI-2.8 by Fuel Technologies international, or equal. 2.8 FUEL PIPING VALVES AND EQUIPMENT A. SOLENOID VALVE Provide a two-way hung, piston type solenoid valve with expansion relief. The solenoid valve shall open the fuel supply line on a call to run from the generator. Solenoid shall comply with NFPA 30. 1. Construction: Stainless steel body with Viton seals 2. Electrical: 24VDC or 12 VDC, 1/2-inch conduit. Contractor shall coordinate voltage based on generator starting voltage. 3. Connection: NPT 4. Housing: Watertight, NEMA 4X 5. Approvals: CSA certified, NFPA 30 6. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 710 or equal B. EXTERNAL EMERGENCY VALVE Provide a fusible link, external emergency valve. 1. Construction: ductile iron body, cap, seat, and swing arm City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15150-16 a. O-Ring: Viton ecapsulated Teflon b. Gasket: Teflon C. Spring: Stainless steel d. Seal Nut Plug: Stainless steel e. Handle: Brass f. Fulcrum Shaft: Stainless steel g. Groove Pin: Steel h. Hold Open Hook: Stainless steel 2. Connection: NPT 3. Fuse Link: 165 degrees Fahrenheit, UL listed 4. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 346 or equal C. LINE STRAINER Provide an external Y-type, bottom cleanout, line strainer. 1. Construction: Cast iron 2. Gasket: Teflon 3. Connection: 1-1/2-inch NPT 4. Strainer: Stainless steel, 100 mesh 5. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 285 or equal D. BALL VALVES Provide a lockable, fiill port, ball valves for material isolation. 1. Construction: Stainless steel body and ball with Teflon packing, seat and seals 2. Handle: Lockable, stainless steel with PVC grip City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-17 3. Cold Working Pressure: 1,000 psi, non-shock 4. Connection: NPT 5. Temperature: -20—350 degrees Fahrenheit 6. Manufacturer and Model and Model: Morrison Bros., 691 BSS or equal E. CHECK VALVE Provide an inline check valve compatible for use with diesel fuel. 1. Construction: 304/316 stainless steel 2. Maximum Working Pressure: 200 psi 3. Connection: NPT 4. Working Temperature: -40 to 300 degrees Fahrenheit 5. Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., 958 or equal F. DIELECTRIC-INSULATED UNIONS Provide industrial dielectric o-ring unions where dissimilar metals are joined. The unions shall be compatible with diesel fuel. L Construction: The connection pieces shall be same material as the material it is joining to. a. O-ring: Viton 2. Connection Configuration: NPT x NPT 3. Manufacturer and Model: Hart 31000 psi Dielectric Union or equal. G. DOUBLE TAPPED BUSHINGS Provide double tapped bushings as necessary to connect external pipe to respective frtel tank port as necessary. 1. Construction: Steel City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-18 2, Connection: NPT 3, Manufacturer and Model: Morrison Bros., Fig 184 or equal 2.9 PAINTING Paint all piping in accordance with specification Section 09900 - Painting. Diesel fuel pipe shall be Brown in color. 2.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. FUEL PIPE Provide self sticking, adhesive-backed, vinyl pipe marker labeled "DIESEL" in white lettering on Brown background in accordance with ANSUASME A13.1-2007. The label shall indicate flow with arrows at both ends of the label; be visible from the point of normal approach; placed near valves, flanges and changes in pipe direction; placed both sides of ceiling, wall or floor penetrations; placed at an line entry or reentry point; placed on straight pipe runs every 20 feet. B. VALVES Label valves and actuators utilizing hanging tags to indicate their function and normal position. 1. Solenoid Valve a. Function: Antisiphon b. Normal Position: Closed 2. Ball Valve a. Function: Material Isolation b. Normal Position: Open PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver fuel system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-19 safe from such hazards. Field repair of material or equipment made defective by improper storage or site construction damage by other trades may be cause for rejection of installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION Piping systems shall be supported and protected against physical damage, including damage from stresses arising from settlement, vibration, expansion, or contraction. All piping shall be installed, examined, inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of ASME 31.9, Building Services Piping, current edition, and the requirements of this specification and the engineering Plans. All pipe shall be carefully placed and supported at the proper lines and grades and where possible. Piping runs shown on the Plans shall be followed as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features. The Owner shall approve major re-routing if required. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and/or specifications, authority having jurisdiction and best commercial trade practice. Any special tools required for laying,jointing, cutting, etc., shall be supplied and properly used. All pipes, valves, and equipment shall be kept thoroughly clean until acceptance of completed work, and shalt conform accurately to lines and grades given. At all times during pipe laying operations, the trench shall be kept free of water either by pumping, bailing or drainage. Seal end of line with a water tight plug or cover when pipe is not being laid. A. ABOVE GRADE PIPING Unless shown otherwise, piping shall be installed parallel to building lines, plumb and level. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing. Joints between steel pipe and fittings shall be sealed liquid tight and threaded. All pipe shall be cut square, reamed and chamfered and be free of all burrs and obstructions. Pipe ends shall have full-bore openings and shall not be undercut. Threads for threaded joint piping shall be neatly cut with sharp tools and jointing procedure shall conform to the best practice. All threaded pipe shall be screwed together with an application of approved thread sealant that is applied to the male threads only. Once a joint has been tightened, it shall not be backed off unless threads are recleaned and new compound applied. This application shall be neatly made; with all compound and dirt thoroughly wiped off outside of every joint. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-20 Pipe shall be bent in accordance with ASME 1331.9. Unions shall be installed in all threaded joint piping to facilitate removal of pipe sections for maintenance or repair in accordance with best trade practice. Unions or flexible couplings shall be installed where shown on the Plans and at all equipment to facilitate removal of the equipment. Where two dissimilar metals join a dielectric union shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion where shown on the Plans and where the materials in question have greater than a 0.15 V difference based on the anodic index. Pipe passing through concrete walls or slabs shall be installed through a steel sleeve with a minimum size of two pipe diameters larger than the carrier pipe. The sleeve shall be free of all dirt and grease and thoroughly cleaned to insure a tight bond with the concrete. B. UNDERGROUND PIPING Underground flexible piping shall be installed within corrugated access piping. Corrugated access piping shall be installed with a minimum thickness of 6-inches of well-compacted bedding material below the pipe invert and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The piping shall have a minimum slope of 1/8 inches/foot in direction of the sump. Flexible piping shall be cut square, and plumb with a manufacturer approved cutting tool and be free of obstructions. Secondary Containment piping shall successfully pass a pressure test of 5 psi prior to backfill. The test shall be through the secondary test boot air chuck. After the test, the test boot shall be pulled back to permit flow of fuel leaks to the sump. C. FUEL TANK Tank shall be installed in a location as shown on the Plans. The tank shall be installed in strict accordance with the most recent installation instructions provided by the tank manufacturer, IFC, NFPA 30, and authority having jurisdiction. The contractor shall provide all necessary mounting hardware. Field paint all areas of the tank where the factory applied finish has been removed in the process of installation. Painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-21 1. Grounding Electrically ground the tank to grounding rods in accordance with Division 16. 2. Fuel Fill Provide a complete fill of diesel fuel in the tank prior to any testing of the generator in accordance with Division 16. 3.3 TESTING A. TANK The primary and secondary tanks shall successfiilly complete an air pressure test prior to installation. While maintaining pressure of 3 to 5 psig on the primary tank, the annular space bounded by the primary and secondary containment tank shall be pressurized to 1-1/2 to 3 psig. The secondary tank shall then be checked for tightness. B. P1P1NG The pressure test shall be witnessed by the Owner. The Owner shall be notified within 15 days prior to testing. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor necessary to perform all testing required herein, the costs to be included in the lump sum bid price. All piping systems shall be tested to demonstrate leak tightness prior to acceptance. Testing shall be done pneumatically to 5 psi. The test pressure shall be maintained while a complete visual inspection of all joints and connections is conducted. There shall be no leakage or permanent distortion caused by the pressure testing. Care shall be exercised to ensure that these pressures are not applied to the storage tank. In no case shall the test pressure be less than a gauge pressure of 5 psi measured at the highest point of the system and in no case shall the test pressure be maintained less than 60 minutes. All leaks shall be repaired or defective material replaced and the test repeated as piping is airtight. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage resulting from or caused by pressure testing. After compliance with test requirements and approval of the Owner, the field painting, where required, may be started. All pressure testing shall be done prior to any finish painting or pipe insulating. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15150-22 C. FLUSHING After fuel piping is installed the fuel piping system shall be thoroughly flushed with diesel until all debris is removed and diesel is clear. Contractor shall legally dispose of flush diesel. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15150-23 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shall consist of plumbing to include interior water systems, drain and waste systems as shown on the Plans and specified herein. All permits shall be obtained in accordance with Section 01160 of these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 15050 Piping Systems 1.3 REFERENCES ASTM B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings ASTM B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM B371 Specification for Copper-Zinc Silicon Alloy Rod AWWA C502 American Water Works Association Standard for Dry- Barrel Fire Hydrants 1.4 MANUFACTURERS Use products of a single manufacturer where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE All Plumbing shall be performed in accordance with the current edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code. The Plans do not detail all items such as complete venting, etc.; however, it is understood that this work shall be included as part of this Project. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Material shall be delivered to the project site in its original unopened containers with labels informing manufacturer and product name. Material shall be stored and handled in compliance with manufacturer's recommendation to prevent damage. 1.7 NAMEPLATES Provide major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number, capacity, and equipment designation securely affixed in a conspicuous place. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS -WATER SYSTEM A. BURIED PIPE 1. Pipe a. Type K copper, ASTM B88, silver solder. 2. Fittings a. Wrought copper; ANSI B16.22, silver solder. B. ABOVE GROUND PIPING 1. Pipe a. Type K copper, ASTM B88, silver solder. 2. Fittings a. Wrought copper; ANSI B16.22, silver solder. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS - DRAIN AND WASTE SYSTEM A. BURIED PIPE All drain, waste and vent pipe shall be hubless, cast iron, standard weight pipe conforming to the requirements of the latest issue of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM 888, or ASTM A74, as manufactured by AS&I, Charlotte, Tyler or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-2 i i B. ABOVE GROUND PIPE All drain, waste and vent pipe shall be hubless, cast iron, standard weight pipe conforming to the requirements of the latest issue of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM 888, or ASTM A74, as manufactured by AS&I, Charlotte, Tyler or equal. C. FITTINGS All fittings and pipe joints shall be hubless, conforming to the requirements of the latest issue of CISPI Standard#301. Hubless coupling gaskets shall be the heavy-duty type with dual stainless steel pipe clamps on each side, and shall conform to ASTM C1540, as manufactured by Anaco, Tyler or equal. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS Floor drains shall be as shown on the Plans as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Zurn, Josam, or Wade, equal to J.R. Smith models listed. 1. Floor Drain: Fig. 2320, galvanized body with nickel bronze top, 2. Funnel Floor Drain: Fig. 2320, galvanized body with nickel bronze top and 6-inch-diameter funnel. 2.4 CLEANOUTS Cleanouts shall be as shown on the Plans as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Zuni, Josam or Wade, equal to J.R. Smith models listed. 1. Grade Cleanout: Fig. 4283, galvanized body with bronze, tapered thread plug. 2. Floor Cleanout: Fig. 4023, galvanized body with nickel bronze top and bronze, tapered thread plug. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. STRAINERS 0.0045 of an inch perforated 304 stainless steel screen, Armstrong AISC or equal by Yarway, Sarco. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 15400-3 B. UNIONS 2 inches and smaller; ground joint, malleable iron type. Grinnell, Crane, Walworth, Syspac. C. ACCESS PANELS Milcor, Type "DW" with screwdriver operated lock. Stainless steel access panels in tile walls. D. INSULATING UNION Epco, Capitol. E. ESCUTCHEON Grinnell Fig. 2 or 13, nickel plated. F. PIPE MARKING See Section 15050. 2.6 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. PIPE HANGERS Adjustable threaded rod type in accord with MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69, and ANSI B31.1 B, CONCRETE INSERTS Malleable iron body and nut, Grinnell CB. C. EXPANSION JOINTS Stainless steel bellows type, Keflex model 308 or equal by Flexonics. D. ALIGNMENT GUIDES Keflex series P or equal by Flexonics. City of Ken[ 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-4 i PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. BURIED WATER PIPE Install with not less than 1 foot of cover, measured from top of pipe to approved finish floor. Install pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Constrict water lines under other utilities where necessary to meet the minimum cover requirements. B. HORIZONTAL SOIL AND WASTE PIPE GRADING Provide a grade of 1/4 inch per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8 of an inch per foot. Install main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and extend finll size to roof line as vents. C. PIPES Remove burrs by reaming. Use Teflon tape on male threads only. D. OPENINGS 1N PIPES Keep closed during progress of work. E. COORDINATION Install so as not to interfere with light fixtures or other trade components. F. CLOSE NIPPLES Not permitted on any part of work. Use standard short nipples for short pipe connections. Use of bushings not permitted. G. PIPING OF COPPER TUBING Continuous. Copper tubing inserts in runs of steel pipe not permitted. Solder joints in copper piping. Do not lay copper tubing on rocks or gravel. H. CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PIPES OF DISSIMILAR METALS Make with insulating union (Dielectric). Include cast iron valve connections to adapters for copper pipe. Does not apply to waste piping. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 15400-5 I. CUTTING OF COPPER PIPE Use a cutter. Smooth sharp edges with emery cloth. J. SADDLES ON PIPE IN LIEU OF TEES AND BENDING PIPE Not permitted. K. EQUIPMENT ISOLATION Provide isolation valves (gate or ball valve) and unions at piping connections to all equipment. 3.2 CLEANOUTS Provide every 50 feet and install at all locations required by code and to permit cleaning of all sewer piping. Provide cleanouts full size of pipe, but not larger than 4 inches. Close cleanout openings with brass screw plugs. Where cleanouts occur in floor, install a brass ferrule complete with a screwed brass cover, flush with floor. Install cleanout threads with graphite. Locate cleanouts to clear cabinet work and make them easily accessible. 3.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. UNIONS Install at final connections to all equipment items and on control side of all valves in mains, branches and risers. B. ESCUTCHEONS Install at all places where exposed piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings. C. EQUIPMENT, VALVES, AND PIPING Tag for identification, indicating equipment, zone and area served. Provide nameplates for access doors and removable ceiling panels to areas containing mechanical equipment, valves, etc. Submit to Engineer for approval proposed list of nameplates. Run all drips and drains for pumps, pans, reliefs, etc.,to the drain. Discharge onto floor not permitted. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-6 i D. GALVANIZED IRON SLEEVES Not less than 20 gauge, cast in concrete, and installed wherever piping passes through floors, footings or walls of concrete or masonry construction. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient size to allow the covering to pass through sleeve. Use steel pipe extended 1 inch above finished floor for sleeves in floors of rooms exposed to water. Watch and protect all sleeves and inserts while concrete is poured. For penetration of floors and walls from buried pipe, caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve with first quality oakum and fill with pitch. E. EXPOSED PIPING, VALVES, HANGERS, ETC., AT FIXTURE Chromium-plated finish. F. ROUGH-IN AND CONNECTION FOR FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT Connect fixtures and equipment furnished and installed by General Contractor, Owner, or others. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain from supplier sufficient information to rough-in properly and connect all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recotmnendation. Furnish all traps, valves tailpieces and other trim not furnished with equipment. G. SHUT-OFF VALVES Provide shut-off valves on all water lines to fixture groups. H. LOCATION OF FIXTURES Locate in accordance with details and dimensions on Plans. f. INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT Support and fasten wall hung fixtures with concealed floor support type carriers. Align fixtures and equipment installed in batteries in accord with architectural drawings. Fit fixtures on finished walls without noticeable warpage on either the wall or fixture and grout with G.E. silicone or similar approved material. J. VACUUM BREAKERS Locate and install on water supply to all fixtures which have water connection located below rim. Install on all hose bibs. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GAO#16627 15400-7 K. WATER CONNECTION STOPS Install individual loose key stops on all fixtures. If water connections are concealed, install valves in lieu of stops. 3.4 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. GENERAL Mechanical equipment and materials are not to be suspended or supported from pipe, electrical conduit,, ceiling systems or any non-structural member. B. CONCRETE ANCHORING Use cast inserts in new construction; stamped metal inserts not acceptable. Expansion shells may be used in existing construction; powder actuated inserts are not acceptable. C. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Item selections, hanger spacings, rod diameters, and protection shields in accord with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes shall not be hung or supported from each other. Isolate copper water pipes from dissimilar metals, hangers, steel or aluminum studs, etc. D. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS Ream clamps where possible. E. VERTICAL ADJUSTING DEVICES Provide on all rigid hangers. F. PROTECTION SHIELD/PROTECTION SADDLE Use on insulated pipe. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES Locate well enough in advance of the excavation to prevent damage during construction. The Contractor is responsible for any damage whatsoever resulting from his operations on the project. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-8 3.6 CONTAMINATION Prevent contamination of the pipeline during construction from any operation or source. 3.7 HEAD PROTECTION Where duct angles, pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed fit walkways or in access ways to equipment for maintenance purposes, cover all such potentially injurious protrusions less than 6'-8" above the floor with padding, Secure padding permanently and finish comparable to adjacent surfaces. 3.8 INSPECTION It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to contact the Owner and arrange for final inspection. *** END OF SECTION *'�* City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15400-9 SECTION 15440 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes furnishing and installing submersible sump pumps as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01200 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals Division 16 Electrical 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST Equipment numbers are as follows: Item Eguiprment Number Discharge Piping Sump Pump 01 SP 01 Discharge Piping Sump Pump 01 SP 02 Check Valve Sump Pump 01 SP 03 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Submersible sump pumps shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements without overloading the rated nameplate horsepower of the motor. Parameter Value Design capacity(gpm) 40 Design head (feet) 17 Shut-off head(feet) 32 Motor size (hp) 1/2 1.5 WARRANTY In addition to the warranty required in the General Conditions, the equipment manufacturer shall provide a 5-year warranty. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#16627 15440-1 i PART PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS The sump pumps shall be the Myers MDC Series. No other shall be allowed. 2.2 PUMPS The pumps shall have heavy duty cast iron casing with non-clogging vortex impellers. The pumps shall be an automatic model featuring integral control and starter with vertical float and Viton switch boot. Pump shall be coated with an epoxy powder coating system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING All equipment shall be completely factory assembled, skid mounted, crated and delivered to protect against damage during shipment. All exposed flanges shall be covered and sealed with shrink-wrap to prevent the entrance of moisture. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. All equipment delivered to the site shall be stored as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION The pump(s) shall be installed as shown on the Plans and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 15440-2 SECTION 15550 GENERATOR ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shall consist of generator engine exhaust piping, silencer, insulation and accessory equipment as shown on the Plans, and as further specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 09900 Painting 16230 Generator Assemblies 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest Washington State adopted, published edition of a reference shall be applicable. B. All Washington Stated amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. International Building Code (IBC), Current Edition 2, International Fire Code (IFC), Current Edition 3. International Mechanical Code (1MC), Current Edition 4. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 5. NFPA 37 Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15550-1 i 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. A. PRODUCT DATA Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, silencer, thimble, roof curb, blanket insulation, and accessories. B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Provide information to be included in the operation and maintenance equipment manuals specified ui Section 01300 and Section 11000. C. WELDER CERTIFICATION Provide welders certification in accordance with American Welding Society or American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STEEL SUPPORT WELDING Qualify processes and operators according to AWS DLL "Structural Welding Code-Steep' B. STEEL PIPE WELDING Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping" 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. LOW PROFILE SILENCER Provide a heavy duty silencer for standby generator application. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0 #16627 15550-2 1. Type: Super critical grade,. 2. Construction: Heavy duty steel, double shell with 2-inch fiberglass packed shell 3. Connection: 150# ANSI pattern steel flange 4. Finish: High heat black powder coating, factory finish 5. Style: bottom inlet, top outlet 6. Manufacturer: GT exhaust Systems, Harco Manufacturing or equal. 7. Weight of Silencer: 175 lbs S. Size of Silencer: 34" x 38" Q Tncaitinn 1nccPQ- At n minimnn, the raAnrtinn arhipii rd chall ha ac shown in the following table. F,e, que,_c, _ ,. 15 � 50500 1,000 2,00 4,000 8,000 Insertion Losses, dBA � 3f 4045 46 45 44 43 43 B. EXHAUST PIPE 1. Black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or F, Grade A, conforming to ASTM A53,butt-weld. 2. Fittings: Steel, butt-weld, conforming to ASME B16.9 and ASTM A234 C. FLANGE Steel, full bore weld neck, raised face, class 150, conforming to ASME B16.5 D. FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR Connection of the exhaust pipe to the generator engine shall be made by a flexible connection to allow for vibration. 1. Material: Type 321 stainless steel, corrugated City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15550-3 2. Length: 18 inches, minimum 3. Connection: ANSI pattern flange. 4. Size: 4-inch diameter E. HIGH TEMPERATURE GASKET Provide gasket of high temperature sealing material compatible with hot diesel exhaust. 1. Material: Non asbestos Vermiculite Ceramic bonded with nitrile ribber 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch 3, Temperature Rating: 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit 4. Certification: ANSI B16.21 5, Manufacturer: Gardico 956G or equal 2.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. BLANKET INSULATION The insulation blanket shall be asbestos free and fabricated using a coated fiberglass cloth outer jacket, a minimum 1-inch-thick insulation layer of glass fiber and a flexible non-corrosive rimer liner. The insulation blanket shall be factory sewn to the required configuration, to ensure a secure and complete fit. The insulation shall not decay, nor sustain mold or vermin. 1. Insulation Material: The insulation material shall be Type E fiberglass, noncombustible 2. Insulation Density: 121b/cu. Ft. 3. Jacket Material: Silicone impregnated fiberglass cloth 4. Inner Liner: Stainless steel 5. Sewing Tread Material: Teflon-coated fiberglass or Kevlar glass City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15550-4 6. Rivets: Stainless steel 7. Temperature Rating: 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit 8. Certifications: UL listed, conform to specifications MIL-1-16411, MIL-I-24244 and ASTM C-1086-88. 9. Manufacturer: Firwni Corp. or equal. B. WALL THIMBLE The exhaust piping shall pass through the wall by utilizing an insulated thimble constructed in accordance with NFPA 37. The thimble shall be of welded construction, consisting of an inner and outer sleeve with insulation within the armular space and vent holes. The thhuble shall include insect screen, interior support collar and exterior support collar, welded to the outer sleeve of the thimble. The exhaust piping shall fit within the inner sleeve. The thimble shall be a minimum of 6 inch larger in diameter than the exhaust pipe within the inner sleeve. The contractor shall field verify and coordinate total thimble length, diameter, and flashing angles with manufacturer and shall be included in the submittal. 1. Thimble Material: Steel 2. Insulation Material: Type E fiberglass, noncombustible 3. Insulation Density: 11-1b/cu. Ft. 4. Inner Sleeve Diameter: 6 inch, or as recommended by the generator manufacturer. 5. Rain collar and Clamp Material: Steel 6. Support Collar Material: Steel 7. Interior Collar Material: Steel 8. Manufacturer: GT exhaust Systems, Harco Manufacturing or approved equal City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15550-5 2.3 FINISH Provide surface preparation and in accordance with Section 09900. Paint piping and fittings with high temperature paint. 1. Temperature Rating: 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit 2. Pruner System: a. Single Coat: 2-3 rails, MDFT b. Color: Gray C. Product: TemperKote 1000 Primer d. Manufacturer: Flame Control Coatings, LLC or approved equal 3. Finish System a. Single Coat: 1.5-2.5 mils MDFT b. Color: Black C. Product: TemperKote 1000HS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver exhaust system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such hazards and weather exposure. Field repair of material or equipment made defective by improper storage or site constriction damage may be cause for rejection of installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION Provide all accessories necessary for proper operation as specified or required for the application. All exhaust system components shall be installed in a manner and location as shown on the Plans or as required for the application and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Support all equipment where necessary. In case City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15550-6 of conflict between these specifications and a governing code, the more stringent standard shall prevail. Piping system shall be supported and protected against physical damage, including damage from stresses arising from settlement, vibration, expansion, or contraction. Exhaust piping shall be sloped away from the generator. A drip leg shall be installed in the lowest piping point. All pipe shall be carefully placed and supported at the proper lines and grades and where possible shall be sloped to permit complete drainage. Piping runs shown on the Plans shall be followed as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features. The Owner shall approve major relocations if required. All pipe shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and/or specifications, and best commercial trade practice. Any special tools required for laying,jointing, cutting, etc., shall be supplied and properly used. All pipe shall be kept thoroughly clean until acceptance of completed work, and shall conform accurately to lines and grades given. At all times during pipe laying operations keep trench free of water either by pumping, hailinn nr rlraina na Caal an`1 of lira xnith � xxia tar tiah4 nhvr xxrhan niixr� is not hainn laid. A. PIPING Joints between steel pipe and fittings shall be welded or flanged. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing. All pipe flanges shall be set level, plumb, and aligned. All flanged fittings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in flanges shall straddle vertical centerline of pipes. All flanged connections shall be bolted together with an approved high temperature gasket material between the flanged connections. All pipe shall be cut square, reamed and chamfered and be free of all burrs and obstructions. Pipe ends shall have ftrll-bore openings and shall not be undercut. All welding shall be by the shielded are, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Procedures are in accordance with ANSI B31. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide for a cross section and weld metal equal to or greater than the parent metal. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface and gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint mechanically bevel pipe ends. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15550-7 Interior weld beads shall be smooth, evenly distributed with an interior projection not exceeding 1/16 of an inch beyond the ID of the air header or fittings. The outside welds shall be wine brushed. Brushes shall be of stainless steel and used only on stainless steel. Where equipment drain connections are provided, they shall be valved, with the discharge pipe carried to the nearest floor drain, drain trench or sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, drain valves shall be piped to 1 inch above the floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform to the requirements of the system served. B. SILENCER The silencer shall be installed at a slope to allow condensate to reach the drain valve. Provide touch up painting of the silencer where scratches have exposed the layer under the factory applied finish. The touch-up painting shall be either provided by the manufacturer or furnished by the contractor to match the factory applied finish. C. INSULATION Insulate the entire exhaust system with high temperature blanket insulation. Install high-temperature insulation blankets made to fit the installation allowing for hangers and clearances. Fasten the outer jacket laced up with stainless steel soft-tempered lacing wire to secure each blanket. The exhaust system consists of the silencer and all associated rigid piping and fittings. Insulation shall not be placed on the flexible connector. 3.3 TESTING All piping systems will be tested to demonstrate leak tightness prior to acceptance. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor necessary to perform all testing required herein. All leaks shall be repaired and all defective material replaced and the test repeated as directed by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage resulting from or caused by leak testing. After compliance with test requirements and approval of the Owner, the field paining, where required, may be started. All pressure testing shall be done prior to any finish painting or pipe insulating. *** END OF SECTION **`` City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15550-8 SECTION 15700 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section shall consist of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment and other associated items as shown on the Plans, and as further specified herein. All permits shall be obtained in accordance with Section 01160. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section item 01300 Submittals Division 16 Electrical 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. All equipment supplied in this Section shall be provided to produce complete, operable systems with all elements properly interconnected as shown in schematic diagrams or to provide specified operations. If a specific dimensioned location is not shown for interconnections or smaller system elements, the Contractor shall select appropriate locations and show them on shop drawing submittal for review. Equipment and material shall be new and without imperfections and shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner; aligned, leveled, cleaned and adjusted for satisfactory operation; installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and the best standard practices for this type of work to ensure connecting and disconnecting accessories can be readily made and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Oil and lubrication fittings shall be located clear of and away from guards, base, and equipment and within reach from the operating floor whenever possible. In order to meet these requirements with equipment as furnished, minor deviation from the Plans may be made as approved by the Owner. The manufacturer's recommendations and instructions of products used in the work are hereby made part of these Specifications, except as they may be superseded by other requirements of these Specifications. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-1 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS i Attend a minimum of two site meetings, each up to 2 hours in duration. A third submittal review meeting may be required prior to submittal approval if the proposed equipment is different than the specified equipment and/or the HVAC design has complex control and operation features such as VVT, VVD or controllers that operate multiple units. The first site meeting will be held after 95 percent of the HVAC equipment and controls have been installed. Any required training should be scheduled and performed at this first site meeting. A follow up site meeting shall be scheduled 6 months after the complete installation of the HVAC and controls to ensure proper operation. Any additional training required should be scheduled and performed at the follow up site meeting. 1.5 EQUIPMENT LIST Refer to Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Schedules shown on the Plans. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Equipment manufacturers and model numbers shall be as shown on the Plans except where indicated herein. 2.2 LOUVERS A. DRAINABLE BLADE Louvers shall be stationary type with drainable blades in a 6-inch louver frame. Each stationary blade shall incorporate an integral drain gutter and each jamb shall incorporate an integral downspout so water drains to blade end, then down the downspouts and out at the louver sill. The louver construction shall consist of a frame and blades from aluminum extrusions of minimum 0.081-inch nominal wall thickness. The blades shall be positioned at 35 degree angles. Each louver shall be equipped with a framed,removable, 0.125 x 3/4 flattened aluminum rear-mounted bird screen or 16 x 18 mesh aluminum insect screen. Louvers shall be supplied with a finish as shown on the equipment schedules. The color shall be custom detemlined by owner or shall be custom matched to the roof color. Each factory-assembled louver section shall be designed to withstand wind loadings of 25 psf. Louver performance data shall be licensed under the AMCA Certified Ratings Program and shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. This certified performance data shall include airflow pressure loss and water penetration. Drainable blade louvers shall be Greenheck ESD series, or equal. Citv of Kent 646 Zone Booster Station Gx o 416627 15700-2 B. ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS Provide and install acoustical louvers as shown on the Plans. Louvers shall be of all aluminum construction. Louvers shall be complete with 16 x 18 mesh aluminum insect screen or 0.125 x 3/4 flattened expanded aluminum bird screen (as shown on the Plans) in a removable frame. Louver blades shall be sloped at 45 degrees, insulated and air foil shaped with a material thickness and sound attenuation characteristics matching the model shown on the Plans. Each factory-assembled louver section shall be designed to withstand wind loadings of 25 psf. Louver performance data shall he licensed ender the AMCA Certified Ratings Program and shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. This certified performance data shall include airflow pressure loss and water penetration. Acoustic performance ratings shall comply with the following standards: "Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions,"ASTM Designation E90-90 and "Standard Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class," ASTM Designation E413-87. Acoustical louvers shall be Greenback AFJ series, or equal. C. PENTHOUSE LOUVER Louver shall be low silhouette louvered penthouse unit for relief applications. Constriction shall be all-aluminum. Unit shall have a removable aluminum cover for internal access and shall be lined with fiberglass insulation to prevent condensation. Cover shall be securely fastened to the unit by corrosion-resistant fasteners. Birdscreen shall be constructed of 1/2-inch (13 mm) mesh securely mounted across intake/relief openings. Units shall feature a weather-resistant 0.080-inch (2 min) aluminum louver with mitered corners. Louvers shall be mounted 4 inches (102 nun) from the throat for maximum weather protection. Louver design shall result in low pressure drops, low hood heights and maintain maximum weather resistance. Penthouse louvers shall be Greenback WRH series, or equal. 2.3 DAMPERS Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of AMCA Standard 500-D. A. INSULATED FRAME AND BLADE DAMPER The damper shall be suitable for pressures up to 8-inch w.g., velocities to 4,000 ft/min, standard air leakage less than 3 CFM/square foot at 1-inch w.g. and temperatures to 200 degrees F. Dampers shall consist of: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G 4t 6627 15700-3 i 0.125-inch aluminum channel frame; aluminum airfoil blade internally insulated with polyurethane foam and with polystyrene on four sides and thermally broken with dual polyurethane resin gaps; aluminum airfoil blade internally insulated polyurethane foam and thermally broken. The airfoil blades shall be completely symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point, presenting identical resistance to airflow in either direction or i pressure on either side of the damper. The axle shall be 304 stainless steel with dual bearings in an acetal inner sleeve. The airfoil blade seal shall be silicone rubber,jamb seal shall be 304 stainless steel, and external 304 stainless steel blade-to-blade linkage. Insulated frame and blade dampers shall be Greenheck ICD series, or equal. B. ROUND CONTROL DAMPER The damper shall be suitable for pressures up to 5-inch w.g., velocities to 2,500 ft/min and temperatures to 180 degrees F. Dampers shall consist of: a 14 gauge galvanized steel frame, blades fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel, plated steel axles turning in stainless steel bearings, and vinyl and silicone blade seals. Round control dampers shall be Greenheck VCDRM, or equal. 2.4 DAMPER ACTUATOR Actuator shall have spring return operation and open in the direction of the airflow. Actuator shall fail in the Open position. The actuator shall be sized by the damper manufacturer for the torque requirements of the damper. The mounting location, voltage, and NEMA enclosure rating shall be as shown on the schedules. Damper actuators shall be Belimo or equal. 2.5 GRILLES Grilles shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-2006. A. SUPPLY GRILLES Grilles shall be of steel construction. Grilles shall be 45 degree deflection fixed louver type with blades spaced 3A" on center. Blades shall run parallel to the long dimension of the grille. The grilles shall be finished in a powder coat. The owner shall determine the color of the grille. Supply grilles shall be Price 96 series, or equal. B. SPIRAL DUCT GRILLE Spiral duct grilles shall be of steel construction. Grilles shall be double deflection type with two sets of fully adjustable deflection blades spaced 3/4" on center. The front blades shall nm parallel to the short dimension City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-4 of the grille. The air scoop shall be adjusted via the operator on the side frame. The grille shall be finished in a powder coat. The owner shall determine the color of the grille. Spiral duct grille shall be Price SDG series, or equal. 2.6 FANS Fans shall be bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance and be UL listed. IN-LINE DIRECT DRIVE ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTAED FAN The fan shall be of the centrifugal, direct drive inlino type. The fan, fan housing, and accessories described below shall be one unit supplied by the same manufacturer. The housing shall be of square design constructed of heavy gauge aluminum and include square duct mounting collars. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum. The wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan applications. Motors shall be heavy-duty ball bearing type carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure as indicated on the Fan Schedules. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of fall speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 V DC signal. Motor shall be a mhlimum of 85% efficient at all speeds. Motor and drives shall be mounted out of the airstream and readily accessible for maintenance. Fan motor shall be of the high efficiency type. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. The bearings shall be selected for minimum (L10) life at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for minimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed, and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. The motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing. The accessories and controls and finish shall be as indicated on the Fan Schedule. Fan shall be Greenheck SQ series, or equal. 2.7 ELECTRIC HEATERS Heaters shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified and meet requirements of the National Electrical Code. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-5 A. UNIT HEATER Heater shall be horizontal or vertical mount type. Heater housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Heater shall be fan-forced air unit with aluminum finned, copper clad heating elements. The fan shall be completely enclosed and dynamically balanced. The unit shall be complete with pivotal wall or ceiling motmting kit as specified on Plans, control transformer, automatic reset thermal overheat protector, adjustable louvered outlet grille and enamel finished steel housing; all shall be one unit supplied by the same manufacturer. Unit heater shall be Qmark MUH series, or equal. 2.8 THERMOSTATS Provide thermostats, as required to control heating and ventilating equipment. Thermostats shall be located on an interior wall that does not receive direct solar exposure unless otherwise indicated. Adjustment screws and temperature-setting indicator shall be accessible without opening the enclosure. Contractor shall provide power wire and appropriate conduit installation for all powered thermostats. A. MODULATING THERMOSTATS Modulating thermostats shall be control designed to regulate fan speed based on level of temperature space. Control shall include a Proportional Integral Derivative(PTD) feedback loop and shall have labeled terminal strips for easy wiring. Control shall output a 0-10 VDC signal to operate an electronic commutation (EC) motor. Temperature setpoint range shall be 50 to 90 degrees F. Modulating thermostats shall be Peco T167 series, or equal. B. INDUSTRIAL ROOM THERMOSTAT Industrial room thermostats shall be designed to control beating or cooling in harsh environments. Construction shall be a NEMA 4X enclosure shielding a nickel-plated sensing bulb. Setpoint temperature shall be set with adjustable knob with a temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F. Thermostat shall be capable of controlling several heaters. Industrial room thermostat shall be Chromalox WORT, or equal. 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTOR At the inlet and discharge of all air handling equipment provide flexible duct connector. The metal to fabric connection shall consist of fabric material a minimum of 3 inches wide with 3 inch metal on either side of the flex material. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15700-6 Metal shall match the duct material for which it is installed. The fabric and metal shall be joined by means of a double lock seam. Flexible fabric shall be Neoprene material with woven fiberglass as base fabric Neoprene coating and shall be UL listed. Material specification at a minimum shall be Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd, Tensile Strength of 500 psi, Tear Strength: 12 psi, Low Temperature: -40 degrees F, High Temp: 200 degrees F. Provide Duro Dyne or approved equal. 2.10 ELBOWS Standard radius or vaned square, as per SMACNA Standards. 2.11 TURNING VANES Turning vanes shall be an engineered airfoil design; with smoothly-rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge for low pressure drop, anti-dirt, and positive fastening. Vanes shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Rail support system shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with pre-punched fastener holes. Tabbed or slotted dimple fasteners are not acceptable. Two fasteners shall fasten each vane to rail allowing for final vane angle angle-of- attack adjustment during installation. Pressure drop performance shall be ETL tested not to exceed 0.027 in w.c. at 1,000 FPM. Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 dB in band 4 at 2,000 FPM-duct size 24 x 24. Manufacturers: Aero-Dyne —H-E-P 2.12 DUCT ACCESS DOOR Hinged, sash lock, as per SMACNA Standards. 2.13 TAPE Non-combustible, tluee inches in size, foil backing, pressure-sensitive lap of facing material. NASHUA 357 (Low Pressure), NASHUA FSK (High Pressure) or equal. 2.14 ADHESIVE Foster, Sealfos#30-36 or Arabol. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 15700-7 2.15 INSULATION A. PREFORMED GLASS FIBER(PGF) 4# density, 0.24K at 75 degrees F mean temp., laminated jacket. Manville Micro-Lok AP-T or equal. 2.16 I\IETAL DUCTWORK Metal ductwork for air supply and return air shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A527 (galvanized sheet metal) or ASTM A167, ANSI Type 302/304 (stainless steel sheets) if S.S. ductwork is shown on the Plans. Metal spiral ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A653 (galvanized sheet metal). Metal ductwork shall be rigidly constructed and installed. Slip joints shall be in the direction of air flow. All joints shall be sealed tight. Bonding materials for sealing duct system and attaching insulation shall be supplied by manufacture. Ducting shall be United McGill, SMACNA or equal. Hangers shall be secured to the ceiling or walls and shall be adequate to support ductwork. Where ducts go through walls, there shall be 1/4-inch clearance left and this area shall be sealed tight with compatible mastic and foam rubber and the penetration area covered over with flanges that are secured to the ductwork only. Volume dampers shall be located as shown on the Plans, and at a minimum of one damper for each branch duct installed. Dampers are to be of the same material as the ducts they are installed in. Fire dumpers shall be installed in ductwork as directed by the Building Permit or required by the Owner. Ductwork shall be installed and supported to comply with the requirements and recommendations of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMCACNA) H VAC Duct Construction Standards. Sheet metal plenum shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gauge galvanized steel and reinforced with 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1/8-inch angles as required to prevent drumming or breathing. Access openings and covers shall be provided for cleaning, wiring and servicing motors, filters, fans and dampers located within or blocked by sheet metal work. 2.17 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Comply with requirements and recommendation of Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Conform to requirements of SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O A16627 15700-8 Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories. Hanger straps and rods shall be in accord with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Fasten bracing to ductwork, including riveting, bolting, and tack welding per SMACNA. Provide galvanized steel band or fabricated angle iron brackets for wall supports, except in wet well area where stainless steel components are required. A. HANGER RODS Carbon Steel, with hex nuts and flat washers. B. CONCRETE INSERTS 1. Continuous channel -Unistrut. 2. Universal, malleable iron - Type 18, FS WW-H-171. Beam Clamps and Attachments as required. 2.18 SEISMIC SUPPORTS All HVAC supports, tie rods, bracing, brackets or other types of supports shall be designed in accordance with the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) and ASCE 7-05. Evaluate the seismic loads in accordance with 2009 IBC and Chapter 13 of ASCE 7-05 for the seismic design parameters shown on the Plans. 2.19 FIRE SEALANT UL listed field installed self-curing fire barrier material (1 hour minimum rating), suitable for insertion in the annual space between a pipe or duct and its wall penetration or sleeve; Dow Coming "Fire Stop" sealant, 3M "Fire Barrier" caulk or putty or Nelson"Flameseal"putty. Three-hour rated fire seals shall be manufactured modular mechanical type, Thunderline "Link-Seal" Model FS Pyro-Pac with accessory wall sleeve or equal, 2.20 FILTERS Air filters shall be 80 percent efficiency, disposable type, and not less than MERV 12 rated. Filter shall UL Class 2 listed unless specifically noted otherwise on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-9 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION All materials shall be installed as shown on the Plans and according to manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust all dampers and louvers to provide tight seal when closed and unobstructed flow when open. Provide all necessary controls, and coordinate all control wiring with Division 16. All installed equipment shall function in manner intended. The heating/cooling system shall be installed as shown on the Plans and shall be connected to any ductwork with flexible connections. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of any condensate drain piping and conduitywire runs for controllers/thermostats. 3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. QUALIFICATIONS All work shall be performed tinder the direct supervision of an AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Resumes including education, experience, and certification of each person on the project shall be submitted for review and approval by the Owner. Notify the Owner 10 days prior to testing. The Owner shall witness the testing and balancing- B. INSTRUMENTATION All instruments used will be currently calibrated and listed in the TAB report showing instrument description, serial number, and date of calibration. C. AIR BALANCE When systems are complete and ready for operation, the TAB Agency will perform a final air balance for all air systems and record the results. The volume of air for the supply, return, exhaust, and outside air equipment and terminals will be tested and balanced within the tolerances of the AABC Standard. The general scope of balancing by the TAB Agency will include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Filters Check air filters and filter media and balance only systems with essentially clean filters and filter media. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-10 2. Fan Speed Measure and record.RPM at each fan speed. 3, Voltage and Amperage Readings Measure and record the final operating amperages and voltage for each motor. 4. Static Pressure Profile Static pressure profiles shall be measured and recorded across each supply fan, cooling coil, heating coil, return air fan, air handling unit filter, and exhaust fan, and at the furthest air device or terminal unit from the air handler supplying that device. Static pressure profiles shall also be provided for systems, which do not perform as designed. 5. Equipment Air Flow Adjust and record exhaust, return, outside, and suppiy air CFfvi and temperatures, as applicable, at each fan and coil. 6. Coil Temperatures Set controls for full cooling and for full heating loads. Read and record entering and leaving dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures (cooling only) at each cooling coil, heating coil, and FIVAC terminal unit. At the time of reading, record water flow, entering and leaving water temperatures (hi variable flow systems adjust the air and water flow to design for all the above readings). 7. Zone Air Flow Adjust each zone of multizone units, each HVAC terminal unit, and air-handling unit for design CFM. S. Outlet Air Flow Adjust each exhaust inlet and supply diffuser, register and grille to within the tolerances shown in the AABC Standard. hiclude all terminal points of air supply and all points of exhaust. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-11 9. Pitot Tube Traverses For use in future troubleshooting by maintenance personnel, all exhaust ducts, main supply ducts, outside air, and return ducts shall have air velocity and volume measured and recorded by the Pitot tube traverse method shown in the AABC Standard. Locations of these traverse test stations shall be described on the sheet containing the data. D. REPORTS The report will contain all required information as described within this specification, including the information formatted and shown in the AABC Standard. Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, records of test instruments used, and a list of all measurements taken. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, water, electricity, etc.) that appear in the reports shall be certified by the Agency's Test and Balance Engineer. Six copies of the final report shall be submitted to the Owner indicating a summary of actual operating data and any abnormal operating conditions. E. EXECUTION L Provide additional dampers, and clean filters as specified herein and shown on the Plans. 2. Put all system and equipment into operation and continue operation until all adjusting, balancing, testing, demonstrations, instructions, and cleaning of systems have been completed. 3. Do not begin testing and balancing until systems are completed and in good working order. 4. Check motors for proper rotation, coupling and drive alignment, belt tension, and freedom from vibration, etc. 5. Make all changes to drives and dampers as necessary to accomplish specified airflows. ***END OF SECTION*** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 15700-12 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL i SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART ] GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the requirements and methods for furnishing and installing the basic electrical materials, and other associated items as shown on the Plans, and as further specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 01800 Testing, Commissioning, and Training (12300 Site Earthwork Division 3 Concrete 09900 Painting 11000 Equipment General Provisions Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE CONTROLLERS Adjustable speed drives are variable frequency AC drives used to power AC squirrel-cage induction motors at variable frequencies, which relate directly to variable speed. These drives are also commonly known as Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs). Basic design typically consists of AC to DC conversion followed by AC output wave simulation using pulse-width modulation (PWM). This simulated output power signal will appear to the motor as a representation of an adjustable frequency sine wave. This output may be electrically noisy. B. ANALOG 1/0 Analog I/O are PLC input/output electronic signals that are contiguous over time. Analog signals represent a large number of values within a specific range. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-1 C. ATTICS Attics shall be considered those closed environments between ceilings and roofing that allow full entry of personnel by use of ladders, pull-down stairs, or other special means. ATTICS are considered dry crawl spaces (see CRAWL SPACES). Tight spaces between ceilings and roofs that do not allow full entry of personnel are considered concealed areas (see CONCEALED AREAS), D. CHEMICAL AREAS Locations where process chemicals are stored or used within a process in either a confined or open manner. Chemical areas may be exposed to chemical solids, liquids, or gases as a result of normal operation, system maintenance, or spills/leaks. E. CONCEALED AREAS Locations that are underground, within waits, or within other areas that do not allow full entry of personnel are considered concealed. Concealed areas are not exposed (see EXPOSED AREAS) or accessible (see ATTICS and CRAWL SPACES). F. CONTROL PANELS Control Panels shall be defined as enclosures that contain electrical devices capable of controlling, altering, indicating or displaying the function or conditions of electrical circuits. Unlike junction boxes, Control Panels are not just used for the redirection or reconnection of electrical circuits. G. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES 120 Vac general-purpose receptacles that are not dedicated to a specific function or piece of equipment. Receptacles dedicated to computers, heat tracing, fans, louvers, and etc., are not considered convenience receptacles. H. CRAWL SPACES Crawl spaces shall be considered those closed environments that are not normally accessible to personnel, but that allow full entry of personnel by special means. City of Kent 646 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-2 i Crawl spaces are considered exposed areas and may be dry or wet (see ATTICS). I. DANIP AREAS Damp areas are considered wet (see WET AREAS). I. DEDICATED RECEPTACLES Dedicated receptacles are provided for a specific receptacle load such as computers, heat tracing, fans, louvers, metering pumps, sump pumps, and etc. Dedicated receptacles are not intended for general use. K. DIGITAL 1/0 A digital I/O point consists of a single input or output binary bit at one of two possible states, which may be represented as I's or 0's, ON or OFF, YES or NO, TRUE or FALSE, etc. Digital I/O may also be called "discrete" I/O. Within these specifications, both terms are synonymous. L. DRY AREAS Locations not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subjected to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction (see FINISHED AREAS). Rooms containing process water, chemical piping, or related equipment are not considered DRY. Areas that are not considered DRY are considered WET. M. EXPOSED AREAS Locations that are visible, outdoors, or exposed to a process or room environment. Exposed areas are not concealed (see CONCEALED AREAS). N. FINISHED AREAS Indoor confined areas that are not directly exposed to a process or process chemicals. They typically include closed offices, bathrooms, laboratories, lunch/break rooms, etc. Finished areas are considered DRY. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-3 O. HIM Human Interface Module—A programmable operator interface directly associated with, or integral to, an electrical control device (such as a VFD or Soft Start drive). This interface displays device setpoints and status with a keypad for data entry. P. HMI Human Machine Interface —The way a person interacts with a computer or electronic device. It comprises the screen menus and icons, keyboard shortcuts, command language, and help functions. Peripheral support devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, touch screen, and remote controls are also included. The HMI system is typically PC based, located in an office or lab environment. Q. HOT SPARE A "Hot Spare" is a PLC analog or digital channel in a PLC card that is powered but the chanmel is unassigned. Hot spares are cormected to fused field 1/0 terminal block groups per Npeciftration 16940. R. INDOOR AREAS Confined locations where the equipment is normally protected from wind, dust, rain, snow, and other natural elements. INDOOR areas are not the same as DRY areas. S. 1/O Inputs/Outputs—Input and output signals into and out of a PLC or RTU. T. OIU Operator Interface Unit—A graphical display of industrial plant system variables and status. It may also allow for process control adjustments. Navigation of its programming may be via keypad, touch screen, or a combination of both. An OIU is typically located on a field control panel or control panel in an electrical equipment room. An Operator Interface Unit is considered a possible extension of a PLC, like an I/O or network card. PLC installations may or may not not include an OIU. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-4 U. OUTDOOR AREAS Locations where the equipment is normally exposed, or partially exposed, to weather in the form of wind, dust, rain, snow, and other natural elements. V. PROCESS AREAS Process areas are those areas that are directly exposed to process moisture, or that may be subjected to moisture in the event of a process leak or failure. They typically include pump rooms, chemical rooms, and direct process-exposure areas such as clearwells, open filters, and reservoirs. Process areas are considered WET. W. PLC Programmable Logic Controller—A device used to monitor and control system process. It can be used stand-alone or in conjunction with other systems such as SCADA. It may provide telemetric functions or interface with telemetric equipment. X. RTU Remote Telemetry Unit/Remote Terminal Unit—A device that reads the status of process devices and transmits them to another telemetric unit. RTUs may transmit a command from another source but will not alter or interpret the command. RTUs differ from PLCs in that they do not control a process. Y. SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) systems are data monitoring and control stations that allow operators to visualize and adjust live process conditions at a centralized HMI. These systems often include process historical data tracking and alarming capabilities. SCADA systems can be used for data monitoring locally, remotely, or both. Z. SHOP FABRICATED Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been established. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station - G&O#16627 16050-5 AA. TELEMETRY Telemetry is the transfer of data between remote sites. Typical methods of data transfer are utility phone lines, radio transmission, and fiber optics. BB. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) See ADJUSTABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS in this Section. CC. VIBRATING EQUIPMENT Equipment that is subject to vibration under normal operating conditions, such as motors, transformers, electrically operated valves, etc. DD. WET AREAS Locations outdoors, underground, directly or indirectly exposed to the process, in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth, or in any other way subject to saturation with water or other liquids. L4 REFERENCES Unless otherwise noted, the requirements of the following code-making authorities and standard organizations apply: References Title AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. FM Factory Mutual System ICEAO Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ISA Instrument Society of America JIC Joint Industrial Council JIC EMP-I Mass production Equipment LPI Light Protection Institute NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA ICS-1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems NEMA ICS-2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies NEMA ICS-6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems NFPA National Fine Protection Association City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-6 NRTL National Recognized Testing Laboratory OSHA Occupational, Health, and Safety Administration UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 508 Safety Industrial Control Equipment UL 698 Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous Locations WAC 296-46B Washington Administrative Code, Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, standards, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, plans, and specifications, the more stringent condition shall govern. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Prior to submittal of shop plans, coordinate all electrical equipment, particularly motor control equipment, process and control panels, and instrumentation, with related manufacturers and with other applicable equipment and systems specified in other divisions of the Specifications. C. Provide submittals in the following manner: 1. Organize the submittals by CSI code type. 2. Clearly show the Tag Number associated with each submittal within each CSI grouping. 3. Include non-tagged devices such as grounding systems, conduits, wireway, duetbank details, wire, cable, boxes, fittings, switches and receptacles. 4. Clearly show the specific part, part number, order code, etc. associated with the device. Use pointers, highlights, circles, etc. to clearly identify the specific part. D, Provide manufacturer's product technical data including, but not limited to: 1. Manufacturer's name, address, and contact number. 2. Manufacturer's product descriptive bulletin. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-7 3. Nameplate data, current, voltage, load, impedance, and other electrical data pertinent to the Project and necessary to assure compliance with the Specifications and Plans. E. Provide elementary wiring diagrams for the electrical control systems showing the wiring of electrical control items, such as starters, control systems, interlocks, switches, and relays as they apply to this Contract. F. Provide schematic interconnection diagrams for each control system and each control panel. Each control diagram shall show a schematic representation of the process equipment and the locations of the switches, meters, automatic valves, indicators, controllers, and recorders. Show correct operating settings and ranges for each control instrument on the diagrams. G. Use diagrams and symbols in shop plans, which conform to IIC Electrical Standards for Industrial Equipment and/or NEMA, ICS, ANSI, and IEEE standards, latest revisions. Prepare plans on 22" x 34", or ANSI size A, B, or D in a format similar to the Contract Documents or other nationally recognized drawing standard. H. Clearly, indicate on submittals that the equipment or material is NRTL listed or is constructed of listed or recognized components. Where a NRTL standard has not been established, clearly identify that no NRTL standard exists for that equipment. I. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Manuals for the electrical system shall consist of3-ringed, expandable metal hinge binders labeled with the job name and the Contractor's name. 1. Provide tab dividers for each major type of equipment. Each divider shall contain detailed information, plans, diagrams, and instructions for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment installed it Division 16. 2. Provide a table of contents listing each tab divided section and its contents. 3. In each section, compile a spare parts list and supplier index. 4. Assemble records of all tests, measurements, and calibration settings made for each device. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 016627 16050-8 i i J. Upon completion of the work, provide Record ("As Built") Plans. Fold, punch, and insert these records into the manual after they are reviewed by the Engineer by folding and punching l 1" x 17" or smaller plans and folding larger sheets, and placing in plastic sleeves in manual. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide the labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install, and place into operation complete power, lighting, control, alarm, communications, and instrurnentation electrical system of this Contract as shown on the Plans or Specifications herein. B. Provide a functioning system(s) in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, performance requirements as specified or indicated, and modifications resulting from reviewed shop plans and field coordinated plans. C. Provide complete wiring and controls for all equipment specified under other divisions and that comply with Division 16. 1, Connect motors, controls, meters, and any other electrical device installed or provided as part of the project. D. Pay and make arrangements for necessary permits, licenses, and inspections. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TESTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, or equal, to supervise onsite testing specified in Part 3. B. Comply with NFPA 70 (NEC) for components and installation. C. LISTING AND LABELING Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-9 1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled:" As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications a. A NRTL as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. b. A NRTL recognized and approved by the State of Washington. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING See Section 01600. Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for storage— either inside or on top of enclosures. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment from being defaced. Repair or replace damaged, corroded, and rejected items at no additional cost to the Owner. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to individual Division 16 sections. l, Similar equipment shall be provided by only one manufacturer throughout the project unless otherwise noted in the Specifications. B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Section 01300. C. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Plans or Specifications to establish quality standards and basis of design: 1, Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal equipment may be acceptable. 2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide new materials and equipment, which are standard products of manufacturers, regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide material or equipment approved and labeled for the purpose for which it is to be used by NRTL or other organizations acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. B, Where voltage, current, power, temperature or other ratings are specified that do not correspond to standard ratings of the manufacturer selected by City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-10 the Contractor, furnish the next rating level which is more conservative or increases the capacity of the device or material in question. C. Furnish materials, devices, and equipment that are non-corrosive or coat them in a manner that renders them non-corrosive and acceptable to the Engineer. Do not provide materials, which contain polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos, or other hazardous or detrimental materials. Do not install materials in a location or construction manner that produces galvanic action or do not install material combinations with corroding or eroding action. D. Where changes in the work, or substitutions in material are proposed, ensure that sizes, weights, openings, etc., are provided that do not require changes in the work outside this Division. E. All terminals shall be suitable for 75 degrees C rated copper conductors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. When equipment is shop fabricated specifically for this Project, use electrical devices and enclosures, which are NRTL, listed and labeled or recognized. B. SHOP OR FACTORY FINISHES 1. See Division 11 and Section 09900. 2, Interiors of other painted electrical equipment shall be either white or light gray. C. Fabricate equipment or devices in the field equivalent in every respect to manufactured items used for the same purpose. Where cutting, drilling, grinding, etc., is done to galvanize or painted metal, regalvanize, or paint to match original finish. 2.4 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for electrical components. 1. Material Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc coating, or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-11 using approved alternative finish or inherent material characteristics. 2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations Hot-dip galvanized steel, or stainless steel, except as otherwise indicated. B. ANCHORS Cadmium plated or galvanized steel in dry areas; stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized steel in wet areas. 1. Lag screws or Type A tapping screws for wood. 2. Rockwell "well-nut" for light loads in masonry. 3. Thru-bolt with fender washers for heavy loads in masonry. 4. Toggle bolts with springhead for hollow partitions. 5. Self-drilling anchors with threaded studs for concrete. 6. Clamps or U-bolts for structural steel. 7. Self-drilling anchors with extension rods for hollow tile over concrete. C. SHEET-METAL SLEEVES 0.0276 of an inch or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed with welded longitudinal joint. D. PIPE SLEEVES ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 2.5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PRODUCTS Where more than one type is listed for a specified application, selection is Installer's option but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and Specifications. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-12 B. COLORED ADHESIVE MARKING TAPE FOR RACEWAYS, WIRES, AND CABLES Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide. C. UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE Provide bright-colored, vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 6-inches wide compounded for direct-burial service with permanent and continuous print. D. TAPE MARKERS Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. COLOR-CODING CABLE TIES Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. F. FASTENERS FOR PLASTIC-LAMINATED AND METAL SIGNS Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. G. FLASH PROTECTION WARNING Provide Are Flash Wailing Label on all equipment as required by 110.16 NEC (2014). The label is to contain the following text: WARNING or DANGER Are Flash Hazard! Follow requirements in NFPA 70E for safe work practices and appropriate PPE. Failure to comply can result in death or injury. 2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT Use touchup paint on equipment provided by equipment manufacturer and select color to match existing equipment finish. A. FOR NON-EQUIPMENT SURFACES Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-13 B. FOR GALVANIZED SURFACES Zinc-rich paint recommended by equipment manufacturer, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS A. WET AREAS 1. For pullboxes and equipment vaults, reference Specification Section 16130. 2. For wet areas which are not pullboxes or equipment vaults, hot-dip galvanized materials, stainless steel materials, or nonmetallic, U-channel system components unless otherwise noted on the Plans. B. DRY AREAS Hot-dip galvanized materials unless otherwise noted on the Plans. C. METHODS Support raceway, equipment, and devices from framing members or building structure with sufficient clearance for maintaining and servicing. Provide backing plates, and/or framing material to support equipment, devices, and materials, which are located between the building or facility structure-framing members. 3.2 RECORDS A. Maintain and annotate on the job at all times a separate set of Record Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions. Show changes from the Contract Documents, routing of hidden raceways, actual fixture and equipment locations, equipment sizes and dimensions and building outline changes. At the end of the Project,provide the Engineer a complete set of Plans marked in red pencil in a manner consistent with the Contract Plans, indicating the changes made on the job. B. Record voltage, current, and megohmeter and ground ohmic resistance test measurements made on the electrical work, the trip units, fuses, and overload relay elements installed in the equipment and the setting of all City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O#16627 16050-14 pressure, flow, level, etc., control devices. When the Project is completed and operating,, turn over these records to the Owner. C. Equipment and raceways installed under this contract for future work shall be dimensioned on the Record Drawings. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building stricture during progress of construction to allow for electrical installations. Obtain approval from structural Engineer for penetration of structural components prior to penetrating the component. R Coordinate installation of supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. D. Coordinate the location of motors, switches, panel connections, and other points of connection with the equipment manufacturers or vendors prior to conduit installation. Route circuits to the actual connection point. Even if removal and reinstallation of building materials is necessary, remove and reinstall conduit, outlet boxes, and other electrical connections, if initial electrical connections are not made to the appropriate equipment location. E. Coordinate and schedule connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. F. Coordinate and verify work under Division 16 with work under other Divisions, cooperate in locating equipment to avoid interference with work of others, and plan work to harmonize with the work of other trades so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible. Coordinate the installing of built-in work, attaching items to buildings, and cutting and patching. Coordinate connecting electrical circuits to components furnished under other Divisions. (Portions of the electrical design are based upon the equipment specified in other Divisions.) No extras are allowed because of moving work required to avoid interference with work of other Contractors. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O #16627 16050-15 G. Coordinate the interruption of electrical systems to any part of the facility in use by the Owner at least 7 working days before interruption of the system. Order the work to minimize downtime. H. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing work where identification is applied to field-finished surfaces. I. Where changes in the work, or substitutions in material are proposed, ensure that sizes, weights, openings, etc., are provided that do not require changes in the work outside this Division. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. ENCLOSURES FOR USE WITH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Unless specifically called out otherwise on the Plans, electrical enclosures shall meet the following specification: 1. Dry Areas NHMA 1. 2. Wet Areas a. Indoors NEMA 3R with HVAC equipment. NEMA 4X where the enclosure will be subjected to splashing water or hose-directed water. NEMA 12 where the enclosure will not be subjected to splashing water or hose-directed water. b. Outdoors NEMA 3R where the enclosure will not be subjected to splashing water,hose-directed water, or windblown dust, 3, Exceptions a. As otherwise indicated on the Plans. b. As modified in other Division 16 sections. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-16 4. Standards a. NEMA ICS-6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. b. UL 508, Rainproof Enclosures. B. WORKMANSHIP Install the equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner employing workers skilled in the particular trade and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code, applicable local regulations, ordinances, and industry standards. A person in charge at the site shall maintain adequate supervision of the work under this division when necessary for coordination with other work. C. SELF-SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT Install self-supporting equipment in a level and plumb manner, shimming with full width stainless steel shims, as necessary. Bolt units to the floor with stainless steel expansion anchors and bolts, or weld units to embedded steel channels. Floor or pad shall be level within plus or minus 1/8 of an inch in a square yard before installing equipment. Grout or caulk enclosure to floor or pad. Provide bushings on conduits entering from above or at the side. For conduits entering from below, install grounded insulating bushings bonded to the ground bus or pad. Install concrete pads and bases according to requirements of Section 03300. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment as indicated or specified: 1. Floor-mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 4-inch-high concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab. D. MOUNTING HEIGHT Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated. Mount enclosures for individual units at 54 niches above floors to centerline of controls unless otherwise indicated in the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Boostcr Station G&O#16627 16050-17 E. ACCESSIBILITY Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Comrect for ease of disconnecting, while minimizing interference with other installations. F. EQUIPMENT ORIENTATION Install items parallel and/or perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated. G. EQUIPMENT MOUNTED ENCLOSURES Attach enclosures mounted on equipment with machine screws or clamps as required. Do not drill equipment frames or sheets without permission of supplier/manufacturer or the Engineer. Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. H. COORDINATION Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 1. WALL MOUNTED ENCLOSURES Stand equipment off wall surfaces a minimum of 1/4 of an inch where enclosures are mounted on walls in WET AREAS with neoprene or plastic shim washers. I. MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes,junction boxes, transformers, and other devices, except where components are mounted directly to a structural member of adequate strength. K. SLEEVES Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except where core-drilled holes are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#]6627 16050-18 fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. L. FASTENING Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware to the building structure. 1. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or any other items. 2. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof-test load. M. FIREPROOFING I. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials. 2. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. 3. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or damaged. N. PENETRATIONS Make all penetrations of electrical work through walls and roofs water and weather-tight. O. MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS 1, Screen or seal all openings into outdoor equipment to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects. 2. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth or concrete. 3. Do not exceed the dimensions indicated for equipment except as approved ur writing by the Engineer. 4. Do not use equipment or arrangements for equipment that reduce the required clearance or exceed the space allocations. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-19 P. DIMENSIONS Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and dimensions indicated for the installation of electrical equipment are restrictive dimensions. 1. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned plans. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. LABELS Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Conduit labeling is further described in section 16130. The labeling of conductors is further described in section 16120. B. NOMENCLATURE Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated on the t ontract We_iiments or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project. C. SELF-ADHESIVE IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. D. IDENTIFY PATHS OF UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL LINES During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lilies, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above power and commmunication lines. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, use a single line marker. E, ENGRAVED, PLASTIC-LAMINATED LABELS, SIGNS, AND INSTRUCTION PLATES Engraving stock shall be melamine plastic laminate punched for mechanical fasteners with a minimum thickness of 1/16 of an inch for signs up to 20 square inches, and 1/8 of an inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face. Provide nameplates on equipment enclosures giving the name and circuit identification of the enclosed device/equipment in 1/4 of an inch lettering. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-20 F. PANELBOARD SCHEDULES For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. G. ARC FLASH HAZARD Provide and install warning labels for arc flash hazard on all switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, and other equipment per the requirements of the NEC and Washington State Administrative Code (WAC). 3.6 DEMOLITION A. EQUIPMENT TO BE DEMOLISHED Demolish all existing electrical devices and circuits, which are noted for demolition. Demolition includes, but is not limited to: 1. Removing all conduit, conductors, fittings, device boxes, hangers, panels, devices, etc., which are not concealed in the building structure or below grade/slab. B. TEMPORARY POWER Provide temporary power to existing branch circuit panels, branch circuits, and/or directly to electrical devices as required to keep all portions of the existing facility, which are occupied by the Owner, or required for operation, in operation at all times. Obtain approval by all appropriate code authorities, including the Department of Labor & Industries Electrical Inspection Department, or the local jurisdiction having authority, for any temporary connections required. C. DAMAGED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Where remahring electrical work is damaged or disturbed in the course of the work, remove damaged portions, and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. D. ABANDONED WORK Remove existing conductors from conduits, unless otherwise indicated. Cut and cap buried raceway indicated to be abandoned in place 2 inches below the surface. Cap and patch surface to match existing surface finish. City of Kout 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-21 E. REMOVAL See section 01900. F. TEMPORARY DISCONNECTION Remove, disconnect, store, clean, reinstall,reconnect, and snake operational those components that are indicated for relocation and/or reconnection. Coordinate the process, mechanical, HVAC, and other equipment scheduled to be relocated and/or reused with other Divisions, 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. 3.N 11)UUHUP PAINTING Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3.9 EXTRA MATERIALS Extra materials in this Section cover all spare parts for electrical devices under this contract and are centrally listed here for clarification and completeness. Spares shall match products installed, and shall be packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing the contents within. A. GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES (ASSOCIATED CSI SECTION— 16230) 1. Power Fuses (line power) Provide 3 spare power fuses of each type and rating. 2. Control Fuses Provide 10 percent (minimum of two) spare control fuses of each type and rating to cover all motor starters (not per starter). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-22 Provide 1 control fuse puller. 3. Filters Provide two sets each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion air filters. 4. V-Belts Provide one complete replacement set of all V-belts. 5. Touchup Paint Provide 1 quart(minimum) of touchup paint matching each color utilized on generator set. 6. Provide spare parts in suitable boxed watertight container marked "GENERATOR SPARE PARTS" and deliver to the Owner. Label with supplier's/manufacturer's name, the model number of the generator set, and the 24-hour service telephone number. B. MOTOR CONTROLLERS (ASSOCIATED CSI SECTION — 16420) The following quantities cover all motor starters under this contract (quantities are not per starter). L Power Fuses (line power) Provide three spare power fuses of each type and rating. 2. Control Transformer Fuses (primary and secondary) Provide 10 percent(minimum of two) spare control transformer fuses of each type and rating. Provide one control fuse puller. 3. Control Fuses Provide 10 percent (minimum of two) spare control fuses of each type and rating. Provide one control fuse puller. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-23 4. Control Relays Provide 10 percent(minimum of two) spare control relays of each type and rating. 5. Control Timing Relays Provide 10 percent(minimum of two) spare control timer relays of each type and rating. 6. Provide a single latching plastic container with a printed label adhered to the lid stating "MOTOR STARTER SPARE PARTS." C. PANELBOARDS (ASSOCIATED CSI SECTION— 16440) 1. Cabinet Keys Provide three spares of each type of key for panelboard cabinet locks. 2. Provide a latching plastic container with a printed [abet adhered to the lid stating 'PANELBOARD SPARE KEYS." D. CONTROL PANELS (ASSOCIATED CSI SECTION— 16940) The following quantities cover all control panels fabricated by the fabrication shop (quantities are not per panel). l. DIN-rail Fused Terminals Provide five spare DIN-rail fused tenninals of each type and rating. 2. DIN-rail Feed-Through Terminals Provide five spare DIN-rail feed-through terminals of each type, color, and rating. 3. Power Fuses (line power) Provide three spare power fuses of each type and rating. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-24 4. Control Power Fuses Provide 10 percent (minimum of two) spare control power fuses of each type and rating. Provide one control fuse puller. 5. PLC UO Fuses Provide 10 percent (minimum of two packets of five fuses each) spare control fuses of each type, voltage, and rating. Fuse ampacity should be clearly shown or marked. 6. PLC Buffer Relays Provide 10 percent (minimum of four) spare PLC buffer relays of each type, style, and rating. 7. Control and Timing Relays Provide 10 percent (minimum of four) spare control and timing relays of each type, style, and rating. S. Control and Timing Relay Sockets Provide two spare control and timing relay sockets of each type, style, and rating. 9. Ethernet Switches Provide one spare Ethernet switch of each type. 10. Relay/Solenoid Surge Protective Devices Provide two spare Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) for AC relays and solenoids and two spare diodes for DC relays and solenoids. 11, Provide a single latching plastic container with a printed label adhered to the lid stating "CONTROL PANEL SPARE PARTS." E. PLC PROCUREMENT (ASSOCIATED CSI SECTION — 16910) 1. Provide one boxed spare of each type of PLC I/O module, conununications module, power supply, and CPU module used in this contract. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-25 2. Provide a single latching plastic container with a printed label adhered to the lid stating "PLC SPARE PARTS." 3.10 TESTING, THIRD PARTY Test electrical equipment before energization and placing into service. Report all test results in writing. Where tests disclose a defect in the work, rework, or repair the work at no additional expense to the Owner and retest to confirm the rework or repair until testing confirms that the defect has been corrected. Test in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and testing instructions and the applicable electrical standards (i.e., NEMA, NFPA, IEEE, ISA, ANSI) for the class of equipment A. THIRD-PARTY GROUND TEST Engage an independent electrical testing organization to perform the test below. 1, Subject the completed GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM to a 3-point tail-of-potential ground test according to IEEE N 1. Perform the test not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage, and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Maximum grounding resistance values shall be as listed below: a. Equipment Grounding System: 25 ohms. b. Main Service, Grounding Electrode System: 5 ohms. 2. Provide third party ground test documents signed by the independent testing agency and the contractor and issued and approved by the Engineer prior @o energizing the power distribution system. These documents shall clearly show and describe the methods and equipment used in the test and all relevant readings and findings including ground resistance at each test location and observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O,U6627 16050-26 These documents shall clearly state whether the system has passed or not passed and show the point(s) where failure occurred. A copy of these signed test results shall be included in the O&M Manual. 3. Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify the Engineer. Check connections of affected equipment and conductors. Replace or repair defective connections or conductors. Provide additional ground rods where the grounding electrode resistance is greater than specified. Revise and repeat third party testing until resistance is within specifications. 4. These specifications apply to the following Section if it is included in this contract: 16060. B. THIRD-PARTY CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST Prior to energization engage an independent electrical testing organization to perform the test below. l. For molded case circuit breakers 100 Amps and larger, provide an independent testing agency to perform switch tests as stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 and circuit breaker tests as stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. Certify compliance with test parameters. 1 Provide third party breaker test documents signed by the independent testing agency and the contractor and issued and approved by the Engineer prior to energizing the breaker(s). These documents shall clearly show and describe the methods and equipment used in the test and all relevant readings and findings and shall include, as a minimum, the following: a. All breakers tested shall use the breaker tag numbers as assigned on the Plans. b. Each parameter measured shall include the dimension in the measured column (Amps, mS2, seconds, etc). C. Each parameter measured shall include an associated minimum and maximum acceptable value (acceptable range). d. Each breaker shall include a "passed" or "failed" status. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-27 e. Failed breakers shall a include short statement describing the failed parameter. f. Each breaker shall include the manufacturer's associated circuit breaker curve. 3. A copy of these signed test results shall be included in the O&M Manual. 4. Breakers that fail third party testing shall be replaced with new and retested by the same third-party testing agency. This process shall be repeated until all breakers subjected to this requirement have successfully passed testing and have been documented. Upon failure of a third-party breaker test, the cost of a new breaker and additional third party testing shall be born by the device/equipment manufacturer. 5. These specifications apply to the following Sections if they are included in this contract: 16230, 16410, 16440, 16442. 3.11 TESTING NOT REQUIRING THIRD PARTY Test electrical equipment before energization and placing into service. Report all test results in writing. Where tests disclose a defect in the work, rework, or repair the work at no additional expense to the Owner and retest to confirm the rework or repair until testing confirms that the defect has been corrected. Test in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and testing instructions and the applicable electrical standards (i.e., NEMA, NFPA, IEEE, ISA, ANSI) for the class of equipment A. CONDUCTOR MEGGER TEST 1. Power Conductor Testing After palling and prior to couueetion perform a Megger test between all power conductors (including the equipment ground) and between each power conductor and earth ground in the following manner: a. Perform megger tests at 600 V, b. Record ambient temperature and humidity during testing. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O ttt 6627 16050-28 c. Cables or conductors with a steady-state value less than 100 megohms shall be considered "failed". d. Failed cables and conductors shall be removed and replaced with new and retested per these specifications. e. Provide a Power Conductor Megger Testing Report. A blank copy of this report, specifically associated with this contract, is available from Engineering on request. A copy of these signed test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to startup and shall be included in the O&M Manual. 2. Control Conductor Testing a. Control conductor insulation testing is not required. 3. Instrumentation Conductor Testing b. Instrumentation conductor insulation testing is not required. B. CONDUCTOR INSPECTION On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. Certify compliance with test parameters. b. Remove and replace conductors with visible insulations damage on conductor ends due to installation in an incomplete or damaged conduit system such as, but not limited to, missing bushings or burrs on conduit ends. C. On THWN, THHN, THHW conductors, a tear, rip, or blister in the outer insulation sheath shall be considered damaged insulation and shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16050-29 C. MOTOR COMMISSIONING TEST l, Provide a Motor Commissioning Test Report for each new motor. A blank copy of this report, specifically associated with this contract, is available from Engineering on request. Motor Commissioning Test Reports shall be signed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to energizing the motors. A copy of these signed test results shall be included in the O&M Manual. 3.12 GENERAL TESTING AND INSPECTION A. PRIOR TO ENERGIZATI0N 1. After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers, perform visual and mechanical inspection of enclosures and devices. 2. Test the equipment and electrical circuits for proper connection, tightness, and absence of undesirable shorts and grounds. 3. Check for continuity, visual damage, marking, and proper phase sequence, 4, Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials from all enclosures; completely wipe down and vacuum. 5. Run a magnet around the bottom of each enclosure and around surfaces that may have collected metal shavings during manufacturing or constriction. B. AFTER ENERGIZATION 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3. Test operation, calibration, and settings of the meters, relays, and indicating devices. 4. Test all operating controls for proper operation. 5, Test all auxiliary equipment, i.e., heaters, thermostats, lights, all illuminated indicating devices and lamps, and all audible alarm City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-30 devices which are an integral part of transformers and panels to verify that they function properly. 6. Check fuses with an olurrmeter. Ring out wiring and busing. Check operation of control and safety interlocks. Check grounding of potential transformers, current transformers, and surge protective devices. Check control connections and tightness at tenninal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. Tug on each connection to verify a tight connection. 7. Check field connections to field devices, PLCs, and motor starters. 8. Verify proper communication reliability and data transfer speed on local networks. 9. Rework or repair equipment, which performs unsatisfactorily during, or as a result of, testing at no additional expense to the Owner. 10, Additional testing requirements specific to other sections are specified in those sections. 3.13 TEST DOCUMENTS Test documents, as described above, shall be signed and submitted to Engineering for review prior to energizing associated electrical circuits. 3.14 DEMONSTRATION Demonstrate to the Owner that the electrical installation is working by operating all electrical systems and equipment. Simulate control and emergency conditions, artificially where necessary, for complete system tests. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with each section in Division 16. 3.15 CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from all internal and external surfaces. Vacuum out the interior of electrical panels. Apply touchup paint as required to repair scratches, etc. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16050-31 Replace nameplates damaged during installation. Thoroughly vacuum the interior of all enclosures to remove dirt and debris. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16050-32 i i SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes grounding of electrical systems, equipment, and basic requirements for grounding, and protection of fife, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sections Items 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16120 Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceway and Boxes WAC 296-4613-250 Grounding and Bonding 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BONDING JUMPER (from NEC 2014, Article 100 - Definition, Bonding Juniper, Main) The connection between the GROUNDED CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR and the EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR at the service. B. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR (from NEC 2014, Article 100 - Definitions) The conductive path installed to connect normally non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment together and to the SYSTEM GROUNDED CONDUCTOR or to the GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, or both. Code requirements associated with equipment grounding is referenced to NEC 250, Section VI—Equipment Grounding and Equipment Grounding Conductors. C. GROUNDED CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR See GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-1 D. GROUNDING ELECTRODE (from NEC 2014, Article 100 - Definitions) A conducting object through which a direct connection to earth is established. E. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR (from NEC 2014, Article 100 - Definitions) A conductor used to connect the SYSTEM GROUNDED CONDUCTOR or the equipment to a GROUNDING ELECTRODE or to a point on the grounding electrode system. F. GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM See SYSTEM GROUNDING, G. SUSE The term SUSE is an acronym for'SUITABLE FOR SERVICE FNTR ANC'F " Tt is the nnint in the elertrinal ornnndino cvctem where. the SYSTEM GROUNDING CONDUCTORS connect to the EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS. For each separately-derived source, this shall occur at the SUSE point. These two points are connected by a BONDING JUMPER. H. SYSTEM GROUND GRID The SYSTEM GROUND GRID refers to all portions of SYSTEM GROUNDING. It may be as simple as a pair of ground rods and their associated GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS or a complex ground system with multiple types of GROUNDING ELECTRODES. 1. SYSTEM GROUNDED CONDUCTOR See GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR. J. SYSTEM GROUNDING System Grounding (also referred to as a GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM) consists of all GROUNDING ELECTRODES, GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS, and associated connecting devices. The utility grounded service conductor, typically referred to as the "utility neutral," is also associated with the system ground. Code requirements City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16060-2 I associated with system grounding is referenced to NEC 250.50 — Grounding Electrode System. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300, and Section 16050. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size,rating, and quantity indications govern. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS Comply with Section 16120. A. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 1. Insulated Conductors Color coded green, per section 16120, 2. Sized in compliance with NEC Table 250.122 or as shown on the Plans, whichever is larger. B. GROUNDING-ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS 1. Bare Conductors Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8. 2. Sized in compliance with NEC Table 250.66 or as shown on the Plans, whichever is larger. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16060-3 C. GROUNDING BRAIDS 1, Copper, manufactured, sized at 26,240 circular mils minimum(#6 AWG equivalent). 2. Certified C22.2, No. 41, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 3, UL Listings: UL-467 and UL486A. 2.3 GROUND RODS A. SIZE AND TYPE 1. Ground rods shall be 3/4-inch diameter by 10-feet long unless otherwise stated on the Plans. 2. Ground rods shall be copperclad steel rods as follows: a. Heavy uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly hpndl d to a riam OPPI rn rP b. Corrosion resistant bonding between the copper and steel. c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface. 2.4 GROUND ROD BOX A. GROUND ROD BOXES 1. Ground rod boxes shall be "Fogtite Ground Rod Box" or equal. B. GROUND ROD BOX LIDS 1. Ground rods associated with vaults, pullboxes, or handholes that may be subjected to road traffic or heavy loads shall have their ground box lids match the road rating load value of the associated vaults, pullboxes, or handholes. 2. The rninimum ground rod box lid shall be rated H2O. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-4 2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. COMPRESSION CONNECTORS 1. Compression type for interior locations: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. C. Non-reversible. d. Terminals for connections to bus bars shall have two bolt holes. 2. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete: a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837. b. High copper alloy content. C. Non-reversible. B. BOLTED CLAMPS 1. Standards: UL 467. 2. High copper alloy content. 3. Heavy-duty type. PART 3 APPLICATION There are two types of grounding systems covered in this specification; (1) Grounding Electrode Systems and (2) Equipment Grounding Circuits. l. Grounding Electrode Systems shall comply, as a minimum, to the requirements of NEC Sections 250.50 through 250.104, including Table 250.66, "Grounding Electrode Conductor for Altemating-Current Systems." 2. Equipment Grounding Circuits shall comply, as a minimum, to the requirements of NEC Sections 250.110 through 250.148, including City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 16060-5 Table 250.122, "Minimum Size Equipment Grounding Conductors for Grounding Raceway and Equipment." 3.1 GROUND ROD BOX The connection of Grounding Electrode Conductors to each ground rod shall be accessible through a ground rod box as described herein. A. Each ground rod shall be provided with a separate ground rod box which shall provide access to the ground rod, its Grounding Electrode Conductor, and its associated ground clamp. Exceptions: Unless specifically stated or detailed otherwise on the Plans. • Ground rod boxes shall not be required if the ground rod is exposed in a manhole, handhole, or seal-off vault as described in this speeifr.cation. B. Each ground rod box shall be mounted flush to grade. Exception: • Unless specifically stated or detailed otherwise on the Plans. 3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEMS Comply with NEC Article 250, Section Ill for types, sizes, and quantities of Grounding Electrode Conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are shown on the Plans. Provide grounding system as shown on the Grounding One Line Diagram of the Plans if provided. A. GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM shall have a minimum of two ground rods spaced a minimum of 6 feet apart and connected with Grounding Electrode Conductors as described in this Section. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#I6627 16060-6 B. SYSTEM GROUND GRIDS AROUND STRUCTURES WITH CONCRETE FLOORS OR STEM WALLS The Plans specifically show, state, or define the method of establishing the SYSTEM GROUND GRID and show the distribution and sizes of the Grounding Electrode Conductors, then these methods shall be followed unless required to be larger by NEC Table 250.66. The Contractor is responsible to provide and meet the testing requirements in QUALITY CONTROL ni this Section. C. OTHER GROUNDING ELECTRODE DEVICES AND METHODS 1. Hydraulic Piping Systems a. Provide and connect a Grounding Electrode Conductor pigtail to metal hydraulic piping on each major riser. Connect the conductors to the pipe using NEC-approved hardware and methods. b. Provide a ground jumper across both sides of a hydraulic piping electrical insulator to continue ground continuity past the insulator. Exception: • Unless specifically stated or detailed otherwise on the Plans. C. Ground shall be derived from: i. SYSTEM GROUND GRID ii. System SUSE connection point. 2. Magnetic Flow Meters a. Provide and connect a Grounding Electrode Conductor to the flow meter manufacturer's ground rings as per the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a#6 AWG ground conductor unless shown otherwise on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-7 Exception: + Unless manufacturer provides documentation verifying thatground rings are not required. 3. Generators a. In addition to the equipment ground provided with the generator feeder, provide a grounding electrode conductor to the generator's neutral terntinal sized per the Plans or per NEC Table 250.66, whichever is larger. Treat this conductor as a neutral wine. b. Grounding Methods i. The Grounding Electrode Conductor shall be connected to the neutral terminal of the generator as a neutral. This conductor shall be connected to the grounding system at the SUSE bonding connection. If required to run through a transfer switch, then this neutral wire shall terminate at the transfer switch's isolated neutral bus before continuing to the SUSE bonding point. it, The Equipment Grounding Conductor shall be connected to the metal frame of the generator in compliance with NEC.250.110. 4. Separately Derived Sources a. Ground step-down power transformer secondary neutral "XO" terminals to Grounding Electrode Conductors. i. System Ground Grid b. Ground step-down power transformer secondary neutral "XO" tennvnals to Grounding Electrode Conductors. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING Comply with NEC Article 250, Section VI for sizes of Equipment Grounding Conductors, except where specific larger sizes are shown on the Cable and Conduit Schedule in the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-8 A. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CIRCUITS Install insulated Equipment Grounding Conductors with circuit conductors in the manner listed below and hi compliance with Code. 1. Service and Feeders. Bond the Equipment Grounding Conductor to the equipment to which the circuit connects and to the raceway if it is metallic. 2. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. 3. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. 4. Flexible raceway runs. B. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS Equipment Grounding Conductors shall be insulated and color-coded green. C. ISOLATED GROUNDING-RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS Install a separate insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terrainals. Terminate at the Equipment Grounding Conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated. D. NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS Install an Equipment Grounding Conductor in nomnetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. Bond the conductor at each end to grounded metallic raceway or equipment. E. METALLIC RACEWAYS Install grounding bushings at the end of each conduit and connect to the equipment ground or GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GdO#16627 16060-9 F. CONTROL PANELS WITH A PLC Provide an insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor from the panelboard ground bus directly to a block of isolated ground terminals in the control panel. These terminals shall not be connected to the control panel's chassis ground. This ground shall be considered "Clean Ground" and shall be dedicated to the termination of instrument cable shields. This "clean" ground shall be 910 AWG minimum. 3.4 FREE-STANDING ELECTRICAL SUPPORT STRUCTURES Metal support structures used to support electrical equipment, devices, cabinets, panels, or enclosures shall be connected to the GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM by Grounding Electrode Conductors sized as shown on the Plans or per NEC Table 250.66, whichever is larger. Provide a ground conductor to each vertical support member within 6 inches after rising out of the concrete pad. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAYS 1. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS shall not be installed in metallic raceway. Where required to be in raceway, use PVC-Schedule 80 unless shown otherwise on the Plans. Reference Specification Section 16130. Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Plans or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. Coordinate grounding corrections made to the water system with the mechanical work and install bonding jumpers wherever deemed necessary, 4.2 CONNECTIONS A. GENERAL Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-10 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent fixture penetration of moisture to the contact surfaces. B. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING-WIRE TERMINATIONS Make the grounding conductor connections to motors or equipment 10 hp and above or 20 amperes and above, with conductor termination and a 5/16 of an inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing. Ground connection to smaller motors and equipment may be made by fastening the conductor termination to a connection box. C. METAL RACEWAY TERMINATIONS Where metallic raceways tenninate at metallic or non-metallic enclosures, panels, or housings, tenninate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated. D. CONNECTION TORQUE Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. COMPRESSION-TYPE CONNECTIONS Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16060-11 4.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. TESTS 1. Provide third party ground testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Boostcr Station G&O#16627 16060-12 i SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes building wires, cables, and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods RCW 19.28.261 Revised Code of Washington, Exemptions from RCW 19.28.161 through RCW 19.28.271 16940 Control Panels 1.3 SUBMITTALS See Section 01300. hndicate Field Test Reports and interpret their results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES A. STRANDING 1. All power, control, and instrumentation conductors larger than#20 AWG shall be stranded. 2. All equipment ground conductors larger than#16 AWG shall be stranded. 3. All grounding electrode conductors larger than#10 AWG shall be stranded. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#]6627 16120-1 B. POWER AND CONTROL WIRE All power and control wire and conductors in raceways shall be rated 600 VAC. 1. XHHW, XHHW-2 a. Conductor Class B, stranded, annealed, uncoated copper. Conductors shall comply with: i. UL Standard 44. ii. ASTM-133, ASTM-138, and ASTM-137138. b. Insulation Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLP) High Heat Water Resistant, insulation Shall comply,with: i. UL-83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. ii, UL-1063 Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. C. The cable shall meet the following Standards and Agency approvals: i. NEMA WC70/ILEA S-95-658. ii. ASTM Stranding Class 133, 138, 137138 iii. Federal Specification A-A-59544 2, THHN, THWN, THHN/THWN-2 a. Conductor Copper, annealed, uncoated. Conductors shall comply with: i. ASTM-133, ASTM-138, and ASTM-137138. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-2 i b. Insulation Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Nylon jacket. Insulation shall comply with: i. UL-83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. ii. UL-1063 Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. C. The cable shall meet the following Standards and Agency approvals: i. NEMA WC70/ILEA S-95-658. 3. MTW (Machine Tool Wiring) a. Conductor Copper, annealed, uncoated. Conductors shall comply with: i. ASTM-133, ASTM-138, and ASTM-137138. b. Insulation Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC). Insulation shall comply with: i. UL-83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. ii. UL-1063 Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. c, The cable shall meet the following Standards and Agency approvals: i. NEMA WC70/ICEA S-95-658. ii. UL Standard UL 83, UL 1063, UL 758 cUL file: E156879 and E123744 iii. AWM Specification 1316, 1317, 1318, 1319, 1320, 1321 iv. ASTM Stranding Class 133, B8, B7138 v. Federal Specification A-A-59544 City of Kent 640 Zane Booster Station G&G 416627 16120-3 vi. CSA 22.2 No. 75, UL E156879 and E123744 C. INSTRUMENTATION, COMMUNICATION, AND NETWORKING CABLES All instrumentation, communication, and networking cables and conductors in raceway shall be rated 600 VAC. Exceptions: « Telephone cables. Antenna cables. Fiber optic cables. 1. Analog Hrstrument Cables Paired and triad analog instrument cables shall be #18 AWG stranded tinned copper 600 V tray cable, rated for wet applications at 75 degrees C in a sunlight resistant PVC jacket. Cables shall be plenum and direct burial rated, and shall be provided with individual pair/triad isolated 100 percent foil shields with independent drain wires and an overall isolated shield with drain wire. These cables shall also be used for totalizing pulse signals from flow meters. The following cables shall be used for multiple conductor applications: a. 2-Conductor, 1 twisted pair, 100 percent overall shield. Belden#9341 or #1120A or equivalent. b. 4-Conductor, 2 twisted pairs, 100 percent individual shields plus 100 percent overall shield. Belden#1048A or equivalent. 2. Ethernet Copper Cables Ethernet cables shall be 600 V, bonded pair, shielded. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-4 i a. Enhanced Category 5 (5e). i. 600 V, polyolefm insulation, with inner PVC jacket and Industrial Grade, Sunlight and Oil Resistant, Black,PVC outer jacket. ii. 8-Conductor, 4 twisted bonded pairs, #24 AWG, solid bare copper, 100 percent overall foil shield plus 70 percent overall braided tinned copper shield. iii. 22.0 dB attenuation per 100 meters at 100 MHz. iv. Beldon#7957A or equivalent. 3. Enhanced Category 5 (5e) and 6 (6e) RJ45 cable plugs RJ45 cable plug connectors shall be 8-wire, 10 — 10000 Mbit/sec with metal housing and FC connection technology. Siemens P/N 6GK1901-1BB12-2AA0 or equal. 2.2 SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS Splices are only allowed under the conditions of Section 4.2.E. A. SPLICES TO POWER CONDUCTORS l. Splices in Outdoor Areas, Handholes, Vaults, or Direct Buried a. For inline butt splices, use mline resin splice kits for non- shielded cables, 600 V; 3M Scotcheast 82-A series or equal. UL listed 486D. b. For odd-shaped and odd sized splices, use multi-mold resin splice kits for non-shielded cables, 600 V; 3M Scotchcast 85-14CP or equal. UL listed 486D 2. Indoor Splices and Taps for Receptacles and Lighting a. Use quick spin, wing torque Electrical Spring and Grounding Connectors; 3M 312, 412, 512, and 512G or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-5 3. Motor Lead Connectors a. Motor terminal connectors shall be insulated multiple tap connectors rated for 600 Vac; N.S.I. Polaris or equal. 4. Power Terminal Blocks a. All power terminals shall be 600 Vac, suitable for 75 degrees C rated copper conductor. b. Power terminal blocks may be copper or aluminum and shall have a short circuit current withstand rating following the guidelines described in UL 1059 and shall meet or exceed the available bolted fault current at the point of application. B. SPLICES TO CONTROL CONDUCTORS 1. In Junction Boxes and Handholes Splices to control conductors in junction boxes and handholes shall be made with 600 V, UL486D certified, water-proof direct bury connectors with strain relief, pre-filled with waterproof and corrosion-proof, non-hardening, silicone dielectric sealant; DRYCONN DBSR Series or equal. 2. Terminal Blocks in Panels Reference Specification 16940 for terminations in Control Panels. C. SPLICES TO INSTRUMENTATION CABLES AND CONDUCTORS 1. in Junction Boxes Strip back the cable outer sheath exposing cable conductors and shield lengths to 1-inch or less. Twist the wires together and solder. Insert and engage into 600 V, UL486D certified, water- proof connectors, pre-filled with waterproof and corrosion-proof, non-hardening, silicone dielectric sealant; DRYCONN Aqua Series or equal 2. Terminal Blocks in Panels Reference Specification 16940 for terminations in Control Panels. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-6 2.3 INSULATING MATERIALS A. ELECTRICAL INSULATION PUTTY Scotchfill, or equal. B. INSULATING ELECTRICAL TAPE 7 Mil/0.18 nun Plasticized PVC, rubber-based adhesive, 200 percent elongation, 26 N/cm tensile strength, 8 kV breakdown voltage, meeting CE, CSA, UL certifications. C. CONDUCTOR COLOR-MARKING TAPE 7 Mll/0.I8 mm Plasticized PVC, rubber-based adhesive, 200 percent elongation, 26 N/cm tensile strength, 8 kV breakdown voltage, meeting CE, CSA, UL certifications, in required color. D. ELECTRICAL HEAT SHRINK TUBING Heat shrink tubing shall be dual-wall polyolefin, 3-1 shrink ratio, 600 Vac, -55 to 110 degrees C operating range meeting UL 224 60OV, 125 degrees C. PART 3 APPLICATIONS 3.1 WIRE APPLICATIONS A. CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE The Cable and Conduit Schedule shall be considered absolute. No changes to wire sizes, wire count, insulation type, or circuit type shall be allowed without approval from the Engineer. B. WIRES IN RACEWAYS Wires installed in raceways shall be considered "FIELD" wiring and shall be installed and terminated by qualified and licensed electrical contractors. Exceptions: i Installation and termination may he by the owner under the provisions of "RCW 19.28.261, Exenrptions from RCW 19.28.161 through RCW 19.28.271. " City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-7 0 If the raceway is installed inside a control panel fabricated by a certified UL 508 shop, then these wires may be installed and terminated per the provisions of WIRES IN CONTROL PANELS as listed below. 1. Power Wire a. Insulation All service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors shall be XHHW-2. Exceptions: Unless called out otherwise in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. • Unless both ends of wire are installed in the some control panel. 2. Class i and 2 Control Wire a. Insulation All control circuits in raceways shall be XIIHW-2. Exceptions: Unless called out otherwise in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. Unless approved in writing by the Electrical Engineer. b. Minimum control wire size in conduits and raceways The minimum control wire size in conduits and raceways shall be 914 AWG. C. WIRES IN CONTROL PANELS Wires in control panels are those wires that are not routed through raceways external to control panels. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#16627 16120-8 I. Control Panel Power and Control Wire a. Insulation Power and control conductors in control panels shall be MTW or THHN/THWN-2. b. Wire minimum size and color: Circuit Type Wire Snze Wire Color . -.. 120 Vac Power Circuits 120 Vac, Line #14 AWG* Black 120 Vac, Neutral __ #14 AWG White 120 Vac, Chassis Ground #12 AWG Green 24 Vdc Power Circuits +24 Vdc Power #14 AWG* Red 24 Vdc Common #14 AWG Dark Blue Isolated (Shield) Ground #12 AWG Light Blue PLC 1/0 Circuits PLC Digital Inputs (DI) #18 AWG Orange PLC Digital Outputs (DO) 418 AWG** Wht/Org stripe — -- Circuit Type Wire Size Wire Color ......._._...._--_--............._----..... ..- PLC Analog Inputs (DI) 418 AWG Shielded Cable PLC Analogy Outputs (DO) #18 AWG Shielded Cable Control/Other Circuits 24 We Control Circuits #16 AWG*** Purple ....�................................. 120 Vac Control Circuits #16 AWG*** Pink Minimum wire sizes for AC and DC power circuits shall be#14 AWG when protected by a 10 A or smaller Overcurrent Protective Device(OCPD),#12 AWG or larger for OCPD larger than 10 A. Size in compliance with NEC and UL 508. The AC neutral wire size shall always match the line wire. ** PLC Digital Output circuits maybe#18 AWG betwoon the PLC output terminal and the buffer relay coil when fused less than or equal to 5A. Wiring from the buffer relay output contacts to field terminals shall be#14 AWG minimum. For retrofitted control panels without buffer relays, provide Digital Output wiring at 414 AWG. D. POWER CORDS SO power cords shall be allowed in control panels for circuits not greater than 120 Vac or 48 Vdc. Such applications require installation by a UL 508 shop. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16120-9 PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION Examine raceways and surfaces receiving wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS 1. Install wires and cables in raceway system, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation," after raceway system is complete. 2. Tighten electrical connectors and tenninals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and LTL 48613. 3. Install cables and conductors neatly it all enclosures. Bend or form wires in neat runs from conduits to terminals. Arrange wires so that they may be grouped by conduit or function in the enclosure. Install cable ties and straps to support and bundle wires in enclosures. Arrange wires to allow wire tags and numbers to be easily read without bending or flexing wiring. 4. Leave 6 inches or more of free conductor at each connected device or equipment terminal and 9 inches of fi-ee conductor at each unconnected outlet. Tape free ends of conductors at unconnected outlets and coil neatly in outlet box. 5, Install wiring to equipment neutral and grounding blocks on the bottom or furthest back row fast. Leave unconnected blocks accessible for future neutral or grounding connections. 6. Provide individual neutral conductors for each associated circuit. Common neutral conductors for multi branch circuits are not permitted. 7. All power distribution raceways shall contain at least one continuous copper grounding conductor with a minimum size as City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-10 per NEC 250.122. Larger sizes shall be used if identified in the Cable and Conduit Schedule on the Plans. B. CONDUCTORS SHARING RACEWAYS 1. Power conductors shall not be run in the same raceway with control conductors. Exception: • Unless specifically shown otherwise in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. 2. Power conductors shall not be nm in the same conduit or raceway with instrumentation cables/conductors. 3. Control conductors shall not be run in the same conduit or raceway with instrumentation cables/conductors. Exception: • Unless specifically shown otherwise in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. C. CONDUCTORS IN CONTROL PANELS 1. Control Panel Instrumentation (Signal) Wiring a. Signal cables between analog input and output field terminals and a PLC shall be connected to the field terminals as shown in Specification 16940. b. Alll cables shields shall be terminated at the field terminal end. Connections to the PLC analog input and output terminals shall not land the shield. C. Signal cable conductors and their shields/drains shall not be separated greater than as described below. 2. Control Panel Communication and Networking Wiring a. All communication and networking cables inside control panels shall have their ends made up with terminal connectors. No cables shall be left open-ended. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-11 b. Cables shall be routed inside PanduitTM or neatly tied to other conductor bundles. D. INSTRUMENTATION (SIGNAL) CABLES 1. Preparing the Shielded End GREEN HEAT SHRINK OVER DRAIN WIRE"- INSTRUMENTAi1ON l CABLE �'--- BLACK HEAT SHRINK OVER CABLE END AND OPEN CONDUCTORS a. Neatly trim the end of the cable. b. Strip back 1.25 inch of the outer jacket taking care not to cut into the conductor insulation- C. Neatly trim the foil back to the edge of the outer jacket taking care not to damage the drain wire. d. For signal cables with a braided shield over a foil shield, carefully cut the braid back to the edge of the outer jacket. e. Provide a green heat shrink tube over the drain wire, leaving 0.25 inch of exposed conductor. f Provide a 1 25-inch black heat shrink over the jacket, covering 0.25 inch of the exposed conductors. This properly insulates and protects the ends of the shields and the outer jacket. g. Strip the signal conductors exposing 0.25 inch of conductor. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Sthtion G&O#16627 16120-12 I I 2. Preparing the Unshielded End 25" 1 25 0 LEA' 0 25 m_ �'-- INSTRUMENTATION T CABLE �--- BLACK HEAT SHRINK OVER CABLE END AND OPEN CONDUCTORS a. Neatly trim the end of the cable. b. Strip back 1.25 inch of the outer jacket taking care not to cut into the signal conductor insulation. C. Neatly trim the foil back to the edge of the outer jacket. d. Cut the drain wire at the edge of the outer jacket taking care not to damage the signal conductor insulation. e. For signal cables with a braided shield over a foil shield, carefully cut the braid back to the edge of the outer jacket. f. Provide a 1.25-inch black heat shrink over the jacket, covering 0.25 inch of the exposed conductors. This properly insulates and protects the ends of the shields and the outer jacket. g. Strip the signal conductors exposing 0.25 inch of conductor. E. SPLICING CONDUCTORS 1. Install service, feeder, branch, and motor circuits continuous without splices from equipment terminal to equipment terminal or motor lead. Exceptions: • Branch circuits for convenience receptacles and lighting. As specifically called out. r With written permission from the Engineerfbr situations where no alternative continuous method is suitable. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-13 2. Install instrumentation and control circuits continuous without splices or terminations from source equipment terminal to destination equipment terminal. Exceptions: w On terminal strips in control panels. • On terminal strips in termination panels. « As specifically called out. • With written permission f•orn the Engineer. 3, Where splicing is allowed, or specifically called out, install in the following manner: a. Splicing Inside Outdoor J-Boxes, or J-Boxes in Wet Areas rower and control conductors shall be spliced per Section 2.2. Provide a minimum of 24 inches of length on both wires for future re-splicing. b. Splicing Inside Motor J-Boxes Power connections inside motor j-boxes shall be made using insulated multiple tap connectors rated for 600 Vac; N.I.S. Polaris or equal. Cover the splice with a minimum of three layers of black insulating electrical tape. Provide a single band with a minimum of two wraps of the appropriate phase color tape to the entry T-lead. Bend the connections away from the sides of the j-box and motor frame to prevent abrasion from motor vibration. Control connections inside motorj-boxes shall be made with crimped butt-splices with heat shrink covers. The heat shrink shall overlap the butt barrel ends by a minimum of 1/2 inch on each side. Cover the splice with a minimum of three layers of black insulating electrical tape. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-14 C. Splicing in 7-Boxes and Control Panels Mounted Indoors in Dry Rooms i. Conductors size #12 AWG through#6 AWG: For conductors less than#6 AWG, provide crimped butt-splice with heat shrink cover. The heat shrink shall overlap the butt barrel ends by a minimum of 1/2 inch. Cover the splice with a minimum of three layers of black electrical tape. Provide a 2-wrap (minimum) single band of the appropriate phase color tape. Exception: • For receptacles and lighting, reference Section 2.2.B. ii. Conductors size #4 AWG and larger: (1) Terminal Connectors For conductors larger than#6 AWG, connections shall be made using insulated multiple tap comiectors rated for 600 Vac; N.S.I. Polaris or equal. Cover the splice with a minimum of three (3) layers of black electrical tape. Provide a 2-wrap (minimum) single band of the appropriate conductor color tape. (2) Terminal Blocks All power terminals shall be 600 Vac, suitable for 75 degrees C rated copper conductor. Connect using properly sized terminal blocks. Exception: If splices are allowed by the Engineer, then use plated copper- City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16120-15 alloy compression splicing sleeves installed by high-pressure compression tools and insulated with heat shrink Raychem sleeves. F. REPLACING FAULTY CONDUCTORS When replacing a faulty conductor or cable that shares a raceway with other conductors or cables, all conductors and cables must be removed and replaced with new. Exceptions: w ff the raceway is straight and without bends or offsets and its length is less than 30 feet, and the conductors are not bound together in the raceway, then only the,faulty cable must be pulled and replaced with new. A manufacturer-app,oved pulling compound or lubricant must be used to minimize degradation to the remaining conductors. The contractor is responsible for the integrity of the remaining conductors. M With specific approval by the Engineer. G. CONDUCTOR LABELLING All conductors shall be labeled in the following manner. Exceptions: Conductors supplying power to lighting and convenience receptacles. • Non-insulated ground conductors. • At each motor tag for nnnding lead numbers. Make all phase rotation changes for motor direction changes at the motor to maintain correct color phase sequence in equipment, + In each enclosure or box where more than one ungrounded power conductor is spliced or connected, tag for panelboard identification and pole number (reference Section 3.3C.). 1, Conductors shall be labeled the same at each end in a place where the label can be clearly read without moving other wires or rotating the label. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-16 2. Conductor labels shall reference the device (destination) tag as provided on the "TAG LIST" in the Plans. For example, conductors from panelboard [01 PB 01] to dedicated receptacle [01 DR-EC 05] shall be labeled as follows: Line: 01 DREC05.L Neutral: O 1DRECO5.N Ground: 01DREC05.G 3. Conductor labels shall each be unique for each circuit. For example, 10 control conductors from Main Control Panel [02 CP 01] (source)to Automatic Transfer Switch [02 ATS 01] (destination) shall be labeled as follows: Wire #1: 02ATS01.01 Wire #2: 02ATS01.02 Wire #9: 02ATSO1.09 Wire#10: 02ATS01.10 4. The labels shall be white heat shrink sized appropriately for the associated conductor with typed lettering in black indelible ink. 5, Label each conductor. When terminating cables, if there is insufficient room to provide a label on each conductor, then label the cable sheath. 6. Tag for phase rotation at each power connection. Exception: r At motor connections. H. CONDUCTOR COLORS 1. For conductor colors inside control panels, reference Section 3.1.C.1. 2. Do not use white, gray, green, or green with yellow stripes color for any power, lighting, or control conductor not intended for neutral or equipment grounding purposes. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16120-17 Exception: 0 Instrumentation and control multi-conductor cables may use white, gray, or green singly or as part of a trace color in addition to the base color. 3. Equipment grounding conductors: Green or green with yellow stripes. 4. 480/277 volt, 3-phase system:: Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral f Brown Orange Yellow Gray 5. 208/120 or 240/120 volt, 3-phase systems: 1 Phase A Phase B _ Phase C l Neutral--------I Black Red Blue White 6. 240/120 volt, single Phase systems: Phase A Phase B Neutral Black Red White 7. Use wire with insulation of required color for conductors of 46 AWG and smaller. For wire larger than #6 AWG, where not available in specified colors, use conductor color marking tape per Section 2.3.C. When conductors are marked in this manner, mark each conductor at all accessible locations such as panelboards, junction boxes, pullboxes, auxiliary gutters, outlets, switches, and control centers. 8. Connect power conductors of the same color to the same phase throughout the installation. Viewing all equipment from the front, make connections so phase color sequence is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc. 1. PULLING CONDUCTORS 1. Instrumentation, Communication, Networking, and Fiber Cables Make all cable pulls by hand using a manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-18 2. Power and Control Conductors a. Make all cable pulls by hand where possible. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, or wrapping extra conductor into an eye, that will not damage cables or raceway. b. On mechanically-assisted pulls use a manufacturer- approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. The compound used must not deteriorate the conductors or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximmn pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Install pullboxes where necessary to prevent exceeding manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cut cable or conductor ends off after pulling and clean all pulling compound from exposed conductors before terminating. J. CABLE SUPPORTS Support cables according to Section 16050. Provide vertical conductor support per NEC Table 300.19(A). K. WIRING AT OUTLETS 1, Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. Connect only to receptacle screw terminals using insulated spade- type lugs. 2. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer, and in compliance with other Sections of Division 16. 4.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. TESTING L Provide conductor megger testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16120-19 SECTION 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes raceways, fittings,boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sections Items 01300 Submittals 02530 Utility Structures 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16120 Conductors and Cables 1 614() Wirino l7017irac 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. 100 PERCENT CONTINUOUS 100 percent continuous means that electrical continuity shall be maintained over a conduit's entire length and that such conduits shall consist of only RGS (whether PVC-coated or not), LFMC, or combinations of these types. There can be no break in the electrical continuity by non-metallic components. EMT conduits are not considered 100 percent continuous. B. CONDUIT BODIES A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of[lie sys[ein. C. CONTROL CONDUITS Control conduits typically contain cables or conductors in the range of 12 Vdc to 120 Vac. These cables/conductors are used to provide discreet field inputs and outputs to motor drives, PLC controllers, operator City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-1 stations, etc. They typically connect to discreet 1/0 field devices like local panel pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches, field li rit switches, relay circuits, etc. D. CONTROL PANELS Control panels are enclosures in which one or more circuits are changed, unlike junction boxes where circuits are simply routed through the panel. Control panels may be as simple as an enclosure with a pilot light or they may be very complicated with hundreds of I/O tenninations. For Control Panel considerations, reference Specification 16940. E. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES Reference Section 16140, Definitions. F. DEVICE BOXES Device boxes are electrical boxes used for receptacles, light switches, dimmers, and other similar devices. Selector switches, indicating lights, displays, etc., are mounted in control panels and equipment enclosures, not in device boxes. G. DRIP FITTINGS Drip fittings are used to drain water from conduit entry points,junction boxes, or other enclosures where accumulation of moisture must be removed. They are also intended to disable the entry of foreign materials, mcludnig tools and fingers, through the drain. H. DRY LOCATIONS Reference Section 16050, Definitions. L EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing (a type of RMC). J. EQUIPMENT VAULT An Equipment Vault is a VAULT that contains one or more electrical devices that are ternrinated within the vault; such as flow meters_, control valves, control or power panels, lighting, and etc. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#10627 16130-2 SEE VAULTS K. FINISHED AREAS Reference Section 16050, Definitions. L. FMC Flexible Metal Conduit (a type of RMC), M. FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (a type of RNC). N. HANDHOLES A handhole is a pullbox that is not sufficiently sized for entrance of personnel (reference PULLBOXES). n. WgTPTFNJP1rTAT107vCnlrr)]TrTc Instrumentation conduits contain cables and conductors that carry low-power modulated or communication signals. They may include 4-20 mA current loops, 0-10 volt analog signals, 5 to 12 Vdc digital (TLL) data, analog or digital connmunications signals, etc. They may also include low-voltage compliance power to instruments such as 5 Vdc, tl5 Vdc, or 24 Vdc. P. JUNCTION BOXES Junction boxes are electrical enclosures used for combining, splitting, pulling, or redirecting electrical circuits. Junction boxes may terminate one conduit or join multiple conduits. Circuits are not altered inside a junction box. Enclosures where circuits are altered are called CONTROL PANELS. With the exception of terminal strips,junction boxes do not contain electrical devices. 1. Junction Boxes, Type Jl Junction boxes identified as TYPE J1 can contain only non-linear power circuits. 2. Junction Boxes, Type J2—not used on this project. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#16627 16130-3 i 3. Junction Boxes, Type J3 Junction boxes identified as TYPE J3 can contain only instrumentation circuits. Junction boxes not containing circuits of the types identified for TYPE J 1, TYPE J2, or TYPE J3 are simply called "junction boxes" (without a TYPE identifier). Q. LFMC Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (a type of RMC). R. LINEAR POWER LOADS Linear power loads are those that are not VFD circuits (both line or load), and are not UV ballast circuits. Although actually non-linear, fluorescent lighting circuits shall be considered linear power loads. S. NON-LINEAR POWER LOADS Non-linear power loads shall include all VFD circuits (both line or load) and all UV ballast circuits. Although actually non-linear, fluorescent lighting circuits shall be considered linear. T. POWER CONDUITS Power conduits contain branch and feeder conductors with voltages 120 Vac and above. These conductors provide operating power to MCCs, panels, motors, lighting, receptacles, HVAC, etc. Conductors can be of #12 AWG wire gauge and larger, either separate or in power cables. U. PROCESS AREAS Reference Section 16050, Definitions. V. PULLBOXES Pullboxes are underground electrical enclosures, sufficiently sized to allow the entrance of personnel, used for combining, splitting, pulling, or redirecting electrical circuits. Pullboxes may terminate one conduit or join multiple conduits. A pullbox can be considered an underground junction box. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-4 Circuits are not altered or terminated inside a pullbox. Pullboxes do not contain electrical equipment or devices. Handholes are types of pull boxes but are not sufficiently sized to allow the entrance of personnel (reference HANDHOLES). W. PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (a type of RNC). X. PVC-RGS Polyvinyl chloride, externally coated RGS (a type of RMC), Alias: May be called or shown on Plans and elsewhere in specifications as PVC-Coated RGS or PVC-RMC. Y. PVC-RMC PPfP1'PnPP Pvc-p("N Z. RGS Rigid Galvanized Steel(a type of PMC). AA. RMC Rigid Metal Conduit (General NEC Category), BB. RNC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (General NEC Category). CC. SURFACE RACEWAYS A metallic raceway that is intended to be mounted to the surface of a structure, with associated couplings, connectors, boxes, and fittings for the installation of electrical conductors. DD. VAULTS A vault is an underground structure, serviceable or accessible only from the top. Handholes, Equipment Vaults, and Pullboxes are considered vaults. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-5 i EE. WET LOCATIONS Reference Section 16050, Definitions. FF. WIREWAYS Sheet metal troughs with hinged or removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a complete system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide data for surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. Coordinate electrical work with outside utilities associated with the project. Non electrical piping and structural has priority over underground conduit routing. Exception; • Unless syecii ically coordinated other-vvise with the General Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METALLIC CONDUIT TYPES A. EMT I. Conduit Galvanized steel tubing meeting ANSI C80.3. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-6 2. Conduit bodies shall be galvanized, or epoxy coated cast iron or aluminum one piece with galvanized, or epoxy coated cast cover, gasket, and threaded hubs. Use stainless steel screws or other approved non-corroding screws to hold cover in place. 3. EMT connectors shall be compression type only. Set screw connectors shall not be allowed. 4. Conduit clamps for EMT shall be stamped galvanized steel. B. FMC 1. Conduit Flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway. 2. Connectors f r ... ..,,.�;,,rt C. LFMC 1. Conduit Flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway, covered by a liquid tight PVC layer. Electri-Flex Type LA or American Sealtite, Type UA 2. Connectors Galvanized steel, screw ni, grounduig type with a ferrule, which covers the end of the inside and outside of the conduit. D. RGS 1. Conduit Hot dipped galvanized with threaded ends meeting ANSI CS0.1. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 t 6130-7 2. Couplings Steel, cast iron, or malleable iron compression type employing a split, corrugated ring and tightening nut, with integral bushings and locknuts. No indent or set screw type. a. Couplings Unsplit, NPT threaded steel cylinders with galvanizing equal to the conduit. b. Nipples Factory made through 8 inches, no running threads. C. Conduit bodies shall be galvanized, or epoxy coated cast iron or aluminum one piece with galvanized, or epoxy coated cast cover, gasket, and threaded hubs. Use stainless steel screws or other approved non-corroding screws to hold cover in place. 3. Conduit Clamps Conduit clamps for RGS shall be cast iron. E. PVC-COATED RGS, PVC-RMC 1. General a. A proprietary colored urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal 2 mil thickness. Conduit or fittings having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable. b. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall 'afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30 degrees F (-1 degrees Q. C. All male and female threads on conduit, elbows, and nipples shall be protected by application of an electronically conducting corrosion resistant compound. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-8 d. Installation of the PVC coated conduit system shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual. e, Conduits and fittings shall meet the following standards: i. ASTM D870 ii. ASTM D1151 iii. ASTM D3359 iv. ASTM D1308 V. NEMARN1 2. Conduit a. The PVC coated rigid metal conduit must be UL listed. The PVC'. onntinn rrnct hnvP haan inuactia_a_t_a_rl by ITT ac J O providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit. Ferrous fittings for general service locations must be UL listed with PVC as the primary corrosion protection. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be new, unused material. Applicable UL standards may include: UL 6 Standard for Safety, Rigid Metal Conduit, UL 514B Standard for Safety, Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. b. The conduit shall be hot dip galvanized inside and out with hot dipped galvanized threads. 3. Fittings and Accessories The design shall be equipped with a positive placement feature to ease and assure proper installation. Certified results confirming seal performance at 15 psig (positive) and 25 inches of mercury (vacuum for 72 hours shall be available). a. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female fitting opening except unions. The inside sleeve diameter shall be matched to the outside diameter of the conduit. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-9 i b, The PVC coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall have a series of longitudinal ribs 40 mils in thickness to protect the coating from tool damage daring installation. C. Conduit Form 8 Bodies shall be 1/2 inch through 2-inch diameter, shall have a tongue-nn-groove "V-Seal' gasket to effectively seal against the elements. Conduit bodies shall be Form 8 and shall be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws. d. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Al U bolts will be supplied with plastic encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads. e. Conduit clamps and fittnigs for PVC-Coated RGS conduits shall be 316L stainless steel. 4. Approved Material a. Plasti-Bond REDH2OT, Perna-Cote, or KorKap manufactured by Robroy Industries. b. Ocal-Blue Steel conduit and fittings as manufactured by Ocal, Inc. C. Any deviation from the above approved materials must be approved by the Engineer. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT TYPES A. PVC 1. Conduits NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. 2. Fittings and Accessories NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material, but elbows shall be RMC. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-10 3. Conduit bodies Where allowed, shall match type, material, and gauge of conduit. 2.3 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. STANDARD METAL BOXES Assembled from stamped steel hot dipped zinc galvanized coated flat pieces, welded or mechanical assembled into a device box, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, meeting NEMA OS 1, with plaster or extension rings and necessary mounting appurtenances to suite construction and application. B. CAST BOXES 1. Cast Aluminum Epoxy coated cast aluminum box, one piece, with mounting lugs, n rtu uu vuvvu +w+vo va u..r , r uu uu.,u+ , brev�i gr ,nuu ov v.v uuv with neoprene gaskets. 2. Cast Iron Cast iron with electro-galvanized and aluminum acrylic paint finish, one piece, with mounting lugs, with threaded holes or hubs, with internal green ground screw and with neoprene gaskets. C. DEVICE COVERS 1. Plastic: Thermoplastic nylon, device-mount, ivory. 2. Aluminum: Sheet Aluminum. 3. Cast Iron: Iron alloy. D. SWITCH ACTUATORS 1, Aluminum: Lever-arm type, raintight, cast aluminum matching the metallurgy of the device box. 2. Cast Iron: Lever-arm type, raintight, cast iron alloy matching the metallurgy of the device box. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-11 E. WEATHERPROOF COVERS AND PLATES Weather proof, self-closing, die-cast aluminum, UL fisted. F. IN-SERVICE COVERS Shall be weather proof and hinged from top with removable cord slots. 2.4 JUNCTION BOXES, HANDHOLES, AND VAULTS A. JUNCTION BOXES 1. Standard Stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, meeting NEMA OS 1. Boxes 6" x 6" x 4" or larger may be code gauge fabricated steel continuously welded at seams and painted after fabrication. 2. Cast Cast iron with electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint finish, one piece, with threaded cover of the same metallurgy and finish, with mounting lugs, with threaded holes or hubs, with internal green ground screw and with neoprene gaskets; explosion-proof, dust-ignition-proof, raintight, rated for Class 1, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D. 3. Stainless Steel NEMA 4X 316L stainless steel with gasketed screw down cover. B. HANDHOLES 1. Material and Strength Handholes shall be made from Concrete or Polymer Concrete. The boxes and covers are required to conform to all test provisions of ANSI/SCTE 77 2002 "Specification For Underground Enclosure Integrity' for Tier 15 applications (Design Load Vertical22,500 lbs. and Lateral 800 lbs/sq. ft.) and to be Listed and Labeled. The boxes must physically accommodate and structurally support compatible covers, which possess the Tier rating. In no assembly City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-12 can the cover design load exceed the design load of the box. All components in an assembly(box and cover) are to be manufactured by the same manufacturer. All covers are required to have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 in accordance with ASTM C1028. Independent third-party verification or test reports stamped by a registered Professional Engineer certifying that all test provisions of this specification have been met are required with each submittal. The cover is to have an identifying function descriptor imprinted on it. The Descriptor shall be ELECTRICAL, CONTROL, SIGNAL, TELEPHONE, STREET LIGHT, or similar approved by the Engineer. Handholes with metallic lids shall be grounded per Specification Section 16060. Handhole fid assemblies comprised of steel shall have a factory- applied galvanized finish. Exception: Unless the assembly is fabricated from stainless steel. 2. Manufacturers Quazite (Strongwell Corp.) Carson Industries C. PULLBOXES AND VAULTS Precast concrete structures with preformed knockout holes for conduit entrance. Reference Section 02530, Utility Structures. Pullboxes and vaults with metallic lids shall be grounded per Specification Section 16060. Pullbox lid assemblies comprised of steel shall have a factory-applied galvanized finish. Exception: + Unless the assembly is fabricated from stainless steel. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16130-13 I PART 3 APPLICATION 3.1 CONDUIT BODIES This section describes the types of raceways,junction boxes, and device boxes that can used for different circuits and different environments. Reference Section 4.1 for methods and practices required for installation. A. CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE The Cable and Conduit Schedule shall be considered absolute. No changes to wire sizes, wire count, insulation type, circuit type, or conduit size shall be allowed without approval from the engineer. The Cable and Conduit Schedule does not indicate conduit type (PVC, EMT, RGS, etc.) since, in many cases, a conduit's type may change between its source and destination. The rules stated in this specification define the necessary and allowed conduit type(s) for various applications and routes. B. RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS The term"RGS conduits" refers to a type of conduit body and does not imply whether the conduit is PVC-coated or not. Certain applications require RGS conduits with PVC coating, others do not. Reference Section 3.2, "RGS RACEWAY PROTECTIVE COATINGS" for these requirements. 1. Circuit Types and Categories a. Circuit Types Conduits are broken into three general circuit types; 1) Power, 2) Control, and 3) Instrumentation (see Definitions). On the Cable and Conduit Schedule,Power conduits are those starting with the letter ?", Control conduits are those starting with the letter "C", and Instrumentation conduits are those starting with the letter "S". City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-14 b. Circuit Categories Power circuits are broken into two categories, those that contain linear loads and those that contain non-linear loads (see Definitions). These types and categories are listed below in Table 3.1.B.1 below. C. Relationships Between Circuit Categories and Conduit Types Many electrical circuit types do not require special conduit routing considerations. However, Table 3.1.B.1 shows the circuit types where the conduit route must be 100 PERCENT CONTINUOUS (reference Definitions). Table 3.1.13.1 r:_ ..:. 100% Type Cateeory Continuous? Power Linear No Power Non-linear Yes Control No Instrumentation Yes 2. Conduit Shape Wiring shall be routed in pipe or tubular conduits, NOT in fabricated wireways or gutters. Exception: s Unless .specifically called out otheruvi.se in the Plans. C. PVC SCHEDULE 40 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS 1. All straight portions of conduits completely concealed in walls, attics, concrete, or below ground(not exposed) shall be PVC Schedule 40. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-15 i Exceptions: r Power conduits containing non-linear loads shall be 100 percent continuous over their entire length. All Instrumentation conduits shall be 100 percent continuous over their entire length. • All conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 over their entire length. PT'C conduit areas under roads or heavy traffic areas shall be Schedule 80. a YVhere specifically called out otherwise in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. 2, All portions of power and control conduits completely concealed inside a reservoir shall be PVC Schedule 40. D. PVC SCHEDULE 80 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS 1. All portions of conduits which contain grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 and shall contain no metal fittings, connectors, or devices. Such conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall contain no other types of conductors. 2. PVC conduit areas under roads or heavy traffic areas. 3. As stated in the Cable and Conduit Schedule. E. RGS RACEWAY APPLICATIONS 1, All conduits requiring 100 percent continuity per Section 3.1.13.1 shall be RGS over their entire length. For coating requirements, reference Section 3.2. Exception: LFMC conduit shall be allowed per the `LFMC Raceway Applications"section herein. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-16 2. Underground factory or bent elbows and offsets greater than or equal to 30 degrees shall be RGS. Exceptions: • Where the radius of a conduit bend is greater than or equal to 15 feet per inch of trade size. Raceways used for the containment and protection of bare grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80. Reference PVC Schedule 80 raceway applications. 3. All portions of conduits exposed outdoors shall be RGS. Exception: • All conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 over their entire length. n h O "--''--- of -------' -- A-- ---"'- -el--1---- -------A tln �JVl lI 1.lJ Vl l:V lluunJ cNpvbGu vll ulc Himuc yl Vc1V W- ,1VU11LL pullboxes, equipment vaults, wet wells, and dry wells (vaults) shall be RGS. Exceptions: « All conduits immediately terminating after penetrating a vault wall, that are allowed to be PVC Schedule 40 underground shall terminate as a PVC conduit bell-end. If the conduit is connected inside the vault to any device, conduit body,junction box, control panel, or any other conduit, then all portions of the conduit inside the vault, through the wall penetration, and 24 inches outside the vault shall be RGS and shall be grounded. • All conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 over their entire length. 5. All portions of conduits penetrating concrete floors, walls, or ceilings shall be RGS. Exception: r In below ground vaults as described above. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 1613047 6. All conduit penetrations from grade shall be RGS. Exception: • All conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 over their entire length. 7. All portions of exposed conduits inside closed buildings shall be RGS. Exceptions: • EMT conduit shall be allowed per the "EMT Raceway Applications" section herein. 0 LFMC conduit shall be allowed per the `LFMC Raceway Applications"section herein. • All conduits containing grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80 over their entire length. s, Unless otherwise specifically called out on a separate plan or detail. F. LFMC RACEWAY APPLICATIONS (REFERENCE DEFINITIONS) 1. LFMC conduit shall be used for the last 18 inches of connection to motors, transformers and other vibrating equipment. 2. LFMC conduit shall be used for the last 18 inches of connection to field instruments such as flow meters in vaults and ultrasonic level transducers. 3. LFMC conduit shall be used for the last 18 inches of connection to any device that may require minor movement during maintenance or repair or that may require physical adjustment. G. EMT RACEWAY APPLICATIONS (REFERENCE DEFINITIONS) L Exposed conduits may be EMT in completely enclosed dry(see Definitions) rooms. 2. EMT conduits may be used in attics and where concealed in walls. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-18 Exception to the use of EMT: r Where conduit is required to 100 percent continuous, 3.2 RGS RACEWAY PROTECTIVE COATINGS Protected RGS conduits are used to mnninnize conduit degradation from moisture and chemicals. Where called in the Plans or Specifications as "Protected RGS," "PVC-Coated RGS," "PVC-Coated," "PVC-RGS," or "PVC-RMC," all such conduits, elbows, and fittings shall be factory coated PVC as defined in Section 2.1. A. PVC-COATED RGS CONDUIT APPLICATIONS 1. All portions of RGS elbows, bends, straight pipes, couplings, and fittings buried underground shall be PVC-Coated. All _A c. nur�vi uuii� vi i��. uiw vv a, �uuua, atraisuv NiNw, i,v utiwibo, uivu fittings encased in concrete shall be PVC-Coated. 3. All portions of RGS elbows, bends, straight pipes, couplings, and fittings exposed outdoors shall be PVC-Coated. 4. All portions of RGS elbows, bends, straight pipes, couplings, and fittings inside underground vaults, pullboxes, wet wells, and dry wells shall be PVC-Coated. 5. All portions of RGS elbows, bends, straight pipes, couplings, and fittings exposed in Chemical Rooms (reference Definitions) shall be PVC-Coated. 6, All portions of RGS conduits penetrating concrete floors and below-ground walls and ceilings shall be PVC-Coated at least 12" into the exposed area and extending at least 24" underground. Exceptions: w Where specifically noted to be otherwise in the Plans. « Non-metallic conduits that terminate at the wall of a pullbox. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t 6627 16130-19 3.3 JUNCTION AND DEVICE BOX APPLICATIONS A. JUNCTION BOXES 1. Junction boxes for Instrumentation and Non-Linear Power circuits (see Definitions) shall be hinged steel, 6" x 6" x 4" minimum. 2. Dry Areas (see Definitions). a. Flush-mounted junction boxes may be the standard type. b. Wall-mounted junction boxes shall be the NEMA 1 gasketed. 3, Wet Areas (see Definitions). a. NEMA 4X 316L stainless steel. Exceptions: •, Except in pullboxes, cast junction boxes shall be allowed jor applications inhere three conduits or less approach frorrz three different directions and no terminations are made inside the junction box. • Unless called out otherwise on the Plans B. DEVICE BOXES, ACTUATORS, AND COVERS All exposed boxes shall be of cast construction. All aluminum and cast iron covers shall be provided with a weatherproof gasket. 1. Outdoors, In Pullboxes, In Equipment Vaults a. Receptacles Cast iron device box body with cast aluminum gasketed cover and top-opening "in-service" cover. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-20 Exception: Cast aluminum device box bodies may be used if specifically called out on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. b. Light Switches Cast iron device box body with cast iron gasketed cover and lever-arm actuator. Exception: a Cast aluminum device box bodies with gasketed die cast aluminum covers and lever arm actuators ma be used if specifically called out on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 2. Indoor, Wet Areas (see Definitions). Flush-mounted (recessed)junction boxes may be the standard metal type. These boxes will usually be mounted in wood or steel stud framed walls with gypsum plasterboard or similar surfacing cover. Boxes mounted in Concrete Masonry Unit (Block) walls shall be Masonry type boxes. a. Receptacles i. Recessed (flush-mount)—standard device box body with gasketed die cast aluminum, snap-action, weatherproof cover. ii. Surface-mounted— cast aluminum device box body with gasketed die cast aluminum, snap-action, weatherproof cover. b. Light Switches i. Recessed(flush-mount) — standard device box body with gasketed cast aluminum switch cover. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16130-21 it- Surface-mounted—die cast aluminum device box body with gasketed cast aluminum switch cover. 3. Indoor, Dry Areas (See Definitions) a. Receptacles i. Recessed (flush-mount)—standard device box body with plastic cover. ii. Surface-mounted— cast aluminum device box body with plastic cover. b. Light Switches i. Recessed (flush-mount)— standard device box body with plastic switch cover. it. Surface-mounted— cast aluminum device box body with plastic switch cover. 4. Hazardous Areas (see Definitions). a. Explosion proof. 3.4 HANDHOLE APPLICATIONS A. HANDHOLES Handholes are used as pull and splice points fit underground installations and are typically installed in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway applications subject to occasional non-deliberate heavy vehicular traffic. 1. Handholes shall be set adjacent to each pole light pedestal. Exception. • Unless specifically shown or called out otherwise on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-22 PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION Examine surfaces and spaces to receive raceways, boxes, for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK Wherever practical, route conduit with adjacent ductwork or piping. 1, Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes or other heat sources operating at temperatures above 100 degrees F. . 41, rho ..,, —A A7 +1' requirements of the utilities. 3. Non-electrical buried piping has routing priority over electrical burials. B. MOUNTING PRACTICES 1, All conduits in process areas shall be surface mounted unless specifically called out otherwise on the Plans. 2. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Where several conduits follow a common route, stagger pull boxes, junction boxes, pulling sleeves, and fittings. C. DEVICE BOX INSTALLATION 1. Coordinate box locations with building surfaces and finishes to avoid bridging wainscots,joints, finish changes, etc. 2. Recess boxes in the wall, floor, and ceiling surfaces in finished areas. Set boxes plumb, level, square and flush with finished building surfaces within 1/16 of an inch for each condition. Set City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-23 boxes so that box openings in building surfaces are within 1/8 of an inch of edge of material cut-out and fill tight to box with building materials. Back boxes with structural material to prevent rotation on studs or joists. Use gang boxes wherever more than one device is used at one location. 3. Surface mount boxes to building structures with a minimum of 1/4-inch spacing and with a minimum of two fasteners. Provide attachments to withstand an additional force of 100 pounds applied vertically or horizontally. 4. Set recessed boxes at the following heights to the bottom of the box, except where noted otherwise in the Plan Set: a. Convenience outlet receptacles in finished areas at 18 inches above floor. b. Lighting switches, dimmers, etc., at 42 inches above floor. C. Wall mounted telephones at 60 inches above floor. d. Boxes for outlets on cabinets, countertops, shelves, and above countertops at 2 inches above the finished surface or 2 inches above the back splash. Verify size, style, and location with the supplier or installer of these items before installation. 5. Set surface-mounted receptacle and lighting boxes in wet areas 42 inches above the finished floor to the center of the box, unless called out otherwise in the Plan Set. 6. Set surface-mounted boxes for lighting switches within 12 inches of the door opening on the strike or lock side of the door or on the side closing last unless indicated otherwise i7 the Plan Set. 7. Arrange boxes used in wet areas to drain moisture away from devices or enclosures for equipment and make conduit connections from below. 8. Set floor boxes level and adjust to finished floor surface. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station 6&0#16627 16130-24 D. CONDUIT INSTALLATION Install conduit as a complete and continuous system without wires. Mechanically secure to boxes, fittings, and equipment. Electrically connect conduits to all metal boxes, fittings, and equipment. 1. All field or manufactured ferrous metal threaded connections of conduits and fittings shall be installed with a coating of electrically conductive, corrosion resistant, copper colloidal compound such as "Shamrock Kopr-ShieldTM Compound" or equivalent. 2, Keep conduits clean and dry. Close each exposed end. 3. Properly ground each metallic box, cover, hd, hatch, conduit, etc., in compliance with the National Electrical Code and Specification Section 16060. 4, When blowing through conduits, cover electrical components installed in enclosures to avoid blowing dirt, shavings, or moisture into equipment 5. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel, monofilament plastic line, or woven polyester pull line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 8 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 6. Install exposed raceways in ]hues parallel or perpendicular to the building or structural member's lines except if structure is not level then follow the surface contours as much as practical. Do not crossover or use offsets if they can be avoided by installing the raceway in a different routing. 7. Run parallel or banked conduits together, on common supports where practical. S. Make bends in parallel or banked runs concentric (common radius point, expanding radius). Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed concentrically; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. 9, Select surface raceway outlet boxes to which lighting fixtures are attached of sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16130-25 10. Provide surface metal raceway outlet box and the backplate and canopy at the feed-in location of each end-stem suspension fluorescent lighting fixture. 11. Labeling With the exception of conduits supplying power to lighting and convenience receptacles, all conduits shall be labeled in the following manner. a. Conduits shall be labeled at each entrance and exit of a raceway, box, and device. Labels shall be placed no more than 3 inches from the relevant entrance or exit and shall be positioned in a manner where they can best be read by technicians and maintenance personnel. Exception: • Only one label shall be required for conduits less than 6 feet in length where the entire conduit can be seen fi"om a single point. b. The labels used shall be permanent items manufactured specifically for tagging conduits in direct sunlight and wet environments. C. The conduit label shall be the full conduit number as listed on the Cable and Conduit Schedule. d. The conduit label shall be attached near the ends of conduit stub ups through floors and penetrations into vaults even if equipment is set over the conduit. a1 ------------- } P021713 � Figure 4.2.D.11 l Example of a Conduit Label City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-26 E. RACEWAY TERMINATIONS AND CONNECTIONS 1. Join raceways with fitti igs designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. 2. Make connections waterproof and rustproof by application of a watertight, conductive thread compound. Clean threads of cutting oil before applying thread compound. 3. PVC—RMC Conduits Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. 4. Apply PVC adhesive by brush. 5. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 6. Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw or pipe cutter. Ream cut ends to remove burrs and sharp ends. Make conduit threads cut in the field with the same effective length and same thread dimensions and taper as specified for factory-cut threads. 7. Flexible Connections Use maximum of 18 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, removal, or movement; and for all motors. Do not use flexible conduit in place of elbows, offsets, or fittings to attach to fixed equipment. Recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures may use up to 6 feet of flexible conduit, or 11 feet of premanufactured lighting"whips." Use LFMC in wet or damp locations. Do not strap flexible conduit to structures or other equipment. 8. Provide double lockouts and insulating bushings at conduit connections to boxes and cabinets. Align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Use grounding type bushings where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-27 Exception: • In wet areas, use Myers hubs. 9. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. 10, Support conduit connections to motors or other equipment independently of the motor or equipment. Raise or drop vertically to the nearest practicable point of connection to the unit. Run vertical drops to the floor and fasten with a floor flange. Unsupported drops are not permitted. Horizontal runs on the floor or on equipment are not permitted. Drop or raise at the appropriate closest location. Run conduit on equipment frames or supports to closely follow the contours of the equipment. Locate conduit to maintain access to all equipment services and adjustment points and so as not to interfere with operation of the equipment. 11. Connect conduit to hubless enclosures, cabinets, and boxes with double lockouts and with insulating type bushings. Use grounding type buslnnngs where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. Make conduit connections to enclosures at the closest point possible where the devices are located to which the circuits contained in the conduit will connect. Exception: In wet areas, connect to enclosures, boxes, and devices from the bottom side using IIver-type hubs. F. EXPANSION FITTINGS Where conduits cross building expansion joints, use suitable sliding or offsetting expansion fittings. Unless specifically approved for bonding, use a suitable bonding jumper. Exception: r For 100 percent continuous conduits,provide an LFMC loop to compensate for expansion. Include conduit outlet boxes.for maximum bend compliance. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-28 G. RACEWAY SUPPORT Support raceways as specified in Section 16050, L. Provide anchors, hangers, supports, clamps, etc., to support the raceways from the structures in or on which they are installed. Do not space supports further apart than 10 feet. 2, Provide sufficient clearance to allow conduit to be added to racks, hangers, etc., in the future. 3. Support raceway within 3 feet of every outlet box,junction box, panel, fitting, etc. 4. Support raceway and boxes in an approved manner by: a. Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry; h Tnnnln hnitc nn hnllm � mocnnry nnitc• C. Wood screws on wood; d. Metal screws on metal. 5. Raceway in wet areas shall have clamp backs or other appropriate spacers to hold them a minimum of 1/2 inch off the surface. Horizontal runs on the roof surface shall be blocked at every 5 feet to hold them a rninnnum of 2 niches above roof surface. H. INSTALLING PVC-COATED RGS CONDUITS 1. Follow the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations when installing PVC-Coated RGS conduits. 2. Seal the connections to protect the conduit. 3. Provide manufacturer's PVC repair compound where the thickness of the conduit coating has been reduced or damaged (from bending, threading, rucking, etc.) City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16130-29 I. BENDS AND OFFSETS Bend and offset metal conduit with hickey or power bender, standard elbows, conduit fittings or pull boxes. Bending of PVC shall be by hot box bender and, for PVC 2-inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Make elbows, offsets and bends uniform and symmetrical. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. J. PENETRATIONS FOR RACEWAYS 1. Do not bore holes in floor and ceiling joists outside center third of member depth or within 2 feet of bearing points. Holes shall be 1-inch diameter maximum. Exception: « Unless specifically approved by Structural Engineer, 2. Penetrate through roofs with core drill hole 1/2 to 1 inch larger than conduit, flash with neoprene, caulk conduit in place and seal with silicone sealant under flashing. Sleeve roof opening where non- concrete roof construction occurs. 4.3 HANDHOLES A. HANDHOLE INSTALLATION Install handholes for underground raceway systems true to line and grade. Provide a compacted foundation of fine sand or 3/8 minus crushed rock for the bearing surface edges of the handholes. The handholes shall be installed per the NEC sections 314, and other applicable sections of the NEC. B. HANDHOLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION 1. End all conduits with a vertical riser. 2. Conduits NOT identified as 100 percent continuous shall be allowed to extend into the handhole as a PVC conduit. Provide a PVC bell-end in each conduit as shown in Figure 4.5.13.2. Provide a removable filler at the end of each conduit to eliminate the possibility of water entry. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-30 � .� �.... BELL END ,. �...._ . - (TYP.) HAN DHOLE Figure 4.5.B.2 Typical PVC Conduit Terminations in a Handhole C. HANDHOLE GROUNDING 1, All handholes with metal conduits or with metal lids shall be grounded per Section 16060-3. 4.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS UNDERGROUND AND IN CONCRETE A. UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS 1. The minimum conduit depth shall be 24 inches. Exceptions: Electrical utility conduit depth shall be 36 inches. i Unless required otherwise by utility company. Unless required to be shallower due to physical constraints (see requirements below). • Unless under a concrete slab (see requirements below), M Conduits contains a grounding electrode conductor shall be 30-inches deep. 2. Conduits that require a buried depth of less than 18 inches shall require a 6-inch-thick concrete covering over that portion of such conduits. Such concrete covers need not be formed but shall be colored red or shall be painted red on top. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 16130-31 I 3, Conduits under a concrete slab-on-grade shall be separated from the slab and from the supporting soil by at least 3 inches with soft sand on all sides. 4. Provide separation of underground instrumentation conduits from power and control conduits by a minimum of 12 inches. Avoid parallel runs of instrumentation conduits with power and control conduits as much as possible. Where instrumentation conduits are required to crossover power or control conduits, maintain the 12-inch separation using depth and make the crossover as close to 90 degrees as possible. Exception: Provide 18 inches ofseparation between instraanentation conduits and non-linear power conduits. 5. Run conduits as straight as practicable. Make changes in direction and/or grade of sufficient length to allow a gradual change (3-foot radius minimum). Make slight offsets with 5-degree couplings. 6. Run trenches true and clear of stones or soft spots. Place 4-inches of fine sand in the trench bottom and tamp into place. Provide preformed plastic spacers on top of sand spaced 5-feet on center. After the raceway is placed in the trench, backfill 6 inches with sand, then with native earth backfill passing a No. 8 sieve, free of stones. Do not tamp on top of the conduit until the final backfill is placed. Tamp or water-settle the final backfill to finish the grade. Compact the backfill as specified under Section 02300 "Site Earthwork." 7. Mark direct buried conduit by placing a red marking tape a minimum of 12 inches below grade during backfilling of the trench. 8. Seal conduit comnections to eliminate leakage. B. CONCRETE ENCASED RACEWAYS Raceways encased in structural concrete must be defined in detail and presented to the Structural Engineer for approval at least 7 days prior to installation. As a minimum, approval will be based on the assurance that City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-32 there will be no physical interference and that structural integrity will not be jeopardized. 1, In general, conduits encased in concrete may take the most direct route providing they do not jeopardize the structural integrity of the slab or interfere with process-related piping or equipment. 2. Conduits shall be at least 1-1/2 inches to the edge of a concrete body. If a structural block-out is desired for conduit bundling near the edge of a concrete body, then submit the desired layout to the Engineer for approval and design as defined in this Section. 3. Conduit density, crossover, and routing must be minimized and coordinated to assure that structural integrity is not jeopardized. 4. At the point-of-exposure out of the slab, conduits must be perpendicular to the slab surface from all angles. 5. No part of an elbow's bending radius shall be seen at the point-of- A xposur.. ....... .... ...w.,. C. CONDUITS 1N ELEVATED SLABS See "CONCRETE ENCASED RACEWAYS" above. D. CONDUITS UNDER SLABS ON GRADE 1. No conduits will be encased in slabs less than 8 inches in depth. 2. For slabs-on-grade, all conduits larger than 3/4-inch trade size must be run underground below the slab. 3. All conduits desired to be installed within slabs on grade shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and design as defined in this Section. Exception: a Conduits shown on the Plans as being designed into slabs on grade do not require further Engineering approval. E. CONDUIT TRANSITIONS Where raceway exits from grade or concrete, provide the following: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16130-33 1. All conduits exiting grade or concrete shall be PVC-Coated RGS. Exception: • Raceways used fin-n- the containment and protection of bare grounding electrode conductors shall be PVC Schedule 80. No portion of these conduits shall be metallic. 2. For equipment to be moved into place at a later date, install a PVC- Coated RGS coupling flush with the floor slab. Insert a threaded flush plug into the coupling. Provide a pull wire looped backed into the conduit that can be reached after removal of the plug. 3. Only the straight portion of conduits shall exit grade or concrete. No curved portion of a factory or field-bent conduit shall be visible existing the penetration, even when covered or hidden by equipment. F. CONDUIT STUB-UPS INTO EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURES L Where conduits are stubbed up into open bottom equipment and enclosures, extend the bottom of the conduit threads 1/2 inch above grade. Provide ground bushing and end fittings, flush with fitting and 2-inch stub, above the bottom of the enclosure. Stub conduits to a uniform height (plus or minus 1/8 of an inch) and align within plus or minus 1/4 inch. Exception: • Conduits that do not meet the requirements of being 100 percent continuous, stubbing up directly under a Motor Control Center that is mounted on a housekeeping pad, shall be allowed to terminate as a PVC conduit w th a bell- end. 2. Locate stub-ups directly under the section gutter into which the conductors they contain are to be rooted. Terminate conduit with insulating, grounding type bushing bonded to the ground bus of the equipment. 3. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends are not visible above the finished slab. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-34 4. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans, spare conduits stubbing up through concrete floors and not adjacent to a wall shall be finished flush with floor with an RGS coupling. Provide an in-set metal plug (male thread) into coupling flush with floor. 5. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans, spare conduits stubbing up through concrete floors or grade, and adjacent to a wall or housekeeping pad shall extend 12 inches above slab/grade. The exterior edge of the conduit shall be a minimum of 1 inch from the wall/pad. 6. All stub-ups shall be provided with pull string. 7. Provide conduit labels on all stub-ups which are not flush mounted. G. FIBERGLASS/RTR ELBOWS 1. Types of Joints a. Adhesive Joints When using an adhesive type jont, the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. b. Adhesive for Fiberglass: The adhesive for fiberglass consists of two parts: resin and hardener. The two materials must be combined before they can be used, 2. Recommended Joining Procedures a. Surfaces to be joined should be clean and free from dirt, foreign materials and moisture. Allow Cleaner to evaporate before applying adhesive. b. Adhesive curing time is the time required for the adhesive in the assembled joint to harden. Cure time is dependent on ambient temperature. 4.5 PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures coatings, and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16130-35 A. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. B. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 4.6 CLEANING On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 4.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. TESTS 1. Conduits identified as meeting the requirements of 100 percent continuity shall be tested between source and destination as follows: a. Testing shall be performed using a Digital Voltmeter or Biddle ohmmeter. b. Testing values shall not exceed 5 ohms. C. if testing values exceed 5 ohms, then corrective action shall be taken to reduce the resistance to 5 ohms or below. d. These measurements shall be documented, signed, and submitted to the Engineer for approval. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t6627 16130-36 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes the various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Items 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16130 Raceways and Boxes 1.3 SUBMITTALS QAA Car4i n W znn 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. 1.5 COORDINATION A. WIRING DEVICES FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT Match devices to plug connectors for Owner-furnished equipment. B. CORD AND PLUG SETS Match cord and plug sets to equipment requirements. 1.6 DEFINITIONS Reference Section 16050, "Definitions." City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Wiring Devices a. Arrow Hart Div., Cooper Industries. b. Bryant Electric, Inc. C. Hubbell Inc. d. Killark Electrical Mfg. Co. C. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. f. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 2, Multi-Outlet Assemblies a. Wiremold Co. 2.2 WIRING DEVICES Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices." Terminals shall be rated for 75 degrees C (min.). A. ENCLOSURES NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated. B. COLOR Ivory except as otherwise indicated or required by Code. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O 416627 16140-2 C. RECEPTACLES, STRAIGHT-BLADE AND LOCKING TYPE Except as otherwise indicated, comply with Federal Specification W-C-596 and heavy-duty grade of UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles." Provide NRTL labeling of devices to verify compliance. 1. General Purpose Convenience Outlets a. Duplex receptacle configuration b. Nylon face C. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. d. Provisions for split bus e. NEMA 5-20R '7 c„P�;�l Pmm�cP RA�A,.fa�lP� a. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. b. NEMA configuration as indicated. D. RECEPTACLES, STRAIGHT-BLADE, SPECIAL FEATURES Comply with the basic requirements specified above for straight-blade receptacles of the class and type indicated, and with the following additional requirements: 1. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles—Class A (5 mA) Personal Protection UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," with integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect only the connected receptacle and no other receptacles connected on the same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch-deep outlet box without an adapter. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-3 E. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES IN WET LOCATIONS Convenience receptacles in wet locations shall comply with NEC Article 406.9 and shall be 20 A, 125 VAC rated terminated with binding screws. F. PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES Matching, locking type, plug and plug receptacle body connector, NEMA L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade. 1. Bodies Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip Woven wire mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand and matched to cable diameter and with attachment provision designed for the corresponduig connector. G. CORD AND PLUG SETS Match voltage, current ratings, and number of conductors to requirements of the equipment being connected. 1. Cord Rubber-insulated, stranded copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Grounding conductor has green insulation. Ampacity is equipment rating plus 30 percent rr nimum. 2. Plug Male configuration with nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match to cord and to receptacle type intended for connection. H. SNAP SWITCHES Quiet-type ac switches, NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 "General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W-S-896. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-4 1. Lighting Switches 120/277 Vac only, rated 20 amperes. 2. Motor Rated Switches Horsepower rated for application indicated. I. WALL PLATES Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices. Features include the following: 1. Color Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated. 2. Plate-Securing Screws A 4,taI ...41, hPaAc nnlnrarl to match nlnta finish _._....»_ .._..__.---- ..., ...»..�.. t,....,. ..... 1. 3. Material for Interior Finished Spaces Lexan, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Interior Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 5. Material for Exterior or Wet Locations: Cast Aluminum. 2.3 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Comply with Standard UL 5, "Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings." B. COMPONENTS OF ASSEMBLIES Products of a single manufacturer designed to be used together to provide a complete matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. C. RACEWAY MATERIAL Metal, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant finish. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-5 D. WIRE No. 12 AWG. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. IDENTIFICATION Each receptacle, whether convenience, or dedicated, shall be labeled with the circuit from which its power is derived. Label as "CKT-XX" where XX=numerical circuit number. 1. Only one Panelboard servicing the site: Label as "CKT-XX" where XX—numerical circuit number within the Panelboard. 2. More than one Panelboard servicing the site: Label as "CKT XX-YY" where XX = Panelboard number and YY =numerical circuit number within the Panelboard. Example: A receptacle powered from circuit 03 of Panelboard [01 PB 02] would be labeled "CKT 02-03." B. RECEPTACLE BOXES 1. Reference Section 16130 for box types, 2. Mounting Height a. Indoor, in DRY Areas Indoor receptacle boxes in DRY areas shall be mounted 12 inches above the floor unless shown otherwise on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-6 b. Indoor, in WET Areas Indoor receptacle boxes in WET areas shall be mounted 42 inches above the floor unless shown otherwise on the Plans. C. Outdoor Outdoor receptacle boxes shall be mounted 18 inches above grade unless shown otherwise on the Plans. 3. Reference Section 16130 for box cover types. C. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES Convenience receptacles shall be 20 A, duplex, white, GFCI, straight blade, 3-wire, grounding, unless called out otherwise on the Plans. In addition to any GFCI requirements, all receptacles, convenience or Aailitatail 1nr�taA in hranb rnnmc onl Li+nhano ckoll 1 d PCA D. DEDICATED RECEPTACLES Dedicated receptacles shall be 20 A, simplex, gray, non-GFCI, straight blade, 3-wire, grounding, unless called out otherwise on the Plans. Power must be connected to a dedicated GFCI breaker in the panelboard. In addition to any GFCI requirements, all receptacles, convenience or dedicated, located iii break rooms and kitchens shall be AFCI. Dedicated receptacles shall include a red phenolic placard with 3/8-inch lettering over the receptacle stating: NON-GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR (specific device) NOT INTENDED FOR GENERAL USE City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-7 E. ARRANGEMENT OF DEVICES Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 1. See "Raceways and Boxes" Section for mounting height of devices. 2. Verify locations of outlets and switches in cabinetry with cabinet supplier and Owner prior to installation. F. INSTALLATION PRACTICES 1„ Install devices and assemblies plumb, level, flush and secure. Provide spacers on device screws to flush yokes or flanges to surface of wall within 1/16 of an inch where boxes are not flush with the wall surface. Install wiring devices such as receptacles to withstand 50 pounds force applied perpendicular to the device face with a maximum deflection of 1/16 of an inch. 2. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. 3. Use corrosion resistant devices in kitchen areas and outdoors. 4. Wining connections shall be made by compression on the screw terminals. The wire shall be neatly and symmetrically wrapped around the screw a minitnum of 180 degrees. G. LIGHT SWITCH ORIENTATION Install switches with the "off'position down, Install three and four-way switches so the load is "off' when all switch handles are down. H. TERMINATION PRACTICES Connect phase, neutral, and grounding wires to devices with full loops around screws installed to tighten with tightening of the screw. Trim insulation to within 1/8 of an inch of screw terminal. I. WALL PLATES Install after painting is complete. Install with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 of an inch to plumb. Install at flush mounted devices so that all four City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-8 edges are in continuous contact with finished wall surface without the use of mats or similar devices. Do not use plaster fillings. 3.2 GROUNDING Connect receptacle or switch ground lug to device box for devices other than isolated ground type. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test wiring devices for proper connections, polarity, and ground continuity. Perform this testing with testing equipment designed for testing polarity and connections. Operate each operable device at least six times. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter operation with local fault simulations, using a tester designed for such testing, and according to manufacturer recommendations. Testing with integral test switches on the receptacle is not sufficient for this Replace damaged or defective components, and retest. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16140-9 SECTION 16230 GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of a packaged diesel engine generator set [01 GEN 01] with accessories as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section item 01300 Submittals Division 15 Mechanical 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FULL LOAD The generator delivering 100 percent of its rated output power. B. MAXIMUM FREQUENCY DIP AND PEAK The maximum allowable frequency deviation, in percent, below and above the generator's specified output frequency during application-specific starting and stopping steps as specified in 1.5. Example: A 10 percent MAXIMUM FREQUENCY DIP AND PEAK on a 480 Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz generator equates to +10 percent (f6 Hz) maximum deviation from 60 Hz, or 54 Hz absolute minimum to 66 Hz absolute maximum frequency limits during the worse-case specified step changes while either loading or unloading. C. MAXIMUM FREQUENCY RECOVERY TIME PERIOD The maximum period of time, in seconds, for the frequency to recover back to its specified steady-state operating band following load transitions from no load to full load or from full load no load. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-1 Example: A 5 second MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RECOVERY TIME PERIOD requires that the generator repeatedly recover from full load added or removed load steps wither 5 seconds maximum. This means that during a full load transition, in either direction, the generator frequency may deviate from its specified steady-state operating band for a maximum of 5 seconds before it has fully recovered back to its specified steady-state operating band. D. MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY OPERATING BAND The maximum allowable frequency deviation, in percent, below and above the generator's specified operating frequency during steady-state operating conditions at any load between no load and Rill load. Example: 0.5 percent MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY OPERATING BAND on a 480 Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz generator equates to t0.5 percent (f0.3 Hz) maximum deviation from 60 Hz, or 59.7 Hz absolute minimum to 60.3 Hz absolute maximum frequency limits at any stable operating load from no load to fiall load. E. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DIP AND PEAK The maximum allowable voltage deviation, in percent, below and above the generator's specified output voltage during application-specific starting and stopping steps as specified in 1.5. Example: 25 percent MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DIP AND PEAK on a 480 Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz generator equates to 125 percent (t120 Vac) maximum deviation from 480 Vac, or 360 Vac absolute minimum to 600 Vac absolute_maximum voltage limits during the worse-case specified step changes while either loading or unloading. F. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RECOVERY TIME PERIOD The maximum period of time, in seconds, for the voltage to recover back to its specified steady-state operating band following load transitions from no load to full load or from full load no load. Example: A 5 second MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RECOVERY TIME PERIOD requires that the generator repeatedly recover from full load added or removed load steps within 5 seconds maximum. This means that during a Rill load transition, in City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 910627 16230-2 either direction, the generator voltage may deviate from its specified steady-state operating band for a maximum of 5 seconds before it has fiilly recovered back to its specified steady-state operating band. G. MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE VOLTAGE OPERATING BAND The maximum allowable voltage deviation, in percent, below and above the generator's specified operating voltage during steady-state operating conditions at any load between no load and full load. Example: 2 percent MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE VOLTAGE OPERATING BAND on a 480 Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz generator equates to 12 percent(t9.6 Vac) maximum deviation from 480 Vac, or 470.4 Vac absolute minimum to 489.6 Vac absolute-maximum voltage limits at any stable operating load from no load and full load. H. NO LOAD The generator delivering 0 percent of its rated output power. I. STANDBY POWER OUTPUT RATING The power output rating equal to the power the generator set delivers continuously under normally varying load factors for the duration of an electrical utility power outage. The power output rating is the gross electrical power output of the generator set minus the total power requirements of the electric motor driven cooling fan, water pump, and other auxiliary loads related to the generator set operations. J. DEFINITIONS REFERENCE GRAPH The following graph is a reference chart to better define the following terms "MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RECOVERY TIME PERIOD," "MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE VOLTAGE OPERATING BAND", "MAXIMUM FREQUENCY RECOVERY TIME PERIOD," and "MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY OPERATING BAND." The Y axis can either be voltage or frequency and the X axis is time. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-3 a_______ _______________________ RECOVERYTE E m ... m0P7 m00 1 I i I i TIME 1.4 REFERENCES A. The latest Washington State adopted, published edition of a reference shall be applicable. B. All Washington State amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code b. NFPA 37 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines c. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. International Fire Code (1FC) 3. International Building Code (IBC) City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o #16627 16230-4 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators 5. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 6, Underwriters Laboratory(UL) a. UL 2200 Generator Engine Generator Assemblies b. UL 142 Steel Aboveground tanks for Flammable and combustible Liquids. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering calculations indicate a standby power output rating requirement of 300 kW at 80 percent power factor at 480/277 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz while operating under the site conditions listed in Part 1.8 of this Section in an ambient temperature range of 0 to 104 degrees F at less than 90 percent rated capacity. The manufacturer shall calculate generator unit size according to the following bus rated loads and starting steps: Step No./ Device I Motor Loa Load Starter No. of Pulses Device No. Description Code d_HD kVA TvDe VFD onlvl Step 1 01 XFMR 01 Transformer,480- iF, 208/120 V,3 Dh .. ...._HT O1 UnitheaterNo. 1 HT HT 0 0� Unit heater,No. 2Ol 3 Unit heater,No. 3 Step 2 [He TR O] Motor Pump No 1 F25115 VFD 6 filtered3TR 02 Motor Pumn No.2 = 125 1 I5 ] VFD 6 filtered R The Generator shall be suitable for operation with pulse width modulated variable frequency drives (connected as loads as shown on the Plans and operating motors throughout a speed range of 6 to 60 hertz) without detrimental effects on voltage or frequency regulation and stability. C. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DIP AND PEAK Shall not exceed 25 percent. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O a 16627 16230-5 D. MAXIMUM FREQUENCY DIP AND PEAK Shall not exceed 10 percent. E. MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE VOLTAGE OPERATING BAND Shall not exceed 2 percent. F, MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY OPERATING BAND Shall not exceed 0.5 percent. G, MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RECOVERY TIME PERIOD Shall not exceed 5 seconds. H. MAXIMUM FREQUENCY RECOVERY TIME PERIOD Shall not exceed 5 seconds. I. ALTERNATOR TERNATOR OUTPUT WAVEFORM At no load, harmonic content measured line-to-line or line-to-neutral does not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor, detennined according to NEMA MG 1, does not exceed 50. J. SUSTAINED SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at the system output terminals, the system will supply 300 percent of rated full load current for not less than 10 seconds to coordinate circuit breaker tripping. This system shall include over-voltage relay protection to preclude damage to any generator system component. K. TEMPERATURE RISE OF GENERATOR Within limits permitted by NEMA MG 1, when operating continuously at full nameplate rating, the temperature rise of the generator shall not exceed 250 degrees F over 100 degrees F ambient. L. STARTING TIME The maximum allowable time period to cold start the generator, while operating at the low end of the specified temperature range, and have its City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 16230-6 voltage and frequency sufficiently stable for a transfer switch to accept or automatically initiate a power transfer, shall be 10 seconds. 1.6 SUBMITTALS For each generator set submit under provisions of Section 01300 and as specified herein. A. PRODUCT DATA Provide the manufacturer and a full description of the generator set and associated components. Include features, ratings, and performance including, but not limited to: 1. Engine including the following: a. Horsepower at rated speed and load b. Emission Ratings C. Lubrication oil capacity 2. Overall dimensions of generator set system including the sub-base fuel tank, and the enclosure. 3, Fuel consumption for 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load of generator set 4. Electrical governor 5. Coolant heater 6. Alternator a. Electrical rating (kVA, reactance, time constants, temperature rise, etc.). 7. Voltage regulator type, make, model, and wiring diagram 8. Noise levels at twenty-three feet (7 meters) in a free field 9. Exhaust pipe and muffler sizing backpressure calculations 10. Warranty and Service Agreement documentation City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16230-7 11. Vibration isolation calculations, Plans and seismic certification from manufacturer per the seismic information listed in Part 1.813 of this Section. 12. Bill of Materials 13. Wiring Diagrams Include diagram which shows the contacts for transmitting the I/O signals named in Section 2.5. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide documentation showing all CD&Es (compliances, deviations, and exceptions) for this Specification. C. GENERATOR SIZING CALCULATIONS Submit calculations showing that the submitted generator's standby power output rating is capable of meeting the specified loads in the specified steps listed. The calculations shall show that the generator meets the specified performance requirements. D. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1. Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with manufacturer's published standards for unit provided. Provide written approval of installation in accordance with all manufacturers' recommendations. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data Provide information to be included in the operation and maintenance equipment manuals specified in Section 01300, Section 11000, and as specified herein. 3. Test Reports The O&M manual shall include a copy of the factory test data and the field test report. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-8 4. Service Agreement and Warranty Include copies of the Service Agreement and Warranty in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. A. SOURCE LIMITATIONS l. Obtain engine generator set from a single supplier with responsibility for the complete system. Furnish a new product built from components with proven reliability and compatibility. The generator set shall be coordinated to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing by the OEM. 2, The warranty shall be supported by the original distributor, not offset to an engine manufacturer, an alternator manufacturer, or a new manufacturer's distributer. B. PRODUCT SELECTION FOR RESTRICTED SPACE The site and building are designed around the approved generator sets. This includes sizing of fuel tanks, proper airflow, NEC clearance requirements, and access space. The Contractor, in concurrence with the Engineer, shall make all changes necessary required to meet the design requirements when submitting on an alternate generator at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Generator set to be UL 2200 listed "Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies." D. EMISSIONS EPA certified for all current EPA emissions requirements. E. FACTORY TEST Test assembled generator set at the factory prior to shipment to the job site. The power factor for the factory test shall be at 0.8 p.f. l, Show the following conditions at load and no load on the Generator Set: Charging System Volts, Voltage Output, Frequency, Coolant Temperature, and Oil Pressure, and other City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16230-9 pertinent information on the test report. Provide a plot of the transient voltage and a plot of the frequency response versus time as a result of a full load single step. 2. Perform manufacturer's standard factory tests, 3. Test for a minimum of 30 minutes at full load per NFPA l 10. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Engine generator system is designed, engineered, and rated to withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 5 degrees F to 122 degrees F, 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Elevation: Sea level to 500 eet. B. SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS The entire generator package including all mounted accessories shall comply with the requirements of the 2015 IBC and ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures, Chapter 13 "Seismic Design for Nonstructural Components," as referenced and amended by the IBC. Seismic design parameters are as follows: 1. Risk Category IV Seismic Design Category D. 2, Component Importance Factor: Ip= 1.5. 3. Design response acceleration parameters: a. SDs — 0.889g b. SDI = 0.502g City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-10 i 1.9 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. WARRANTY 1. The manufacturer shall warrant the materials and workmanship of the generator set for a minimum of 5 years, or 2,500 hours from the registered commissioning and startup. 2. The warranty shall be comprehensive and shall include all components included in the generator package. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time, service hours, repair part costs, etc., during the warranty period. B. 2-YEAR MAINTENANCE SERVICE Beginning at time of Substantial Completion, provide 24 months frill maintenance service performed by qualified service technicians of the manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly inspections to check for defects and operational abnormalities. Include routine preventive maintenance (oil changes, filter changes, belt adjustments, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer and perform adjustments as required to bring the generator performance back into compliance with the original specifications. Provide OEM parts and supplies to complete all service to support all factory warranty requirements with written reports to the Owner upon completion of visits. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time, service hours, repair part costs, etc., during the warranty period. Provide a 2-hour load bank test on the generator at I 1 months and 23 months from the time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. Cummins Power Generation as provided by Cummins Northwest, no exceptions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-11 2.2 ENGINE A. FEATURES 1. Four-stroke cycle diesel engine of either vertical in-line or V-type suitable for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel. 2. Engine speed shall be governed by an electronic governor. Refer to frequency requirements specified earlier in this Specification. B. COMPONENTS 1. Oil Pump Gear type lubricating oil pump for supplying oil under pressure to main bearings, crankpin bearings, pistons, piston pins, inning gears, camshaft bearings, and valve rocker mechanism. 2. Oil Filters Full flow oil filters cou,.,,rncml,, lc ated f r servicing, with a spring-loaded bypass valve to ensure oil circulation. 3. Air Filter Dry type air filter. 4. Cooling System Sufficient to cool the engine when the generator set is delivering full rated load in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F. a. Engine-driven, centrifugal-type water circulating pump. b. Thermostatic valve. 5. Coolant/Jacket/ Block Heater As described in Part 2.6-B of this Section. 6. Electrical starters sufficient to start the engine within 10 seconds of call to start. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station ` G&O#16627 16230-12 i i 7. Batteries Lead acid batteries shall be of sufficient capacity to permit starting the generator engine a minimum of four times without recharging. Batteries are to be mounted in an earthquake- and drip-proof rack on the skid, frame, or other approved separate location with required connections provided. 8. Battery Charger a. Silicone rectifier static type, self regulated with high current and full float operation with a filtered output. b. The charger shall be capable of providing a high current charging rate when the battery voltage is below the "float voltage set point." Full floating charging when voltage is above the set point. C. Battery charger operates from 120 volts, single phase AC connected to Generator Auxiliary Device Panel (GADP) as per Section 2.6.A. d. The charger shall be complete with voltmeter, ammeter, charging rheostat, automatic equalizing timer, and high/low battery voltage alarm. e. The battery charger shall be factory mounted with vibration isolators to prolong service life. f. Battery charger shall include standard NFPA outputs where generator is legally required for life safety. 9. Provide watertight flex connections for all conduits and piping attached to generator. 2.3 ALTERNATOR ' A. Four pole, 1,800 rpm revolving field generator. B. Enclosure shall be of drip-proof construction. C. Insulation Class H. D. Wiring shall be 12-lead, reconnectable, and configured for the specified voltage, phasing, neutral point, and frequency. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-13 2.4 VOLTAGE REGULATOR An electronic voltage regulator shall be provided. 2.5 CONTROL PANEL The Control panel shall be of the rotatable dead-front type, vibration free mounted on the generator set. The generator control panel and the generator main circuit breaker shall be installed per NEC clearances and provide accessibility to equipment. The tops of control panels and the circuit breakers shall be mounted a maximum of 72 inches above the fmished floor. A. The control panel shall operate at 12 or 24 VDC from the generator/battery electrical system as required by manufacturer based on the size of the system. B. Control panel shall include the following fimctions/devices: 1. Automatic Starting System a. Provides three 15 second cranking cycles and two rest periods followed by a lockout and alarm. b. Operation is initiated by the closing of a remote Form A contact in the automatic transfer switch control circuit. 2, Indicating light for alarm condition. 3. Indication for the following: a. Running b. Low coolant level C. High coolant temperature d. Low oil pressure e. Over speed f. Over crank g. AC volts for each phase City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 16230-14 i h. AC current for each phase i. Frequency j. Lube oil pressure k. Coolant temperature 1. Run Time m. Number of Starts 4. Engine "AUTO-OFF-MANUAL" control selector switch. 5. Red colored emergency shutdown pushbutton/switch. 6. Time delay relay to permit operation at `NO-LOAD" after retransfer of load to normal source (cool down timer). 7, Automatic safety controls which shut down the engine on: a. Low lubricating oil pressure b. Low coolant level C. High jacket water temperature d. Engine over speed 8. Include a Form A (N.O. Dry) contact for remote connection for each of the following Generator functions. a. Running b. General Alarm c. Fail(shall include, as a minimum, any combination of conditions in 8 above) d. AUTO-OFF-MANUAL control switch in Auto Mode e. Low Battery Voltage f Low Oil Pressure City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-15 g. High Coolant Temperature h. Low Fuel Level i. High Fuel Level j. Fuel Tank Leak 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. GENERATOR AUXILIARY DEVICE PANEL The generator manufacturer shall provide, install, and prewire a Generator Auxiliary Device Panel (GADP) as part of the generator system with the following minimum features: l. The GADP shall consist of a NEMA I gasketed 240/120 VAC single phase load center with a main breaker and appropriately sized branch circuit breakers for the battery charger and the heaters listed below under GENERATOR HEATERS. Available power to the panel is 208/120 VAC, three phase. Exception: The GADP load center can be replaced with one or more 20 A, 4 plex receptacle sets in cast aluminum boxes under the following conditions: a. The battery charger and all heater loads are 120 VAC, single phase, b. The sum of the battery charger and all heater loads does not exceed 1920 VA (16A), C. All loads are prewired by the manufacturer with grounded plug cables, d. The receptacles are placed within reach of all load plugs, e. If required, multiple 4plex receptacle sets are connected together by the manufacturer (provide a single electrical connection point,for the Contractor). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-16 2. For indoor generators, the GADP shall be securely mounted on the generator skid in a location easily accessible by the operator and to a Contractor-provided power conduit. 3, The GADP shall be internally connected to the described loads by the generator manufacturer. 4. it is the intent that the Contractor need only provide a single power conduit and associated conductors to the manufacturer-provided GADP and terminate the conductors to a main circuit breaker, neutral, and ground. All connections for heater controls and devices shall be prewired and pretested by the manufacturer. B. GENERATOR HEATERS 1. Coolant Heater Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled immersion type engine coolant heater to ensure a minimum coolant temperature of 120 degrees F at ambient room temperature of 5 degrees F. C. CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Provide an output main circuit breaker according to the plans and specifications section 16410. This breaker shall be lockable in its open position. The breaker shall have an auxiliary contact that is open when the breaker is in the open position. This circuit shall be prewired by the generator manufacturer to dedicated terminals in the generator control panel. Wire between these devices in LFMC conduit. 2. Provide a generator field protection circuit breaker, or other means to protect the alternator. 3, Provide a load bank circuit breaker according to the plans and that meets specification section 16410. D. VIBRATION ISOLATORS 1. Provide vibration isolators between the trait and the sub-base fuel tank. The isolation mountings shall consist of malleable cast iron top and bottom housings incorporating steel spring or elastomeric constriction and shall be provided with built-in leveling bolts, elastomeric pad and built-in resilient chocks to control oscillation and withstand lateral forces in all directions. Isolators shall be City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-17 presized and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the generator set manufacturer. 2. Vibration isolation efficiency shall be 96 percent at 1,800 rpm. Provide Korfind or equal. 3. Calculations shall be provided with the vibration isolation submittal demonstrating that the specified efficiency can be met with the project specific system characteristics. 4. Vibration isolators may be waved with manufacturer's documentation that the entire generator package including mounted accessories is IBC certified without them. E. ANCHORS Anchors used to secure the generator to the base or other stable surface shall be designed and sized by the manufacturer. Anchors shall be cast-in- place 316 stainless steel anchor bolts or drilled-in 316 stainless steel anchors set with epoxy adhesive. Expansion type anchors shall not be acceptable. The Contractor shall provide and install these anchors. 2.7 FINISH The entire standby generator set assembly with accessories is to be factory painted, color chosen by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. Generator set manufacturer shall provide appropriate epoxy/polyurethane coating system for high heat conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such hazards. Field repair of material or equipment made defective by improper storage or site construction damage by other trades may be cause for rejection of installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the complete generator set and accessories per the manufacturer's installation instructions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-18 1, Anchor the generator set to concrete housekeeping base or pad with high strength anchors and adequate penetration suitable for the Seismic Design Category as specified in the Plans. 2. Make all electrical connections between accessory items, which are not factory wired, prior to requesting the test engineer. B. Maintain minimum workspace around unit and components per manufacturer's installation shop plans and NFPA 70 NEC. C. Provide a complete till of lubricating oil. D. Provide a complete fill of fuel in diesel storage tank before testing. E. Provide a complete fill of manufacturer approved antifi-eeze (ethylene-glycol) and water to protect the engine and heat exchanger cooling system to minus 25 degrees F. F. Contractor shall locate generator control panel and the generator main circuit breaker per NEC clearances and provide accessibility to equipment. Neither shall be mounted more than 72 inches above the floor. Include all costs associated with relocating the standard control/service panel arrangement on generator set to maintain code requirements in the Bid Cost. G, The generator set shall not be started up or tested in the field until all exhaust piping has been insulated as specified and shown on the Plans. All intake and exhaust louvers and fuel system components shall be fully functional. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION Identify field installed wiring, components, and provide warning signs as specified in Section 16050. 3.4 GROUNDING Provide ground continuity to facility electrical ground system as indicated in the Plans and Specification 16060. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide services of a factory authorized service representative to provide inspection results of field visit and field testing in writing. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#10627 16230-19 B. TESTING AGENCY Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality-control testing. C. TESTING l. Prior to Energization After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers, perform visual and mechanical inspection of enclosure and devices. 2. Provide third party breakers testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. Check connections and mounting for proper torque. Correct or replace malfunctioning units and retest. Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials from enclosure. Completely wipe down and vacuum enclosure. 3. After Energization After electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfimetioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. D. FIELD TEST Test the assembled generator set after installation at the job site is complete. 1„ Advise the Engineer, the Integrator, the Contractor, the local Fire Prevention Inspector, and the Owner of the proposed time and date of the field test at least 2 weeks in advance so that the test may be witnessed if desired. 2. Under supervision of a factory authorized service representative, pretest all system functions, operations, and protective features. Provide all instruments and equipment required for tests. Adjust to ensure operation is according to specifications. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-20 3. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications under the environmental conditions present and expected. 4. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include, but not be limited to: all electric heaters, battery charger(s), etc. 5. Cold Start Test a. The unit shall demonstrate the ability to start from a "cold" standby condition (i.e., normal standby mode with engine coolant temperature established by properly functioning water- jacket heater). 6. Calibration and PLC Signal Status Check a. Calibrate all sensors and instruments. b. Verify the scaling and cmmections of each signal to the PLC. Coordinate this work with the integrator. 7. Generator Load Testing a. Generator load testing shall be provided using a manufacturer-provided temporary load bank at 1.0 power factor. The generator shall be operated at 50 percent of full load rating for thirty minutes, followed seamlessly by thirty minutes at 80 percent of full load rating, followed seamlessly by one hoar at 100 percent full load rating. b. After the first 15 minutes at full load, the following shall be recorded at 15-minute intervals (four recordings). i. Voltage (phase to phase and phase to ground) and phase rotation it. Amperage (each phase) iii. Frequency iv. Fuel pressure, oil pressure, and water temperature V. Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16230-21 vi. Ambient temperature c. During the load test period, check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building or enclosure, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during 80 percent and 100 percent loading. d. A certified copy of the test results shall be given to the Engineer and supplied with the O&M manuals. 8. The following test shall be observed by the local Fire Prevention Inspector: a. Prior to any filling of combustible or flammable liquids, the tank shall be pressure tested per NFPA 30, Section 2.4. Include the test report in the O&M manuals, b. The fuel fill container shall be tested for proper operation. 9. The Contractor shall demonstrate the backup power system is fully functional by simulating power outages. Coordinate phase rotation with the Contractor prior to transferring power. 10. Refill the generator tank after completion of field testing. E. RETEST Correct deficiencies identified by field tests and observations, and retest until specified requirements are fully met. 3.6 TRAINING A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall conduct specifically organized training sessions covering operation and maintenance of the unit for personnel employed by the Owner. The training sessions shall be conducted to educate and train the personnel in maintenance and operation of all components of the unit. Training shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1, Preventative maintenance procedures 2. Trouble-shooting 3. Calibration City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-22 4. Testing 5. Replacement of components 6. Automatic mode operation 7. Manual mode operation 8. Fuel and monitoring system 9. Spare parts that have been provided B. At least one training session, at least 3 hours in duration, shall be conducted at the site after startup of the system. The manufacturer shall prepare and assemble specific instruction materials for each training session and shall supply such materials to the Owner at least 2 weeks prior to the time of the training. 3.7 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust voltage and frequency output of generator set to nominal ratings and mark gauges with plastic pen for normal, operation references for Owner. B. Adjust time response of control system to meet site performance requirements. C. Check all remote connections again for proper tightness. 3.8 CLEANING Upon completion of installation and startup, inspect engine generator set. Remove paint splatters, other spots, dirt, and debris. Perform touchup painting to cover scratches and marks to finish. Match original finish of generator set. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16230-23 SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES, FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for the following: A. Feeder and equipment disconnect switches B. Feeder and branch-circuit protection C. Motor safety disconnect switches 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sections ltcm 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16140 Wiring Devices 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. Manufacturer's Product Data for disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 16050. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16410-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering disconnect switches and circuit breakers that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division. 2. Siemens Energy& Automation, Inc. 3. Square D Co, 4. Eaton, Cutler Hammer. 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. MOTOR SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES Motor safety disconnect switches shall be provided when the motor starter is not in sight of the associated motor or when shown on the Plans. Motor safety disconnect switches shall be provided with the following specifications. l. Separately Enclosed Knife Type Switches a. Switches shall not be fused unless specifically shown otherwise on the Plans. b. Switches shall include pad lockable handles, lockable in both the open and closed positions. C. Switches shall be rated at 600 V. d. Switches shall include two auxiliary contacts, rated at 10 A at 250 Vac each, connected to the switch pivot arm that are open when the switch is open, closed when the switch is closed. e. Switches shall be rated at motor horsepower or as per the Plans, whichever is the larger. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O A16627 16410-2 f. Switch enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel unless specifically stated otherwise in the Plans or through the approval of the Engineer. 2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. ENCLOSED, MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle in both the open and closed positions. B. CHARACTERISTICS Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated on the Plans with interrupting rating to meet available fault current. 1. Main and feeder breakers shall be molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip. 2. A-11 ho trip setting. 3. Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic trip, trip-free with non-interchangeable, non-adjustable trip unless otherwise noted. C. APPLICATION LISTING Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting loads (SWD) or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment (HACR).. D. CIRCUIT BREAKERS, 200 A AND LARGER l. Trip units shall be interchangeable within frame size. 2. Assure ability to selectively coordinate circuit breakers. E. CIRCUIT BREAKERS, 400 A AND LARGER Where indicated on the Plans, provide trip units with separate field- adjustable settings of instantaneous trip, short-time trip, short-time delay, long-time trip, and long-time delay. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 16410-3 F. MOLDED-CASE SWITCH Where indicated,molded-case circuit breaker without trip units. G. LUGS Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors suitable for copper conductors of the number and size indicated. H. SHUNT TRIP Where indicated. 1. ACCESSORIES As indicated. NEMA AB 1, Type 4X stainless steel urdess stated otherwise in the Plans, 2.4 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Reference Specification 16050 for spare parts, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL PROTECTION DEVICES A. The Contractor shall provide coordination of circuit breakers, fuses, and other associated protective devices. 1. For adjustable breakers, provide the values for continuous, short- time, instantaneous, ground fault, and other relevant trip and delay settings. Adjust breakers as per 3.4. 2. Provide to the Owner and Engineer calculations, plots, and overlays that clearly show proper coordination of protection circuits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb nn locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install wiring between disconnect switches, circuit breakers, control, and indication devices. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16410-4 C, Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightenuig values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 496A and UL 486R. D. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in Section 16050. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. TESTING AGENCY Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality-control testing. B. TESTING 1. Prior to Energization After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers, perform visual and mechanical inspection of enclosure and devices. Provide third party breaker testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. Check connections and mounting for proper torque. Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials from enclosure. Completely wipe down and vacuum enclosure. 2. After Energization After electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 416627 16410-5 3.4 ADJUSTING Set field-adjustable disconnect switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. Provide fuses for fused disconnect switches to coordinate with manufacturer's listed maximum fuse size for equipment supplied by the disconnect switch. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16410-6 SECTION 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of the following types of power transfer switches: A. Automatic Transfer Switches. B. Manual Transfer Switches, 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals n i Rnn Division 3 Concrete Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. 3-POSITION, DELAYED TRANSFER A 3-position "delayed transfer" ATS can be held in the "center" (no load connection)position for a programmable delayed period of tune before completing its transfer to the calling position. Delayed transfer applies to transfers in either direction. Delayed transfers can only apply to "Open Transition" switches. B. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Automatic transfer switches shall be defined as power transfer switches used to automatically switch system power away fi-om faulty utifity service power to backup generator power then back ag�in to utility power when valid utility power is reacquired. Automatic transfer switches can be configured for automatic generator starting, waiting for generator stability, then transferring the system bus to City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station C&O#16627 16415-1 the generator. They are also configurable for switching back to utility power under selectable conditions. Automatic transfer switches can be set up for automatic generator testing and shutdown. C. DELAYED TRANSFER A "Delayed Transfer" ATS provides a programmable delay in the "neutral position." When in this mode, the load circuit is completely disconnected from both the normal and standby power sources. A delay in this position allows load circuits to dissipate electrical and mechanical energy before being re-energized. D. NEUTRAL POSITION The neutral position describes a position of the transfer switch when the load leads are connected to neither the normal nor the standby source. In this position, the load circuit is completely disconnected. This position should not be confused with the neutral bus or with neutral bus switching. E. NEUTRAL SWITCHING In a neutral-switching ATS, the neutral load bus is switched between power source neutrals in the same manner as the power leads. F. NORMAL POSITION A switch is in its "NORMAL" position when it is connected to the primary (utility) power source. G. OPEN TRANSITION An"Open Transition" ATS provides a "break-before-make" transition under all transition conditions. H. STANDBY POSITION A switch is in its "STANDBY" position when it is connected to the secondary (generator) power source. This position may also be referred to as the back-up position. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-2 1. TIME DELAY DEFINITIONS TD 1 "Call Delay" is the delay from the ATS sensing faulty utility power and the issue of a generator call to run command. TD2 "Off Utility Delay" is the delay from the ATS issuing a generator call to run command and the transfer of the ATS away from the "UTILITY"position. TD3 "Hold Neutral Delay" is the period of time that the ATS will hold the switch in its "neutral' (or"center" or "disconnected") position when transferring from the "UTILITY"position to the "GENERATOR" position and from the "GENERATOR" back to the "UTILITY"position. In this neutral position, the load side of the ATS is disconnected from both utility and generator power. This delay allows the electronic equipment ample time to dissipate their residual power for proper reapplication of power flowing a shutdown. This delay only applies to 3-position delayed-transfer switches. TD4 "Hold Generator Delay" is the delay of the ATS to switch back to utility power after the utility has been sensed as healthy. TD5 "Cool-Down Delay" is the duration of generator runtime after the ATS has switched back to utility. This cool down period is intended to shut the generator off only after a relaxed cooling period. -- UTILITY FAILURE -----— UTILITY RECOVERED UTILITY_FAULTED i s i o ------ START GENERATOR m STOP GENERATOR GENERATOR i e CALL TO RUN ATS POSITION TD5 Tf79 ...- UTILITY— " GENERATOR t n 2-POSITION SWITCH SIMPLIFIED TIMING DIAGRAM City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16415-3 --------- UTILITY FAILURE ......... UTILITY RECOVERED M UTILITY FAULTED r r r r ------ START GENERATOR s STOP GENERATOR �— GENERATOR CALL TO RUN TD1 ATS POSITION _,► r .... 7D2 i h --TD5 --►I UTILITY NEUTRALS r r....TD3---► i"' TD4 GENERATOR— ; r 3-POSITION SWITCH SIMPLIFIED TIMING DIAGRAM J. UVTL Utility Voltage Transition Level. K. GVTL Generator Voltage Transition Level. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit four copies of the following: A. Manufacturer's Product Data for transfer switches and accessories specified in this Section. B. O&M Manual requirements are outlined in Section 01300 and shall also contain the following information: 1. Two-year maintenance service agreement as described below. 2. Screenshots and descriptions detailing how to step through the setup and configuration menus. 3. Field test results as described herein. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-4 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. ATS Beginning at the time of Substantial Completion, provide a 24 months full maintenance service performed by skilled employees of the manufacturer's designated service organization. Provide OEM parts and supplies to complete all service to support all factory warranty requirements with written reports to the Owner upon completion of visits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS All automatic transfer switches shall be compatible with the selected genset. A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Cummins Power Generation/Onan, no exceptions. 2.2 PROCUREMENT A. The party responsible for the procurement of the automatic transfer switch shall be the single source of responsibility for submittal, products provided, warranty, startup and service purposes. B. All automatic transfer switches shall be provided by the contractor that is supplying the generator set as defined in Specification 16230. 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. RATINGS 1. Phases: As shown on the Plans. 2. Poles: As shown on the Plans. 3. Voltage Rating: As shown on the Plans. 4, Current Rating: As shown on the Plans. 5. Fault Current Rating: As shown on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-5 i i 6. Neutral With neutral bus unless indicated otherwise on the Plans. 7. Enclosure: As shown on the Plans. B. FEATURES Reference 'DEFINITIONS" in this specification. 1. UL 1008/CSA certification. 2. Open Transition 3. Delayed transfer (3-position) switch, capable of transferring the connected load from its "normal"power source to a"neutral' (disconnected) position for a programmable period of time, then from the "neutral'position to its "standby"power source, and capable of retransferring back to its "normal' power source with mirrored positions and delays. Delay settings: .............. ............_. __-__ Setting Timing Function(') Initial Duration TD1 Call Delay 1 second TD2 Off Utility Delay 0 seconds TD3 Hold Neutral Delay 15 seconds Setting Timing Function(l)m... Initial Duration TD4 Hold Generator Delay 15 minutes TD5 Cool-Down Delay 5 nnnutes ( ) Delay Y. 1 Reference"Time Dela Definitions." 4. Power switching shall be provided for all phases. 5. Power sensing shall be provided for all phases. 6. Switch transfer control sensing shall be provided on all phases. 7. Switching mechanism shall be a discrete purpose device specifically designed for Automatic Transfer Switches. 8. Electrically operated by solenoid mechanisms and held by mechanical latches. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16415-6 9, High current-breaking capacity with silver-surfaced contacts equipped with are barriers and magnetic blow-out coils. 10. Contacts rated in accordance with UL 1008 for current carrying and switching capabilities. 11. Suitable for repetitive load transfer switching. Minimum 1,000 transfer cycles under full load conditions and minimum 2,000 cycles under no load conditions. 12. Interlocked to prevent supplying the load from more than one source at a time. 13, Adjustable close differential voltage monitoring relays provided on all three phases to sense voltage on the 'NORMAL" and "STANDBY" sources. 14. Auxiliary Contacts All n _J;1 .. ......fn n1, 11 1. :n..1„foA A.-., ❑..__ !` .:fnWe for 120V, 10A inductive loads,NEMA 1310 rated, wired to easily-accessible terminals in the low voltage control area. b. Provide, as a minimum, the following status outputs: i. Switch in utility power position. ii. Switch in generator position. iii. Switch fault. iv. Generator call status. This status signal is one of two identical outputs. One can be directly connected to the generator to call a start operation. The second is electrically isolated from the generator connection and intended for connection to monitoring equipment. V. Utility power available. 15. Molded case breakers are not acceptable. 16. Intelligent display panel with push-button navigation switches. The display shall be clearly visible in both bright (sunlight) and no light City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-7 conditions. It shall be visible over an angle of at least 120 degrees. The display panel shall be capable of providing the following functions and capabilities: a. Display source condition information, including AC voltage for each phase of normal and emergency source, frequency of each source. Voltage for all three phases shall be displayed on a single screen for easy viewing of voltage balance. Line to neutral voltages shall be displayed for 4-wire systems. b. Display source status, to indicate source is connected or not connected. C. Display load data, including 3-phase AC voltage, 3-phase, frequency, M, and kVA. Voltage and current data for all phases shall be displayed on a single screen. d. The display panel shall allow the operator to view and make the following adjustments in the control system, after entering an access code: t Set nominal voltage and frequency for the transfer switch. ii. Adjust voltage and frequency sensor operation set points. iii. Set up time clock functions. iv. Set up load sequence functions. V. Enable or disable control functions in the transfer switch, including program transition. vi. Set up exercise and load test operation conditions, as well as normal system time delays for transfer time, time delay start, stop, transfer, and retransfer. e. Display real time clock data, including date, and time in hours, minutes, and seconds. The real time clock shall incorporate provisions for automatic daylight saving time and leap year adjustments. The control shall also log total operating hours for the control system. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-8 £ Display service history for the transfer switch. Display source connected hours, to indicate the total number of hours connected to each source. Display number of tines transferred, and total number of times each source has failed. g. Display information for other transfer switches in the system, including transfer switch name, real time load in kW on the transfer switch, current source condition, and current operating mode. h. Display fault history on the transfer switch, including condition, and date and time of fault. Faults to include controller checksum error, low controller DC voltage, ATS fail to close on transfer, ATS fail to close on retransfer, battery charger malfunction, network battery voltage low, and network communications error. nnLn ,Tf(- 1. When "normal" voltage falls below invalid UVTL, then a. The ATS starts the generator. 2. When the "standby" voltage is above valid GVTL, then a. After a programmable delay in the "normal"position, the switch transfers from the "normal" position to the "neutral" position. b. After a programmable delay in the "neutral" position, the switch transfers from the "neutral" position to the "standby" position. 3. When "nonnal" voltage is above valid UVTL, then a. After a programmable delay in the `standby" position, the switch transfers from the "standby" position to the "neutral" position. b. After a programmable delay in the "neutral" position, the switch transfers from the "neutral" position to the"normal" position. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16415-9 c. After the switch returns to the "normal" position, the transfer switch shuts off the generator after a programmable cool down delay. 4, Two separately adjustable tune delays prevent transfer and retransfer on voltage dips. 5. Seven-day exercise timer provides periodic exercising of generator, a. Timer is programmable as to day of week, time of day, and duration for exercising. b. Programmable as to whether generator is exercised with or without load being transferred 6. Initially preset the UVTL at: a. Valid >— 90 percent nominal system voltage b. Invalid<= 80 percent nominal system voltage C. Relay will pull in at the "valid" level and drop out at the "invalid" level. T Initially preset the GVTL at: a. Valid >— 90 percent nominal system voltage b, Invalid <=75 percent nominal system voltage C. Relay will pull in at the "valid" level and drop out at the "invalid" level. 8. Initially preset the utility and generator frequency transition levels at: a. Valid>= 95 percent of system frequency b. Invalid >= 90 percent of system frequency City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-10 2.4 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCHES A. RATINGS 1. Phases: As shown on the Plans. 2. Poles: As shown on the Plans. 3. Voltage Rating: 600V. 4. Current Rating: As shown on the Plans. 5. Fault Current Rating: As shown on the Plans. 6. Neutral With neutral bus where indicated on the Plans. 7. Enclosure a. Mounted Inside a Closed Room NEMA 12 unless indicated otherwise on the Plans. B. FEATURES L UL 508, UL 98 certification and in accordance with article 702 of the NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70. 2. Switches shall include pad lockable handles, lockable in the "NORMAL," "OFF," and "STANDBY" positions. 3. Switches shall include two auxiliary contacts: a. One contact closed when in "NORMAL"position. b. The other contact closed when in "STANDBY" position. C. Both contacts open in "OFF" position. Both contacts shall be rated at 10 A, 250 V. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16415-11 4. Capable of transferring the connected load from "NORMAL" to "OFF", from "OFF" to "STANDBY," from"STANDBY" to "OFF," and from "OFF" to "NORMAL." 5. Manual mechanical switch movement. C. OPERATION 1. Transfers fiom "NORMAL" to "OFF" on manual movement of switch handle. 2. Transfers from "OFF" to "STANDBY" on manual movement of switch handle. 3. Transfers from "STANDBY"to "OFF" on manual movement of switch handle. 4. Transfers from "OFF" to "NORMAL" on manual movement of switch handle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver transfer switch components to their final locations un protective wrappings, containers, and other means of protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such hazards. Field repair of material or equipment made defective by improper storage or site construction damage by other trades may be cause for rejection of installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install transfer switch per the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Maintain minimum workspace around unit and components per manufacturer's installation shop drawings and NFPA 70 NEC. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed wiring, components, and provide warning signs as specified in Section 16050. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16415-12 3.4 GROUNDING Provide ground continuity to facility electrical ground system as indicated in the Contract Provisions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide a factory-authorized service representative to supervise installation and connections to the unit. Provide the inspection results of field visit and field testing in writing. B. SUPERVISED ADJUSTING AND PRETESTING Under supervision of a factory authorized service representative pretest all system functions, operations, and protective features. Provide all instruments and equipment required for testing. Adjust the time delays, and trip point settings to ensure operation is within accordance to the specifications. C. FIELD TEST Test the transfer switch after installation is complete,. 1, Advise the Engineer of the test date well in advance so that the test may be witnessed if desired. 2. Perform manufacturer's standard field tests. 3. Provide documented field lest results to Owner and Engineer. 4. Provide trip set points and time delays in the O&M manual. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 164 t 5-13 i SECTION 16420 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes AC motor controllers rated 600 volts and less that are supplied as enclosed units within motor control centers or as individual units mounted in equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Items 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16120 Conductors and Cables 16410 Enclosed Switches,Fuses, and Circuit Breakers 16442 Motor Control Equipment 16910 PLC Hardware and Software Procurement 16940 Control Panels 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ANALOG AMMETER A dial-type, d'Arsenval movement, analog meter measuring motor ampacity, either directly or indirectly from a current transformer connected to one of the motor leads. B. COMPLETE COMBINATION STARTER The terms STARTER, MOTOR STARTER, COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER, and COMBINATION STARTER are all equivalent to COMPLETE COMBINATION STARTER as described here. A Complete Combination Starter consists of all power, control, and communication devices required to completely and safely operate a motor in HAND control. It consists of a lockable Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD) such as a circuit breaker or a fused disconnect, a Power Module (RVSS, VFD, or Magnetic) for controlling/applying power to the motor, Motor Overload Protection (MOP) circuits, and other ancillary circuits for complete control and protection of the motor and starter power devices. It City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-1 includes an enclosure with operator interface control and monitoring devices. C. EST (FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN) A Field Service Technician (EST) is defined as a "hands-on" field representative qualified and authorized to perform technical start-up and trouble-shooting work on the manufacturer's motor starters including drive programming and configuration. D. FVNR BYPASS CONTACTOR In RVSS starter power circuits, an FVNR rated BYPASS CONTACTOR is one whose current rating is sufficiently high to allow direct across-the- line motor starting in an FVNR mode (RVSS failure). See RUN RATED BYPASS CONTACTOR in this section. In VFD starter power circuits, the function of the FVNR BYPASS ((-%'KTT A r Tl1T2 is ton ni.la a c_tha_lina mntnr rnntrnl in tha avant that y y rn » arno the VFD fails. This CONTACTOR mast have a current rating that is sufficiently high to allow direct across-the-line motor starting in an FVNR operating mode (VFD failure). E. FVNR (FULL VOLTAGE NON REVERSING) STARTER FVNR starters operate motors in only one direction. These starters instantly apply full line voltage to the motor terminals through a contactor relay. See MAGNETIC STARTER. F. HIM (HUMAN INTERFACE MODULE) HIM units are programmable human interfaces to RVSS and VFD drives and are used to configure the drive protection and control options. These devices are typically provided with pro grantruing/operating buttons and visual displays. G. IGBT (INSULATED GATE BIPOLAR TRANSISTORS) IGBTs are embedded devices used to provide power switching in the DC-to-AC inverter section of VFD power modules. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-2 H. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER Because FVNR and FVR starters use an electromagnetic contactor relay to transfer power to the motor, these devices are a part of the MAGNETIC STARTER family of motor starters. See FVNR, FVR. I. POINT OF ANALYSIS The Point of Analysis is a point indicated on the electrical one line diagram(s) where the contractor is responsible to comply with the Total Harmonic Current Distortion (THDC) limits of the IEEE-519, 2014 standard. By defining this point, the Engineer is providing all manufacturers a common point to calculate their THDC values. The `available short circuit current' (Ise) value required for IEEE-519 calculation shall be taken from the electrical one line diagram(s) of the Plans as the BOLTED FAULT CURRENT at the Point of Analysis. The "average maximum demand current' (IL) value required for IEEE-519 calculation shall be taken from the UTILITY LOAD DEMAND column of the LOAD SUMMARY table on the electrical one line diagram(s) of the Plans. Only loads "downstream" of the Point of Analysis shall be utilized in the calculation of IL- J. RAMP RATE, VFD The VFD ramp rate is defined as the time, in seconds, for the VFD to increase its output frequency from 0 Hz to 60 Hz or decrease its output frequency from 60 Hz to 0 Hz. K. RUN-RATED BYPASS CONTACTOR In RVSS starter power circuits, a run rated BYPASS CONTACTOR is one whose current rating is limited to the RVSS current rating. This type of bypass contactor cannot be used to directly start the motor across-the- line. See FVNR BYPASS CONTACTOR in this section. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-3 L. SCRS (SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS) SCRs are GE's trade name for a thyristor (a four-layer unidirectional switching device). SCRs are triggered by the application of a gate current and are shut off at a zero-voltage crossover. M. "S" CURVES A modified linear-ramp curve with rounded edges between portions of the curve that are changing (d/dt portions) and portions of the curve that are not changing (steady state). steady state portion ............. "S"curve "S"curve `►,, d/dtportion steady state portion ----- /� N. THD (TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION) THD is defined as the ratio of the sum of the levels of all hannonic components to the level of the fundamental frequency. Values are limited by the IEEE 519, 1992 standard developed to minimize power problems related to non-linear loads, such as VFDs. O. VFD The VFD is the manufacturer's integrated power module package without additional starter components, and consists of an embedded AC-to-DC converter, a DC link, and a DC-to-AC inverter, associated inverter"firing" control circuitry, and a microprocessor for power circuit firing control and motor/module protection. It is one of the key components that make up a COMPLETE COMBINATION VFD STARTER. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Do not submit motor starters under a separate 16420 submittal. Submit motor starters under the MCC submittal, 16442, Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-4 Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) for each motor starter. Submit drawings showing schematics for each motor starter. Schematics shall include all physical devices and connections of power and control circuits. Schematics shall include diagrams or descriptions clearly describing internal VFD logic where applicable. All devices on the schematics shall be tagged with their associated BOM number. Subinit drawings of door-mounted devices with associated BOM numbers. Submit the name and phone number of the technical person that will be made available to the Engineer/Integrator for support of PLC networking to the manufacturer's networked devices. Submit the name and phone number of the technical person that will be made available to the Engineer/Integrator for support of internal drive programming and configuration. Submit Manufacturer's product data for motor controllers and accessories specified in this Section. Submit maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 16050. Submit compiled load current and overload relay list after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. 1.6 COORDINATION The Contractor shall acquire the full and complete nameplate data for each motor and document this data for insertion into the O&M Manual. This data shall be made available during FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING work as described in Section 3.5. Coordinate the sizing and settings of each starter's Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD) and Motor Overload Protection (MOP) device with associated motor's nameplate data. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-5 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Siemens. 2. Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse & Cutler-Hammer Products. When motor starters are integrated into Motor Control Centers (MCCs), the starters shall be fabricated, tested, and UL labeled by the MCC 2.2 PRODUCT SHIPMENT AND STORAGE A. PRODUCT SHIPMENT The motor starters shall be delivered to the project's System Integrator (reference specification 16940) for temporary connection and integrated testing with the site PLC prior to being delivered to the jobsite. This testing will be coordinated by the System Integrator and combined into a complete witness test of both the PLC and motor starter controls. All hardwire comiections between the PLC(s) and the motor starters shall be tested during the witness test. For the test, all motor starters (whether FVNR, FVR, RVSS, or VFD) shall be powered at their full operational voltage and shall be connected and tested against a voltage-rated AC squirrel cage motor. Allow for the Owner and Engineer to witness these tests. Provide a minimum of 15 days' notice prior to the test. The System Integrator shall be responsible for repackaging and shipping to the jobsite. The Contractor is responsible for unloading the shipment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 16420-6 i B. PRODUCT STORAGE Motor starters, whether in MCCs or stand alone, shall be packaged, covered, and protected from weather and physical damage during storage before final installation. 2.3 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS, GENERAL A. ENCLOSURES 1. For Starters Internal to MCCs For starters internal to MCCs, reference Section 16442 (Control Centers) and reference the MCC NEMA rating(s) on the Plans. B. COMPLIANCE 1. Standards Motor starters shall be Underwriter's Laboratory (UL) listed and labeled, and comply with the latest applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, and the National Electrical Code. C. GENERAL DEVICES AND COMPONENTS All combination motor starters shall include the following devices: 1. Overcurxent Protective Device (OCPD). a. The OCPD shall be a NEMA AB 1, motor circuit breaker protector, magnetic only, with field-adjustable short-circuit trip-coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes for the specific motor being powered. b. The OCPD shall be lockable in the OPEN position and shall include an auxiliary Form A contact that is open when the OCPD is electrically tripped or manually opened. C. The OCPD shall be lockable from the front panel, without the operator having to open the panel door. d. The OCPD shall be sized by the motor controller manufacturer for the motor being served and shall be City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-7 selectively coordinated with OCPDs upstream as per Section 16410. 2. Control Devices (reference Specification 16940) The following minimum requirements apply: a. Provide surge protective devices across each AC and DC relay coil. b. Provide control and tinning relays per Section 16940,. C. Provide LED `push-to-test" indicating lights. d. Provide combination electromechanical motor start counter and motor run time (elapsed time) meters per Section 16940. Battery backed LCD displays will not be accepted. ➢... 4,10 Dt. _ TR....:r...-Dal...,.. rt...r .,, ..1r...„4..,�0 1.. phase imbalance, phase reversal, under-voltage, and over-voltage, with a Form A contact that is active on any of these conditions. Exception;. + Programmable starters that provide the Phase Monitor Relay functions as described above do not require an additional discrete phase monitor relay. £ Door-Mounted Devices Provide door-mounted devices as specifically shown on the Plans. Door-mounted devices, such as elapsed time meters, motor start counters, indicating lights, ammeters, selector switches, reset pushbuttons, etc., shall not be replaced with electronic panel functions. g. Devices Mounted Internal to the Enclosure Motor starters shall include all components and devices necessary to provide the electrical control functionality City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-8 I shown on the Motor Starter Elementary Wiring Diagrams on the Plans. Electromechanical relays and timers shall not be replaced with electronic logic functions. Exceptions to 2: & Unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 3. Control Circuit Requirements a. Control functions shall match those shown on the Motor Starter Elementary Diagrams including manual requirements by the operators. Provide additional circuits and devices as required by the starter manufacturer for power circuit isolation; however, these additions shall not change the features or functionality of the intended design. b. Provide additional fusing or device protection as required to protect the drive's electronic power and control circuits and to comply with UL requirements. C. Motor starters shall be provided with independent fused "control power" circuits. A fault in one motor control circuit shall only disable that associated motor. i. Motor starter control circuits shall be 120 volts AC. ii. If motor power is derived from 480 Vac, then each control circuit shall be provided with an independent control transformer with a 120-volt AC fused secondary. The fuse shall be factory mounted to the top of the transformer. in, Motor starter control circuits may include remote panel heaters, motorized dampers, blower enclosure cooling fans, or other small power devices. Size the control transformers and fuses to handle all connected loads shown on the Plans plus an additional 25 percent. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16420-9 D. WORK BY MANUFACTURER 1. All starters a. The manufacturer shall provide motor controls as defined in these specifications and as shown on the Motor Starter Wiring Diagrams in the Plans. b. The manufacturer shall provide complete combination motor starters as described in this section of this specification. c. The manufacturer shall provide all physical (external) control relays and timers per Motor Starter Wiring Diagrams in the Plans. These devices shall not be integrated into programmable starter devices (VFDs, RVSSs, Smart Overload Relays, Extended UO, etc.). d. The manufacturer shall provide additional internal controls .......,�..,...�......y�,..,......�.,.� ..,, spec.". �,ovrer c..,,....� as required for drive protection and manufacturer's warranty. 2. Starters with Programmable Devices Motor starters containing programmable devices (VFDs, RVSSs, Smart Overload Relays, Extended I/O modules, etc.) shall be configured as follows: a. The manufacturer shall provide internal fault logic for protection of motors and starter power devices. These are the manufacturer's programmed conditions as required to warrant the system. A relay"FAULT" output will be programmed true on these fault conditions. b. The manufacturer shall provide HIM programming as follows: i. HIM Display: (1) The HIM will always display the "fault code" if faulted. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-10 (2) If not faulted, then the HIM will display motor speed or motor amps (owner selection). ii. HIM Key Pad: (1) The system can be placed in the PROGRAMMING mode only through password entry. The password shall be provided to the owner. (2) START, STOP, RESET, HAND, OFF, AUTO keys are inactive (locked out) unless in the programming mode. 3. Networked Starters. a. For VFD motor starters the manufacturer shall provide internal logic for control of"RUN", "SPEED REFERENCE", and "PUMP SET OK" functionality per the Motor Starter Wiring Diagrams in the Plans. If different pin assignments are used by the manufacturer, then these shall match the external and internal logic connections as shown in the plans and shall be clearly documented during submittal. Extended 1/0 modules (EIOMs) shall be added as required to meet these conditions. For non-VFD motor starters, the manufacturer shall provide internal logic for control of"RUN" and "PUMP SET OK" functionality per the Motor Starter Wiring Diagrams in the Plans. If different pin assignments are used by the manufacturer, then these shall match the external and internal logic connections as shown in the plans and shall be clearly documented during submittal. Extended 1/0 modules (EIOMs) shall be added as required to meet these conditions. b. The manufacturer shall configure and program the internal logic functions and HIM unit, as described in these specifications and on the Plans. c. The manufacturer shall provide all drive digital inputs to be readable by the PLC over the network. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-11 d. The manufacturer shall provide full support to the PLC programmer for the acquisition and transfer of networked I/O. E. WORK BY INTEGRATOR OR FST 1. General The manufacturer shall allow for field adjustments by a qualified FST and shall support the efforts of the FST during the panel shop witness testing and during startup and commissioning as defined in this specification. Reference Section 3.5. The manufacturer shall provide the FST directly or authorize the FST work to be performed by the Integrator. If authorized to be performed by the Integrator, then a. Such adjustments and settings shall not affect the manufacturer's warranty or transfer the manufacturer's ,.�.:�: y .�.,. Tr...._..... _a b. Such work by the Integrator shall be financially compensated for by the manufacturer. 2. Witness Testing The FST shall demonstrate complete functionality of internal logic functions for "RUN", "SPEED REFERENCE", and"STARTER READY" functionality during shop witness testing. a .xa voc DIJ wx SW] 01,2 SW3 11 DO VFD MODULE SW6 SWS ,. J �.,... ... i Drs SW6 ... y Dl.e Example of a 6-input test switch bank City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-12 To do this, the EST shall provide a simple 6-bit switch harness similar to that shown above for testing output functions with up to six digital inputs. The EST shall disconnect the starter wiring to selected inputs, verify the output against all possible input combinations using the switches, document the result, and reconnect the starter wiring. This example shows a 6-input test (64 possible combinations). The EST shall prepare a logic table showing input status against the resulting output. If the internal logic operates properly, then the entire starter will be tested for proper operation with both internal and external controls fcmctioning as unit. If corrections need to made as a result of the test, then the manufacturer shall support the changes either directly or by authorizing the Integrator to perform this work as the FST. 3. Settings Specific to the Application: The EST shall provide drive module configuration settings as listed below. These changes shall not affect the manufacturer's warranty or reduce the manufacturer's liability. a. Current limit settings, b. Motor protection settings, C. Final settings for the fixed maximum and minimum speeds, d. Providing frequency notch (avoidance) bands, e. Final settings for the fixed acceleration and deceleration ramp rates, f. Others with approval. 2.4 VFD MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL The drive is designed to provide variable speed control of a standard NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase, induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Output power is of suitable capacity and wave form to provide step-less speed control of the specified 3-phase motor City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-13 throughout a continuous speed range under variable or constant load (as applicable) not exceeding the motor's full load rating. Controller is suitable for and coordinated with the thermal, electrical, and mechanical characteristics of the motor actually furnished to which it is connected. Coordinate the drive capability with the torque characteristics (variable or constant torque) of the actual equipment furnished, which is driven by the motor to which the drive is connected. B. THD NOISE IMMUNITY AND COMPLIANCE WITH IEEE 519 1, THD levels shall meet the recommendations of IEEE-519, 2014 at the "Point of Analysis" (reference definitions). Reference to the location of values for Isc and h, required for IEEE-519 calculations are described in the definition. 2. During subnuttal, show the values and calculations used to .7va�««.;.,o +I, 10.,_1 � A t...,o ..f 1;«o 41+„ 1,e;.,.. �..1,.«;at_.7 —A ♦1,_;_ .,.,. ... . .. . . . ". .yY u. . . .� b L,....�".. ..M ....H assumed compliance with IEEE-519. C. THE POWER CIRCUIT 1. Technology a. The Bridge Power switching devices shall be IGBTs. VFD motor starters shall be six-pulse, Pulse Width Modulated (PWM). b. Control Type Variable Torque Output Rating: Three-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-14 2. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD) Reference GENERAL DEVICES AND COMPONENTS, Section 2.3C. 3. The VFD a. Variable torque VFDs shall be over-sized to the next standard NEC horsepower above that shown on the Plans. Other devices associated with the combination motor starter shall be sized at the horsepower shown on the Plans. b. Capable of sustaining 115 percent of motor rated full load current indefinitely. C. Operates in an ambient temperature of 0 to 40 degrees C. d. Maintains displacement power factor of 0.95 or better over the entire speed range. 4. Motor/Drive Protection, Adjustments, and Auto Reset a. VFD shall include self diagnostics for detection of failed circuitry. b. Fault detection shall shut down motor operation as shown on the Plans. Upon removal of fault condition, the drive shall automatically reset and attempt to restart. C. Upon return of power after an outage, the drive shall automatically restart. d. In addition to other specified standard protective functions the VFD shall provide the following: i. Drive over-temperature trip. ii. Short-circuit protection. iii. Fault current protection of AC to DC rectifier section. iv. Adjustable current limit of 50 to 110 percent of full-load rating. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16420-15 V. Stall prevention. vi. Surge protection from input line AC transients (lightning/surge arrestor). vii. Electrical isolation between power and logic circuits. viii. Able to withstand output terminal line-to-line short circuits without component failure. 5. Line and Load Circuit Conditioning a. Line Filtering Passive Tune filtering shall be provided on all VFD starters to assist in compliance to IEEE 519-2014. Line filters may consist of reactors only or may include capacitors and resistors as required to comply with IEEE 519-2014. The LiiuilynE if 1II LlliV LLvV JLLI VVLLJ1Jl VL 4 l tlel eV111. I\.UVV 1. Line filters that include capacitors shall have the capacitors switched off when the motor is not running. Circuits internal and external to the drive module required to control the application of the capacitors shall be provided by the manufacturer. Extended 1/0 modules (EIOMs) shall be added as required to meet tlris requirement. b. Load Filtering Passive load filtering shall be provided on all VFD starters to reduce motor winding voltage stress, improve drive stability, and assist in drive protection. The filter may consist of a simple reactor or a passive combination RLC dv/dt filter as described below. i. For motor lead lengths less than 200 feet Provide 1.5 percent load reactor. ii. For motor lead lengths greater than 200 feet City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16420-16 Provide an PLC dv/dt load filter with a 1.5 percent load reactor. Exception to 5: • Line filtering may not be required when using 18 pulse technology or active filters. Requirements to be defined by the manufacturerfbr compliance to IEEE 519-1992. 6. VFD Isolation Circuits internal and external to the drive module required to control the isolation of the VFD module shall be provided by the manufacturer. Extended I/O modules (EIOMs) shall be added as required to meet this requirement. D. THE CONTROL CIRCUIT Reference GENERAL DEVICES AND COMPONENTS, Section 2.3C. E. VFD SPEED CONTROL VFD motor starters shall be provided with manual and automatic speed control. Automatic speed control may be derived from a signal source remote fi,om the starter and may be hardwired, networked, or both to]- redundancy. 1. Manual Speed Control Manual speed control shall be selected by the VFD as shown in the Motor Starter Wiring Diagrams in the Plans. The Manual Speed Reference shall be derived from the drive's a door-mounted speed potentiometer.Regardless of the manual range setting, the speed shall be limited to values between "minimum speed" and "maxhnum speed"programmed in the VFD through the HIM. 2. Hardwired Speed Reference Remote hardwired speed references shall be from an isolated 4-20 mA analog signal. Four mA shall equate to 0 Hz (0 percent speed). Twenty mA shall equate to 60 Hz (100 percent speed). Regardless of the 4-20 mA signal, the speed shall be limited to City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-17 values between "minimum speed" and "maximum speed" programmed in the VFD through the HIM. 3. Networked Speed Reference Remote networked speed references shall be transferred over a LAN between the controlling PLC and VFD drive. The range shall be between 0 and 100 percent, where 0 percent shall equate to 0 Hz (0 percent speed) and 100 percent shall equate to 60 Hz (100 percent speed). Regardless of the niininnum speed reference sent over the LAN, the speed shall be limited to values between "minimum speed" and "maximum speed" programmed in the VFD through the HIM. F. VFD DRIVE CONTROL 1, Microprocessor based digital logic control programmable from the HIM. 2. Q-A COr,tP01 NP- a. Maximum speed is field adjustable up to the rated 60 Hz motor speed. b. Minimum speed is field adjustable from 0 to 75 percent of maximum rpm. C. The minimum and maximum speeds are independently field adjustable through the HIM. Initial settings shall be preconfigured by the starter manufacturer for each VFD starter as shown in the table below. d. Speeds shall increase and decrease at a linear ramp rate, independently adjustable for acceleration and deceleration through the HIM. Initial settings shall be preconfigured by the starter manufacturer for each VFD starter as shown in the table below. Ramp Rates Speed Limits (0-100% speed)in sec. (in % full speed) _..—n Tat!Number Description Accel Decel Min Max. [01 MTR 01] MOTOR, BOOSTER PUMP 5 5 40 100 [01 MTR 05] (ANY) City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-18 I 3. In addition to other specified features, provide the following: a. Low-fi-equency voltage boost. b. Coast to rest. C. Minimum five-cycle logic power carryover during utility loss. d. Insensitivity to line rotation. e. Display of fault information. f. Slip compensation. g. Programmable `jump frequency." G. VFD I/O TERMINALS The VFD shall include, as a minimum, the I/O connections as shown on the motor starter elementary wiring diagrams on the Plans. Provide extended 1/0 modules, as required, to meet this objective. The manufacturer shall make all signals to digital input pins available to the PLC over the network. This transmission of data shall made seamless to the PLC listed in specification 16910. H. NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS Where motor starters are shown on the Plans to be networked together or to a PLC, either directly or through network switches, such VFD combination motor starters shall include communications equipment and protocols compatible with the approved system control PLC. Provide the minimum command and status parameters as shown on the schematic(s) and I/O tables on the Plans. Provide additional distributed I/O modules and associated power supplies, as required, to meet the data transfer networking requirements listed here and shown on the schematic(s) and 1/0 tables on the Plans. The manufacturer shall provide technical assistance to the Integrator as required to create a reliable and clear transfer of data packets between the motor starters and the PLC as identified in specification 16910. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-19 2.5 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification 16050 for spare parts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION Apply motor starters as described on the Plans, 3.2 INSTALLATION Install independently mounted motor control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NEC. A. IDENTIFICATION Identify motor control components and control wiring according to B. LOCATION AND MOUNTING Locate controllers as shown on the Plans. Provide the mounting methods for each separate starter enclosure as shown on the Plans. Reference Section 16050. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between motor control devices according to Section 16120. B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Make all control wiring connections to provide a complete and operational system. Provide additional terminals, wire guides, and gutters as required for a safe and protected system. 3.4 CONNECTIONS Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals including screws and bolts according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-20 3.5 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS l. Testing procedures described herein shall apply to all starters associated with the Project. 2. Complete testing of motor starters shall be provided and shall include: a. The services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform breaker testing as described below. b. The assistance of the starter manufacturer's Field Service Technician (FST) as described below. Throughout this contract, the Field Service Technician shall be provided by the manufacturer. Special Note: Areas of field testing and commissioning where the work responsibilities are shown as "FST/INTEGRATOR" maybe performed by either the manufacturer's FST or the Integrator (if so authorized by the manufacturer and agreed upon by the Integrator). If the work is authorized to be performed by the Integrator, then such work shall not affect the manufacturer's warranty or transfer the manufacturer's liability to the Integrator. 3, Motor starter tests shall also be coordinated with the following representatives: a. The System Integrator, b. The motor/pump Manufacturer, c. The Engineer, d. The Owner. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-21 B. TESTING PROCEDURES BEFORE MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO THE STARTER(FST ASSISTANCE NOT REQUIRED) 1. Megger the motor leads per Specification 16120. 2. If the starter is powered from a separate feeder, then megger the feeder per Specification 16120. 3, For molded case circuit breakers 100 amps and larger, provide independent testing agency to perform circuit breaker tests as stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. Certify compliance with test parameters. Provide the Engineer a copy of the test results signed by testing agency. 4. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of enclosure and devices. Remove and replace damaged units with new. 5, Connect power, control, instrumentation, and communication L.VLIVU4LVLJ LV L31V 111V LV3 JL4l L.l. V VLILy LLI\. IL1Ll.�l1L�' Vl Gll connections. 6. Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials from enclosure. 7. Completely wipe down and vacuum enclosure. C. ENGAGING THE FST AT THE JOBSITE PRIOR TO ENERGIZATION Engage an FST to be present when energizing or commissioning motor starters. Under the direction of the FST, the following minimum tests shall be performed, documented, and dated by the FST. These documents will be provided as a part of the MCC or Motor Starter Sections of the O&M Manual. The FST shall: 1. Check connections and device mounting for proper torque. 2. Check alignment of plug-in devices with stationary parts. 3. Check operating mechanisms for binding, lubrication, etc. 4. Verify that all pilot lights are LED type. Replace if not. City of Kent 040 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-22 �. Verify that analog meters are scaled roughly two times the motor's FLA. 6. Test the validity of the control, instrumentation, and communication circuits. 7. Test all breakers for proper physical movement and door interlocking. Repair or replace as required. 8. Set the motor protection values for the specific motors being controlled. 9. Verify the drive's initial minimum and maximum speed ranges per the table in Section 2.6F. 10. Set the acceleration and deceleration rates per the tables in Section 2.5 and Section 2.6, FACTORY SETTINGS, for RVSS and VFD units respectively. 11. The EST shall energize the starter, D. SERVICES OF THE FST/INTEGRATOR AT THE JOBSITE AFTER ENERGIZATION The FSTANTEGRATOR shall: 1, Verify motor rotation and direction. Coordinate this work with the pump/motor manufacturer. Wiring corrections shall be made by the Contractor. 2. Test the starter protection circuits. 3. Test the starter RESET control. 4. Test the starter for proper operation and functionality per design, Verify manual and automatic speed controls and transfers. 5. In coordination with the pump or blower manufacturer, the Owner, and the Engineer, run VFD-controlled motors through their minimum and maximum speed ranges. Identify the frequencies at which the motor speeds cause excessive resonant frequency vibrations (as detemiured by the pump/blower manufacturer). Identify the frequencies just above and below the resonant City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16420-23 frequency and program the VFD drive to lock out the band of frequencies in between (the "notch frequencies"). Perform this task for each resonant frequency. Document the lower and upper frequencies of the lockout bands. 6. Test the starter network communications and ftmctionality with associated PLC or network controller. Coordinate this work with the System Integrator. 7. Test all starter digital and analog I/O connectivity, functionality, and scaling with the PLC, whether hardwired or networked. Coordinate this work with the System Integrator. 8. Test starter cooling fan circuits. 9. Test minimum and maximum speeds. 10. Correct malfunctioning traits on site where possible and retest to dernonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new E. ADJUSTMENTS AND STARTER PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION BY THE FST/INTEGRATOR 1. The FST/INTEGRATOR shall provide adjustments, calibrations, and final settings for RVSS units, VFD drives, and Motor Overcurrent Protective (MOP) devices as required to meet design intent and process requirements and make all necessary adjustments and calibrations as required to provide acceptable motor starting and operational performance. Motor nameplate data shall be provided to the EST by the Contractor. 2. The FST/INTEGRATOR shall provide the final OCPD breaker trip setting for the motor circuit being protected. 3. The FST/INTEGRATOR shall document all such adjustments and calibrations in a table similar to that shown below (as a minimum) and initial and date each final setting. This table shall be submitted to Engineering for approval and acceptance. All Status "As Left" conditions must be checked off as "OK" before completion. The final table shall be provided as a part of the MCC or Motor Starter Sections of the 0&M Manual. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station GAO #16627 16420-24 .................................................__._... Parameter Adjusted Value ._._,_.,........._._........................................ Ref. Status Test Performed No Parameter Description 4 L' � "As Left" Date/Time By (Initials) 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. DEMONSTRATION OF FULLS' FUNCTIONAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1. Provide all testing required to demonstrate complete functionality for all motor/motor starter systems including speed control, speed notching, manual and auto control, motor acceleration and deceleration, upper and lower speed limits (in manual and auto modes), and motor protection. 2. Cycle power to each starter while then motors are running. Provide a minimum of two cycle tests per motor/starter. B. TRAINING I. The FST shall provide basic starter operation training immediately following commissioning. 2. The FST shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of training 30 to 90 days after commissioning (time defined by Owner). The training shall demonstrate FVNR, RVSS, and VFD controller operation and troubleshooting to the Owner's operators and maintenance personnel. Include training related to equipment operation and maintenance procedures. 3. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice. 3.7 CLEANING Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and rears of finish to match original fresh. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION ** City of Bent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16420-25 SECTION 16440 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of lighting, power, and distribution panelboards, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding and Bonding 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. A. PRODUCT DATA For each type ofpanelboard, accessory item, and component specified. B. SIIOP DRAWINGS For panelboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following: 1. Enclosure type and mounting,. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings, 3. Short-circuit current rating ofpanelboard. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16440-1 C. PANELBOARD SCHEDULES For installation in panelboards and inclusion in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Submit final versions prior to closeout of project. D. MAINTENANCE DATA For panelboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: A. REFERENCED STANDARDS 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. NEMA PB 1, Panelboards. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 50, Standard for Safety Cabinets and Boxes. b. 67, Standard for Safety Panelboards. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. All panelboards associated with a project shall be the same manufacturer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16440-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution& Control Div. 2. Eaton, Cutler-Harmner. 3, Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. 2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION Standards: NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, UL 50, UL 67, B. RATINGS 1, Bus current, voltage, number of phases, and number of wires as shown on the Plans. 2. Short Circuit Fault Rating a. 250 Vac or Less 10 kAIC minimum short circuit rating or as indicated on the Plans, whichever is the greater. b. 600 Vac or Less 14 kAIC minimum short circuit rating or as indicated on the Plans, whichever is the greater. 3. Service Entry Equipment rated when indicated on the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 416627 16440-3 C. BUS BARS 1. Main Bus Bars a. Plated drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity sized to limit temperature rise to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. b. Drilled and tapped and arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. 2. Ground Bus a. Ground bus shall be full size (100 percent) rated unless shown otherwise on the Plans. b. Ground bus shall be bonded to the box. C. Provide additional isolated ground bus when indicated on the Plans. d. Compression type connectors. 3. Neutral Bus Bars a. Insulated, full size (100 percent) rated tuiless shown otherwise on the Plans. b. Compression type connectors. D. CONSTRUCTION 1. Interiors shall be factory assembled and designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent unit and without removing the main bus connectors. 2. Multi-Section Panelboards a. Feed-through or sub-feed lugs. 3. Main Lugs a. Compression type approved for copper and aluminum. City of Kent 640 Zonc Boostcr Station G&O#16627 16440-4 E. ENCLOSURES 1. Panelboard Mounted Integral to MCC a. Trims supplied with hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. b. Doors on Panelboard front, with concealed hinges, secured with corrosion resistant chrome-plated flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike. C. Nominal 20-inch wide by 5-3/4-inch deep with gutter space in accordance with NEC. d. Clear plastic cover for directory card on the inside of each door. e. Rated NEMA 1. F. SEP�.'ICE CnrTTDN7LTTT `ADDDC`'AL Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect. l. Future Devices Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices. 2.3 OVERCURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. MAIN OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE 1. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker, NEMA AB 1, handle lockable. 2. Vertical mounting unless stated otherwise in the Plans. B. BRANCH OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES I. Shall be bolt-on molded case circuit breakers City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G o#I6627 16440-5 2. The minimum breaker size shall be 15 Arnp unless stated otherwise on the Plans. 3. Characteristics a. Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated on the Plans. b. Fault current rating as defined herein and as indicated on the Plans. C. Where branch circuit breakers are shown on the Plans to be GFCI the GFCI shall be Class A (5 mA), sometimes called a "Personal Protection" GFCI. 4. Application Listing a. Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 5. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger a. Trip units shall be interchangeable within frame size. 6. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger a. Field-adjustable short-time and continuous current settings. 7. Circuit breakers, under 200 A a. Thermal-magnetic, trip-free, non-interchangeable, non- adjustable. S. Lugs a. Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for copper conductors of number and size indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16440-6 Setup, adjust and fasten in place flush trim anduiteriors. Install circuit breakers as shown on the "Panelboard Schedule" for each panelboard. Record all circuit breaker installation deviations from the "Panelboard Schedule" and show on the Record Drawings the actual size and pole position of all circuit breakers installed. Do not remove knockouts for breaker positions unless a breaker is to be installed (reference EXTRA MATERIALS, UNUSED CIRCUITS in this Section). Where twistouts or knockouts are removed in error, provide a circuit breaker (one pole, 20-ampere) to fill each position removed. A. MOUNTING HEIGHTS Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. B. MOUNTING Dl.....1. a-A .. .,:a ..,:rl....,r ,7:�r,..r:,.., ,.f1.,.., nR.,...,r fl-A, .. ..011......-.7� . .0..... ...... ..5... ............ ...�....�,.... .,. .,.,n. .11.,1...0 uniformly flush with wall finish. Provide spacers of neoprene or fiberglass to shim out from irregular surfaces or from damp surfaces. C. CIRCUIT DIRECTORY Prepare neatly typewritten panelboards directories in the same pole sequence as the panelboard stamping. Send a copy to the Owner for his records. Prior to typing the final directories, verify room and equipment names and numbers with the Owner and modify circuit descriptions of areas/spaces to conform with the Owner's desires. Obtain approval before installing. D. PROVISION FOR FUTURE CIRCUITS Install panelboards in such a manner as to leave access to the box, building chases, knockouts, etc, for future circuit additions. Place conduit in the rear line of knockouts where possible. Install spare conduits from flush- mounted panels up to accessible spaces. E. WIRING IN PANELBOARD GUTTERS Rim neatly parallel and perpendicular to enclosure. Arrange conductors into groups, and bundle and wrap with wire ties. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16440-7 3.2 IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Section 16050. Label each panelboard with engraved laminated-plastic or metal nameplates mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.3 GROUNDING Connect equipment grounding conductors to ground bus, except for circuits requiring isolated grounding. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus as indicated. 3.4 CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1, Make insulation-resistance tests of each panelboard bus, component, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. 2. Make continuity tests of each circuit. B. TESTING AGENCY Provide services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing. C. TESTING 1. Prior to Energization Provide third party breakers testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16440-8 Perform visual and mechanical inspection of panelboard, bus, and breakers. Check connections and mounting for proper torque. Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials. Completely wipe down and vacuum panelboard. 2. After Energization After electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.6 ADJUSTING Cc, F.c14 ,.,1:..,.�..l.l,. ,.._.:t�L.,.,. --A ,.:....,.:t 4..,...1,�..a..:... .........�,. ,.,. :...,1:�,.a.,,l JL 11LiLLL-0.LL�LLJ Lp VIt, JW ILV L1liJ 0.11LL Vll VLL1L'V11.6111i1 Ll lnl 1QL1�,VJ 0.J .1 u,1 ao u. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16440-9 SECTION 16442 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of motor control equipment rated 600 V and less. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 16941 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16420 Motor Controllers 16940 Control Panels 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA For each type of motor control center, accessory item, and component specified. B. SHOP DRAWINGS Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices,major features, and voltage rating. hiclude the following: 1. Enclosure type, wiring type. 2. Bus configuration, voltage and current ratings for horizontal bus and each separate vertical bus. 3. Short-circuit current ratings. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. 5. Elevation drawing with dimensions. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-1 6. Identification of units and their location in the MCC. 7. Bill of Materials for each control unit. 8. Wiring diagrams for power distribution circuits. 9. Elementary wiring diagrams for each motor starter including wire numbers, terminal connectivity to contactors, relays, and drive modules. Clearly show field wiring termination points and numbering. 10. Nameplate schedules. C. FIELD TEST REPORTS Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D AIA TTTTETT A TTlU T A T A V \(1lVli Li VAlll For components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. E. LOAD-CURRENT AND OVERLOAD-RELAY HEATER LIST Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. Motor control centers must be factory assembled and wired as completed units by the manufacturer, except where shipping splits are required for shipping of the units. This requirement pertains to control wiring, PLC wiring, and similar wiring within the centers and/or to the "MCC side" of terminal blocks or terminal strips within the centers. Use of a third party to assembly and/or wire the centers is not permitted. A. SOURCE LIMITATIONS Obtain similar motor-control devices through one source from a single manufacturer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-2 B. PRODUCT SELECTION FOR RESTRICTED SPACE Plans indicate maximum dimensions for motor-control centers, including clearances between motor-control centers and adjacent surfaces and items, and are based on types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' motor- control centers with equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect motor control center during construction fi-om moisture, dust, abrasion, or other damage or disfigurement, using plastic sheeting, kraft paper, space heaters, or other appropriate means. Field repair of material or equipment made defective by improper storage is not acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Siemens 2. Eaton; Cutler Hammer 2.2 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER FABRICATION A. RATINGS 1. 600 V class, 3-phase, 60 hertz with operating voltage and number of wires as indicated on the Plans. 2. Bus bracing short circuit fault current rating: as indicated on the Plans. B. ENCLOSURES 1. Free-standing, totally enclosed, metal-clad stricture. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16442-3 2, Sections nonninally 20-inches wide by 20-mches deep by 90-inches high, bolted together to form a continuous assembly. 3, Suitable for mounting against a wall or back-to-back with other electrical units and not requiring rear or side access. 4. Designed to easily extend at either end with similar vertical structures. 5. Provide channel sills where indicated. 6. Enclosure NEMA 250, Type as indicated on the Plans. C. WIRING NEMA ICS 3, Class 11, Type B. ,.upper .,A..,.t,.... ATn 1 A AAATl_ ,. wiias.x�.wi, ivv. .� �ry� iine.minnLiini size for control wiring, No. 12 AWG minimum size for power wiring. 2, 600 volt rated MTW thermoplastic insulation. Insulation color as follows: a. Red for control circuits internally energized b. Yellow for control circuits externally energized C. Black for power wiring d. White for all grounded conductors e. Blue for do conductors. D. WIREWAYS Continuous both vertically and horizontally. 1. Accessible from the front of the center. 2. Completely isolated from bus compartments and adjacent sections. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 416627 16442-4 3. Vertical wireways adjacent to the slide-in units in each section, but accessible through a separate hinged door running the fidl height of each section between horizontal wireways. 4, Horizontal wireways at both top and bottom, each intersecting the vertical wireways of every section. E. BUSING 1. Material Tin plated copper. 2. Main Horizontal Bus a. Ampacity 600 amperes RMS tin plated copper unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. b. The main horizontal bus shall be at the top or the center, continuous without splices, except where shipping splits are required. Provide splice bars and hardware for shipping splits. Access to the horizontal bus is by removable barriers. C. Extend the main horizontal bus the full length of the MCC with provisions for splicing additional sections to either end. d. Lug connections to the bus are bolted. 3. Vertical Buses a. Ampacity Sized for maximum load on vertical section. 300 amperes RMS tin plated copper minimum. b. Securely bolted to the main horizontal bus with connections easily accessible for maintenance. C. Completely isolated and insulated by means of a barrier. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16442-5 d. Continuous fi-om the top of the section to the lowest unit opening possible in the section. e, Lug connections to the bus are bolted. 4. Ground Bus a. Ampacity Tin plated copper, 50 percent of the RMS ampacity of the main horizontal bus. 300 amperes RMS minimum. b. Extend the full length of the MCC with provisions for splicing additional sections to either end. C. Copper ground bus at the bottom of the center, mechanically and electrically connected to each vertical structure. LL. V V VILLV SrV U11U lUs I:VlIl144llV IlJ. e. Lug connections to the bus are bolted. 5. Bracing a. Short circuit fault current rating: as indicated on the Plans. b. Bracing designed to avoid accumulation of dirt, lint, etc., on supports between phases. C. Supports are moisture-resistant, non-carbonizing and non- tracicing. d. Bracing designed to avoid accumulation of dirt, lint, etc. on supports between phases. 6. Barriers a. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers and a barrier cover below the vertical bus to protect the ends of the bus from contact with items entering the bottom of the enclosure. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 t 6442-6 F. SECTION UNITS FOR MOTOR CONTROL 1. Units consist of protective/disconnect devices, magnetic starters, control power transformers, control units, pilot lights, relays, terminal blocks and associated wiring mounted on a metal slide-in structure of a modular size. 2. Units of equal rating are interchangeable within the center structure and from center to center. 3. Unit components do not protrude into or restrict wireways. 4. Unit barriers isolate each unit from adjacent units, vertical bus and horizontal bus. 5. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights are mounted on the draw-out compartment;but they are visible and operable externally through gasketed, die-cut openings in the unit door. Provide an external reset mechanism for overload relays on the unit door. 6. Plug-in contacts for bus connection of the units are silver plated, free-floating but captive in an insulating block and easily replaceable. The unit plug-in arrangement is completely self- aligning and fail-safe against accidental short or ground. Each plug-in control unit is retained in the structure. T Short-circuit protective devices in combination starters and branch circuit protective devices have an external operator. This operator is interlocked with the door so that the circuit must be de-energized before the door can be opened and the device cannot be closed with the door open. A semi-concealed interlock defeat mechanism is provided. 8. The lugs compartment does not interfere with routing of control or power wiring nor interrupt the vertical wireway in the vertical section where it is installed. 9, Locate units as indicated on Plans. Do not revise locations, layout, or number of sections of center from that shown on Plans. G. IDENTIFICATION 1, Provide a main nameplate for each center, 2" x 10" nninimurn size with 1/2-inch engraved letters. Nameplate is Lamacoid or equal City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-7 plastic laminate or engraved metal plate. Lettering is white; backgrounds are black. No abbreviations are permitted unless approved by the Owner. Engraving is subject to the Owner's approval. 2. Lugs [Main Breaker] compartment is identified by a l" x 4" nameplate engraved "MAIN LUGS [BREAKER] COMPARTMENT." 3. Each unit door and each slide-in unit shall has a permanently attached, engraved nameplate: 3/8 of an inch letter unless otherwise shown. 4. Provide legend plates for all cover-mounted control devices, including pilot lights, selector switches and pushbuttons. Engraving is subject to the Owner's approval. 5. Provide nameplates for all relays, tuners, transformers, fuses, terminal blocks, and switches mounted internally to the unit. Ti.........1..M,. .. ,. T .. ,.:,1 -:--A A_ ,...,.1,. ..F ivui u.Yiuv .o cu , i.uuia�viu ou.i.0 iv cup, o"ui�, u u�.v �.�. cu wiu�u uii,y refer. Engrave as indicated for the device on the elementary wiring diagrams. 6. Identify conductors at each tenidnation by yellow sleeve wire markers of the heat-shrink or stretch-on type with indelible black letters and numbers at each termination or splice. a. The manufacturer's standard internal wiring may be numbered per NEMA or manufacturer's standard. H. FINISH Ferrous parts are cleaned, rustproofed and finished with light gray baked enamel. Manufacturer's standard gray colors or accents are acceptable. 2.3 PROTECTIVE AND CONTROL DEVICES A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS MEET NEMA STANDARD AB-1 I, Maui breakers: molded case units with solid state long and short time trip circuits individually and separately adjustable for both time and pickup. Four wine systems have ground trip units. Provide two normally open individual dry auxiliary contacts, rated 10 A at City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 916627 16442-8 250 Vac, that open when the breaker is tripped or manually opened; closed when the breaker is closed. 2. Feeder breakers: molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip, adjustable for magnetic pickup. Provide two normally open individual dry auxiliary contacts, rated 10 A at 250 Vac, that open when the breaker is tripped or manually opened; closed when the breaker is closed. 3. Motor circuit breakers: magnetic only trip with adjustable trip setting. Provide two normally open individual dry auxiliary contacts, rated 10 A at 250 Vac, that open when the breaker is tripped or manually opened; closed when the breaker is closed. 4. Branch circuit breakers: molded case, thermal-magnetic trip, trip-free with non-interchangeable, non-adjustable trip unless otherwise noted. 5. Breakers meet the integrated equipment rating required for the available short circuit current at the equipment in which they are used. 6. All breakers provided in MCC shall be coordinated with respect to their trip points by the MCC manufacturer. B. MOTOR STARTERS MEET NEMA STANDARD ICS 1. Motor starters shall not include intrinsically safe areas or circuits. Intrinsically safe areas shall be located fit electrical enclosures other than the MCC. Where a field device directly associated with the starter requires an intrinsically safe interface,provide the power to the intrinsically safe circuit from the starter. In this manner, if power is lost to the control panel but the starter is still operable, then the field device and its associated intrinsic interface shall also remain operable. 2, Complete with three overload units of the melting alloy or bimetal type. The overload units are manual reset type. 3. Starter sizes as stated by NEMA, no half or third sizes or IEC devices or ratings are allowed. Minimum size NEMA 1. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-9 4. 600 volt rated, three-pole with 120 Vac control power and 120 Vac coils. 5. Provide three normally open/normally closed(Form C) dry auxiliary contact sets,rated 10 A at 250 Vac, on each starter as a minimum. a. Provide additional auxiliary contact sets as required or indicated for specified functionality and interface with control systems. C. MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTION AND CONTROL DEVICES 1. Fuses Power fuses, Class RK-5 silver element. Control fuses, Busman FNQ or equal. 2. Power Monitor Metering 1\1111111V 1. Jl.l.11V 111VlT V, l�Vll'r V110.111i1J. 3. Surge Protection As noted on the Plans. 4. Pilot Devices: Reference Section 16940. 5. Control Relays: Reference Section 16940, 6. Time Delay Relays: Reference Section 16940, 7. Interval Timers: Reference Section 16940. 8. Running Time Meters Eagle Signal six digit non-reset or equal. 9. Ammeters Sized for approximately two tunes the Full Load motor Amps (FLA), t2 percent accuracy, 3-1/2 to 4 inch size, GE "Big Look" or equal, Simpson, Weston, or Crompton. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-10 10. Current Transformers One percent accuracy at burden and lead length as installed. G.E., Midwest, or Westinghouse. 11. Current Monitor Reference Section 16940. 2.4 OTHER MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MOUNTED EQUIPMENT Sections may contain units, equipment or devices other than motor starters such as transformers, panelboards, power factor correction capacitors, metering equipment, or similar devices or equipment. These items are standard products of the same manufacturer as the center and meet the requirements of the specification sections for those items. Units, equipment, and devices are factory mounted in the center. Locate units, equipment and devices as indicated on Plans. Do not revise locations or layout of center from that shown on Plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Install motor control centers and accessory items according to NEMA iCS. A. MOUNTING 1. Level, plumb and rigid without distortion of enclosure. 2, Install on floor or pad level within f1/8 of an inch in a square yard. 3. Shim with stainless steel shins where necessary. 4. Bolt units to the floor with 3/8 of an inch stainless steel epoxied anchors and bolts or weld to embedded steel chamnels. 5. Grout or caulk enclosure to floor or pad. B. CONDUIT CONNECTIONS 1. Provide bushings on conduits entering from above or at the sides. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-11 2. Provide grounded insulating bushings bonded to the ground bus or pad on conduits entering from below. C. WIRING IN WIREWAYS Arrange conductors into groups, and bundle and wrap with wire ties. D. Prior to energization, remove bracing, packing materials, tape on movable parts, etc. as necessary. Check for damage to enclosure, cracked porcelain, chipped bushings, etc. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Section 16050. 3.3 GROUNDING Connect equipment grounding conductors to ground bus, except for circuits Provide ground continuity to facility electrical ground system as indicated. 3.4 CONNECTIONS Clean splice plates with Stoddard's Solvent before assembling. Assemble all shipping splits. Tighten bus splices, electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. Check factory connections for proper torque. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. The manufacturer shall make insulation-resistance tests of each motor control center bus, component, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16442-12 2. The manufacturer shall make continuity tests of each circuit. B. TESTING AGENCY Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality-control testing. C. TESTING 1. Prior to Energization Provide third party breakers testing per Specification 16050, Section 3. After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers, perform visual and mechanical inspection of enclosure and devices. Check connections and mounting for proper torque. Remove any burrs, filings, or other foreign materials from enclosure. Completely wipe down and vacuum enclosure. 2. After Energization After electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.6 ADJUSTING Tighten all structural connections, barriers, racking mechanisms, etc. Check alignment of plug-in devices with stationary parts. Check operating mechanisms for binding, lubrication, etc. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. Check continuity and phase uniformity from unit to unit and for all control or metering circuits. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-13 3.7 CLEANING Vacuum equipment clean after installation; remove metal cuttings with a magnet or suitable means before assembling equipment; wipe insulating supports, bushings, etc., with a clean lint-free cloth; clean debris, shavings, etc., from breakers, bus, switches, relays, and similar components before startup. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16442-14 SECTION 16460 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of dry-type distribution and specialty transformers rated 1000 V and less. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. A. PRODUCT DATA Submit the following: 1. Nameplate ratings 2, Mounting methods 3. Dimensioned plans, sections, elevation views and minimum clearances B. WIRING DIAGRAMS Submit manufacturer's wiring diagrams and clearly identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field-installed wiring. C. FIELD TEST REPORTS Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3. D. MAINTENANCE DATA Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16460-1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide transformers by one the following: �. �.uu�i-ueixuuwnwuwu B. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. C. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. D. Square D; Groupe Schneider, 2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types and sizes specified, designed for 60-Hz service. B. CORES Grain-oriented, nonaging silicon steel. C. COILS Continuous copper windings without splices, except for taps. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16460-2 D. INTERNAL COIL CONNECTIONS Brazed or pressure type. E. ENCLOSURE Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed. F. SOUND LEVELS Manufacturer shall guarantee not to exceed the following: 1. Up to 9 kVA: 40 dB. 2. 10 to 50 kVA: 45 dB. G. EFFICIENCY Ventilated, dry type, 15 kVA and larger: Energy efficient meeting DOE 2016 requirements. 2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561,. A. CORES One leg per phase. B. WINDINGS One coil per phase in primary and secondary. C. ENCLOSURE As follows unless otherwise indicated. I. Indoor, ventilated. D. INSULATION CLASS 185 or 220 degrees C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 degrees C class for transformers larger than 15 kVA. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O #16627 16460-3 1. Rated Temperature Rise 150 degrees C maximum rise above 40 degrees C for 220 degrees C class insulation; 115 degrees C maximum rise for 185 degrees C class insulation. E. TAPS For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full-capacity taps in high-voltage windings are as follows: 1. Taps, 3 through 25 kVA Two 5-percent taps below rated high voltage. 2. Taps, 25 through 500 kVA Six 2.5-percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high voltage. ` A !� XTTRol 4NT" CCTf XT Ar mn A ATCCI:l I)nrl c�na • 1. 11 \VL (V,D SIG 1\(1L 11\ U,S .' l \J A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are fisted and labeled as complying with UL 506. B. RATINGS Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by 50 percent rninimurn. C. DESCRIPTION Self-cooled, 2 windings. 2.5 FINISHES A. INDOOR UNITS Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and pruner. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Design and routine factory tests comply with referenced standards. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16460-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Comply with safety requirements of IEEE C2. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. if manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B, 3.2 GROUNDING Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near the transformer. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test to ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Docutnents, and is suitable for energizing. A. TESTS Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness,mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2, Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. 3. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding to winding and winding to ground. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16460-5 B. TEST FAILURES Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ADJUSTING After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization egnnp.:.,,.., uuvusii M iiviuiai vp,iuiuib 'y,W vi iaCHRy. i,wuiu Yiuualy ailu secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kcnt 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16460-6 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This work specified in this Section covers interior lighting devices, including luminaires, lamps, and power supplies, along with lighting accessories and controls; as well as luminaire mounting, installation, lamping, and testing. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BALLAST The power circuit of a gas-discharge (fluorescent, HID, etc.) lamp. Ballasts are either inductive or electronic. B. COLOR RENDERING INDEX (CRI) A figure-of-merit adopted by the Department of Energy that quantifies the color accuracy of lighting devices compared to incandescent light. CRT is normalized such that a score of 100 represents the output of an incandescent lamp. C. COLOR TEMPERATURE The color of the light produced by a particular lighting device, measured in kelvin. A higher kelvin temperature results in a"cooler" blue light, while lower kelvin temperatures are "warmer," and more orange. D. DIFFUSER A modifier placed in front of a lamp to change the light intensity and distribution. Part of a LUMINAIRE. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-1 E. DRIVER The power circuit of an LED LAMP. May be part of a luminaire, or integrated into the lamp itself. F. EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE A LUMINARE intended to automatically supply illumination to critical areas in the event of failure of the normal supply. G. ENGINE See DRIVER fit this section. H. EXIT LIGHT An illuminated sign or LUMINAIRE intended to indicate the path of egress. An exit light may or may not be an EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE. 1. GAS-DISCHARGE LAMP General category of lamps that produce light by discharge of electricity through ionized gas. Types include Fluorescent and High-Intensity Discharge (HID). Powered by a BALLAST. J. LAMP The part of a LUMINAIRE that produces light. K. LED LAMP A lamp that uses Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to produce useful light. Powered by a DRIVER. L. LUMEN MAINTENANCE FACTOR The percent of the rated lumen output of a lamp still available after a specified period of time. A lamp capable of only half of its original output after will have a lumen maintenance factor of0.50 or L50. May be used to specify the performance of a lamp after a particular number of hours, or the number of hours of operation at a particular level. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#t6627 16510-2 M. LUMINAIRE A complete lighting device, exit light, or emergency lighting device. Luminaires consist of one or more LAMPS mounted in a fixture, along with DRIVERS or BALLASTS to power them, and lenses or diffusers to provide the correct lighting distribution. N. PHOTOCELL A control device that switches a lighting circuit in response to ambient light level. 1.4 REFERENCES All applicable ANSI and UL standards. IES LM-79, LM-80, TM-21. NFPA 70 [NEC] (latest edition, with Washington State Amendments). Washington State Energy Code (latest edition). Washington State Administrative Code [WAC] (current edition). International Building Code (latest edition, with Washington State Amendments), 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. For each required product, submit data sheets with detailed descriptions of the product to be purchased. Identify each data sheet with the corresponding entry on the Lighting Schedule or Bill of Materials. Where data sheets offer a range of options and accessories, mark or highlight each selection, along with all final part numbers. A. Submit on each luminaire in the Lighting Schedule. Submittal shall contain the following information, as a minimum: 1. Manufacturer and part number. 2. Product dimensions and weight. 3. Product environmental rating (NEMA rating). 4. Electrical ratings: a. Voltage, Current, and Power h. Power factor C. Efficacy City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-3 5. Lighting metrics: a. Lumen output b. Lumen maintenance factor at 25,000 hours c. Color temperature d. Color Rendering Index (CRI) C. Lighting distribution 6. Regulatory approvals and certifications, including NRTL listing 7. Battery and charging data (if applicable). B. Submit on all lighting controls (switches, photocells, occupancy sensors, etc.). Submittal shall contain the following information, as a minimum: 1. Manufacturer and part number. 2. Product dimensions and weight. .�. U vuonm�en*al rating k1v EPJ,�,raiuig). 4. Electrical ratings (Voltage, Current, and Power). 5. Regulatory approvals, certifications, and labels. 6. Wiring diagrams showing both factory- and field-installed wiring for the specific application in this Project. Differentiate between factory- and field-installed wiring. C. Submit maintenance data for luminaires and lighting controls in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 01300. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware, and trim with all other items to be mounted on the ceiling, and all reserved or classified areas, including work of other trades. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16510-4 1.8 WARRANTY A. WARRANTY 1. The manufacturer shall warrant the materials and workmanship of all luminaires for a minimum of 2 years from the time of Substantial Completion. 2. The warranty shall be comprehensive and shall include all components included in the lmninaire package. 3, If during the warranty period the manufacturer refuses to honor a claim due to the actions of the contractor, the contractor shall replace all affected items at no cost to the owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc.; Holophane, Lithonia 2. Eaton Corp. 3. GE Lighting 4. OSRAM Sylvania, Inc. B. "OR EQUAL" PRODUCTS Luminaires shall be the products specified in the Lighting Schedule in the Plans, or equal. Substitute products shall: 1. Use the same lighting technology(LED, Fluorescent, etc.) as the specified luminaire, 2. Have the same lumen output, color temperature, CRI, and IES distribution, 3, Not have an input wattage greater than 110% of the specified luminaire, and, City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-5 4. Have the same environmental ratings. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. POWER 1, Luminaires shall be powered at the voltage specified in the Lighting Schedule. 2. Power supplies, including ballasts, drivers, and transformers, shall be self-contained within luminaires. B. QUALITY 1. MANUFACTURER LABELS AND MARKINGS The exterior of lenses and diffusers shall have no visible logos, labels, trademarks, or monograms. 2. METAL PARTS Metal parts shall be free from burrs, scratches, and sharp corners and edges. 3. TRANSMITTING AND REFLECTING SURFACES Luminaires shall be provided and installed with all transmitting and reflecting surfaces required to produce the same distribution as the luminaires used as the basis of design, as shown fit the Lighting Schedule. 4. FINISH Provide manufacturer's standard finish, except where otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer. Finish shall be free from streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and other defects. C. MAINTENANCE ACCESS Any parts of luminaires not subject to the manufacturer's warranty shall be accessible for maintenance and owner-replaceable. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-6 i D. UV RADIATION LED Luminaires shall not emit UV radiation E. WET LOCATION LUMINAIRES Unless otherwise stated in the Plans, luminaires installed in wet locations shall be rated: 1. NEMA 3R where not subject to splashing or hose-directed water. Contractor shall provide all materials required to obtain labeled environmental ratings. F. FUSED LUMINAIRES Provide fused luminaires for applications: 1. Installed more than eight feet above the floor, 2. Powered by 277 V circuits, or, 3. Where required by code. Install a listed fuse and fuse holder approved for the application by the luminaire manufacturer. G. EMERGENCY LUMINAIRES All emergency luminaires shall be UL 924 listed. Additionally, emergency luminaires located in classified areas shall be UL 844 listed. Emergency luminaires shall have the following features: 1, Self-contained internal battery, rated to provide a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency level illumination in the event of a power failure. Power conductors to emergency luminaires shall not be switched. Emergency luminaires may have switched conductors in addition to the power conductors. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O#16627 16510-7 H. EXIT LIGHTS All exit lights shall be UL 924 listed, and shall have the following features: 1. Internal illumination, always on. 2. Illuminated arrow indicating direction of egress, 3, Self-contained internal battery, rated to provide a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency level illumination in the event of a power failure. 4. 120VAC input power unless stated otherwise on the Plans. Power conductors to exit lights shall not be switched. 2.3 LIGHTING TECHNOLOGIES Each luminaire shall use the technology specified in the lighting schedule.. A. LED LUMINAIRES LED Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 (Luminaires) and UL 8750 (LED Equipment for Use in Lighting Products). 1. Drivers LED Drivers shall be manufacturer approved for the specific model of luminaire to be installed. Drivers shall meet the following specifications: a. UL 8750 listed. b. Certified by NRTL acceptable to the State of Washington. c. Compliant with FCC Part 15, Class A. d. Power Factor: greater than 0,90. Q. Supply circuit THD: less than 10%. f Temperature Rating: -20 to +40 degrees Celsius. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#16627 16510-8 i 2. Lamps LED Lamps shall be an integral part of the luminaire, and rated to last the entire design lifetime of the luminaire. LED lamps shall have the following specifications: a. Color Temperature: 4000K, unless otherwise indicated. b. CRI: at least 80 CRI. C. Lamp Life: at least 60,000 hours, L80. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK 1. Coordinate lighting with general electrical work, and with other trades. 2. Locate luminaires outside of classified areas and reserved electrical space, unless explicitly called for by the Plans. 3. Process equipment and piping has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to avoid conflict with the process and maintenance thereof. 4. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment and ductwork has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to avoid conflict with HVAC. 5. Maintenance vehicle access has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to not impede maintenance vehicles. 6. Luminaires shall be mounted parallel to finished floor or grade, with no tilt angle unless explicitly called for by the Plans. T Adjust stem or chain lengths to suit field conditions where indicated mounting heights are not feasible. B. LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS 1. Install luminaires with supports, brackets, and trim recommended by the luminaire manufacturer. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16510-9 2. Bottom of luminaires shall be at the elevation noted in the Plans. 3. Luminaires shall be secured by manufacturer hardware and fasteners. Nails shall not be used to secure luminaires. 4, Supports shall be rated for four times the weight of the luminaire, or 45 kilograms (100 tbs.), whichever is greater. Luminaires weighing more than 23 kilograms (50 tbs.) shall be supported independently from the outlet box. 5. Luminaires shall be supported from building stricture or ceiling framing. Provide additional framing to support luminaires that cannot be directly mounted to structural members. Structural integrity shall not be compromised due to installation of luminaires. 6. Hanging luminaires shall be supported at each quarter point and every eight feet,minimum,by hardware that cannot be dislodged by upward force. Pendants and rods over 120 centimeters long (4o inelies) Shall be braced to limit swinging. 7. Luminaires in grid-type ceilings shall be supported by additional wires at each corner, independently anchored to the structural system above. Wires shall be the same type and size as the wires supporting the grid ceiling structure. 8. Surface-mounted luminaires shall be installed flush and tight to the finished ceiling. Surface-mounted luminaires more than 45-centimeters wide (18 inches) shall be supported at each corner, in addition to the outlet box. C. INSTALLATION METHODS 1. Unless preempted by other work, luminaires shall be installed at the positions and spacings shown on the Lighting Plants). Inform the Engineer of all lighting changes in writing. Plan symbols show the required position of the center of each luminaire, but may be undimensioned. 2. Luminaires in rows or grids shall be installed true to line. Continuous runs of luminaires shall be installed straight and true, with manufacturer's joining hardware. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16510-10 3. Luminaires located in a common area shall be installed at the same level. D. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 1. All luminaires shall be grounded. 2. Each luminaire shall be powered by the circuit and operated by the control device(s) shown on the Plans. 3. All luminaires shall be connected according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 4. All screw terminals shall be torqued to manufacturer's specifications. If no torque values are published by the manufacturer, terminals shall be torqued to values specified in UL 486A. 5. All luminaires (except emergency luminaires and exit luminaires) shall be fitted with NEC 410.130(G)-type luminaire disconnect plugs. Ideal PowerPlug or equal. E. LIGHTING CONTROLS Lighting controls shall be installed according to the Plans. Process areas shall have manual lighting controls. Restrooms, garages, storage rooms, and other enclosed non-process spaces shall have occupancy sensors. F. LAMPING Lamps shall be selected and installed according to the Lighting Schedule and manufacturer's instructions. Test lamp sockets and holders before installing lamps. G. ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS Installation of luminaires shall meet all manufacturer requirements to maintain labeled environmental ratings. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-11 H. CLEANING Thoroughly clean dirt and debris from all internal and external surfaces, Vacuum interior of luminaires after installation. Prior to commissioning, wipe all transmitting and reflecting surfaces with damp cloth. L SAFE DISPOSAL Disposal of lamps and luminaires containing hazardous materials (mercury, etc.) shall comply with state and local rules. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. DAMAGED LUMINAIRES During commissioning, Contractor shall inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Damaged luminaires and components shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. Contractor shall replace any transmitting or reflecting Sur lace that is scratched, shattered, or otherwise darnaged belVre completion of work at no cost to the owner. Metal parts that demonstrate corrosion during the project warranty period shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. Contractor shall provide replacements for any lamps that fail prior to completion of work. B. TESTING Contractor shall demonstrate normal operation of each lurninau e. Contractor shall interrupt electrical power to demonstrate proper operation of emergency luminaires. Malfunctioning luminaires and components shall be repaired or replaced, then tested again. Contractor shall demonstrate each lighting control to show correct operation, and repair or replace malfunctioning controls. ***END OF SECTION*** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16510-12 SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY The work specified in this Section covers exterior lighting devices, including luminaires, lamps, and power supplies; along with outdoor lighting accessories and controls; as well as outdoor mounting hardware, light poles, and accessories; and luminaire mounting, installation, lamping and testing. 1.2 RELATED SPECIFIED ELESEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BALLAST The power circuit of a gas-discharge (fluorescent, HID, etc.) lamp. Ballasts are either inductive or electronic. B. DRIVER The power circuit of an LED Lamp. May be part of a luminaire, or integrated into the lamp itself. C. EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE Any LUMiNAIRE mounted in an OUTDOOR AREA (as defined in Specification Section 16050). D, LAMP The part of a LUMINAIRE that produces light. E. LED LAMP A lamp that uses an array of Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to produce useful light. Powered by a DRIVER. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-1 F. LUMEN MAINTENANCE FACTOR The percent of the rated lumen output of a lamp still available after a specified period of time. A lamp capable of only half of its original output after will have a lumen maintenance factor of 0.50 or L50. G. LUMINAIRE A complete lighting device, exit light, or emergency lighting device. Luminaires consist of one or more LAMPS mounted in a fixture, along with DRIVERS or BALLASTS to power them, and lenses or diffusers to provide the correct lighting distribution. H. PHOTOCELL A control device that switches a lighting circuit in response to ambient light level. 1.4 REFERENCES Ail applicable ANSI standards. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials [AASHTO] UL 844, 924, 935, 1029, 1598, 8750. IES LM-79, LM-80, TM-21. NFPA 70 [NEC] (latest edition, with Washington State Amendments). Washington State Energy Code (latest edition). Washington State Administrative Code [WAC] (current edition). International Building Code (latest edition, with Washington State Amendments). 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. For each required product, submit data sheets with detailed descriptions of the product to be purchased. Identify each data sheet with the corresponding entry on the Lighting Schedule or Bill of Materials. Where data sheets offer a range of options and accessories, mark or highlight each selection, along with all final part numbers. A. Submit on each luminaire in the Lighting Schedule. Submittal shall contain the following information, as a minimum: I. Manufacturer and part number. 2. Product dimensions and weight. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-2 3. Environmental rating (NEMA rating). 4. Electrical ratings: a. Voltage, Current, and Power b. Power factor C. Efficacy 5. Lighting metrics: a. Lumen output b. Lumen maintenance factor c. Color temperature d. Color Rendering Index (CRI) e. Lighting distribution 6. Regulatory approvals, certifications, and labels. B. Submit on all lighting controls (photocells, motion detectors, etc.). Submittal shall contain the following information, as a minimum: 1. Manufacturer and part number. 2. Product dimensions and weight. 3. Enviromnental rating (NEMA rating). 4. Electrical ratings (Voltage, Current, and Power). 5. For luminaires to be mounted on poles: a. Effective Projected Area (EPA) 6. Regulatory approvals, certifications, and labels. 7. Detailed wiring diagrams showing both factory- and field-installed wiring for the specific application in this Project. Differentiate between factory- and field-installed wiring. C. Submit on all light poles. Submittal shall contain the following information as a minimum: 1. Manufacturer and part number. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16520-3 2. Detailed dimensions and weight. 3. Mounting height. 4. Anchor bolt design. 5. Regulatory approvals, certifications, and labels. 6. Color and manufacturer finish. D. Submit maintenance data for luminaires and lighting controls in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 01300. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE See Section 16050. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware, light poles with all other items to be mounted on the exterior of buildings, or on the facility grounds, including the work of other trades. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc.; Holophane, Lithonia 2. Eaton Corp.; Crouse-Hinds, Cooper 3. GE Lighting 4. OSRAM Sylvania, Inc. B. "OR EQUAL"PRODUCTS Luminaires shall be the products specified in the Lighting Schedule in the Plans, or equal. Substitute products shall: City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#,6627 16520-4 l, Use the same lighting technology(LED, Fluorescent, etc.) as the specified luminaire, 2. Have the same lumen output, CRI, and IES distribution, 3. Not have an input wattage greater than 110 percent of the specified luminaire, and, 4. Have the same environmental rating. Light poles shall be the products specified fit the Lighting Schedule in the Plans, or equal. Substitute products shall: l. Have the same dimensions (including weight) as the specified light pole, 2. Have the same mounting height and weight/EPA ratings, 3. Meet the harmonic vibration requirements, and, 4. Have the same finish. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. POWER 1. Luminaires shall be powered at the voltage specified in the Lighting Schedule. 2. Power supplies, including ballasts, drivers, and transformers, shall be self-contained within luminaires. B. QUALITY 1. Manufacturer Labels and Markings The exterior of lenses and diffusers shall have no visible logos, labels, trademarks, or monograms. 2. Metal Parts a. Metal parts shall be free from burrs, scratches, and sharp corners and edges. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station a&O#16627 16520-5 b, Sheet metal components shall be corrosion-resistant aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. Sheet metal shall be formed and supported to prevent warping and sagging. C. Exposed structural metal shall be stainless steel. 3. Reflecting Surfaces Minimum reflectance shall be as follows, except as otherwise indicated: a. White surfaces: 85 percent. b. Specular surfaces: 83 percent. C. Diffusing Specular surfaces: 75 percent. d. Laminated silver metallized film: 90 percent. 4. Transmitting Surfaces Transmitting surfaces (including lenses, diffusers, covers, globes, etc.) shall be 100 percent acrylic plastic or water-white, annealed crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated. a. Plastic High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. b. Lens Thickness Minimum 31nm (1/8 inch), except where greater thickness is specified. 5. Finish Provide manufacturer's standard finish, except where otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer. Finish shall be free from streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and other defects. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 06627 16520-6 C. HOUSING l. Luminaire housings shall be rigidly-formed, light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform with use. 2. Luminaire housings shall have one of the following environmental ratings: a. NEMA 3R where not subject to splashing or hose-directed water. 3. Contractor shall provide all materials required to obtain labeled environmental ratings. D. FUSED LUMINAIRES Provide fused luminaires for applications: I. Installed more than eight feet above the floor, 2. Powered by 277 V circuits, or, 3. Where required by code. Install a listed Ease and fuse holder approved for the application by the lnninaire manufacturer. 2.3 LIGHTING TECHNOLOGIES Each luminaire shall use the technology specified in the lighting schedule. A. FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES Fluorescent luminaires shall conform to UL 1598. 1. Ballasts Fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic instant-start type, approved for the type and combination of lamps to be installed. Multi-lamp ballasts shall continue to operate after the failure of one lamp. Ballasts shall meet the following specifications: a. UL 935, Class P listed. b. Certified by NRTL acceptable to the State of Washington. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-7 C. Compliant with FCC Part 18, Non-Consumer Equipment. d. Sound rating: "A." e. Power Factor: greater than 0.90. f Lamp Flicker: less than 5 percent. g. Input THD: less than 14 percent. It. Temperature rating: -20 to +40 degrees Celsius. 2, Lamps Provide lamps for each fluorescent luminaire. Lamps shall be listed, and shall be of the type and rating approved by the luminaire manufacturer, consistent with the Lighting Schedule. Fluorescent lamps shall have the following specifications: a. Color Temperature: 4100K, unless othenvise indicated. b. CRI: at least 80 CRI. C. Lamp Life: at least 20,000 hours, rated average. B. HIGH-INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LUMINAIRES High-Intensity Discharge luminaires shall conform to UL 1598. 1. Ballasts HID Ballasts shall be electronic type, approved for the chemistry, type, and rating of lamps to be installed. Ballasts shall meet the following specifications: a. UL 1029 listed. b. Certified by NRTL acceptable to the State of Washington. C. Compliant with FCC Part 18, Non-Consumer Equipment. d. Sound rating: "A." e. Power Factor: greater than 90 percent. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-8 f. Input THD: less than 14 percent. g. Temperature rating: -20 to +40 degrees Celsius. 2. Lamps Provide lamps for each HID Luminaire. Lamps shall be listed, and shall be of the chemistry, type, and rating approved by the luminaire manufacturer, consistent with the Lighting Schedule. HID lamps shall have the following specifications: a. Color Temperature: 3600K, unless otherwise noted. b. CRI: at least 70 CRI. C. Lamp Life: at least 10,000 hours, rated average. 3. Other Features a. Luminaire shall block at least 99 percent of HID lamp UV emissions. C. LED LUMINAIRES LED Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 (Luminaires) and UL 8750 (LED Equipment for Use in Lighting Products). LED luminaires shall have a manufacturer warranty of at least two years. 1. Drivers LED Drivers shall be manufacturer approved for the specific model of luininaire to be installed. Drivers shall meet the following specifications: a. UL 8750 fisted. b. Certified by NRTL acceptable to the State of Washington. C. Compliant with FCC Part 15, Class A. d. Power Factor: greater than 0.90. e. Supply circuit THD: less than 10%. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16520-9 f. Temperature Rating: -20 to +40 degrees Celsius. 2. Lamps LED Lamps shall be an integral part of the luminaire, and rated to last the entire design lifetime of the luminaire. LED lamps shall have the following specifications: a. Color Temperature: 4000K, unless otherwise indicated. b. CRI: at least 80 CRI. C. Lamp Life: at least 60,000 hours, L80. 2.4 LIGHT POLES Light poles shall have the design and dimensions specified in the Lighting Schedule. All light poles shall meet current AASHTO standards, and shall be certified by an NRTL acceptable to the State of Washington. A. HAND HOLE All light poles shall have integral hand holes within two feet of the base. 1. The hand hole shall be large enough to accoramodate all electrical connections required by the plans. 2. The hand hole shall have one of the following environmental ratings: a. NEMA 3R where not subject to splashing or hose-directed water. 3. The handhole cover shall be the same material, color, and finish as the light pole. 4. Light pole shall have a grounding terminal, located in the hand hole. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-10 B. COORDINATION The mounting system for the light pole, including the bolt pattern and cable entry, shall be coordinated before pouring the foundation. Coordinate the light pole with the specified luminaires, so that the light pole is fully compatible with the luminaires to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK 1. Coordinate lighting with general electrical work, and with other trades. 2. Locate luminaires outside of classified areas and reserved electrical space, unless explicitly called for by the Plans. 3, Process equipment and piping has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to avoid conflict with the process and maintenance thereof. 4. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment and ductwork has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to avoid conflict with HVAC. 5. Vehicle access has priority over lighting. Luminaires shall be placed to maintain required clearance above right-of-way. 6, Adjust mounting heights to suit field conditions where indicated heights are not feasible. B. LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS 1, Install luminaires with supports, brackets, and trim recommended by the luminaire manufacturer. 2. Luminaires shall be secured by manufacturer hardware. Nails shall not be used to secure luminaires. 3. Luminaires mounted on light poles shall be installed with manufacturer hardware. Luminaires shall be mounted and wired before raising the light pole. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-11 4. Luminaires mounted on building exterior. C. INSTALLATION METHODS 1. Unless preempted by other work, luminaires shall be installed at the positions and spacings shown on the Lighting Plan(s). Inform the Engineer of all lighting changes in writing. Plan symbols show the required position of the center of each luminaire but may be un-dimensioned. 2. Luminaires in rows or grids shall be installed true to line. Continuous runs of luminaires shall be installed straight and true, with manufacturer's joining hardware. 3. Luminaires located in a conunon area shall be installed at the same level. D. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Aii i 7iii iia fires and light poics shall be grOnndcd. 2. Each luminaire shall be powered by the circuit and operated by the control device(s) shown on the Plans. 3. All luminaires shall be connected according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 4. Each light pole shall have a luminaire disconnect, located in the hand hole. The luminaire disconnect shall deenergizc all current- carrying conductors serving the light pole, comply with NEC 410.130 (G), and shall be listed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. DAMAGED HARDWARE During commissioning, Contractor shall inspect each lighting device. Damaged luminaires, supports, and components shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. Contractor shall replace any transmitting or reflecting surface that is scratched, shattered, or otherwise damaged before completion of work at no cost to the owner. Metal parts that demonstrate corrosion during the project warranty period shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-12 Contractor shall provide replacements for any lamps that fail prior to completion of work. B. TESTING Contractor shall demonstrate normal operation of each luminaire. Contractor shall interrupt electrical power to demonstrate proper operation of emergency luminaires. Malfunctioning luminaires and components shall be repaired or replaced, then tested again. Contractor shall demonstrate each lighting control to show correct operation, and repair or replace malfunctioning controls. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16520-13 SECTION 16910 PLC HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PROCUREMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section consists of hardware and software procurement of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) and Operator Interface Units (OIUs). For progranuning requirements, reference specification 13451,. Programming is by Systems Interface, Inc., 10802 471h Avenue West, Mukilteo, WA 98275, (425) 481-1225, Contact: Robert Schommer. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item n i inn o..t.__:....1.. 111VV JUV1111LL4IS 13451 PLC Programming 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.3 REFERENCES Reference Title NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS-1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems ICS-1.1 Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control ICS-4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use ICS-6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems Publication NO 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 V maximum) NFPA National Fire Protection Association NEC National Electric Code 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 1, The system includes racks, central processing units (CPUs), input/output(UO) modules, communication modules, power supplies, OIUs, and associated accessory items to provide a complete and functional process control system for the facility. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16910-1 2. The system includes development and application software required by the PLC and OIU hardware to provide complete operation functionality for the facility. B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Reference Specification Section 13451 for PLC Programming and Process Control Description. 1.5 DEFINITIONS Reference specification 16050. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of Specification Section 01300. B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit an electronic version of the manufacturer's data sheets for hardware components including specific model numbers for each device and size of memory provided in each CPU. 2. Submit an electronic version of the manufacturer's installation and user's manuals. 3. If required by the software manufacturer provide a "runtime" license of the software to the Owner and provide copies of the license agreement to the Owner. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Provide specific information including: a. An electronic version of the manufacturer's published operation and maintenance manual, user's manual, and troubleshooting guide. b. Information for obtaining assistance and troubleshooting, parts ordering information, and field service personnel requests. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16910-2 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS Programmer must have testing hardware and sufficient programming experience to demonstrate operational functionality per Section 2 herein. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. Siemens—no exceptions 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Conform to NEMA ICS L I for installation and application of the PLC system. 2.3 COMPONENTS The PLC CPU, UO, ON, and communication cards shall be provided with the latest version of firmware. A. CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT (CPU) Siemens S7-1500 Series. B. ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT (UO) MODULES Provide modules as defined in the PLC PO tables in the Plans. 1. Analog Input Cards Channels: 4 Input Type: 4-20 mA Resolution: 16 bit or+/-15 bit Differential? Yes City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16910-3 Isolated? Yes 2. Analog Output Cards Channels: 4 Input Type: 4-20 mA Resolution: 16 bit Differential? Yes Isolated? Yes C. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT (FO) MODULES Provide modules as defined in the PLC FO tables in the Plans. Manufacturers other than Allen Bradley shall match the features and performance criteria of the Allen Bradley products listed below: 1. Digital hiput Cards Input Channels; 16 Input Voltage: 24 VDC Signal Polarity: Sinking/Sourcing (configure card for sourcing; +24VDC=true) 2. Digital Output Cards Output Charnels: 16 Output Voltage: 24 VDC Signal Polarity: Sourcing Output Channels; 16 Output Voltage: Relay, Form A D. POWER SUPPLY UNITS 1. For racks using separate power supplies, use the largest power supply available for that specific rack. Input Voltage: 24 VDC E. OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT 1. Provide Operator Interface Units suitable for installation through the control panel door. Every operator interface unit shall meet the following requirements. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16910-4 a. Shall be from the same Manufacturer as the PLC. b. Shall not degrade the environmental rating of the enclosure to which it is installed. For outdoor applications, the OlU shall be provided with a permanently mounted weatherproof cover viewable with the cover closed. C. Shall have a display screen that is 12 inch minimum (measured diagonally). d. Shall have color graphics. e. Shall have a minimum of one 10/100 MB ethemet port and one USB port. f. Shall have a minimum of 512 MB of RAM and 512 MB of storage. b. .�iiai� u�Y�uv,ucu wiui a yuwci �uYtriy ii icttuucu w operate from the same power source as the PLC. 2.4 ACCESSORIES Provide all accessories required, whether indicated or not, for a complete PLC control system to accomplish the requirements of the Plans and Specifications, 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. SHOP TEST L Submit a shop test plan indicating how the test will be conducted, and how equipment operation will be verified. 2, Provide a shop test after factory assembly of the PLC control panel and prior to shipment including the following: a. Conduct a burn-in period (minimum of 2 days) where the system is powered continuously and checked for proper operation and operating temperature. b. Provide sufficient PLC programming to demonstrate PLC 1/0 testing. Include a PC with sufficient software tools to allow visual demonstration of each digital/analog input City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O tt16627 16910-5 status/value and be capable of forcing digital and analog outputs. Coordinate effort with PLC programmer if required(reference Specification Section 13451). C. Utilize dummy I/Os to verify proper operation. d. Demonstrate that all PLC hardware is fully functional. e. Allow for Owner and/or Engineer representatives to witness the shop test. Provide a minimum of 15 days notice prior to test. f. Do not ship the system prior to successful completion of this testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install PLC control system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Test, verify and demonstrate access to and functionality of PLC system. ** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#166z7 16910-6 SECTION 16940 CONTROL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE The work specified in this Section includes control panels [01 CP 01]. [01 CP 01 shall be built and provided by Systems Interface, Inc. 1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section Item 01300 Submittals 13450 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware Division 16 Electrical 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CONTROL PANELS Reference Section 16050. B. CONTROL POWER Control power is considered electrical power at either 120 VAC or 24 VDC that powers control or instrumentation devices. Control power circuits are less than 150 VAC and less than or equal to 20 Amps. Examples: 1. 120 VAC or 24 VDC device power to instruments such as flow meters, chlorine analyzers, dissolved oxygen transmitters, and etc, 2, 120 VAC or 24 VDC device power to control devices such as PLCs, radios, network switches, and etc. 3. 120 VAC power to control devices such as motor operated valves, metering pumps (even when through dedicated receptacles), lighting circuits (controlled within a lighting control panel), and etc. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-1 1.4 REFERENCES Reference Title NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS-1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems 1CS-4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use ICS-6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems Publication No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 V maximum) NFPA National Fire Protection Association NEC National Electric Code JIC-EMP-1 Joint Industrial Council 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. CONTROL PANELS 1, Reference Section 16050, Definitions,, 2. Control panels shall be fabricated similar to those shown on the Plans. With the exception of the discrete and analog UO terminal blocks, the exact dimensions and component layout is not critical, 3. The system includes new control panels for control of process equipment. Some of the control panels are provided under Division 16. Some panels are provided under other Divisions with equipment specified in those Divisions. Control panels, whether provided under Division 16 or other Divisions, shall meet the requirements of this Section. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. See Section 01300. 2. Dimensioned or to-scale panel layout drawings, 3. Materials of construction. 4. Drawings showing conduit and wiring access locations. 5. Elementary wiring diagrams and terminal block drawings, differentiating between panel and field wiring. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-2 6, Bill of Materials describing the reference name or number, quantity, complete English language description, manufacturer, model number, local supplier, and wiring or piping reference. Information shall include manufacturer name, catalog descriptions, wiring and piping diagrams, dimensional plans, anchoring details, installation instruction, and test results. 7, Loop diagrams with all components connected per ISA standards. 8. Nameplate text. 9. Heat calculations and relationship to enclosure fan, heater, air conditioner. 10. UPS system loading and resulting back-up nun time. B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. See Section 01300. n r r__ rr0"vt e man uiacturer's operating and maintenance iiianuials rur each device or item provided. 3. Recormnended spare parts stocking list. C. CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION 1. The Contractor fabricating panels shall submit proof of certification as a UL 508 and/or UL 698A (if required) panel shop. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Make shop drawings available prior to placement of conduits in slabs to ensure placement is coordinated with panel access locations. B. Test panels prior to shipment to project site. 1, The entire assembled panel shall be tested to be free from grounds and shorts. 2. Controllers, circuits, and interlocks shall be tong out and tested to assure that they function correctly before the panel is shipped. Prior to placement of conduit feeds, assure approved control panel layouts are available. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#]6627 16940-3 C. Panels supplied under this Section are provided by a single manufacturer. D. Provide panels labeled by a recognized testing laboratory or otherwise acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and industries meeting the requirements of Article 409 of the NEC. In addition, all completed panels shall be UL listed. E. Revise all drawings upon completion of the work to show `as shipped" condition of the panel. 1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. After completion of shop assembly and testing, enclose panels in heavy-duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from dust and moisture. Place dehumidifiers inside the polyethylene covering. B. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport. Show shipping weight on shipping tags, together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling on job site. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS Reference Specification Section 16050 for spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS 2.1 CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES A. ENCLOSURE BODIES Control panel enclosures are factory UL labeled enclosures fabricated of stretcher leveled steel welded into a rigid, self-supporting structure. Control panels shall be completely enclosed, welded construction, self- supporting, and gasketed dust-tight. 1, Panels mounted outdoors or in below-ground vaults shall be NEMA 4X 316L stainless steel. Exception: Unless indicated otherwise in the Plans. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16940-4 2. Panels mounted indoors shall be NEMA 1 gasketed. Exception: • Unless indicated otherwise in the Plans. B. HINGES AND HINGE PINS 1. Provide full length (continuous)piano hinges rated for 1.5 times the weight of the door plus all door-mounted instruments. 2. Hinges shall be welded to all surfaces and shall match the metallurgy of the enclosure. 3. Hinge pins shall be 316L stainless steel on all panels. C. MOUNTING FEET If called for, mounting feet shall be the height indicated on the Plans and shall be made of the same material as the enclosure body that it supports. 2.2 CONTROL PANEL POWER DEVICES A. FUSES 1. Power Circuit Fusing Reference Specification 16410, Enclosed Switches, Fuses, and Circuit Breakers. 2. Control Power Fusing Control power fuses are FRN for ratings above 10 amperes and FNQ for 10 amperes and below. FRN fuses are mounted in phenolic blocks with a fuse puller mounted adjacent to them. FNQ fuse holders are DIN-rail mounted type, 12A, 300 V minimum, hinged to disconnect and replace fuse, with blown fuse indicating light. Label all fuseholders with fuse identification number and fuse size and type. Provide five spare fuses of each type and size in each panel. Provide box mounted on panel interior marked "SPARE FUSES"to hold the spares. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-5 3. PLC UO Field Connection Fusing a. 24 VDC Fusing i. Fuses for 24 VDC circuits shall be 5 x 20 mm, glass body, fast acting, 250 VAC, sized by the integrator unless specifically called in the Plans or Specifications. ii, Fuse holders for 24 VDC circuits shall be DIN-rail mounted type, provided in fusible terminal blocks, for 5 x 20 nun fitses, black, hinged to open, 10-57 VAC/VDC, with red LED blown fuse indicators, #30 AWG - #12 AWG, 15A. b. 120 VAC Fusing i. Fuses for 120 VAC circuits shall be 1/4" x 1-1/4", glass body, time-delay, 250 VAC, sized by the integrator imless specifically called in the Plans or Specifications. ii, Fuse holders for 120 VAC circuits shall be DIN-rail mounted type,provided in fusible terminal blocks, for 1/4" x 1-1/4" fuses, black, 100-300 VAC, with neon blown fuse indicators, #30 AWG - #12 AWG, 15A. B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Power Circuit Breakers Reference Specification 16410, Enclosed Switches, Fuses, and Circuit Breakers. 2. Control Power Circuit Breakers Control power circuit breakers shall be DIN-rail mounted type, miniature, 240 VAC, single pole, 10 kAIC (minimum) @ 240 VAC, "C" curve (inductive) trip characteristics, 1,500 VAC dielectric strength (minimum), #14 to #12 AWG 75°C line and load screw terminals, UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5.1: Allen Bradley Bulletin 1492-SPU Series A or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O 416627 16940-6 C. DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ACTUATORS 1. For Power Circuits > 30 Amps Reference Specification 16410, Enclosed Switches, Fuses, and Circuit Breakers. 2. For Power Circuits <=30 Amps a. For Single Phase Circuits Load disconnect switches shall be 2-position, OFF-ON, 90 degree, 600 VAC, 20 A or 32 A rating, single pole, front door installation; Allen Bradley 194L-E as-1751 or equal, where as = 20 for 20 A unit and as = 32 for 32 A unit. Associated switch actuators shall be OFF-ON, 90 degree, front/door installation, IP66 rated, 22.5 turn central hole mount, square, red/yellow handle with padlock provision, 48 mm x 48 mm; Allen Bradley 194L-HC4L-175I or equal, b. For Three Phase Circuits Load disconnect switches shall be 2-position, OFF-ON, 90 degree, 600 VAC, 20 A or 32 A rating, 4-pole, front door installation; Allen Bradley 194L-E as-1754 or equal, where as=20 for a 20 A unit and as =32 for a 32 A unit. Load disconnect switch actuators shall be OFF-ON, 90 degree, front/door installation, IP66 rated, 22.5 mm central hole mount, square, grey/black handle with padlock provision, 64 mm x 64 mm; Allen Bradley 194L-HC6E- 175I or equal. When being used as a 3 PH motor safety disconnect switch, reference Specification 16410, Enclosed Switches, Fuses, and Circuit Breakers. D. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1. For Power Circuits > 150 VAC and>30 A Reference Specification 16280, Surge Protective Devices. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 16940-7 2. For Control Power Circuits Control power SPDs shall protect L-N, L-G and N-G and have a minimum peak surge current of 40kA, shall have terminals that accept a#12 AWG conductor, shall be rated for the voltage shown in the Plans, shall be UL listed, and shall have a terminal configuration with separate Line,Neutral, and Ground connections. Control power SPDs shall meet Mil-Std-220 for maximum EMURFI attenuation. Control power SPDs shall be DIN-rail mounted, 1-inch wide maximum. Control power SPDs shall be Cooper Bossman#BSPM1120S2G or equal. 3, For Telecommunications All incoming phone and internet services shall be provided with surge protection. a. Intermatic 1G2TM or equal for twisted pair copper. b. Intermatic IG4TM or equal for coaxial. cable. E. UPS SYSTEMS 1. 120 VAC UPS Systems UPS systems shall be on-line (non-switching) 120 VAC, 60 Hz in/120 VAC, 60 Hz out uninterruptible power supplies capable of maintaining continuous power to supported devices, at voltages within device specifications, for a minimum of 30 minutes, or as stated in the Plans, following a loss of input power. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the size of the UPS system and batteries and shall include load calculations of supported devices in the submittal. Batteries shall be maintenance free lead-acid type. Manufacturers shall be APC, Best, Unison/Tripphte, or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#r 6627 16940-8 F. DC POWER SUPPLY 1. 24 VDC Power Supplies 24 VDC power supplies shall be 120 VAC input, 24 VDC output, 10 A minimum, with+/- 1 percent voltage regulation from no-load to full-load. Process power supplies shall be sized by the integrator and increased in size as required. Provide the power supply sizing calculations with the product submittal. a. 10 A: PULS #QS10.241 or equal. G. POWER MONITOR UNITS (PMU) Power monitor unit shall be of the same manufacturer as the MCC. 3 phase power monitor units shall be complete with the following: 1. Current Transformers (CTs) Mechanical and thennal ratings of transformers shall be coordinated with that of the equipment in which tiney are mounted. Basic impulse level shall be 10 kV and accuracy class shall be 0.3 for B-0.1, B-0.2, and B-0.5 burdens. A clearly visible nameplate shall give complete transformer characteristics. 3 independent current transformers shall be provided with 5 ampere secondary current at the primary current ratio indicated. a. For new installations, provide doughnut style current transformers. b. For existing installations,provide split core style current transformers. 2. Potential Transformers (PTs) Potential transformers shall only be allowed for PMUs connected to circuits > 600 VAC. For< 600 VAC, provide PMUs that connect directly to the measured bus. 3. Fusing Provide all required fusing and fuse blocks. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-9 i 4. The Power Monitor Unit The PMU shall have the following features and functions. a. Front panel mountable. b. Powered from the unit's PTs or directly off of the measured bus. A separate power source shall not be required. c. LED display or an LCD backlit display.. d. Capable of transmitting measured data over the network type that is used by the PLC/HMi systems. All hardware and software shall be included to provide a complete and functional network interface. 5. Measurement Capabilities The PMU shall measure and transmit the following: 0 RMS Voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral for all three phases with an accuracy of+/-0.3 percent of full scale. • RMS current per phase with an accuracy of+/-0.3 percent of full scale. Real power (in kW), 3 Phase total with an accuracy of +/-0.6 percent of full scale. • Apparent power(in WA), 3 Phase total with an accuracy of+/-0.6 percent of full scale. « Reactive power(in WAR), 3 Phase total with an accuracy of+/-0.6 percent of full scale. • Power Factor(PF) with an accuracy of+/-1.0 percent of full scale. Frequency in Hertz with an accuracy of+/-0.2 percent of full scale. w Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion in Percent to the 31sc harmonic. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&G#16627 16940-10 r Current Total Harmonic Distortion in Percent to the 31 st harmonic. • RMS Average Current. r RMS Average Voltage. • kW-Hours. WAR-hours. • Peak Average kW with date/time stamp. Peak Average kVA with date/time stamp, • Peak Average WAR with date/time stamp. • Peak kW Demand with date/time stamp. 0 Peak k VAR Demand with date/time stamp. Peak Maximum Current for each phase with date/time stamp. Peak Maximum Voltage for each phase with date/time stamp. Peak Minimum Voltage for each phase with date/time stamp. 6. Annunciation The PMU shall provide an instantaneous dry.contact Form C alarm that transitions under any selectable combination of the following conditions: o Phase Loss. a Phase Reversal. • Phase Imbalance (with adjustable setpoint and time delay). • Over-voltage (with adjustable setpoint and time delay). City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-11 i • Undervoltage (with adjustable setpoint and time delay). + Overcurrent(with adjustable setpoint and time delay). H. PHASE MONITOR RELAYS (PMRS) 1, PMRs shall only be used on 3 phase power systems and shall be compatible with the voltage configuration as shown on the Plans. For 240 VAC 3 phase systems, the high leg shall be phase B. 2. PMRs shall monitor the following conditions and provide the ability to adjust trip values and tune delays as described below: a. Phase Loss i. Trip not adjustable ii. Time delay not adjustable, fixed at 100 msec. b. Phase Reversal i. Trip not adjustable ii. Time delay not adjustable, fixed at 100 msec. C. Phase Unbalance i. Trip adjustable, set at 10 percent ii. Time delay not adjustable, fixed at 2 seconds. d. Under voltage i. Trip adjustable, set at 80 percent of nominal voltage ii. Time delay adjustable, set at 5 seconds. e. Overvoltage i. Trip not adjustable, fixed at 110 percent of nominal voltage it. Time delay not adjustable, fixed based on inverse time. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-12 3. PMRs shall be provided with I SPDT (Form C) dry isolated contact that transitions when thresholds are exceeded for time delays described above. 4. PMRs shall be: Automation Direct,Prosense, PMRU-1 C-480A or equal. I. MOTOR START COUNTERS/MOTOR RUN TIME(ELAPSED TIME) METERS When the control panel contains motor starters, start counter and run time meter shall be a combination electromechanical device. Eaton CEC- 55PM-406 or equal. Battery backed LCD displays shall not be used. Refer to Specification 16420, Motor Controllers. I. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS Current transformers are 1 percent accuracy at burden and lead length as installed. G.E., Midwest, Westinghouse or Hawkeye. W AMIVIFTFRA Ammeters are t2 percent accuracy, 2-1/2-inch size GE, Simpson, Weston, or Crompton. L. ANALOG CURRENT TRANSMITTERS Loop powered 4-20 mA solid core current transducer for currents up to 200 A. Hawkeye H721 Series or equal. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL CONTROL DEVICES A. PILOT LIGHTS 1, Pilot lights shall be heavy duty, Class 9001, Type J, NEMA 4 (watertight) and NEMA 13 (oil-tight), metal collar, push-to-test, multi-segmented LED with red, green, amber, blue, clear, white, or yellow colored caps as shown on the Plans. a. Allen-Bradley b, Cutler-Hammer C. General Electric City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-13 d. Siemens e. Square D B. PUSH BUTTONS 1. Push buttons shall be heavy duty, Class 9001, Type K, UL Types 4 and 13,NEMA 4 (watertight) and NEMA 13 (oil-tight), metal collar, non-illuminating, with full button guard. Contact block shall be provided with 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contacts minimum with the ability to stack additional blocks. Provide additional blocks as required. Pushbutton actuators may be standard, mushroom head, recessed (flush collar), or deep recessed (deep collar) as required. a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler-Hammer C. General Electric d. Siemens e. Square D C. SELECTOR SWITCHES l. On-Off Selector Switches ON-OFF selector switches shall be Class 9001, Type K, UL types 4 and 13,NEMA 4 (watertight) and NEMA 13 (oil-tight), metal collar, non-illuminating push button contact blocks with 2-position operators and standard knob. Contact block shall be provided with 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts minimum with the ability to stack additional blocks. Provide additional blocks as required. The 2-position operator shall be manual rotation to left and manual rotation to right. Two contact block stacks shall be provided. In both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the left position and open in the right position. in both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the right position and open in the left position. a. Allen-Bradley City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-14 b. Cutler-Hammer C. General Electric d. Siemens e. Square D 2. Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Selector Switches HOA selector switches shall be Class 9001, Type K, UL types 4 and 13, NEMA 4 (watertight) and NEMA 13 (oil-tight), metal collar, non-illuminating push button contact blocks with 3-position operators and standard knob. Contact block shall be provided with 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts minimum with the abilitv to stack additional blocks. Provide additional blocks as required. The 3-position operator shall be manual rotation to left and right from center and manual return back to center. Two contact block stacks shah be provided. In both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the left position and open in the center and right positions. In both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the right position and open in the center and left positions. a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler-Hammer C. General Electric d. Siemens e. Square D 3. Reset-Off-On Selector Switches RESET-OFF-ON selector switches shall be Class 9001, Type K, UL types 4 and 13, NEMA 4 (watertight) and NEMA 13 (oil-tight), metal collar, non-illuminating push button contact blocks with 3-position operators and standard knob. Contact block shall be provided with 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts minimum with the ability to stack additional blocks. Provide additional blocks as required. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-15 The 3-position operator shall be manual rotation to left and right from center, spring return from left to center and manual return from right to center. Two contact block stacks shall be provided. In both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the left position and open in the center and right positions. hr both contact block stacks, one set of contacts is closed in the right position and open in the center and left positions. a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler-Hammer C. General Electric d. Siemens e. Square D D. RELAYS Regardless of the technology of a relay's control (from simple to prograrrarrable), the relay's output technology shall be the electro- mechanical type. Electronic outputs (triacs, thyristors, transistors, etc.) shall not be allowed. Exceptions: • Unless specif Bally shown otherwise on the Plans. 0 Unless approved in writing by the Engineer, 1. Contactor relays Contactor relays for switching 120 VAC power circuits including, but not limited to, lighting, solenoid valves, and small motors shall be electro-mechanical machine tool, heavy-duty type, NEMA rated, with 120 VAC/24 VDC coils and double-break contacts rated at 20 A at 250 VAC. Equip relays with surge suppressers. IEC rated relays are not permitted. 2. Control relays Control relays for logic control circuits shall be permitted to be miniature "ice cube" type DPDT or 4PDT with 24V or 1 10-120V City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-16 AC/DC coils with a mechanical life of 20 million operations minimun and an electrical life of 1 million operations minimum at l amp. The dielectric strength between the coil and contacts shall be 2,000 VAC for 1 minute. Contacts shall be rated at 10A at 250 VAC, 10A at 30 VDC. Relays shall have a maximum pickup and release time of 25 milliseconds and a minimum drop voltage of 30 percent of the rated voltage. Relays shall include non-polarized LED coil indictors. Relays shall be IDEC, P&B/Tyco or equal. 3. Time delay relays Time delay relays shall be electronic, programmable, multifunction type with a minimum of two Form C (DPDT) contacts rated at 10 A into resistive loads. Timers shall have a selectable timing range from 0.05 seconds to 999 hours. The following features shall be provided on the front of the timer for easy and clear adjustability: a. Function selection (type of delay function); b. Tiinne setting (3 digits); C. Timing range (seconds, minutes, hours); d. Table showing the selectable functions; e. LED indicator that indicates timing mode and time out condition. On-delay timers (TDAE, Time Delay After Energization) shall be 8-pin octal socket style with 120 VAC or 24 VDC coils; Macromatic 4TD-70222 and #TD-70228 respectively. Off-delay timers (TDAD, Time Delay After De-energization) shall be 11-pin socket style with 120 VAC or 24 VDC coils, requiring an isolated trigger(see figure below); Macromatic #TD-71622 and #TD-71628 respectively. 4. PLC 24 VDC Output Buffer Relays PLC 24 VDC output buffer relays shall be miniature DIN-rail DPDT type with silver-nickel alloy contacts rated at 8 amps @ 250 VAC/30 VDC (resistive load), 4 amps @ 250 VAC/30 VDC (inductive load), and 100,000 operations at full rated load with a dielectric strength between contacts of 1,000 VAC for 1 minute. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-17 The relay coil shall be 24 VDC, with a mechanical life of 50 million operations and a dielectric strength between the coil and contacts of 5,000 VAC for 1 minute. Relays shall have a maximum pickup time of 15 milliseconds and release time of 10 milliseconds and a minimum drop voltage of 10 percent of the rated voltage. Relays shall include a non-polarized LED coil indicator. Relays shall include a DIN-rail mounting socket, 0.625-inch wide maximum with finger-safe screw terminals and replacement locking lever. DPDT relays and sockets shall be stackable at 0.625 inch. Relays shall be IDEC RJ2S-CL-D24 or exact equal. Sockets shall be IDEC SJ2S-07L or exact equal. 5. PLC 120 VAC - to - 24 VDC Input Buffer Relays PLC 120 VAC input buffer relays shall be miniature DiN-rail DPDT type with silver-nickel alloy contacts rated at 8 amps @ 250 VAC/30 VDC (resistive load), 4 amps @ 250 VAC/30 VDC (inductive load), and 200,000 operations at full rated load with a dielectric strength between contacts of 1,000 VAC for 1 minute. The relay coil shall be 120 VAC, with a mechanical life of 30 million operations and a dielectric strength between the coil and contacts of 5,000 VAC for 1 minute. Relays shall have a maximum pickup time of 15 milliseconds and release time of 10 milliseconds and a minimum drop voltage of 30 percent of the rated voltage. Relays shall include a non-polarized LED coil indicator. Relays shall include a DIN-rail mounting socket, 0.625-inch wide maximum with finger-safe screw terminals and replacement locking lever. DPDT relays and sockets shall be stackable at 0.625 inch. Relays shall be IDEC RJ2S-CL-A120 or exact equal. Sockets shall be IDEC SM-071,or exact equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-18 E. THERMAL SETPOINT CONTROLLERS/TRANSMITTERS 1, Motor Winding Temperature Monitoring and Alarming Thermal Setpoint Controllers shall be: a. 2-wire, 3-wire, and 4-wire Ni100 and PtI00 RTD compatible; b. B, E J, K,N, R, S, T (ITS 90/IEC 584), L (DIN 43710) thermocouple compatible; C. Provide a linearized 4-20 mA isolated output; d. Provide an adjustable over- and under- temp Form A, 250 VAC, 500 VA(2 A) output contact; e. Provide line monitoring for sensor wire-break and short circuit; f. Capable of operating between 20 and 250 VAC input power; g. Provide galvanic separation of input circuits, output circuits, and power supply; h. Provide no more than 0.2 mA of sensor current; i. Provide galvanic separation of input circuits, output circuits, and power supply; j. Turck Interface Module, Ex-Temperature Measuring Amplifier, 1-Chamrle; Part Number IM34-12EX-RI or equal. F. ETHERNET SWITCHES Ethernet switches shall be industrial grade, 10/100 MB, DIN-rail mounted type, 24 VDC powered, 8-port; N-Tron 300 series or equal. Exception: If the requirement shown on the Plans is greater than 8 ports, then provide the higher value. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station O&O#16627 16940-19 I G. DATA RADIO Radio shall be Integra TR Model #242-4048-510, or equal. 2.4 CONTROL PANEL ANCILLARY DEVICES A. RECEPTACLES MOUNTED IN CONTROL PANELS 120 VAC power to convenience and device receptacle in control panels shall not be derived from the same panelboard circuit as that used for process control devices (PLC, flow meters, autodialers, DC power supplies, etc.). 1. Convenience Receptacles Convenience receptacles in control panels are not dedicated and are intended for providing 120 VAC convenience power for non- motor-operated equipment. Convenience receptacles shall be GFCI, 15 Amp, 125 VAC, duplex, white, in a DIN-rail mount, cast aluminum box. Stamped steel boxes shall not be used. 2. Device Receptacles Device receptacles are dedicated for communication and control devices operating within the control panel on a continuous basis, These include devices with 120 VAC power packs like VPNs, Fiber-To-Voice Converters, Data-To-Voice Converters, and etc. Device receptacles shall be non-GFCI, 15 Amp, 125 VAC, duplex, white, in a DIN-rail mount, cast aluminum box. Stamped steel boxes shall not be used. On Communication Patch Panels, these receptacle circuits can be extended with surge- and load-protected power strips. B. PANEL LIGHTING For all panels so designated on the Plans, provide an LED lighting package, under cabinet style, hardwired, 120 VAC, with integral door- activated ON/OFF switch. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-20 120 VAC power to the panel light shall not be derived from the same Panelboard circuit as that used for process control devices (PLC, flow meters, autodialers, DC power supplies, etc.). C. PANEL COOLING FANS Provide a panel cooling system in enclosures that contain motor starters, drives, PLCs, RTUs, and other electronic devices that can generate heat and have maximum operating temperature limits unless specifically shown otherwise in the Plans. The panel cooling system shall include one or more fans with a thermostat as a minimum. The cooling system shall be sufficiently sized to maintain an internal enclosure temperature below the maximum operating temperature of all internal devices. Provide a thermostat for cooling,N.O. contact, adjustable setpoint range 32 to 140 degrees F, 15 Amp-rated contact at 120 VAC. Cooling fans shall be configured to exhaust air. Vents shall be provided for supply air. Layout fans and vents in such a manner as to: i, Maximize cooiine of critical components; 2. Minimize air flow restriction; 3. Eliminate entry of water or dust particles into the enclosure. Provide vent covers over fan and vent openings to eliminate rain and moderate washdown for all outdoor panels and all panels so designated on the Plans Provide a "washdown filter" fan set, capable of eliminating sprayed water entry, stainless steel, 120 VAC, 310 CFM, 3.8 Amps max., 19" x 10" x 5". 120 VAC power to panel fans shall not be derived from the same panelboard circuit as that used for process control devices (PLC, flow meters, autodialers, DC power supplies, etc.). D. TERMINAL BLOCKS l. For Power Circuits > 30 Amps Terminations for power circuits greater than 150 V to ground or greater than 30 A shall be made using 600 VAC, UL listed, screw type,Power Distribution Blocks. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-21 2. For Non-Fused Control, Instrumentation, and Power Circuits < 30 VDC, < 150 VAC, and <=30 Amps Provide standard feed-through DIN-rail type IEC terminal blocks, single circuit, screw terminal type, 922 - #10 AWG,rated 600 V AC/DC at 30 A, white or grey; Allen Bradley Bulletin 149244 series or equal. Exceptions: 0 For equipment/chassis grounded circuits Provide DIN-rail type IEC grounding blocks, single circuit, screw terminal type, #22 - #10 AWG, rated 600 VAC/DC at 30 A, green/yellow in color;Allen Bradley Bulletin 1492- WG6 or equal. These ground blocks shall be inherently connected to the din rail. • For instrumentation cable shield terminations (reference Section 3.I.E) Provide standard feed-through DIN-rail type IEC terminal blocks, single circuit, screw terminal type, 422 - #10 AWG, rated 600 VAC/DC at 30 A, blue; Allen Bradley Bulletin 1492-J4-B or equal. 5. Terminals used for digital and analog I/O field connections shall be grouped as shown in Section 3.1.E, FABRICATION, FIELD CONNECTIONS TO PLC UO. E. PANEL WIRING PRODUCTS 1. Power Circuit Wiring; Reference Specification 16120. 2. Control Circuit Wiring; Reference Specification 16120. 3. Analog PLC I/O Wiring Signal cables connected completely inside control panels between analog input and output field terminal groupings and their associated PLC analog cards shall be#22 AWG, stranded, tinned copper, twisted pair, 300 V, 100 percent overall foil shielded cable with#22 AWG tinned copper drain wire; Belden#8451 or equal. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-22 2.5 CONTROL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. PANEL NAMEPLATES AND IDENTIFICATION 1, Identify each item on the control panel with rectangular nameplates. 2. Provide nameplates of rigid phenolic plastic laminate with engraved lettering or engraved metal plate with filled lettering. Use black background with white lettering. 3, Minimum letter height is 1/2 inch for instrument description and 1/4-inch height for instrument tag number. 4. Provide each panel with a 2-inch by 10-inch (minimum) nameplate with 1-inch-high lettering with panel identification. 5. Abbreviations are not permitted unless approved by the Owner or specifically shown on the nameplates, schedules, or plans. .�,. Imotall Lw. eplates plumb and parallel to the "dies of doors or structure to which they are attached. Attach to the sheet metal structure by a thin coat of adhesive and sheet metal screws. Make adhesive and screw applications in such a manner as to avoid nameplate buckling or distortion due to use of excessive adhesive or over tightening of screws. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 FABRICATION A. GENERAL L Control panels are factory or shop fabricated units completely assembled, wired, and tested before shipment to the job site. 2. Panel construction, in general, meets JIC EMP-1 standards and applicable NEMA and IEEE standards. Exception: • Where open penetrations are required such as far fans and vents, the NENIA rating of the panel may be modified to meet the intent of the design and fit the environment of the City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-23 application. flerify the change of a panel's NEMA rating with the Engineer. 3, The panels shall be constructed in accordance with Article 409 of the NEC and electrical testing laboratory standards and shall be so labeled (the standards of a recognized electrical testing laboratory). 4. Size panels for enclosed equipment and available space for mounting of panel or as shown on the Plans. 5„ Panels shall be descaled, cleaned, and primed in preparation for painting. Painting shall consist of one coat of flat white enamel in the interior and two coats of hard finish exterior enamel, gray in color. Paint shall be suitable for field touch-up. Spare paint (1 quart) shall be provided for touch-up purposes. Exceptions: « #the panel is to he used in eastern Washington, then the final outer coating shall be high gloss white. Unless shown otherwise in the Plans stainless steel enclosures shall not he painted. 6. Panel material, penetrations, and etc, shall be verified for proper operation in their intended locations. Issues and concerns shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to fabrication within or on the panel. B. FREE-STANDING PANELS 1. Welded construction 2. Completely enclosed, self-supporting, and gasketed dust-tight. 3. Seams and corners welded and ground smooth. 4, Furnish doors with keyed alike locking handles and three point catch. 5, Provide each panel with lifting eyebolts. Furnish stainless steel base channels. 6. Slotted bolt holes in base, 1-1/2 long for field adjustment. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16940-24 C. COMPONENT INSTALLATION 1. Minimize welding to panel fronts and avoid distortion of panel metal. 2. Reinforce around areas of the enclosure weakened by openings or mounting of heavy equipment/components. 3. Accurately and cleanly cut or nibble cutouts, and finish free of sharp edges or burrs. Make cutouts plumb, level, and on-line vertically or horizontally within 1/32 of an inch where components are in rows or columns. 4. Provide minimum 1-5/8-inches spacing between horizontal rows of externally mounted components; 1-1/2 inches minimum between vertical columns of components. 5. The distance from the bottom row of components to the floor shall be not less than 36 inches,unless specifically shown as less. In general, all indicating lights, pushbuttons, etc., shall be mounted in accardance with the se^uen e of o,,eratron from left to t,* and r rtg.. top to bottom. 6. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spacing between components mounted on the panel sub-plate, Provide minimum spacing between the component and the wire duct of 1-1/2 inches above, and I inch below. T Components mounted in the interior shall be fastened to an interior subpanel using machine screws plus adhesive to insure vibration- free attachment. 8. Interior component mounting and wiring shall be grouped as much as possible by function and then by component type. Interiors shall be so arranged that control relays, terminal blocks, fuses, etc., can be replaced or added without disturbing adjacent components. 9, AC UPS systems and associated batteries shall be mounted on a shelf specifically sized and braced for the UPS system. This rack shall assure that the UPS system is not resting on the bottom of the Control Panel and that no part of the UPS system blocks, or in any other way interferes with devices, terminals, or wireways that are not specifically a part of the UPS system. The shelf shall have a raised lip around all sides that are not in contact with a wall. The bottom of the shelf shall be at least 4 inches above the bottom of City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station Gs o#16627 16940-25 I the enclosure (this provides a free flow of cables and conductors from conduits entering the bottom of the panel). Straps shall be provided to secure the UPS to the shelf. if insufficient room is available on the panel's backplane, then mount the shelf to the inside of the door. When mounted on the door, secure all cables to the door in such a manner that assures: a. Highly reliable secured connections to the UPS (not affected by movement of the door), b. Free and unencumbered door movement, C. Door movement that does not stress the cables. 10. Open batteries provided to support DC UPS systems shall be mounted on 316L stainless steel shelves and provided with non- conducting bracing straps to firmly hold the battery in place. The shelves shall have a raised lip around all sides that are not in contact with a wall. The bottom of the shelf shall be at least 4 inches above the bottom of the enclosure. Batteries provided with manufacturer's mounting systems do not require the additional stainless steel shelving. D. PANEL WIRING METHODS 1. Provide panel wiring sizes and colors per Specification 16120. 2, Provide PLC analog and digital input and output circuit field terminations and wiring methods per Section 3.1.E. 3. Field wiring terminations to control panel terminal strips shall be connected as shown on the Plans. Cable shields or "drain" wires shall be terminated as per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide a chassis-connected equipment ground bus at the bottom of PLC control panels. 5. Provide an isolated ground bus, dedicated solely for analog shield connections, adjacent to the equipment ground bus. Provide a separate and dedicated#10 AWG minimum green-insulated ground wire from the Panelboard ground bus to the isolated ground bus. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-26 6. Provide raceways for panel wiring. a. Size raceways per the requirements of NEC. b. Provide panel wireways between each row of components, and adjacent to each terminal strip. C. Wireways are a minimum of 1-inch wide and 3-inches deep with removable snap-on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. Wireways shall be constructed of non-metallic materials with a voltage insulation in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein Panduit type LG, Panel Channel or equal 7. Run wires neatly in wiring duct tied and handled with tie wraps or similar materials. 8. Provide wire bending space per NEMA 1CS 6. 9. Label wiring within the panel with wire numbers using the same number on both ends of the wire. Identifv aarh ivire temlinsatinn including long jumpers, with wire markers. Arrange wire labels to permit reading of identification when installed. 10, Connect wiring internal to the panel to one side, leaving the opposite side for field terminations. Connect no more than two wires to any one control terminal point. 11, Arrange wiring inside the panel to separate instrumentation cables, conductors, and terminals at least 12 inches from 120 VAC power and control circuits. 12. Connect electrical equipment grounds to the chassis grounding bus. 13. Provide necessary power supplies for control equipment. E. WIRE TERMINATION METHODS 1. Power conductors terminated on Power Distribution Blocks shall be covered with the block manufacturer's transparent cover and a caution sticker stating the voltage and available bolted fault current. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-27 2„ Terminate one end of all instrumentation cable shields to blue isolated-ground terminals (reference Section 2.4.E). 3. Provide fused terminals as shown on the Plans or defined herein. Reference Section 2.2 for materials 4. Terminals used for 4-20 mA analog input and output circuits shall be grouped as shown herein. This grouping shall be provided for each analog input and output connected to a PLC, whether assigned or unassigned (spare). 5. Provide terminal strips for the termination of panel wiring not directly connected to panel mounted devices. 6. Tenninals shall facilitate wire sizes as follows: a. 120 VAC applications: Wire size 12 AWG and smaller. b. Other: Wire size 14 AWG and smaller. 7. Tag each I/O terminal to indicate tag number of the connected device or wire. 8. Provide 20 percent excess terminals (minimum) for future expansion. 9, Provide a minimum of 1.5 inches between terminal strips and wireways or between terminal strips. F. FIELD CONNECTIONS TO PLC I/O 1. Analog Input, Termination and Connectivity Each 4-20 mA PLC analog input shall be connected to a 7-terminal grouping as shown below and as detailed on the Analog Loop Diagrams on the Plans whether the input channel is assigned or unassigned (spare) and whether the input is single-ended, differential, or isolated. No chassis-grounded tenninals shall be used. Reference table below. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-28 7-Terminal Analog Input Grouping, Terminal Assignments Internal Panel Terminal Type Connections Clarifieation and Color +24VDC +24 VDC Power Fused, Black ..... ....... — PLC Al (+) PLC Analog Input, + Fused, Black PLC Al (-) PLC AnaloU Input, - Fe_edthrou h, Gra U NOT ASSIGNED 2-Device Connection Fecdthrough, Gray 24VCOM 24 V Common Feedthrough, Gray SHLD COMMON Shield Common Feedthrough, Blue ISO GROUND Isolated Ground Feedthrough, Blue vINI IQI.rx; wunnv[ PICAII) � 4.�pt [3JInG^luvc11 urc ti f�tix�� I" ivems� a � �u-m+rux All connections on the UL 508 side are the same, regardless of the type of field connection. Bundle all analog input terminal groups in the same sequence as the analog input cards and channels. Maintain a minimum of 12 inches between analog terminal groups and AC power circuits. The shields shall be connected at the terminal block-end only. Shields shall not be connected at the PLC cards. No additional 24 VDC fusing is to be provided. For cable type between terminal groupings and analog input PLC cards, reference Section 2A.F. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#16627 16940-29 2. Analog Input, 7-Terminal Connection Methods a. Field Connection TYPE AI-1, connection to a single loop- powered field device The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog input to a single loop-powered field device using a 7-terminal standard analog input terminal group. rY 41 ui UNn «'�n1-p».$�`N31.Ga.1.G24�/S+�YiEf3�P1�Y`P��IT :vpf ........., I GIYJ: .exfxx " d Yu16CelA'AfiliYi .. JU✓0MA �f� �MOM.... FEDSIU 1b n II "I IN b. Field Connection TYPE Al-2, connection to two loop- powered field devices The Figure below shows the method of comnecting a PLC analog input to two loop-powered field devices using a 7- terminal standard analog input terminal group. PLOM iNaurrAR]rao ?S'pf-19U,..P.daR.1,S'C43f::F�'t"!'.L',Y.tF�G2.S:113�4d1IS ,1JJR �• I "q�. rbYVIC" olwtl I i xx' U ca,xx, ..iron -cuu . ............... ... iiur:.nv r(.�.�SnGCik'.NLLI k^AYallrl{) .. RFDl 01'. .... .....y..tll 19FIt1E c. Field Connection TYPE A1-3, connection to a single 24 VDC device-powered field device The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog input to a single 24 VDC device-powered field City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-30 device using a 7-terminal standard analog input terminal group. Device power is provided by the control system power. PRIM"'. yM.'Pd14 h(::f._51N.,r9 .u!a_y1iYS-.'�� .C; .. CIA �IIW IAW i nawfnR V(�YryF"y1pr141 ✓I YnYRPdN"j,MA.YP J .✓ M,��¢iM'bflA"a � r-. i ftk5TY4`Y`. IEW'W ..._..._...........:................._..,ut Ysn d. Field Connection TYPE AI-4, connection to a single 120 VAC device-powered field device The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog input to a single 120 VAC device-powered Yield device using a 7-terminal standard analog input terminal group. pLCNW� . INPOit"AFlD TYPE AI-M SIN'LE sA5 VMC 0)yY G_WJ;a 3FJb7$rl? ✓f a 'AWx... c) , .roimrr rue, .✓ _. ✓ _ �� ru¢nrNr 61 invlrx v[ __ n rvrnnasn'W a tigYrsrz.. w msrn .,,_. ti,..uisnslor. e. Field Connection TYPE AI-5, connection to a set of 24 VDC device-powered and loop-powered field devices The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog input to two field devices, with at least one requiring 24 VDC device power using a 7-terminal standard analog input terminal group. Device power is provided by the control system power. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&0#16627 16940-31 I PI'UTU U, IIJPUiCAI'� ]:.Y.pE ais L4YFtL d�kl�k::.k.'�7W.�F.IGY2m4(�kt�k?Y# _, �.. IV;AI f wxx OI VIAi • .� AJ — a •.NSUMNuI+TrgY a". ��J�P•• IJi\/IU 1 3. Analog Output, Termination and Connectivity Each 4-20 mA PLC analog output channel shall be connected to a 5-terminal grouping as shown below and as detailed on the Plans whether the input channel is assigned or unassigned and whether the output is isolated or not. No chassis-grounded terminals shall be used. Reference table below. 5-Terminal Analog input Grouping, Terminal Assignments --...----- ................ .__.......... .....__-- Internal Panel Terminal Typ e Connections Clarification and Color ............,............_ .........__......__....._ ...... PLC AO(+) PLC Analog Output, + Fused, Black NOT ASSIGNED 2-Device Connection Feedtlirough, Gray PLC AO(-) PLC Analog Output, - Feedthrough, Grav SHLD COMMON Shield Common Feedthrough, Blue ISO GROUND Isolated Ground Feedthrough, Blue 1111P�ILIKI f,I o.t ._wx;. i Ln�op. ll � '. � ,f,La R?wd;Ts9 f•�1 4 111➢51F rp "SIN' UL YABI�E All connections on the UL 508 side are the same, regardless of the type of field connection. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o a16627 16940-32 Bundle all analog output terminal groups in the same sequence as the analog output cards and channels. Maintain a minimum of 12 inches between analog terminal groups and AC power circuits. The shields shall be connected at the terminal block-end only. Shields shall not be connected at the PLC cards. No additional 24 VDC fusing is to be provided. For cable type between terminal groupings and analog input PLC cards, reference Section 2A.F. 4. Analog Output, 5-Terminal Connection Methods a. Field Connection TYPE AO-1, connection to a single field device The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog output to a single field device using a 5-terminal standard analog output terminal group. wminrnao IhVCI in wVY l � E ms [ 'I{ v i - wnnl c� � 4j SN311YYMFM to , .i —, .� ly{YObUd01P � /i. — N"uG{Gi'K9 C III IDSI'h .y. }u IILQA NH b. Field Connection TYPE AO-2, connection to two field devices The Figure below shows the method of connecting a PLC analog output to two field devices using a 5-terminal standard analog output terminal group. These devices can be loop-powered or device powered. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o#t 6627 16940-33 nrL&Q A--WALLO DEL—IrCM �wr ... ...... ...... .. alxx pxmp�l ........... AD rxVIICF 5. Digital Input, Termination and Connectivity a. Digital Input Type All digital inputs shall be the "sinking" type as shown below. Reference Specification Section 13450, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware. IN ( 1 +24 VDO INS DC 24V COM CO 1/2 OF 24 VDC,16 CHANNEL PLC DIGITAL SINKING INPUT CIRCUIT b. Digital Input Fusing to Field Circuits Provide fusing for each field-connected digital input. A single fuse shall be used for a group of field inputs from a common remote panel providing that the inputs are connected to the same input card. A common fuse shall not be used for separate cards. Separate fuses shall be provided for field inputs that are not terminated in a common remote panel. Provide a separate fuse for each set of 4 unassigned (spare) Digital Inputs. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-34 Fuses shall be 0.5 Amp. Provide a separate gray feedthrough terminal for each digital input channel whether the input channel is assigned or unassigned. C. Digital Input Connection Methods i. Connections to "Dry' Field Contacts Discrete input field devices with dry Form A or Form B contacts sharing a common cabinet or piece of equipment may be combined into a group sharing a single +24 VDC fused common as shown below. P GUIPAI PUfCAM waeool9cRt le i. REIDCYCWTACr xxmas!ravneaFo ,,,v„ HELD!]IF +e ....11E LA'03S[ it. Connections to "Hof' (wet) 120 VAC Field Circuits Digital inputs derived from 120 VAC "hot" circuits shall be huffered through interposing relays inside the PLC control panel prior to cormection to the 24 VDC Digital Input PLC cards in a manner shown in the Figure below. Reference "PLC 120 VAC - to - 24 VDC Input Buffer Relays" in Section 2.2 for relay product type. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&o 916627 16940-35 i i Picol�re,� INPURAF'� I IkAIFt]DIGL'htLiff'. " Vpr. vAwts Ilan,xalmcr -- _— IyPWFk. Ito VMc R gyp. — yumdll a.NAflua.kWEC1ED x __. r ....19W7, [RAE6lF FEIL (X]YIAgF • - i y� p —... 1 �tMmY!j 4F _... .I ..._... IN.., MF.. MIL LSIVACINIERPCYAN3AFJAYE iii. Digital Pulse Inputs Digital pulse inputs shall be either dry Form A or Form B contacts or active open-collector circuits as shown in the Figure below. The +24 VDC power shall be provided by the 24 VDC control system power and shall be separately fused. Plr:�,lrAl_ INPM� 6. DIGITAL OUTPUT, Termination and Connectivity a. Digital Output Type All digital outputs shall be the"sourcing" type as shown below. Reference Specification 13450, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) IIardware. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-36 VDC -nAl +24 VDC our u our 14 OUT 15 � DC f---*M 24V COIN .....COM...._. 24 VDC,16 CHANNEL PLC DIGITAL SOURCING OUTPUT CIRCUIT b. Digital Output Buffer Relays All 24 VDC digital outputs, even if unassigned (spare), chap hp h11ffOrpri thrnnah a IIPr)T (minimnm) intemn6na __._. _.c_ _ __ _ _ �__________.__y _.___r relay prior to being connected to other internal circuits or field terminals. 4PDT relays shall be provided where shown on wiring diagrams. Reference "PLC 24 VDC Output Buffer Relays" in Part 2 for product type. Internally connected buffered outputs shall not be fused. Assigned digital outputs shall be assigned to single or double fused output terminal pairs as shown in the Figure below. FIELD IEFFAN GLCrNGT4 WfFlru>Or . . ._ :d � aesLrsLEo 1 r' Qr r.. TYPI� ., mEu INIEWy4lLY fhlTNl n OPI P ,••.•., dr.... 21V[ DUVFERR AYv ..NVOW, All unassigned digital outputs shall be buffered to a single fused output terminal pair as shown in the Figure below. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-37 rmnirnr� am vns,is PEIDIEFAIN4LS j ... L" nF I3P1 PJ l •. . t� w. v IJA5 iIIGIED Y 4 "'A21 J aelnsw r E, ix 181[h "wn BLJIMPrnnm G. RELAY COIL SURGE SUPPRESSION 1. 120 VAC Coil Surge Suppression All 120 VAC coils shall be paralleled by a Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) type surge suppressor as shown in the Figure below. The suppressor shall be connected directly across the relay socket coil terminals with short wire leads. 120 VAC RELAY r MOV 2. 24 VDC Coil Surge Suppression All 24 VDC coils shall be paralleled by a reverse-connected shunt diode as shown in the Figure below. The diode shall be connected directly across the relay socket coil terminals with short wire leads. The diode shall be rated at IA, 100 P1V minimum. 24 VDO RED Y DIODE 3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit a shop test plan indicating how the test will be conducted, and how the system will be verified. K Revise all plans upon completion of the work to show the "as shipped" condition of the panel. C. Allow for the owner and Engineer to witness the shop test. Provide a minimum of 15-days notice prior to the test. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-38 D. Provide a shop test after factory completion and prior to shipment. 1. Test Documentation a. Provide a testing procedure and submit to the Engineer at least 1 week prior to the shop test. b. Document all required corrections, even those that may be remedied during the shop test. C. Issue a copy of the test procedures and necessary corrections to the General Contractor and the Engineer. d. Make all necessary corrections before shipping any panels, equipment, or devices to the job site. e. Issue a final signed document verifying that each correction has been made. 2. PLC Control Test a. Conduct a burn-in period (minimum of 2 days) where the system is operated continuously and checked for proper operation. b. Utilize simulated UOs to verify proper operation. Demonstrate the operation of each digital and analog 1/0 point. C. Demonstrate compete connectivity and data transfer over the process control network. Verify the operation of all motor starters and remote devices monitored and controlled over the network. d. Provide a computer and the software required for testing such that the owner may view the simulation of operator entries of field parameters such as set points and alarm values during the test. 3. Relay and Process Controller Test a. Demonstrate the complete operation of the relay logic, backup logic, process controllers, and etc. City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-39 I 4. Motor Starter Test a. Demonstrate the complete operation of all motor starters. Connect a portable motor to each starter and operate the motor in HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. Demonstrate the proper operation of all motor safety interlocks. b. Preprogram all motor starter Human Interface Modules (11IMs) for compliance with motor manufacturer's protection criteria and compliance with the design engineer's control requirements. 5. Other Tests a. Provide normal operating voltage to all equipment. Demonstrate the operation of all equipment while under power. b. The entire assembled panel shall be tested to be free from grounds and shorts. C. Controllers, circuits and interlocks shall be rung out and tested to assure that they function correctly before the panel is shipped. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding panels on concrete housekeeping pads. B. Anchor panels rigidly in place with approved anchorage devices. If mounting details are shown on the Plans, then these methods shall be used. *** END OF SECTION *** City of Kent 640 Zone Booster Station G&O#16627 16940-40